Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Power Defense Molded Case 2.1 Introduction

Circuit Breakers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-2
2.2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-4 2
Power Defense Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-12
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22 2
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42 2
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70 2
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87 2
Series G Circuit Breakers Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-98
High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit Breakers 2
for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107 2
Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . V4-T2-112
Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116 2
Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-140
Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-142 2
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-146
2.3 Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-147
V4-T2-158
2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-172
V4-T2-190
2
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-208
V4-T2-217
2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-228
V4-T2-232
2
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-235
V4-T2-239
2
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-244
V4-T2-247
2
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-255
V4-T2-257
2
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258
2
2.4 Series C Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259 2
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-264
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-278 2
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304 2
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354 2
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380 2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-399
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-410 2
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-412
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413 2
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449 2
2.5 Specialty Breakers
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-476 2
Direct Current Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-482
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-496 2
E2 Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-506
2.6 Handle Mechanisms 2
Learn Drawings Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532
Online Online Handle Mechanisms—Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-544 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-1

 2.1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Introduction

Contents
2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Description Page
2 Introduction
Power Defense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-4
2 Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-147
Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
2 Specialty Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-476

2 Learn
Online
Drawings
Online

2
2
2
2
2
2 Product Overview Application Description
2 Eaton offers the widest
variety of molded case circuit
The Series G® line features an
average 35% size reduction,
Eaton molded case circuit
breakers cover the widest
breakers available today. common field-installable range of applications in the
2 Designed for electrical and internal accessories and industry:
machinery OEMs serving a advanced trip unit functionality
2 range of industries and that eliminates the need for
● Electrical OEMs
applications, these proven rating plugs. These breakers ● Machinery OEMs
2 designs incorporate the
latest in innovation with
meet the requirements of
UL, CSA, IEC, CCC and
● Navy breakers:
● UL 489 Supplement SB
2 the high reliability that has
been our hallmark since the
CE, allowing the OEM to
standardize on a design that
● MIL-C-17588
advent of the circuit breaker meets the needs of their
● MIL-C-17361
2 in the 1920s. global customer base. ● ABS/NVR

2 The Series C® family ranges Mining breakers up to

●
The Power Defense™
family is Eaton’s premier from 15 to 2500 amperes and 1100 Vac
MCCB globally rated line, includes thermal-magnetic
2 Earth leakage
●

incorporating Power Xpert® breakers, electronic trip ● DC breakers 125–750 Vdc

Release electronic trip units breakers, molded case
2 Engine generator breakers
●
with best-in-class safety switches, motor circuit
15–1200 amperes
and protection features. It protectors and specially
2 Current-limiting breakers
●
includes ratings from 15 designed breakers for
to 2500 amperes, thermal- engine generator, DC
2 magnetic and electronic
breakers, and modular
and mining applications.

field-installable accessories.
2 Power Defense breakers
meet the requirements of
2 UL®, CSA®, CE and CCC.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Introduction
2.1
Typical Applications
2
Machine Tool Control Panels Busbar Trunking Tap-Offs Typical Eaton Applications
and Motor Control Centers In busbar trunking tap-offs to 2
Designed for these provide circuit protection.
equipment requirements,
including new world-class
2
Individual Enclosures
accessories. Completely assembled in
enclosures to meet specific
2
Panelboards
As both main and branch
customer requirements.
2
circuit protection devices. Additional Applications
Feeder Pillars Special versions of each Eaton 2
frame are available to provide
In distribution systems to
provide main and branch
safe equipment control and Panelboard
2
protection in mining and other
circuit protection. applications. Contact your 2
Eaton agent or distributor for
Switchgear
2
additional information. Individual Circuit
In distribution systems to Breaker Enclosure
provide main and branch Bus Bar Trunking
circuit protection up to
Tap-Off
2
2500 A (RG-Frame).
Machine Tool
Control Panel 2
Switchboard
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-3

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Description Page
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-42
2 Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-57
V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . . V4-T2-98
2 High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
2 Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers .
Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
V4-T2-107

2 Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
V4-T2-112

Fused Current-Limiting Module . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114

2 Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . . V4-T2-116
Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-140
2 Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-142
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing. . . . . . V4-T2-146
2
2
2
2 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits PXR 20
Eaton’s globally accepted ● A fully adjustable trip unit
2 Power Defense molded case
Power Xpert Release
Electronic Trip Units
Trip Unit Configurations with LSI and LSIG protection
capabilities. This trip unit
circuit breaker (MCCB) can: Thermal-Magnetic
2 ● Connect to your network or Simpler communications. ● Available with adjustable
offers more advanced
features than ever before at
the cloud with built-in Better protection. magnetic settings, and for this level, including current
2 communication capability Easier energy metering IEC markets, adjustable metering, programmable
● Generate the data to help Embedded in the Power thermal settings. For relays, and optional
2 optimize your facility’s Defense portfolio, Power
Xpert Release (PXR) electronic
NEMA markets, fixed
magnetic and fixed thermal
embedded communications
performance to enable seamless
2 ● Mitigate arc flash to keep
trip units for global low-voltage
commercial and industrial
settings are options.
Four-pole options with
integration into control and
communication systems
your employees, customers applications are Eaton’s 0%, 60% and 100%
2 and end users safe latest innovation in circuit protection are available
● The PXR 20 also offers
cutting-edge safety
The Power Defense MCCB protection technology. They
2
features like the Arcflash
portfolio is globally adaptive are designed to help you PXR 10 Reduction Maintenance
to your footprint no matter simplify your communications, ● All of the advantages of System™ and zone
2 the application or project
requirement. All frames have
enhance your protection and
support your energy metering.
an electronic trip unit in selective interlocking with
a simpler interface, which new testing and status
2 the availability of global
certifications including IEC,
● Unique Eaton trip unit leads to easy setup. This
trip unit is available with
indication features, and
cause of trip indication
platform enables you to
CCC, UL and CSA. Eaton’s LSI protection and includes
2 best-in-class support enables
easily change set points,
test and configure circuit programmable settings so
you to order readily available that it can be tailored for
2 product for on-time delivery,
breakers, and meter energy
and power information the specific application
across the globe.
2
● Enhanced, easy-to-use
interface allows you to
view and adjust the trip
2 unit settings
● Intuitive interface provides
2 simple scroll-through
visibility for critical
2 performance metrics such as
metering, battery life, zone
2 selective interlock settings
and circuit breaker health

V4-T2-4 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
PXR 20D Trip Unit Features
● Offers the same level of 2
functionality as the PXR 20, Breaker Health Feature and Arcflash Reduction Power Xpert Protection
but with a programmable Programmable Alarms Maintenance System Manager 2
interface that allows for Less Costly Downtime Better Safety and Productivity Simpler Operation,
additional flexibility in By enabling you to perform For added protection, the Reduced Maintenance 2
protection parameters predictive and preventive Power Defense portfolio Once installed, your Power
and integration into inter-
connected power distribution
maintenance on your power offers Eaton’s patented Xpert Release trip unit 2
distribution system prior to Arcflash Reduction continues to provide cost
systems. The protection
and safety functions can
component failure, the
breaker health feature and
Maintenance System to
reduce arc flash incident
savings and advanced
functionality through the
2
be programmed not only programmable alarms will energy. This innovative safety Power Xpert Protection
from the onboard LCD help you avoid costly feature can help you: Manager (PXPM) interface. 2
screen, but also through downtime. This intuitive user interface
Decrease personal
2
●
communications, making allows for simple trip unit set
your system setup and
● Communicates circuit protection equipment
breaker status at customer (PPE) requirements to up and programming, real-
commissioning easier and
future-proofed determined levels to enhance productivity time reporting of power and
energy metering, as well as
2
prompt for breaker ● Enhance the safety of your
PXR 25 maintenance or inspection personnel
the ability to check critical
performance metrics, to 2
● Offers more functionality
● Provides real-time
meet your application needs
than ever before in a evaluation of breaker
condition by tracking and
Enhanced Ground Fault
Protection and Coordination while decreasing 2
molded case circuit maintenance and in-field
breaker trip unit. 1% analyzing diagnostic details
including breaker
Easier Phase or Ground Fault
Detection and Warning
testing time. The testing 2
accuracy for energy features and functionality,
operations, short-circuit
readings, coupled with
the option for multiple fault levels, operational
Expanded protection of
ground fault increases
which can be run through a
personal computer, offers
2
communication protocols time, internal temperature coordination capabilities
and embedded and overloads and provides ability to turn
savings through labor hour
reduction and avoiding the 2
programmable relays, protection off. need for expensive
making this the ultimate Zone Selective Interlocking
● ON/OFF feature simplifies proprietary testing kits. 2
example of an intelligent Reduction in Arc Flash Energy system testing Ultimate control and data
2
●
node in a power The zone selective ● Ground fault trip units are at your fingertips:
distribution system interlocking (ZSI) feature combine trip, alarm, and Set point Configuration:
2
●
● Leverage the capabilities communicates when a phase OFF in every unit, with
of this product to eliminate or ground fault is present. Allows direct-to-trip unit
programmable relays for or offline set up,
meters and other
components from the
● The breaker closest to the alarm or pre-alarm
functionality
including duplication of 2
fault will override any settings between units
system, making the power
distribution system cost-
customer-defined delay
setting and open
● Expanded time profile
selections include I2t and
● Control Mode: Capture 2
effective and smaller, with waveforms, reset TU or
increased intelligence
instantaneously to clear
the fault, allowing line-side
flat response profiles for
more coordination options
set the date/time
Test Mode: Run
2
and connectivity ●
breakers to remain closed
Each breaker frame section and online Industry Standard
secondary injection and
create test reports
2
indicates the full range of trip ● The PXR trip unit displays Communication
Real-Time Data:
2
●
units available for the frame. when the ZSI system is Energy monitoring and
Provides information
The wide range of trip unit engaged, communicating, system status with onboard
regarding all status and
options, coupled with field-
replaceable trip units, enables
and helping to keep you
and your employees safe—
serial and industrial network
communications available
metered data direction 2
from the trip unit
2
compatibility with global so you no longer have to through CAM modules in the
requirements and allows PXR 20, 20D and 25 will offer
● Event Summaries:
just trust that the ZSI is
upgrade from the most basic a greater view and control Stores up to 200 events,
operational, unlike with
protective device to a high- other MCCB offerings into the machine or power detailed information on
the most recent (10) trip
2
end, intelligent node in a ● ZSI is also a proven distribution system.
power system. solution for reducing arc Available features can offer:
and (10) alarm events,
and time adjustments to 2
flash incident energy when the real-time clock
a fault is present ● Easy connection to PLC
building management
● Reports: Allows for the 2
formatting and printing
systems, SCADA and
cloud-based systems of real time data and of 2
performed secondary
Remote monitoring and
2
●
injection tests
option control of breaker
Metering and health data
2
●

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-5

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Breaker Frame Overview

2 Power Defense molded case PD-3—Covers a range of 45 A Interrupting Ratings Some of the most common
2 circuit breakers include six
frames, PD-1 through PD-6,
through 600 A with field-
installable trip units, including
The Power Defense molded
case circuit breaker line is a
accessories and their function
are described below.
providing flexibility to meet fixed thermal/adjustable
2 protection needs up to magnetic and all PXR
global product, with
interrupting ratings across a Internal Accessories
2500 A. electronic trip unit options in broad range of voltages. Auxiliary Switches—Provide
2 PD-1—Compact frame
two frame options: 400 A and These interrupting ratings circuit breaker primary
600 A. PD-3 also has 100% are optimized for power contact status information.
covering range of 15 A
2 through 125 A with fixed
UL ratings and current-
limiting options. Additionally,
distribution and meet the The auxiliary switch is used
for remote indication and
thermal-magnetic trip unit, broadest range of application
2
motor protection circuit needs. See each frame for the interlock system verification.
and with current-limiting breakers ranging from 45 A specific interrupting levels. These switches mount
options. Additionally, motor through 600 A with PXR internal to the breaker in the
2 circuit protectors covering a
range from 3 A through 100 A
electronic trip units, as well Modular Accessories right side accessory cavity.
as motor circuit protectors
2 with adjustable magnetic
settings of 3x to 11x.
ranging from 70 A through
600 A with adjustable
The Power Defense molded
case circuit breakers feature
Alarm Switches—Used for
remote indication of
new, modular accessories automatic trip operation. The
2 PD-2—Standard frame
covering a range of 15 A
magnetic settings from
5x to 10x. that are designed to make switch automatically resets
customization of the breaker when the circuit breaker is
2 through 225 A with trip unit
options, from a fixed thermal-
PD-4—Covers a range of for the unique requirements reset. These switches mount
300 A through 800 A with of the application easier than internal to the breaker in the
magnetic to the most
2 advanced Power Xpert
field-installable trip units,
including fixed thermal/
ever before. A common line
of auxiliary switch and bell
right side accessory cavity.
Release (PXR) electronic Shunt Trip—Provides
2
adjustable magnetic, and all alarms allow for inter-
units. PD-2 also has current- PXR electronic trip unit changeability between the capability to trip the breaker
limiting options available. options (PXR 10, PXR 20, different Power Defense by remote control. Shunt trips
2 Additionally, motor protection
circuit breakers ranging from
PXR 20D and PXR 25), and breaker frames, enabling the are designed to be applied at
100% UL rating options. final configuration of the specific AC or DC voltages.
2 15 A through 200 A with
PXR electronic trip units, PD-5—Covers a range of
breaker at the point of use These devices are installed
internal to the breaker in the
and minimizing the amount of
as well as motor circuit 320 A through 1200 A with left side accessory cavity.
2 protectors ranging from 3 A field-installable PXR
inventory required. Compact,
modular shunt trips and under
through 150 A with adjustable electronic trip units, PXR 20, Undervoltage Release
voltage releases have been
2 magnetic settings from PXR 20D and PXR 25, as well designed to be easily installed
(UVR)—Monitors a voltage,
typically of a line voltage, and
3x to 10x. as 100% UL rating options. and removed as the project or
2 PD-6—Covers a range of application dictates.
trips the circuit breaker when
the voltage falls below 70%
700 A through 2500 A with of the nominal voltage
2 field-installable PXR designated for the UVR.
electronic trip units, PXR 20, These devices are installed
2 PXR 20D and PXR 25, as well
as 100% UL rating options.
internal to the breaker in the
left side accessory cavity.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-6 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
External Accessories Standards and
Terminals—Multiple cable Locking Devices—Offer the Certifications 2
terminal options are available capability to lock the breaker
for each frame, providing handle in the OFF or ON
Power Defense circuit
breakers meet applicable:
2
alternatives to connect position (trip-free operation
UL 489
2
●
primary power and loads to allows the breaker to trip
the circuit breaker. when locked in the ON ● CSA, C22.2 No. 5-02
IEC 60947-2
2
●
Additionally, control wire position). Power Defense
terminals provide a means to offers three primary types, ● GB 14048.2-2008
tap off control power. Multi- including handle blocks,
wire terminals on the load padlockable hasps, and 2
side of the breaker can also provisions for Kirk trapped
be used to distribute the load key locks (Kirk lock must be 2
from the circuit breaker to purchased separately).
multiple devices without the
use of separate distribution Walking Beam Interlock— 2
Provides a mechanical
terminal blocks.
interlock between two 2
Terminal Shields—Provide adjacent circuit breakers of
protection against accidental the same frame size and pole 2
contact with live configuration, preventing
terminations, as well as
clearance between circuit
both breakers from being
switched ON at the same
2
breaker poles or adjacent time. To install a walking
circuit breakers, and are beam interlock, the circuit 2
required for some terminal breakers must be ordered
applications. with the factory modification 2
to accept the interlock.
Interphase Barriers—Offer
additional electrical clearance Plug-In Adapters—Provide a 2
between circuit breaker poles rear connection and mounting
for special termination base to simplify installation 2
applications. and front removal of circuit
Operating Mechanisms—
breakers. Plug-in adapters are 2
available for frames PD-1,
Manually operated
mechanisms designed to
PD-2 and PD-3.
2
open, close and reset circuit Drawout Configurations—
breakers. These are available Provide a robust system to 2
in three basic configurations— remove or exchange breakers
flange mounted, through-the-
door and direct (close-
and is typically used in critical
power operations. It provides
2
coupled)—to provide a variety
of options for different
a rear connection and cell,
and provides indication of 2
applications. the circuit breaker position.
Remote/Electrical
Drawout configurations are 2
available for frames PD-3,
Operators—A motor driven,
stored energy operator that
PD-4 and PD-5. 2
enables a user to locally or
remotely switch the breaker 2
between the OFF, ON and
TRIP positions, including 2
reset switching. These
operators mount on the front
cover of the circuit breaker,
2
within the trim line of the
circuit breaker, and are 2
designed to be applied at
specific AC or DC voltages. 2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-7

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Catalog Numbering System Overview

2
Breakers
2 Power Defense breakers are Product may be ordered Note that most of the A configured breaker (20 digits)
configured using a 20-digit using the base breaker accessories for Power catalog number should only
2 catalog number that can be
divided into two sections:
catalog number (14 digits)
only. However, if factory
Defense molded case circuit
breakers are field installable.
be used when it is necessary
to have a factory modification
2 ● Base breaker catalog
modifications are required,
including installation of
When field installing
accessories, the best practice
of the circuit breaker.
number = digits 1–14 accessories, the full breaker to follow is to order a base
2 ● Factory modifications = catalog number plus factory breaker with the 14-digit
digits 15–20 modifications (20 digits) for catalog number, and order
2 a configured breaker must the accessories separate for
be used. field installation.
2
Base Breaker Catalog Number (14 digits)
2 The catalog number has fixed positions for each breaker characteristic. The fixed format allows a
customer to determine the performance characteristics of the product by parsing the catalog
2 number. The format of the Power Defense breaker catalog number is as follows:
Catalog Number PD G 3 3 F 0400 TFA J
2 Digits (1, 2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7–10) (11–13) (14)
Power Certifications Frame size Poles Interrupting Continuous Trip unit type Terminals
2
Meaning
Defense and standards rating current rating

2 Certifications and Standards (Digit 3)

The certifications and standards selection (digit 3) denotes the global standards and certifications
2 met by the product, and, as such, indicates the respective markings found on the product. Defined
values and their meaning are as follows:
2 Value Meaning Marks on Product
Global ratings UL, CSA, CE, CCC
2 G
F Global ratings with 100% UL rating UL, CSA, CE, CCC

2 D Rated to 240 V UL, CSA

J UL and CSA UL, CSA
2 C IEC and GB CE, CCC
E IEC only CE
2
Poles (Digit 5) Configured Breaker Catalog Factory modifications on
2 The poles selection (digit 5) is Number (20 digits) Power Defense catalog
mostly self-explanatory, with For breakers with factory numbers are also based on
2 the exception of four-pole modifications, product fixed positions within digits
breakers, which may use the must be ordered using the 15–20 of the catalog number.
2 values 4 (100% protected
neutral pole), 0 (no protection
complete 20-digit configured
breaker catalog number.
Digits 15–16 are always used
for indicating accessories,
2 on neutral pole), or 6 (60%
protected neutral pole).
This 20-digit number includes
the base breaker catalog
17–18 for tripping accessories
and 19–20 for other
number plus an additional accessories or modifications.
2 Other selections are self- 6 digits to denote the factory When not used, the
explanatory, and further modifications. modification code digits
2 defined in each frame-
specific section relative to
default to the letter N.
the specific frame or
2 product type.

2 Example
2 An example of a full catalog number with modification codes would be as follows:
Catalog Number PDG33F0400TFAJ CC SP WB

2 Digits (1–14) (15, 16) (17, 18) (19, 20)

Meaning Base breaker catalog Indicating accessories (auxiliary Tripping accessories (shunt trip Other accessories or
2 number and/or alarm switches) or UVR) modifications

V4-T2-8 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Indicating Accessories (Digits 15, 16) Other Accessories (Digits 19, 20)
The two digits used for Digit 16 determines the Other factory-installed accessories and factory modifications 2
indicating accessories (digits configuration of the switches, available (digits 19, 20) are detailed on a frame-by-frame basis
15, 16) denote the type of such as Form A (normally in the respective section of the catalog. 2
accessory(-ies) installed, the open or NO), Form B
type of termination of those
accessories, and the
(normally closed or NC), or
Form C (change-over or CO,
2
Trip Units and Accessories for Field Installation
configuration. or NO/NC). or Replacement 2
Digit 15 specifically Power Defense circuit Breaker frames are
designates the accessory breakers are designed to
have field-installable
configured using the base
breaker catalog number
2
type and termination, as
2
shown below (note that accessories, and for frame (14 digits), as detailed in
not all frames offer all the sizes 3, 4, 5 and 6, field each section.
options shown). installable and replaceable
trip units. As such, breaker In general, when ordering
accessory or trip unit field
2
Type Accessory Terminations Digit 15 Selection frames, trip units and
Auxiliary switch only Pigtail (30-inch) A
accessories may be
purchased separately for field
installation kits, the format
of the catalog number begins 2
Pigtail (3-meter) with a description of the
2
D configuration. Trip units and
Screw terminal X accessories also have frame or frames for which
designated catalog numbers it is applicable (e.g., PDG3),
Spring cage clamp U
for identification and ordering followed by a separator 2
Alarm switch only Pigtail (30-inch) B purposes. digit (X), and ending with a
Pigtail (3-meter) E
descriptive section, as
follows:
2
Screw terminal Y
Spring cage clamp V 2
Auxiliary and alarm Pigtail (30-inch)
Pigtail (3-meter)
C
F
Trip Units and Accessories
Catalog
2
2
Number
Screw terminal Z Example PDG3 X Descriptive Section
Spring cage clamp W
Power Defense Separator May include voltage, functionality or other
2
Meaning
Global Standards digit description of accessory or trip unit.
Frame 3
Tripping Accessories (Digits 17, 18) 2
The two digits used for Digit 18 designates the
tripping accessories (digits 17,
18) denote the type of
nominal voltage rating of the
shunt trip or UVR, for which
Trip Units Thermal-Magnetic Trip 2
Trip units may be ordered Units (TMTU)
accessory installed, the type
of termination, and the
options available vary by
frame and are detailed in
installed as part of a base or Power Defense TMTUs 2
configured breaker, with are available in frame sizes 1
nominal voltage rating of the each frame section of the
accessory. Digit 17 catalog.
(digits 11–13) denoting the
functionality and features
through 4, covering a
continuous current range
2
specifically designates the
type of accessory and type of
included. Additionally, trip
units may be ordered
of 15 A through 800 A.
2
termination, as shown below. Thermal (overload)
separately, using the trip unit
Type Accessory Terminations Digit 17 Selection designated catalog numbers. settings—Functionality and 2
Below, it is explained how configurations are available
Shunt trip Pigtail (30-inch) S separate trip unit catalog
numbers are set up, as well
based on the standard to
which the breaker is certified,
2
Pigtail (3-meter) R
with all trip units carrying UL
Screw terminal T
as their relationship with their
designation in digits 11–13 of and CSA certifications (PDG, 2
Under voltage release Pigtail (30-inch) U the breaker catalog number PDF, etc.) having a fixed
Pigtail (3-meter) W for the same trip unit. thermal setting. 2
Screw terminal Magnetic (short circuit)
2
V
settings—For frame sizes 1
and 2 that include UL and
CSA certifications, magnetic 2
settings are fixed. For frame
sizes 3 and 4, the trip unit
includes an adjustment for
2
the short circuit protection
setting of the trip unit, with
2
the range dependent on the
frame. 2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-9

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

When ordered individually, The information in the

2 thermal-magnetic trip unit description, TFA30400, is
catalog numbers include a also used in the base breaker
2 Descriptive Section to denote catalog number.
the tripping characteristics of
2 the unit, the pole configuration
and continuous current rating.
2
2 Example
An individual TMTU catalog number takes the form of:

2 Catalog Number PDG3 X TFA 3 0400

Description Power Defense Separator Trip unit tripping Poles Continuous
2 Frame Size digit characteristics current rating

2 Specific to TMTUs, the trip

unit characteristics used in
Thermal-magnetic trip units
(or breakers) may also be
2 the base breaker catalog
number denote the thermal
ordered calibrated to 50 °C
ambient temperature by
and magnetic tripping using a V in the trip unit
2 characteristics of the unit. type designator. Breakers
with 50 °C calibrated trip units
2 do not carry a UL Listing.
TM trip unit tripping characteristics options:
2 Configured Separate TM
Breaker Digit Trip Unit Digit Designator Option Meaning
2 11 6 Trip unit type T Thermal-magnetic trip unit

2 V 50 °C thermal-magnetic trip unit

12 7 Thermal type F Fixed
2 A Adjustable
13 8 Magnetic type F Fixed
2 A Adjustable

2 Note: IEC rated circuit thermal-magnetic trip units that are included with PDC or PDE breakers are typically
fully adjustable (thermal and magnetic). Please consult with the product line for additional details.

2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETUs)
2 PXR ETUs are available in When ordered individually, Sections of the PXR ETU
frame sizes 2 through 6, PXR trip unit catalog numbers catalog number are also
2 covering a continuous
current range of 15 A
also include a Descriptive
Section denoting the
used in the Base Breaker
that is outfitted with the
2
through 2500 A. functionality and configuration same trip unit.
of the trip unit.

2 Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETUs)

2 Catalog Number
Description
PDG3
Power Defense
X
Separator digit
PXR
PXR ETU
3
Poles
0400
Maximum continuous current rating
P2M
Trip unit functionality
Frame Size
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-10 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
The three digit code at the end of the trip unit catalog number, or digits 11–13 for a base catalog
number, denote the trip unit type, protection features and options included with the trip unit. 2
2
Example
Trip unit features and options: 2
Configured Separate PXR
Breaker Digit Trip Unit Digit Designator Option Meaning 2
11 14 Trip unit type B PXR 10 Basic ETU
E PXR 20 2
D
P
PXR 20D
PXR 25
2
12 15 Protection type 2 LSI 2
3 LSIG
4 LSI with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ (ALSI) 2
LSIG with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System (ALSIG)
2
5
8 LSI Motor (MLSI)
9 LSIG Motor (MLSIG)
2
13 16 Options included N None
R Programmable relays 2
M Modbus and relays
Z ZSI and relays 2
CAM Link and relays
2
C
W Modbus, ZSI, and relays
X CAM Link, ZSI, and relays
2
D Modbus, CAM Link, and relays
Y Modbus, CAM Link, ZSI and relays 2
Each frame section provides details on which options are available for the frame and includes a 2
table similar to the one below, denoting the options that may be combined by following horizontal
lines and selecting one item per section, such as E2Z or P3W below. 2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options
2
Trip Unit Type Protection Type Available Configured Options
(Character 11) (Character 12) (Character 13)
— Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays 2
— — Modbus — — Modbus — Modbus Modbus

PXR ETU LSI LSIG LSI 1 LSIG 1

—
—
—
—
—
—
ZSI
—
—
CAM
ZSI
—
ZSI
CAM
—
CAM
ZSI
CAM
2
PXR 10 B 2 — — — N — — — — — — — — 2
PXR 20 E 2 — — — N R M Z C W X — —
— 3 4 5 — R M Z C W X — — 2
PXR 20D D 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
PXR 25 P 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y 2
Accessories 2
Power Defense accessory catalog numbers also follow a format with a frame description, separator digit (X) and descriptive section,
similar to trip units.
2
Accessory catalog numbering format:
Catalog Number 2
Example PDG3 X ST130ACDCS
Meaning Power Defense Global Standards Separator digit Descriptive section. May include voltage, functionality,or other description of accessory. 2
Frame 3

In cases where an accessory is used on multiple frames, multiple frames may be listed in the Frame Description, such as “PDG34” for
2
some rotary handles. Accessory catalog numbers are listed with descriptions in each frame section.
2
Note
1 With Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System.
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-11

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Technical Data
2
Technical Data—Frame Sizes 1 and 2
2
2
2
2 Description Unit
Frame Size 1—125 A,
1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
Frame Size 2—225 A,
1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole

2 Interrupting rating /
breaking capacity
50–60 Hz kA C F G K M N1 P1 F G K M N P

2 NEMA UL/CSA 240 Vac 25 35 65 85 100 150 200 35 65 85 100 150 200
480 Vac (277 Vac 18 25 35 50 65 85 100 25 35 50 65 85 100

2 for 1-pole)
600 Vac (347 Vac 10 14 18 22 25 30 35 14 18 22 25 30/25 35/25
for 1-pole) 23
2 125 Vdc 4 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 10 10 10

2 IEC 60947-2
250 Vdc 4
220–240 Vac Icu
10
25
22
35
22
55
35
85
42
100
42
150
42
200
10
35
10
55
10
85
22
100
22
150
22
200

2 Ics 25 35 55 85 100 100 150 35 55 85 100 100 150

380–415 Vac Icu 20 25 36 50 70 70 100 25 36 50 70 70 100
2 Ics 20 25 36 50 50 70 100 25 36 50 53 70 70
440 Vac Icu — — — — — — — 25 30 35 50 70 100
2 Ics — — — — — — — 20 22.5 35 40 50 65
480 Vac Icu — — — — — — — 20 25 35 50 65 65
2 Ics — — — — — — — 20 20 22.5 30 40 40

2 525 Vac 2 Icu

Ics
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
18
15/13
20
15/13
30/25
15/13
30/25
15/13
30/25
15/13
35/25
18/13

2 660–690 Vac Icu — — — — — — — — 8 10 10 10 10

Ics — — — — — — — — 4 5 5 5 5
2 125 Vdc 4 Icu 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 10 10 10
Ics 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 10 10 10
2 250 Vdc 4 Icu 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 22 22 22
Ics 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 10 10 10 22 22 22
2 Rated short circuit 220–240 Vac 52.5 73.5 121 187 220 330 440 73.5 121 187 220 330 440
making capacity (Icm)
2 380–415 Vac
440 Vac
42
—
53
—
76
—
105
—
154
—
154
—
220
—
52.5
52.5
75.6
63
105
73.5
154
105
154
154
220
220

2 480 Vac — — — — — — — 42 52.5 73.5 105 143 143

525 Vac — — — — — — — 37.8 42 63/52.5 63/52.5 73.5 73.5
2 660–690 Vac — — — — — — — — 16.8 21 21 21 21
Withstand/threshold Icw kA — 1.8
2 of the frame
Trip unit
2 Interchangeable No No
Thermal-magnetic (T) Fixed-Fixed Fixed-Fixed
2 Motor circuit protector (M) Adjustable Mag Only (3 pole) Adjustable Mag Only (3 pole)
Electronics
2 Basic—PXR 10 (B) LSI, MLSI

2 Standard—PXR 20 (E)
Ammeter—PXR 20D (D)
LSI, LSIG
LSI, LSIG

2 Energy / programmable—PXR 25 (P) LSI, LSIG, MLSI, MLSIG

Notes
2 1 N and P ratings not available for single-pole breakers.
2 First listed interrupting rating applies to thermal-magnetic breakers; the second rating applies to electronic breakers.

2 3 PDG1 breakers are rated for use in 600Y/347 Vac systems.

4 125 Vdc ratings are for single-pole breakers. 250 Vdc require two poles in series.

V4-T2-12 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Technical Data—Frame Sizes 1 and 2, continued
2
2
2
Frame Size 1—125 A, Frame Size 2—225 A, 2
Description Unit 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
UL File Number E7819 E7819 2
UL 100% rated breaker
Amperage range Thermal-magnetic A
—
15–125
—
15–225 (1-pole: 15–150;
2
15–30 for 1-pole N and P ratings
Electronics — 15–225
2
Selectivity category A A
2
Reference standard UL/CSA/IEC/CCC UL/CSA/IEC/CCC
Rated insulation voltage Main conducting V 500 800 (TMTU) 690 (ETU) 2
U, according to IEC paths
60947–2
Auxiliary circuits V 500 690 2
Rated impulse Main conducting kV 6 8 (TMTU) 6 (ETU)
withstand voltage Uimp paths 2
Auxiliary circuits 4 4
Rated operational IEC/CCC Vac 415 690 2
voltage Ue (AC)
UL/CSA Vac 600/347 600
Rated operational IEC/CCC Vdc 250 250
2
voltage Ue (DC)
UL/CSA Vdc 250 250
2
Suitable for use on single-phase No 3-pole and 4-pole
AC applications up to 480 V?
Permissible ambient temperature range °C –20 to +70 –20 to +70
2
(for storage and operation)
Product complies with Shock Yes Yes
2
IEC 60068
Permissible load for various ambient
2
temperatures close to the circuit breaker,
related to the rated current of the circuit
breaker
2
Thermal-magnetic
breakers
40 °C 100% 100% 2
45 °C 98% 100%
50 °C 96% 100% 2
55 °C 93% 98%
60 °C 91% 95%
2
70 °C 86% 90%
2
PXR Electronic Breakers 40 °C — 100%
(including motor
protection circuit
45 °C — 100% 2
breakers) 50 °C — 100%
55 °C — 98% 2
60 °C — 92%
70 °C — 80%
2
Altitude derating factor See Special Applications Section See Special Applications Section
2
400 Hz derating factor — See Special Applications Section
Endurance (operating cycles) no-load 10,000 20,000 2
(mechanical endurance)
Endurance (operating cycles) with load
(electrical endurance) at 415 V
125 A: 4000;100 A: 6000 8,000 2
Maximum switching frequency (per minute) 125 A: 5; 100 A: 6 2 2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-13

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Technical Data—Frame Sizes 1 and 2, continued

2
2
2
2 Frame Size 1—125 A, Frame Size 2—225 A,
Description Unit 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
2 Dimensions (H x W x D) 1-pole inch 5.5 x 1.0 x 3.0 6.0 x 1.4 x 3.5
(mm) (139.7 x 25.4 x 76.2) (152.4 x 35.1 x 88.9)
2 2-pole 5.5 x 2.0 x 3.0 6.0 x 2.8 x 3.5
(139.7 x 50.8 x 76.2) (152.4 x 71.1 x 88.9)
2 3-pole 5.5 x 3.0 x 3.0 6.0 x 4.1 x 3.5
(139.7 x 76.2 x 76.2) (152.4 x 104.6 x 88.9)
2 4-pole 5.5 x 4.0 x 3.0 6.0 x 5.5 x 3.5
(139.7 x 101.6 x 76.2) (152.4 x 139.5 x 88.9)
2 Pole to pole distance inch
(mm)
1.000
(24.40)
1.375
(34.93)

2 Approximate weight lb (kg)

Breaker 3-pole / 4-pole 2.29 (1.04) / 2.84 (1.29) 4.21 (1.82) / 5.69 (2.46)
2 Breaker with Plug-in 3-pole / 4-pole — 6.00 (2.72) / 8.09 (3.67)
Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum W 31 48 (TMTU); 38 (ETU)
2 rated current ln fixed breaker (3P)—for plant
protection
2 Suitable for reverse-
feed applications
Yes (except MCP) Yes (except MCP)

2 Blow out dimension Inch

(mm)
3.75
(95.3)
1.00
(25.4)

2 Required spacing
between circuit
Inch
(mm)
0 0

breakers
2 Installation methods Fixed Yes Yes

2 Plug-in
Drawout
Yes
—
Yes
—

2 DIN rail Yes Yes 1

IP Protection With accessories IP30 IP2X with finger protection
2 Pollution degree III III
Overvoltage category III III
2 Annex H IT capability at 415 V Yes Yes

2 Permissible mounting
positions
90

90
90
90

2
2
2 Note
1 Consult with product line for availability.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-14 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Technical Data—Frame Sizes 3 and 4
2
2
2
Frame Size 3—400 A, Frame Size 3—600 A, Frame Size 4—800 A, 2
Description Unit 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
Interrupting rating / 50–60 Hz kA F G K M N P F G K M N P G K M 2
breaking capacity
NEMA UL/CSA 240 Vac 35 65 85 100 150 200 35 65 85 100 150 200 65 85 100 2
480 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100 25 35 50 65 85 100 35 50 65
600 Vac 14 18 25 35 50 65 14 18 25 35 50 65 18 25 35
2
125 Vdc — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
2
250 Vdc 1 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 42 42 42 22 22 25
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu 35 55 85 100 150 200 35 55 85 100 150 200 55 85 100 2
Ics 35 55 85 100 100 150 35 55 85 100 100 150 55 85 100
380–415 Vac Icu 25 36 50 70 70 100 25 36 50 70 70 100 36 50 70 2
440 Vac
Ics
Icu
25
25
36
30
50
35
53
50
70
70
70
100
25
25
36
30
50
35
53
50
70
70
70
100
36
30
50
35
53
50
2
Ics 20 22.5 35 40 50 50 20 22.5 35 40 50 50 22.5 35 40 2
480 Vac Icu 20 25 35 50 65 85 20 25 35 50 65 85 25 35 50
Ics 20 20 22.5 30 40 40 20 20 22.5 30 40 40 20 22.5 30 2
525 Vac Icu 18 20 25 30 35 40 18 20 25 30 35 40 20 25 30
Ics 5 7.5 10 15 25 25 5 7.5 10 15 25 25 16.5 20 25
2
660–690 Vac Icu — 8 10 15 20 20 — 8 10 15 20 20 8 10 15
2
Ics — 4 5 7.5 10 10 — 4 5 7.5 10 10 4 5 7.5
125 Vdc Icu — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 2
Ics — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
250 Vdc 1 Icu 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 42 42 42 22 22 25 2
Ics 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 42 42 42 22 22 25
Rated short circuit 220–240 Vac 73.5 121 187 220 330 440 73.5 121 187 220 330 440 121 187 220
2
making capacity (Icm)
380–415 Vac 52.5 75.6 105 154 154 220 52.5 75.6 105 154 154 220 75.6 105 154
2
440 Vac 52.5 63 73.5 105 154 220 52.5 63 73.5 105 154 220 63 73.5 105
480 Vac 42 52.5 73.5 105 143 187 42 52.5 73.5 105 143 187 52.5 73.5 105 2
525 Vac 37.8 42 52.5 63 73.5 84 37.8 42 52.5 63 73.5 84 42 52.5 63
660–690 Vac — 16.8 21 31.5 42 42 — 16.8 21 31.5 42 42 16.8 21 31.5 2
Withstand/threshold
of the frame
Icw kA 4 4 6
2
Trip unit
Interchangeable Yes Yes Yes 2
Thermal-magnetic (T)
Motor circuit protector (M)
Fixed-Adjustable
Adjustable Mag Only (3 pole)
Fixed-Adjustable
Adjustable Mag Only (3 pole)
Fixed-Adjustable
—
2
Adjustable Magnetic
only (3-pole)—PXR 10 (B)
LSI, MLSI LSI, MLSI LSI 2
Standard—PXR 20 (E) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
2
Ammeter—PXR 20D (D) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Energy / programmable—PXR 25 (P) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG, MLSI, MLSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG, MLSI, MLSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG 2
2
Note
1 2P in series.

2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-15

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Technical Data—Frame Sizes 3 and 4, continued

2
2
2
2 Frame Size 3—400 A, Frame Size 3—600 A, Frame Size 4—800 A,
Description Unit 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
2 UL File Number E7819 E7819 E7819

2 UL 100% rated breaker

Amperage range Thermal-magnetic A
Yes (ETU)
100–400
Yes (TMTU and ETU)
250–600
Yes (ETU)
300–800

2 Electronics 45–400 90–600 320–800

Selectivity category A A A
2 Reference standard UL/CSA/IEC/CCC UL/CSA/IEC/CCC UL/CSA/IEC/CCC
Rated insulation voltage U, Main conducting V 800 800 (TMTU); 690 (ETU) 800 (TMTU);690 (ETU)
2 according to IEC 60947–2 paths
Auxiliary circuits V 690 690 690
2 Rated impulse withstand Main conducting kV 8 (TMTU); 6 (ETU) 8 (TMTU); 6 (ETU) 8 (TMTU); 6 (ETU)
voltage Uimp paths
2 Auxiliary circuits 4 4 4
Rated operational voltage Ue IEC/CCC Vac 690 690 690
2 (AC)
UL/CSA Vac 600 600 600

2 Rated operational voltage Ue IEC/CCC

(DC)
Vdc 250 250 250
UL/CSA Vdc 250 250 250
2 Suitable for use on single-phase 3-pole and 4-pole 3-pole and 4-pole 3-pole and 4-pole
AC applications up to 480 V?

2 Permissible ambient temperature range

(for storage and operation)
°C –20 to +70 –20 to +70 –20 to +70

2 Product complies with

IEC 60068
Shock Yes Yes Yes

2 Permissible load for various ambient temperatures

close to the circuit breaker, related to the rated
current of the circuit breaker
2 Thermal-magnetic breakers 40 °C 100% 100% 100%

2 45 °C
50 °C
95.5%
91%
95.5%
91%
97%
94%

2 55 °C 86% 86% 91%

60 °C 82% 82% 88%
2 70 °C 70% 70% 80%
PXR electronic breakers 40 °C 100% 100% 100%
2 (including motor protection
45 °C 100% 100% 100%
circuit breakers)
2 50 °C 100% 100% 100%
55 °C 86% 86% 91%
2 60 °C 82% 82% 88%
70 °C 70% 70% 80%
2 Altitude derating factor See Special Applications Section See Special Applications Section See Special
Applications Section
2 400 Hz derating factor See Special Applications Section See Special Applications Section See Special
Applications Section
2 Endurance (operating cycles) no-load (mechanical 15,000 15,000 10,000
endurance)
2 Endurance (operating cycles) with load (electrical
endurance) at 415 V
5000 5000 3000

2 Maximum switching frequency (per minute) 1 1 1

V4-T2-16 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Technical Data—Frame Sizes 3 and 4, continued
2
2
2
Frame Size 3—400 A, Frame Size 3—600 A, Frame Size 4—800 A, 2
Description Unit 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
Dimensions 1-pole inch — — — 2
(H x W x D) (mm)
2-pole 10.1 x 5.5 x 4.3 10.1 x 5.5 x 4.3 16.0 x 8.3 x 4.4 2
(257.1 x 138.9 x 109.1) (257.1 x 138.9 x 109.1) (406.4 x 209.6 x 111.2)
3-pole 10.1 x 5.5 x 4.3 10.1 x 5.5 x 4.3 16.0 x 8.3 x 4.4 2
(257.1 x 138.9 x 109.1) (257.1 x 138.9 x 109.1) (406.4 x 209.6 x 111.2)
4-pole 10.1 x 7.2 x 4.3 10.1 x 7.2 x 4.3 16.0 x 11.0 x 4.4 2
(257.1 x 182.9 x 109.1) (257.1 x 182.9 x 109.1) (406.4 x 279.4 x 111.2)
Pole to pole distance inch
(mm)
1.719
(43.66)
1.719
(43.66)
2.750
(69.85)
2
Approximate weight lb (kg) 2
Breaker 3-pole / 11.02 (5.00) 12.79 (5.80) 30.00 (13.60)
4-pole 13.77 (6.25) 17.42 (7.90) 39.90 (18.08)
2
Breaker with Plug-in 3-pole / 18.07 (8.20) 19.84 (9.01) —
4-pole 20.82 (9.44) 26.87 (12.19)
2
Power loss per circuit breaker at W 70 (TMTU); 64 (ETU) 130 (TMTU); 110 (ETU) 291 (TMTU); 270 (ETU)
maximum rated current ln fixed
breaker (3P)—for plant protection 2
Suitable for reverse- Yes Yes Yes
feed applications 2
Blow out dimension Inch 1.00 1.00 2.36
(mm) (25.4) (25.4) (60.0) 2
Required spacing between Inch 0 0 0
circuit breakers (mm) 2
Installation methods Fixed Yes Yes Yes
Plug-in Yes Yes — 2
Drawout Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes 1
DIN rail — — —
2
IP Protection With
accessories
IP2X with Finger Protection IP2X with Finger Protection IP2X Protection
2
Pollution degree III III III
2
Overvoltage category III III III
Annex H IT capability at 415 V Yes Yes Yes 2
Permissible mounting
positions 2
90

90
90
90

2
2
Note
1 Consult with product line for availability.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-17

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Technical Data—Frame Sizes 5 and 6

2
2
2
2 Frame Size 5—800, 1200, 1600 (IEC) Frame Size 6—1600, 2000, 2500
Description Unit 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
2 Interrupting rating / 50–60 Hz kA K M N P T1 M N P
breaking capacity
2 NEMA UL/CSA 240 Vac 85 100 150 200 200 125 150 200
480 Vac (277 Vac 50 65 85 100 125 65 85 100
2 for 1-pole)
600 Vac (347 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 35 50 65
2 for 1-pole)
125 Vdc — — — — — — — —
2 250 Vdc — — — — — — — —

2 IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu

Ics
85
85
100
100
150
100
200
150
—
—
135
100
150
100
200
100

2 380–415 Vac Icu 50 70 70 100 — 70 70 100

Ics 50 53 50 50 — 50 50 50
2 440 Vac Icu 35 50 70 100 — 50 70 100
Ics 35 40 50 50 — 40 50 50
2 480 Vac Icu 35 50 65 85 — 50 65 85

2 Ics 22.5 30 40 40 — 30 40 40
525 Vac Icu 25 30 35 40 — 30 35 40

2 Ics 20 25 25 25 — 25 25 25
660–690 Vac Icu 10 15 20 35 — 15 20 35
2 Ics 5 7.5 10 18 — 7.5 13 18
125 Vdc Icu — — — — — — — —
2 Ics — — — — — — — —

2 250 Vdc Icu — — — — — — — —

Ics — — — — — — — —
2 Rated short circuit 220–240 Vac 187 220 330 440 — 297 330 440
making capacity (Icm)
380–415 Vac 105 154 154 220 — 154 154 220
2 440 Vac 73.5 105 154 220 — 105 154 220

2 480 Vac
525 Vac
73.5
52.5
105
63
143
73.5
187
84
—
—
105
63
143
73.5
187
84

2 660–690 Vac 21 31.5 42 73.5 — 31.5 42 73.5

Withstand/threshold Icw kA 14 20
2 of the frame
Trip unit
2 Interchangeable Yes Yes
Thermal-magnetic (T) — —
2 Motor circuit protector (M) — —
Electronics
2 Basic—PXR 10 (B) — —

2 Standard—PXR 20 (E)
Ammeter—PXR 20D (D)
LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

2 Energy / programmable—PXR 25 (P) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

Note
2 1 PDJ (UL/CSA only), three-pole only; 800 A.

V4-T2-18 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Technical Data—Frame Sizes 5 and 6, continued
2
2
2
Frame Size 5—800, 1200, 1600 (IEC) Frame Size 6—1600, 2000, 2500 2
Description Unit 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
UL File Number E7819 E7819 2
UL 100% rated breaker
Amperage range Thermal-magnetic A
Yes
—
Yes (up to 2000 A)
—
2
Electronics 320–1200 (1600 IEC) 700–2500 2
Selectivity category A A
Reference standard UL/CSA/IEC/CCC UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 2
Rated insulation voltage Main conducting V 690 (ETU) 690 (ETU)
U, according to IEC paths 2
60947–2
Auxiliary circuits V 690 690
Rated impulse withstand Main conducting kV 6 (ETU) 6 (ETU) 2
voltage Uimp paths
Auxiliary circuits 4 4 2
Rated operational IEC/CCC Vac 690 690
voltage Ue (AC)
UL/CSA Vac 600 600
2
Rated operational
voltage Ue (DC)
IEC/CCC Vdc — —
2
UL/CSA Vdc — —
Suitable for use on single-phase AC circuits? Yes No 2
Permissible ambient temperature range °C –20 to +70 –20 to +70
(for storage and operation) 2
Product complies with Shock Yes Yes
IEC 60068 2
Permissible load for various ambient
temperatures close to the circuit breaker,
related to the rated current of the circuit
2
breaker
Thermal-magnetic 40 °C — — 2
breakers
45 °C
50 °C
—
—
—
—
2
55 °C — — 2
60 °C — —
70 °C — — 2
PXR electronic breakers 40 °C 100% 100%
(including motor
45 °C 95.5% 95.5%
2
protection circuit
breakers) 50 °C 91% 91%
2
55 °C 85% 85%
60 °C 81% 81% 2
70 °C 70% 70%
Altitude derating factor See Special Applications Section See Special Applications Section 2
400 Hz derating factor See Special Applications Section See Special Applications Section
Endurance (operating cycles) no-load 3000 3000
2
(mechanical endurance)
Endurance (operating cycles) with load 500 500
2
(electrical endurance) at 415 V
Maximum switching frequency (per minute) 1 1 2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-19

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Technical Data—Frame Sizes 5 and 6, continued

2
2
2
2 Frame Size 5—800, 1200, 1600 (IEC) Frame Size 6—1600, 2000, 2500
Description Unit 2-, 3- and 4-Pole 2-, 3- and 4-Pole
2 Dimensions (H x W x D) 1-pole inch — —
(mm)
2 2-pole 16.0 x 8.3 x 5.5 16.0 x 15.5 x 9.8
(406.4 x 209.5 x 139.7) (406.4 x 393.7 x 247.65)
2 3-pole 16.0 x 8.3 x 5.5 16.0 x 15.5 x 9.8
(406.4 x 209.5 x 139.7) (406.4 x 393.7 x 247.65)
2 4-pole 16.0 x 11.1 x 5.5 16.0 x 20.0 x 9.8
(406.4 x 282.7 x 139.7) (406.4 x 508 x 247.65)
2 Pole to pole distance inch
(mm)
2.750
(69.85)
4.500
(114.30)

2 Approximate weight lb (kg)

Breaker 3-pole / 4-pole 46.80 (21.30) / 58.00 (26.31) 135.00 (61.23) / 182.00 (82.55)
2 Breaker with Plug-in 3-pole / 4-pole — —
Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum W 87 (800 A) 220 (1600 A); 270 (2000 A);
2 rated current ln fixed breaker (3P)—for plant 195 (1200 A and 1600 A) 400 (2500 A)
protection
2 Suitable for reverse-feed
applications
Yes Yes

2 Blow out dimension Inch

(mm)
13.125
(333.38)
2.625
(66.68)

2 Required spacing
between circuit breakers
Inch
(mm)
0 0

2 Installation methods Fixed Yes Yes

Plug-in — —
2 Drawout Yes 1 —
DIN rail — —
2 IP Protection With accessories IP2X Protection IP2X Protection
Pollution degree III III
2 Overvoltage category III III

2 Annex H IT capability at 415 V Yes Yes

Permissible mounting
2 positions
90

90
90
90

2
2
Note

2 1 Consult with product line for availability.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-20 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Power Defense Accessories
PDG1 PDG2 PDG3 PDG4 PDG5 PDG6
2
Auxiliary switches
2
Rated thermal current Ith 5A 4A 4A 4A 6A 6A
Rated operational voltage (AC) 125 V / 250 V / 600 V 230 V / 500 V / 600 V 230 V / 500 V / 600 V 230 V / 500 V / 600 V 600 V 600 V 2
Rated operational current (AC) 5A/5A/2A 4 A / 1 A / 0.6 A 4 A / 1 A / 0.6 A 4 A / 1 A / 0.6 A 6A 6A
Rated operational voltage (DC) 125 V 220 V 220 V 220 V 125 V / 250 V 125 V / 250 V 2
Rated operational current (DC)
Backup fuse 1
1A
4A
0.3 A
4A
0.3 A
4A
0.3 A
4A
0.5 A / 0.25 A
4A
0.5 A / 0.25 A
4A
2
Undervoltage releases 2
Response voltage
Drop (breaker tripped) Us 0.35~0.70 0.35~0.70 0.35~0.70 0.35~0.70 0.35~0.70 0.35~0.70 2
Pickup (breaker may be switched on) Us 0.85~1.1 0.85~1.1 0.85~1.1 0.85~1.1 0.85~1.1 0.85~1.1
Power consumption in continuous operation:
2
50/60 Hz 24 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 11 W ≤ 9.6 W
2
50/60 Hz 110–130 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 11 W ≤ 9.6 W
50/60 Hz 208–240 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 11 W ≤ 9.6 W 2
50/60 Hz 380–440 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 11 W ≤ 9.6 W
50/60 Hz 480–525 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 11 W ≤ 9.6 W 2
50/60 Hz 600 Vac ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W
12 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W
2
24 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W
2
48 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W
60 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W 2
125 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W
250 Vdc ≤ 4.3 W ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W ≤ 6.25 W ≤ 7.5 W 2
Maximum opening time (ms)
Shunt trips
≤ 50 ≤ 20 ≤ 20 ≤ 20 ≤ 46 ≤ 77
2
Shunt trips (“f” releases) response voltage 2
Pickup (breaker tripped) Us 0.7~1.1 0.7~1.1 0.7~1.1 0.7~1.1 0.7~1.1 0.7~1.1
Power consumption in (short time) at: 2
50/60 Hz 24 Vac/24 Vdc 41 / 120 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 475/610 612/396
50/60 Hz 110–130 Vac/125 Vdc 572 / 121 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 100/150 1896/475
2
50/60 Hz 208–240 Vac/250 Vdc 2280 / N/A ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 432/55 1896/475
2
50/60 Hz 380–440 Vac 572 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 110 2156
50/60 Hz 480–525 Vac 840 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 32 289 2
50/60 Hz 600 Vac 1080 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 42 384
12 Vdc 201 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 145 — 2
48 Vdc 475 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 67 403
60 Vdc 720 ≤3W ≤3W ≤3W 102 666
2
Maximum load duration
2
Maximum opening time (ms) ≤ 50 <20 <20 <20 <30 <62

Note 2
1 Proper system design should size the backup fuse to the rated current going through the auxiliary switch.

2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-21

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 1
Description Page
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A)
2 Catalog Number / Product Selection . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-23
V4-T2-26
2 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-28
V4-T2-29
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42
2 Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
2 Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . .
High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
V4-T2-98

2 Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . .

Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers .
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-107
Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
2 Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112
Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
2 Fused Current-Limiting Module . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . . V4-T2-116
2 Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-140
V4-T2-142
V4-T2-146
2
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing. . . . . .

2
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 1

2 Product Description
Frame Size 1 covers a range
Application Description
Frame Size 1 can be used to
Features and Benefits
Frame Size 1 breakers are
Standards and Certifications
Power Defense breakers are
2 of 15 A through 125 A with
fixed-fixed thermal-magnetic
meet a wide range of circuit
protection and power
available in multiple ratings
from 15 A through 125 A.
designed and tested to meet
stringent requirements for:
trip units. PD-1 is available distribution needs, including They are of a modular
2 UL
●

in single-, two-, three- and current-limiting applications. design with field installable ● CSA
four-pole configurations, with PD-1 is a cable-in / cable-out accessories and terminals,
2 the four-pole configuration MCCB. which may also be factory ● IEC (CE)
CB (CCC)
available with no protection installed. ●

2 on the neutral pole, or fully

protected.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-22 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Catalog Number / Product Selection
2
Power Defense—Frame Size 1 (15–125 A)
Frame Size 1 covers a range of 15 A through 125 A using thermal-magnetic trip units. 2
It is available in configurations of single-, two-, three- and four-pole.
2
Interrupting Ratings (Two-, Three- and Four-Pole)
Catalog Designator C F G K M1 N 12 P 12 2
UL/CSA kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms
240 Vac 25 35 65 85 100 150 200 2
480 Vac
600Y/347 Vac
18
10
25
14
35
18
50
22
65
25
85
30
100
35
2
250 Vdc 3 10 22 22 35 42 42 42 2
IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
240 Vac 25 25 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100 150 150 200 200 2
380–415 Vac 20 20 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 50 70 70 100 100
250 Vdc 3 10 10 22 22 22 22 35 35 42 42 42 42 42 42
2
Interrupting Ratings (Single-Pole) 2
2
C F G K M
UL/CSA kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms
120 Vac 35 — 100 — 200 2
240 Vac 25 35 65 85 100
277 Vac 18 25 35 50 65 2
347 Vac 10 14 18 22 25
125 Vdc 10 22 22 35 42
2
IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
2
240 Vac 25 25 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100
125 Vdc 10 10 22 22 22 22 35 35 35 35 2
2
Notes
1 UL current limiting.
2 Available in three- and four-pole configurations only.
3 Must use 2 poles in series for 250 Vdc.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-23

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Power Defense—Frame Size 1 (15–125 A)

2 This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Single- and Two-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units—Globally Rated
2
PD G 1 3 M 0125 TFF J
2
Product Series
2 PD = Power Defense

2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal
2 Standards Size Options Ratings 1 Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/ 1 =1 1 = 1-pole C = 18 kA at 480 V 0015 = 15 A TFF = Fixed Thermal / N = No terminals

2 CCC 2 = 2-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V

G = 35 kA at 480 V
0020
0025
= 20 A
= 25 A
Fixed Magnetic
VFF = 50 °C Fixed
J = Line and load
terminals
K = 50 kA at 480 V 0030 = 30 A Thermal / Fixed K = Line only terminals
2 M = 65 kA at 480 V 0035
0040
= 35 A
= 40 A
Magnetic
(non UL)
L = Load only terminals

Interrupting 0045 = 45 A
2 Ratings 2
0050
0060
= 50 A
= 60 A
C = 10 kA at 600Y/347 V 0070 = 70 A
2 F = 14 kA at 600Y/347 V
G = 18 kA at 600Y/347 V
0080
0090
= 80 A
= 90 A
K = 22 kA at 600Y/347 V 0100 = 100 A
2 M = 25 kA at 600Y/347 V 0110
0125
= 110 A
= 125 A

2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Three- and Four-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units—Globally Rated
2
PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/ 1 =1 3 = 3-pole C = 18 kA at 480 V 0015 = 15 A TFF = Fixed Thermal / N = No terminals
2 CCC 4 = 4-pole (100% N)
0 = 4-pole (0% N)
F = 25 kA at 480 V
G = 35 kA at 480 V
0020
0025
= 20 A
= 25 A
Fixed Magnetic
VFF = 50 °C Fixed
J = Line and load
terminals
K = 50 kA at 480 V 0030 = 30 A Thermal / Fixed K = Line only terminals
2 M = 65 kA at 480 V 0035
0040
= 35 A
= 40 A
Magnetic
(non UL)
L = Load only terminals
N = 85 kA at 480 V
0045 = 45 A
2 P = 100 kA at 480 V
0050
0060
= 50 A
= 60 A
C = 10 kA at 600Y/347 V
0070 = 70 A
2 F = 14 kA at 600Y/347 V
G = 18 kA at 600Y/347 V
0080
0090
= 80 A
= 90 A
K = 22 kA at 600Y/347 V = 100 A
2
0100
M = 25 kA at 600Y/347 V 0110 = 110 A
N = 30 kA at 600Y/347 V 0125 = 125 A
P = 35 kA at 600Y/347 V
2
2 Molded Case Switches—Globally Rated 3

PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/ 1 =1 3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A KNS = Molded Case N = No terminals

2 CCC 4 = 4-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V Switch J = Line and load
terminals

2 G = 18 kA at 600Y/347 V
M = 25 kA at 600Y/347 V
K = Line only terminals
L = Load only terminals

2 Notes
1 Ratings at 277 Vac for single-pole.

2 2 Ratings at 347 Vac for single-pole.

3 Molded case switch may open above 1250 A.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-24 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 1
Catalog numbers shown are for a single side of a three-pole breaker.
2
For two- and four-pole options, replace the X3 with X2 or X4, respectively.
Example: PDG1X3T125 becomes PDG1X2T125 for two-pole. 2
2
Terminal Types
2
2
2
2
2
2
PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125 PDG1X3TA1256W PDG1X3TA1253W PDG1X3TS125 GCWTK 2
Note: Pictures are for reference only.
2
Terminals
Maximum Number of AWG Metric (mm2) Digit 14 Designation 2
Breaker Terminal Wire Wire Conductors Range per Range per 3-Pole Included Line and Line Load Standard
Amperes Body Type Type Class per Phase Conductor Conductor Catalog Number Accessories Load Only Only on Amperes 2
Standard Terminals
125 Steel Al or Cu B, C 1 14-3/0 2.08–85 PDG1X3T125 — J K L 15–125
2
Alternate Terminals
2
125 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 14-1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG1X3TA125 — T U V 15–125
Multi-wire Terminals 2
125 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 14-6 2.08–13.3 PDG1X3TA1256W Terminal shield — — G 15–125
125 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 14-2 2.08–33.6 PDG1X3TA1253W Terminal shield — — H 15–125 2
2
End Cap Kit/Screw Terminals
— — — — — — — PDG1X3TS125 — S D E 15–125

Note: Wire capacity is based on standard imperial wire sizes; metric sizes provided in table 2
are a direct conversion to demonstrate maximum capacity, not to denote metric wire sizes.

Control Wire Tabs 2

Use
Package
Quantity
Catalog
Number 2
15–125 A 12 GCWTK
2
Note: Control wire tabs can be installed with terminals listed above.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-25

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories
2
Internal Accessory Configurations—Frame Size 1 1
2 3- and 4-Pole Circuit Breakers

2
2
2
2 Tripping
Accessory Options
Indicating
Accessory Options
None None
2 1 Make/1 Break Alarm Switch

2 2 Make/2 Break Alarm Switch

1A/1B Auxiliary Switch
2 Qty: 1 2A/2B Auxiliary Switch
1A/1B Alarm,1A/1B Auxiliary Combination
2
2 Qty: 1

2
Alarm and Auxiliary Switches
2 Alarm and auxiliary switches Breaker catalog numbers ● Digit 15 denotes the type
are plug-and-play accessories with alarm and auxiliary of accessory(-ies) installed
2 designed to be field switch combinations require and the terminal types
installable. However, Eaton a complete 20-digit catalog ● Digit 16 denotes number of
2 also offers the service of field
installation in our factories.
number, adding the alarm and
auxiliary switch functionality
switches installed
● If no other accessories are
2
in digits 15–16 and adhering selected, use NNNN for
to the following conditions the final 4 digits of the
and tables:
2 catalog number

2 Alarm and Auxiliary Switch—Field Installation Kits 2

Auxiliary Switch Catalog Number
2 Three-Pole None 1NO/1NC (1 Form C) 2NO/2NC (2 Form C)
Alarm Switch None — AUX1A1BPK AUX2A2BPK
2 1NO/1NC (1 Form C) ALM1M1BEPK AUXALRMEPK —

2 2NO/2NC (2 Form C) ALM2M2BEPK — —

2 Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Factory Installation (Digits 15–16) 2

Auxiliary Switch Breaker Catalog Number (Digit 15–16 Suffix)
2 Three-Pole None 1NO/1NC (1 Form C) 2NO/2NC (2 Form C)

2
Alarm Switch None NN AC A1
1NO/1NC (1 Form C) BC CC —

2 2NO/2NC (2 Form C) B1 — —

Notes
2 1 Two-pole PD-1 breakers have an accessory pocket compatible with indicating accessory options only.
2 All options come with pigtail terminations.

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-26 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 1 Undervoltage Releases
Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Breaker Catalog Number
2
Shunt Trips
Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Breaker Catalog Number
Voltage
24 Vdc
Digit 17-18 Suffix
UG
Catalog Number
UVR024DPK
2
Voltage Digit 17-18 Suffix Catalog Number
12 Vdc SH SNT012CPK
48 Vdc UJ UVR048DPK 2
60 Vdc UK UVR048DPK
24 Vac/Vdc
48–60 Vdc
SN
—
SNT024CPK
SNT4860CPK
125 Vdc — UVR125DPK 2
250 Vdc UM UVR250DPK
110–125 Vdc — SNT125DPK
24 Vac UF UVR024APK
2
250 Vdc — SNT250DPK
48–60 Vac — SNT4860CPK
48 Vac — UVR048APK
2
60 Vac — UVR048APK
110–240 Vac — SNT120CPK
380–600 Vac — SNT480CPK
125 Vac — UVR120APK 2
240 Vac UB UVR240APK
480 Vac — UVR480APK 2
525 Vac UD
2
UVR600APK
600 Vac UE UVR600APK

Handle Mechanisms—Frame Size 1 2

Universal Direct Rotary Handle Mechanism Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism 2
NEMA 1/12 NEMA 1/12 Catalog

Description
Black Handle
Catalog Number
Red Handle
Catalog Number
Description Number 2
PDG1XHMDS Standard lockable handle with mechanism PDG1XHMDS
With interlock EHMCCBI EHMCCRI (black and gray) NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X 1 2
Without interlock EHMCCB EHMCCR Emergency lockable handle with mechanism PDG1XHMDE
(red and yellow) NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X 1
2
Mechanism only EHMVDB
12-in (307 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG12XHMS307 2
20-in (507 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG12XHMS507
Standard NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG12XHM79S 2
(black and gray)
Emergency NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG12XHM79E 2
(red and yellow)
2
Flex Shaft Handle Mechanism

Cable Length (ft)

Metal Handle, NEMA 1/3R/12
Catalog Number
High Performance Handle, NEMA 1/3R/12
Catalog Number
Metal Handle, NEMA 4/4X
Catalog Number
High Performance Handle, NEMA 4/4X
Catalog Number
2
2 PDG1XFS02 PDG1XFS02HP PDG1XFS02X PDG1XFS02HPX 2
3 PDG1XFS03 PDG1XFS03HP PDG1XFS03X PDG1XFS03HPX
4 PDG1XFS04 PDG1XFS04HP PDG1XFS04X PDG1XFS04HPX 2
5
6
PDG1XFS05
PDG1XFS06
PDG1XFS05HP
PDG1XFS06HP
PDG1XFS05X
PDG1XFS06X
PDG1XFS05HPX
PDG1XFS06HPX
2
7 PDG1XFS07 PDG1XFS07HP PDG1XFS07X PDG1XFS07HPX
2
8 PDG1XFS08 PDG1XFS08HP PDG1XFS08X PDG1XFS08HPX
9 PDG1XFS09 PDG1XFS09HP PDG1XFS09X PDG1XFS09HPX 2
10 PDG1XFS10 PDG1XFS10HP PDG1XFS10X PDG1XFS10HPX
2
Flex Shaft Handle Auxiliary Switch
Description Catalog Number
2
1A/1B, Early Break AUX1EBFSEG
2
Note
1 Handle mechanism shaft sold separately. 2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-27

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories—Frame Size 1 Dimensions and Weights—Frame Size 1

2
External Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 Description Fit Type Catalog Number Number
of Poles Width Height Depth
Padlockable handle lock, Snap-on Center
2
PDG1XPLKSNAP
1 1.0 (25.4) 5.5 (139.7) 2.99 (76.0)
Padlockable handle lock hasp Top PDG1XPLKT
2 2.0 (50.8) 5.5 (139.7) 2.99 (76.0)
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp, OFF only Top PDG1XPLKTOFF
3 3.0 (76.2) 5.5 (139.7) 2.99 (76.0)
Right PDG1XPLKROFF
2 Padlockable handle block On handle PDG1XPHB
4 4.0 (101.6) 5.5 (139.7) 2.99 (76.0)

Padlockable handle block, OFF only On handle PDG1XPHBOFF

2 Walking beam interlock 12 Three-pole PDG1XWBI3P
Approximate Shipping Weight in lb (kg)
Breaker Type 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

2 Slide bar interlock

Four-pole
Field
PDG1XWBI4P
EFSBI
PDG1 125 A 0.85 (0.39) 1.57 (0.71) 2.3 (1.04) 2.84 (1.29)

2
Notes
Electrical operator 110–240 Vac/Vdc MOPEG240C
1 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant
24/48 Vdc MOPEG48D (factory suffix WB).
2 Wohner busbar adapter Field top EG-BUS-T
2 Requires two breakers.

Field bottom EG-BUS-B

2 Terminal covers Three-pole PDG1XTC3P

2 Interphase barriers
Four-pole
2 barriers
PDG1XTC4P
PDG1XIB3P

2
DIN Rail Mounting
2 Description Catalog Number

2 DIN rail adapter; single-pole PDG1XDIN1P

Din rail adapter; two-, three- or four-pole PDG1XDIN234P

2 DIN rail adapter; three- or four-pole PDG1XDIN34P

Metal DIN rail adapter, three-pole PDG1XDINM3P
2
Base Mounting Hardware
2 Description Catalog Number

2 Single-pole metric
Two-, three-, four-pole metric
8703C80G11
8703C80G08

2 Single-pole English 8703C80G12

Two-, three-, four-pole English BMHE
2 Note: Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-28 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Contents
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 2
Description Page
2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A)
Catalog Number / Product Selection . . . . . . V4-T2-30
2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-35
V4-T2-41 2
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57 2
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79 2
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . .
High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
V4-T2-98
2
Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers V4-T2-107 2
Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112 2
Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
Fused Current-Limiting Module . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . .
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-116
2
Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-140
V4-T2-142 2
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing . . . . . V4-T2-146
2
2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 2 2
Product Description
Frame Size 2 covers a range
Application Description
Frame Size 2 can be used
Features and Benefits
Frame Size 2 breakers are
Standards and Certifications
Power Defense breakers are
2
of 15 A through 225 A with a
complete offering of trip units,
to meet a wide range of
circuit protection and power
available in multiple ratings
from 15 A through 225 A.
designed and tested to meet
stringent requirements for: 2
including PXR electronic trip distribution needs, including They are configured with a UL
2
●

units and fixed-fixed thermal- ground fault protection and trip unit from the factory. ● CSA
magnetic trip units. current-limiting options. PXR Accessories are modular in
trip units in PD-2 provide all design to allow for field ● IEC (CE)
CB (CCC)
2
levels of protection, including installation or factory ●

energy metering with

multiple communication
configuration. PXR trip units
are available with advanced
2
schemes, breaker health features to provide
indication, and zone selective customers unparalleled 2
interlocking with visual situational awareness of
indication. their electrical system. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-29

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Catalog Number / Product Selection

2
Power Defense—Frame Size 2 (15–225 A)
2 Frame Size 2 covers a range of 15 A through 225 A using electronic trip units or thermal-magnetic
trip units. It is available in configurations of single-, two-, three- and four-pole.
2
Interrupting Ratings (Two-, Three- and Four-Pole)
2 Catalog Designator F G K1 M1 N1 P1
UL/CSA kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms
2 240 Vac 35 65 85 100 150 200

2 480 Vac
600 Vac
25
14
35
18
50
22
65
25
85
30 / 25 3
100
35 / 25 3

2 250 Vdc 2 10 10 10 22 22 22
IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
2 240 Vac 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100 150 100 200 150
380–415 Vac 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 53 70 70 100 70
2 440 Vac 25 20 30 22.5 35 35 50 40 70 50 100 65

2 480 Vac 20 20 25 20 35 22.5 50 30 65 40 65 40

525 Vac 18 15 / 13 3 20 15 / 13 3 30 / 25 3 15 / 13 3 30 / 25 3 15 / 13 3 30 / 25 3 15 / 13 3 35 / 25 3 18 / 13 3

2 660–690 Vac — — 8 4 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
250 Vdc 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22
2
2 Interrupting Ratings (Single-Pole)
Catalog Designator F G K M N P

2 UL/CSA kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms

277 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100
2 347 Vac 14 18 22 25 30 35
125 Vdc 10 10 10 22 22 22
2 IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs

2 240 Vac 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 70 85 70 100 70

125 Vdc 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22
2 Notes
1 UL current limiting for three- and four-pole breakers.

2 2 DC ratings available in thermal-magnetic breakers only. 250 Vdc is achieved using two poles in series.
3 First rating listed is for thermal-magnetic breakers, second rating is for breakers with PXR electronic trip units.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-30 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Power Defense—Frame Size 2 (15–225 A)
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers 2
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Single-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units (TMTU)—Globally Rated
2
PD G 2 1 M 0150 TFF J
2
Product Series
PD = Power Defense 2
2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal
Standards
G = UL/CSA/IEC/
Size
2 =2
Options
1 = 1-pole F
Ratings
= 25 kA at 277 V 0015
Current Ratings
= 15 A 2
Type Options
TFF = Fixed thermal / N
Options
= No terminals
2
CCC G = 35 kA at 277 V 0020 = 20 A 2 Fixed magnetic J = Line and load terminals
K
M
= 50 kA at 277 V
= 65 kA at 277 V
0025
0030
= 25 A
= 30 A
VFF = 50 °C Fixed thermal /
Fixed magnetic
K
L
= Line only terminals
= Load only terminals
2
= 85 kA at 277 V 1 0035 = 35 A (non UL)
N
P = 100 kA at 277 V 1 0040
0045
= 40 A
= 45 A
2
= 50 A
F = 14 kA at 347 V
2
0050
G = 18 kA at 347 V 0060 = 60 A
K = 22 kA at 347 V 0070 = 70 A
= 80 A
M = 25 kA at 347 V
N = 30 kA at 347 V 1
0080
0090 = 90 A 2
0100 = 100 A
P = 35 kA at 347 V 1 0110
0125
= 110 A
= 125 A 2
0150 = 150 A
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Two-, Three- and Four-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units—Globally Rated
2
PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/ 2 =2 2 = 2-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0015 = 15 A TFF = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
CCC 3
4
= 3-pole
= 4-pole (100% N)
G = 35 kA at 480 V
K = 50 kA at 480 V
0020
0025
= 20 A
= 25 A
Fixed magnetic
VFF = 50 °C Fixed thermal /
J
K
= Line and load terminals
= Line only terminals
2
= 4-pole (0% N) M = 65 kA at 480 V 0030 = 30 A Fixed magnetic = Load only terminals
2
0 L
6 = 4-pole (60% N) N = 85 kA at 480 V 0035 = 35 A (non UL)
P = 100 kA at 480 V 0040 = 40 A
= 45 A
2
0045
F = 14 kA at 600 V 0050 = 50 A
G = 18 kA at 600 V 0060 = 60 A
= 70 A
2
K = 22 kA at 600 V 0070
M = 25 kA at 600 V 0080 = 80 A
N = 30 kA at 600 V 0090 = 90 A
P = 35 kA at 600 V
0100
0110
= 100 A
= 110 A 2
0125 = 125 A
0150
0175
= 150 A
= 175 A 2
0200 = 200 A
0225 = 225 A
2
Notes
1 N and P ratings available for 15–30 A on single-pole breakers.
2
2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-31

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Power Defense—Frame Size 2 (15–225 A)

2 This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.
2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers with TMTU—UL/CSA Rated to 240 Vac
2
PD D 2 3 M 0225 TFF J
2
Product Series
2 PD = Power Defense

2 Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal

Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
2 D = UL/CSA 2 =2 2 = 2-pole F = 35 kA at 240 V 0015 = 15 A TFF = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole G = 65 kA at 240 V 0020 = 20 A Fixed magnetic J = Line and load terminals
2 K = 85 kA at 240 V
M = 100 kA at 240 V
0025
0030
= 25 A
= 30 A
VFF = 50 °C Fixed thermal /
Fixed magnetic
K
L
= Line only terminals
= Load only terminals
N = 150 kA at 240 V 0035 = 35 A (non UL)
2 P = 200 kA at 240 V 0040
0045
= 40 A
= 45 A
0050 = 50 A
2 0060
0070
= 60 A
= 70 A
0080 = 80 A
2 0090
0100
= 90 A
= 100 A
0110 = 110 A
2 0125
0150
= 125 A
= 150 A
= 175 A
2
0175
0200 = 200 A
0225 = 225 A

2 Molded Case Switches—Globally Rated 1

2 PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/ 2 =2 2 = 2-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0100 = 100 A KNS = Molded Case Switch N = No terminals
CCC 3 = 3-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V 0150 = 150 A J = Line and load terminals
2 4 = 4-pole
G = 18 kA at 600 V
0225 = 225 A K
L
= Line only terminals
= Load only terminals
M = 35 kA at 600 V
2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release Electronic Trip Units (ETU)—Globally Rated
2 PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/ 2 =2 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0060 = 60 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI N = No terminals
CCC 4 = 4-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0100 = 100 A E## 2=PXR 20 J = Line and load terminals
2 (programmable N) K = 50 kA at 480 V
M = 65 kA at 480 V
0150
0225
= 150 A
= 225 A
D## 2=PXR 20D
P## 2=PXR 25
K
L
= Line only terminals
= Load only terminals
N = 85 kA at 480 V
2 P = 100 kA at 480 V

2 F = 14 kA at 600 V
G = 18 kA at 600 V
K = 22 kA at 600 V
2 M = 25 kA at 600 V
N = 25 kA at 600 V
P = 25 kA at 600 V
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release Electronic Trip Units (ETU)—100% UL Rated
2 PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/ 2 =2 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0060 = 60 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI J = Line and load terminals
CCC (100% 4 = 4-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V = 100 A E## 2=PXR 20 W = Optional line and
2
0100
L Rated) K = 50 kA at 480 V 0150 = 150 A D## 2=PXR 20D load terminals
M = 65 kA at 480 V 0225 = 225 A P## 2=PXR 25

2 N = 85 kA at 480 V
P = 100 kA at 480 V

2 F = 14 kA at 600 V
G = 18 kA at 600 V
K = 22 kA at 600 V
2 M = 25 kA at 600 V
N = 25 kA at 600 V
P = 25 kA at 600 V
2
Notes

2 1 Molded case switch may open above 1800 A.

2 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-33 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2)

V4-T2-32 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options—Frame Size 2
2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options
#(1)—Protection Type #(2)—Available Configured Options 2
— Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays Relays
—
—
—
—
Modbus
—
—
ZSI
—
—
Modbus
ZSI
—
ZSI
Modbus
—
Modbus
ZSI
2
PXR ETU LSI LSIG 1 — — — — CAM — CAM CAM CAM
PXR 10 B 2 — N — — — — — — — — 2
PXR 20 — — —
2
E 2 N R M Z C W X
— 3 — R M Z C W X — —
PXR 20D D
PXR 25 P
2
2
3
3
—
—
—
—
M
M
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
D
D
Y
Y
2
2
Description of PXR Configured Options
Relays 2—Form A contacts Modbus 2—Modbus RTU ZSI—Zone Selective Auxiliary Power 2
(rated for 240 Vac, 1 A) directly from breaker Interlocking
● 2 available if Modbus RTU ● Interface: 3 wires ● Includes ability to turn
● Connection included
with all PXR 20, 20D and
2
is not used; 1 available (RTU_D(+), RTU_D(–), ON and OFF 25 trip units
when used in conjunction RTU_GND) ● Interface: 3 wires Note: For PXR 20 units, 2
with Modbus RTU ● Interface: 2 wires (Zin, Zout, Zcomm) wire harness connections for
● Interface: 3 wires (RLY1, (RLY1, RLYC Common) ● No additional modules
auxiliary power not included on 2
RLY2, RLYC Common) E2N styles.
● No additional modules required
● Programmable to indicate required ● Required for 2
breaker conditions ● Available as field-installable CAM—CAM Link Connection communications, relays
● Available as field-installable option if not pre-configured (requires a CAM module per and metering accuracy 2
option if not pre-configured (catalog number breaker) ● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A
(catalog number PDG2XMODRTUREL) 3 ● Interface: 5 wires (refer to ● Interface: 2 wires 2
PDG2XRELAYS) 3 CAM IL for details)
(Aux +24 V, Aux 0 V)
● Communications Adapter
Modules available for
2
Modbus TCP and
PROFIBUS
2
2
Available Continuous Current (lr) Settings on PXR Electronic Trip Units
2
Catalog Number Selection and Maximum Setting (ln)
0060 0100 0150 0225
2
Option Setting 60 A 100 A 150 A 225 A
PXR 10, PXR 20 1 15 A 32 A 50 A 80 A
2
2
3
16 A
20 A
35 A
40 A
60 A
63 A
90 A
100 A
2
4 25 A 50 A 70 A 110 A
2
5 30 A 60 A 80 A 125 A
6 35 A 63 A 90 A 150 A 2
7 40 A 70 A 100 A 160 A
8 45 A 80 A 110 A 175 A 2
9 50 A 90 A 125 A 200 A
10 = ln 60 A 100 A 150 A 225 A 2
PXR 20D, PXR 25 Programmable from minimum to maximum values in 1 A increments.

Notes
2
2
1 All neutral current sensors required for LSIG protection are sold separately.
2 Relays and/or Modbus RTU in PD-2 uses accessory pocket, therefore UVR and shunt trip use is not possible.
3 PD-2 can only be equipped with one field-installable communication option (PDG2XMODRTUREL or PDG2XRELAYS).

2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-33

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 2
2 Catalog numbers shown are for a single side of a three-pole breaker.
2 For two- and four-pole options, replace the X3 with X2 or X4, respectively.
Example: PDG2X3T100 becomes PDG2X2T100 for two-pole

2 Terminal Types

2
2 Collar

Nut
Collar Collar
Screw
Conductor

2
Clip Collar

Conductor
Washer Washer Washer
Conductor Conductor
Conductor Screw
Screw Extrusion Screw Wire Clamp

2 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA225 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3TA100 PDG2X3TA225K PDG2X3TA2256W PDG2X3TA150RF PDG2X3T20 PDG2X3TS225

PDG2X3T150 PDG2X3TA150 PDG2X3TA2253W PDG2X3TA225RF
2 PDG2X3T225

Note: Pictures are for reference only.

2 Terminals

2 Maximum
Breaker Breaker Terminal Wire Wire
Number of AWG/kcmil
Conductors Range per
Metric (mm2)
Range per 3-Pole Included
Digit 14 Designation
Line and Line Load Standard

2
Amperes Frame 1 Body Type Type Class per Phase Conductor Conductor Catalog Number Accessories Load Only Only on Amperes
Standard Terminals

2 100 15–100 Steel Cu/Al B, C 1 14–1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG2X3T100 2 J K L 15–100

225 60–225 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 4–4/0 21.2 —107 PDG2X3TA225 3 J K L 110–225
2 Alternate Terminals
50 15–50 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 14–4 2.08–21.2 PDG2X3TA50 T U V 15–50
2 100 60–100 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 14–1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG2X3TA100 T U V 60–100

2 150
225
60–150
175–225
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
B, C
B, C
1
1
14–4/0
6–300
2.08–107
13.3–152
PDG2X3TA150
PDG2X3TA225K 3 Terminal shield
T
T
U
U
V
V
110–150
175–225

2 Non-standard Terminals
100 15–100 Steel Cu/Al B, C 1 14–1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG2X3T100 2 W Y Z 15–100
2 150 60–150 Stainless Cu B, C 1 4–4/0 21.2 —107 PDG2X3T150 W Y Z 110–150
Steel
2 225 60–225 Copper Cu B, C 1 4–4/0 21.2 —107 PDG2X3T225 W Y Z 175–225
Multi-wire Terminals
2 225 150–225 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 14–6 2.08–13.3 PDG2X3TA2256W — — G 15–225

2 225 150–225 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 14–2 2.08–33.6 PDG2X3TA2253W — — H 15–225

Rear Fed Terminals 4

2 150 60–150 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 14–4/0 2.08–107 PDG2X3TA150RF Terminal shield — — — 15–150
225 60–225 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 6–300 13.3–152 PDG2X3TA225RF Terminal shield — — — 175–225
2 Box Terminal
20 15–20 Steel Cu/Al B, C 1 14–10 2.08–5.26 — — — 15–20
2
PDG2X3T20
Rear Connectors 4

2 225 — — — — — — — PDG2X3T225RC R — — 15–25

End Cap Kits/Screw Terminals
2 225 — — — — — — — PDG2X3TS225 S D E 15–25

2 Note: Wire capacity is based on standard imperial wire sizes; metric sizes provided in table
are a direct conversion to demonstrate maximum capacity, not to denote metric wire sizes.
Control Wire Tabs
Compatible Package Catalog
Notes
2 1 The “Breaker Frame” column provides information on the ampere ratings for which the terminal may be used (field installation);
Terminals
PDG2X3T100
Qty.
12
Number
FCWTK
in some cases the range is limited by proper fit of the terminal onto the breaker conductor.
PDG2X3T150
2 The column “Standard on Amperes” provides information on what terminal is used during factory configuration
per Digit 14 of the breaker catalog number. The two may not match. PDG2X3TA225 12 FCWTK225
2 Factory standard terminals and non-aluminum terminals for 100 A and below are the same terminals.

2 3 PDF2 225 A breakers with Digit 14 designation of “J” are equipped with PDG2X3TA225K terminals.

PDF2 150 A breakers with Digit 14 designation of “J” are equipped with PDG2X3TA225 terminals.
2 4 Breaker loses UL when fitted with rear-fed terminals or rear connectors.

V4-T2-34 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Accessories
2
Internal Accessory Configurations—Frame Size 2
2
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 12 2
3-Pole Circuit Breakers 4-Pole Circuit Breakers
2
2
Tripping Tripping
2
Accessory Alarm (2 Spaces) Aux (2 Spaces) Accessory Alarm (2 Spaces) Aux (4 Spaces)
Options Options Options Options Options Options 2
None None None None None None
Shunt Trip 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space) Shunt Trip 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space) 2
1NC (1 space)
1NO/1NC (2 spaces)
1NC (1 space)
1NO/1NC (2 spaces)
1NC (1 space)
1NO/1NC (2 spaces)
1NC (1 space)
1NO/1NC (2 spaces)
2
2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) 2
UVR 2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces) UVR 2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces)
2CO (4 spaces) 2
4NO (4 spaces)
4NC (4 spaces)
2
2
Electronic Circuit Breakers
3-Pole Circuit Breakers 4-Pole Circuit Breakers
2
2
2
Tripping
Accessory Alarm Aux
Tripping
Accessory Alarm Aux (2 Spaces)
2
Options
None
Options
None
Options
1NO/1NC 3
Options
None
Options
None
Options
1NO/1NC 3
2
Shunt Trip Shunt Trip 1NO/1NC 3 + 1NO (1 space) 2
1NO/1NC 3 + 1NC (1 space)
1NO/1NC 3 + 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 2
1NO/1NC 3 + 2NO (2 spaces)
UVR UVR 1NO/1NC 3 + 2NC (2 spaces)
2
2
2
Bell alarm Bell alarm
(1NO/1NC–Form C) (1NO/1NC–Form C)
2
Qty: 1 Programmable relay Qty: 1 Programmable relay
with Modbus RTU with Modbus RTU
2
Qty: 2 Programmable relays Qty: 2 Programmable relays

Notes 2
1 Two-pole PD-2 breakers have an accessory pocket compatible with indicating accessory options only.
2 Single-pole PD-2 breakers may be equipped with a Form C bell alarm as a factory installation only. Use “BC” as a suffix code in digits 15–16.
3 Qty: 1 1NO/1NC (Form C) auxiliary contact is automatically factory installed for all Frame 2 Power Defense breakers with electronic trip units.
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-35

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Blocks—Frame Size 2

2 Power Defense breakers Power Defense breakers Power Defense alarm and Frame 2 breakers with
have designated positions for have secondary covers for auxiliary switches are electronic trip units are
2 alarm and auxiliary switches ease of field installation of available in contact blocks, in automatically configured with
in the right-pole accessory accessories, including alarm Form A (NO), Form B (NC) a factory-installed Form C
2 cavity. For Frame 2, the two and auxiliary switches. and Form C (NO-NC) types. auxiliary contact block
left-most positions are used Form A and Form B contacts because the right-pole
2 for alarm switches, and the
two right-most locations are
take one position in the
breaker accessory cavity, and
accessory cavity is not
available for field
2 used for auxiliary switches. Form C contacts take two
positions in the cavity.
modification. Trip position can
also be communicated via
Identical contact blocks are communications and the PXR
2 used for the alarm and programmable relays.
auxiliary switch functions.
2
Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXAA PDGXAB PDGXAC

2 Type Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC

2
Screw Terminal Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXXA PDGXXB PDGXXA + PDGXXB
Type Form A / NO Form B / NC For NO-NC, use two separate
2 contact blocks

2
Push-In Clamp Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXUA PDGXUB PDGXUC
Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC
2
Type

2 Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m) Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality

2 Catalog Number PDGXDA PDGXDB PDGXDC

Type Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC
2
2 Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality—Bulk Packs
Catalog Number Type Termination Bulk Pack Quantity 1
2 PDGXXA-BP20 Form A / NO Screw Terminal 20

2 PDGXXB-BP20 Form B / NC Screw Terminal 20

PDGXUA-BP20 Form A / NO Push-in Clamp 20

2 PDGXUB-BP20 Form B / NC Push-in Clamp 20

PDGXUC-BP10 Form C / NO-NC Push-in Clamp 10
2
2 Alarm Switch for Use with PXR Electronic Trip Units 2
Catalog Number PDG2XALMBC PDG2XALMEC
2 Type Form C / NO-NC Form C / NO-NC

2 Termination 0.75 m pigtail 3.0 m pigtail

Notes
2 1 Order in multiples of quantity listed to receive bulk pack. (ex. Order qty 20 PDGXXA-BP20 to receive 1 bulk pack).
2 Frame 2 breakers with electronic trip units do not allow access to the right accessory pocket

2 but are automatically configured with a factory installed Form C / NO-NC auxiliary switch.
These alarm switches can be field or factory installed in the left accessory pocket in place of a shunt trip or UVR.

2
2

V4-T2-36 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Factory Installation of Alarm and Auxiliary Switches—Frame Size 2
Alarm and auxiliary switches ● Switches may be ● If no other accessories are Note: Though factory 2
are plug-and-play accessories requested for alarm only, selected, use NNNN for configuration options are limited,
designed to be field auxiliary only or a the final 4 digits of the combinations of auxiliary
switches and alarms using
2
installable. However, Eaton combination of the two catalog number
also offers installation service ● Digit 16 denotes the ● Frame 2 breakers with
differing terminals and contact
block styles are still available 2
in our factories. number and type (NO, NC) electronic trip units do not through field installation. Please
Breaker catalog numbers of switches installed allow access to the right
accessory pocket but are
see full auxiliary switch and alarm
catalog numbers to order.
2
with alarm and auxiliary ● For Eaton factory
switch combinations require
a complete 20-digit catalog
installation, the same type
of terminals (i.e. all pigtail
automatically configured
with a factory installed
2
1NO/1NC auxiliary switch.
number, adding the alarm and
auxiliary switch functionality
0.75 m, all screw, etc.) and
same style of contact block A bell alarm accessory is 2
in digits 15–16 and adhering (i.e., all 1NO/1NC, all 2NC, available for separate
to the following conditions etc.) must be used in a installation in the left 2
and tables. factory configuration accessory pocket.
● Digit 15 denotes the type 2
of accessory(-ies) installed
and the terminal types 2
Pigtails—29 in / 0.75 m (A, B, C) 2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
Alarm Switch None NN AA AB AC AD AE A1 A2 A3 2
1NO BA CA — — — — — — —
1NC BB — CB — — — — — — 2
1NO/1NC 1 BC — — CC — — C1 — —
2NO BD — — — CD — — C2 — 2
BE — — — — CE — — C3
2
2NC

Screw Terminals (X, Y, Z) 2

Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC
Four-Pole
2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
2
Alarm Switch None NN XA XB XC XD XE X1 X2 X3 2
1NO YA ZA — — — — — — —
1NC YB — ZB — — — — — — 2
1NO/1NC YC — — ZC — — Z1 — —
2NO YD — — — ZD — — Z2 — 2
2NC YE — — — — ZE — — Z3
2
Push-In Clamps (U, V, W)
2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC
Four-Pole
2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
2
Alarm Switch None NN UA UB UC UD UE U1 U2 U3
2
1NO VA WA — — — — — — —
1NC VB — WB — — — — — — 2
1NO/1NC VC — — WC — — W1 — —
2NO VD — — — WD — — W2 — 2
2NC VE — — — — WE — — W3

Note
2
2
1 Single-pole breakers can be equipped with a 1NO/1NC alarm switch that must be factory installed; use suffix BC in digits 15–16.

No other internal accessories are available for single-pole breakers.

2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-37

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Pigtails—118 in / 3.0 m (D, E, F)

2 Auxiliary Switch

2
Three-Pole Four-Pole
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
NN DA DB DC DD DE D1 D2 D3
2
Alarm Switch None
1NO EA FA — — — — — — —

2 1NC
1NO/1NC
EB
EC
—
—
FB
—
—
FC
—
—
—
—
—
F1
—
—
—
—

2 2NO ED — — — FD — — F2 —
2NC EE — — — — FE — — F3
2
2 Factory Installation of Alarm Switch for Use with PXR Electronic Trip Units
Pigtails—29 in / 0.75 m Pigtails—118 in / 3.0 m
2 Auxiliary Switch Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole Three-Pole
2 None 1NO/1NC None 1NO/1NC
Auxiliary switch None NN 1 AC 1 Alarm switch None NN 1 DC
2 1NO/1NC — CC 1NO/1NC — FC

2
Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 2
2 Power Defense breakers have designated positions for shunt trips and undervoltage releases
(UVRs) in the left pole accessory cavity. Each breaker has space for one tripping accessory only.
2 Power Defense breaker have secondary covers for ease of field installation of tripping accessories.
2 Shunt Trips
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
2 12 Vdc PDG2XST12DCT PDG2XST12DCS PDG2XST12DCR

2 48 Vdc PDG2XST48DCT PDG2XST48DCS PDG2XST48DCR

60 Vdc PDG2XST60DCT PDG2XST60DCS PDG2XST60DCR

2 24 Vac/Vdc PDG2XST24ACDCT PDG2XST24ACDCS PDG2XST24ACDCR

110-130 Vac/125 Vdc PDG2XST130ACDCT PDG2XST130ACDCS PDG2XST130ACDCR
2 200-240 Vac/250 Vdc PDG2XST250ACDCT PDG2XST250ACDCS PDG2XST250ACDCR
380-440 Vac
2
PDG2XST440ACT PDG2XST440ACS PDG2XST440ACR
480-525 Vac PDG2XST525ACT PDG2XST525ACS PDG2XST525ACR

2 600 Vac PDG2XST600ACT PDG2XST600ACS PDG2XST600ACR

2 Undervoltage Releases (UVRs)

Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
2 12 Vdc PDG2XUV12DCV PDG2XUV12DCU PDG2XUV12DCW
24 Vdc
2
PDG2XUV24DCV PDG2XUV24DCU PDG2XUV24DCW
48 Vdc PDG2XUV48DCV PDG2XUV48DCU PDG2XUV48DCW

2 60 Vdc PDG2XUV60DCV PDG2XUV60DCU PDG2XUV60DCW

125 Vdc PDG2XUV125DCV PDG2XUV125DCU PDG2XUV125DCW
2 250 Vdc PDG2XUV250DCV PDG2XUV250DCU PDG2XUV250DCW
24 Vac PDG2XUV24ACV PDG2XUV24ACU PDG2XUV24ACW
2 130 Vac PDG2XUV130ACV PDG2XUV130ACU PDG2XUV130ACW
240 Vac
2 440 Vac
PDG2XUV240ACV
PDG2XUV440ACV
PDG2XUV240ACU
PDG2XUV440ACU
PDG2XUV240ACW
PDG2XUV440ACW

2 525 Vac PDG2XUV525ACV PDG2XUV525ACU PDG2XUV525ACW

600 Vac PDG2XUV600ACV PDG2XUV600ACU PDG2XUV600ACW
2 Note
1 1NO/1NC (AC) is always included in breakers with PXR trip units;

2 no selection or selection of NN in Digits 15–16 will result in AC.

V4-T2-38 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Factory Installed Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 2
Shunt trips and under voltage Breaker catalog numbers ● Digit 17 denotes the type ● Each breaker has space for 2
releases (UVRs) are plug-and- with shunt trips or UVRs of accessory installed and one shunt trip or UVR
play accessories designed to require a complete 20-digit the terminal type tripping accessory only 2
be field installable. However, catalog number, adding ● Digit 18 denotes the
Eaton also offers the service the tripping accessory voltage of the accessory 2
of installation in our factories. functionality in digits 17 and ● If no accessories are
18 and adhering to the
following conditions and
selected, use NNNN for
the final 4 digits of the
2
tables. catalog number
2
Shunt Trips
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
2
12 Vdc TH SH RH 2
48 Vdc TJ SJ RJ
60 Vdc TK SK RK 2
24 Vac/Vdc TN SN RN
110–130 Vac/125 Vdc TP SP RP
2
200–240 Vac/250 Vdc TR SR RR
2
380–440 Vac TC SC RC
480–525 Vac TD SD RD 2
600 Vac TE SE RE
2
Undervoltage Releases (UVRs) 2
2
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
12 Vdc VH UH WH
24 Vdc VG UG WG 2
48 Vdc VJ UJ WJ
60 Vdc VK UK WK 2
125 Vdc VL UL WL
250 Vdc VM UM WM
2
24 Vac
130 Vac
VF
VA
UF
UA
WF
WA
2
240 Vac VB UB WB 2
440 Vac VC UC WC
525 Vac VD UD WD 2
600 Vac VE UE WE
2
Note: Use suffix US for 18 Vdc when using Time Delay UVR.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-39

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Handle Mechanisms—Frame Size 2

2
Direct Rotary Handle Mechanism 1
2 NEMA 1/12 Factory Installed
Description Catalog Number Digits 19–20
2 Standard lockable handle and mechanism PDG2XHMCS HA
Standard lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock PDG2XHMCSN HB
2 Standard lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock PDG2XHMCSP HC

2 Standard lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG2XHMCSNP HE
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism PDG2XHMCE H1

2 Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock PDG2XHMCEN H2

Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock PDG2XHMCEP H3
2 Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG2XHMCENP H5

2
Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism 1
2 NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X Factory Installed
Description Catalog Number Digits 19–20
2 PDG2XHMDS Standard lockable handle and mechanism 2 PDG2XHMDS DA

2 Standard lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock DC

2 PDG2XHMDSP
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism 2 PDG2XHMDE D1

2 Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock 2 PDG2XHMDEP D3

12 in (307 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG12XHMS307 —
2 20 in (507 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG12XHMS507 —
Standard NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG12XHM79S —
2 Emergency NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG12XHM79E —

2
Metal Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism 1
2 NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X
Description Catalog Number
2 Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 6-inch shaft PDG2XHMDS06MH
Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 12-inch shaft PDG2XHMDS12MH
2 Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 24-inch shaft PDG2XHMDS24MH

2 Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 6-inch shaft

Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 12-inch shaft
PDG2XHMDE06MH
PDG2XHMDE12MH

2 Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 24-inch shaft PDG2XHMDE24MH

2 Flex Shaft Handle Mechanism

2 Metal Handle,
NEMA 1/3R/12
High Performance Handle,
NEMA 1/3R/12
Metal Handle,
NEMA 4/4X
High Performance Handle,
NEMA 4/4X
Cable Length (ft) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 2 PDG2XFS02 PDG2XFS02HP PDG2XFS02X PDG2XFS02HPX
3
2
PDG2XFS03 PDG2XFS03HP PDG2XFS03X PDG2XFS03HPX
4 PDG2XFS04 PDG2XFS04HP PDG2XFS04X PDG2XFS04HPX

2 5 PDG2XFS05 PDG2XFS05HP PDG2XFS05X PDG2XFS05HPX

6 PDG2XFS06 PDG2XFS06HP PDG2XFS06X PDG2XFS06HPX
2 7 PDG2XFS07 PDG2XFS07HP PDG2XFS07X PDG2XFS07HPX
8 PDG2XFS08 PDG2XFS08HP PDG2XFS08X PDG2XFS08HPX
2 9 PDG2XFS09 PDG2XFS09HP PDG2XFS09X PDG2XFS09HPX
10
2 PDG2XFS10 PDG2XFS10HP PDG2XFS10X PDG2XFS10HPX

Notes
2 1 Standard handles are black and gray; Emergency handles are red and yellow.
2 Handle mechanism shaft sold separately.

V4-T2-40 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Accessories—Frame Size 2 Power Defense Breaker Enclosures
Fit Type PD2 with PXR PD2 with Thermal-Magnetic
2
External Accessories
Factory
24 Vdc PDG2XROP24DC PDG2XROPT24DC
2
Installed 48–60 Vdc PDG2XROP60DC PDG2XROPT60DC
Description Fit Type Catalog Number Digits 19–20
125 Vdc PDG2XROP125DC PDG2XROPT125DC 2
Padlockable hasp Top PDG2XPLKT L4
250 Vdc PDG2XROP250DC PDG2XROPT250DC
Left side PDG2XPLKL L5
110–130 Vac PDG2XROP130AC PDG2XROPT130AC 2
Right side PDG2XPLKR L6
Snap on PDG2XPLKSNAP L0
200–240 Vac
380–440 Vac
PDG2XROP240AC
PDG2XROP440AC
PDG2XROPT240AC
PDG2XROPT440AC
2
Padlockable hasp OFF only Top L1
Left side
PDG2XPLKTOFF
PDG2XPLKLOFF L2
2
Base Mounting Hardware
Right side PDG2XPLKROFF L3 Description Catalog Number 2
Padlockable handle block On handle PDG2XPHB — Single-pole metric 4218B80G09
Kirk lock provision 1 Top PDG2XKLKPTFF L7 Two-pole metric 4218B80G11 2
Walking beam interlock Two-, three-, and PDG2XWBI234P —
23 four-pole
Three-, four-pole metric
Single-pole English
BMH1M
624B375G01
2
Plug-in breaker base only Three-pole PDG2XPIBB3P225A —
Four-pole PDG2XPIBB4P225A —
Two-pole English 4218B80G01 2
Three-, four-pole English BMH1
Plug-in breaker parts kit Three-pole —
Four-pole
PDG2XPIBK3P225A
PDG2XPIBK4P225A — Note: Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or 2
molded case switch.
Terminal covers Two-pole PDG2XTC2P — 2
Three-pole PDG2XTC3P —
Four-pole PDG2XTC4P — Dimensions and Weights—Frame Size 2 2
Interphase barriers Single-pole PDG2XIB —
Three-pole PDG2XIB3P —
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Number

Finger protection
Four-pole
Three-pole
PDG2XIB4P —
—
of Poles Width Height Depth
2
PDG2XFP3P 1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.50 (88.9)
Four-pole PDG2XFP4P — 2 2.75 (69.9) 6.00 (152.4) 3.50 (88.9) 2
60–100 A residual Cable type PDG2XNCTD0100 — 3 4.12 (104.6) 6.00 (152.4) 3.50 (88.9)
current neutral sensor
4 5.49 (139.5) 6.00 (152.4) 3.50 (88.9) 2
150–225 A residual current Cable type PDG2XNCTD0225 —
neutral sensor
Approximate Shipping Weight in lb (kg) 2
60–100 A residual Busbar type PDG2XNCTB0100 —
current neutral sensor
150–225 A residual current Busbar type PDG2XNCTB0225 —
Breaker Type
PDG2 225 A
1-Pole
2.00 (0.91)
2-Pole
3.00 (1.36)
3-Pole
4.21 (1.82)
4-Pole
5.69 (2.46)
2
neutral sensor
Service entrance Three-pole PRLSEBPD2 —
Notes 2
1 Provision only. For use with Type FF Kirk keylock (sold separately).
barrier kit
Bolt projection in withdrawn position is 0 in (0 mm).
2 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant
2
(factory suffix WB).
3 Requires two breakers. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-41

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 3
Description Page
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A)
V4-T2-29

2 Catalog Number / Product Selection . . . . . .

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-43
V4-T2-51

2 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-56
V4-T2-57
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
2 Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . . V4-T2-98
High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
2 Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . .
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers .
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-107
2 Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112
Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
2 Fused Current-Limiting Module . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . . V4-T2-116
2 Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-140
Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-142
2 Special Modification Ordering and Pricing. . . . . . V4-T2-146

2
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 3

2 Product Description
Frame Size 3 covers a range
Application Description
Frame Size 3 can be used
Features and Benefits
Frame Size 3 breakers are
Standards and Certifications
Power Defense breakers are
2 of 45 A through 600 A with
a complete offering of
to meet a wide range of
circuit protection and power
modular and available as
complete breakers from
designed and tested to meet
stringent requirements for:
trip units, including PXR distribution needs, including the factory, or as modular
2 UL
●

electronic trip units and fixed- ground fault protection, components, including ● CSA
adjustable thermal-magnetic current-limiting, 100% frames, trip units,
2 trip units. PD-3 is available UL ratings, and high accessories and terminals ● IEC (CE)
CB (CCC)
in two versions, with 400 A instantaneous settings to provide flexibility for ●

2 and 600 A constructions to

optimize performance in
for selective coordination.
PXR trip units in PD-3 provide
customers. PXR trip units
are available with advanced
multiple applications. all levels of protection, features to provide
2 including energy metering customers unparalleled
with multiple communication situational awareness of their
2 schemes, breaker health electrical system.
indication, and arc flash
2 reduction options.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-42 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Catalog Number / Product Selection
2
Power Defense—Frame Size 3 (45–600 A)
Frame Size 3 covers a range of 45 A through 600 A using electronic trip units, and 100 A through 2
600 A using thermal-magnetic trip units. It is available in configurations of two-, three- and
four-pole, with the two-pole being in the same physical size of a three-pole variant. Frame 3 has 2
two unique constructions: one for 400 A and a second one for 600 A. The 600 A construction
provides a unique capability to be used at 400 A and below in critical coordination applications
where a high level fixed instantaneous is required. This is accomplished by using a letter H in the
2
7th digit of the catalog number, as shown below.
2
Interrupting Ratings
Catalog Designator F G K M1 N1 P1 2
UL/CSA kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms
2
240 Vac 35 65 85 100 150 200
480 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100 2
600 Vac 14 18 25 35 50 65
250 Vdc 23 10 / 22 10 / 22 10 / 22 22 / 42 22 / 42 22 / 42 2
2
IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
240 Vac 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100 150 100 200 150
380–415 Vac 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 53 70 70 100 70
2
440 Vac 25 20 30 22.5 35 35 50 40 70 50 100 50
480 Vac 20 20 25 20 35 22.5 50 30 65 40 85 40 2
525 Vac 18 5 20 7.5 25 10 30 15 35 25 40 25
660–690 Vac — — 8 4 10 5 15 7.5 20 10 20 10 2
250 Vdc 10 / 22 10 / 22 10 / 22 10 / 22 10 / 22 10 / 22 22 / 42 22 / 42 22 / 42 22 / 42 22 / 42 22 / 42
2
23

Notes
1 UL current-limiting. M interrupting rating only current limiting for the 400 A construction breakers.
2 DC ratings available in thermal-magnetic breakers only. 250 Vdc is achieved using two poles in series.
2
2
3 First rating listed is for 400 A frame, second rating is for 600 A frame.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-43

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

2 This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.
2
Molded Case Circuit Breaker with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units (TMTU)—Globally Rated
2
PD G 3 3 M 0400 TFA J
2
Product Series
2 PD = Power Defense

2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal

2 Standards
G = UL/CSA/IEC/
Size
3 =3 2
Options
= 2-pole 1
Ratings
F = 25 kA at 480 V
Current Ratings
0100 = 100 A 2
Type Options
TFA = Fixed thermal / N
Options
= No terminals
CCC 3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A 2 Adjustable magnetic J = Line and load terminals
2 4
0
= 4-pole (100% N)
= 4-pole (0% N)
K = 50 kA at 480 V
M = 65 kA at 480 V
0150 = 150 A
0175 = 175 A
VFA = 50 °C Fixed thermal /
Adjustable magnetic
K
L
= Line only terminals
= Load only terminals
= 4-pole (60% N) N = 85 kA at 480 V 0200 = 200 A (non UL)
2
6
P = 100 kA at 480 V 0225 = 225 A
0250 = 250 A
F = 14 kA at 600 V H250 = 250 A 3
2 G = 18 kA at 600 V 0300 = 300 A
K = 25 kA at 600 V H300 = 300 A 3

2 M = 35 kA at 600 V
N = 50 kA at 600 V
0350 = 350 A
H350 = 350 A 3
P = 65 kA at 600 V 0400 = 400 A
2 H400 = 400 A 3
0500 = 500 A
0600 = 600 A
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with TMTU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 2 = 2-pole 1 F = 25 kA at 480 V H250 = 250 A 3 TFA = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
2 (100% UL Rated) 3
4
= 3-pole
= 4-pole (100% N)
G = 35 kA at 480 V
K = 50 kA at 480 V
H300
H350
= 300 A 3
= 350 A 3
Adjustable magnetic J
K
= Line and load terminals
= Line only terminals
0 = 4-pole (0% N) M = 65 kA at 480 V H400 = 400 A 3 L = Load only terminals
2 6 = 4-pole (60% N)
F = 14 kA at 600 V
0500
0600
= 500 A
= 600 A
G = 18 kA at 600 V
2 K = 25 kA at 600 V
M = 35 kA at 600 V

2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with TMTU—UL/CSA Rated to 240 Vac
2
PD D = UL/CSA 3 =3 2 = 2-pole 1 F = 35 kA at 240 V 0100 = 100 A TFA = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
2 3 = 3-pole G = 65 kA at 240 V
K = 85 kA at 240 V
0125
0150
= 125 A
= 150 A
Adjustable magnetic
VFA = 50 °C Fixed thermal /
J
K
= Line and load terminals
= Line only terminals
M = 100 kA at 240 V 0175 = 175 A Adjustable magnetic L = Load only terminals
2 N = 150 kA at 240 V
P = 200 kA at 240 V
0200
0225
= 200 A
= 225 A
(non UL)

0250 = 250 A
2 0300
0350
= 300 A
= 350 A
0400 = 400 A
2 0500
0600
= 500 A
= 600 A

2
Molded Case Switches 4—Globally Rated
2
PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/ 3 =3 3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0400 = 400 A KNS = Molded case switch N = No terminals
2 CCC 4 = 4-pole (100% N) M = 65 kA at 480 V 0600 = 600 A J
K
= Line and load terminals
= Line only terminals
G = 18 kA at 600 V L = Load only terminals
2 M = 35 kA at 600 V

2 Notes
1 All PD-3 two-pole breakers are physically the same size as a three-pole frame with the outer poles used for electrical connections.
2 Not available in four-pole 60% neutral protection.

2 3 High override (600 A frame).

4 Molded case switches may open above 4000 A for the 400 A frame, and above 6300 A for the 600 A frame.

V4-T2-44 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETU)
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units. 2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated
2
PD G 3 3 M 0400 P2M J
2
2
Product Series
PD = Power Defense

2
Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Pole
Options
Interrupting
Ratings
Continuous
Current Ratings
Trip Unit
Type Options
Standard Terminal
Options 2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/ 3 =3 2 = 2-pole 1 F = 25 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI N = No terminals
CCC 3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
G = 35 kA at 480 V
K = 50 kA at 480 V
0250 = 250 A
0400 = 400 A
E## 2=PXR 20
D## 2=PXR 20D
J
K
= Line and load terminals
= Line only terminals
2
(programmable N) M = 65 kA at 480 V 0600 = 600 A P## 2=PXR 25 = Load only terminals
2
L
N = 85 kA at 480 V H250 = 250 A High Override
P = 100 kA at 480 V (600 A Frame)
H400 = 400 A High Override
F = 14 kA at 600 V (600 A Frame) 2
G = 18 kA at 600 V
K = 25 kA at 600 V
M = 35 kA at 600 V 2
N = 50 kA at 600 V
P = 65 kA at 600 V 2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI N = No terminals 2
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0250 = 250 A E## 2=PXR 20 J = Line and load terminals
(programmable N) K = 50 kA at 480 V
M = 65 kA at 480 V
0400
0600
= 400 A
= 600 A
D## 2=PXR 20D
P## 2=PXR 25
K
L
= Line only terminals
= Load only terminals
2
H250 = 250 A High Override
F = 14 kA at 600 V
G = 18 kA at 600 V
(600 A Frame)
H400 = 400 A High Override
2
K = 25 kA at 600 V (600 A Frame)
M = 35 kA at 600 V 2
Notes
1 All PD-3 two-pole breakers are physically the same size as a three-pole frame with the outer poles used for electrical connections. 2
2 See PXR Trip Unit Options table on Page V4-T2-48 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).

2
(1) (2)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-45

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Globally Rated Frame Only

2 PD-3 thermal-magnetic and electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units, terminals and accessories for
field configuration of a final breaker. Each Frame Only device is marked with interrupting ratings and a maximum continuous current
2 rating; each trip unit is also marked with a maximum continuous current rating, which must not exceed that of the frame. Additionally,
100% UL Rated frames are marked as such on the Frame Only device.
2 Frame Only—Globally Rated

2 PD G 3 3 M 0400 FNN N
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2 Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal
Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
2 G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 2 = 2-pole 1
3 = 3-pole
F = 25 kA at 480 V
G = 35 kA at 480 V
0400 = 400 A
0600 = 600 A
FNN = Frame only N = No terminals

4 = 4-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V
2 M = 65 kA at 480 V
N = 85 kA at 480 V
2 P = 100 kA at 480 V

F = 14 kA at 600 V
2 G = 18 kA at 600 V
K = 25 kA at 600 V
M = 35 kA at 600 V
2 N = 50 kA at 600 V
P = 65 kA at 600 V

2
Frame Only—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0400 = 400 A FNN = Frame only N = No terminals
2 (100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V
K = 50 kA at 480 V
0600 = 600 A

M = 65 kA at 480 V
2 F = 14 kA at 600 V
G = 18 kA at 600 V
2 K = 25 kA at 600 V
M = 35 kA at 600 V

2 Note
1 All PD-3 two-pole breakers are physically the same size as a three-pole frame with the outer poles used for electrical connections.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-46 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Trip Units
PD-3 thermal-magnetic and electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units, 2
terminals and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker. The 400 A frame must use trip units
of ratings 0100–0400, while the 600 A frame must use trip units of ratings 0500, 0600 or designated 2
by H, such as H250. Additionally, for two-pole breakers using electronic trip units, three-pole trip units
are used. PDG designated trip units are for use with PDG and PDF breaker frames. The 100% rating 2
for PDF (100% UL Rated) is marked on the frame, not the trip unit.

Trip Units Only

2
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units. 2
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units 2
PD G 3 X TFA 3 0600 2
Product Series 2
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Separator
Digit
Trip Unit
Type Options
Pole
Options
Continuous
Current Ratings
2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 X = Accessory TFA = Fixed Thermal /
Adjustable Magnetic
2
3
= 2-pole
= 3-pole
0100
0125
= 100 A 1
= 125 A 1 2
VFA = 50 °C Fixed Thermal / 4 = 4-pole (100% N) 0150 = 150 A
Adjustable Magnetic
(non UL)
0
6
= 4-pole (0% N)
= 4-pole (60% N)
0175
0200
= 175 A
= 200 A 2
0225 = 225 A
0250
0300
= 250 A
= 300 A
2
0350 = 350 A
0400
0500
= 400 A
= 500 A
2
0600 = 600 A
H250 = 250 A High Override
(600 A Frame)
2
= 300 A High Override
2
H300
(600 A Frame)
H350 = 350 A High Override
(600 A Frame)
H400 = 400 A High Override 2
(600 A Frame)
2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units

Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units 2

PD G 3 X PXR 3 0600 E2N 2
Product Series
2
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/ Frame Separator Trip Unit Pole Continuous Trip Unit 2
Standards Size Digit Type Designator Options Current Ratings Type and Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 X = Accessory PXR = Power Xpert Release
Trip Unit
3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
0125
0250
= 125 A
= 250 A
B2N = PXR 10 LSI
E## 2=PXR 20
2
(programmable N) 0400 = 400 A D## 2=PXR 20D
0600
H250
= 600 A
= 250 A High Override
P## 2=PXR 25 2
(for use in 600 A Frame)
H400 = 400 A High Override
(for use in 600 A Frame)
2
Notes
1 Not available in four-pole 60% neutral protection.
2
2 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-48 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2)
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-47

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options—Frame Size 3

2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options
2 #(1)—Protection Type #(2)—Available Configured Options
LSI with LSIG with
2 Arcflash
Reduction
Arcflash
Reduction
—
—
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
—
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
Modbus
Maintenance Maintenance — — — ZSI — ZSI ZSI — ZSI
2 PXR ETU LSI LSIG 1 System System — — — — CAM — CAM CAM CAM
PXR 10 B 2 — — — N — — — — — — — —
2 PXR 20 E 2 — — — N R M Z C W X — —
— 3 4 5 — R M Z C W X — —
2 PXR 20D D 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
PXR 25 — — — — —
2
P 2 3 4 5 M W D Y

Descriptions of PXR Configured ZSI—Zone Selective Arcflash Reduction Auxiliary Power

2 Options Interlocking Maintenance System, ● Connection included with
Relays—2 Form A contacts ● Interface: 3 wires or Maintenance Mode all PXR 20, 20D, and 25
2 (rated for 240 Vac, 1 A) (Zin, Zout, Zcomm) ● Available as trip unit trip units
● Interface: 3 wires (ALM1, ● Includes ability to turn Protection Type 4 or 5 Note: For PXR 20 units,
2 ALM2, ALM Common) ON and OFF, and ● Interface: Switch and LED wire harness connections for
auxiliary power not included on
● Programmable to indicate indicate signals on face of trip unit (self-
2 powered) and two wires E2N styles.
breaker conditions
CAM—CAM Link connection for remote switch enable
Modbus—Modbus RTU (requires a CAM module per ● Required for
2 directly from breaker breaker) ●
option (24 Vdc required)
A programmable relay will
communications, relays,
● Interface: 5 wires (refer to and metering accuracy
● Interface: 3 wires (MODBA,
2
be factory defaulted to
MODBB, MODBG) CAM IL for details) ● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A
remote indication of
● No additional modules ● Communications Adapter Arcflash Reduction ● Interface: 2 wires
2 required Modules available for Maintenance System Aux +24 V, Aux 0 V)
Modbus TCP and PROFIBUS
2
Available Continuous Current (lr) Settings on PXR Electronic Trip Units
2 Catalog Number Selection and Maximum Setting (ln)
0125 0250/H250 0400/H400 0600
2 Option Setting 125 A 250 A 400 A 600 A
PXR 10, PXR 20 1 45 A 90 A 160 A 250 A
2 2 50 A 100 A 175 A 275 A
3 60 A 110 A 200 A 300 A
2 4 63 A 125 A 225 A 320 A

2 5
6
70 A
80 A
150 A
160 A
250 A
275 A
350 A
400 A

2 7 90 A 175 A 300 A 450 A

8 100 A 200 A 320 A 500 A

2 9 110 A 225 A 350 A 550 A

10 = ln 125 A 250 A 400 A 600 A
2 PXR 20D, PXR 25 Programmable from minimum to maximum values in 1 A increments.

Note
2 1 All neutral current sensors required for LSIG protection are sold separately.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-48 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 3
Catalog numbers shown are for a single side of a three-pole breaker.
2
For two- and four-pole options, replace the X3 with X2 or X4, respectively.
Example: PDG3X3TA300 becomes PDG3X2TA300 for two-pole. 2
Terminal Types 2
2
2
2
2
PDG3X3TA300 PDG3X3TA400 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3TA400H PDG3X3TA630 PDG3X3TA4003W PDG3X3TA400RF
PDG3X3TA350 PDG3X3TA400SW PDG3X3T402 PDG3X3T400H PDG3X3T630 PDG3X3TA4006W PDG3X3TA400HRF 2
PDG3X3T300 PDG3X3T400 PDG3X3TA401H PDG3X3TA630SW PDG3X3TA6006W PDG3X3TA630RF
PDG3X3T350
PDG3X3TA350SW
PDG3X3TA400CW
PDG3X3T400CW
PDG3X3T401H
PDG3X3TA401HCW
PDG3X3TA630CW
PDG3X3T630CW
PDG3X3TA6006WSW
2
PDG3X3TA401CW PDG3X3T401HCW
PDG3X3TA401
2
Note: Pictures are for reference only.
2
Terminals
Digit 14 Designation Factory 2
Maximum Number of AWG / kcmil Metric (mm2) Config.
Breaker Breaker
Amperes Frame
Terminal
Body Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Class
Conductors Range per
per Phase Conductor
Range per
Conductor
3-Pole
Catalog Number
Included
Accessories
Line and
Load
Line
Only
Load
Only
Ampere
Range
2
Standard Terminals
2
300 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 3–350 26.7–177 PDG3X3TA300 — J K L 100–225
350 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 250–500 127–253 PDG3X3TA350 — J K L 250–350 2
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 3/0–250 85–127 PDG3X3TA400 Terminal shield J K L 400
400 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 500–750 253–380 PDG3X3TA401H Terminal shield J K L H250–H400 2
630 600 Aluminum
Optional Aluminum Terminals
Cu/Al B, C 2 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3TA630 Terminal shield J K L 450–600
2
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 500–750 253–380 PDG3X3TA402 Terminal shield T U V 100–400 2
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2/0–250 (2) or 67.4–127 (2) or PDG3X3TA401 Terminal shield I O F 100–400
2/0–500 (1) 67.4–253 (1)
2
400 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 3–500 26.7–253 PDG3X3TA400H — T U V H250–H400
Optional Copper Terminals 2
300 400 Copper Cu B, C 1 3–350 26.7–177 PDG3X3T300 — W Y Z 100–225
350 400 Copper Cu B, C 1 250–500 127–253 PDG3X3T350 — W Y Z 250–350 2
400
400
400
400
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu/Al
B, C
B, C
2
1
3/0–250
Al: 500–750
85–127
—
PDG3X3T400
PDG3X3T402
Terminal shield
Terminal shield
W
—
Y
—
Z
—
400
—
2
Cu: 500 Only
400 600 Copper Cu B, C 1 3–500 26.7–253 PDG3X3T400H — — — — —
2
400 600 Copper Cu B, C 1 500–750 253–380 PDG3X3T401H Terminal shield W Y Z H250–H400
2
630 600 Copper Cu B, C 2 2–500 33.6 –253 PDG3X3T630 Terminal shield W Y Z 450–600
StrandAble Terminals 2
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 3/0–250 85–127 PDG3X3TA400SW Terminal shield A B C 100–400
D, G, H, 3/0–4/0 85–107 2
I, K, M
350 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 250–500 127–253 PDG3X3TA350SW — — — — — 2
D, G, H, 250–350 127–177
I, K, M 2
630 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3TA630SW Terminal shield A B C H250–600
D, G, H, 2–350 33.6–177
2
I, K, M
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-49

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 3
2 Terminals, continued
2 Maximum Number of AWG / kcmil Metric (mm2)
Digit 14 Designation Factory
Config.

2
Breaker Breaker Terminal Wire Wire Conductors Range per Range per 3-Pole Included Line and Line Load Ampere
Amperes Frame Body Type Type Class per Phase Conductor Conductor Catalog Number Accessories Load Only Only Range
Control Wire Aluminum Terminals
2 400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 3/0–250 85–127 PDG3X3TA400CW Terminal shield 1 2 3 100–400

2 400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2/0–250 (2) or 67.4–127 (2) or PDG3X3TA401CW

2/0–500 (1) 67.4–253 (1)
Terminal shield 4 5 6 100–400

2 400
630
600
600
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
B, C
B, C
1
2
500–750
2–500
253–380
33.6–253
PDG3X3TA401HCW
PDG3X3TA630CW
Terminal shield
Terminal shield
1
1
2
2
3
3
H250–H400
450–600

2 Control Wire Copper Terminals

400 400 Copper Cu B, C 2 3/0–250 85–127 PDG3X3T400CW Terminal shield 7 8 9 100–400
2 400 600 Copper Cu B, C 1 500–750 253–380 PDG3X3T401HCW Terminal shield 7 8 9 H250–H400
630 600 Copper Cu B, C 2 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3T630CW Terminal shield 7 8 9 450–600
2 Multi-wire Terminals

2 400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 12–2/0 3.31–67.4 PDG3X3TA4003W Terminal shield — — H 100–400
400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 14–3 2.08–26.7 PDG3X3TA4006W Terminal shield — — G 100–400

2 600 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 14–1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG3X3TA6006W Terminal shield — — G H250–600
StrandAble Multi-wire Terminals
2 600 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 12–2/0 — PDG3X3TA6006WSW Terminal shield — — — —
D, G, H, 8–1/0
2 I, K, M
Rear-fed Terminals 1
2 400 400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 250–500 127–253 PDG3X3TA400RF Interphase — — — —
barriers
2 400 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3TA400HRF Interphase — — — —
barriers
2 630 600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3TA630RF Interphase — — — —
barriers
2 Rear Connectors 1
400 — Aluminum — — — — — — R — — 100–400
2
PDG3X3T400RC
630 — — — — — — — PDG3X3T600RC — R — — 250–600

2 End Cap Kits/Screw Terminals

400 — — — — — — — PDG3X3TS400 — S D E 100–400

2 600 — — — — — — — PDG3X3TS600 — S D E 250–600

2
Note: Wire capacity is based on standard imperial wire sizes; metric sizes provided in table
are a direct conversion to demonstrate maximum capacity, not to denote metric wire sizes.

2 Control Wire Tabs

Package Catalog
2 Use Qty. Number
100–400 A 12 KCWTK
2
Note

2 1 Breaker loses UL rating when fitted with

rear-fed terminals or rear connectors.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-50 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Accessories Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Power Defense alarm and
Blocks—Frame Size 3 auxiliary switches are 2
Internal Accessory Configurations—Frame Size 3 Power Defense breakers available in contact blocks, in
have designated positions for Form A (NO), Form B (NC), 2
Three-Pole Circuit Breakers alarm and auxiliary switches and Form C (NO-NC) types.
in the right pole accessory
cavity. For Frame 3, the two
Form A and Form B contacts
take one position in the
2
left-most positions are used
for alarm switches, and the
breaker accessory cavity, and
Form C contacts take two 2
two right-most locations are positions in the cavity.
used for auxiliary switches. Identical contact blocks are 2
used for the alarm and
Power Defense breakers
have secondary covers for
auxiliary switch functions. 2
Tripping Alarm Options Aux Options
ease of field installation of Electronic breakers with
Accessory Options (2 Spaces) 1 (2 Spaces)
accessories, including alarm communications options 2
Shunt Trip None None and auxiliary switches. (Modbus RTU or CAM Link)
1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space) lose one alarm switch 2
position, but are also able to
1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space)
1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces)
provide trip position via
communications and the PXR
2
UVR 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) programmable relays.
2
2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces)
Contact Blocks
2
Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Contact Blocks for
Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality 2
Four-Pole Circuit Breakers Catalog Number PDGXAA PDGXAB PDGXAC
Type Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC
2
Screw Terminal Contact Blocks for
2
2
Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
Catalog Number PDGXXA PDGXXB PDGXXA + PDGXXB
Type Form A / NO Form B / NC For NO-NC, use two
separate contact
2
Tripping Alarm Options Aux Options
blocks
Accessory Options (2 Spaces) 1 (4 Spaces) 2
2
Shunt Trip None None
Push-In Clamp Contact Blocks for
1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space) Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality 2
1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space)
2
Catalog Number PDGXUA PDGXUB PDGXUC
1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) Type Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC
UVR 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces)
2
2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m) Contact Blocks for
2NO/2NC (4 spaces) Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2
4NO (4 spaces) Catalog Number PDGXDA PDGXDB PDGXDC

4NC (4 spaces) Type Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC 2

Notes
1 Frame 3 Power Defense breakers with electronic trip units AND communication only have Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch 2
access to one alarm space. Breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units or electronic trip units Functionality—Bulk Packs
without communication have access to two alarm spaces.
2 Neutral pole includes two additional auxiliary spaces.
Type Termination Bulk Pack 2
Catalog Number Quantity 3
3 Order in multiples of quantity listed to receive bulk pack. (ex. Order qty 20 PDGXXA-BP20 to

receive 1 bulk pack). PDGXXA-BP20 Form A / NO Screw Terminal 20 2

PDGXXB-BP20 Form B / NC Screw Terminal 20
PDGXUA-BP20 Form A / NO Push-in Clamp 20
2
PDGXUB-BP20 Form B / NC Push-in Clamp 20
2
PDGXUC-BP10 Form C / NO-NC Push-in Clamp 10

2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-51

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Factory Installation of Alarm and Auxiliary Switches—Frame Size 3

2 Alarm and auxiliary switches auxiliary switch functionality ● For Eaton factory ● If no other accessories are
are plug-and-play accessories in digits 15–16 and adhering installation, the same type selected, use NNNN for
2 designed to be field to the following conditions of terminals (i.e., all pigtail the final 4 digits of the
installable. However, Eaton and tables. 0.75 m, all screw, etc.) catalog number
2 also offers installation service
● Digit 15 denotes the type
must be used. If a ● Electronic breakers with
in our factories. combination of alarm and communications lose one
of accessory(-ies) installed
2 Breaker catalog numbers and the terminal types
auxiliary switches is
selected, they must be the
alarm switch position in
with alarm and auxiliary order to provide trip status
● Switches may be
2 switch combinations require requested for alarm only,
same type (i.e., all 1NC, all
1NO/1NC, etc.)
via communications. They
do not lose an auxiliary
a complete 20-digit catalog auxiliary only or a Digit 16 denotes number position for this purpose.
2
●
number, adding the alarm and combination of the two and type (NO, NC) of
switches installed
2
2 Pigtails—29 in / 0.75 m (A, B, C)

2 Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole Four-Pole

2
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
Alarm Switch None NN AA AB AC AD AE A1 A2 A3

2 1NO
1NC
BA
BB
CA
—
—
CB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

2 1NO/1NC
2NO
BC
BD
—
—
—
—
CC
—
—
CD
—
—
C1
—
—
C2
—
—

2 2NC BE — — — — CE — — C3

2 Screw Terminals (X, Y, Z)

Auxiliary Switch
2 Three-Pole
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC
Four-Pole
2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC

2 Alarm Switch None NN XA XB XC XD XE X1 X2 X3

1NO YA ZA — — — — — — —
2 1NC YB — ZB — — — — — —
1NO/1NC YC — — ZC — — Z1 — —
2 2NO YD — — — ZD — — Z2 —
2NC YE — — — — ZE — — Z3
2
Push-In Clamps (U, V, W)
2 Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
Alarm Switch None NN UA UB UC UD UE U1 U2 U3
2 1NO VA WA — — — — — — —
1NC VB — WB — — — — — —
2 1NO/1NC VC — — WC — — W1 — —
VD — — — WD — — W2 —
2 2NO
2NC VE — — — — WE — — W3

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-52 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Factory Installation of Alarm and Auxiliary Switches—Frame Size 3
Pigtails—118 in / 3.0 m (D, E, F)
2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole Four-Pole
2
Alarm Switch None
None
NN
1NO
DA
1NC
DB
1NO/1NC
DC
2NO
DD
2NC
DE
2NO/2NC
D1
4NO
D2
4NC
D3
2
1NO EA FA — — — — — — —
2
1NC EB — FB — — — — — —
1NO/1NC EC — — FC — — F1 — — 2
2NO ED — — — FD — — F2 —
2NC EE — — — — FE — — F3 2
For PXR Trip Units with Communication 1 2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC
Four-Pole
2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
2
Alarm Switch None NN AA AB AC AD AE A1 A2 A3
2
1NO BA CA — CF CG — CP CQ —
1NC BB — CB CH — CI CR — CS 2
Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 3
Power Defense breakers have designated positions for shunt trips and undervoltage releases
2
(UVRs) in the left pole accessory cavity. Each breaker has space for one tripping accessory only.
2
Power Defense breakers have secondary covers for ease of field installation of tripping accessories.

Shunt Trips
2
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m) 2
12 Vdc PDG3XST12DCT PDG3XST12DCS PDG3XST12DCR
48 Vdc PDG3XST48DCT PDG3XST48DCS PDG3XST48DCR 2
60 Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
PDG3XST60DCT
PDG3XST24ACDCT
PDG3XST60DCS
PDG3XST24ACDCS
PDG3XST60DCR
PDG3XST24ACDCR
2
110–130 Vac/125 Vdc PDG3XST130ACDCT PDG3XST130ACDCS PDG3XST130ACDCR 2
200–240 Vac/250 Vdc PDG3XST250ACDCT PDG3XST250ACDCS PDG3XST250ACDCR
380–440 Vac PDG3XST440ACT PDG3XST440ACS PDG3XST440ACR 2
480–525 Vac PDG3XST525ACT PDG3XST525ACS PDG3XST525ACR
600 Vac PDG3XST600ACT PDG3XST600ACS PDG3XST600ACR 2
Undervoltage Releases (UVRs)
2
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
2
12 Vdc PDG3XUV12DCV PDG3XUV12DCU PDG3XUV12DCW
24 Vdc PDG3XUV24DCV PDG3XUV24DCU PDG3XUV24DCW 2
48 Vdc PDG3XUV48DCV PDG3XUV48DCU PDG3XUV48DCW
60 Vdc PDG3XUV60DCV PDG3XUV60DCU PDG3XUV60DCW 2
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
PDG3XUV125DCV
PDG3XUV250DCV
PDG3XUV125DCU
PDG3XUV250DCU
PDG3XUV125DCW
PDG3XUV250DCW
2
24 Vac PDG3XUV24ACV PDG3XUV24ACU PDG3XUV24ACW 2
130 Vac PDG3XUV130ACV PDG3XUV130ACU PDG3XUV130ACW
240 Vac PDG3XUV240ACV PDG3XUV240ACU PDG3XUV240ACW 2
440 Vac PDG3XUV440ACV PDG3XUV440ACU PDG3XUV440ACW
525 Vac PDG3XUV525ACV PDG3XUV525ACU PDG3XUV525ACW
2
600 Vac PDG3XUV600ACV PDG3XUV600ACU PDG3XUV600ACW
2
Note: Use PDG3XUV18DCW when using Time Delay UVR.

Note
2
2
1 All options shown have 29 in/0.75 m pigtail termination. For alternate termination options, contact the product line.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-53

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Factory Installed Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 3

2 Shunt trips and undervoltage Breaker catalog numbers ● Digit 17 denotes the type ● If no additional accessories
releases (UVRs) are plug-and- with shunt trips or UVRs of accessory installed and are selected, use NN for
2 play accessories designed to require a complete 20-digit the terminal type digits 15-16 and 19-20 of
be field installable. However, catalog number, adding the ● Digit 18 denotes the the catalog number
2 Eaton also offers the service tripping accessory voltage of the accessory ● Each breaker has space for
of installation in our factories. functionality in digits 17 and one shunt trip or UVR
2 18 and adhering to the
following conditions and
tripping accessory only

2 tables.

2
Shunt Trips
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)

2 12 Vdc TH SH RH
48 Vdc TJ SJ RJ
2 60 Vdc TK SK RK
24 Vac/Vdc TN SN RN
2 110–130 Vac/125 Vdc TP SP RP

2 200–240 Vac/250 Vdc TR SR RR

380–440 Vac TC SC RC

2 480–525 Vac TD SD RD
600 Vac TE SE RE
2
2 Undervoltage Releases (UVRs)
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
2 12 Vdc VH UH WH

2 24 Vdc VG UG WG
48 Vdc VJ UJ WJ
2 60 Vdc VK UK WK
125 Vdc VL UL WL
2 250 Vdc VM UM WM
24 Vac VF UF WF
2 130 Vac VA UA WA

2 240 Vac VB UB WB
440 Vac VC UC WC
2 525 Vac VD UD WD
600 Vac VE UE WE
2 Note: Use suffix US for 18 Vdc when using Time Delay UVR.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-54 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Handle Mechanisms—Frame Size 3
2
Direct Rotary Handle Mechanism 1
NEMA 1/12 Factory Installed Digits 2
Description Catalog Number 19–20
Standard lockable handle and mechanism PDG3XHMCS HA 2
Standard lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock PDG3XHMCSN HB
Standard lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock PDG3XHMCSP HC 2
Standard lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock and mechanical padlock
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism
PDG3XHMCSNP
PDG3XHMCE
HE
H1
2
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock PDG3XHMCEN H2 2
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock PDG3XHMCEP H3
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG3XHMCENP H5 2
Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism 1
2
Description
NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X
Catalog Number
Factory Installed Digits
19–20
2
PDG3XHMDS Standard lockable handle and mechanism 2 PDG3XHMDS DA 2
Standard lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock 2 PDG3XHMDSP DC
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism 2 PDG3XHMDE D1 2
Standard lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock 2 PDG3XHMDEP D3
9 in (245 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG34XHMS245 —
2
17 in (445 mm) handle mechanism shaft
Standard NFPA79-compliant shaft handle
PDG34XHMS445
PDG34XHM79S
—
—
2
Emergency NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG34XHM79E — 2
Metal Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism 1 2
Description
NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X
Catalog Number 2
Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 6-inch shaft
Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 12-inch shaft
PDG3XHMDS06MH
PDG3XHMDS12MH
2
Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 24-inch shaft PDG3XHMDS24MH 2
Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 6-inch shaft PDG3XHMDE06MH
Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 12-inch shaft PDG3XHMDE12MH 2
Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 24-inch shaft PDG3XHMDE24MH
2
Flex Shaft Handle Mechanism 2
Metal Handle, High Performance Handle, Metal Handle, High Performance Handle,

Cable Length (ft)

NEMA 1/3R/12
Catalog Number
NEMA 1/3R/12
Catalog Number
NEMA 4/4X
Catalog Number
NEMA 4/4X
Catalog Number 2
2 PDG3XFS02 PDG3XFS02HP PDG3XFS02X PDG3XFS02HPX
2
3 PDG3XFS03 PDG3XFS03HP PDG3XFS03X PDG3XFS03HPX
4 PDG3XFS04 PDG3XFS04HP PDG3XFS04X PDG3XFS04HPX 2
5 PDG3XFS05 PDG3XFS05HP PDG3XFS05X PDG3XFS05HPX
6 PDG3XFS06 PDG3XFS06HP PDG3XFS06X PDG3XFS06HPX 2
7
2
PDG3XFS07 PDG3XFS07HP PDG3XFS07X PDG3XFS07HPX
8 PDG3XFS08 PDG3XFS08HP PDG3XFS08X PDG3XFS08HPX
9 PDG3XFS09 PDG3XFS09HP PDG3XFS09X PDG3XFS09HPX
2
10 PDG3XFS10 PDG3XFS10HP PDG3XFS10X PDG3XFS10HPX

Notes 2
1 Standard handles are black and gray; Emergency handles are red and yellow.
2 Handle mechanism shaft sold separately. 2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-55

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories—Frame Size 3 Dimensions and Weights—Frame Size 3

2 External Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 Factory
Installed
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
Description Fit Type Catalog Number Digits 19–20 2 5.47 (138.9) 10.13 (257.1) 4.30 (109.1)
2 Padlockable hasp Top PDG3XPLKT L4 3 5.47 (138.9) 10.13 (257.1) 4.30 (109.1)

2 Padlockable hasp,
OFF only
Top PDG3XPLKTOFF L1 4 7.22 (182.9) 10.13 (257.1) 4.30 (109.1)

2 Padlockable handle
block
On handle PDG3XPHB — Approximate Shipping Weight in lb (kg)
Breaker Type 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
Kirk lock provision— Left side L8
2
PDG3XKLKPSF
left side, Type F 1 PDG3 400 A 8.05 (3.65) 11.02 (5.0) 13.77 (6.25)
Kirk lock provision— Right side L9 PDG3 600 A 10.43 (4.73) 12.36 (5.61) 16.27 (7.39)
2 right side, Type F 1
Notes
Kirk lock provision— Left/right side PDG3XKLKPSFF —
2
1 Provision only. Kirk keylock sold separately. Bolt projection in withdrawn position is
left/right side, Type FF 1
0.375 in (9.525 mm) for F-lock and 0 in (0 mm) for FF-lock.
Walking beam 400 A frame, two-, PDG3XWBI234P — 2 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant

2 interlock 23 three- and four-pole

600 A frame, two- and PDG3XWBI23P —
(factory suffix WB in digits 19-20).
3 Requires two breakers.

2 three-pole
600 A frame, four-pole PDG3XWBI4P —

2 Electrical operator 24 Vdc PDG3XROP24DC —

48–60 Vdc PDG3XROP60DC —
2 125 Vdc PDG3XROP125DC —
250 Vdc PDG3XROP250DC —
2 110–130 Vac PDG3XROP130AC —
200–240 Vac PDG3XROP240AC —
2 380–440 Vac PDG3XROP440AC —

2 Plug-in breaker
base only
Three-pole
Four-pole
PDG3XPIBB3P600A
PDG3XPIBB4P600A
—
—

2 Plug-in breaker
parts kit
Three-pole, 400 A PDG3XPIBK3P400A —
Three-pole, 600 A PDG3XPIBK3P600A —
2 Four-pole, 400 A PDG3XPIBK4P400A —
Four-pole, 600 A PDG3XPIBK4P600A —
2 Terminal covers Three-pole (400 A frame) PDG3XTC3P400A —
Three-pole PDG3XTC3P —
2 Four-pole PDG3XTC4P —

2 Interphase barriers Single-pole

Three-pole
PDG3XIB
PDG3XIB3P
—
—

2 Four-pole PDG3XIB4P —
Finger protection Three-pole PDG3XFP3P —
2 Four-pole PDG3XFP4P —
Neutral CTs for Busbar type PDG3XNCTB0600 —
2 ground fault (PXR)
Service entrance Three-pole PRLSEBPD3 —
2 barrier kit
Withdrawable Three-pole, 400 A PDG3XWDR3P400A —

2 cassettes
Four-pole, 400 A PDG3XWDR4P400A —
Three-pole, 600 A PDG3XWDR3P630A —
2 Four-pole, 600 A PDG3XWDR4P630A —

2 Base Mounting Hardware

Description Catalog Number
2 Two-, three-, four-pole metric 66A4560G03

2 Note: Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or

molded case switch.
2

V4-T2-56 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Contents
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 4
Description Page
2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-42
2
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A)
Catalog Number / Product Selection . . . . . . V4-T2-58 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-63
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-69 2
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79 2
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . .
High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
V4-T2-98 2
Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . .
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-107 2
Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112 2
Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
Fused Current-Limiting Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114 2
Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . V4-T2-116
Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-140
V4-T2-142
2
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing . . . . . V4-T2-146
2
2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 4 2
Product Description
Frame Size 4 covers a range
Application Description
Frame Size 4 can be used to
Features and Benefits
Frame Size 4 breakers are
Standards and Certifications
Power Defense breakers are
2
of 300 A through 800 A with
a complete offering of trip
meet a wide range of circuit
protection and power
modular and available as
complete breakers from the
designed and tested to meet
stringent requirements for: 2
units, including PXR distribution needs, including factory or as modular UL
2
●

electronic trip units and fixed- ground fault protection and components, including ● CSA
adjustable thermal-magnetic 100% UL ratings. PXR trip frames, trip units,
trip units. PD-4 is available in units in PD-4 provide all levels accessories and terminals ● IEC (CE)
CB (CCC)
2
a single 800 A frame. of protection, including to provide flexibility for ●

energy metering with

multiple communication
customers. PXR trip units
are available with advanced
2
schemes, breaker health features to provide
indication and arc flash customers unparalleled 2
reduction options. situational awareness of
their electrical system. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-57

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Catalog Number / Product Selection

2
Power Defense—Frame Size 4 (300–800 A)
2 Frame Size 4 covers a range of 320 A through 800 A using electronic trip units, and 300 A through
800 A using thermal-magnetic trip units. It is available in configurations of two-, three- and four-
2 pole, with the two-pole being in the same physical size of a three-pole variant.

2 Interrupting Ratings
G K M
2 UL/CSA kA rms kA rms kA rms
240 Vac 65 85 100
2 480 Vac 35 50 65

2 600 Vac
250 Vdc 1
18
22
25
22
35
25

2 IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs

240 Vac 55 55 85 85 100 100
2 380–415 Vac 36 36 50 50 70 53
440 Vac 30 22.5 35 35 50 40
2 480 Vac 25 20 35 22.5 50 30

2 525 Vac 20 16.5 25 20 30 25

660–690 Vac 8 4 10 5 15 7.5
2 250 Vdc 1 22 22 22 22 25 25

2 Power Defense—Frame Size 4 (300–800 A)

This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
2 for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.

2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units (TMTU)—Globally Rated

2 PD G 4 3 M 0800 TFA J

2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense

2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal
2 Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 2 = 2-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0300 = 300 A 2 TFA = Fixed thermal / N = No terminals
2 3
4
= 3-pole
= 4-pole (100% N)
K = 50 kA at 480 V
M = 65 kA at 480 V
0350
0400
= 350 A 2
= 400 A 2
Adjustable magnetic
VFA = 50 °C Fixed thermal /
J
K
= Line and load terminals
= Line only terminals
0 = 4-pole (0% N) 0450 = 450 A 2 Adjustable magnetic L = Load only terminals
2 6 = 4-pole (60% N) Canada
G = 18 kA at 600 V
0500
0600
= 500 A
= 600 A
(non UL)

K = 25 kA at 600 V 0700 = 700 A

2 M = 35 kA at 600 V 0800 = 800 A

2 Molded Case Switches—Globally Rated 3

2 PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 2 = 2-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A KNS = Molded Case Switch N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V J = Line and load terminals
2 4 = 4-pole
G = 18 kA at 600 V
K
L
= Line only terminals
= Load only terminals
M = 35 kA at 600 V
2
Notes
2 1 DC ratings available in thermal-magnetic breakers only. 250 Vdc is achieved using 2 poles in series.
2 Not available in four-pole 60% neutral protection.

2
3 Molded case switch may open above 6000 A.

2
2

V4-T2-58 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETU)
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers for selecting Power Defense 2
circuit breakers and trip units.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated 2
PD G 4 3 M 0800 P2M J 2
Product Series 2
PD = Power Defense
2
2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal
Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 2 = 2-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
K = 50 kA at 480 V
M = 65 kA at 480 V
E## 1=PXR 20
D## 1=PXR 20D
J
K
= Line and load terminals
= Line only terminals
2
(programmable N) P## 1=PXR 25 L = Load only terminals
G = 18 kA at 600 V
K = 25 kA at 600 V
2
M = 35 kA at 600 V
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI N = No terminals
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole
(programmable N)
K = 50 kA at 480 V
M = 65 kA at 480 V
E## 1=PXR 20
D## 1=PXR 20D
J
K
= Line and load terminals
= Line only terminals
2
P## 1=PXR 25 L = Load only terminals
G = 18 kA at 600 V
K = 25 kA at 600 V
2
M = 35 kA at 600 V
2
Globally Rated Frame Only 2
PD-4 thermal-magnetic and electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units,
terminals and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker. Each Frame Only device is marked 2
with interrupting ratings and a maximum continuous current rating; each trip unit is also marked with a
maximum continuous current rating, which must not exceed that of the frame. Additionally, 100% UL
Rated frames are marked as such on the Frame Only device.
2
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers for selecting Power Defense
circuit breakers and trip units.
2
Frame Only—Globally Rated 2
PD G 4 3 M 0800 FNN J 2
Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal
2
2
Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 2 = 2-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals
3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V
4 = 4-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V 2
G = 18 kA at 600 V
K = 25 kA at 600 V
M = 35 kA at 600 V
2
2
Frame Only—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 3 = 3-pole G = 35 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V
M = 65 kA at 480 V
2
G = 18 kA at 600 V
K = 25 kA at 600 V
2
M = 35 kA at 600 V

Note
2
2
1 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-61 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2)

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-59

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Trip Units
2 PD-4 thermal-magnetic and electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate
frames, trip units, terminals and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker.
2 For two-pole breakers using electronic trip units, three-pole trip units are used.

2 PDG designated trip units are for use with PDG and PDF breaker frames. The 100%
rating for PDF (100% UL Rated) is marked on the frame, not the trip unit.

2 Trip Units Only

This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
2 for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.

2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units

2 PD G 4 X TFA 3 0800
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2 Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Separator
Digit
Trip Unit
Type Options
Pole
Options
Continuous
Current Ratings
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 X = Accessory TFA = Fixed Thermal / 2 = 2-pole 0300 = 300 A 1
2 Adjustable Magnetic
VFA = 50 °C Fixed Thermal /
3 = 3-pole 0350 = 350 A 1
= 400 A 1
4 = 4-pole (100% N) 0400
Adjustable Magnetic = 450 A 1
2 (non UL)
0
6
= 4-pole (0% N)
= 4-pole (60% N)
0450
0500 = 500 A
0600 = 600 A
2 0700
0800
= 700 A
= 800 A

2 Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units

2 Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units

2 PD G 4 X PXR 3 0800 E2N

2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2 Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Separator
Digit
Trip Unit
Type Designator
Pole
Options
Continuous
Current Ratings
Trip Unit
Type and Options

2 G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 4 =4 X = Accessory PXR = Power Xpert Release

Trip Unit
3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
0800 = 800 A B2N = PXR 10 LSI
E## 2=PXR 20
(programmable N) D## 2=PXR 20D
2 P## 2=PXR 25

2 Notes
1 Not available in four-pole 60% neutral protection.
2 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-61 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).

2 (1) (2)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-60 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options—Frame Size 4
2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options
#(1)—Protection Type #(2)—Available Configured Options 2
LSI with LSIG with
Arcflash
Reduction
Arcflash
Reduction
—
—
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
—
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
Modbus
2
2
Maintenance Maintenance — — — ZSI — ZSI ZSI — ZSI
PXR ETU LSI LSIG 1 System System — — — — CAM — CAM CAM CAM
PXR 10 — — — — — — — — — — —
2
B 2 N
PXR 20 E 2 — — — N R M Z C W X — —

PXR 20D D
—
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
—
—
R
—
M
M
Z
—
C
—
W
W
X
—
—
D
—
Y
2
PXR 25 P 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
2
Descriptions of PXR Configured Options
Relays—2 Form A contacts ZSI—Zone Selective Arcflash Reduction Auxiliary Power 2
(rated for 240 Vac, 1 A) Interlocking Maintenance System,
● Interface: 3 wires (ALM1, ● Interface: 3 wires or Maintenance Mode
● Connection included with
all PXR 20, 20D, and 25
2
ALM2, ALM Common) (Zin, Zout, Zcomm) Available as trip unit trip units
2
●

● Programmable to indicate ● Includes ability to turn Protection Type 4 or 5 Note: For PXR20 units,
breaker conditions ON and OFF, and ● Interface: Switch and LED wire harness connections for
indicate signals on face of trip unit and two auxiliary power not included on 2
Modbus—Modbus RTU wires for remote switch E2N styles.
directly from breaker CAM—CAM Link connection
(requires a CAM module per
enable option ● Required for 2
● Interface: 3 wires (MODBA, (24 Vdc required)
breaker) communications, relays,
MODBB, MODBG)
● Interface: 5 wires (refer to
● A programmable relay will and metering accuracy 2
● No additional modules be factory defaulted to ● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A
required
●
CAM IL for details)
Communications Adapter
remote indication of
Arcflash Reduction ● Interface: 2 wires 2
Modules available for (Aux +24 V, Aux 0 V)
2
Maintenance System
Modbus TCP and PROFIBUS

Available Continuous Current (lr) Settings on PXR Electronic Trip Units

2
Option Setting
Catalog Number Selection and Maximum Setting (ln)
800 A
2
PXR 10, PXR 20 1 320 A 2
2 350 A
3 400 A 2
4 450 A
5 500 A 2
6 550 A
7 600 A 2
8 630 A
9 700 A
2
PXR 20D, PXR 25
10 = ln 800 A
Programmable from minimum to maximum values in 10 A increments.
2
Note
1 All neutral current sensors required for LSIG protection are sold separately.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-61

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 4
2 Catalog numbers shown are for a single side of a three-pole breaker.
2 For Frame Size 4, terminals are also available in single-pole kits; these
are not available in two-pole or four-pole configurations, unless otherwise
noted. For single terminals, replace X3 with X1 on the catalog number.
2 Example: PDG4X3TA800 becomes PDG4X1TA800 for a single unit.

2 Terminal Types

2
2
2
2
2
PDG4X3TA700 PDG4X3TA800 PDG4X3TA801 PDG4X3TA800RF
2 PDG4X3T600
PDG4X3TA700CW
PDG4X3TA800SW
PDG4X3TA800CW
PDG4X3T800
PDG4X3TA801CW

2 Note: Pictures are for reference only.

2 Terminals

2 Maximum Number of AWG / kcmil Metric (mm2)

Digit 14 Designation Factory
Config.
Breaker Terminal Wire Wire Conductors Range per Range per 3-Pole Included Line and Line Load Ampere
2 Amperes Body Type Type Class per Phase Conductor Conductor Catalog Number Accessories Load Only Only Range
Standard Terminals
2 700 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 1–500 42.4–253 PDG4X3TA700 — J K L 300–700
800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–400 85–203 — J K L 800
2
PDG4X3TA800
Alternate Terminals

2 800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 500–750 253–380 PDG4X3TA801 — T U V 300–800

Non-Aluminum Terminals
2 600 Copper Cu B, C 2 2/0–500 67.4–238 PDG4X3T600 — W Y Z 300–600
800 Copper Cu B, C 3 3/0–300 85–152 PDG4X3T800 — W Y Z 700–800
2 Strandable Terminals

2 800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C

D, G, H, I,
3 3/0–400
3/0–300
85–203
85–152
PDG4X3TA800SW — A B C 300–800

K, M
2 Control Wire Terminals

2 700 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 1–500 42.4–253 PDG4X3TA700CW — 1 2 3 300–700

800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–400 85–203 PDG4X3TA800CW — 1 2 3 800
2 800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 500–750 253–380 PDG4X3TA801CW — 4 5 6 300–800
Rear Fed Terminals 2
2 800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–300 85–152 PDG4X3TA800RF Interphase — — — 300–800
barriers
2 Rear Connectors 2
800 — — — — — — — R — — 300–800
2
PDG4X3T800RC
End Cap Kits/Screw Terminals

2 800 — — — — — — PDG4X3TS800 1 — S D E 300–800

Notes
2 Wire capacity is based on standard imperial wire sizes; metric sizes provided in table are a direct
conversion to demonstrate maximum capacity, not to denote metric wire sizes.
2 1 End cap kits are available in three-pole and four-pole configurations only.
For four-pole, use catalog number PDG4X4TS800.
Breaker loses UL rating when fitted with rear-fed terminals or rear connectors.
2
2

V4-T2-62 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Accessories
2
Internal Accessory Configurations—Frame Size 4
2
Three-Pole Circuit Breakers Four-Pole Circuit Breakers
2
2
2
Tripping Tripping
Accessory
Options
Alarm Options
(1–2 spaces) 1
Aux Options
(4 spaces)
Accessory
Options
Alarm Options
(1–2 spaces) 1
Aux Options
(6 spaces)
2
None None None None None None 2
Shunt Trip 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space) Shunt Trip 1NO (1 space) 1NO (1 space)
1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space) 1NC (1 space) 2
1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces) 1NO/1NC (2 spaces)
2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces) 2NO (2 spaces)
2
UVR 2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces) UVR 2NC (2 spaces) 2NC (2 spaces)
2
2CO (4 spaces) 2CO (4 spaces)
4NO (4 spaces) 4NO (4 spaces) 2
4NC (4 spaces) 4NC (4 spaces)
3CO (6 spaces) 2
6NO (6 spaces)
6NC (6 spaces)
2
Note 2
1 Frame 4 Power Defense breakers with electronic trip units and communication only have

access to one alarm space. Breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units or electronic trip units
without communication, have access to two alarm spaces.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-63

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Blocks—Frame Size 4

2 Power Defense breakers Power Defense alarm and
have designated positions for auxiliary switches are
2 alarm and auxiliary switches available in contact blocks, in
in the right pole accessory Form A (NO), Form B (NC),
2 cavity. For Frame 4, the two and Form C (NO-NC) types.
left-most positions are used Form A and Form B contacts
2 for alarm switches, and the
two right-most locations are
take one position in the
breaker accessory cavity, and
2 used for auxiliary switches. Form C contacts take two
positions in the cavity.
Power Defense breakers Identical contact blocks are
2 have secondary covers for
ease of field installation of
used for the alarm and
auxiliary switch functions.
2 accessories, including alarm
and auxiliary switches. Electronic breakers with
communications options
2 (Modbus RTU or CAM Link)
lose one alarm switch
2 position, but are also able to
provide trip position via
2 communications and the PXR
programmable relays.
2 Contact Blocks

2 Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
Catalog Number PDGXAA PDGXAB PDGXAC
2 Type Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC

2
Screw Terminal Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXXA PDGXXB PDGXXA + PDGXXB

2 Type Form A / NO Form B / NC For NO-NC, use two separate

contact blocks

2
2 Push-In Clamp Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
Catalog Number PDGXUA PDGXUB PDGXUC

2 Type Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC

2
Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m) Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality
2 Catalog Number PDGXDA PDGXDB PDGXDC
Form A / NO Form B / NC Form C / NO-NC
2
Type

2 Contact Blocks for Alarm and Auxiliary Switch Functionality—Bulk Packs

2 Catalog Number Type Termination Bulk Pack Quantity 1

PDGXXA-BP20 Form A / NO Screw Terminal 20
2 PDGXXB-BP20 Form B / NC Screw Terminal 20
PDGXUA-BP20 Form A / NO Push-in Clamp 20
2 PDGXUB-BP20 Form B / NC Push-in Clamp 20

2 PDGXUC-BP10 Form C / NO-NC Push-in Clamp 10

Note
2 1 Order in multiples of quantity listed to receive bulk pack. (ex. Order qty 20 PDGXXA-BP20 to receive 1 bulk pack).

2
2

V4-T2-64 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Factory Installation of Alarm and Auxiliary Switches—Frame Size 4
Alarm and auxiliary switches auxiliary switch functionality ● For Eaton factory ● If no other accessories are 2
are plug-and-play accessories in digits 15–16 and adhering installation, the same type selected, use NNNN for
designed to be field to the following conditions of terminals (i.e., all pigtail the final 4 digits of the 2
installable. However, Eaton and tables. 0.75 m, all screw, etc.) catalog number
also offers installation service
● Digit 15 denotes the type
must be used. If a ● Electronic breakers with 2
in our factories. combination of alarm communications lose one
of accessory(-ies) installed
Breaker catalog numbers and the terminal types
and auxiliary switches is
selected, they must be the
alarm switch position in
order to provide trip status
2
with alarm and auxiliary ● Switches may be same type (i.e., all 1NC,
switch combinations require requested for alarm all 1NO/1NC, etc.)
via communications. They
do not lose an auxiliary
2
a complete 20-digit catalog only, auxiliary only or a Digit 16 denotes number position for this purpose
2
●
number, adding the alarm and combination of the two and type (NO, NC) of
switches installed
2
Pigtails—29 in / 0.75 m (A, B, C) 2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole Four-Pole
2
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC 3NO/3NC 6NO 6NC
Alarm Switch None NN AA AB AC AD AE A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 2
BA CA — — — — — — — — — —
1NO
1NC BB — CB — — — — — — — — —
2
1NO/1NC
2NO
BC
BD
—
—
—
—
CC
—
—
CD
—
—
C1
—
—
C2
—
—
C4
—
—
C5
—
—
2
2NC BE — — — — CE — — C3 — — C6
2
Screw Terminals (X, Y, Z) 2
Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
Four-Pole
3NO/3NC 6NO 6NC
2
Alarm Switch None NN XA XB XC XD XE X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
2
1NO YA ZA — — — — — — — — — —
1NC YB — ZB — — — — — — — — — 2
1NO/1NC YC — — ZC — — Z1 — — Z4 — —
2NO YD — — — ZD — — Z2 — — Z5 — 2
2NC YE — — — — ZE — — Z3 — — Z6
2
Push-In Clamps (U, V, W)
Auxiliary Switch 2
Three-Pole Four-Pole
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC 3NO/3NC 6NO 6NC 2
Alarm Switch None NN DA DB DC DD DE D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
1NO EA FA — — — — — — — — — — 2
1NC EB — FB — — — — — — — — —
1NO/1NC EC — — FC — — F1 — — F4 — — 2
ED — — — FD — — F2 — — F5 —
2
2NO
2NC EE — — — — FE — — F3 — — F6

2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-65

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Factory Installation of Alarm and Auxiliary Switches—Frame Size 4

2 Pigtails—118 in / 3.0 m (D, E, F)
2 Auxiliary Switch
Three-Pole Four-Pole

2 Alarm Switch None

None
NN
1NO
UA
1NC
UB
1NO/1NC
UC
2NO
UD
2NC
UE
2NO/2NC
U1
4NO
U2
4NC
U3
3NO/3NC
U4
6NO
U5
6NC
U6

2 1NO VA WA — — — — — — — — — —
1NC VB — WB — — — — — — — — —

2 1NO/1NC VC — — WC — — W1 — — W4 — —
2NO VD — — — WD — — W2 — — W5 —
2 2NC VE — — — — WE — — W3 — — W6

2 Pigtails—29 in / 0.75 m (A, B, C)

Auxiliary Switch

2 Three-Pole
None 1NO 1NC 1NO/1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO/2NC 4NO 4NC
Four-Pole
3NO/3NC 6NO 6NC

2 Alarm Switch None

1NO
NN
BA
AA
CA
AB
—
AC
CF
AD
CG
AE
—
A1
CP
A2
CQ
A3
—
A4
CT
A5
CU
A6
—

2 1NC BB — CB CH — CJ CR — CS CV — CW

Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 4

2 Power Defense breakers have designated positions for shunt trips and undervoltage releases
(UVRs) in the left pole accessory cavity. Each breaker has space for one tripping accessory only.
2
Power Defense breakers have secondary covers for ease of field installation of tripping accessories.
2 Shunt Trips

2
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
12 Vdc PDG4XST12DCT PDG4XST12DCS PDG4XST12DCR

2 48 Vdc PDG4XST48DCT PDG4XST48DCS PDG4XST48DCR

60 Vdc PDG4XST60DCT PDG4XST60DCS PDG4XST60DCR
2 24 Vac/Vdc PDG4XST24ACDCT PDG4XST24ACDCS PDG4XST24ACDCR
110–130 Vac/125 Vdc PDG4XST130ACDCT PDG4XST130ACDCS PDG4XST130ACDCR
2 200–240 Vac/250 Vdc PDG4XST250ACDCT PDG4XST250ACDCS PDG4XST250ACDCR

2 380–440 Vac
480–525 Vac
PDG4XST440ACT
PDG4XST525ACT
PDG4XST440ACS
PDG4XST525ACS
PDG4XST440ACR
PDG4XST525ACR

2 600 Vac PDG4XST600ACT PDG4XST600ACS PDG4XST600ACR

2
Undervoltage Releases (UVRs)
2 Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
12 Vdc PDG4XUV12DCV PDG4XUV12DCU PDG4XUV12DCW
2 24 Vdc PDG4XUV24DCV PDG4XUV24DCU PDG4XUV24DCW

2 48 Vdc PDG4XUV48DCV PDG4XUV48DCU PDG4XUV48DCW

60 Vdc PDG4XUV60DCV PDG4XUV60DCU PDG4XUV60DCW

2 125 Vdc PDG4XUV125DCV PDG4XUV125DCU PDG4XUV125DCW

250 Vdc PDG4XUV250DCV PDG4XUV250DCU PDG4XUV250DCW
2 24 Vac PDG4XUV24ACV PDG4XUV24ACU PDG4XUV24ACW
130 Vac
2
PDG4XUV130ACV PDG4XUV130ACU PDG4XUV130ACW
240 Vac PDG4XUV240ACV PDG4XUV240ACU PDG4XUV240ACW

2 440 Vac PDG4XUV440ACV PDG4XUV440ACU PDG4XUV440ACW

525 Vac PDG4XUV525ACV PDG4XUV525ACU PDG4XUV525ACW
2 600 Vac PDG4XUV600ACV PDG4XUV600ACU PDG4XUV600ACW

2 Note: Use PDG4XUV18DCW when using Time Delay UVR.

V4-T2-66 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Factory Installed Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 4
Shunt trips and undervoltage Breaker catalog numbers ● Digit 17 denotes the type ● If no additional accessories 2
releases (UVRs) are plug-and- with shunt trips or UVRs of accessory installed and are selected, use NN for
play accessories designed to require a complete 20-digit the terminal type digits 15-16 and 19-20 of 2
be field installable. However, catalog number, adding the ● Digit 18 denotes the the catalog number
Eaton also offers the service tripping accessory voltage of the accessory ● Each breaker has space for 2
of installation in our factories. functionality in digits 17 and one shunt trip or UVR
18 and adhering to the
following conditions and
tripping accessory only 2
tables.
2
Shunt Trips
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
2
12 Vdc TH SH RH 2
48 Vdc TJ SJ RJ
60 Vdc TK SK RK 2
24 Vac/Vdc TN SN RN
110–130 Vac/125 Vdc TP SP RP
2
200–240 Vac/250 Vdc TR SR RR
2
380–440 Vac TC SC RC
480–525 Vac TD SD RD 2
600 Vac TE SE RE
2
Undervoltage Releases (UVRs) 2
Voltage Screw Terminals Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Pigtail (118 in / 3.0 m)
12 Vdc VH UH WH
2
24 Vdc VG UG WG
2
48 Vdc VJ UJ WJ
60 Vdc VK UK WK 2
125 Vdc VL UL WL
250 Vdc VM UM WM 2
24 Vac VF UF WF
130 Vac VA UA WA
2
240 Vac VB UB WB
2
440 Vac VC UC WC
525 Vac VD UD WD 2
600 Vac VE UE WE

Note: Use suffix US for 18 Vdc when using Time Delay UVR.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-67

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Handle Mechanisms—Frame Size 4

2
Direct Rotary Handle Mechanism 1
2 NEMA 1/12 Factory Installed
Description Catalog Number Digits 19–20
2 Standard lockable handle and mechanism PDG4XHMCS HA

2 Standard lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock

Standard lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock
PDG4XHMCSN
PDG4XHMCSP
HB
HC

2 Standard lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG4XHMCSNP HE
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism PDG4XHMCE H1
2 Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock PDG4XHMCEN H2
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock H3
2
PDG4XHMCEP
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with door interlock and mechanical padlock PDG4XHMCENP H5

2
Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism 1
2 NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X Factory Installed
Description Catalog Number Digits 19–20
2 Standard lockable handle and mechanism 2 PDG4XHMDS DA
Standard lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock 2 PDG4XHMDSP DC
2 Emergency lockable handle and mechanism 2 PDG4XHMDE D1

2 Emergency lockable handle and mechanism with mechanical padlock 2

9 in (245 mm) handle mechanism shaft
PDG4XHMDEP
PDG34XHMS245
D3
—

2 17 in (445 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG34XHMS445 —

Standard NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG34XHM79S —
2 Emergency NFPA79-compliant shaft handle PDG34XHM79E —

2 Metal Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism 1

2 Description
NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X
Catalog Number

2 Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 6-inch shaft PDG4XHMDS06MH

Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 12-inch shaft PDG4XHMDS12MH
2 Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 24-inch shaft PDG4XHMDS24MH
Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 6-inch shaft PDG4XHMDE06MH
2 Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 12-inch shaft PDG4XHMDE12MH

2 Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 24-inch shaft PDG4XHMDE24MH

2 Flex Shaft Handle Mechanism

Metal Handle, High Performance Handle, Metal Handle, High Performance Handle,
2 Cable Length (ft)
NEMA 1/3R/12
Catalog Number
NEMA 1/3R/12
Catalog Number
NEMA 4/4X
Catalog Number
NEMA 4/4X
Catalog Number

2 4 PDG4XFS04 PDG4XFS04HP PDG4XFS04X PDG4XFS04HPX

5 PDG4XFS05 PDG4XFS05HP PDG4XFS05X PDG4XFS05HPX
2 6 PDG4XFS06 PDG4XFS06HP PDG4XFS06X PDG4XFS06HPX
10
2
PDG4XFS10 PDG4XFS10HP PDG4XFS10X PDG4XFS10HPX

Notes

2 1 Standard handles are black and gray; Emergency handles are red and yellow.
2 Handle mechanism shaft sold separately.

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-68 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Accessories—Frame Size 4 Dimensions and Weights—Frame Size 4
2
External Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Factory
Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2
Installed 2 8.25 (209.6) 16 (406.4) 4.38 (111.2)
Description Fit Type Catalog Number Digits 19–20
3 8.25 (209.6) 16 (406.4) 4.38 (111.2) 2
Padlockable hasp Top PDG4XPLKT L4
Padlockable hasp, Top PDG4XPLKTOFF L1
4 11.0 (279.4) 16 (406.4) 4.38 (111.2)
2
OFF only
Padlockable handle On handle PDG4XPHB —
Approximate Shipping Weight in lb (kg)
2
block Breaker Type 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
Kirk lock provision— Left side PDG4XKLKPSF L8 PDG4 800 A 30 (13.6) 30 (13.6) 39.9 (18.08) 2
left side 1
Kirk lock provision—
right side 1
Right side L9
Notes
1 Provision only. For use with Type F Kirk keylock (sold separately). 2
Bolt projection in withdrawn position is 0.375 in (9.525 mm).
Walking beam
interlock 23
Two-, three-, and four-pole PDG4XWBI234P — 2 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant

(factory suffix WB).

2
2
3 Requires two breakers.
Electrical operator 24 Vdc PDG4XROP24DC —
48–60 Vdc PDG4XROP60DC —
125 Vdc PDG4XROP125DC — 2
250 Vdc PDG4XROP250DC —
110–130 Vac PDG4XROP130AC — 2
200–240 Vac
380–440 Vac
PDG4XROP240AC
PDG4XROP440AC
—
—
2
Interphase barriers Single-pole PDG4XIB — 2
Three-pole PDG4XIB3P —
Four-pole PDG4XIB4P — 2
Neutral CTs for Busbar Type PDG4XNCTB0800 —
ground fault (PXR) 2
Service entrance Three-pole PRLSEBPD4 —
barrier kit 2
Withdrawable Three-pole, 800 A PDG4XWDR3P800A —
cassettes
Four-pole, 800 A PDG4XWDR4P800A — 2
Base Mounting Hardware 2
Description Catalog Number
2
Two-, three-, four-pole metric BMH4M
Two-, three-, four-pole English BMH4 2
2
Note: Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-69

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 5
Description Page
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-42
2 Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A)
V4-T2-57

Catalog Number / Product Selection . . . . . . V4-T2-71

2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-76
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-78
2 Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . .
High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
V4-T2-98

2 Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . .

Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers .
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-107
Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
2 Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112
Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
2 Fused Current-Limiting Module . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . . V4-T2-116
2 Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-140
V4-T2-142
V4-T2-146
2
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing . . . . .

2
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 5

2 Product Description
Frame Size 5 covers a global
Application Description
Frame Size 5 can be used to
Features and Benefits
Frame Size 5 breakers are
Standards and Certifications
Power Defense breakers are
2 range of 320 A through
1200 A with a complete
meet a wide range of circuit
protection and power
modular and available as
complete breakers from
designed and tested to meet
stringent requirements for:
offering of advanced PXR distribution needs, including the factory or as modular
2 UL
●

electronic trip units. It ground fault protection, components, including ● CSA

includes two frame sizes 100% UL ratings, high frames, trip units,
2 of 800 A and 1200 A. interrupting capacity and high accessories and terminals ● IEC (CE)
CB (CCC)
Additionally, PD-5 has a instantaneous settings for to provide flexibility for ●

2 1600 A IEC (CE) and GB

(CCC) frame that covers
selective coordination. PXR
trip units in PD-5 provide all
customers. PXR trip units
are available with advanced
800 A through 1600 A. levels of protection, including features to provide
2 energy metering with customers unparalleled
multiple communication situational awareness of
2 schemes, breaker health their electrical system.
indication and arc flash
2 reduction options.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-70 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Catalog Number / Product Selection
2
Power Defense—Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) for UL/CSA and 320–1600 A for IEC/CCC)
Frame Size 5 covers a range of 320 A through 1200 A using electronic trip units. It is available in 2
configurations of two-, three- and four-pole, with the two-pole being in the same physical size of a
three-pole variant. Additionally, an IEC / CCC option is available for 1600 A, with selectable ratings 2
from 800 A through 1600 A.
Interrupting Ratings 2
K M N P T
UL/CSA kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms 2
240 Vac
480 Vac
85
50
100
65
150
85
200
100
200
125
2
600 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 2
IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
240 Vac 85 85 100 100 150 100 200 150 — — 2
380–415 Vac 50 50 70 53 70 50 100 50 — —
440 Vac 35 35 50 40 70 50 100 50 — —
2
480 Vac 35 22.5 50 30 65 40 85 40 — —
2
525 Vac 25 20 30 25 35 25 40 25 — —
660–690 Vac 10 5 15 7.5 20 10 35 18 — — 2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETU) 2
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units. 2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated
2
PD G 5 3 M 1200 P2M N
2
Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Pole
Options
Interrupting
Ratings
Continuous
Current Ratings
Trip Unit
Type Options
Standard Terminal
Options
2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 2 = 2-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A E## 1=PXR 20 N = No terminals (imperial
3 = 3-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V 1200 = 1200 A D## 1=PXR 20D tapped conductors) 2
4 = 4-pole N = 85 kA at 480 V P## 1=PXR 25 M = No terminals (metric
(programmable N) P = 100 kA at 480 V tapped conductors)
2
K = 25 kA at 600 V
M = 35 kA at 600 V
N = 50 kA at 600 V 2
P = 65 kA at 600 V
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A E## 1=PXR 20 N = No terminals (imperial
2
PD
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V 1200 = 1200 A D## 1=PXR 20D tapped conductors)
(programmable N) N = 85 kA at 480 V P## 1=PXR 25 M = No terminals (metric
P = 100 kA at 480 V tapped conductors)
2
K = 25 kA at 600 V
M = 35 kA at 600 V
N = 50 kA at 600 V 2
P = 65 kA at 600 V
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU (125 kA at 480 V / 85 kA at 600 V)—UL/CSA Rated
2
J = UL/CSA 5 =5 3 = 3-pole T = 125 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A 1=PXR 20 N = No terminals (imperial
2
PD E##
D## 1=PXR 20D tapped conductors)
T = 85 kA at 600 V P## =PXR 25
1
KNS =Molded case switch
2
Note
1 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-74 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2) 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-71

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETU)
2 This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.
2 Molded Case Switches—Globally Rated 1

2 PD G 5 3 M 1200 P2M N
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal
2 Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A KNS = Molded Case Switch N = No terminals (imperial
2 4 = 4-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V 1200 = 1200 A tapped conductors)
M = No terminals (metric
K = 25 kA at 600 V tapped conductors)
2 M = 35 kA at 600 V

2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers—IEC/CCC Rated (only available as a complete breaker)
2
PD C = IEC/CCC 5 =5 3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 415 V 1600 = 1600 A E## 2 = PXR 20 M = Front connect
2 4 = 4-pole M = 70 kA at 415 V D## 2
P## 2
=
=
PXR 20D
PXR 25
conductor extensions
included (metric)
K = 25 kA at 600 V KNS = Molded Case R = Rear connectors
2 M = 35 kA at 600 V Switch included

2 Globally Rated Frame Only

PD-5 electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units, terminals, and accessories for field
2 configuration of a final breaker. Each Frame Only device is marked with interrupting ratings and a maximum
continuous current rating; each trip unit is also marked with a maximum continuous current rating, which must not
2 exceed that of the frame. Additionally, 100% UL Rated frames are marked as such on the Frame Only device.
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers for selecting Power Defense
2 circuit breakers and trip units.
Frame Only—Globally Rated
2 PD G 5 3 M 1200 FNN N
2 Product Series

2 PD = Power Defense

2 Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Pole
Options
Interrupting
Ratings
Continuous
Current Ratings
Trip Unit
Type Options
Standard Terminal
Options

2 G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 2 = 2-pole
3 = 3-pole
K = 50 kA at 480 V
M = 65 kA at 480 V
0800 = 800 A
1200 = 1200 A
FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals (imperial
tapped conductors)
4 = 4-pole N = 85 kA at 480 V M = No terminals (metric
2 P = 100 kA at 480 V tapped conductors)

K = 25 kA at 600 V
2 M = 35 kA at 600 V
N = 50 kA at 600 V
P = 65 kA at 600 V
2
Frame Only—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 3 = 3-pole K = 50 kA at 480 V 0800 = 800 A FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals (imperial
2 (100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V
N = 85 kA at 480 V
1200 = 1200 A tapped conductors)
M = No terminals (metric
P = 100 kA at 480 V tapped conductors)
2 K = 25 kA at 600 V
M = 35 kA at 600 V
2 N = 50 kA at 600 V
P = 65 kA at 600 V
2 Notes
1 Molded case switch may open above 14,000 A.

2 2 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-74 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2)

V4-T2-72 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Trip Units
PD-5 electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units, 2
terminals, and accessories for field configuration of a final breaker. Each frame
rating (800 A, 1200 A, and 1600 A—IEC only) must use trip units of the same 2
rating. Additionally, for two-pole breakers, three-pole trip units are used.
PDG designated trip units are for use with PDG and PDF breaker frames. The 2
100% rating for PDF (100% UL Rated) is marked on the frame, not the trip unit.
2
Trip Units Only
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers 2
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.

Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units

2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units 2
PD G 5 X PXR 3 1200 E2N 2
Product Series 2
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/ Frame Separator Trip Unit Pole Continuous Trip Unit 2
Standards Size Digit Type Designator Options Current Ratings Type and Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 5 =5 X = Accessory PXR = Power Xpert Release
Trip Unit
3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
0800 = 800 A
1200 = 1200 A
E## 1=PXR 20
D## 1=PXR 20D
2
(programmable N) P## 1=PXR 25
2
Note
1 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-74 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2) 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-73

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options—Frame Size 5

2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options
2 #(1)—Protection Type #(2)—Available Configured Options
LSI with LSIG with
2 Arcflash
Reduction
Arcflash
Reduction
—
—
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
—
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
Modbus
Maintenance Maintenance — — — ZSI — ZSI ZSI — ZSI
2 PXR ETU LSI LSIG 1 System System — — — — CAM — CAM CAM CAM
PXR 20 E 2 — — — N R M Z C W X — —
2 — 3 4 5 — R M Z C W X — —
PXR 20D D 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
2 PXR 25 P 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y

2 Descriptions of PXR Configured Options

Relays—3 Form A contacts ZSI—Zone Selective Arcflash Reduction Auxiliary Power
2 (rated for 240 Vac, 1 A) Interlocking Maintenance System, ● Connection included with
● Interface: 4 wires ● Interface: 3 wires or Maintenance Mode all PXR 20, 20D, and 25
2 (RLY1, RLY2, RLY3, (Zin, Zout, Zcomm) ● Available as trip unit trip units
RLYC Common) ● Includes ability to turn Protection Type 4 or 5 ● Required for
2 ● Programmable to indicate ON and OFF, and ● Interface: Switch and LED communications, relays,
breaker conditions indicate signals on face of trip unit and two and metering accuracy
2 ● Available as field-installable CAM—CAM Link connection
wires for remote switch
enable option
● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A
option if not pre-configured (requires a CAM module per ● Interface: 2 wires
2 (catalog number
PDG56XRELAYS) 2
breaker) ●
(24 Vdc required)
A programmable relay will
(Aux + 24 V, Aux 0 V)
● Interface: 5 wires (refer to
2 Modbus—Modbus RTU CAM IL for details)
be factory defaulted to
remote indication of
directly from breaker ● Communications Adapter Arcflash Reduction
2 ● Interface: 3 wires Modules available for Maintenance System
(RTU_D(+), RTU_D(–), Modbus TCP and PROFIBUS
2 RTU_GND)
● No additional modules
2 required
● Available as field-installable
2 option if not pre-configured
(catalog number
2 PDG56XMODRTU) 2

2 Available Continuous Current (lr) Settings on PXR Electronic Trip Units

2 Catalog Number Selection and Maximum Setting (ln)

1600
0800 1200 1600 A
2 Option Setting 800 A 1200 A (IEC only)
PXR 20 1 320 A 500 A 800 A
2 2 350 A 550 A 900 A
3 400 A 600 A 1000 A
2 4 450 A 630 A 1100 A
5 500 A 700 A 1200 A
2 6 550 A 800 A 1250 A
7 600 A 900 A 1300 A
2 8 630 A 1000 A 1400 A

2 9
10 = ln
700 A
800 A
1100 A
1200 A
1500 A
1600 A

2 PXR 20D, PXR 25 Programmable from minimum to maximum values in 10 A increments.

Notes
2 1 All neutral current sensors required for LSIG protection are sold separately.
2 Breaker Status Module PDG5XRCBSM is also required if breaker position Open/Close/Trip status is required.

2
2

V4-T2-74 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 5
Terminals for Frame 5 are available as single terminals only, unless otherwise specified.
2
To configure both line and load of a three-pole breaker, order quantity 6 terminals.
2
Terminal Types
2
2
2
2
PDG5X1T700 PDG5X1TA700
PDG5X1TA700CW
PDG5X1TA1000
PDG5X1TA1000CW
PDG5X1T1000 PDG5X1TA1200
PDG5X1TA1200CW
PDG5X1TA1201
PDG5X1TA1201CW
2
2
PDG5X1TA1200SW
PDG5X1T1200

Note: Pictures are for reference only.

2
Terminals 2
Maximum Number of AWG / kcmil Metric (mm2)
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Class
Conductors
per Phase
Range per
Conductor
Range per
Conductor
3-Pole
Catalog Number 1 Hardware Included
2
Aluminum Terminal Options 2
700 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 1–500 42.4–253 PDG5X1TA700 Imperial
1000 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–400 85–203 PDG5X1TA1000 Imperial 2
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 4 4/0–500 107–253 PDG5X1TA1200 Imperial
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 500–750 253–380 PDG5X1TA1201 Imperial
2
Copper Terminal Options
2
700 Copper Cu B, C 2 2/0–500 67.4–253 PDG5X1T700 Imperial
1000 Copper Cu B, C 3 3/0–500 85–253 PDG5X1T1000 Imperial 2
1200 Copper Cu B, C 4 3/0–400 85–203 PDG5X1T1200 Imperial
StrandAble Terminal Options 2
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 4 4/0–500 107–253 Imperial
2
PDG5X1TA1200SW
D, G, H, I, K, M 4/0–350 107–177
Control Wire Terminal Options
2
700 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 1–500 42.4–253 PDG5X1TA700CW Imperial
1000 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–400 85–203 PDG5X1TA1000CW Imperial 2
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 4 4/0–500 107–253 PDG5X1TA1200CW Imperial
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 500–750 253–380 PDG5X1TA1201CW Imperial 2
2
Conductor Extensions 23

1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G01 Imperial two-pole

1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G02 Imperial three-pole 2
1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G05 Imperial four-pole
1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G03 Metric two-pole 2
1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G04 Metric three-pole
1200 — — — — — — 5104A24G06 Metric four-pole
2
Note: Wire capacity is based on standard imperial wire sizes; metric sizes provided in table
are a direct conversion to demonstrate maximum capacity, not to denote metric wire sizes.
2
Notes 2
1 Add M at end for metric hardware.
2 Included with 100% rated breaker.
3 Kits include conductors for both sides of the breaker (e.g., 6 conductors for a three-pole breaker). Order quantity 1 per breaker.
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-75

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories
2
Internal Accessory Configurations—Frame Size 5
2 Three- and Four-Pole Circuit Breakers

2 Tripping Accessory
Options Left Pole Right Pole

2 None None Bell Alarm Options 1

Shunt Trip Bell Alarm Options 1 Auxiliary Switch Options 1

2 Auxiliary Switch Options 1 Bell and Auxiliary

Combination Options 1
Alarm and Auxiliary
2 Combination Options 1

UVR
2
2
2
2
Indicating Accessories—Frame Size 5
Alarms and Auxiliary Switches
2 Auxiliary Switch
None None 1 Form C 2 Form C 3 Form C

2 Alarm Switch None Left — PDG5X1AC PDG5X2AC PDG5XL3AC

Right — PDG5X1AC PDG5X2AC PDG5XR3AC
2 1 Form C Left PDG5XL1BC PDG5XL1AC1BC PDG5XL2AC1BC —
Right PDG5XR1BC PDG5XR1AC1BC PDG5XR2AC1BC —
2 2 Form C Left PDG5XL2BC PDG5XL1AC2BC — —
Right PDG5XR2BC PDG5XR1AC2BC — —
2
Alarm and Auxiliary Switches for Breakers with Communicating Trip Units 2
2 Auxiliary Switch
None None 1 Form C 2 Form C
2 Alarm Switch None Left — — —
Right
2
PDG5XRCBSM 3 PDG5XRC1AC PDG5XRC2AC
1 Form C Left — — —

2 2 Form C
Right
Left
PDG5XRC1BC
—
PDG5XRC1AC1BC
—
—
—

2 Right PDG5XRC2BC — —

Notes
2 1 See Indicating Accessories tables for options.
2 All electronic trip units configured with communication will automatically include a communication indicator (PDG5XRCBSM) in the right pole.

2 Up to two additional Form C contacts are available for external indication in the right pole.
3 PDG5XRCBSM is factory installed in breakers with trip units that require breaker position Open/Close/Trip status. It must be installed in breakers not already equipped

with relays or Modbus RTU when adding those features (PDG56XRELAYS or PDG56XMODRTU). Applicable to E2N trip units only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-76 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Factory Installed Indicating Accessories—Frame Size 5 1
Alarms and Auxiliary Switches
2
Auxiliary Switch
None None 1 Form C 2 Form C 3 Form C
2
Alarm Switch None Left — — — A4
2
Right NN AC A1 —
1 Form C Left — — — — 2
Right BC CC C1 —
2 Form C Left — — — — 2
Right B1 CX — —
2
Alarm and Auxiliary Switches for Breakers with Communicating Trip Units 2
Auxiliary Switch 2
None None 1 Form C 2 Form C
Alarm Switch None Left — — — 2
Right NN AC A1
1 Form C Left — — — 2
Right BC CC —
2 Form C Left — — —
2
Right B1 — —
2
Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 5 2
Shunt Trips
Factory Installed
2
2
Voltage Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Catalog Number (Digit 17–18)
48–60 Vdc PDG5XST60DCS SK
110–125 Vdc PDG5XST125DCS SL 2
220–250 Vdc PDG5XST250DCS SM
24 Vac/Vdc PDG5XST24ACDCS SN 2
48–60 Vac PDG5XST60ACS ST
110–240 Vac PDG5XST240ACS SA or SB
2
380–440 Vac PDG5XST440ACS SC
2
480–600 Vac PDG5XST600ACS SD or SE

2
Undervoltage Releases (UVRs)

Voltage Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m)

Factory Installed
Catalog Number (Digit 17–18)
2
12 Vdc PDG5XUV12DCU UH 2
24 Vdc PDG5XUV24DCU UG
48–60 Vdc PDG5XUV60DCU UJ or UK 2
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
PDG5XUV125DCU
PDG5XUV250DCU
UL
UM
2
12 Vac PDG5XUV12ACU UU
2
24 Vac PDG5XUV24ACU UF
48–60 Vac PDG5XUV60ACU UT 2
110–127 Vac PDG5XUV120ACU UA
208–240 Vac PDG5XUV240ACU UB 2
380–500 Vac PDG5XUV480ACU UC or UV
2
Note: Use PDG5XUV18DCU (Suffix US) when using Time Delay UVR.

Notes
2
2
1 Factory installation of indicating accessories available for the right pole only. Left pole accessories may be field installed.
2 All electronic trip units configured with communication will automatically include a Communication Indicator

in the right pole. Up to two additional Form C contacts are available for external indication in the right pole.
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-77

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Handle Mechanisms—Size 5
2
Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism
2 NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X Factory Installed
Description Catalog Number Digits 19–20
2 Standard lockable handle and mechanism 1 PDG5XHMDS DA
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism 1 PDG5XHMDE D1
2 12 in (305 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG56XHMDS305 —

2 Metal Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism

2
NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X
Description Catalog Number
Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 6-inch shaft
2
PDG5XHMDS06MH
Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 12-inch shaft PDG5XHMDS12MH

2 Metal standard lockable handle, mechanism, and 24-inch shaft PDG5XHMDS24MH

Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 6-inch shaft PDG5XHMDE06MH
2 Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 12-inch shaft PDG5XHMDE12MH
Metal emergency lockable handle, mechanism, and 24-inch shaft PDG5XHMDE24MH
2
2 Flex Shaft Handle Mechanism
Metal Handle, High Performance Handle, Metal Handle, High Performance Handle,

2 Cable Length (ft)

NEMA 1/3R/12
Catalog Number
NEMA 1/3R/12
Catalog Number
NEMA 4/4X
Catalog Number
NEMA 4/4X
Catalog Number

2 4 ft
5 ft
PDG5XFS04
PDG5XFS05
PDG5XFS04HP
PDG5XFS05HP
PDG5XFS04X
PDG5XFS05X
PDG5XFS04HPX
PDG5XFS05HPX

2 6 ft PDG5XFS06 PDG5XFS06HP PDG5XFS06X PDG5XFS06HPX

10 ft PDG5XFS10 PDG5XFS10HP PDG5XFS10X PDG5XFS10HPX
2
2 External Accessories—Frame Size 5 Base Mounting Hardware
External Accessories Description Catalog Number
2 Factory Two-, three-, four-pole metric BMH5M
Installed
2 Description Fit Type Catalog Number Digits 19–20
Two-, three-, four-pole English BMH5

Padlockable hasp Left-side PDG5XPLKS L5 Note: Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
2 Right-side L6
molded case switch.

2 Padlockable hasp
Padlockable hasp,
Top
Top
PDG5XPLKT
PDG5XPLKTOFF
L4
L1 Dimensions and Weights—Frame Size 5
OFF only
2 Non-padlockable handle block Field PDG5XHB —
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
Kirk key interlock kit 2 Left-side PDG5XKLKPSF L8
Right-side L9 2 8.25 (209.5) 16 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)

2 Walking beam interlock 34 Three- or four-pole PDG5XWBI34P WB 5 3 8.25 (209.5) 16 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)

Electrical operator 24 Vdc EOP5T21 — 4 11.13 (282.7) 16 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)

2 48 Vdc EOP5T22 —
Approximate Shipping Weight in lb (kg)
2 125 Vdc
120 Vac
EOP5T26
EOP5T07
—
—
Breaker Type 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
PDG5 800, 1200 46.8 (21.30) 46.8 (21.30) 58 (26.31)
2 208 Vac EOP5T09 —
and 1600 A
240 Vac EOP5T11 —
2 480 Vac EOP5T15 —
Notes
1 Handle mechanism shaft sold separately.

Neutral CTs for ground fault (PXR) Busbar type PDG5XNCTB1200 — 2 Provision only. For use with Type F Kirk keylock (sold separately).

2 Interphase barriers Three-pole PDG5XIB3P —

Bolt projection in withdrawn position is 0.375 in (9.525 mm).
3 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant

2 Four-pole PDG5XIB4P — (factory suffix “WB”).

4 Requires two breakers.
Terminal covers Three-pole PDG5XTC3P —
5 Modification code for walking beam denotes modification to the breaker; accessory

2 Service entrance barrier kit Three-pole PRLSEBPD5 — must be ordered separate.

V4-T2-78 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Contents
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 6
Description Page
2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-42
2
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-57
V4-T2-70 2
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A)
Catalog Number / Product Selection . . . . . . V4-T2-80 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-84
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-86 2
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . .
High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
V4-T2-98 2
Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . .
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-107 2
Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112 2
Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
Fused Current-Limiting Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114 2
Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . V4-T2-116
Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-140
V4-T2-142
2
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing . . . . . V4-T2-146
2
2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Frame Size 6 2
Product Description
Frame Size 6 covers a range
Application Description
Frame Size 6 can be used to
Features and Benefits
Frame Size 6 breakers are
Standards and Certifications
Power Defense breakers are
2
of 700 A through 2500 A with
a complete offering of
meet a wide range of circuit
protection and power
modular and available as
complete breakers from
designed and tested to meet
stringent requirements for: 2
advanced PXR electronic trip distribution needs, including the factory or as modular UL
2
●

units. It includes three frame ground fault protection and components, including ● CSA
sizes of 1600 A, 2000 A and 100% UL ratings. PXR trip frames, trip units,
2500 A. units in PD-6 provide all levels accessories and terminals ● IEC (CE)
CB (CCC)
2
of protection, including to provide flexibility for ●

energy metering with

multiple communication
customers. PXR trip units
are available with advanced
2
schemes, breaker health features to provide
indication and arc flash customers unparalleled 2
reduction options. situational awareness of
their electrical system. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-79

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Catalog Number / Product Selection

2
Power Defense—Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A)
2 Frame Size 6 covers a range of 700 A through 2500 A using electronic trip units. It is available
in configurations of two-, three- and four-pole, with the two-pole being in the same physical size
2 of a three-pole variant.
Interrupting Ratings
2 M N P

2 UL/CSA kA rms kA rms kA rms

240 Vac 125 150 200
2 480 Vac 65 85 100
600 Vac 35 50 65
2 IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs

2 240 Vac 135 100 150 100 200 100

380–415 Vac 70 53 70 53 100 53

2 440 Vac 50 40 70 50 100 50

480 Vac 50 30 65 40 85 40
2 525 Vac 30 25 35 25 40 25
660–690 Vac 15 7.5 20 13 35 18
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETU)
2 This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated
2
PD G 6 3 M 2500 P2M N
2
Product Series
2 PD = Power Defense

2 Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal

2
Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 2 = 2-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V 1600 = 1600 A E## 1=PXR 20 N = No terminals (imperial
3 = 3-pole N = 85 kA at 480 V 2000 = 2000 A D## 1=PXR 20D tapped conductors)
2 4 = 4-pole
(programmable N)
P = 100 kA at 480 V 2500 = 2500 A P## 1=PXR 25 M = No terminals (metric
tapped conductors)
M = 35 kA at 600 V
2 N = 50 kA at 600 V
P = 65 kA at 600 V

2
2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)

F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 3 = 3-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V 1600 = 1600 A E## 1=PXR 20 N = No terminals (imperial

2
PD
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole N = 85 kA at 480 V 2000 = 2000 A D## 1=PXR 20D tapped conductors)
(programmable N) P = 100 kA at 480 V P## 1=PXR 25 M = No terminals (metric
2 M = 35 kA at 600 V
tapped conductors)

N = 50 kA at 600 V
2 P = 65 kA at 600 V

Molded Case Switches—Globally Rated 2

2
PD G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 3 = 3-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V 1600 = 1600 A KNS = Molded Case Switch N = No terminals (imperial
2 4 = 4-pole
M = 35 kA at 600 V
2000 = 2000 A tapped conductors)
M = No terminals (metric
tapped conductors)
2
Notes
2 1 See tables and descriptions on Page V4-T2-82 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2)
2 Molded case switch may open above 17,500 A.

V4-T2-80 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Globally Rated Frame Only
PD-6 electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units, terminals, and accessories for field 2
configuration of a final breaker. Each Frame Only device is marked with interrupting ratings and a maximum
continuous current rating; each trip unit is also marked with a maximum continuous current rating, which must not 2
exceed that of the frame. Additionally, 100% UL Rated frames are marked as such on the Frame Only device.
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers for selecting Power Defense 2
circuit breakers and trip units.
Frame Only—Globally Rated 2
PD G 6 3 M 2500 FNN N 2
Product Series 2
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Pole
Options
Interrupting
Ratings
Continuous
Current Ratings
Trip Unit
Type Options
Standard Terminal
Options
2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 2 = 2-pole
3 = 3-pole
M = 65 kA at 480 V
N = 85 kA at 480 V
1600 = 1600 A
2000 = 2000 A
FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals (imperial
tapped conductors) 2
4 = 4-pole P = 100 kA at 480 V 2500 = 2500 A M = No terminals (metric

M = 35 kA at 600 V
tapped conductors)
2
N = 50 kA at 600 V
P = 65 kA at 600 V 2
Frame Only—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated) 2
PD F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 3 = 3-pole M = 65 kA at 480 V 1600 = 1600 A FNN = Frame Only N = No terminals (imperial 2
(100% UL Rated) 4 = 4-pole N = 85 kA at 480 V 2000 = 2000 A tapped conductors)
P = 100 kA at 480 V M = No terminals (metric
tapped conductors)
2
M = 35 kA at 600 V
N = 50 kA at 600 V
P = 65 kA at 600 V
2
Trip Units 2
PD-6 electronic breakers may also be purchased as separate frames, trip units, terminals, and accessories for field
configuration of a final breaker. Each frame rating (1600 A, 2000 A, and 2500 A) must use trip units of the same 2
rating. Additionally, for two-pole breakers, three-pole trip units are used.
PDG designated trip units are for use with PDG and PDF breaker frames. The 100% rating for PDF (100% UL Rated) 2
is marked on the frame, not the trip unit.
2
Trip Units Only
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers for selecting Power Defense 2
circuit breakers and trip units.

Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units 2

Power Xpert Release (PXR) Electronic Trip Units
2
PD G 6 X PXR 3 2500 E2N
2
2
Product Series
PD = Power Defense

2
Certifications/ Frame Separator Trip Unit Pole Continuous Trip Unit
Standards Size Digit Type Designator Options Current Ratings Type and Options 2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 6 =6 X = Accessory PXR = Power Xpert Release 3 = 3-pole 1600 = 1600 A E## 1=PXR 20
Trip Unit 2000 = 2000 A
4 = 4-pole
(programmable N) 2500 = 2500 A
D## 1=PXR 20D
P## 1=PXR 25 2
2
Note
1 See PXR Trip Unit Options table on Page V4-T2-82 for protection type (# ) and available configured options (# ).
(1) (2) 2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-81

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Globally Rated Frame Only

2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options
2 #(1)—Protection Type #(2)—Available Configured Options
LSI with LSIG with
2 Arcflash
Reduction
Arcflash
Reduction
—
—
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
—
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
—
Relays
Modbus
Relays
Modbus
Maintenance Maintenance — — — ZSI — ZSI ZSI — ZSI
2 PXR ETU LSI LSIG 1 System System — — — — CAM — CAM CAM CAM
PXR 20 E 2 — — — N R M Z C W X — —
2 — 3 4 5 — R M Z C W X — —
PXR 20D D 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y
2 PXR 25 P 2 3 4 5 — — M — — W — D Y

2 Descriptions of PXR Configured Options

Relays—3 Form A contacts ZSI—Zone Selective Arcflash Reduction Auxiliary Power
2 (rated for 240 Vac, 1 A) Interlocking Maintenance System, ● Connection included with
● Interface: 4 wires ● Interface: 3 wires or Maintenance Mode all PXR 20, 20D, and 25
2 (RLY1, RLY2, RLY3, (Zin, Zout, Zcomm) ● Available as trip unit trip units
RLYC Common) ● Includes ability to turn Protection Type 4 or 5 ● Required for
2 ● Programmable to indicate ON and OFF, and ● Interface: Switch and LED communications, relays,
breaker conditions indicate signals on face of trip unit and two and metering accuracy
2 ● Available as field-installable CAM—CAM Link connection
wires for remote switch
enable option
● 24 Vdc, 0.5 A
option if not pre-configured (requires a CAM module per ● Interface: 2 wires
2 (catalog number
PDG56XRELAYS)
breaker) ●
(24 Vdc required)
A programmable relay will
(Aux + 24 V, Aux 0 V)
● Interface: 5 wires (refer to
2 Modbus—Modbus RTU CAM IL for details)
be factory defaulted to
remote indication of
directly from breaker ● Communications Adapter Arcflash Reduction
2 ● Interface: 3 wires Modules available for Maintenance System
(RTU_D(+), RTU_D(–), Modbus TCP and PROFIBUS
2 RTU_GND)
● No additional modules
2 required
● Available as field-installable
2 option if not pre-configured
(catalog number
2 PDG56XMODRTU)

2 Available Continuous Current (lr) Settings on PXR Electronic Trip Units

Catalog Number Selection and Maximum Setting (ln)
2 Option Setting
1600
1600 A
2000
2000 A
2500
2500 A

2 PXR 20 1 700 A 1000 A 1600 A

2 800 A 1100 A 1700 A
2 3 900 A 1200 A 1800 A
4 1000 A 1250 A 1900 A
2 5 1100 A 1400 A 2000 A
6 1200 A 1600 A 2100 A
2 7 1250 A 1700 A 2200 A
8 1400 A 1800 A 2300 A
2 9 1500 A 1900 A 2400 A

2 PXR 20D, PXR 25

10 = ln 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A
Programmable from minimum to maximum values in 10 A increments.

2 Note
1 All neutral current sensors required for LSIG protection are sold separately.

2
2
2

V4-T2-82 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 6
Terminals for Frame 6 are available as single terminals only, unless otherwise specified.
2
To configure both line and load of a three-pole breaker, order quantity 6 terminals.
2
Terminal Types 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
PDG6X1TA1600 PDG6X3TA2000 PDG6X1T1600 PDG6X1T2000RC
PDG6X1T2500RC 2
PDF6X1T2000RC

Note: Pictures are for reference only. 2

Terminals
2
Maximum
Breaker Terminal Wire Wire
Number of
Conductors
AWG / kcmil
Range per
Metric (mm2)
Range per 3-Pole
2
Amperes Body Type Type Class per Phase Conductor Conductor Catalog Number 1 Hardware Included
Aluminum Terminal Options
2
1600 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 4 500–1000 253–507 PDG6X1TA1600 Imperial
2
2000 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 6 2–600 33.6 –304 PDG6X3TA2000 2 Imperial bus connection
Copper Terminal Options 2
1600 Copper Cu B, C 4 1–600 42.4–304 PDG6X1T1600 Imperial
Rear Connectors 3 2
2000 Copper Imperial
2
PDG6X1T2000RC
2000 Copper PDF6X1T2000RC 4 Imperial
2500 Copper PDG6X1T2500RC Imperial
2
Note: Wire capacity is based on standard imperial wire sizes; metric sizes provided in table
are a direct conversion to demonstrate maximum capacity, not to denote metric wire sizes. 2
Notes
1 Add M at end for metric hardware. 2
2 Only available for three-pole breaker; order quantity 1 per breaker side, or quantity 2 per breaker.
3 Kit includes one conductor and hardware; order quantity 6 for both sides of a three-pole breaker. 2
4 Included with 100% rated breaker.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-83

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories
2
Internal Accessory Configurations—Frame Size 6
2 All Frame 6 accessories are installed in an internal pocket to the right of the breaker handle.

2 Internal Accessory
Accessory Accessory
2 Slot 1 Options Slot 2 Options
None None
2 2 Form C 2 Form C

2
Lower Accessory Lower Accessory Lower Accessory
2 Slot 1 Options Slot 2 Options Slot 3 Options
None None None
2 Shunt trip Shunt trip UVR
Alarm switch UVR Alarm switch
2 — Alarm switch —

2
Indicating Accessories—Frame Size 6
2 Indicating Accessories 12
2 Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switch
1 Form C PDG6X1BC —
2 2 Form C PDG6X2BC PDG6X2AC
4 Form C — PDG6X4AC
2
2 Factory Installed Indicating Accessories
Auxiliary
2 None 2 Form C 4 Form C
Alarm switch None NN A1 A7
2 1 Form C BC C1 C9
2 Form C B1 CY CZ
2 Notes

2 1 All PDG6 indicating accessories come with 29 in/0.75 m pigtails.

2 All PDG6 indicating accessories are installed in the accessory pocket to the right of the breaker handle.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-84 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Tripping Accessories—Frame Size 6
2
Shunt Trips
Factory Installed 2
Voltage Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m) Catalog Number (Digit 17–18)
48–60 Vdc PDG6XST60DCS SK 2
110–125 Vdc PDG6XST125DCS SL
220–250 Vdc PDG6XST250DCS SM 2
24 Vac/ Vdc
48–60 Vac
PDG6XST24ACDCS
PDG6XST60ACS
SN
ST
2
110–240 Vac PDG6XST240ACS SA or SB 2
380–440 Vac PDG6XST440ACS SC
480–600 Vac PDG6XST600ACS SD or SE 2
Undervoltage Releases (UVRs)
2
Voltage Pigtail (29 in / 0.75 m)
Factory Installed
Catalog Number (Digit 17–18)
2
12 Vdc PDG6XUV12DCU UH 2
24 Vdc PDG6XUV24DCU UG
48–60 Vdc PDG6XUV60DCU UJ or UK 2
125 Vdc PDG6XUV125DCU UL
250 Vdc PDG6XUV250DCU UM
2
12 Vac
24 Vac
PDG6XUV12ACU
PDG6XUV24ACU
UU
UF
2
48–60 Vac PDG6XUV60ACU UT 2
110–127 Vac PDG6XUV120ACU UA
208–240 Vac PDG6XUV240ACU UB 2
380–500 Vac UC or UV
2
PDG6XUV480ACU

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-85

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Handle Mechanisms—Size 6
2
Variable Depth Rotary Handle Mechanism
2 NEMA 1/3R/12/4/4X Factory Installed
Description Catalog Number Digits 19–20
2 Standard lockable handle and mechanism 1 PDG6XHMDS DA
Emergency lockable handle and mechanism 1 PDG6XHMDE D1
2 12 in (305 mm) handle mechanism shaft PDG56XHMDS305 —

2
Flex Shaft Handle Mechanism
2 Metal Handle, High Performance Handle, Metal Handle, High Performance Handle,
NEMA 1/3R/12 NEMA 1/3R/12 NEMA 4/4X NEMA 4/4X

2 Cable Length (ft) Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
4 ft PDG6XFS04 PDG6XFS04HP PDG6XFS04X PDG6XFS04HPX

2 5 ft PDG6XFS05 PDG6XFS05HP PDG6XFS05X PDG6XFS05HPX

6 ft PDG6XFS06 PDG6XFS06HP PDG6XFS06X PDG6XFS06HPX
2
2 External Accessories—Frame Size 6 Dimensions and Weights—Frame Size 6
External Accessories
2 Factory
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
Installed
2 Description Fit Type Catalog Number Digits 19–20 2 15.5 (393.7) 16 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)

Padlockable hasp Right PDG6XPLKR L6 3 15.5 (393.7) 16 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)

2 Padlockable hasp, OFF only Right PDG6XPLKROFF L3 4 20 (508.0) 16 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)

2 Kirk key interlock kit Right

2 PDG6XKLKPRF L9
Walking beam interlock 34 Three-pole PDG6XWBI3P WB 5
Approximate Shipping Weight in lb (kg)

2 Electrical operator 48 Vdc EOP6T21K —

Breaker Type 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

120 Vac EOP6T08K — PDG6 1600 and 2000 A 102 (46.3) 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)

2 240 Vac EOP6T11K — PDG6 2500 A 135 (61.2) 135 (61.2) 182 (82.6)

Neutral CTs for Busbar type —

2
PDG6XNCTB2500 Notes
ground fault (PXR) 1 Handle mechanism shaft sold separately.
2 Provision only. For use with Type F Kirk keylock (sold separately).

2 Bolt projection in withdrawn position is 1.00 in (25.4 mm).

3 Breaker must be ordered with walking beam interlock ready modification from plant

(factory suffix “WB”).

2 4 Requires two breakers.
5 Modification code for Walking Beam denotes modification to the breaker; accessory

2 must be ordered separate.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-86 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A)
2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Motor Circuit Protectors
Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications
2
Motor circuit protectors (MCPs)
are instantaneous-only
MCPs are designed to be
used in combination with
Power Defense MCPs are of
a modular design, with field-
MCPs are UL Recognized
Components (UL File E7819)
2
devices available in ratings
from 3 A to 600 A. Power
motor starters. Power
Defense MCPs are typically
installable accessories and
terminals. Accessories and
and comply with the
applicable requirements of 2
Defense MCPs are available used in combination with terminals for MCPs are the UL 489 standard. Eaton
in Frame Sizes 1, 2 and 3, and motor starters, usually NEMA common with the accessories MCPs are also UL Listed in 2
are designated by the trip unit sizes 0 through 6. Each MCP used for the equivalent frame combination with Eaton
digits in the catalog number device is calibrated at a size molded case circuit motor starters under various 2
(Digits 11–13), always use minimum for six trip settings breaker. Accessories may be UL file number; reference
M as Digit 11. Digit 12
designates the calibration
to provide flexibility in its
application. Typical motor full
field or factory installed. For
factory installation, follow the
UL’s website for additional
information.
2
2
(S = Standard, H = High, load currents and NEMA same catalog numbering
L = Low), and always use starter sizes are provided for guidelines provided for the MCPs are also designed to
A as Digit 13 to indicate an each device and setting, only respective equivalent circuit comply with CSA Standard
adjustable instantaneous as a guide for selecting breaker frame. C22.2 No. 5, IEC 60947-2
(Annex O), and GB 14048.2.
2
setting. MCPs; actual motor
characteristics and design
parameters must be used
As such, they carry the
following markings: 2
to determine the adequate
device and setting to be
● UL 2
● CSA
used in the application.
● IEC (CE) 2
● CB (CCC)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-87

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Frame Size 1 Product Selection

2 PDG1 MCPs cover a Where a 13x setting is All catalog numbers shown Ratings
continuous current range required for an intermediate include standard line and load
2 of 3 A through 100 A, with FLA value, alternate CAM steel terminals (Digit 14 = J).
Maximum Application Voltage
(UL and CSA)
trip calibration settings from settings and/or MCP ratings For aluminum terminals, use 600Y/347 Vac
2
●
9 A through 1100 A. All should be used. T in Digit 14 of the catalog
devices are a thtree-pole number.
● 480 Vac
A High Calibration MCP for
2 250 Vdc
●
configuration and have a
single interrupting capacity the 100 A device is also Terminal catalog numbers
Note: For DC applications, actual
available for special listed in the table are for one
2 as an IEC 60947-2 (Annex O)
instantaneous trip circuit applications where the side of the MCP; order 2 sets
trip levels are approximately 40%
higher than values shown.
breaker. ampere rating of the for line and load if ordering
2 PDG1 MCPs include six trip
disconnecting means cannot
be less than 115% of the
separate. IEC Instantaneous Circuit
Breaker (ICB) Interrupting
Capacity (kA)
2 settings, corresponding to
3x through 11x of the
motor full load ampere rating,
and includes settings Icu Ics
continuous amperage rating corresponding to 5x to 15x of
2 of the device, and each the continuous ampere rating
240 Vac
415 Vac
5
5
5
5
corresponding to 13x the of the device.
2 minimum FLA value shown in 690 Vac 3 1.5
the table below.
2
PDG1 Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration
2 MCP Trip MCP Trip Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
Continuous CAM Setting Setting Typical NEMA Typical Motor Included Optional
2 MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Full Load Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T)
PDG13M0003MSAJ 3 A 3x 9 0 0.69–0.91 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
2 B 5x 15 1.1–1.3
(Steel) (Aluminum)

2 C
D
7x
9x
21
27
1.6–1.7
2.0–2.2

2 E 10x 30 2.3–2.5
F 11x 33 2.6–2.8
2 PDG13M0007MSAJ 7 A 3x 21 0 1.5–2.0 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
(Steel) (Aluminum)
B 5x 35 2.6–3.1
2 C 7x 49 3.7–3.9

2 D 9x 63 4.8–5.2
E 10x 70 5.3–5.7

2 F 11x 77 5.8–6.1
PDG13M0015MSAJ 15 A 3x 45 0 3.4–4.5 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
2 B 5x 75 5.7–6.8
(Steel) (Aluminum)

C 7x 105 8.0–9.1
2 D 9x 135 10.4–11.4

2 E 10x 150 11.5–12.6

F 11x 165 12.7–13.0
2 PDG13M0030MSAJ 30 A 3x 90 1 3.9–9.1 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
(Steel) (Aluminum)
B 5x 150 11.5–13.7
2 C 7x 210 16.1–18.3

2 D
E
9x
10x
270
300
20.7–22.9
23.0–25.2

2 F 11x 330 25.3–26.1

PDG13M0050MSAJ 50 A 3x 150 2 11.5–15.2 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
2 B 5x 250 19.2–22.9
(Steel) (Aluminum)

C 7x 350 26.9–30.6
2 D 9x 450 34.6–38.3

2 E 10x 500 38.4–42.1

F 11x 550 42.2–43.5

V4-T2-88 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
PDG1 Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration, continued
MCP Trip MCP Trip Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2
MCP Catalog Number
Continuous
Amperes
CAM
Setting
Setting
(Mult)
Setting
(Amps)
Typical NEMA
Starter Size
Typical Motor
Full Load Current Amperes
Included
(Dig 14 = J)
Optional
(Dig 14 = T) 2
70 A 3x 210 2 16.1–30.6
2
PDG13M0070MSAJ PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
(Steel) (Aluminum)
B 5x 350 26.9–32.2
C 7x 490 37.6–42.9
2
D 9x 630 48.4–53.7
E 10x 700 53.8–59.1 2
F 11x 770 59.2–60.9
PDG13M0100MSAJ 100 A 3x 300 3 23–30.6 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125 2
(Steel) (Aluminum)
B
C
5x
7x
500
700
38.4–46.0
53.8–61.4
2
D 9x 900 69.2–76.8 2
E 10x 1000 76.9–84.5
F 11x 1100 84.6–87.0 2
2
PDG1 Motor Circuit Protectors—High Calibration
MCP Trip MCP Trip Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers 2
Continuous CAM Setting Setting Typical NEMA Typical Motor Included Optional
MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Full Load Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) 2
PDG13M0100MHAJ 100 A 5x 500 3 38.4–46.0 PDG1X3T125 PDG1X3TA125
B 7.5x 750 57.6–65.2
(Steel) (Aluminum) 2
C 10x 1000 76.9–84.5
2
D 12.5x 1250 1

E 13.75x 1375 1
2
F 15x 1500 1

Note
2
1 Settings above 85 A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the ampere rating

of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-89

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Frame Size 2 Product Selection

2 PDG2 MCPs cover a Where a 13x setting is Additionally, four Low Ratings
continuous current range of required for an intermediate Calibration devices are
2 3 A through 150 A, with trip FLA value, alternate dial available for low magnetic
Maximum Application Voltage
(UL and CSA)
calibration settings from 9 A settings and/or MCP ratings protection special 600 Vac
2
●
through 2500 A. All devices should be used. applications.
are a three-pole configuration
● 250 Vdc
A High Calibration MCP for All catalog numbers shown
2 and have a single interrupting
capacity as an IEC 60947-2 the 150 A device is also include standard line and load
Note: For DC applications, actual
trip levels are approximately 40%
available for special terminals (Digit 14 = J). For higher than values shown.
2 (Annex O) instantaneous
circuit breaker. applications where the optional terminals, use T, W
IEC Instantaneous Circuit
ampere rating of the or other options in Digit 14 as
2 PDG2 MCPs include eight trip
settings, corresponding to
disconnecting means cannot
be less than 115% of the
described in the Frame Size 2
circuit breaker section of the
Breaker (ICB) Interrupting
Capacity (kA)

2 3x through 10x of the motor full load ampere rating. catalog. Icu Ics
continuous amperage rating 240 Vac 5 5
of the device, and each Terminal catalog numbers
2 corresponding to 13x the listed in the table are for one
side of the MCP; order 2 sets
415 Vac
690 Vac
5
3
5
1.5
minimum FLA value shown
2 in the table below. for line and load if ordering
separate.

2 PDG2 Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration

2 Continuous CAM
MCP Trip
Setting
MCP Trip
Setting Typical NEMA
Typical Motor
Full Load
Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
Included Optional Optional
MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) (Dig 14 = W)
2 PDG23M0003MSAJ 3 A 3.0 9 0 0.69–0.91 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3T100
(Steel) (Aluminum) (Steel)
2 B 4.0 12 0.92–1.0
(Same as J)
C 5.0 15 1.1–1.2
2 D 6.0 18 1.3–1.5
E 7.0 21 1.6–1.7
2 F 8.0 24 1.8–1.9
G 9.0 27 2.0–2.2
2 H 10.0 30 2.3–2.5

2 PDG23M0007MSAJ 7 A 3.0 21 0 1.50–2 PDG2X3T100

(Steel)
PDG2X3TA50
(Aluminum)
PDG2X3T100
(Steel)
B 4.0 28 2.10–2.5
(Same as J)
2 C 5.0 35 2.6–3.1
D 6.0 42 3.2–3.6
2 E 7.0 49 3.7–3.9

2 F
G
8.0
9.0
56
63
4.3–4.7
4.8–5.2

2 H 10.0 70 5.3–5.7
PDG23M0015MSAJ 15 A 3.0 45 0 3.40–4.5 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3T100
2 B 4.0 60 4.60–5.6
(Steel) (Aluminum) (Steel)
(Same as J)
C 5.0 75 5.7–6.8
2 D 6.0 90 6.9–7.9

2 E 7.0 105 8.0–9.1

F 8.0 120 9.2–10.3

2 G 9.0 135 10.4–11.4

H 10.0 150 11.5–12.6
2 PDG23M0030MSAJ 30 A 3.0 90 1 6.90–9.1 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3T100
(Steel) (Aluminum) (Steel)
B 4.0 120 9.20–11.4
2 C 5.0 150 11.5–13.7
(Same as J)

2 D 6.0 180 13.8–16.0

E 7.0 210 16.1–18.3
2 F 8.0 240 18.4–20.6
G 9.0 270 20.7–22.9
2 H 10.0 300 23.0–25.2

V4-T2-90 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
PDG2 Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration, continued
MCP Trip MCP Trip Typical Motor Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2
MCP Catalog Number
Continuous
Amperes
CAM
Setting
Setting
(Mult)
Setting
(Amps)
Typical NEMA
Starter Size
Full Load
Current Amperes
Included
(Dig 14 = J)
Optional
(Dig 14 = T)
Optional
(Dig 14 = W) 2
50 A 3.0 150 2 11.50–15.2
2
PDG23M0050MSAJ PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3T100
(Steel) (Aluminum) (Steel)
B 4.0 200 15.30–19.1
(Same as J)
C 5.0 250 19.2–22.9
2
D 6.0 300 23.0–26.8
E 7.0 350 26.9–30.6 2
F 8.0 400 30.7–34.5
G 9.0 450 34.6–38.3 2

PDG23M0100MSAJ 100
H
A
10.0
3.0
500
300 3
38.4–42.1
23.00–30.6 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA100 PDG2X3T100
2
(Steel) (Aluminum) (Steel)
B 4.0 400 30.70–38.3
(Same as J) 2
C 5.0 500 38.4–46.0
D 6.0 600 46.1–53.7 2
E 7.0 700 53.8–61.4
F 8.0 800 61.5–69.1
2
G 9.0 900 69.2–76.8
2
H 10.0 1000 76.9–84.5
PDG23M0150MSAJ 150 A 3.0 450 4 34.60–46 PDG2X3TA225
(Aluminum)
PDG2X3TA150
(Aluminum)
PDG2X3T150
(St. Steel)
2
B 4.0 600 46.10–57.5
C 5.0 750 57.6–69.1 2
D 6.0 900 69.2–80.6
E 7.0 1050 80.7–92.2
2
F 8.0 1200 92.3–103.7
2
G 9.0 1350 103.8–115.2
H 10.0 1500 115.3–126.7 2
PDG2 Motor Circuit Protectors—High Calibration
2
Continuous CAM
MCP Trip
Setting
MCP Trip
Setting Typical NEMA
Typical Motor
Full Load
Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
Included Optional Optional
2
2
MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) (Dig 14 = W)
PDG23M0150MHAJ 150 A 5.0 750 4 57.0–75.0 PDG2X3TA225 PDG2X3TA150 PDG2X3T150
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (St. Steel)
B 6.7 1000 76.0–95.0 2
C 8.3 1250 96.0–114.0
D 10.0 1500 115.0–130.7 2
E 11.7 1750 1

F 13.3 2000 1 2
G 15.0 2250
2
1

H 16.7 2500 1

Note 2
1 Settings above 130 A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the ampere rating

of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating 2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-91

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

PDG2 Motor Circuit Protectors—Special Low Calibration

2 MCP Trip MCP Trip Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers

2 MCP Catalog Number

Continuous
Amperes
CAM
Setting
Setting
(Mult)
Setting
(Amps)
Included
(Dig 14 = J)
Optional
(Dig 14 = T)
Optional
(Dig 14 = W)
25 A 1.6 40
2 PDG23M0025MLAJ
B 1.7 43
PDG2X3T100
(Steel)
PDG2X3TA50
(Aluminum)
PDG2X3T100
(Steel)
(Same as J)
2 C 1.8 46
D 2.0 49
2 E 2.1 52
F 2.2 55
2 G 2.3 58

2 PDG23M0050MLAJ 50
H
A
2.4
1.6
60
80 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA50 PDG2X3T100
(Steel) (Aluminum) (Steel)
2 B 1.7 87
(Same as J)
C 1.9 93
2 D 2.0 98
E 2.1 103
2 F 2.2 109

2 G 2.3 115
H 2.4 120
2 PDG23M0070MLAJ 70 A 1.6 115 PDG2X3T100
(Steel)
PDG2X3TA100
(Aluminum)
PDG2X3T100
(Steel)
B 1.7 122 (Same as J)
2 C 1.9 130
D 2.0 139
2 E 2.1 145

2 F 2.2 153
G 2.3 160
2 H 2.4 170
PDG23M0100MLAJ 100 A 1.6 160 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA100 PDG2X3T100
2 B 1.7 174
(Steel) (Aluminum) (Steel)
(Same as J)

2 C
D
1.9
2.0
185
196

2 E 2.1 207
F 2.2 218
2 G 2.3 229
H 2.4 240
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-92 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
400 A Frame Size 3 Product Selection
PDG3 400 A Frame MCPs Where a 13x setting is All catalog numbers shown Ratings 2
cover a continuous current required for an intermediate include standard aluminum
range of 70 A through 400 A, FLA value, alternate dial line and load terminals
Maximum Application Voltage
(UL and CSA) 2
with trip calibration settings settings and/or MCP ratings (Digit 14 = J). For optional 600 Vac
2
●
from 350 A through 4500 A. should be used. terminals, use T (aluminum),
All devices are a three-pole W (copper) or other options in
● 250 Vdc
A High Calibration MCP
configuration in a 400 A frame
and have a single interrupting for the 400 A frame device
Digit 14 as described in the
Frame Size 3 circuit breaker
Note: For DC applications, actual
trip levels are approximately 40% 2
capacity as an IEC 60947-2 is also available for special section of the catalog. higher than values shown.
(Annex O) instantaneous applications where the
IEC Instantaneous Circuit
2
circuit breaker. ampere rating of the Terminal catalog numbers

PDG3 MCPs include nine trip

disconnecting means cannot
be less than 115% of the
listed in the table are for one
side of the MCP; order 2 sets
Breaker (ICB) Interrupting
Capacity (kA) 2
2
settings, corresponding to motor full load ampere rating. for line and load if ordering Icu Ics
5x through 10x of the separate. 240 Vac 100 100
continuous amperage rating
of the device and each
415 Vac
690 Vac
70
15
53
7.5
2
corresponding to 13x the
minimum FLA value shown 250 Vdc 22 22
2
in the table below.
2
PDG3 400 A Frame Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration
Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2
MCP Trip MCP Trip Typical Motor

MCP Catalog Number

Continuous
Amperes
CAM
Setting
Setting
(Mult)
Setting
(Amps)
Typical NEMA
Starter Size
Full Load
Current Amperes
Included
(Dig 14 = J)
Optional
(Dig 14 = T)
Optional
(Dig 14 = W) 2
PDG33M0070MSAJ 70 A
B
5.0
5.7
350
400
4 27.0–30.7
30.8–33.8
PDG3X3TA300
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA402
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T300
(Copper) 2
C 6.3 440 33.9–36.9 2
D 6.9 480 5 37.0–40.3
E 7.5 525 40.4–43.8 2
F 8.1 570 43.9–46.9
G 8.7 610 47.0–50.7
2
H 9.4 660 50.8–53.8
2
I 10.0 700 53.9–57.2
PDG33M0100MSAJ 100 A 5.0 500 5 38.5–43.4 PDG3X3TA300
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA402
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T300
(Copper)
2
B 5.7 565 43.5–48.0
C 6.3 626 48.1–53.0 2
D 6.9 690 53.1–57.6
E 7.5 750 57.7–62.3
2
F 8.1 810 62.4–67.3
2
G 8.8 875 67.4–71.9
H 9.4 935 72.0–76.9 2
I 10.0 1000 77.0–81.6
PDG33M0125MSAJ 125 A 5.0 625 5 48.1–53.8 PDG3X3TA300 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T300 2
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper)
B
C
5.6
6.2
700
780
53.9–59.9
60.0–66.1
2
D 6.9 860 66.2–72.3 2
E 7.5 940 72.4–78.4
F 8.2 1020 78.5–83.8 2
G 8.7 1090 83.9–89.9
H 9.4 1170 90.0–96.1
2
I 10.0 1250 96.2–102.0
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-93

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

PDG3 400 A Frame Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration, continued

2 MCP Trip MCP Trip Typical Motor Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers

2 MCP Catalog Number

Continuous
Amperes
CAM
Setting
Setting
(Mult)
Setting
(Amps)
Typical NEMA
Starter Size
Full Load
Current Amperes
Included
(Dig 14 = J)
Optional
(Dig 14 = T)
Optional
(Dig 14 = W)
150 A 5.0 750 5 57.7–64.6
2 PDG33M0150MSAJ
B 5.6 840 64.7–71.9
PDG3X3TA300
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA402
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T300
(Copper)

2 C 6.2 935 72.0–79.2

D 6.9 1030 79.3–86.5
2 E 7.5 1125 86.6–93.8
F 8.1 1220 93.9–101.1
2 G 8.8 1315 101.2–108.4

2 H
I
9.4
10.0
1410
1500
108.5–115.3
115.4–122.4

2 PDG33M0175MSAJ 175 A 5.0 875 5 67.4–75.3 PDG3X3TA300

(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA402
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T300
(Copper)
B 5.6 980 75.4–83.8
2 C 6.2 1090 83.9–92.3
D 6.9 1200 92.4–100.7
2 E 7.5 1310 100.8–109.2

2 F 8.1 1420 109.3–117.6

G 8.7 1530 117.7–126.1
2 H 9.4 1640 126.2–134.6
I 10.0 1750 134.7–142.8
2 PDG33M0200MSAJ 200 A 5.0 1000 5 77.0–86.5 PDG3X3TA300 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T300
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper)
B 5.6 1125 86.6–96.1
2 C 6.3 1250 96.2–105.7

2 D 6.9 1375 105.8–115.3

E 7.5 1500 115.4–124.9
2 F 8.1 1625 125.0–134.6
G 8.8 1750 134.7–144.2
2 H 9.4 1875 144.3–153.8

2 PDG33M0225MSAJ 225
I
A
10.0
5.0
2000
1125 5
153.9–163.3
86.6–97.3 PDG3X3TA300 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T300
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper)
2 B 5.6 1265 97.4–108.4
C 6.3 1410 108.5–118.8
2 D 6.9 1545 118.9–129.9
E 7.5 1690 130.0–140.7
2 F 8.1 1830 140.8–151.5

2 G 8.8 1970 151.6–162.3

H 9.4 2110 162.4–173.0
2 I 10.0 2250 173.1–183.6
PDG33M0250MSAJ 250 A 5.0 1250 5 96.2–108.0 PDG3X3TA350 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T350
2 B 5.6 1405 108.1–119.9
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper)

C 6.2 1560 120.0–132.3

2 D 6.9 1720 132.4–144.2

2 E 7.5 1875 144.3–156.1

F 8.1 2030 156.2–168.0
2 G 8.7 2185 168.1–179.9
H 9.4 2340 180.0–192.3
2 I 10.0 2500 192.4–204.0

2
2

V4-T2-94 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
PDG3 400 A Frame Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration, continued
MCP Trip MCP Trip Typical Motor Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2
MCP Catalog Number
Continuous
Amperes
CAM
Setting
Setting
(Mult)
Setting
(Amps)
Typical NEMA
Starter Size
Full Load
Current Amperes
Included
(Dig 14 = J)
Optional
(Dig 14 = T)
Optional
(Dig 14 = W) 2
300 A 5.0 1500 5 115.4–129.9
2
PDG33M0300MSAJ PDG3X3TA350 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T350
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper)
B 5.6 1690 130.0–144.2
C 6.3 1875 144.3–158.4
2
D 6.9 2060 158.5–173.0
E 7.5 2250 173.1–187.6 2
F 8.1 2440 187.7–201.9
G 8.8 2625 202.0–216.1 2
H
I
9.4
10.0
2810
3000
216.2–230.7
230.8–244.9
2
PDG33M0350MSAJ 350 A 5.0 1750 5 134.7–151.5 PDG3X3TA350
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA402
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T350
(Copper)
2
B 5.6 1970 151.6–168.4
C 6.3 2190 168.5–185.3 2
D 6.9 2410 185.4–201.9
E 7.5 2625 202.0–218.8
2
F 8.1 2845 218.9–235.7
2
G 8.8 3065 235.8–252.6
H 9.4 3285 252.7–269.2 2
I 10.0 3500 269.3–285.7
PDG33M0400MSAJ 400 A 5.0 2000 5 153.9–173.0 PDG3X3T400 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T400 2
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper)
B 5.6 2250 173.1–192.3
C 6.3 2500 192.4–211.5
2
D 6.9 2750 211.6–230.7
2
E 7.5 3000 230.8–249.9
F 8.1 3250 250.0–269.2 2
G 8.8 3500 269.3–288.4
H 9.4 3750 288.5–307.6 2
I 10.0 4000 307.7–326.9
2
PDG3 400 A Frame Motor Circuit Protectors—High Calibration 2
Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2
MCP Trip MCP Trip Typical Motor
Continuous CAM Setting Setting Typical NEMA Full Load Included Optional Optional
MCP Catalog Number Amperes Setting (Mult) (Amps) Starter Size Current Amperes (Dig 14 = J) (Dig 14 = T) (Dig 14 = W)
PDG33M0400MHAJ 400 A 5.6 2250 5 173.1–194.5 PDG3X3T400 PDG3X3TA402 PDG3X3T400 2
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper)
B 6.3 2530 194.6–216.1
C 7.0 2810 216.2–237.6
2
D 7.7 3090 237.7–259.5
2
E 8.4 3375 259.6–281.1
F 9.1 3655 281.2–302.6 2
G 9.8 3935 302.7–324.1
H 10.5 4215 324.2–346.1 2
I 11.3 4500 346.2–368.1
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-95

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

600 A Frame Size 3 Product Selection

2 PDG3 600 A MCPs cover a continuous amperage rating other options in Digit 14 as Note: For DC applications, actual
continuous current range of of the device, and each described in the Frame Size 3 trip levels are approximately 40%
2 250 A through 600 A, with corresponding to 13x the circuit breaker section of the higher than values shown.
trip calibration settings from minimum FLA value shown catalog. IEC Instantaneous Circuit
2 1250 A through 6000 A. in the table below. Where a
Terminal catalog numbers Breaker (ICB) Interrupting
All devices are a three-pole 13x setting is required for an Capacity (kA)
listed in the table are for one
2 configuration in a 600 A frame
and have a single interrupting
intermediate FLA value
alternate dial settings and/or side of the MCP; order 2 sets Icu Ics
for line and load if ordering 240 Vac 100 100
2 capacity as an IEC 60947-2
(Annex O) instantaneous
MCP ratings should be used.
separate. 415 Vac 70 53
circuit breaker. All catalog numbers shown 690 Vac 25 13
2 PDG3 MCPs include nine trip
include standard line and load
terminals (Digit 14 = J). For
Ratings
250 Vdc 42 42
Maximum Application Voltage
2 settings, corresponding to
5x through 10x of the
optional terminals, use T
(aluminum) W (copper) or
(UL and CSA)
● 600 Vac
2 ● 250 Vdc

2 PDG3 600 A Frame Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration

MCP Trip MCP Trip Typical Motor Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2 MCP Catalog Number
Continuous
Amperes
CAM
Setting
Setting
(Mult)
Setting
(Amps)
Typical NEMA
Starter Size
Full Load
Current Amperes
Included
(Dig 14 = J)
Optional
(Dig 14 = T)
Optional
(Dig 14 = W)

2 PDG33MH250MSAJ 250 A 5.0 1250 6 96.2–108.0 PDG3X3TA401H

(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA400H
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T401H
(Copper)
B 5.6 1405 108.1–119.9

2 C 6.2 1560 120.0–132.2

D 6.9 1720 132.3–144.1
2 E 7.5 1875 144.2–156.1
F 8.1 2030 156.2–168.0
2 G 8.7 2185 168.1–179.9
H 9.4 2340 180.0–192.2
2 I 10.0 2500 192.3–204.0
300 A 5.0 1500 6 115.4–129.9
2 PDG33MH300MSAJ
B 5.6 1690 130.0–144.1
PDG3X3TA401H
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3TA400H
(Aluminum)
PDG3X3T401H
(Copper)

2 C
D
6.3
6.9
1875
2060
144.2–158.4
158.5–173.0

2 E 7.5 2250 173.1–187.6

F 8.1 2440 187.7–201.8
2 G 8.8 2625 201.9–216.1
H 9.4 2810 216.2–230.7
2 I 10.0 3000 230.8–244.9
PDG33MH350MSAJ 350 A 5.0 1750 6 134.6–151.4 PDG3X3TA401H PDG3X3TA400H PDG3X3T401H
2 B 5.6 1970 151.5–168.4
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper)

C 6.3 2190 168.5–185.3

2 D 6.9 2410 185.4–201.8

2 E
F
7.5
8.1
2625
2845
201.9–218.7
218.8–235.7

2 G 8.8 3065 235.8–252.6

H 9.4 3285 252.7–269.1

2 I 10.0 3500 269.2–285.7

PDG33MH400MSAJ 400 A 5.0 2000 6 153.8–173.0 PDG3X3TA401H PDG3X3TA400H PDG3X3T401H
2 B 5.6 2250 173.1–192.2
(Aluminum) (Aluminum) (Copper)

C 6.3 2500 192.3–211.4

2 D 6.9 2750 211.5–230.7
E 7.5 3000 230.8–249.9
2 F 8.1 3250 250.0–269.1
G 8.8 3500 269.2–288.4
2 H 9.4 3750 288.5–307.6

2 I 10.0 4000 307.7–326.9

V4-T2-96 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
PDG3 600 A Frame Motor Circuit Protectors—Standard Calibration, continued
MCP Trip MCP Trip Typical Motor Terminal Kit Catalog Numbers
2
MCP Catalog Number
Continuous
Amperes
CAM
Setting
Setting
(Mult)
Setting
(Amps)
Typical NEMA
Starter Size
Full Load
Current Amperes
Included
(Dig 14 = J)
Optional
(Dig 14 = T)
Optional
(Dig 14 = W) 2
450 A 5.0 2250 6 173.1–194.5
2
PDG33M0450MSAJ PDG3X3TA630 — PDG3X3T630
(Aluminum) (Copper)
B 5.6 2530 194.6–216.1
C 6.2 2810 216.2–237.6
2
D 6.9 3090 237.7–259.5
E 7.5 3375 259.6–281.4 2
F 8.1 3660 281.5–303.0
G 8.8 3940 303.1–324.5 2
H
I
9.4
10.0
4220
4500
324.6–346.1
346.2–368.1
2
PDG33M0500MSAJ 500 A 5.0 2500 6 192.3–216.1 PDG3X3TA630
(Aluminum)
— PDG3X3T630
(Copper)
2
B 5.6 2810 216.2–240.3
C 6.3 3125 240.4–264.5 2
D 6.9 3440 264.6–288.4
E 7.5 3750 288.5–313.7
2
F 8.2 4080 313.8–336.4
2
G 8.8 4375 336.5–359.1
H 9.3 4670 359.2–384.5 2
I 10.0 5000 384.6–408.2
PDG33M0600MSAJ 600 A 5.0 3000 6 230.8–259.5 PDG3X3TA630 — PDG3X3T630 2
(Aluminum) (Copper)
B 5.6 3375 259.6–289.1
C 6.3 3760 289.2–316.8
2
D 6.9 4120 316.9–346.1
2
E 7.5 4500 346.2–375.3
F 8.1 4880 375.4–403.7 2
G 8.8 5250 403.8–433.0
H 9.4 5630 433.1–461.4 2
I 10.0 6000 461.5–507.7
2
Note: 800 and 1200 A, 600 Vac maximum motor circuit protectors are available as Series C HMCP product.

Additional Information
2
Terminals Accessories Weights and Dimensions 2
Available terminal MCPs and MCCBs for each MCPs have the same
configuration for MCPs follow frame use a common set dimensions and weight as
the three-pole version of the
2
the same guidelines as of accessories. Available
presented for each circuit
breaker frame. Additional
accessories are presented
in each corresponding
respective circuit breaker,
shown in each frame section. 2
terminals, including control Power Defense circuit
wire, StrandAble and other breaker frame section 2
options are presented in (i.e., PDG1 accessories are
each Power Defense circuit found in the Frame Size 1 2
breaker frame size section. section, PDG2 accessories in
the Frame Size 2 section and
PDG3 in the Frame Size 3
2
section).
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-97

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A)

2
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
2 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications
2 Power Defense motor
protection circuit breakers
MPCBs meet requirements
for motor branch protection,
PXR motor protection
electronic trip units provide
MPCBs provide:
● UL 489 branch circuit
2 (MPCBs) use Power Xpert
Release (PXR) electronic trip
including disconnecting
means, branch circuit short-
motor protection basic and
advanced functionality in PXR
protection
● UL 508 and CSA C22.2
units to provide branch circuit protection and 10 and PXR 25, respectively.
2 protection and motor overload protection. MPCBs Features include phase
No. 14 motor protection,
and meet IEC 60947-2 and
protection in a combined can be used with a contactor unbalance protection, phase
2
50947-4 requirements
device, eliminating the need to eliminate the need for loss protection, over/under
for a separate overload relay. overload relay and still create voltage protection, cold/hot Power Defense MPCBs
2 Motor protection PXR units
build upon the features
manual motor control. Typical
branch motor starter
start (thermal memory)
protection, programmable
meet:
● UL 489
2 available in standard PXR trip
units and add motor
applications are protected by
three components consisting
high load alarms,
programmable relays for
● CSA
protection application specific of: breaker, contactor and multiple functions to include
● C22.2 No. 5-02
2 functionality and features. overload relay, or fuse, pre-detection trip relay, Class ● IEC 60947-2
MPCBs are available in Power contactor and overload relay. 5/10/15/20/30 protection, ● GB 14048.2-2008
2 Defense Frame Sizes 2 and 3, The MPCB application- energy metering,
and share accessories and specific protection eliminates communications, cause-of-
2 catalog numbering
convention with the
the need for motor overload
relay and reduces the
trip indication, events logging,
breaker health monitoring,
respective molded case traditional three-component harmonics, ground fault alarm
2 circuit breaker frames. starter assembly down to and protection, and more.
two elements—the MPCB
2 and the contactor. ZSI allows the MPCB to
interface with upstream
2 feeder or branch circuit
breakers for coordination
and reduction of arc flash
2 for some applications.

2 Power Defense MPCB—Frame Size 2 (15–200 A)

2 Frame Size 2 covers a range of 15 A through 200 A using PXR 10 and PXR 25
electronic trip units. In is available in three-pole configurations.

2 Interrupting Ratings
Catalog Designator F G K M N P
2 UL/CSA kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms

2 240 Vac 35 65 85 100 150 200

480 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100
2 600 Vac 14 18 22 25 25 25
250 Vdc — — — — — —
2 IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs

2 240 Vac
380–415 Vac
35
25
35
25
55
36
55
36
85
50
85
50
100
70
100
53
150
70
100
70
200
100
150
70

2 440 Vac 25 20 30 22.5 35 35 50 40 70 50 100 65

480 Vac 20 20 25 20 35 22.5 50 30 65 40 65 40
2 525 Vac 18 13 20 13 25 13 25 13 25 13 25 13
660–690 Vac — — 8 4 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5
2 250 Vdc — — — — — — — — — — — —

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-98 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Power Defense MPCB—Frame Size 3 (45–600 A)
Frame Size 3 covers a range of 45 A through 600 A using PXR 10 and PXR 25 electronic trip units. 2
In is available in three-pole configurations. Frame 3 has two specific constructions, one each for 400 A and 600 A.
The 600 A construction provides a unique capability to be used at 400 A and below in applications requiring 2
higher fixed instantaneous levels. This is accomplished by using a letter H in the 7th digit of the catalog number.
Interrupting Ratings 2
Catalog Designator F G K M N P
2
UL/CSA kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms kA rms
240 Vac 35 65 85 100 150 200 2
480 Vac 25 35 50 65 85 100
600 Vac 14 18 25 35 50 65 2
125/250 Vdc — — — — — —
IEC lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs lcu lcs
2
240 Vac 35 35 55 55 85 85 100 100 150 100 200 150
2
380–415 Vac 25 25 36 36 50 50 70 53 70 70 100 70
440 Vac 25 20 30 22.5 35 35 50 40 70 50 100 50 2
480 Vac 20 20 25 20 35 22.5 50 30 65 40 85 40
525 Vac 18 5 20 7.5 25 10 30 15 35 25 40 25 2
660–690 Vac
125/250 Vdc
—
—
—
—
8
—
4
—
10
—
5
—
15
—
7.5
—
20
—
10
—
20
—
10
—
2
2
MPCB with Power Xpert (PXR) Electronic Trip Units (ETU)
This information is presented as a tool to develop catalog numbers 2
for selecting Power Defense circuit breakers and trip units.
Frame Size 2 MPCB with PXR ETU—Globally Rated 2
PD G 2 3 M 0200 P8M J 2
Product Series 2
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/
Standards
Frame
Size
Pole
Options
Interrupting
Ratings
Continuous
Current Ratings
Trip Unit
Type Options
Standard Terminal
Options 2
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 2 =2 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0060 = 60 A B8N = PXR 10 MLSI N = No terminals
G = 35 kA at 480 V
K = 50 kA at 480 V
0100
0150
= 100 A
= 150 A
P8# = PXR 25 MLSI 1
P9# = PXR 25 MLSIG 1
J
K
= Line and load terminals
= Line only terminals
2
M = 65 kA at 480 V 0200 = 200 A = Load only terminals
2
L
N = 85 kA at 480 V
P = 100 kA at 480 V

F = 14 kA at 600 V 2
G = 18 kA at 600 V
K = 22 kA at 600 V
M = 25 kA at 600 V 2
N = 25 kA at 600 V
P = 25 kA at 600 V 2
Frame Size 2 MPCB with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated) 2
F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC
(100% UL Rated)
2 =2 3 = 3-pole
4 = 4-pole
F = 25 kA at 480 V
G = 35 kA at 480 V
0060
0100
= 60 A
= 100 A
B8N = PXR 10 MLSI
P8# = PXR 25 MLSI 1
J = Line and load terminals
W = Optional line and
2
K = 50 kA at 480 V 0150 = 150 A P9# = PXR 25 MLSIG 1 load terminals
M = 65 kA at 480 V 0200 = 200 A 2
N = 85 kA at 480 V
P = 100 kA at 480 V
2
F = 14 kA at 600 V
G = 18 kA at 600 V
K = 22 kA at 600 V 2
M = 25 kA at 600 V
N = 25 kA at 600 V
P = 25 kA at 600 V
2
Note
1 See “Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options” table on Page V4-T2-101 for # (Available Configured Options). 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-99

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Frame Size 3 MPCB with PXR ETU—Globally Rated

2
PD G 3 3 M 0200 P8M J
2
Product Series
2 PD = Power Defense

2
2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Standard Terminal
Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Type Options Options
G = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A B8N = PXR 10 MLSI N = No terminals
2 G = 35 kA at 480 V
K = 50 kA at 480 V
0250 = 250 A
0400 = 400 A
P8# = PXR 25 MLSI 1
P9# = PXR 25 MLSIG 1
J
K
= Line and load terminals
= Line only terminals
M = 65 kA at 480 V 0600 = 600 A L = Load only terminals
2 N = 85 kA at 480 V H250 = 250 A High Override
(600 A Frame)
P = 100 kA at 480 V
H400 = 400 A High Override
2 F = 14 kA at 600 V (600 A Frame)
G = 18 kA at 600 V
2 K = 25 kA at 600 V
M = 35 kA at 600 V
N = 50 kA at 600 V
2 P = 65 kA at 600 V

2
Frame Size 3 MPCB with PXR ETU—Globally Rated (100% UL Rated)
2 F = UL/CSA/IEC/CCC 3 =3 3 = 3-pole F = 25 kA at 480 V 0125 = 125 A B8N = PXR 10 MLSI N = No terminals
(100% UL Rated) G = 35 kA at 480 V 0250 = 250 A P8# = PXR 25 MLSI 1 = Line and load terminals
2
J
K = 50 kA at 480 V 0400 = 400 A P9# = PXR 25 MLSIG 1 K = Line only terminals
M = 65 kA at 480 V 0600 = 600 A L = Load only terminals
= 250 A High Override
2
H250
F = 14 kA at 600 V (600 A Frame)
G = 18 kA at 600 V H400 = 400 A High Override

2 K = 25 kA at 600 V
M = 35 kA at 600 V
(600 A Frame)

2 Note
1 See “Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options” table on the next page for # (Available Configured Options).

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-100 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Power Xpert Release (PXR) Trip Unit Options
#(1)—Protection Type #(2)—Available Configured Options
2
— Relays Relays Relays Relays
— Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus 2
— — ZSI — ZSI
PXR
PXR 10
ETU
B
LSI
8
LSIG
—
—
N
—
—
—
—
CAM
—
CAM
—
2
PXR 25 P 8 9 — M W D Y 2
Descriptions of PXR Configured Options
Relays—2 Form A contacts ZSI—Zone Selective Auxiliary Power
2
(rated for 240 Vac, 1 A)
● Interface: 3 wires (ALM1,
Interlocking output
● Interface: 2 wires
● Connection included with
all PXR 25 trip units
2
●
ALM2, ALM Common)
Programmable to indicate ●
(Zout, Zcomm)
Includes ability to turn
● Required for
communications, relays,
2
●
breaker conditions
Field installable for PD-2
ON and OFF, and
indicate signals ●
and metering accuracy
24 Vdc, 0.5 A
2
Note: PD-2 includes 1 relay
when used in conjunction with
CAM—CAM Link connection
(requires a CAM module per
● Interface: 2 wires
Aux +24 V, Aux 0 V)
2
Modbus RTU. breaker)
● Interface: 5 wires (refer to
2
Modbus—Modbus RTU
directly from the breaker
●
CAM IL for details)
Communications Adapter
2
● Interface: 3 wires (MODBA,
MODBB, MODBG)
Modules available for
Modbus TCP and PROFIBUS 2
● No additional modules
required 2
● Field installable for PD-2
2
Available Settings and Features on PXR Motor Protection Electronic Trip Units
Full Load Amperes (le) Current Settings Full Load Amperes (le) Current Settings
2
2
PD-2 PD-3
0060 0100 0150 0200 0125 0250/H250 0400/H400 0600
Option Setting 60 A 100 A 150 A 200 A 125 A 250 A 400 A 600 A
PXR 10 1 15 A 32 A 50 A 70 A 45 A 90 A 160 A 250 A 2
2 16 A 35 A 60 A 80 A 50 A 100 A 175 A 275 A
3 20 A 40 A 63 A 90 A 60 A 110 A 200 A 300 A 2
4 25 A 50 A 70 A 100 A 63 A 125 A 225 A 320 A
5 30 A 60 A 80 A 110 A 70 A 150 A 250 A 350 A
2
6
7
35 A
40 A
63 A
70 A
90 A
100 A
125 A
150 A
80 A
90 A
160 A
175 A
275 A
300 A
400 A
450 A
2
8 45 A 80 A 110 A 160 A 100 A 200 A 320 A 500 A
2
9 50 A 90 A 125 A 175 A 110 A 225 A 350 A 550 A
10 60 A 100 A 150 A 200 A 125 A 250 A 400 A 600 A 2
PXR 25 Programmable from minimum to maximum values in 1 A increments.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-101

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Trip Profile (Trip Class and Short Delay/ Ground Fault Advanced Motor
2 Phase Unbalance) Instantaneous Settings Protection Settings Protection Settings

2 PXR 10—Dial 2 MPCBs with PXR 10 include

a combined Short Delay and
MPCBs with PXR 25 include
an option to add ground fault
MPCBs with PXR 25 trip units
also include additional
Dial Trip Phase
2 Setting Label Class Unbalance Instantaneous trip dial. The
short delay time may be
protection. Ground fault
protection includes the
application specific motor
protection features. These
1 A 5 OFF programmed to trip ability to trip and/or alarm features may be set to trip
2 2 B 10 OFF instantaneously or with a on a determined ground the breaker, alarm (indication
3 C 15 OFF
delay for coordination or to fault condition. via programmable relays),
2 4 D 20 OFF
avoid nuisance tripping.
Phase Unbalance
or disabled.
Breakers with PXR 25 trip
2 5 E 30 OFF units include independent ● Pickup Level: Over Voltage
adjustments for short delay 5 to 35% of load ● Pickup Level:
6 F 5 ON
180 to 720 V
2 and instantaneous settings. Trip Time:
●
7 G 10 ON
1 to 300 seconds ● Trip Time:
8 H 15 ON PXR 10—Dial 3 Programmable 1 to 300 seconds
2 Action taken: May be set to
●

9 J 20 ON Isd trip or alarm Under Voltage

Setting (x Ie) tsd (sec)
2 10 K 30 ON
1 3 Default to INST;
Phase Loss ● Pickup Level:
60 to 670 V
PXR 10—Phase Unbalance programmable via ● Pickup Level:
2 Settings Programmable by PXPM
2 4
USB and PXPM to Fixed at 75% of load
● Trip Time:
1 to 300 seconds
3 5 INST, 0.150 or 0.300.
● Pickup Level: ● Trip Time:
2 5 to 35% of load 4 6
INST / 0.150 / 0.300
1 to 240 seconds Voltage Unbalance (between
● Trip Time: 5 7 ● Action taken: May be set to phase-to-phase readings)
2 1 to 300 seconds 6 8 trip or alarm ● Pickup Level:
● Action taken: MPCB will 5% to 25% difference
7 10
2 trip at selected protection
8 11 1
Metering and ● Trip Time:
settings Communications Capabilities 1 to 300 seconds
2 PXR 25—Programmable
9 12 1
PXR 25 motor protection Phase Rotation
10 13 1
trip units include the same ● Configuration:
2 Trip Class
● Trip Class: Note advanced metering functions ABC or CBA sequence
1 If setting value exceeds the fixed as the MCCB PXR 25, including: ● Time: Fixed at 200 ms
2 5–30 in increments of 0.1
magnetic override of the device, the
setting defaults to the magnetic override ● Energy metering to 1% Reverse Power
Phase Unbalance
2 ● Pickup Level:
value (please verify these values in the
time current curves or PXR user manual. ●
accuracy
Current metering to 0.5%
● Pickup Level:
1–65,500 kW
5 to 35% of load
accuracy
2 ● Trip Time: PXR 25—Programmable
● Multiple communications
● Trip Time:
1 to 300 seconds
1 to 300 seconds Short delay pickup—Isd (x Ie)
options, including standard
2 ● Action taken: MPCB will ● 3x–13x: Programmable in Modbus RTU Total Harmonic Distortion
trip at selected protection increments of 0.1x ● Line-to-line and line-to-
● Load alarm at two
2 settings
Short delay time—tsd (sec) programmable levels neutral voltage
Phase Loss 0.05–0.50: Programmable between 50% to 120% ● Each phase and neutral
2
●

● Pickup Level: in increments of 0.01 sec ● Programmable relays for current

Fixed at 75% of load ● Fixed (flat) response remote indication ● 1st through 29th at 60 Hz/
2 ● Trip Time: 1st through 35th at 50 Hz
1 to 240 seconds Instantaneous pickup—Ii (x In)
2 ● Action taken: May be set to ● 3x–Maximum:
Programmable in
trip or alarm
2 ●
increments of 0.1x
Maximum is determined
2 by frame fixed magnetic
override level

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-102 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Additional Information
Terminals Accessories Weights and Dimensions 2
Available terminal
configuration for MPCBs
MPCBs and MCCBs for
each frame use a common
MPCBs have the same
dimensions and weight as 2
follow the same guidelines as set of accessories. Available the three-pole version of the
presented for each circuit accessories are presented in respective circuit breaker, 2
breaker frame. Additional each corresponding Power shown in each frame section.
terminals, including control Defense circuit breaker 2
wire, StrandAble and other frame section (i.e., PDG2
options are presented in
each Power Defense circuit
accessories are found in the
Frame Size 2 section and
2
breaker frame size section. PDG3 in the Frame Size 3
section). All Frame Size 2 2
MPCBs are automatically
configured with 1 Form C 2
auxiliary switch.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-103

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Description Page
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-42
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
2 Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . . V4-T2-98
2 High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
Breakers for Selective Coordination
High Instantaneous Power Defense
2 Frame 3 (H250–H400)
High Instantaneous Power Defense
2 Frame 5 (400 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-105
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers . V4-T2-107
2 Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112
2
Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
Fused Current-Limiting Module . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . . V4-T2-116
2 Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-140
Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-142
2 Special Modification Ordering and Pricing. . . . . . V4-T2-146

2
2 High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit Breakers Product Selection 600 A Frame
for Selective Coordination 600 A Frame Only Catalog Number
2 High Instantaneous Power Defense Frame 3 (H250–H400)
Three-Pole Four-Pole
PDG33F0600FNNN PDG34F0600FNNN
2 Product Description Product Selection PDG33G0600FNNN PDG34G0600FNNN
Eaton’s Power Defense
2
PDG33K0600FNNN PDG34K0600FNNN
Frame 3 molded case PXR Electronic Trip Unit
PDG33M0600FNNN PDG34M0600FNNN
circuit breakers are available Power Defense Frame 3
2 with standard and high molded case circuit breakers PDG33N0600FNNN PDG34N0600FNNN
instantaneous constructions from 250 A to 400 A can PDG33P0600FNNN PDG34P0600FNNN

2 for the nominal amperages

of 250–400. The high
be configured with high
instantaneous construction Product Selection High-Magnetic TMTU
with all PXR electronic trip
2 instantaneous construction
offers a wider range of unit options. To configure, High-Magnetic Trip Unit Catalog Number
use H as the 7th digit in the Three-Pole Four-Pole 1
instantaneous adjustability
2 and can be adjusted up to 14-digit complete catalog PDG3XTFA3H250 PDG3XTFA4H250
7200 A for higher current number. For additional PDG3XTFA3H300 PDG3XTFA4H300
2 levels of selective
coordination.
selection details and product
information, refer to the PDG3XTFA3H350 PDG3XTFA4H350
Power Defense Frame 3 PDG3XTFA3H400 PDG3XTFA4H400
2 Standards and Certifications section within this catalog.
Product Selection High-Magnetic Electronic TU
2 UL
●
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
● CSA High-Magnetic Trip Unit Catalog Number 2
Power Defense Frame 3
2 ●

●
IEC (CE)
CB (CCC)
high-magnetic molded
Three-Pole
PDG3XPXR0H250###
Four-Pole
PDG3XPXR0H250###
case circuit breakers from
2 250 A to 400 A can be
configured by purchasing
PDG3XPXR0H300### PDG3XPXR0H300###
PDG3XPXR0H350### PDG3XPXR0H350###
2 600 A frame and high-
magnetic (250 A–400 A)
PDG3XPXR0H400### PDG3XPXR0H400###

trip unit separately. For a For four-pole trip units, neutral protection is specified using the 9th digit
2
1

complete list of available of the catalog number. Available options: 0 = 0%, 4 = 100%, 6 = 60%
thermal-magnetic trip unit (example: PDG3XTFA0H20 = 0% protected neutral)
2 options, see the selection
2 The last three digits of the catalog number specify the trip unit type, protection
and features. See PXR Trip Unit Options table on V4-T2-48 for reference.
tables to the right.
2

V4-T2-104 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Instantaneous Settings PXR Electronic Trip Unit
H250 H400
2
Minimum 2x (In) 2x (In)
2
Maximum 28x (In) 18x (In)
Instantaneous override—7200 A 2
Magnetic Adjustments Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 2
H250–H400
Minimum 5x (Ir) 2
28x (Ir)
2
Maximum
Magnetic threshold—6000 A

2
High Instantaneous Power Defense Frame 5 (400 A)
2
Product Description Application Description When the line-side and Innovative Technology and
Eaton’s Power Defense The PDJ5 circuit breaker load-side molded case Reliable Performance 2
Frame 5 molded case incorporates a higher level circuit breaker trip ratings The PDJ5 is based on the
circuit breakers with high- of instantaneous pickup, are chosen to coordinate
in the overload range, they
Power Defense Frame 5 2
instantaneous withstand thus allowing for higher circuit breaker and shares
are specifically designed
for critical operations and
current levels of selective
coordination. Standard
also can be selectively
coordinated in the fault range
the same footprint and
accessories. Complete
2
up to the values listed in
selective coordination
requirements. The high-
molded case circuit breakers
typically are furnished with a the table at the end of this
with PXR electronic trip unit
technology, the PDJ5 circuit 2
instantaneous withstand magnetic pickup or electronic section or IA01200002E. For breaker can be configured
PDJ5 frame is available at instantaneous adjustment set overcurrents protected by with PXR 20D or PXR 25 2
400 A and includes Eaton’s at ten times (10x) maximum circuit breakers on the load- trip units with standard
state-of-the art PXR the continuous trip rating. side of the PDJ5, only the
effected load-side circuit
LSI functionality or ALSI
to include Eaton’s Arcflash
2
electronic trip unit. This For details on ratings and
design enables the breaker
to withstand up to 90 times
adjustment capability of the
PDJ5 circuit breakers, please
breaker will open, while
the line-side circuit breaker
Reduction Maintenance
System.
2
remains closed, thus
rated current before opening
under short-circuit conditions.
consult the ratings table
at the end of this catalog providing continuity of Standards and Certifications 2
section. These higher levels power to the other critical ● UL 489
of electronic instantaneous loads supplied by the PDJ5 ● CSA, C22.2 No. 5-02 2
values in turn allow the circuit breakers.
system designer to obtain
selective coordination at
2
fault current levels up to
these higher ratings.
2
Greater values of selective
coordination are available 2
based on manufacturer
tested combinations using 2
the PDJ5 as line-side breaker
and standard breakers as
load-side devices. Refer to
2
IA01200002E to determine
the maximum fault levels 2
that selective coordination
achieves. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-105

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Product Selection
2
2
PDJ5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Available Catalog Numbers—400 A Rating

2 PXR 20D ETU PXR 25 ETU

PDJ53MH400D2DN PDJ53MH400P2DN
2 PDJ53MH400D2MN PDJ53MH400P2DN

2 PDJ53MH400D2WN
PDJ53MH400D2YN
PDJ53MH400P2WN
PDJ53MH400P2YN

2 PDJ53MH400D4DN PDJ53MH400P4DN
PDJ53MH400D4MN PDJ53MH400P4MN
2 PDJ53MH400D4WN PDJ53MH400P4WN

2
PDJ53MH400D4YN PDJ53MH400P4YN

2 Power Xpert Release Trip Unit Options—PDJ5 (Digits 11–13)

2 Protection Type
LSI with
Available Configured Options

Arcflash Reduction Relays Modbus Relays Modbus Relays Modbus

2 PXR ETU LSI Maintenance System Relays Modbus ZSI CAM ZSI CAM
PXR 20D D 2 4 M W D Y
2 PXR 25 P 2 4 M W D Y

2
PDJ5 PXR 20D and PXR 25 Protection Settings
2 Frame 400 A

2 Setting Pickup (Ir) Time at 6x (Ir) Short Delay Pickup (Isd) Short Delay Time (tsd) Instantaneous Pickup
Minimum 150 A 0.5 s 1.5x (Ir) 0.050 s 2x (In)

2 Maximum 400 A 14.0 s 8.0x (Ir) 0.500 s 36x (In) 1

Step 10 A 0.10 s 0.10 0.01 s 0.10
2 Additional Setting OFF

2
Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz
2 Description PDJ5

2 Maximum rated current (amperes) 400 A

UL/CSA
2 240 V 100
480 V 65
2 600 V 35

2 Note
1 36x (I ) = Instantaneous Override value of 14,400 A.
n

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-106 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Contents
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Description Page
2
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers 2
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-42
2
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70 2
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87 2
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . V4-T2-98
High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
2
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number / Product Selection . . . . . . V4-T2-108 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting 2
Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112
Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . V4-T2-116 2
Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-140
Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-142 2
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing . . . . . V4-T2-146
2
2
2
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers 2
Product Description
Direct current (DC) systems
Application Description
Applications include UPS
Features and Benefits
Current ratings are available
Standards and Certifications
The DC breaker family is both
2
and applications are
becoming commonplace as
battery supply circuits,
solar systems and electric
from 25 to 3000 A, with a full
scale of voltage up to 600 Vdc
CSA and UL 489 listed. Eaton
breakers may be applied in 2
alternative energy sources vehicle charging, as well as and interrupting ratings to both ungrounded and select
have expanded and the commercial and industrial address needs ranging grounded applications, with 2
number of DC devices and distribution. from standard to the highest poles connected in series
data centers using DC power performance. Optional to operate at the maximum 2
has swelled. Eaton offers internal accessories provide voltages shown on Page V4-
molded case circuit breakers
to meet circuit protection and
remote tripping and indication
of breaker status.
T2-12 through V4-T2-20.
To use DC circuit breakers
2
switching requirements for a on 600 V (500 V for Power
host of different DC end-user All DC breakers use the Defense frame 1) grounded 2
requirements. same internal and external systems, three poles in series
accessories as their
corresponding, standard
must be connected on the 2
ungrounded leg.
Power Defense equivalents.
The standard Power Defense 2
molded case circuit breakers
carry a maximum 250 Vdc 2
ratings for ungrounded
systems. Refer to the 2
following page for
interrupting ratings.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-107

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Catalog Number / Product Selection

2 ● Frame size 1 covers a range of 25 A through 100 A, Interrupting Ratings (Single- and Two-Pole)
three-pole only option
2 ● Frame size 2 covers a range of 15 A through 150 A for
Catalog Designator
UL
F
kA rms
K
kA rms
M
kA rms
single-pole options and 15 A through 225 A for two- and
2 three-pole options
125 Vdc 1 10 35 42
250 Vdc 2 35 42 50
● Frame size 3 covers a range of 100 A through 600 A,
2 three-pole only option
● Frame size 4 covers a range of 300 A through 800 A, Interrupting Ratings (Three-Pole)
2 three-pole only option Catalog Designator F K M
UL kA rms kA rms kA rms
● Frame size 6 covers a range of 1600 A through 3000 A,
2 three-pole only option 125 Vdc 10 35 42/50 3
250 Vdc 35 42 50
2 600 Vdc 35 50 65
PD1 at 500 Vdc
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Three-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units—Frame Size 1 (25–100 A)
2
PD K 1 3 M 0100 TFF J
2
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense

2 Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Type Standard Terminal
Standards Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Options Options
2 K = UL/CSA DC rated 1 =1 3 = 3-pole F = 10 kA at 125 Vdc 0025 = 25 A
0030 = 30 A
TFF = Fixed thermal/
fixed magnetic
N = No terminals
J = Line and load terminals
K = 35 kA at 125 Vdc
0035 = 35 A
2 M = 42 kA at 125 Vdc
0040 = 40 A
F = 35 kA at 250 Vdc 0045 = 45 A
2 K = 42 kA at 250 Vdc
M = 50 kA at 250 Vdc
0050 = 50 A
0060 = 60 A
0070 = 70 A
2 F = 35 kA at 500 Vdc
K = 50 kA at 500 Vdc
0080 = 80 A
0090 = 90 A
M = 65 kA at 500 Vdc 0100 = 100 A
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Single-, Two- and Three-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units—Frame Size 2 (15–225 A)
2
PD K 2 3 M 0225 TFF J
2
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense

2
Certifications/Standards Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Trip Unit Type Standard Terminal
2 K = UL/CSA DC rated Size Options Ratings Current Ratings Options Options
2 =2 1 = 1-pole F = 10 kA at 125 Vdc 0015 = 15 A 0070 = 70 A TFF = Fixed thermal/ N = No terminals
2 2 = 2-pole
3 = 3-pole
K = 35 kA at 125 Vdc
M = 42 kA at 125 Vdc
0020
0025
= 20 A 0080 = 80 A
= 25 A 0090 = 90 A
fixed magnetic J = Line and load
terminals
0030 = 30 A 0100 = 100 A
2 F = 35 kA at 250 Vdc
K = 42 kA at 250 Vdc
0035
0040
= 35 A 0125 = 125 A
= 40 A 0150 = 150 A 4
M = 50 kA at 250 Vdc 0045 = 45 A 0175 = 175 A
2 0050 = 50 A 0200 = 200 A
F = 35 kA at 600 Vdc 0060 = 60 A 0225 = 225 A

2 K = 50 kA at 600 Vdc
M = 65 kA at 600 Vdc

2 Notes
1 Single-pole option is rated at 125 Vdc only.

2 2 Two-pole option is rated at 125 Vdc and 250 Vdc.

3 First value for frames 1, 2, 3, 4. Second value for frame 6.
4 Single-pole option has a maximum current rating of 150 A.
2
2

V4-T2-108 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Three-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units—Frame Size 3 (100–600 A)
2
PD K 3 3 M 0600 TFA J
2
Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Current Trip Unit Standard Terminal
Standards Size Options Ratings Ratings Type Options Options 2
K = UL/CSA DC rated 3 =3 3 = 3-pole F = 10 kA at 125 Vdc 0100 = 100 A 0300 = 300 A TFA = Fixed thermal/ N = No terminals
K = 35 kA at 125 Vdc
M = 42 kA at 125 Vdc
0125 = 125 A
0150 = 150 A
H300 = 300 A 1
0350 = 350 A
adjustable
magnetic
J = Line and load
terminals
2
0175 = 175 A H350 = 350 A 1 LFA = Low amperage/
F = 35 kA at 250 Vdc
K = 42 kA at 250 Vdc
0200 = 200 A
0225 = 225 A
0400 = 400 A
H400 = 400 A 1
adjustable
magnetic 2
2
M = 50 kA at 250 Vdc 0250 = 250 A 0500 = 500 A
H250 = 250 A 1 0600 = 600 A 2
F = 35 kA at 600 Vdc
K = 50 kA at 600 Vdc
M = 65 kA at 600 Vdc 2
Frame 3 PDK DC Frame Only 2
PD K 3 3 M 0600 FNN N 2
2
Product Series
PD = Power Defense
2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Current Trip Unit Standard Terminal 2
Standards Size Options Ratings Ratings Type Options Options
K = UL/CSA DC rated 3 =3 3 = 3-pole F = 10 kA at 125 Vdc 0600 = 600 A FNN = Frame only N = No terminals 2
K = 35 kA at 125 Vdc
M = 42 kA at 125 Vdc
2
F = 35 kA at 250 Vdc
K = 42 kA at 250 Vdc
M = 50 kA at 250 Vdc
2
F = 35 kA at 600 Vdc
K = 50 kA at 600 Vdc
2
M = 65 kA at 600 Vdc
2
Frame 3 LFA Low Magnetic DC Trip Unit
2
PD K 3 X LFA 0600 2
Product Series 2
PD = Power Defense

Certifications/ Frame Accessory Trip Unit Continuous Current

2
Standards Size X = Accessory Type Options Ratings
K = UL/CSA DC rated 3 =3 LFA = Low amperage/ 0600 = 600 A 2
adjustable magnetic

Notes
2
1 High override (600 A frame). When ordering frame only, select interrupting rating digit and select highest nominal current (400 or 600 A).

Frame only option does not come with terminals, ex., PDK33F0400FNN. 2
2 Only available in the high override (600 A frame).

2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-109

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Three-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit—Frame Size 4 (300–800 A)
2
PD K 4 3 M 0800 TFA J
2
2 Product Series
PD = Power Defense

2
Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Current Trip Unit Standard Terminal
2 Standards Size Options Ratings Ratings Type Options Options
K = UL/CSA DC rated 4 =4 3 = 3-pole F = 10 kA at 125 Vdc 0300 = 300 A TFA = Fixed thermal/ N = No terminals
2 K = 35 kA at 125 Vdc
M = 42 kA at 125 Vdc
0350 = 350 A
0400 = 400 A
adjustable magnetic J = Line and load terminals

0450 = 450 A
2 F = 35 kA at 250 Vdc
K = 42 kA at 250 Vdc
0500 = 500 A
0600 = 600 A
M = 50 kA at 250 Vdc 0700 = 700 A
2 0800 = 800 A
F = 35 kA at 600 Vdc
2 K = 50 kA at 600 Vdc
M = 65 kA at 600 Vdc

2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers (Three-Pole) with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit—Frame Size 6 (1600–3000 A)

2 PD K 6 3 M 0300 TFN N
2 Product Series

2 PD = Power Defense

2 Certifications/ Frame Pole Interrupting Continuous Current Trip Unit Standard Terminal
Standards Size Options Ratings Ratings Type Options Options
2 K = UL/CSA DC rated 6 =6 3 = 3-pole F = 10 kA at 125 Vdc
K = 35 kA at 125 Vdc
1600 = 1600 A
2000 = 2000 A
TFN = Fixed magnetic N = No terminals (imperial
tapped conductors)
M = 42 kA at 125 Vdc 2500 = 2500 A M = No terminals (metric
2 3000 = 3000 A tapped conductors)
F = 35 kA at 250 Vdc
2 K = 42 kA at 250 Vdc
M = 50 kA at 250 Vdc

2 F = 35 kA at 600 Vdc
K = 50 kA at 600 Vdc
M = 65 kA at 600 Vdc
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-110 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminal Types
2
2
2
PDG1X3T125 PDG2X3T100 PDG2X3TA225 PDG3X3TA300
PDG2X3TA350
PDG3X3TA400 PDG3X3TA400H PDG3X3TA630 PDG4X3TA700 PDG4X3TA800 2
Note: Pictures are for reference only. 2
Terminals 2
Maximum Number of Metric (mm2)
Frame
Size
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body Type
Wire
Type
Wire
Class
Conductors
per Phase
AWG Range
per Conductor
Range per
Conductor
Catalog
Number
Included
Accessories
Standard on
Amperes
2
1 125 Steel Cu/Al B, C 1 14–3/0 2.08–85 PDG1X3T125 15–125 2
2 100 Steel Cu/Al B, C 1 14–1/0 2.08–53.5 PDG2X3T100 1 15–100
225 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 4–4/0 21.2–107 PDG2X3TA225 1 110–225 2
3 300 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 3–350 26.7–177 100–225
2
PDG3X3TA300
350 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 250–500 127–253 PDG3X3TA350 250–350
400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 3/0–250 85–127 PDG3X3TA400 Terminal shield 400
2
400 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 3–5200 26.7–253 PDG3X3TA400H H250–H400
630 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 2–500 33.6–253 PDG3X3TA630 Terminal shield 450–600 2
4 700 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 2 1–500 42.4–253 PDG4X3TA700 300–700
800 Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 3 3/0–400 85–203 PDG4X3TA800 800 2
Note
1 Catalog numbers shown are for a single side of a three-pole breaker. For single- and two-pole options, replace the X3 with X1 or X2, respectively.
2
Example: PDG2X3T100 becomes PDG2X2T100 for two-pole.
2
Accessories
All DC breakers use the same internal and external accessories 2
as their corresponding, standard Power Defense equivalents.
● Frame 1: Refer to Pages V4-T2-26 through V4-T2-28 2
● Frame 2: Refer to Pages V4-T2-35 through V4-T2-41
● Frame 3: Refer to Pages V4-T2-51 through V4-T2-56 2
Frame 4: Refer to Pages V4-T2-63 through V4-T2-69
2
●

● Frame 6: Refer to Pages V4-T2-84 through V4-T2-86

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-111

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents
2 Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Description Page
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-42
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
2 Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . . V4-T2-98
2 High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers . V4-T2-107
2 Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
Circuit Breaker Module
2 Catalog Number / Product Selection . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
2 Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . .
Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-140
2 Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing. . . . . .
V4-T2-142
V4-T2-146

2
2
2
2 Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module

2 Product Overview
Power demand continues to
Product Description
The current-limiting breaker
Features and Benefits
Superior system protection:
Standards and Certifications
● UL 489
2 grow in new and existing
facilities. To meet increased
modules use a unique contact
design to enhance the
● Auto reset improves
● CSA C22.2

demand, larger utility supplies, system protection, similar system uptime and
2 spot networks and large to that of the circuit breaker. eliminates the need for
finding replacement parts
facility transformers are When high short-circuit
2 installed. The increased current is flowing through the ● No fuses to replace,
reducing the overall cost of
capacity of the electrical contacts of these modules,
2 source results in increased
fault currents in excess of
the design results in very high
interrupting capacities and
ownership and the waste
created by fuses
100 kA short-circuit protection. improved current-limiting
2 Overloads, by using
●

Eaton manufactures non-fused characteristics. inverse time current

current-limiting modules with tripping characteristics of
2 interrupting capacities up to Application Description the molded case circuit
200 kA at 600 Vac or 70 kA at High-performance breakers breaker
2 690 Vac. Unlike fused current
limiters with a one-time
are most commonly applied
when very high fault levels
● Low-level short circuits,
by using instantaneous
2 use, a current-limiting module
provides an automatic reset of
are available and with
applications where the
and/or short time delay
tripping characteristics of
the module after a short-circuit current-limiting capability is
2 event. Resetting the molded used upstream of the final
the molded case circuit
breaker
case circuit breaker is the load to limit current. Typical
2 High-level short circuits,
●
only action required to restore loads include lighting, power
by using ultra-high-speed,
critical power to the system; distribution and motor control
blow-apart contacts of the
2 there is no time wasted
with sourcing the correct
applications.
current-limiting module in
series with the circuit
2 replacement fuses or
module to bring the system
breaker contacts
back online.
● Let-through currents, by
2 improved opening speed of
the contacts, the resultant
2 rapid rise of arc voltage
introduces impedance into
the system
2

V4-T2-112 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Catalog Number / Product Selection
2
Interrupting Ratings (Three-Pole)
415 Vac (IEC) 690 Vac (IEC)
2
480 Vac 600 Vac
Type Product Amperes (UL) (UL) ICU ICS ICU ICS
2
PDG13(P) thermal-magnetic Breaker only 15–125 100 35 1 100 100 - -
With limiter 15–100 150 100 1 150 150 - - 2
PDG23(P) thermal-magnetic Breaker only 15–225 100 35 100 70 10 5
With limiter 40–200 200 200 — — — — 2
PDG23(P) PXR electronic Breaker only 15–225 100 35 100 70 10 5
With limiter — — — — — — —
2
Current-Limiting Module 2
PD G 2 X CL 035 K 2
Product Series Standard Terminal
2
PD = Power Defense Certifications/ Maximum Options
Standards
Frame
Accessory Type
CL = Current limiter
Amperage K = Line only terminals 2
G = UL/CSA Accessory Designation 035 = 15–35 A L = Load only terminals
Size 200 = 40–200 A
2 =2
X = Accessory
2
2
Terminals
2
Terminal Wire Wire Number of AWG/kcmil Metric (mm2) Three-Pole Digit 12 Designation
Body Type Type Class Conductors per Phase Range per Conductor Range per Conductor Catalog Number Line Only Load Only
2
Aluminum Cu/Al B, C 1 #8–350 10–185 TA250FJ K L
2
Dimensions and Weights 2
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm)
2
Height Width Depth Weight in lb (kg)
6.06 (153) 4.13 (104.9) 3.39 (86.1) 8.50 (3.86) 2
Note
1 600Y/347 V
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-113

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment
Description Page
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-42
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
2 Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . . V4-T2-98
2 High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers . V4-T2-107
2 Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112
2 Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
Fused Current-Limiting Module
2 Type LFD Current Limiter Attachment . . . . V4-T2-115
Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . . V4-T2-116
2 Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-140
V4-T2-142
2
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing. . . . . . V4-T2-146

2
2 Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
Fused Current-Limiting Module
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment

2 Product Overview Product Description Product Selection

Eaton’s type ELC current ELC type current limiters are
2 Type ELC Current ELC Current Limiter Attachment
limiter attachment for the coordinated with the MCP so
Limiter Attachment MCP Rating Catalog
PDG2 motor circuit protector that normal fault currents are
2 (MCP) is designed to provide interrupted automatically by (Amperes) Number
increased interrupting the MCP without any damage 3 ELC3003R
capacity. The combination to the limiter. Only the rare
2 may be used for the high fault is opened by the
7
15
ELC3007R
ELC3015R
application up to 200 kA current limiter attachment.
2 symmetrical at 600 Vac, Faults that are interrupted by 30
50
ELC3030R
ELC3050R
making the MCP suitable for the current limiter also
2 use in network distribution
systems or other applications
magnetically trip the MCP,
opening all three poles,
100 ELC3100R
150 ELC3150R
2 where unusually high fault
currents are available. The
preventing single-phase
operation. Technical Data and Specifications
current limiter connects to
2 the load end of the MCP and Each of the three poles of
the ELC current limiter are
Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes 1
is provided with terminals Type ELC Current Wire Range Metric
2 suitable for copper or equipped with an indicator
that extends when a fault is
Limiter Maximum Amperes AWG (mm2)
aluminum conductors
interrupted by the current Standard Aluminum Terminals
2 (see table at the right).
limiter attachment. 50 14–2 2.5–35
100 1–4/0 50–95
2 150 1–4/0 50–95

2 Non-Standard Terminals (Steel)

50 14–2 2 2.5–35

2 100
150
—
—
—
—

2 Notes
1 Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in

2 UL 486A or UL 486B.
2 Optional on special order for copper cable only.

2 All HMCP 800 A and 1200 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-360.

V4-T2-114 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Type LFD Current Limiter Attachment
2
Product Overview Standards and Certifications Product Selection
The LFD current limiter is an ● UL 489 2
accessory that bolts to the ● CSA C22.2 Type LFD Current Limiter
2
Type LFD Current
load end of a Power Defense Limiter Circuit Breaker Catalog
Frame 2 thermal-magnetic or Rating Amperes Number
PXR electronic circuit
breaker, providing 200 kA 15–70 LFD3070R 2
80–160
2
interrupting capacity at up to LFD3150R
600 Vac. LFD current limiters
for thermal-magnetic circuit
breakers are UL listed under 2
File E47239.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-115

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents
2 Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures
Description Page
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-42
Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-57
2 Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . . V4-T2-98
2 High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers . V4-T2-107
2 Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112
2 Power Defense Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker—
Fused Current-Limiting Module . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
2 Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
2 Cable Sizing/Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Application Terminals . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-117
Catalog Numbering System Overview . . . . V4-T2-118
2 Catalog Numbering System Overview . . . . V4-T2-120
Communications and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-140
2 Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Modification Ordering and Pricing. . . . . .
V4-T2-142
V4-T2-146
2
2 Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures

2 Product Description Application Description

Standard Terminals Terminal Ratings Terminal Ratings
2 Eaton’s Power Defense Cu/Al, Cu, or Al 75 °C vs. 90 °C
molded case circuit breakers
2 (MCCB) can be configured
Each terminal is marked with
information specific to the
Terminal Rating
Terminals are marked to As an example, 90 °C wire
with line and load terminals
wire material type that it is indicate the maximum wire is often required for use in
2 factory installed or shipped
separately for field
rated for use with. In most temperature rating that is 100% continuous current
electrical applications, the approved for use. In relation rated MCCB applications.
2 installation. Each terminal
provides wire connecting
conductor material is to molded case circuit When this is the case, the
comprised of copper or breaker application, the 90 °C wire must be applied
capabilities for specific
2 ranges of continuous current
aluminum busbar or stranded
wire. Each is considered
temperature rating is typically
90 °C or 75 °C. Although the
at its 75 °C rated ampacity,
which often results in the
ratings and wire types. Wire
2 connecting terminals are
effective material for
conducting electricity a
terminal is marked with
applicable wire temperature
wire being selected one
size larger than typical. An
typically secured to the
nd both have different rating, it is important to note example of the terminal
2 breaker using slotted or hex
head screws and use various
advantages. Copper has UL 489, the standard to markings and corresponding
higher conductivity as well which MCCBs adhere, only designations is on
2 hardware types for securing
connection to the wire.
as superior tensile strength, recognizes 60 °C and 75 °C Page V4-T2-117.
which is considered an wire for testing purposes
For proper terminal-breaker
2 or terminal-wire torque
advantage in the event of a
high current fault. Aluminum
and rated use. If 90 °C wire
is used to connect to an
requirements, please consult
2 the detailed selection tables
is a lighter material with
greater pliability and is also
MCCB, the wire must be
applied at its 75 °C rated
in this catalog or the specific
generally more cost-effective. ampacity.
2 markings on the terminal.
Each terminal is labeled to
indicate which material it is
2 rated for use with as outlined
on Page V4-T2-117.
2
2
2

V4-T2-116 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Standards and Certifications Special Application Terminals
All terminals comply with
2
Multi-Wire Terminals Rear Fed Terminals Control Wire Terminals
UL Standards 486A and 486B
and CSA Standard C22.2 2
No. 65M.
Terminal Marking
2
Example 1
2
The use of load-side multi-wire
Rear fed terminals allow the
ability to connect cable from
Control wire terminals and
control wire kits are offered
2
terminals provides an
alternative to power
the back of the breaker
instead of the top or bottom.
to provide means to tap off
control power from the circuit 2
distribution blocks by This allows for easier breaker using the male end of
distributing the electrical load
directly from the circuit breaker
connection when the breaker a quick disconnect. Varying 2
is more accessible from the for each frame size, the tabs
to multiple downstream
devices. These terminals can
back. A kit of three terminals can be ordered separately for 2
typically includes terminal field installation or factory
be installed in the field or
specified for factory
shields or interphase barriers. installed onto the terminal.
2
installation. Kits typically End Cap/Screw Terminal Kits
include terminal shields, 2
mounting hardware, insulators

Legend
and tin-plated connectors.
Multi-wire terminals connect
2
AL — Aluminum conductors directly to the circuit breaker
and eliminate the need for 2
CU — Copper conductors
additional short-circuit
9 — 90 °C wire combination ratings, as
An end cap kit slides onto the
2
7 — 75 °C wire required by separate power
line or load side of the circuit
Example: AL9CU—Rated for use with
distribution blocks. Direct
breaker and acts as a 2
connection to the breaker
aluminum and copper and is 90 °C rated. threaded adapter for the
Note
also saves space in the panel
and eliminates wiring. Multi-
conductor to accept a ring 2
terminal (compression lug)
wire terminals are UL listed
2
1 If the terminal is not marked to indicate
or other bolt-on connector.
maximum wire temperature rating, for use on the load side of
it should be assumed that 75 °C is the
The kit is designed to meet
the circuit breaker.
maximum wire rating. any requirements for
clearance and is capped to 2
StrandAble Terminals
provide finger protection
Cable Sizing/Selection StrandAble Standard once installed. Each kit 2
When sizing and selecting includes a threaded base
cable for use with a molded and the required hardware 2
case circuit breaker, the for securing the connector.
temperature rating of both Note: As standard, Power 2
the breaker terminals and Defense frame sizes 4, 5 and 6
the electrical equipment
connectors must be
Standard molded case circuit include imperial threaded
conductors (optional metric
2
breaker terminals are listed
2
considered to ensure proper threading). No additional
for Class B and C rigid wire by components are required to
size and insulation rating can default in accordance with UL
be chosen. The equipment connect a compression lug or
labeling or installation
489 & 486 standards. Eaton’s
StrandAble terminals allow
other bolted connection to
these frames.
2
guidelines must be reviewed for direct connection to the
to determine the proper circuit breaker with nearly any 2
cable size and insulation class of rigid or fine strand
required, regardless of the
ratings listed on the terminal.
wire. This eliminates the 2
need for any additional
For general selection
guidelines, NEC Article 310
fittings and ensures UL
compliance with all
2
(NEC 2017) outlines the
use of “Conductors for
components connected to
the breaker. Rated for use 2
General Wiring” and can be with the eight most common
a resource for determining
appropriate cable size based
wire classes, StrandAble 2
terminals offer a breaker
on the temperature rating,
wire type and amperage
integrated solution that can 2
eliminate time and save cost
requirement. in an electrical assembly.
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-117

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Catalog Numbering System Overview

2
Breakers
2 Power Defense breakers are Product may be ordered Note that most of the When field installing
configured using a 20-digit using the base breaker accessories and terminals for accessories, the best practice
2 catalog number that can be catalog number (14 digits) Power Defense molded case to follow is to order a base
divided into two sections: only. However, if factory circuit breakers are field breaker with the 14-digit
2 • Base breaker catalog
modifications are required,
including installation of
installable. catalog number and order the
accessories or special
number = digits 1–14
2 • Factory modifications =
accessories, the full breaker
catalog number plus factory
terminals separate for field
installation.
digits 15–20 modifications (20 digits) for
2 a configured breaker must
be used.
2
2 Base Breaker Catalog Number (14 digits with standard terminal configuration)
The catalog number has fixed positions for each breaker characteristic. The fixed format allows a
customer to determine the performance characteristics of the product by parsing the catalog
2 number. The format of the Power Defense breaker catalog number is as follows:

2
Catalog Number PD G 3 3 F 0400 TFA J
Digits (1, 2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7–10) (11–13) (14)

2 Meaning Power
Defense
Certifications
and Standards
Frame Size Poles Interrupting
rating
Continuous
current rating
Trip unit type Terminals

2
Terminal Catalog Number (if ordered separately)
2 Each terminal catalog number has consistent nomenclature that can be used for deciphering
specific terminal characteristic. The consistent format allows the customer to determine the
2 applicable breaker frame, quantity included in each kit and base terminal type.
Catalog Number PD G 3 X 3 TA400

2 Digits (1, 2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7–end)

Meaning Power Certifications Frame Size Denotes Quantity included Base terminal (marked on
2 Defense and Standards accessory in kit each component)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-118 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Specifying Terminals on a Breaker (Digits 14 / 19–20)
The 14th digit of each base For breakers that require In cases where a 20-digit 2
breaker catalog number special terminal catalog number is required,
indicates the terminal configurations, such as digit 14 will always be utilized 2
configuration. For breakers different terminals on line and to specify the line side
that require terminals on the load side, a configured 20- terminal requirement. Digits 2
line side only, load side only, digit catalog number must be 19–20 will be utilized to
or use the same terminals for
line and load side, the 14th
utilized. When different
terminals are required on
specify the load side
configuration. This can be
2
digit can be used to specify each side, the Power accomplished by using the
the terminal requirement. Defense catalog number letter “Z” in digit 19 and 2
structure will maintain specifying the load terminal
consistency. using digit 20. 2
Example: 20-Digit Catalog Number—Frames 1–4 with Different Line and Load Terminals 2
PD G 2 3 F 0225 TFF K NN NN ZG
(1, 2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7–10) (11–13) (14) (15–16) (17–18) (19–20) 2
Power Certifications Frame Size Poles Interrupting Continuous Trip unit type Line side Indicating Tripping Load side
Defense and Standards rating current rating terminals accessory accessory terminals 2
The example above illustrates a Power Defense Frame 2 circuit breaker configured with different terminals
on the line and load side. Digit 14 (K) indicates standard terminals, PDG2X3TA225, on the line side.
2
Digits 19–20 (ZG) indicate special multi-wire terminals, PDG2X3TA2256W, on the load side.
2
Specifying Terminals on a Breaker (Frames 5 and 6)
Power Defense frames 5 and For frames 5 and 6, standard If factory-installed terminals 2
6 are most commonly 14-digit catalog numbers will are required for frames 5 or 6,
ordered without terminals not include terminals. The they can be specified using a 2
installed at the factory. These 14th digit of the catalog complete 20-digit catalog
frames include tapped
conductors that can be
number will indicate imperial
or metric threaded
number. In these cases, the
14th digit will indicate the
2
specified for imperial or
metric threading. This allows
conductors. conductor threading and
digits 19–20 will specify the 2
for increased flexibility when terminal type.
making field connections to 2
the breaker conductors.
2
Example: 20-Digit Catalog Number—Frames 5 and 6 with Factory-Installed Terminals
PD G 5 3 M 1200 P5D M NN NN ZJ 2
(1, 2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7–10) (11–13) (14) (15–16) (17–18) (19–20)
Power Certifications Frame Size Poles Interrupting Continuous Trip unit type Threading type Indicating Tripping Terminals 2
Defense and Standards rating current rating accessory accessory

The example above illustrates a Power Defense frame 5 circuit breaker configured with factory-
2
installed terminals. Digit 14 (M) indicates metric threaded conductors on the line and load side.
Digits 19–20 (ZJ) indicate terminal, PDG5X1TA1200, installed on the line and load side. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-119

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Product Selection
2
Terminals—Frame Size 1 (15–125 A)
2
2 Standard Terminals
2-pole PDG1X2T125 Line and Load J
2
Breaker Catalog
3-pole PDG1X3T125 Number Digit 14 Line Only K
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG1X4T125 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) L/ZL
2 Breaker Max Amps 125 A Terminal Body Type Steel Wire Torque (in-lb) See listed chart
Standard Amp Range 15–125 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) See listed chart
2 # Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial
Wire Range AWG #14–3/0 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) —
2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–85 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial

2
Alternate Terminals
2 2-pole PDG1X2TA125 Breaker Catalog Line and Load T
3-pole PDG1X3TA125 Line Only U
2 Catalog Number 4-pole PDG1X4TA125
Number Digit 14
Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) V/ZL
Breaker Max Amps Terminal Body Type Wire Torque (in-lb)
2
125 A Aluminum See listed chart
Standard Amp Range 15–125 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) See listed chart

2 # Conductors per Phase

Wire Range AWG
1
#14–1/0
Wire Temperature Rating
Wire Classes
75 °C
B, C
Wire Hardware Type
Terminal Torque (in-lb)
Slotted—Imperial
—

2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–53.5 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial

2 Multi-Wire Terminals
2 2-pole
3-pole
—
PDG1X3TA1253W
Breaker Catalog Line and Load
Line Only
—
—
Number Digit 14

2 Catalog Number
Breaker Max Amps
4-pole
125 A
PDG1X4TA1253W
Terminal Body Type
Designation
Aluminum
Load Only (Digit 14/19–20)
Wire Torque (in-lb)
H/ZH
70

2 Standard Amp Range 15–125 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 7.9
# Conductors per Phase 3 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/32 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG #14–2 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–33.6 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/32 in) Imperial
2
2
2-pole — Breaker Catalog Line and Load —
3-pole PDG1X3TA1256W Number Digit 14 Line Only —
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG1X4TA1256W Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) G/ZG
2 Breaker Max Amps 125 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 25
Standard Amp Range Wire Type Wire Torque (Nm)
2
15–125 A Cu/Al 2.82
# Conductors per Phase 6 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/32 in) Imperial

2 Wire Range AWG

Wire Range Metric (mm2)
#14–6
2.08–13.3
Wire Classes
Included Parts
B, C
Terminal Shield
Terminal Torque (in-lb)
Terminal Hardware Type
35
Hex (5/32 in) Imperial

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-120 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 1 (15–125 A), continued
2
End Cap Kit/Screw Terminals
2-pole — Breaker Catalog Line and Load S 2
3-pole PDG1X3TS125 Line Only D
2
Number Digit 14
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG1X4TS125 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) E/ZE
Breaker Max Amps 125 A Terminal Body Type — Wire Torque (in-lb) 34–38
Breaker Frame 15–125 A Wire Type — Wire Torque (Nm) 4–4.4 2
# Conductors per Phase Wire Temperature Rating Wire Hardware Type
2
— — —
Wire Range AWG — Wire Classes — Terminal Torque (in-lb) 34–38
Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts End Cap/Hardware Terminal Screw Size Hex Cap (10/32 x 0.875)
2
Control Wire Tabs
Catalog Number GCWTK For Use With …
2
Breaker Max Amps 125 A PDG1X3TA125,
PDG1X3T125
2
Breaker Frame 15–125 A
Quick Connect Tab Size 1/4-in 2
Package Qty 12
2
Terminal Shields and Barriers
2-pole — 2
3-pole PDG1XTC3P
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG1XTC4P 2
Breaker Max Amps 125 A —
Breaker Frame 15–125 A — 2
Included Parts —
2
Terminal
Shield,
Terminal Shield
Cover, Barriers
2
Catalog Number PDG1XIB3P 2
Breaker Max Amps 125 A
Breaker Frame 15–125 A 2
Included Parts Qty 2 Barriers
2
2
Frame Size 1 Wire Torque (if chart is referenced)
For Sizes … Torque (in-lb) For Sizes … Torque (Nm) 2
14–10 AWG
8 AWG
35
40
2.5–6 mm²
10 mm²
3.95 Nm
4.52 Nm
2
6–4 AWG 45 16–25 mm² 5.08 Nm 2
3–1/0 AWG 50 25–50 mm² 5.65 Nm
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-121

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 2 (15–225 A)

2 Standard Terminals
2 2-pole
3-pole
PDG2X2T100
PDG2X3T100
Breaker Catalog Line and Load
Line Only
J
K
Number Digit 14
2 Catalog Number 4-pole PDG2X4T100 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) L/ZL
Breaker Max Amps 100 A Terminal Body Type Steel Wire Torque (in-lb) See listed chart

2 Standard Amp Range 15–100 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) See listed chart
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG #14–1/0 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 20
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–53.5 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial
2
2
2-pole PDG2X2TA225 Breaker Catalog Line and Load J
3-pole PDG2X3TA225 Number Digit 14 Line Only K
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG2X4TA225 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) L/ZL
2 Breaker Max Amps 225 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 120
Standard Amp Range Wire Type Wire Torque (Nm)
2
110–225 A Cu/Al 13.55
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/16 in) Imperial

2 Wire Range AWG

Wire Range Metric (mm2)
#4–4/0
21.2–107
Wire Classes
Included Parts
B, C
—
Terminal Torque (in-lb)
Terminal Hardware Type
N/A
Clip-in Mount

2 Alternate Terminals
2 2-pole
3-pole
PDG2X2TA50
PDG2X3TA50
Breaker Catalog Line and Load
Line Only
T
U
Number Digit 14

2 Catalog Number
Breaker Max Amps
4-pole
50 A
PDG2X4TA50
Terminal Body Type
Designation
Aluminum
Load Only (Digit 14/19–20)
Wire Torque (in-lb)
V/ZV
See listed chart

2 Amp Range 15–50 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) See listed chart
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG #14–4 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 20
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–21.2 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial
2
2-pole PDG2X2TA100 Breaker Catalog Line and Load T
2 3-pole PDG2X3TA100 Number Digit 14 Line Only U
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG2X4TA100 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) V/ZV

2 Breaker Max Amps 100 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) See listed chart
Amp Range 60–100 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) See listed chart
2 # Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial
Wire Range AWG #14–1/0 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 20
2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–53.5 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial

2 2-pole PDG2X2TA150 Breaker Catalog Line and Load T

3-pole PDG2X3TA150 Number Digit 14 Line Only U
2 Catalog Number 4-pole PDG2X4TA150 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) V/ZV
Breaker Max Amps 150 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 120
2 Amp Range 60–150 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 13.55
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/16 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG #14–4/0 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) N/A
Wire Range Metric (mm2) Included Parts Terminal Hardware Type
2
2.08–107 — Clip-in Mount

2
2-pole PDG2X2TA225K Breaker Catalog Line and Load T
3-pole PDG2X3TA225K Number Digit 14 Line Only U
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG2X4TA225K Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) V/ZV
2 Breaker Max Amps 225 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 275
Amp Range Wire Type Wire Torque (Nm)
2
60–225 A Cu/Al 31.07
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial

2 Wire Range AWG

Wire Range Metric (mm2)
#6–300 kcmil
13.3–152
Wire Classes
Included Parts
B, C
Terminal Shield
Terminal Torque (in-lb)
Terminal Hardware Type
100
Hex (5/32 in) Imperial

V4-T2-122 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 2 (15–225 A), continued
2
Non-standard Terminals
2-pole PDG2X2T150 Breaker Catalog Line and Load W 2
3-pole PDG2X3T150 Number Digit 14 Line Only Y
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG2X4T150 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) Z/ZZ 2
Breaker Max Amps 150 A Terminal Body Type Stainless Steel Wire Torque (in-lb) See listed chart
Amp Range 60–150 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) See listed chart 2
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial
Wire Range AWG #4–4/0 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 20 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 21.2–107 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial
2
2-pole PDG2X2T225 Line and Load W
3-pole PDG2X3T225
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14 Line Only Y 2
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG2X4T225 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) Z/ZZ
Breaker Max Amps 225 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 120 2
Amp Range 60–225 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 13.55
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/16 in) Imperial 2
Wire Range AWG Wire Classes Terminal Torque (in-lb)
2
#4–4/0 B, C N/A
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 21.2–107 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Clip–in Mount

Multi-Wire Terminals
2
2-pole
3-pole
—
PDG2X3TA2256W
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14
Line and Load
Line Only
—
—
2
2
Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) G/ZG
Breaker Max Amps 225 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 25
Amp Range
# Conductors per Phase
15–225 A
6
Wire Type
Wire Temperature Rating
Cu/Al
90 °C
Wire Torque (Nm)
Wire Hardware Type
2.82
Hex (3/32 in) Imperial
2
Wire Range AWG #14–6 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 35
2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–13.3 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/32 in) Imperial
2
2-pole — Breaker Catalog Line and Load —

Catalog Number
3-pole
4-pole
PDG2X3TA2253W
—
Number Digit 14
Designation
Line Only
Load Only (Digit 14/19–20)
—
H/ZH
2
Breaker Max Amps 225 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 70
2
Amp Range 15–225 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 7.9
# Conductors per Phase 3 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/32 in) Imperial 2
Wire Range AWG #14–2 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–33.6 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/32 in) Imperial 2
Rear Fed Terminals 2
2-pole PDG2X2TA150RF Line and Load —
2
Breaker Catalog
3-pole PDG2X3TA150RF Number Digit 14 Line Only —
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG2X4TA150RF Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) —
Breaker Max Amps 225 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 120 2
Amp Range 15–150 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 13.55
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/16 in) Imperial 2
Wire Range AWG #14–4/0 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 60
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–107 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/32 in) Imperial 2
2-pole PDG2X2TA225RF Breaker Catalog Line and Load — 2
3-pole PDG2X3TA225RF Line Only —
2
Number Digit 14
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG2X4TA225RF Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) —
Breaker Max Amps 225 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 275
Amp Range 60–225 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 31.07 2
# Conductors per Phase Wire Temperature Rating Wire Hardware Type
2
1 75 °C Hex (3/16 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG #6–300 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 60
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 13.3–152 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/32 in) Imperial
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-123

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 2 (15–225 A), continued

2
Box Terminals
2 2-pole — Breaker Catalog Line and Load —
3-pole PDG2X3T20 Number Digit 14 Line Only —
2 Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) —
Breaker Max Amps 20 A Terminal Body Type Steel Wire Torque (in-lb) 20
2 Amp Range 15–20 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 2.26
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG #14–10 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 20
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–5.26 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Slotted—Imperial
2
End Cap Kit/Screw Terminals
2 2-pole – Line and Load S
Breaker Catalog

2
3-pole PDG2X3TS225 Number Digit 14 Line Only D
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG2X4TS225 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) E/ZE
Breaker Max Amps Terminal Body Type Wire Torque (in-lb)
2
225 A — 34–38
Breaker Frame 15–225 A Wire Type — Wire Torque (Nm) 4–4.4

2 # Conductors per Phase

Wire Range AWG
—
—
Wire Temperature Rating
Wire Classes
—
—
Wire Hardware Type
Terminal Torque (in-lb)
—
34–38

2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts End Cap/Hardware — Hex Cap (10/32 x 0.75)

2 Control Wire Tabs

Catalog Number FCWTK For Use With …
2 Breaker Max Amps 150 A PDG2X3T100,
PDG2X3T150
Breaker Frame 15–150 A
2 Quick Connect Tab Size 1/4-in
Package Qty 12
2
Catalog Number FCWTK225 For Use With …
2 Breaker Max Amps 225 A PDG2X3T225
Breaker Frame
2 Quick Connect Tab Size
175–225 A
1/4-in

2 Package Qty 12

2 Terminal Shields and Barriers

2-pole PDG2XTC2P

2 Catalog Number
3-pole
4-pole
PDG2XTC3P
PDG2XTC4P

2 Breaker Max Amps 225 A —

Breaker Frame 15–225 A —

2 Included Parts Terminal Shield & Hardware —

2 2-pole
3-pole
PDG2XIB
PDG2XIB3P

2 Catalog Number
Breaker Max Amps
4-pole
225 A
PDG2XIB4P
—

2 Breaker Frame 15–225 A —

Included Parts Interphase Barriers —
2
2 Frame Size 2 Wire Torque (if chart is referenced)
For Sizes … Torque (in-lb) For Sizes … Torque (Nm)
2 14–10 AWG 35 2.5–6 mm² 3.95 Nm

2 8 AWG 40 10 mm² 4.52 Nm

6–4 AWG 45 16–25 mm² 5.08 Nm
2 3–1/0 AWG 50 25–50 mm² 5.65 Nm

V4-T2-124 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 3 (45–600 A)
Standard Terminals
2
2-pole
3-pole
PDG3X2TA300
PDG3X3TA300
Breaker Catalog Line and Load
Line Only
J
K
2
Number Digit 14
Catalog Number
Breaker Max Amps
4-pole
300 A
PDG3X4TA300
Terminal Body Type
Designation
Aluminum
Load Only (Digit 14/19–20)
Wire Torque (in-lb)
L/ZL
275
2
Breaker Frame 400 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 31 2
Standard Amp Range 100–225 A Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in)
# Conductors per Phase 1 — — — — 2
Wire Range AWG #3–350 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 26.7–177 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial 2

2-pole PDG3X2TA350 Line and Load J

2
Breaker Catalog

Catalog Number
3-pole
4-pole
PDG3X3TA350
PDG3X4TA350
Number Digit 14
Designation
Line Only
Load Only (Digit 14/19–20)
K
L/ZL
2
Breaker Max Amps
Breaker Frame
350 A
400 A
Terminal Body Type
Wire Type
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Wire Torque (in-lb)
Wire Torque (Nm)
375
42.37
2
Standard Amp Range 250–350 A Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) 2
# Conductors per Phase 1 — — — —
Wire Range AWG 250–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 127–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial
2
2-pole
3-pole
PDG3X2TA400
PDG3X3TA400
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14
Line and Load
Line Only
J
K
2
2
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA400 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) L/ZL
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 275
Breaker Frame
Standard Amp Range
400 A
400 A
Wire Type
—
Cu/Al
—
Wire Torque (Nm)
—
31
—
2
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) 2
Wire Range AWG 3/0–250 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–127 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial 2
2-pole PDG3X2TA401H Line and Load J
2
Breaker Catalog
2
3-pole PDG3X3TA401H Number Digit 14 Line Only K
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA401H Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) L/ZL
Breaker Max Amps Terminal Body Type Wire Torque (in-lb)
Breaker Frame
400 A
600 A Wire Type
Aluminum
Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm)
550
62.14
2
Standard Amp Range
# Conductors per Phase
H250–H400 A
1
—
Wire Temperature Rating
—
90 °C
—
Wire Hardware Type
—
Hex (5/16 in)
2
Wire Range AWG 500–750 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 200
2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 253–380 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
2
2
2-pole PDG3X2TA630 Breaker Catalog Line and Load J
3-pole PDG3X3TA630 Number Digit 14 Line Only K
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA630 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) L/ZL
Breaker Max Amps 600 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375 2
Breaker Frame Wire Type Wire Torque (Nm)
Standard Amp Range
600 A
450–600 A —
Cu/Al
— —
42.37
—
2
# Conductors per Phase
Wire Range AWG
2
#2–500 kcmil
Wire Temperature Rating
Wire Classes
90 °C
B, C
Wire Hardware Type
Terminal Torque (in-lb)
Hex (5/16 in)
200
2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 33.6–253 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-125

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 3 (45–600 A), continued

2
Optional Terminals
2 2-pole PDG3X2TA402 Breaker Catalog Line and Load T
3-pole PDG3X3TA402 Number Digit 14 Line Only U
2 Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA402 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) V/ZV
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
2 Breaker Frame 400 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in)
2 Wire Range AWG 500–750 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 253–380 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial
2
2 2-pole
3-pole
PDG3X2TA401
PDG3X3TA401
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14
Line and Load
Line Only
—
—

2
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA401 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) —
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) (2) 275 or (1) 375

2 Breaker Frame
# Conductors per Phase
400 A
2
Wire Type
Wire Temperature Rating
Cu/Al
90 °C
Wire Torque (Nm)
Wire Hardware Type
(2) 31.0 or (1) 42.37
Hex (5/16 in)

2 Wire Range AWG (2) 2/0–250 kcmil; Wire Classes

(1) 2/0–500 kcmil
B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8

2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) (1) 67.4–127;

(1) 67.4–253
Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial

2 2-pole PDG3X2TA400H Line and Load T

Breaker Catalog

2
3-pole PDG3X3TA400H Number Digit 14 Line Only U
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA400H Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) V/ZV
Breaker Max Amps Terminal Body Type Wire Torque (in-lb)
2
400 A Aluminum 375
Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37

2 # Conductors per Phase

Wire Range AWG
1
#3–500 kcmil
Wire Temperature Rating
Wire Classes
75 °C
B, C
Wire Hardware Type
Terminal Torque (in-lb)
Hex (3/8 in)
200

2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) 26.7–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial

2
Optional Copper Terminals
2 2-pole PDG3X2T300 Breaker Catalog Line and Load W
3-pole PDG3X3T300 Number Digit 14 Line Only Y
2 Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4T300 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) Z/ZZ
Breaker Max Amps 300 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 275
2 Breaker Frame 400 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 31
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG #3–350 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8
Wire Range Metric (mm2) Included Parts Terminal Hardware Type
2
26.7–177 — Hex (7/32 in) Imperial

2 2-pole
3-pole
PDG3X2T350
PDG3X3T350
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14
Line and Load
Line Only
W
Y

2
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4T350 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) Z/ZZ
Breaker Max Amps 350 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 375

2 Breaker Frame
# Conductors per Phase
400 A
1
Wire Type
Wire Temperature Rating
Cu
75 °C
Wire Torque (Nm)
Wire Hardware Type
42.37
Hex (3/8 in) Imperial

2 Wire Range AWG 250–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 127–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-126 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 3 (45–600 A), continued
2
Optional Copper Terminals, continued
2-pole PDG3X2T400 Breaker Catalog Line and Load W 2
3-pole PDG3X3T400 Number Digit 14 Line Only Y
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4T400 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) Z/ZZ 2
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 275
Breaker Frame 400 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 31 2
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG 3/0–250 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–127 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial
2
2-pole
3-pole
PDG3X2T402
PDG3X3T402
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14
Line and Load
Line Only
—
— 2
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4T402 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) —
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 550
2
Breaker Frame
# Conductors per Phase
400 A
1
Wire Type
Wire Temperature Rating
Cu/Al
90 °C
Wire Torque (Nm)
Wire Hardware Type
62.14
Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
2
Wire Range AWG Al: 500–750 kcmil Wire Classes
Cu: 500 kcmil
B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 200
2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–127 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
2
2-pole
3-pole
PDG3X2T400H
PDG3X3T400H
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14
Line and Load
Line Only
—
—
2
Catalog Number
Breaker Max Amps
4-pole
400 A
PDG3X4T400H
Terminal Body Type
Designation
Copper
Load Only (Digit 14/19–20)
Wire Torque (in-lb)
—
550
2
Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 62.14
2
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG #3–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 200 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 26.7–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
2
2-pole PDG3X2T401H Line and Load W
2
Breaker Catalog
3-pole PDG3X3T401H Number Digit 14 Line Only Y
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4T401H Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) Z/ZZ
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 500 2
Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 56.49
# Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial 2
Wire Range AWG 500–750 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 200
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 253–380 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial 2
2-pole PDG3X2T630 Line and Load W
2
Breaker Catalog
2
3-pole PDG3X3T630 Number Digit 14 Line Only Y
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4T630 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) Z/ZZ
Breaker Max Amps
Breaker Frame
630 A
600 A
Terminal Body Type
Wire Type
Copper
Cu
Wire Torque (in-lb)
Wire Torque (Nm)
375
42.37
2
# Conductors per Phase
Wire Range AWG
2
#2–500 kcmil
Wire Temperature Rating
Wire Classes
75 °C
B, C
Wire Hardware Type
Terminal Torque (in-lb)
Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
200
2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 33.6–253 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial 2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-127

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 3 (45–600 A), continued

2
StrandAble Terminals
2 2-pole PDG3X2TA400SW Breaker Catalog Line and Load A
3-pole PDG3X3TA400SW Number Digit 14 Line Only B
2 Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA400SW Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) C/ZC
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 275
2 Breaker Frame 400 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 31
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG 3/0–250 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8
3/0–4/0 Wire Classes D, G, H, I, K, M Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8
2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–127 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial

2 2-pole PDG3X2TA350SW Line and Load —

Breaker Catalog
2 Catalog Number
3-pole
4-pole
PDG3X3TA350SW
PDG3X4TA350SW
Number Digit 14
Designation
Line Only
Load Only (Digit 14/19–20)
—
—

2 Breaker Max Amps

Breaker Frame
350 A
400 A
Terminal Body Type
Wire Type
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Wire Torque (in-lb)
Wire Torque (Nm)
375
42.37

2 # Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG 250–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8

2 250–350 kcmil Wire Classes D, G, H, I, K, M Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8

Wire Range Metric (mm2) 127–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
2
2-pole PDG3X2TA630SW Line and Load A
2
Breaker Catalog
3-pole PDG3X3TA630SW Number Digit 14 Line Only B
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA630SW Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) C/ZC
2 Breaker Max Amps 630 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37
2 # Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG #2–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 200
2 #2–350 kcmil Wire Classes D, G, H, I, K, M Terminal Torque (in-lb) 200
Wire Range Metric (mm2) Included Parts Terminal Hardware Type
2
127–253 Terminal Shield Hex (5/16 in) Imperial

2 Terminals with Control Wire

2 2-pole PDG3X2TA400CW Breaker Catalog Line and Load 1
3-pole PDG3X3TA400CW Number Digit 14 Line Only 2

2 Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA400CW Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) 3/Z3
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 275

2 Breaker Frame 400 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 31

# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in)
2 Wire Range AWG 3/0–250 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–127 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial
2
2-pole PDG3X2TA401CW Line and Load 4
2 3-pole PDG3X3TA401CW
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14 Line Only 5
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA401CW Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) 6/Z6
2 Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) (2) 275 or (1) 375
Breaker Frame Wire Type Wire Torque (Nm)
2
400 A Cu/Al (2) 31.0 or (1) 42.37
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in)

2 Wire Range AWG (2) 2/0–250

kcmil
Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8

(1) 2/0–500 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8

2 kcmil
Wire Range Metric (mm2) (2) 67.4–127 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial
2 (1) 67.4–253 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial

V4-T2-128 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 3 (45–600 A), continued
2
Aluminum Terminals with Control Wire, continued
2-pole PDG3X2TA630CW Breaker Catalog Line and Load 1 2
3-pole PDG3X3TA630CW Number Digit 14 Line Only 2
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA630CW Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) 3/Z3 2
Breaker Max Amps 630 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37 2
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in)
Wire Range AWG #2–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 200 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 33.6–253 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
2
Copper Terminals with Control Wire
2-pole PDG3X2T400CW Line and Load 7
2
Breaker Catalog

2
3-pole PDG3X3T400CW Number Digit 14 Line Only 8
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4T400CW Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) 9/Z9
Breaker Max Amps Terminal Body Type Wire Torque (in-lb)
2
400 A Copper 275
Breaker Frame 400 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 31
# Conductors per Phase
Wire Range AWG
2
3/0–250 kcmil
Wire Temperature Rating
Wire Classes
75 °C
B, C
Wire Hardware Type
Terminal Torque (ft-lb)
Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
6–8
2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–127 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial
2
2-pole PDG3X2T630CW Breaker Catalog Line and Load 7 2
3-pole PDG3X3T630CW Number Digit 14 Line Only 8
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4T630CW Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) 9/Z9
2
Breaker Max Amps 630 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37 2
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG #2–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 200 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 33.6–253 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
2
Multi-Wire Terminals
2-pole PDG3X2TA4003W Breaker Catalog Line and Load — 2
3-pole PDG3X3TA4003W Number Digit 14 Line Only —
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA4003W Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) H/ZH 2
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 120
Breaker Frame 400 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 13.55 2
# Conductors per Phase Wire Temperature Rating Wire Hardware Type
2
3 90 °C Hex (3/16 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG #12–2/0 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 3.31–67.4 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/32 in) Imperial
2
2-pole
3-pole
PDG3X2TA4006W
PDG3X3TA4006W
Breaker Catalog Line and Load
Line Only
—
—
2
Number Digit 14
Catalog Number
Breaker Max Amps
4-pole
400 A
PDG3X4TA4006W
Terminal Body Type
Designation
Aluminum
Load Only (Digit 14/19–20)
Wire Torque (in-lb)
G/ZG
25
2
Breaker Frame 400 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 2.82
2
# Conductors per Phase 6 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/32 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG #14–3 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 35 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–26.7 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/32 in) Imperial
2
2-pole PDG3X2TA6006W Line and Load —
3-pole PDG3X3TA6006W
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14 Line Only — 2
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA6006W Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) G/ZG
Breaker Max Amps 600 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) See listed chart 2
Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) See listed chart
# Conductors per Phase 6 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Slotted Imperial 2
Wire Range AWG Wire Classes Terminal Torque (in-lb)
2
#14–1/0 B, C 200
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 2.08–53.5 Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-129

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 3 (45–600 A), continued

2
StrandAble Multi–Wire Terminals
2 2-pole PDG3X2TA6006WSW Breaker Catalog Line and Load —
3-pole PDG3X3TA6006WSW Number Digit 14 Line Only —
2 Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA6006WSW Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) —
Breaker Max Amps 600 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) See listed chart
2 Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) See listed chart
# Conductors per Phase 6 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Slotted Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG #12–2/0 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 200
#8–1/0 Wire Classes D, G, H, I, K, M — —
2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts Terminal Shield Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial

2 Rear-Fed Terminals

2 2-pole
3-pole
PDG3X2TA400RF
PDG3X3TA400RF
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14
Line and Load
Line Only
—
—

2
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA400RF Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) —
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375

2 Breaker Frame
# Conductors per Phase
400 A
1
Wire Type
Wire Temperature Rating
Cu/Al
75 °C
Wire Torque (Nm)
Wire Hardware Type
42.36
Hex (3/8 in)

2 Wire Range AWG 250–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 6–8
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 127–253 Included Parts Interphase Barriers Terminal Hardware Type Hex (7/32 in) Imperial

2
2-pole PDG3X2TA400HRF Breaker Catalog Line and Load —
2 3-pole PDG3X3TA400HRF Number Digit 14 Line Only —
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA400HRF Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) —

2 Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.36
2 # Conductors per Phase 1 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in)
Wire Range AWG #2–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 200
2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) 33.6–253 Included Parts Interphase Barriers Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial

2 2-pole PDG3X2TA630RF Line and Load —

Breaker Catalog

2
3-pole PDG3X3TA630RF Number Digit 14 Line Only —
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TA630RF Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) —
Breaker Max Amps Terminal Body Type Wire Torque (in-lb)
2
600 A Aluminum 375
Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.36

2 # Conductors per Phase

Wire Range AWG
2
#2–500 kcmil
Wire Temperature Rating
Wire Classes
75 °C
B, C
Wire Hardware Type
Terminal Torque (in-lb)
Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
200

2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) 33.6–253 Included Parts Interphase Barriers Terminal Hardware Type Hex (1/2 in) Imperial

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-130 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 3 (45–600 A), continued
2
End Cap Kit/Screw Terminals
2-pole — Breaker Catalog Line and Load S 2
3-pole PDG3X3TS400 Line Only D
2
Number Digit 14
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TS400 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) E/ZE
Breaker Max Amps 400 A Terminal Body Type — Wire Torque (in-lb) 120–144
Breaker Frame 400 A Wire Type — Wire Torque (Nm) 14–16 2
# Conductors per Phase Wire Temperature Rating Wire Hardware Type
2
— — —
Wire Range AWG — Wire Classes — Terminal Torque (in-lb) 120–144
Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts End Cap/Hardware Terminal Screw Size Hex Cap (M8–1.25 x 25)
2
2-pole
3-pole
—
PDG3X3TS600
Breaker Catalog Line and Load
Line Only
S
D
2
Number Digit 14
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3X4TS600 Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) E/ZE
2
Breaker Max Amps 600 A Terminal Body Type — Wire Torque (in-lb) 354
Breaker Frame 600 A Wire Type — Wire Torque (Nm) 40 2
# Conductors per Phase — Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type —
Wire Range AWG — Wire Classes — Terminal Torque (in-lb) 354 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts End Cap/Hardware Terminal Screw Size Hex Cap (M12 x 30)
2
Control Wire Tabs
Catalog Number KCWTK For Use With … 2
Breaker Max Amps 400 A PDG3X3TA300, PDG3X3T300,
Breaker Frame 100–400 A
PDG3X3TA350, PDG3X3T350 2
Quick Connect Tab Size
Package Qty
1/4-in
12
2
Terminal Shields and Barriers
2
2-pole
3-pole
—
PDG3XTC3P
2
Catalog Number
Breaker Max Amps
4-pole
600 A
PDG3XTC4P
—
2
Breaker Frame 70–600 A —
2
Included Parts Terminal Shield —
& Hardware
2
2-pole PDG3XIB 2
3-pole PDG3XIB3P
Catalog Number 4-pole PDG3XIB4P
2
Breaker Max Amps 600 A —
Breaker Frame 70–600 A — 2
Included Parts Interphase —
Barriers
2
2
Frame Size 3 Wire Torque (if chart is referenced)
2
For Sizes … Torque (in-lb) For Sizes … Torque (Nm)
14–10 35 in-lb 2.5–6 3.95 Nm 2
8 40 in-lb 10 4.51 Nm
6–4 45 in-lb 16–25 5.08 Nm 2
2–1/0 50 in-lb 35–50 5.65 Nm
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-131

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 4 (300–800 A)

2 Standard Terminals
2 2-pole
3-pole
PDG4X1TA700
PDG4X3TA700
Breaker Catalog Line and Load
Line Only
J
K
Number Digit 14
2 Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) L/ZL
Breaker Max Amps 700 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375

2 Standard Amp Range 300–700 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG 1–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 42.4–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
2-pole PDG4X1TA800 Line and Load J
2 3-pole PDG4X3TA800
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14 Line Only K
Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) L/ZL
2 Breaker Max Amps 800 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
Standard Amp Range 800 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37
2 # Conductors per Phase 3 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG Wire Classes Terminal Torque (ft-lb)
2
3/0–400 kcmil B,C 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–203 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial

2 Alternate Terminals

2 2-pole
3-pole
PDG4X1TA801
PDG4X3TA801
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14
Line and Load
Line Only
T
U

2
Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) V/ZV
Breaker Max Amps 800 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 500

2 Amp Range
# Conductors per Phase
300–800 A
2
Wire Type
Wire Temperature Rating
Cu/Al
—
Wire Torque (Nm)
Wire Hardware Type
56.49
Hex (3/8 in) Imperial

2 Wire Range AWG 500–750 kcmil Wire Classes B,C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 253–380 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
Alternate Copper Terminals
2 2-pole PDG4X1T600 Breaker Catalog Line and Load W
3-pole PDG4X3T600 Number Digit 14 Line Only Y
2 Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) Z/ZZ
Breaker Max Amps 600 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 300
2 Amp Range 300–600 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 33.9
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG 2/0–500 kcmil Wire Classes B,C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 67.4–238 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
2 2-pole
3-pole
PDG4X1T800
PDG4X3T800
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 14
Line and Load
Line Only
W
Y
Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) Z/ZZ
2 Breaker Max Amps 800 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 275

2 Amp Range
# Conductors per Phase
700–800 A
3
Wire Type
Wire Temperature Rating
Cu
—
Wire Torque (Nm)
Wire Hardware Type
31.07
Hex (3/8 in) Imperial

2 Wire Range AWG 3/0–300 kcmil Wire Classes B,C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–152 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-132 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 4 (300–800 A), continued
2
StrandAble Terminals
2-pole — Breaker Catalog Line and Load A 2
3-pole PDG4X3TA800SW Number Digit 14 Line Only B
Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) C/ZC 2
Breaker Max Amps 800 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) —
Amp Range 300–800 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) — 2
# Conductors per Phase 3 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG 3/0–400 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) — 2
3/0–300 kcmil Wire Classes D, G, H, I, K, M — —
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–203 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial 2
2
Control Wire Terminals
2-pole PDG4X1TA700CW Breaker Catalog Line and Load 1 2
3-pole PDG4X3TA700CW Number Digit 14 Line Only 2
Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) 3/Z3
2
Breaker Max Amps 700 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
Amp Range 300–700 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37 2
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG #1–500 kcmil Wire Classes B,C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 42.4–253 Control Tab Size 1/4-in Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
2
2-pole PDG4X1TA800CW Breaker Catalog Line and Load 1
3-pole PDG4X3TA800CW Number Digit 14 Line Only 2
Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) 3/Z3
Breaker Max Amps 800 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375 2
Amp Range Wire Type Wire Torque (Nm)
2
300–800 A Cu/Al 42.37
# Conductors per Phase 3 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG
Wire Range Metric (mm2)
3/0–400 kcmil
85–203
Wire Classes
Control Tab Size
B, C
1/4-in
Terminal Torque (ft-lb)
Terminal Hardware Type
30–35
Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
2
2-pole PDG4X1TA801CW Breaker Catalog Line and Load 4

Catalog Number
3-pole
4-pole
PDG4X3TA801CW
—
Number Digit 14
Designation
Line Only
Load Only (Digit 14/19–20)
5
6/Z6
2
Breaker Max Amps 800 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 500
2
Amp Range 300–800 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 56.49
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial 2
Wire Range AWG 500–750 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 253–380 Control Tab Size 1/4-in Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-133

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 4 (300–800 A), continued

2
Rear Fed Terminals
2 2-pole PDG4X1TA800RF Breaker Catalog Line and Load —
3-pole PDG4X3TA800RF Number Digit 14 Line Only —
2 Catalog Number 4-pole — Designation Load Only (Digit 14/19–20) —
Breaker Max Amps 800 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 275
2 Amp Range 300–800 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 31.07
# Conductors per Phase 3 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG 3/0–300 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–152 Included Parts Interphase Barriers Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
2 End Cap Kit/Screw Terminals
2-pole — Breaker Catalog Line and Load S
2 Catalog Number
3-pole
4-pole
PDG4X3TS800
PDG4X4TS800
Number Digit 14
Designation
Line Only
Load Only (Digit 14/19–20)
D
E/ZE

2 Breaker Max Amps 800 A Terminal Body Type — Wire Torque (ft-lb) 35
Breaker Frame 300–800 A Wire Type — Wire Torque (Nm) 47.45
2 # Conductors per Phase — Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type —
Wire Range AWG — Wire Classes — Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 35
2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts End Cap/Hardware Terminal Screw Size Hex Cap (1/2–13 x 1.25 in)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-134 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A)
Terminal Options
2
1-pole
—
PDG5X1TA700
—
Breaker Catalog Line and Load ZJ 2
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only ZK
Catalog Number
Breaker Max Amps
—
700 A
—
Terminal Body Type
Designation
Aluminum
Load Only
Wire Torque (in-lb)
ZL
375
2
Amp Range 320–700 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37 2
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG 1–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 42.4–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
1-pole PDG5X1TA1000 Line and Load ZJ
— —
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only ZK 2
Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only ZL
Breaker Max Amps 1000 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375 2
Amp Range 320–1000 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37
# Conductors per Phase 3 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial 2
Wire Range AWG Wire Classes Terminal Torque (ft-lb)
2
3/0–400 kcmil B, C 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–203 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial

1-pole PDG5X1TA1200 Line and Load ZJ

2
Breaker Catalog

Catalog Number
—
—
—
—
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only
Designation Load Only
ZK
ZL
2
Breaker Max Amps
Amp Range
1200 A
320–1200 A
Terminal Body Type
Wire Type
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Wire Torque (in-lb)
Wire Torque (Nm)
375
42.37
2
# Conductors per Phase 4 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
2
Wire Range AWG 4/0–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 107–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial 2
1-pole PDG5X1TA1201 Breaker Catalog Line and Load ZT 2
— — Number Digit 19/20 Line Only ZU
Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only ZV 2
Breaker Max Amps 1200 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 450
Amp Range 320–1200 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 50.84 2
# Conductors per Phase 3 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG 500–750 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) Included Parts Terminal Hardware Type
2
107–253 — Hex (3/4 in) Imperial

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-135

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A), continued

2 Copper Terminal Options
2 1-pole
—
PDG5X1T700
—
Breaker Catalog Line and Load ZW
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only ZY

2 Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only ZZ

Breaker Max Amps 700 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 300

2 Amp Range 320–700 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 33.9

# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG 2/0–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 67.4–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
1-pole PDG5X1T1000 Breaker Catalog Line and Load ZW
2 — — Number Digit 19/20 Line Only ZY
Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only ZZ

2 Breaker Max Amps 1000 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 300
Amp Range 320–1000 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 33.9
2 # Conductors per Phase 3 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG 3/0–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial

2 1-pole PDG5X1T1200 Breaker Catalog Line and Load ZW

— — Number Digit 19/20 Line Only ZY
2 Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only ZZ
Breaker Max Amps 1200 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 275
2 Amp Range 320–1200 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 31.07
# Conductors per Phase 4 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG 4/0–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) Included Parts Terminal Hardware Type
2
107–253 — Hex (3/4 in) Imperial

StrandAble Terminals
2 1-pole PDG5X1TA1200SW Line and Load ZA
Breaker Catalog

2
— — Number Digit 19/20 Line Only ZB
Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only ZC
Breaker Max Amps Terminal Body Type Wire Torque (in-lb)
2
1200 A Aluminum 375
Amp Range 320–1200 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37

2 # Conductors per Phase

Wire Range AWG
4
4/0–500 kcmil
Wire Temperature Rating
Wire Classes
90 °C
B, C
Wire Hardware Type
Terminal Torque (ft-lb)
Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
30–35

2 4/0–350 kcmil Wire Classes D, G, H, I, K, M

Wire Range Metric (mm2) 107–253 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
Control Wire Terminals
2 1-pole PDG5X1TA700CW Breaker Catalog Line and Load Z1
— — Number Digit 19/20 Line Only Z2
2 Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only Z3
Breaker Max Amps 700 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
2 Amp Range 320–700 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37
# Conductors per Phase 2 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG 1–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 42.4–253 Control Tab Size 1/4-in Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
1-pole PDG5X1TA1000CW Line and Load Z1
2 — —
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only Z2
Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only Z3
2 Breaker Max Amps 1000 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
Amp Range 320–1000 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37
2 # Conductors per Phase 3 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG 3/0–400 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) 85–203 Control Tab Size 1/4-in Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial

V4-T2-136 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Terminals—Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A), continued
2
Control Wire Terminals, continued
1-pole PDG5X1TA1200CW Breaker Catalog Line and Load Z1 2
— — Number Digit 19/20 Line Only Z2
Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only Z3 2
Breaker Max Amps 1200 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
Amp Range 320–1200 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37 2
# Conductors per Phase 4 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG 4/0–500 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35 2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 107–253 Control Tab Size 1/4-in Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial
2
1-pole
—
PDG5X1TA1201CW
—
Breaker Catalog Line and Load
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only
Z4
Z5 2
Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only Z6
Breaker Max Amps 1200 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 450
2
Amp Range
# Conductors per Phase
320–1200 A
3
Wire Type
Wire Temperature Rating
Cu/Al
—
Wire Torque (Nm)
Wire Hardware Type
50.84
Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
2
Wire Range AWG 500–750 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
2
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 107–253 Control Tab Size 1/4-in Terminal Hardware Type Hex (3/4 in) Imperial

2
Conductor Extensions
2
2-pole 5104A24G01 Breaker Catalog Line and Load —

Catalog Number (Imperial)

3-pole
4-pole
5104A24G02
5104A24G05
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only
Designation Load Only
—
—
2
Breaker Max Amps 1200 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) See terminal/conductor
2
Amp Range 320–1200 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) See terminal/conductor
# Conductors per Phase — Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type See terminal/conductor 2
Wire Range AWG — Wire Classes — Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts Interphase Barriers Terminal Hardware Type Hex (1/2 in) Imperial 2
2-pole 5104A24G03 Breaker Catalog Line and Load — 2
3-pole 5104A24G04 Number Digit 19/20 Line Only —
Catalog Number (Metric) 4-pole 5104A24G06 Designation Load Only — 2
Breaker Max Amps 1200 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) See terminal/conductor
Amp Range 320–1200 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) See terminal/conductor 2
# Conductors per Phase Wire Temperature Rating Wire Hardware Type
2
— — See terminal/conductor
Wire Range AWG — Wire Classes — Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 30–35
Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts Interphase Barriers Terminal Hardware Type Hex (M12) Metric
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-137

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Terminals—Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A)

2 Terminal Options
2 1-pole
—
PDG6X1TA1600
—
Breaker Catalog Line and Load ZJ
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only ZK

2 Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only ZL

Breaker Max Amps 1600 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 550

2 Amp Range 700–1600 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 62.14
# Conductors per Phase 4 Wire Temperature Rating 75 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
2 Wire Range AWG 500–1000 kcmil Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 20
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 253–507 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (9/16 in) Imperial
2
— — Breaker Catalog Line and Load ZJ
2 Catalog Number
3-pole
—
PDG6X3TA2000
—
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only
Designation Load Only
ZK
ZL

2 Breaker Max Amps 2000 A Terminal Body Type Aluminum Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
Amp Range 700–2000 A Wire Type Cu/Al Wire Torque (Nm) 62.14
2 # Conductors per Phase 6 Wire Temperature Rating 90 °C Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG #2–600 Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (ft-lb) 25
2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) 33.6–304 Included Parts Extended Connectors Terminal Hardware Type Hex (9/16 in) Imperial

2 Copper Terminal Options

1-pole PDG6X1T1600 Line and Load ZW
2 — —
Breaker Catalog
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only ZY
Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only ZZ
2 Breaker Max Amps 1600 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) 375
Amp Range 700–1600 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) 42.37
2 # Conductors per Phase 4 Wire Temperature Rating — Wire Hardware Type Hex (3/8 in) Imperial
Wire Range AWG Wire Classes Terminal Torque (ft-lb)
2
#1–600 kcmil B, C 20
Wire Range Metric (mm2) 42.4–304 Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (9/16 in) Imperial

2 Rear Connectors
2 1-pole
—
PDG6X1T2000RC
—
Breaker Catalog Line and Load
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only
—
—

2
Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only —
Breaker Max Amps 2000 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) See terminal/conductor

2 Amp Range 700–2000 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) See terminal/conductor
# Conductors per Phase — Wire Temperature Rating — Connector Tap Size 2 x 0.45-in Opening

2 Wire Range AWG — Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 120

Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16-in) Imperial
2
1-pole PDF6X1T2000RC Breaker Catalog Line and Load —

2 Catalog Number
—
—
—
—
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only
Designation Load Only
—
—

2 Breaker Max Amps 2000 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) See terminal/conductor
Amp Range 700–2000 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) See terminal/conductor

2 # Conductors per Phase — Wire Temperature Rating — Connector Tap Size 2 x 0.45-in Opening
Wire Range AWG — Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 120
2 Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16 in) Imperial

2 1-pole
—
PDG6X1T2500RC
—
Breaker Catalog Line and Load —
Number Digit 19/20 Line Only —

2 Catalog Number — — Designation Load Only —

Breaker Max Amps 2000 A Terminal Body Type Copper Wire Torque (in-lb) See terminal/conductor

2 Amp Range 700–2000 A Wire Type Cu Wire Torque (Nm) See terminal/conductor
# Conductors per Phase — Wire Temperature Rating — Connector Tap Size 2 x 0.45-in Opening
2 Wire Range AWG — Wire Classes B, C Terminal Torque (in-lb) 120
Wire Range Metric (mm2) — Included Parts — Terminal Hardware Type Hex (5/16-in) Imperial
2

V4-T2-138 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Power Defense Breaker Enclosures
Maximum
2
Breaker Breaker Number NEMA Catalog
Frame Amperes of Poles Rating Number 2
PD1 125 2P/3P NEMA 1 SPD1K0125
NEMA 1 Flush FPD1K0125 2
NEMA 3R
NEMA 12
RPD1K0125
DPD1K0125
2
NEMA 4X WPD1K0125 2
PD2 225 2P NEMA 1 SPD2J0225
NEMA 1 Flush FPD2J0225 2
3P NEMA 1 SPD2K0225
NEMA 1 Flush FPD2K0225
2
2P/3P NEMA 3R RPD2K0225
2
NEMA 12 DPD2K0225
NEMA 4X WPD2K0225 2
PD3 (400 A) 400 2P/3P NEMA 1 SPD3K0400
NEMA 1 Flush FPD3K0400 2
NEMA 3R
2
RPD3K0400
NEMA 12 DPD3K0400
NEMA 4X WPD3K0400
2
PD3 (600 A) 600 2P/3P NEMA 1 SPD3K0600
NEMA 3R RPD3K0600 2
NEMA 12 DPD3K0600
NEMA 4X WPD3K0600 2
PD4 800 2P/3P NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
SPD4K0800
RPD4K0800
2
NEMA 12 DPD4K0800 2
NEMA 4X WPD4K0800
PD5 1200 2P/3P NEMA 1 SPD5K1200 2
NEMA 3R RPD5K1200
NEMA 12 DPD5K1200
2
NEMA 4X WPD5K1200
2
Note: These enclosures are approved for use with Power Defense
breakers equipped with thermal-magnetic PXR 10 or PXR 20 trip units.
For enclosed breakers using PXR 20D or PXR 25 trip units, please contact
2
the enclosed circuit breaker product line.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-139

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Contents
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers—Communications and Software
Description Page
2 Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Frame Size 1 (15–125 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-22
2 Frame Size 2 (15–225 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 3 (45–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-42
2 Frame Size 4 (300–800 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Size 5 (320–1200 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-57
V4-T2-70
Frame Size 6 (700–2500 A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-79
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (3–600 A) . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-87
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (15–600 A) . . . V4-T2-98
2 High Instantaneous Power Defense Circuit
Breakers for Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
2 Power Defense Direct Current Circuit Breakers .
Power Defense Mechanical Current-Limiting
V4-T2-107

Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112

2 Terminals, Lugs, Connectors and Enclosures . . . V4-T2-116
Communications and Software
2 Communication Adapter Modules
Modbus RTU RS-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-141
2 Power Xpert Protection Manager. . . . . . . . . V4-T2-141
Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-142
2 Special Modification Ordering and Pricing. . . . . . V4-T2-146

2
2
2 Communications and Software

2 Communication Adapter Modules

Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Supported Protocols
2 Designed for Power Defense ● Improve safety with ● Compact, DIN rail mounted ● Modbus TCP/IP CAM
circuit breakers, the Power remote breaker control via design with removable for PXR 20, 20D, 25
2 Xpert Release (PXR) programmable discrete I/O terminal blocks offers space Catalog number:
communications adapter ● Perform at-a-glance savings, fast installation PXR-ECAM-MTCP
2 module (CAM) expands the
communication capabilities of
troubleshooting with and accessibility for
maintenance
● PROFIBUS DP CAM
front-facing LEDs that for PXR 20, 20D, 25
2 the PXR 20, PXR 20D and
PXR 25 electronic trip units.
communicate status
and alarms
● Dimensions:
4.30 in (110 mm) H
Catalog number:
When used in conjunction PXR-PCAM
2 with an IoT-based system,
● Simplify configuration and
monitoring with intuitive
1.20 in (30 mm) W
4.30 in (110 mm) D
the PXR-CAMs allow for
2 greater visibility into the
HTML5 web interface
(ECAM only)
facility, process or machine,
2 thus adhering to the design
principles of Industry 4.0.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-140 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Modbus RTU RS-485
2
Product Description Application Description Field Installation
Power Xpert Release (PXR) With this industry standard Field-installable options are 2
trip units have optional protocol, the PXR trip units available on the PXR 20
integral Modbus RTU can supply real-time data for Power Defense frames 2
communication on the such as voltage, current, 2, 5 and 6. See catalog
PXR 20. Modbus RTU
comes standard on the
power, health and status
to any Modbus RTU client
numbers below: 2
● Field installable Modbus
PXR 20D and 25. without any additional
external device. RTU with Relay for PD-2: 2
PDG2XMODRTUREL
● Field installable Modbus 2
RTU for PD-5 and 6:
PDG56XMODRTU 2
2
Power Xpert Protection Manager 2
Product Description
Eaton’s Power Xpert
Features and Benefits
● Set point configuration: Secondary Injection Testing Trip/Alarm Waveform
2
Protection Manager (PXPM)
software provides a clean,
allows direct-to-trip unit or
offline setup, including
The secondary injection test
function utilizes a separate
PXPM’s trip/alarm waveform
feature allows PXR trip units
2
intuitive user interface duplication of settings
enabling unmatched control, between units
circuit that injects a signal in
parallel with and representative
to capture and display the
breaker state leading up to 2
testing and troubleshooting. ● Control mode: capture of the output of the current the last trip or alarm event,
The software is free to waveforms, reset trip unit sensor. All the built-in provided that auxiliary power 2
download and can run all or set the date/time protection circuitry and is connected.
standard features on any PC. ● Real-time data: provides routines respond per the
settings in the breaker. The Available waveform data 2
Licenses can be purchased to information regarding all includes minimum and
unlock premium features: status and metered data
direction from the trip unit
PXPM software can initiate
testing of long delay trip, maximum phase current, 2
secondary injection testing voltage and frequency. Using
short delay trip, instantaneous
and trip/alarm waveform. ● Event summaries: stores
up to 200 events, detailed trip, maintenance mode and this information increases 2
Communication between ground (earth) fault trip via uptime by identifying issues
PXPM and PXR trip units is
information on the most
recent (10 trip and 10 the USB communication. causing an event and
minimized breaker wear
2
made via USB or through alarm) events, and time
2
connected networks. The current sensor test by identifying potential
adjustments to the real- utilizes a separate circuit to tripping issues faster,
time clock create a signal that is directed without the need for
● Reports: allows for the though the Rogowski coil. expensive standalone 2
formatting and printing of This signal will verify testing equipment.
real-time data of performed
secondary injection tests
continuity and functionality
of the Rogowski coil.
2

Advanced Feature Licenses

2
Description Part Number 2
PXPM Advanced Testing License 10 Sessions PXPM-SW-TEST-10
PXPM Advanced Testing License 30 Sessions PXPM-SW-TEST-30 2
PXPM Advanced Testing License 120 Sessions PXPM-SW-TEST-120
PXPM Advanced Testing License Infinite Sessions PXPM-SW-TEST 2
PXPM Trip/Alarm Waveform License 10 Sessions
PXPM Trip/Alarm Waveform License 30 Sessions
PXPM-SW-WAVE-10
PXPM-SW-WAVE-30
2
PXPM Trip/Alarm Waveform License 120 Sessions PXPM-SW-WAVE-10 2
PXPM Trip/Alarm Waveform License Infinite Sessions PXPM-SW-WAVE
Licenses are also available online at www.Eaton.com/BuyPXPM. 2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-141

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Special Applications
2
Extreme Temperature In addition to ambient 50 °C Calibrated Breakers All Eaton circuit breaker cases
2 Applications temperature, other factors
must be taken into account in
Special non-UL listed are molded from a glass-
polyester material, which
The Technical Data section of calibrations are available for
2 this catalog (Pages V4-T2-12 the application of circuit
breakers in system designs.
50 °C ambient temperatures
for breakers equipped with
does not support the growth
of fungus. Any parts that are
–V4-T2-20) presents
These include altitude, power susceptible to the growth of
2 permissible loads for each
breaker type at ambient factor, cable size and type,
thermal-magnetic trip units,
and for separate thermal- fungus will require special
load types, and others. magnetic trip units. Breakers treatment for application in
2 temperatures ranging from
40 °C through 70 °C. The Additional details on these equipped with electronic trip these types of conditions.
tables are presented as an can be found in Eaton’s units can operate reliably For this application, add suffix
2 aid in selecting breakers Consulting Application Guide. in ambient temperatures of J1 to digits 19–20 on a Power
appropriate for the application. 100% Rated Breakers 50 °C, and do not require Defense catalog number to
2 Per industry standards, Molded case circuit breakers
specific calibration. order.
breakers are calibrated to are designed to carry rated For this application on
2 perform at an ambient current in open air at the thermal-magnetic breakers,
High Altitude Applications
Low-voltage circuit breakers
temperature of 40 °C. calibrated temperature for the trip unit digits (11–13) of
2 Thermal-magnetic breakers an indefinite period of time
without tripping. Molded case
the Power Defense circuit
breaker catalog number are
must be progressively de-
rated for voltage and current
are temperature sensitive,
carrying capacity at altitudes
2 and at temperatures above
40 °C will carry less current
circuit breakers are typically
applied in an enclosure, there-
changed, from TFF and TFA
to VFF and VFA, respectively. above approximately 6000 ft.
fore the National Electrical Details for these are provided The thinner air at higher
2
than their continuous current
Code (Article 220.10b) within each frame section. altitudes reduces cooling
rating.This high temperature
requires that all overcurrent and dielectric characteristics
condition promotes nuisance
2 tripping and can create protection devices be loaded Freeze-Tested Circuit
Breakers
compared to denser air found
at lower altitudes.
unacceptable temperature to a maximum of 80% of their
2 conditions inside the breaker
and at the terminals. To
continuous current rating,
unless specifically listed for
Power Defense circuit
breakers may be ordered with
Derate voltage, interruption
and current-carrying capacity
2 prevent these issues, the
ambient temperature load
100% applications. Breakers
listed for 100% applications
freeze testing for applications
in extreme cold conditions.
for every increase of 1000 ft
over 6000 ft.
derating values presented in specifically outline, on the This option uses special
2 the technical data section nameplates, a minimum size lubrication and mechanical Voltage and interruption
must be followed. Additionally, enclosure, the minimum operation is verified at –40 °C. capacity: 2.5% derate every
2 special 50 °C calibrated ventilation (if needed), and
For this application, add suffix
1000 ft over. For example, a
480 V at 65 kA circuit breaker
breakers are available— the minimum conductor size
J2 to digits 19–20 on a Power
2 note that these do not
carry a UL Listing.
for application at 100% rating.
Defense catalog number to
applied at 7000 ft elevation
would be derated to 468 V
Power Defense circuit order. at 63 kA.
2 Electronic breakers are breakers are available in
Fungus/Moisture Treated
insensitive to ambient 100% rated configurations, Current-carrying capacity:
2 temperature within a certain
range and are not likely to
as presented in each section
of the catalog. Power
Breakers
Molded case circuit breakers
apply 3 °C ambient
temperature rise every
1000 ft over.
2 nuisance trip. However, if
the ambient temperature
Defense breakers rated for
100% use the designator
are suited for operation in 0%
to 95% noncondensing Frame/trip unit specific
significantly exceeds 40 °C PDF in Digits 1–3 of the humidity environments. As is
2 the electronic circuitry or catalog number. the case with all electrical
temperature derating tables
can be found in the technical
other internal components equipment, application in a
2 could become damaged.
It is important to understand
that using 100% rated
condition or environment
data section.
Power Defense electronic above this humidity level
breakers is not always the
2 breakers are designed with
circuitry to initiate a tripping
best choice for every system
should be avoided. Breakers
applied in these environments
design. Consideration should
2 operation to provide self-
protection to the electronic
be given to any present or
should be protected by the
proper NEMA rated enclosure
future factors that could
components in the event the (or of appropriate IP rating),
2 internal temperature reaches
affect the overall system
design, and an understanding
and maintained dry. If such
to an unsafe level. operating conditions cannot
2 of NEC Article 210.20a in
application of these products.
be met, special treatment
of the circuit breaker should
2 be considered to minimize
the possibility of operational
problems.
2
2
2

V4-T2-142 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Reverse Fed Applications Application of Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers in 400–415 Hz Systems
All Power Defense molded 2
Some specialty equipment The thermal derating on Application Recommendations
case circuit breakers shipped
complete from Eaton’s
requires 400–415 Hz power
systems. Due to the increased
these devices is based
upon 100%, three-phase
It is recommended that 2
factory are capable of being thermal indicating devices
reverse fed, with the power
resistance in these systems,
circuit breakers typically
application in open air in a
maximum of 40 °C (104 °F)
such as “tempiplates” be
placed on the line and load
2
source feeding the lower require derating. Additionally, with 4 feet (1.2 m) of the terminals or T-connectors of
side (typically considered the
load side) of the circuit
cable and bus sizes used at specified cable 75 °C (167 °F) the center pole. These are 2
400–415 Hz are not based on of bus at the line and load side. usually the hottest terminals
breaker. UL specifies
parameters for circuit
standard National Electrical
Additional derating of not less with a balanced load. A 2
Code tables for 60 Hz maximum temperature of
breakers to be applied in than 20% will be required if
reverse-feed applications,
applications, and larger cross
sections are necessary. the circuit breaker is to be 90 °C (50 °C over a maximum
ambient of 40 °C) would
2
which are met by Power used in an enclosure.
Defense circuit breakers. Eaton’s Power Defense
Further derating may be
verify the maximum rating for
the application. Temperature 2
This typically includes a molded case circuit breakers
required if the enclosure profiles taken on these
factory seal and no “Line” or
“Load” markings. All Frame
can be applied for overcurrent
protection on 400–415 Hz contains other heat breakers can be correlated to 2
Sizes 1 and 2 (PDG1 and generating devices or if the ensure that the hottest points
PDG2) circuit breakers are
systems. Commonly used to
power computer installations, ambient temperatures within the breaker are within 2
always shipped in this 400–415 Hz systems are exceed 40 °C (104 °F). the required temperature
configuration. also employed in conjunction
Cable and Bus Sizing
limits. A thermal cutoff
switch can also be used to
2
with certain aircraft, military
Breakers that ship as frames
only (available in Frame Sizes
and other specialty equipment. The cable and bus sizes to be
used at 400–415 Hz are not
actuate a shunt trip to open
the breaker if the thermal 2
3–6), for field installation of The following application limits are exceeded. Consult
trip units, are marked for tables contain derating
based on standard National
Electrical Code tables for the Eaton Technical Resource 2
standard application, with guidelines for applying Eaton 60 Hz application. Larger Center for further information
the line side marked at the molded case circuit breakers cross sections are necessary on special applications. 2
top and the load side at the on 400–415 Hz systems. at 400–415 Hz to avoid
bottom, and meet UL
requirement for standard The Continuous Current table
exceeding component
temperature limits. All
2
applications. on the next page lists the
maximum continuous current
busbars specified are based
upon mounting the bars in
2
An Eaton facility authorized carrying capacity at 400 Hz.
the vertical plane to allow
to modify MCCBs under UL
File E7819 may convert a The Interrupting Capacities maximum air flow. All 2
table on V4-T2-145 lists the busbars are spaced at a
standard circuit breaker of
this type to a reverse-feed estimated interrupting minimum of 1/4-inch 2
capable device per UL capacities at 400–415 Hz. (6.35 mm) apart. Mounting
parameters following specific Due to the increased
of busbars in the horizontal
plane will necessitate
2
procedures. resistance of the copper
Frame Sizes 1 and 2 always sections resulting from the
additional drafting.
Edgewise orientation of 2
ship complete from the skin effect produced by the bus may change the
factory and are always eddy currents at 400–415 Hz, maximum ratings indicated. 2
reverse-feed capable. Frame circuit breakers in many
Sizes 3, 4, 5 and 6 may ship cases require derating.
2
as complete circuit breakers,
or as separate frames and
trip units if ordered
2
separately.
2
Motor Circuit Protector
devices are not capable of
being reverse fed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-143

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers

2 400–415 Hz Application

2
Maximum Continuous Maximum Cable/ Terminals (Fixed Front)
Breaker Frame Current (Amps at 60 Hz) Continuous (Amps) Busbar (per phase) Catalog Number
PDG1 15 15 1–#12 Cu PDG1X3T125
2 20 20 1–#12 Cu PDG1X3T125
25 25 1–#12 Cu PDG1X3T125
2 30 30 1–#10 Cu PDG1X3T125
35 35 1–#10 Cu PDG1X3T125
2 40 40 1–#8 Cu PDG1X3T125
45 45 1–#8 Cu PDG1X3T125
2 50 50 1–#6 Cu PDG1X3T125
60 60 1–#6 Cu PDG1X3T125
2 80 70 1–#4 Cu PDG1X3T125
90 80 1–#2 Cu PDG1X3T125
2 100 90 1–#1 Cu PDG1X3T125
110 100 1–1/0 Cu PDG1X3T125
2 125 110 1–1/0 Cu PDG1X3T125
PDG2 1 15 15 1–#12 Cu PDG2X3T100
2 20 20 1–#12 Cu PDG2X3T100
25 25 1–#12 Cu PDG2X3T100
2 30 30 1–#10 Cu PDG2X3T100
35 35 1–#10 Cu PDG2X3T100
2 40 40 1–#8 Cu PDG2X3T100
50 45 1–#6 Cu PDG2X3T100
2 70 65 1–#4 Cu PDG2X3T100
90 85 1–#2 Cu PDG2X3T100
2 100 95 1–#1 Cu PDG2X3TA150
125 115 1–1/0 Cu PDG2X3TA150
2 150 135 1–1/0 Cu PDG2X3TA150
PDG3 (400 A Frame) 1 125 100 1–1/0 Cu PDG3X3T300

2 150
170
125
150
1–1/0 Cu
1–2/0 Cu
PDG3X3T300
PDG3X3T300

2 200
225
160
180
1–3/0 Cu
1–4/0 Cu
PDG3X3T300
PDG3X3T300

2 250
300
200
225
1–250 kcmil Cu
1–350 kcmil Cu
PDG3X3T300
PDG3X3T300

2 350
400
275
300
1–500 kcmil Cu
2–3/0 Cu
PDG3X3T350
PDG3X3T400

2 PDG3 (600 A Frame) 1 250

300
200
250
1–250 kcmil Cu
1–350 kcmil Cu
PDG3X3TA400H
PDG3X3TA400H

2 350
400
275
300
1–500 kcmil Cu
1–500 kcmil Cu
PDG3X3TA400H
PDG3X3TA400H

2 500
600
400
400
2–500 kcmil Cu
2–500 kcmil Cu
PDG3X3TA630
PDG3X3TA630

2 PDG4 1 400
500
340
405
2–3/0 Cu
2–300 kcmil Cu
PDG4X3T600
PDG4X3T600
600 470 2–350 kcmil Cu
2 700 355 2–4/0 Cu
PDG4X3T600
PDG4X3T800
800 400 2–300 kcmil Cu
2
PDG4X3T800
PDG5 1 1200 700 3–300 kcmil Cu PDG5X1T1000

2 750
850
3–350 kcmil Cu
4–350 kcmil Cu
PDG5X1T1000
PDG5X1T1200

2 PDG6 1 2000 1500 4–1/2 x 4 Cu 2

Notes
2 1 PXR metering accuracy is ±5% in 400 Hz application.
2 Rear connected Cu T-Bar.

2
2

V4-T2-144 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.2
Interrupting Capacities of 400 Hz Breakers
Estimated 400–415 Hz Interrupting Capacities 12 (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
2
Breaker Frame 240 V 480 V 600 V
2
PDG1_C 5,000 3,600 —
PDG1_F 7,000 5,000 3,600 2
PDG1_G 17,000 7,000 4,400
PDG1_H 20,000 13,000 5,000 2
PDG1_P 40,000 20,000 7,000
PDG2_F 3,600 2,800 2,800 2
PDG2_G, PDG2_M 13,000 5,000 3,600
PDG3_F, PDG3_G, PDG3_M (400 A Frame) 21,000 11,000 8,000 2
PDG3_G (600 A Frame) 13,000 7,000 3,600
PDG3_K (600 A Frame) 17,000 10,000 5,000
2
PDG3_M (600 A Frame)
PDG3_P (600 A Frame)
20,000
40,000
13,000
20,000
7,000
10,000
2
PDG4_K
PDG4_M
14,000
21,000
10,000
11,000
7,000
8,000
2
PDG5 21,000 16,000 8,000 2
PDG6 40,000 33,000 33,000

Notes 2
1 The above interrupting ratings are estimates based on the design parameters and operating characteristics of each breaker as well as on the limited

amount of test data thus far available for circuit breakers applied to 400-415 Hz systems.
2 Not UL Listed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-145

 2.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Power Defense Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Special Modification Ordering and Pricing

2 The pricing schedule below Installation of Terminals 1 Fungus/Moisture Treated Certificate of Compliance
2 outlines the available Power
Defense modifications,
There is no fee for the
installation of standard or
This option provides
additional protection against
or Origin
Available from Eaton’s
ordering instructions and
2 associated fees. The fees
non-standard terminals on
any frames except PD5
fungus growth in application
above 95% noncondensing
Technical Resource Center.
only cover the cost of the and PD6. humidity. Fee: No charge.
2 installation or modification.
Marine Certification
Any additional hardware Fee: $300 list price addition Fee: 20% addition to total
2 required such as shunt trips,
auxiliary switches, terminals,
per PD5/PD6 breaker. breaker list price. Power Defense frames 1–5
are available with marine
Ordering: Reference Ordering: Add suffix J1 to
2
and so forth are in addition to certification. This includes
the fees listed below. terminals, lugs and digits 19–20 on a Power ABS, Lloyd’s and UL 489SA
connectors section for Defense catalog string. certifications.
2 Installation of Internal modification suffixes.
Note: Modification removes Fee: 10% additional to total
Accessories 1 Walking Beam Modification UL listing per UL 489.
2 Internal accessories included
Modify rear of breaker for Special Calibrations
breaker list price.
are alarm switches, auxiliary Ordering: Add suffix M1 to
walking beam installation.
2 switches, shunt trips and
undervoltage releases. Fee: $325 list price addition
Ambient temperature
calibrations other than 40 ºC
digits 19–20 on the Power
Defense catalog string.
2 Fee: $200 list price addition
per breaker. Requires two
breakers.
and 50 ºC or special magnetic
calibrations where applicable. Note
per breaker. 1 May also be field installed for reduced

2 Ordering: Reference frame

Ordering: Add suffix WB
to digits 19–20 on a Power
Fee: 20% addition to total
breaker list price.
cost and leadtime.

catalog section for

2 modification suffixes.
Defense catalog string.
Ordering: Contact Eaton’s
Freeze Tested Technical Resource Center.
2 Note: Single fee per breaker
regardless of number of This option uses special Note: Modification removes
internal accessories installed. lubrication and mechanical UL listing per UL 489.
2 Installation of External
operation is verified at –40 ºC.
Additional information can Certified Test Report
2 Accessories 1 be found in the special
applications section of
Available on demand via
External accessories included Eaton Asset Manager mobile
2 are lock offs, locking the catalog. phone application.
provisions (Kirk Key™), Fee: 20% addition to total
handle mechanisms, plug-in Fee: Varies.
2 blocks and motor operators.
breaker list price.
Ordering: Add suffix J2 to
2 Fee: $200 list price additional
per accessory.
digits 19–20 on a Power
Defense catalog string.
2 Ordering: Reference Note: Modification removes
frame catalog section for UL listing per UL 489.
2 modification suffixes

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-146 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Contents
Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for UL, CSA and IEC Applications
Description Page
2
Series G 2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-148
Product Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-149
V4-T2-150
2
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-152
V4-T2-157 2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172 2
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-190
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208 2
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-217
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
V4-T2-228
V4-T2-232
2
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-235
V4-T2-239 2
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244 2
Special Features and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-247
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-255 2
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258 2
Learn Drawings
Online Online
2
2
Product Overview 2
Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for
UL, CSA and IEC Applications
The EG, JG and LG frames are
designed around space-saving
The Most Logically Designed Thorough In-Plant Testing 2
Contact Assembly The quality, dependability and
Eaton Series G molded case
circuit breakers provide
footprints. The NG and RG
use the proven Eaton Series C
The flexibility and outstanding
performance characteristics
reliability of every Eaton
Circuit Breaker is ensured by
2
increased performance in ND and RD designs.
considerably less space than
The Series G family includes
of Eaton circuit breakers are
made possible by the best
a thorough program of in-
plant testing. Two calibration 2
standard circuit breakers or contact designs in circuit tests are conducted on every
comparable fusible devices.
five frame sizes in ratings
from 15 to 2500 amperes. breaker history. Our pole of every circuit breaker 2
The “G” signifies global Series G offers a choice of technology creates a high- to verify the trip mechanism,
applications: Series G circuit several interrupting capacities speed “blow-open” action operating mechanism, 2
breakers are marked with UL, up to 200 kA at 480 volts AC using the electromechanical continuity and accuracy.
CSA, CE, IEC and KEMA (200 kA at 240 volts AC). forces produced by high-level
fault currents. Current-Limiting 2
KEUR listings. Other Characteristics
Series G molded case circuit
advantages include:
breakers are also available in Eaton circuit breakers are Circuit breakers are current- 2
● Field-fit accessories direct current options. Please operated by a toggle-type limiting because of their
● Common accessories see Specialty Breakers mechanism that is
mechanically trip-free from
high repulsion contact 2
through 630 amperes Section 2.6 for more details. arrangement and use
● Electronic trip units from Standard calibration is 40 °C.
the handle so that the
contacts cannot be held
of state-of-the-art arc 2
20 to 2500 amperes extinguishing technology.
For applications in high closed against short circuit
● UL-listed and IEC-rated, ambient temperature currents. Tripping due to Eaton offers one of the 2
30 mA ground fault/earth conditions, 50 °C factory overload or short circuits is most complete lines of
leakage modules calibration is available on clearly indicated by the current-limiting breakers in 2
● Built-in ground fault thermal-magnetic breakers position on the handle. This the industry. The industrial
protection down to (not UL). remarkably fast and
dependable contact action is
breakers are available in
current-limiting versions
2
20 amperes
designed to enhance safety. with interrupting capacities
up to 200 kA at 480 V 2
without fuses in the same
physical size as standard 2
and high interrupting
capacity breakers. 2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-147

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Operating Mechanisms
2 Eaton circuit breakers have The toggle handle snaps into As an additional switching Positions of the Toggle
a toggle handle operating the TRIPPED position if the position indicator for EG- to Handle Drive
2 mechanism, which also breaker is tripped by one of RG-Frame circuit breakers,
serves as a switching position its overcurrent, short circuit, there are two windows on
2 indicator. The indicator shows shunt or undervoltage the right and on the left of the
the positions of: ON, OFF and releases. Before the circuit toggle handle, in which the OFF ON Tripped
2 TRIPPED. breaker can be reclosed
following a trip-out, the toggle
switching state is indicated
by means of the colors
Reset

2 handle must be brought

beyond the OFF position
red, green and white
corresponding to the ON,
(RESET). The circuit breaker OFF and TRIPPED positions
2 can then be reclosed. respectively.

2
Standards and Certifications
2 Eaton Series G circuit Global Third-Party
2 breakers meet applicable
UL 489 and IEC 60947-2
Certification
Certification marks ensure
standards.
2 product compliance with the
total standard via the third
Molded case circuit breakers
2 from Eaton are designed to party witnessing of tests
conform with the following by globally recognized
international standards: independent certification
2 organizations.
● Australian Standard AS ● National Electrical ● Union Technique de
2 2184 and AS 3947-2
molded case circuit
Manufacturers Association
Standards Publication No.
l’Electricite Standard
NF C 63-120, low-voltage
KEMA is a highly recognized,
independent international
AB1-1993 molded case switchgear and control organization that offers
2 ●
breakers
British Standards circuit breakers gear circuit breaker certification and inspection
Institution Standard ● South African Bureau of requirements facilities for equipment in
2 EN60947.2 Standards, Standard SANS ● Verband Deutscher many industries. The KEMA-
156, Standard Specification Elektrotechnike KEUR mark is the highest
● International
2 Electromechanical for molded case circuit (Association of German certification an electrical
product can receive from
Commission breakers Electrical Engineers)
KEMA. Our IEC 60947-2
2 Recommendations IEC ● Swiss Electro-Technical Standard VDE 0660,
low-voltage switchgear molded case circuit breakers
60947.2 circuit breakers Association Standard SEV are KEMA tested and
2 947.2, Safety Regulations
for circuit breakers
and control gear, circuit
breakers certified. These breakers are
also listed in accordance with
2 ● Japanese T-Mark standard
molded case circuit
UL 489, as well as CSA C22.2
No. 5-02.
breakers
2 KEMA, UL and CSA provide
ongoing follow-up testing and
2 inspections to ensure that
Eaton molded case circuit
2 breakers continue to meet
their exacting standards.
2 ISO Certification
Eaton circuit breakers are
2 manufactured in ISO®
certified facilities.
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-148 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Product Selection Overview
2
Electronic Trip Units (Digitrip RMS Trip Units)—Multi-Function Electronic Trip Units for All Applications
True rms Sensing
2
Digitrip RMS trip units use Eaton’s microprocessor-based intelligence to provide true rms sensing,
permitting increased accuracy and reliable system protection. True rms sensing is not susceptible to
2
nuisance tripping when waveforms containing high harmonic currents are present.
2
Digitrip RMS 310+ Digitrip RMS 610 and 910
Digitrip RMS 310+ electronic Digitrip RMS 310+ LSG and Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip Digitrip RMS 910 trip units 2
trip units are available with LSIG units are available with units are available with Eaton can also provide the user with
Eaton Series G circuit ground fault pickup and flat R-Frame circuit breakers 800 power and energy monitoring 2
breakers JG, LG, NG and RG, response ground fault delay. through 2500 amperes. capability. Peak power
as well as Series C FD, KD,
LD and MDL circuit breakers.
Ground fault alarm options are
available with trip and no trip
Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units
provide unparalleled system
demand, present power 2
demand, and total energy, as
Digitrip 310+ trip units are
functionality as a means to
notify users of a ground fault
protection with the added
convenience of a local
well as forward and reverse
energy can be monitored with
2
equipped with an integrated Ir condition with the option to display. this unit.
switch that allows users to maintain the breaker online. 2
modify the continuous Curve Shaping Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
current rating of the breaker
without having to replace a
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units
can effectively coordinate Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip
have the additional capability
of monitoring line-to-line
2
rating plug. This provides with both sophisticated units are available with up to
further flexibility for upstream power breakers as nine curve shaping choices
voltage, as well as system
power factor. Both 2
coordination in systems. well as downstream thermal- achieved by adjusting up to parameters are displayed in
The trip units may be used magnetic breakers, making seven switches on the front
of the unit for optimum
the digital display window 2
in 50 Hz or 60 Hz applications. Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units and are supported by LEDs to
The Digitrip 310+ offers true
rms sensing, is front
the cost-effective reliable
choice for selectively
system coordination.
Maximum curve shaping
indicate which parameter is
being displayed.
2
flexibility is provided by
adjustable and has an optional
local display of current and
coordinated systems.
dependent long and short Harmonics Monitoring 2
cause of trip. Thermal Memory delay adjustments that are
All Digitrip RMS trip units
long delay pickup (Ir) based, Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
are capable of displaying
2
Curve Shaping depicted on the front of the
incorporate a long delay. values of current harmonics
When selectively coordinated Thermal memory prevents the
unit by the blue portion of the
time-current curve. in the digital display window. 2
systems are called for, system from cumulative Percentage of harmonic
Digitrip RMS 310+ will overheating due to repeated Additional coordination content can be monitored for 2
provide a cost-effective overcurrent events that may capability can be provided by each phase, up to the 27th
solution for a variety of
applications.
occur in quick succession. utilizing the short delay and
ground fault zone selective
harmonic. Additionally, a total
harmonic distortion value can
2
Field Testing
The standard Digitrip RMS
A field test kit is available for
interlocking features available
on these trip units.
be calculated and displayed.
2
310+ includes an adjustable Communications
short time pickup setting
encompassing an I2t ramp
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units.
System Diagnostics Digitrip RMS 910 units have 2
Arcflash Reduction Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 built-in communications
function that provides the
basic LS curve shaping Maintenance System models of trip units provide options to allow all protection, 2
function. Arcflash Reduction long delay, short delay, monitoring, and control
Maintenance System is an instantaneous, and ground information to be transmitted 2
Digitrip 310+ trip units also available feature on KD, LG, fault cause of trip LEDs on back to a central location via
include selectable long time
delay (tLD) and pickup
LD, MDL, NG and RG frames the front of the unit. Their
display shows a magnitude of
the Eaton PowerNet™
system.
2
with 310+ electronic trip
settings (Ir). A rating plug is trip information, as well as
not required.
units. This feature increases
worker safety by providing remote signal contacts, for Field Testing 2
an accelerated instantaneous improved system alarming. Integral field testing capability
The optional Digitrip RMS
310+ LSI and LSIG provide trip unit to reduce arc flash. is provided on all 610 and 910 2
Additionally, LG, NG and RG System Monitoring trip units. No additional test
additional flat response short
time delay adjustments and frames with the Arcflash Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units set is needed to perform both 2
an instantaneous setting to Reduction Maintenance have the capability to monitor trip and no trip field testing.
provide LSI curve shaping System feature include a
fully adjustable instantaneous
phase currents, as well as
neutral or ground currents.
2
capability.
setting. This information is displayed
on a large digital display 2
mounted on the unit.
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-149

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Product Selection Guide

2
Electronic Trip Units
2 Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910
2 RMS 310+ RMS 610 RMS 910

2 JG

2
2
RG LG/NG
2 Breaker Type

2 Series G frame(s) JG-, LG-, NG- and RG-Frames RG-Frame RG-Frame

Ampere rating 20–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A
2 Interrupting rating at 415 V 35, 70, 100 kA 70, 100 kA 70, 100 kA
Trip Unit Sensing
2 rms sensing Yes Yes Yes

2 Protection and Coordination 1

Protection Ordering options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG

2 Fixed rating plug (In) 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes

Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Long delay Adjustable lr switch Yes Yes No No
Long delay setting Var/frame Var/frame 0.5–1.0 x (ln) 0.5–1.0 x (ln)
2 Long delay time I2t at 6x 10 seconds 3 10 seconds 3 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds

2 Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes

High load alarm 1.05 lr 1.05 lr 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir
2 Short delay Short delay setting Var/frame 4 Var/frame 4 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t 100 ms No 100, 300, 500 ms 100, 300, 500 ms
2 Short delay time flat No I–300 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms

2 Instantaneous
Short delay time ZSI
Independent adjustable Inst. setting
No
No
Yes
Yes 5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

2 Instantaneous setting No Var/frame 200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln) 200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln)

Discriminator No No Yes 6 Yes 6
2 Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault Ground fault setting Var/frame 7 Var/frame 7 25–100% x (ln) 7 25–100% x (ln) 7
2 Ground fault delay I2t at 0.62x No No 100, 300, 500 ms 100, 300, 500 ms

2 Ground fault delay flat I–300 ms I–300 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms

Ground fault ZSI No Yes Yes Yes

2 Ground fault thermal memory No No Yes Yes

Notes
2 In = Rating plug rating.
Ir = Long delay setting.
2 1 310+ details are included by frame in Pages V4-T2-187 (JG), V4-T2-205 (LG), V4-T2-215 (NG), and V4-T2-226 (RG).
2 310+ trip units have selectable settings instead of a rating plug.

2 310+ trip units have adjustable long delay times of 2–24 seconds, except NG 310+ for 800 A frame, for which it is 2–14 seconds.
3
4 JG/LG: 2X–14X (In); NG: 2X–8X (In); RG: 2X–9X (In); 2500 ampere RG-Frame 2X–6X% x (In).
5 LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG 310+ trip units include an independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting.
2 6 LS, LSG only.
7 Not to exceed 1200 amperes.
2
2
2

V4-T2-150 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910, continued
RMS 310+ RMS 610 RMS 910
2
2
JG
2
2
2
RG LG/NG

LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSIG (A) LSI (A), LSIG
System Diagnostics
2
Cause of trip LEDs Yes 1 2 Yes 1 2 Yes Yes
2
Magnitude of trip information No No Yes Yes
Remote signal contacts No No Yes Yes 2
System Monitoring
Digital display Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes Yes 2
Current
Voltage
Yes 3
No
Yes 3
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
2
Power and energy No No No Yes 2
Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes
Power factor No No No Yes 2
System Communications
PowerNet No No No Yes
2
Field Testing
Testing method Test set 4 Test set 4 Integral Integral
2
Notes 2
1 Using cause of trip module (catalog number TRIP-LED).
2 RG 310+ trip units include integrated cause of trip LEDs.
3 Using ammeter or remote ammeter/cause of trip display (catalog number DIGIVIEW and DIGIVIEWR06).
2
2
4 Test kit available for field testing 310+ trip units (catalog number MTST230V).

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-151

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Technical Data and Specifications

2
Ratings
2 Frames EG, JG and LG

2
EG JG LG

2
2
2
2 Maximum rated current (amperes) 125, 160 1 250 400, 630 2
Breaker type 3 B B E S S H H C E S H C U X E S H C U X
2 Number of poles 1 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4

2 Breaker Capacity (kA rms) Vac 50–60 Hz

NEMA®, 240 Vac 25 25 35 85 85 100 100 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200
UL, CSA
2 480 Vac — 18 25 — 35 — 65 100 25 35 65 100 150 200 35 50 65 100 150 200
600 Vac 4 — — 18 — 22 — 25 35 18 18 25 35 50 50 18 25 35 50 65 65
2 125/250 Vdc 5 10 6 10 10 35 6 35 42 6 42 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu 25 25 35 85 85 100 100 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200
2 Ics 25 25 35 43 43 50 50 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200

2 380–415 Vac Icu

Ics
— 18 25 — 40 — 70 100 25 40 70 100 150 200 35 50 70 100 150 200
— 18 25 — 30 — 35 100 25 40 70 100 150 200 35 50 53 100 150 200

2 660–690 Vac Icu — — — — — — — — 12 12 14 16 18 18 12 20 25 30 35 35

Ics — — — — — — — — 6 6 7 12 14 14 6 10 13 15 18 18
2 125/250 Vdc 5 Icu 10 6 10 10 35 6 35 42 6 42 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50
Ics 10 6 10 10 35 6 35 42 6 42 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50
2 Ampere range 15–160 A 1 20–250 A 100–630 A 2

2 Trip Units
F = Fixed
FT-FM
AT-FM
FT-AM
AT-AM
FT-AM
AT-AM
A = Adjustable Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310) Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310)
2 T = Thermal
M = Magnetic

2 Interchangeable — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Built-in ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

2 Thermal- Fixed thermal ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

magnetic
Adjustable ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2 thermal
Magnetic Fixed Adjustable Adjustable
2 Electronic LS — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
RMS 7
2 LSI
LSG
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■

■
■

■
■

■
■

■
■

■
■

■
■

■
■

■
■

■
■

■
■

■
■

2 LSIG — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

ALSI — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

2 ALSIG — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Utilization category A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
2
Notes

2 1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG.
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
3 Breaker type C, U and X are current limiting per UL 489.

2 4 EG breaker rated 600/347 Vac.

5 Two poles in series.

2 6 125 Vdc only for single-pole breakers.

7 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available.

V4-T2-152 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Frames NG and RG
NG RG
2
2
2
2
2
Maximum rated current (amperes) 800, 1200 800, 1200 800, 1200 1600 1 800 1600, 2000, 2500 1600, 2000, 2500
Breaker type S H C2 S U H C2 2
Number of poles 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3 3 3, 4 3, 4
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz
2
NEMA,
UL, CSA
240 Vac 85 100 200 — 200 125 200
2
480 Vac 50 65 100 — 150 65 100
600 Vac 25 35 65 — 65 50 65 2
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu 85 100 200 85 — 135 200
Ics 85 100 100 85 — 100 100 2
Icu
380–415 Vac
Ics
50
50
70
50
100
50
50
50
—
—
70
50
100
50
2
660–690 Vac Icu 20 3 25 3 35 20 3 — 25 3 35 3 2
Ics 10 13 18 10 — 13 18
250 Vdc Icu — — — — — — — 2
Ics — — — — — — —
Ampere range 400–1200 A 400–1200 A 400–1200 A 1600 A 800 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A
2
Trip units Electronic
(Digitrip RMS 310+)
Electronic
(Digitrip RMS 310+ and 910) 2
Interchangeable
Built-in
—
■
—
■
—
■
—
■
—
■
■5

■
■5

■
2
Electronic 4 LI — — — — — ■6 ■6
2
LS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

LSI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 2
LIG — — — — — ■6 ■6

LSG ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2
LSIG ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
2
ALSI ■ ■ ■ ■ — ■ ■

ALSIG ■ ■ ■ ■ — ■ ■ 2
Utilization category A A A A A A A

Notes
2
1 NG 1600 ampere frame is not UL or CSA listed.
2 Not KEMA-KEUR listed. 2
3 IEC 60947-2 H.5 Annex H is not KEMA-KEUR tested.
4 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available.
5 RG 310+ are interchangeable with the exception of: FROM not ground fault equipped TO ground fault equipped
2
2
6 Available only on Digitrip 910 trip units.

2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-153

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

General Specifications
2
All Series G Frames
2 EG JG LG NG RG

2 Maximum rated current In depending on the version

Rated insulation voltage U, according to IEC 60947-2
160 A 1 250 A 400, 630 A 2 800, 1200, 1600 A 3 1600, 2000, 2500 A

2 Main conducting paths 500 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac
Auxiliary circuits 500 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac
2 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
Main conducting paths 6 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV
2 Auxiliary circuits 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV

2 Rated operational voltage Ue

IEC 415 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac
2 NEMA 600Y/347 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac
UL and CSA listed Yes 1 Yes Yes 2 Yes 3 Yes
2 Permissible ambient temperature –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C
Permissible load for various ambient temperatures — —
2
4 5 4 5 4 5

close to the circuit breaker, related to the rated current

of the circuit breaker
2 Circuit breakers for plant protection
At 40 °C 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
2 At 50 °C 96% 92% 96% 94% 96% 91% 91% 91%

2 At 55 °C
At 60 °C
93%
91%
87%
83%
94%
92%
90%
87%
93%
90%
86%
82%
85%
81%
85%
81%

2 At 70 °C 86% 73% 88% 80% 84% 70% 70% 70%

Circuit breakers for motor protection
2 At 40 °C — 100% 100% — —
At 50 °C — 100% 100% — —
2 At 55 °C — 100% 100% — —

2 At 60 °C — 100% 100% — —
At 70 °C — 90% 90% — —
2 Circuit breakers for starter combinations and
isolating circuit breakers

2 At 40 °C 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

At 50 °C 100% 100% 100% 91% 91%
2 At 55 °C 96% 96% 95% 85% 85%
At 60 °C 91% 82% 90% 81% 81%
2 At 70 °C 86% 88% 84% — —

2 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (DC) Not for circuit

breakers for motor protection (Time constant t = 10 rms)

2 Two conducting paths in series 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 6 6

For EG to LG up to 250 Vdc

NEMA (time constant t = 8 rms) 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 42 kA max.
2
6 6

Two conducting paths in series 250 Vdc

2 Notes
1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG.
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
2 3 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the NG.
4 Thermal overload release set to the lower value.

2 5 Thermal overload release set to the upper value.

6 Not suitable for DC switching.

2
2
2

V4-T2-154 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
All Series G Frames, continued
EG JG LG NG RG
2
Main switch characteristics according to IEC 60947-2
in combination with lockable rotary drives
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2
Rated short circuit breaking capacity according to
IEC 60947-2 (at AC 50/60 Hz)
For rated short circuit breaking capacity, see Page V4-T2-152.
2
Endurance (operating cycles)
Maximum switching frequency
10,000
300 1/h
10,000
240 1/h
8,000
240 1/h
3,000
60 1/h
3,000
60 1/h
2
Conductor cross sections and terminal types for
main conductors
Box terminals Box terminals Box terminals Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals 2
Solid or stranded 2.5 to 95 mm2 50 to 150 mm2 95 to 240 mm2 — — —
2
Finely stranded with end sleeve 2.5 to 50/70 mm2 35 to 120 mm2 70 to 150 mm2 — — —
Busbar — — — 600 A Optional Optional 2
Tightening torque for box terminals 5.6 Nm 20 Nm 42 Nm 31 Nm 31 Nm —
Tightening torque for busbar connection pieces 5.6 Nm 15 Nm 30 Nm 6 Nm 50 Nm 20 Nm 2
Conductor cross sections for auxiliary circuits with
terminal connection or terminal strip 2
Solid 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 Up to 2x4 mm2 Up to 2x4 mm2
Finely stranded with end sleeve 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 Up to 2x2.5 mm2 Up to 2x2.5 mm2
2
With brought-out cable ends — 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2 0.82 (AWG 18) mm2
2
Tightening torque for fitting screws — 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm
Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum rated 2
current ln (the power losses of the undervoltage
releases (“r” releases) must be observed if necessary)
at three-phase symmetrical load) 400 A: 600 A: 2
For plant protection 40 W 45 W 65 W 120 W 87/210 W 220/270/400 W
As isolating circuit breaker 40 W 45 W 65 W 120 W 87/210 W 220/270/400 W
2
For starter combinations 40 W 45 W 65 W 120 W — —
2
For motor protection — 45 W 65 W 120 W — —
Permissible mounting position 2
2
90

90
90
90

2
Arc spacing— suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes (except HMCPE) Yes Yes Yes Yes 2
Auxiliary Switches
Rated thermal current lth 6A 6A 6A 6A 6A 2
Rated making capacity 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A
AC-14 AC-14 AC-14 AC-15 AC-15
2
Rated operational voltage 230/400/600 V 230/400/600 V 230/400/600 V 600 V 600 V
2
Rated operational current 6/3/0.25 A 6/3/0.25 A 6/3/0.25 A 6A 6A
DC-13 DC-13 2
Rated operational voltage 125/250 V 125/250 V 125/250 V 125/250 V 125/250 V
Rated operational current 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.25 A 0.5/0.25 A 2
Backup fuse 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A
Miniature circuit breaker 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-155

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

All Series G Frames, continued

2 EG JG LG NG RG

2 Releases
Undervoltage releases (“r” releases)
2 Response voltage:
Drop (breaker tripped) Us 35–70% 35–70% 35–70% 35–70% 35–70%
2 Pickup (breaker may be switched on) Us 85–110% 85–110% 85–110% 85–110% 85–110%

2 Power consumption in continuous operation at:

50/60 Hz 12 Vac — — — 1.9 VA 2.9 VA

2 50/60 Hz 24 Vac 0.72 VA 3.9 VA 3.9 VA 2.4 VA 3.1 VA

50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac 1.15–1.78 VA 2.5–3.8 VA 2.5–3.8 VA 2.3–4.1 VA 3.4–6.0 VA
2 50/60 Hz 110–127 Vac 0.96–1.25 VA 1.8–2.4 VA 1.8–2.4 VA 3.4–4.2 VA 3.3–3.8 VA
50/60 Hz 208–240 Vac 1.28–1.68 VA 2.7–3.8 VA 2.7–3.8 VA 4.8–6.5 VA 4.2–7.2 VA
2 50/60 Hz 380–500 Vac 2.2–3.9 VA 3.4–5.8 VA 3.4–5.8 VA 6.8–12.0 VA 3.8–10.0 VA

2 50/60 Hz 525–600 Vac 3.4–4.3 VA 3.4–4.3 VA 3.4–4.3 VA — —

12 Vdc — — — 2.6W 3.4W

2 24 Vdc 0.70 W 3.1W 3.1W 3.6W 4.3W

48–60 Vdc 1.12–1.76W 2.0–3.1W 2.0–3.1W 3.5–5.5W 4.8–7.2W
2 110–125 Vdc 0.94–1.21W 1.6–2.2W 1.6–2.2W 2.9–3.6W 3.3–3.8W
220–250 Vdc 1.45–1.86W 3.1–4W 3.1–4W 4.8–6.3W 6.6–7.5W
2 Maximum opening time 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 62 ms 62 ms

2 Shunt Trips
Shunt trips (“f” releases)
2 Response voltage:
Pickup (breaker tripped) Us 70–110% 70–110% 70–110% 70–110% 70–110%
2 Power consumption in (short time) at:

2 50/60 Hz 24 Vac
50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac
10–41 VA
139–210 VA
87–405 VA
710–1105 VA
87–405 VA
710–1105 VA
98–475 VA
24–50 VA
612 VA
403–666 VA

2 50/60 Hz 48–127 Vac — — — — —

50/60 Hz 110–240 Vac 83–360 VA 66–432 VA 66–432 VA 67–432 VA 396–1896 VA
2 50/60 Hz 380–440 Vac — 127–188 VA 127–188 VA 76–110 VA 1596–2156 VA
50/60 Hz 380–600 Vac 418–1080 VA — — — —
2 50/60 Hz 480–600 Vac — 34–60 VA 34–60 VA 19–42 VA 230–384 VA

2 12–24 Vdc 29–120 W 164–631 W 164–631 W 145–610 W 396 W

48–60 Vdc 475–720 W 830–1580 W 830–1580 W 67–102 W 341–528 W

2 110–125 Vdc 99–121 W 112–150 W 112–150 W 121–150 W 264–350 W

220–250 Vdc — 40–58W 40–58 W 46–55 W 374–475 W
2 Maximum load duration Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically
Maximum opening time 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 62 ms 62 ms
2 Molded Case Switch (with High Magnetic Trip)

2 Unfused kAIC at 480 Vac (415 Vac) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70)
Self-protected, will trip above 1250 for EG125; 2500 4000/6300 12,500 20,000
2 1600 for EG160

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-156 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG 2
EG
H W D
JG
H W D
LG
H W D
2
Single-pole 5.50 (139.7) 1.00 (25.4) 2.99 (76.0) — — — — — —
2
Two-pole 5.50 (139.7) 2.00 (50.8) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (105.0) 3.57 (87.4) — — —
Three-pole 5.50 (139.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (105.0) 3.57 (87.4) 10.13 (258.0) 5.48 (140.0) 4.09 (104.0) 2
Four-pole 5.50 (139.7) 4.00 (101.6) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 5.34 (135.6) 3.57 (87.4) 10.13 (258.0) 7.22 (183.0) 4.09 (104.0)
2
Series G—Frame NG and RG
2
NG RG
H W D H W D
2
Single-pole — — — — — —
Two-pole — — — — — — 2
Three-pole 16.00 (406.0) 8.25 (210.0) 5.50 (140.0) 16.00 (406.0) 15.50 (394.0) 9.75 (229.0)
Four-pole 16.00 (406.0) 11.13 (280.0) 5.50 (140.0) 16.00 (406.0) 20.00 (508.0) 9.75 (229.0)
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lb (kg)
2
Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG
EG JG LG NG RG 2
Single-pole
Two-pole
0.85 (0.39)
1.57 (0.71)
—
11.3 (5.13)
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
Three-pole 2.28 (1.04) 5.06 (2.30) T/M
5.31 (2.41) ETU
12.36 (5.61) T/M
13.04 (5.92) ETU
46.8 (21.3) 103.0 (47.0) 2
Four-pole 2.85 (1.29) 6.76 (3.07) T/M
7.12 (3.23) ETU
16.27 (7.39) T/M
16.92 (7.68) ETU
62.0 (28.3) 118.4 (54.0) 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-157

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Contents
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
Description Page
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-160
V4-T2-169
2 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-170
V4-T2-170
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-190
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208
2 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-217
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-228
2 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . .
V4-T2-232
V4-T2-235
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
V4-T2-239

Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244

2 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-247
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-255
2 Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258
2
2
2
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)

2 Product Description
EG breaker is HACR rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-158 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
Series G—EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)

E G H 3 015 FF G 2
2
Frame Terminations/Hardware
E
Amperes
Terminals Mounting Hardware 2
M = Metric end caps Metric
Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA 1 = One
Number of Poles 016
015
1 E = Imperial end caps
G = Line/load standard
Imperial
Metric 2
2 = Two 020 B = Bolt-on —

Performance
3 = Three
4 = Four—neutral 0% protected
025
030
2
Trip Unit
7 = Four—neutral 100% protected
2
600Y/347 480 415 240 032 1
FF = Fixed fixed
B — 18 18 25 035
AF = Adjustable thermal fixed magnetic
18 25 25 35 040
E KS = Molded case switch
S 22 35 40 85
045
050 2
H 25 65 70 100 060
C 35 100 100 200 063 1
070
2
K Molded case switch 2
2
080
090
100
110
125 2
160 1

Notes
2
1 Cannot be UL rated.
2 Available only as 125 and 160 A sizes. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-159

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Product Selection
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals
2 and Mounting Hardware) IC Rating at 415/480 Volts

EG-Frame—18/18
2 EG-Frame
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3
Adjustable 2 Adjustable 2
2 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal,
Maximum Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic
2 Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 15 EGB1015FFG EGB2015FFG EGB3015FFG — EGB4015FFG —

16 EGB1016FFG EGB2016FFG EGB3016FFG — EGB4016FFG —

2 20 EGB1020FFG EGB2020FFG EGB3020FFG — EGB4020FFG EGB4020AFG

25 EGB1025FFG EGB2025FFG EGB3025FFG EGB3025AFG EGB4025FFG EGB4025AFG
2 30 EGB1030FFG EGB2030FFG EGB3030FFG — EGB4030FFG —
32 EGB1032FFG EGB2032FFG EGB3032FFG EGB3032AFG EGB4032FFG EGB4032AFG
2 35 EGB1035FFG EGB2035FFG EGB3035FFG — EGB4035FFG —
40
2 45
EGB1040FFG
EGB1045FFG
EGB2040FFG
EGB2045FFG
EGB3040FFG
EGB3045FFG
EGB3040AFG
—
EGB4040FFG
EGB4045FFG
EGB4040AFG
—

2 50 EGB1050FFG EGB2050FFG EGB3050FFG EGB3050AFG EGB4050FFG EGB4050AFG

60 EGB1060FFG EGB2060FFG EGB3060FFG — EGB4060FFG —

2 63 EGB1063FFG EGB2063FFG EGB3063FFG EGB3063AFG EGB4063FFG EGB4063AFG

70 EGB1070FFG EGB2070FFG EGB3070FFG — EGB4070FFG —
2 80 EGB1080FFG EGB2080FFG EGB3080FFG EGB3080AFG EGB4080FFG EGB4080AFG
90 EGB1090FFG EGB2090FFG EGB3090FFG — EGB4090FFG —
2 100 EGB1100FFG EGB2100FFG EGB3100FFG EGB3100AFG EGB4100FFG EGB4100AFG
110
2 125
EGB1110FFG
EGB1125FFG
EGB2110FFG
EGB2125FFG
EGB3110FFG
EGB3125FFG
—
EGB3125AFG
EGB4110FFG
EGB4125FFG
—
EGB4125AFG

2 160 — — EGB3160FFG EGB3160AFG EGB4160FFG EGB4160AFG

Notes
2 1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.

2 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-160 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
EG-Frame—25/25 Single-Pole Unavailable
2
EG-Frame—25/25
EG-Frame
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3
2
2
Adjustable 2 Adjustable 2
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic
Maximum Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
15 EGE2015FFG EGE3015FFG — EGE4015FFG — 2
16 EGE2016FFG EGE3016FFG — EGE4016FFG —
20 EGE2020FFG EGE3020FFG — EGE4020FFG EGE4020AFG 2
25
2
EGE2025FFG EGE3025FFG EGE3025AFG EGE4025FFG EGE4025AFG
30 EGE2030FFG EGE3030FFG — EGE4030FFG —
32 EGE2032FFG EGE3032FFG EGE3032AFG EGE4032FFG EGE4032AFG
2
35 EGE2035FFG EGE3035FFG — EGE4035FFG —
40 EGE2040FFG EGE3040FFG EGE3040AFG EGE4040FFG EGE4040AFG 2
45 EGE2045FFG EGE3045FFG EGE3050AFG EGE4045FFG —
50 EGE2050FFG EGE3050FFG — EGE4050FFG EGE4050AFG 2
60
63
EGE2060FFG
EGE2063FFG
EGE3060FFG
EGE3063FFG
—
EGE3063AFG
EGE4060FFG
EGE4063FFG
—
EGE4063AFG
2
70 EGE2070FFG EGE3070FFG — EGE4070FFG — 2
80 EGE2080FFG EGE3080FFG EGE3080AFG EGE4080FFG EGE4080AFG
90 EGE2090FFG EGE3090FFG — EGE4090FFG — 2
100 EGE2100FFG EGE3100FFG EGE3100AFG EGE4100FFG EGE4100AFG
125 EGE2125FFG EGE3125FFG EGE3125AFG EGE4125FFG EGE4125AFG 2
160 — EGE3160FFG EGE3160AFG EGE4160FFG EGE4160AFG
2
Notes
1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
2
2
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-161

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

EG-Frame—40/35
2 EG-Frame
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3

2 Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal,

Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed
Maximum Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Magnetic
2 Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 15 EGS1015FFG EGS2015FFG EGS3015FFG — EGS4015FFG —

16 EGS1016FFG EGS2016FFG EGS3016FFG — EGS4016FFG —
2 20 EGS1020FFG EGS2020FFG EGS3020FFG — EGS4020FFG EGS4020AFG
25
2
EGS1025FFG EGS2025FFG EGS3025FFG EGS3025AFG EGS4025FFG EGS4025AFG
30 EGS1030FFG EGS2030FFG EGS3030FFG — EGS4030FFG —

2 32 EGS1032FFG EGS2032FFG EGS3032FFG EGS3032AFG EGS4032FFG EGS4032AFG

35 EGS1035FFG EGS2035FFG EGS3035FFG — EGS4035FFG —
2 40 EGS1040FFG EGS2040FFG EGS3040FFG EGS3040AFG EGS4040FFG EGS4040AFG
45 EGS1045FFG EGS2045FFG EGS3045FFG — EGS4045FFG —
2 50 EGS1050FFG EGS2050FFG EGS3050FFG EGS3050AFG EGS4050FFG EGS4050AFG

2 60
63
EGS1060FFG
EGS1063FFG
EGS2060FFG
EGS2063FFG
EGS3060FFG
EGS3063FFG
—
EGS3063AFG
EGS4060FFG
EGS4063FFG
—
EGS4063AFG

2 70 EGS1070FFG EGS2070FFG EGS3070FFG — EGS4070FFG —

80 EGS1080FFG EGS2080FFG EGS3080FFG EGS3080AFG EGS4080FFG EGS4080AFG
2 90 EGS1090FFG EGS2090FFG EGS3090FFG — EGS4090FFG —
100 EGS1100FFG EGS2100FFG EGS3100FFG EGS3100AFG EGS4100FFG EGS4100AFG
2 125 EGS1125FFG EGS2125FFG EGS3125FFG EGS3125AFG EGS4125FFG EGS4125AFG

2 160 — — EGS3160FFG EGS3160AFG EGS4160FFG EGS4160AFG

Notes
2 1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.

2 3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-162 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
EG-Frame—70/65
EG-Frame
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3
2
2
Adjustable2 Adjustable2

Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Thermal, Fixed Fixed Thermal, Thermal, Fixed
Maximum Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Magnetic Fixed Magnetic Magnetic
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
15 EGH1015FFG EGH2015FFG EGH3015FFG — EGH4015FFG — 2
16 EGH1016FFG EGH2016FFG EGH3016FFG — EGH4016FFG —
20 EGH1020FFG EGH2020FFG EGH3020FFG EGH3020AFG EGH4020FFG EGH4020AFG 2
25
2
EGH1025FFG EGH2025FFG EGH3025FFG EGH3025AFG EGH4025FFG EGH4025AFG
30 EGH1030FFG EGH2030FFG EGH3030FFG — EGH4030FFG —
32 EGH1032FFG EGH2032FFG EGH3032FFG EGH3032AFG EGH4032FFG EGH4032AFG
2
35 EGH1035FFG EGH2035FFG EGH3035FFG — EGH4035FFG —
40 EGH1040FFG EGH2040FFG EGH3040FFG EGH3040AFG EGH4040FFG EGH4040AFG 2
45 EGH1045FFG EGH2045FFG EGH3045FFG — EGH4045FFG EGH4050AFG
50 EGH1050FFG EGH2050FFG EGH3050FFG EGH3050AFG EGH4050FFG — 2
60
63
EGH1060FFG
EGH1063FFG
EGH2060FFG
EGH2063FFG
EGH3060FFG
EGH3063FFG
—
EGH3063AFG
EGH4060FFG
EGH4063FFG
—
EGH4063AFG
2
70 EGH1070FFG EGH2070FFG EGH3070FFG — EGH4070FFG — 2
80 EGH1080FFG EGH2080FFG EGH3080FFG EGH3080AFG EGH4080FFG EGH4080AFG
90 EGH1090FFG EGH2090FFG EGH3090FFG — EGH4090FFG — 2
100 EGH1100FFG EGH2100FFG EGH3100FFG EGH3100AFG EGH4100FFG EGH4100AFG
125 EGH1125FFG EGH2125FFG EGH3125FFG EGH3125AFG EGH4125FFG EGH4125AFG 2
Notes
1 16, 32, 63 A are not UL listed ratings.
2
2
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-163

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

EG-Frame—100/100 Current Limiting (Single-Pole and Two-Pole Unavailable)

2
2 EG-Frame EG-Frame—100/100
Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% Protected Neutral 3
2 Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed Magnetic

2 Maximum Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 15
16
EGC3015FFG
EGC3016FFG
—
—
EGC7015FFG
EGC7016FFG
—
—

2 20 EGC3020FFG EGC3020AFG EGC7020FFG EGC7020AFG

25 EGC3025FFG EGC3025AFG EGC7025FFG EGC7025AFG
2 30 EGC3030FFG — EGC7030FFG —
32
2
EGC3032FFG EGC3032AFG EGC7032FFG EGC7032AFG
35 EGC3035FFG — EGC7035FFG —

2 40 EGC3040FFG EGC3040AFG EGC7040FFG EGC7040AFG

45 EGC3045FFG — EGC7045FFG —

2 50 EGC3050FFG EGC3050AFG EGC7050FFG EGC7050AFG

60 EGC3060FFG — EGC7060FFG —
2 63 EGC3063FFG EGC3063AFG EGC7063FFG EGC7063AFG
70
2
EGC3070FFG — EGC7070FFG —
80 EGC3080FFG EGC3080AFG EGC7080FFG EGC7080AFG

2 90 EGC3090FFG — EGC7090FFG —
100 EGC3100FFG EGC3100AFG EGC7100FFG EGC7100AFG
2 125 EGC3125FFG EGC3125AFG EGC7125FFG EGC7125AFG

2
Molded Case Switches 4
2 Catalog
Number
2 EGK3125KSG
EGK7125KSG
2 EGK3160KSG

2
EGK7160KSG

Notes

2 1 16, 32, 63 A are not UL listed ratings.

2 Adjustable thermal is not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100%
2 neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
4 Molded case switches may open above 1250 A.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-164 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
EG Bolt-On Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit and Mounting Hardware)
2
EG-Frame—18 kAIC at 480 Vac
EG-Frame
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 2
2
Maximum Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog
Amps at 40 °C Number 1 Number 2 Number 3
15 EGB1015FFB EGB2015FFB EGB3015FFB 2
20
25
EGB1020FFB
EGB1025FFB
EGB2020FFB
EGB2025FFB
EGB3020FFB
EGB3025FFB
2
30 EGB1030FFB EGB2030FFB EGB3030FFB 2
35 EGB1035FFB EGB2035FFB EGB3035FFB
40 EGB1040FFB EGB2040FFB EGB3040FFB 2
45 EGB1045FFB EGB2045FFB EGB3045FFB
50 EGB1050FFB EGB2050FFB EGB3050FFB 2
60
70
EGB1060FFB
EGB1070FFB
EGB2060FFB
EGB2070FFB
EGB3060FFB
EGB3070FFB
2
80 EGB1080FFB EGB2080FFB EGB3080FFB 2
90 EGB1090FFB EGB2090FFB EGB3090FFB
100 EGB1100FFB EGB2100FFB EGB3100FFB 2
110
2
EGB1110FFB EGB2110FFB EGB3110FFB
125 EGB1125FFB EGB2125FFB EGB3125FFB

2
EG-Frame EG-Frame—35 kAIC at 480 Vac
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
2
Maximum
Continuous
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
2
2
Amps at 40 °C Number 1 Number 2 Number 3
15 EGS1015FFB EGS2015FFB EGS3015FFB
20 EGS1020FFB EGS2020FFB EGS3020FFB 2
25 EGS1025FFB EGS2025FFB EGS3025FFB
30 EGS1030FFB EGS2030FFB EGS3030FFB 2
35 EGS1035FFB EGS2035FFB EGS3035FFB
40 EGS1040FFB EGS2040FFB EGS3040FFB 2
45
50
EGS1045FFB
EGS1050FFB
EGS2045FFB
EGS2050FFB
EGS3045FFB
EGS3050FFB
2
60 EGS1060FFB EGS2060FFB EGS3060FFB 2
70 EGS1070FFB EGS2070FFB EGS3070FFB
80 EGS1080FFB EGS2080FFB EGS3080FFB 2
90
2
EGS1090FFB EGS2090FFB EGS3090FFB
100 EGS1100FFB EGS2100FFB EGS3100FFB
110 EGS1110FFB EGS2110FFB EGS3110FFB
2
125 EGS1125FFB EGS2125FFB EGS3125FFB

Notes 2
1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24.
2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12.
3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8.
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-165

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

EG-Frame—65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 EG-Frame
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole

2 Maximum
Continuous
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Amps at 40 °C Number 1 Number 2 Number 3
2 15 EGH1015FFB EGH2015FFB EGH3015FFB

2 20 EGH1020FFB EGH2020FFB EGH3020FFB

25 EGH1025FFB EGH2025FFB EGH3025FFB

2 30 EGH1030FFB EGH2030FFB EGH3030FFB

35 EGH1035FFB EGH2035FFB EGH3035FFB
2 40 EGH1040FFB EGH2040FFB EGH3040FFB
45
2
EGH1045FFB EGH2045FFB EGH3045FFB
50 EGH1050FFB EGH2050FFB EGH3050FFB

2 60 EGH1060FFB EGH2060FFB EGH3060FFB

70 EGH1070FFB EGH2070FFB EGH3070FFB
2 80 EGH1080FFB EGH2080FFB EGH3080FFB
90 EGH1090FFB EGH2090FFB EGH3090FFB
2 100 EGH1100FFB EGH2100FFB EGH3100FFB

2 110
125
EGH1110FFB
EGH1125FFB
EGH2110FFB
EGH2125FFB
EGH3110FFB
EGH3125FFB

2
2 Load Terminals
Terminal, (Package of Three Terminals)
2 Maximum Breaker
Amps
Body
Material Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2 AWG Wire Range
Catalog
Number

2 Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals

15–50 Aluminum Cu/Al 2.5–50 #14–1/0 3TA125EF

2 60–125 Aluminum Cu/Al 16–70 #6–3/0 3TA150EF

Notes
2 1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24.
2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12.

2 3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-166 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
EG-Frame
2
2
2
2
2
2
3T125EF 3TA125EF 3TA150EF 3TA160EFK EF2RTWK, Two-Pole–Metric Control Wire Multiwire
EF3RTWK, Three-Pole–Metric
EF4RTWK, Four-Pole–Metric
Terminal Kit
GCWTK
Connectors
2
EF2RTDK, Two-Pole–Imperial
EF3RTDK, Three-Pole–Imperial
EF4RTDK, Four-Pole–Imperial
2
2
Line and Load Terminals
2
(Package of
Maximum
Breaker
Terminal
Body Metric Wire AWG Wire
Three Terminals)
Catalog 2
Amps Material Wire Type Range mm2 Range Number
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 2
125 Steel Al 4–6 #14-3/0
2
3T125EF 1
125 Steel Cu 2.5–95 #14-3/0 3T125EF 1
125 Aluminum Cu/Al 2.5–50 #14-1/0 3TA125EF
2
160 Aluminum Cu/Al 16–70 #6-3/0 3TA150EF
160 Aluminum Cu/Al 35–120 #3-250 3TA160EFK 2
160 Aluminum Cu/Al 35–120 #3-250 4TA160EFK 2

EG-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have line and load terminals
2
as standard equipment.
2
Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely
with screw and washer. 2
Caution: Collar must surround conductor.
2
Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion. Tighten securely with screw and washer.
Endcap kits are used on the E-Frame breaker line side to connect busbar or similar electrical
connections. Includes hardware.
2
2
Notes
1 Standard line and load terminals.
2 Four-pole kit with four terminals.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-167

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Control Wire Terminal Kit Terminal End Covers (Gas Barrier)

2 Catalog The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers
Number only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity
2 Control wire terminal kit 5652B38G01 (one per circuit breaker) when ordering.

2 Package of 12—priced individually

Terminal End Covers
For use with steel or stainless steel standard line and load Conductor Opening Diameter Catalog
2 terminals only. Inches (mm) Number
6.35 (0.25) EEC3K
2 Interphase Barriers
10.41 (0.41) EEC4K
Catalog
2 Number
Multiwire Connectors
Interphase barriers EIPBK Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end
2 Package includes 2 barriers terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit
breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate
2 The interphase barrier is available for extended insulation distribution terminal blocks.
between circuit breaker poles. Specify quantity when ordering.
Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, terminal shield
2 insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three
Base Mounting Hardware—DIN Rail Mounting
mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side
2 Catalog
Number
(OFF) end.

2 DIN rail adapter—single-pole EF1DIN EG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information

(Package of 3) 1
DIN rail adapter—two-pole EGDIN
2 DIN rail adapter—three- or four-pole EF34DIN
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalog
Number
Metal DIN rail adapter—three-pole
2
EGGDDIN
125 3 14–2 3TA125E3K
Metric base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker 125 6 14–6 3TA125E6K
2 or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required
separately, order S/N 8703C80G08. Note
1 For four-pole kit, change “3” at beginning of catalog number to “4.”

2 Note: English mounting hardware kit can be supplied separate. Catalog

number is BMHE #6–32 x 3 inches for two-, three- and four-pole. Single-
2 pole mounting hardware metric order 8703C80G11. English hardware
8703C80G12. Both sold in quantities of 100.

2 Terminal Shields
The terminal shield is available for line terminal areas in three-
2 and four-pole circuit breakers. Special terminal shields are also
available for use when an electrical (solenoid) operator is
2 mounted on the circuit breaker. The standard style number by
pole for each terminal shield is for a package of 10 and is priced
2 per each package. Special terminal shields are packaged
individually.

2 Terminal Shields—IP30 Protection

2 Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number

2 3
4
EFTS3K
EFTS4K

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-168 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories 2
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
EG-Frame Accessories
2
Reference
Single-
Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
2
Description Page Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Internal Accessories
(Only one internal accessory per pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ —
2
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ —
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ —
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ — 2
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ — — ■ —
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-252 — — — ■ — — ■ — — — 2
Undervoltage release mechanism — — — ■ — — ■ — — —
2
V4-T2-253
External Accessories
End cap kit V4-T2-168 — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-168 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-168 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-168 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal shields V4-T2-168 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Terminal end covers
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-168
V4-T2-168
—
—
—
●
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
—
●
—
●
—
●
—
●
2
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-250 ■ ■ — — ■ — — ■ — — 2
Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-250 ■ ■ — — ■ — — ■ — —
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-250 — — ■ ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ — 2
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-250 — — — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-250 — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Electrical operator
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-250
V4-T2-532
—
—
—
—
—
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton) 2
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-248 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
SA and SB 2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
2
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-169

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Technical Data and Specifications

2
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings
2 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
Circuit 2
220–240 380–415 690 125 250 34
2 Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles 120 Icu Ics 277 347 Icu Ics 480 600Y/ 347 Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
EGB125 1 35 25 25 18 — — — — — — — 10 10 — —
2 2, 3, 4 — 25 25 — — 18 18 18 — — — — — 10 10

2 EGE125
EGS125
2, 3, 4
1
—
100
35
85
35
43
—
35
—
22
25
—
25
—
25
—
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
35
—
35
10
—
10
—

2 EGH125
2, 3, 4
1
—
200
85
100
43
50
—
65
—
25
40
—
30
—
35
—
22
—
—
—
—
—
—
42
—
42
35
—
35
—

2 2, 3, 4
EGC125 5 3, 4
—
—
100
200
50
200
—
—
—
—
70
100
35
100
65
100
25
35
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
42
42
42
42

2 EGB160 2 3, 4 — 25 25 — — 18 18 18 — — — — — 10 10
EGE160 2 3, 4 — 35 35 — — 25 25 25 18 — — — — 10 10
2 EGS160 2 3, 4 — 85 43 — — 40 30 35 22 — — — — 35 35

2 UL 489 Current-Limiting Data

2 Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
EGC 240 V/200 kA 24.5 0.6310
2 EGC 480 V/100 kA 24.5 0.6310
EGC 600 Y/35 kA 20.0 1.392
2
Dimensions and Weights
2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 EG-Frame
Number
2 of Poles Width Height Depth
1 1.00 (25.4) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
2 2 2.00 (50.8) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
3 3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
2 4 4.00 (101.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)

2 EG-Frame

2
Front Cover Cutout Front View Three-Pole Side View
CL
Breaker
1.85
2 0.14 (3.6) R
0.90
(47.0)
3.03 5.50
(22.9) CL (77.0) (139.7)
2 Handle

1.30 Dia.
2
0.47 (11.9) 3.00
(33.0) 2.77
0.94 (23.9) (76.2) (70.4)

2 Approximate Shipping Weight in Lb (kg)

EG-Frame
2 Number of Poles
EG Breaker Type 1 2 3 4
2 EGB125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82)

2 Notes
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 IEC only.

2 3 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.

4 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA.

2 5 Current limiting per UL 489.

V4-T2-170 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
2
10.26
(260.6)
4.75
0.55 (14.0)
2
(120.6)
2
1.49
0.50
(12.7)
1.00
(25.4)
(37.8) 3.98
(101.1) 2
1.00
3-Pole
2.98 2
(25.4) (75.7)

1.50 0.50
2.00
(50.8)
2
(38.1) (12.7)
2
4.78 2
(121.4) 0.70 (17.8)
8.59
(218.2)
0.90 (22.9) 2
0.35 (8.9)
2
2
3.01
0.09
(2.29)
(76.5)
3.17
2
2.75 (80.5)
(69.9)
0.78
2
2
(19.8)

EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module 2

4.17
9.66
(245.4) 2
0.56 (105.9)
(14.2) 3.61 2
(91.7)
2
1.00
2
(25.4)
3.00
0.50
1.00 (12.7)
2
(76.2) (25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
2
2
3.20 2
(81.3)
4.17
(105.9) 2
2
2
2.75 0.09
(69.9) (2.3) 2
2
0.78
(19.8)
2
0.41
(10.4) 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-171

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Contents
2 JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
Description Page
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
2 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-173
V4-T2-174
2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-186
Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-188
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-190
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208
2 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-217
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-228
2 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . .
V4-T2-232
V4-T2-235
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
V4-T2-239

Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244

2 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-247
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-255
2 Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258
2
2
2
2 JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)

2 Product Description
JG breaker is HACR rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-172 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
Series G—JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)

J G S 3 250 FA G C 2
2
Frame Rating
J Blank = 80% rated
C = 100% rated
2
F01 = Freeze tested for –70ºF (–57ºC)
2
Standard/Application Amperes
Number of Poles 050 F02 = Freeze tested for –22ºF (–30ºC)
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
2 = Two 070
Performance
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected
080
090
Terminations/Hardware 2
Terminals Mounting Hardware
600 480 415 240 9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected 100
E 18 25 25 65 125 M = Metric end caps
E = Imperial end caps
Metric
Imperial
2
150
S 18 35 40 85 G = Line/load standard Metric
H 25 65 70 100
160
175 W = Without terminals 2
C 35 100 100 200 200
U 50 150 150 200 225
250 AA = Adj. adj.
Trip Unit
2
X 50 200 200 200
FA = Fixed adj.
K Molded case switch
KS = Molded case switch 2
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG 2
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
NN = Frame only (250 A only; no trip unit) 2
Trip Unit
2
JT 4 100 FA B20 2
2
Trip Features (ETU Only) 12
JT
2 = Two
Number of Poles
Amperes
Trip Unit
AA = Adj. adj.
Blank= No feature
B20= High load alarm
2
3 = Three FA = Fixed adj. B21= Ground fault alarm, with trip
4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected
T/M
080
ETU
050 KS = Molded case switch B22= Ground fault alarm, no trip 2
9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected 090 100 33 = 310+ electronic LS ZG= Zone selective interlocking
100
110
160
250
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG 2
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
2
125
150
160
175
200 2
225
250 2
2
Notes
1 Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features.
2 B21 and B22 available with LSG and LSIG trip units.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-173

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Product Selection
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals
2 and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts

2 JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%2
2 Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable

2 Maximum
Continuous Magnetic
Magnetic
Catalog
Magnetic
Catalog
Magnetic 1
Catalog
Magnetic
Catalog
Magnetic 1
Catalog
Amperes Range Number Number Number Number Number
2 70 350–700 JGE2070FAG JGE3070FAG — JGE4070FAG —

2 90
100
450–900
500–1000
JGE2090FAG
JGE2100FAG
JGE3090FAG
JGE3100FAG
—
JGE3100AAG
JGE4090FAG
JGE4100FAG
—
JGE4100AAG

2 125 625–1250 JGE2125FAG JGE3125FAG JGE3125AAG JGE4125FAG JGE4125AAG

150 750–1550 JGE2150FAG JGE3150FAG — JGE4150FAG —
2 160 800–1600 — — JGE3160AAG — JGE4160AAG
175 875–1750
2
JGE2175FAG JGE3175FAG — JGE4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGE2200FAG JGE3200FAG JGE3200AAG JGE4200FAG JGE4200AAG

2 225 1125–2250 JGE2225FAG JGE3225FAG — JGE4225FAG —

250 1250–2500 JGE2250FAG JGE3250FAG JGE3250AAG JGE4250FAG JGE4250AAG
2
2 JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35, Two-Pole
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%2
2 Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable

2 Maximum
Continuous Magnetic
Magnetic
Catalog
Magnetic
Catalog
Magnetic 1
Catalog
Magnetic
Catalog
Magnetic 1
Catalog
Amperes Range Number Number Number Number Number
2 70 350–700 JGS2070FAG JGS3070FAG — JGS4070FAG —

2 90
100
450–900
500–1000
JGS2090FAG
JGS2100FAG
JGS3090FAG
JGS3100FAG
—
JGS3100AAG
JGS4090FAG
JGS4100FAG
—
JGS4100AAG

2 125 625–1250 JGS2125FAG JGS3125FAG JGS3125AAG JGS4125FAG JGS4125AAG

150 750–1550 JGS2150FAG JGS3150FAG — JGS4150FAG —
2 160 800–1600 — — JGS3160AAG — JGS4160AAG
175 875–1750
2
JGS2175FAG JGS3175FAG — JGS4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGS2200FAG JGS3200FAG JGS3200AAG JGS4200FAG JGS4200AAG

2 225 1125–2250 JGS2225FAG JGS3225FAG — JGS4225FAG —

250 1250–2500 JGS2250FAG JGS3250FAG JGS3250AAG JGS4250FAG JGS4250AAG
2 Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0.

2 2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-174 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65
JG-Frame
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%2
2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Adjustable Thermal, 2
Magnetic Magnetic Fixed Magnetic 1 Magnetic Fixed Magnetic 1
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
70 350–700 JGH2070FAG JGH3070FAG — JGH4070FAG — 2
90 450–900 JGH2090FAG JGH3090FAG — JGH4090FAG —
100 500–1000 JGH2100FAG JGH3100FAG JGH3100AAG JGH4100FAG JGH4100AAG 2
125 625–1250
2
JGH2125FAG JGH3125FAG JGH3125AAG JGH4125FAG JGH4125AAG
150 750–1550 JGH2150FAG JGH3150FAG — JGH4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — — JGH3160AAG — JGH4160AAG
2
175 875–1750 JGH2175FAG JGH3175FAG — JGH4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGH2200FAG JGH3200FAG JGH3200AAG JGH4200FAG JGH4200AAG 2
225 1125–2250 JGH2225FAG JGH3225FAG — JGH4225FAG —
250 1250–2500 JGH2250FAG JGH3250FAG JGH3250AAG JGH4250FAG JGH4250AAG 2
Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0.
2
2
2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-175

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 100/100, 150/150

2
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting
2 JG-Frame
Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% 2

2 Maximum
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Continuous Magnetic Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Amperes Range Number Number Number Number
70 350–700 JGC3070FAG — JGC4070FAG —
2 80 400–800 — JGC3080AAG — JGC4080AAG

2 90
100
450–900
500–1000
JGC3090FAG
JGC3100FAG
—
JGC3100AAG
JGC4090FAG
JGC4100FAG
—
JGC4100AAG

2 125 625–1250 JGC3125FAG JGC3125AAG JGC4125FAG JGC4125AAG

150 750–1550 JGC3150FAG — JGC4150FAG —
2 160 800–1600 — JGC3160AAG — JGC4160AAG
175 875–1750 JGC3175FAG — JGC4175FAG —
2 200 1000–2000 JGC3200FAG JGC3200AAG JGC4200FAG JGC4200AAG

2 225 1125–2250 JGC3225FAG — JGC4225FAG —

250 1250–2500 JGC3250FAG JGC3250AAG JGC4250FAG JGC4250AAG

2
2 JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting
Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% 2
2 Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Maximum
2 Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 70 350–700 JGU3070FAG — JGU4070FAG —

80 400–800 — JGU3080AAG — JGU4080AAG

2 90 450–900 JGU3090FAG — JGU4090FAG —

100 500–1000 JGU3100FAG JGU3100AAG JGU4100FAG JGU4100AAG
2 125 625–1250 JGU3125FAG JGU3125AAG JGU4125FAG JGU4125AAG
150 750–1550
2
JGU3150FAG — JGU4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — JGU3160AAG — JGU4160AAG

2 175 875–1750 JGU3175FAG — JGU4175FAG —

200 1000–2000 JGU3200FAG JGU3200AAG JGU4200FAG JGU4200AAG
2 225 1125–2250 JGU3225FAG — JGU4225FAG —
250 1250–2500 JGU3250FAG JGU3250AAG JGU4250FAG JGU4250AAG
2 Notes

2
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0.
2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-176 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200
2
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200, Current Limiting
JG-Frame
Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
2
2
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal,
Maximum Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 1 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 1
Continuous Magnetic Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Amperes Range Number Number Number Number 2
70 350–700 JGX3070FAG — JGX4070FAG —
80 400–800 — JGX3080AAG — JGX4080AAG 2
90 450–900
100 500–1000
JGX3090FAG
JGX3100FAG
—
JGX3100AAG
JGX4090FAG
JGX4100FAG
—
JGX4100AAG
2
125 625–1250 JGX3125FAG JGX3125AAG JGX4125FAG JGX4125AAG 2
150 750–1550 JGX3150FAG — JGX4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — JGX3160AAG — JGX4160AAG 2
175 875–1750 JGX3175FAG — JGX4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGX3200FAG JGX3200AAG JGX4200FAG JGX4200AAG 2
225
250
1125–2250
1250–2500
JGX3225FAG
JGX3250FAG
—
JGX3250AAG
JGX4225FAG
JGX4250FAG
—
JGX4250AAG
2
2
Molded Case Switches 3 2
Catalog
Number
2
JGK3250KSG
JGK7250KSG 2
Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 2
0.8 and 1.0.
2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
3 Molded case switches will trip above
2
2500 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-177

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts

2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%

2 Maximum
Amperes
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 25/25
250 JGE2250NN JGE3250NN JGE4250NN

2 40/35
250 JGS2250NN JGS3250NN JGS4250NN
2 70/65
250 JGH2250NN JGH3250NN JGH4250NN
2 100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489

2 250 —
150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489
JGC3250NN JGC4250NN

2 250 — JGU3250NN JGU4250NN

200/200 Current Limiting Per UL 489
2 250 — JGX3250NN JGX4250NN
25/25 100% Rated Per UL 489 1
2 250 — JGE3250NNC —

2 40/35 100% Rated Per UL 489 1

250 — JGS3250NNC —
2 70/65 100% Rated Per UL 489 1
250 — JGH3250NNC —
2
2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Ampere Catalog Catalog
2 Rating Range Number Range Number
70 350–700 JT2070FA JT3070FA — — JT4070FA —
2 80 400–800 — JT3080FA JT3080AA 2 64–100 — JT4080AA 2

2 90 450–900 JT2090FA JT3090FA — — JT4090FA —

100 500–1000 JT2100FA JT3100FA JT3100AA 2 80–100 JT4100FA JT4100AA 2

2 125 625–1250 JT2125FA JT3125FA JT3125AA 2 100–125 JT4125FA JT4125AA 2

150 750–1550 JT2150FA JT3150FA — — JT4150FA —
2 160 800–1600 — — JT3160AA 2 128–160 — JT4160AA 2
175 875–1750 —
2
JT2175FA JT3175FA — JT4175FA —
200 1000–2000 JT2200FA JT3200FA JT3200AA 2 160–200 JT4200FA JT4200AA 2

2 225 1125–2250 JT2225FA JT3225FA — — JT4225FA —

250 1250–2500 JT2250FA JT3250FA JT3250AA 2 200–250 JT4250FA JT4250AA 2
2 Notes
1 Components—100% rated frame.

2 2 Adjustable thermal trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-178 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
310+ Electronic Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-187. 2
JG 310+ Electronic Trip Units 2
Neutral CT for LSG
LS LSI LSG LSIG and LSIG 1 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number Number Number Number Number
2
Three-Pole
50 JT305033 JT305032 JT305035 JT305036 JGFCT050 2
100 JT310033 JT310032 JT310035 JT310036 JGFCT100
160 JT316033 JT316032 JT316035 JT316036 JGFCT160
2
250 JT325033 JT325032 JT325035 JT325036 JGFCT250
2
Four-Pole 23
50 JT405033 JT405032 JT405035 JT405036 — 2
100 JT410033 JT410032 JT410035 JT410036 —
160 JT416033 JT416032 JT416035 JT416036 — 2
250
2
JT425033 JT425032 JT425035 JT425036 —

310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories 2

Description
Catalog
Number 2
Electronic portable test kit
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
MTST230V
5108A03H01
2
External neutral sensor (250 A) JGFCT250 2
External neutral sensor (160 A) JGFCT160
External neutral sensor (100 A) JGFCT100 2
External neutral sensor (80 A) JGFCT050
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
2
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
2
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06

Notes 2
1 For use on a three-pole breaker used in a four-wire system if ground fault protection for the

neutral is required.
2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is
2
not adjustable.
3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-179

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Complete Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Units

2 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-187.

2 IEC/UL/CSA—25/25
Neutral CT for
2 LS LSI LSG LSIG LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Rating Number Number Number Number Number
Three-Pole
2 50 JGE305033G JGE305032G JGE305035G JGE305036G JGFCT050
100 JGE310033G JGE310032G JGE310035G JGE310036G JGFCT100
2 160 JGE316033G JGE316032G JGE316035G JGE316036G JGFCT160

2 250 JGE325033G JGE325032G JGE325035G JGE325036G JGFCT250

Four-Pole 2

2 50 JGE405033G JGE405032G JGE405035G JGE405036G —

100 JGE410033G JGE410032G JGE410035G JGE410036G —
2 160 JGE416033G JGE416032G JGE416035G JGE416036G —
250
2
JGE425033G JGE425032G JGE425035G JGE425036G —

2 IEC/UL/CSA—40/35

2 LS LSI LSG LSIG

Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Rating Number Number Number Number Number
Three-Pole
2 50 JGS305033G JGS305032G JGS305035G JGS305036G JGFCT050

2 100 JGS310033G JGS310032G JGS310035G JGS310036G JGFCT100

160 JGS316033G JGS316032G JGS316035G JGS316036G JGFCT160

2 250 JGS325033G JGS325032G JGS325035G JGS325036G JGFCT250

Four-Pole 23
2 50 JGS405033G JGS405032G JGS405035G JGS405036G —
100
2
JGS410033G JGS410032G JGS410035G JGS410036G —
160 JGS416033G JGS416032G JGS416035G JGS416036G —

2 250 JGS425033G JGS425032G JGS425035G JGS425036G —

2 IEC/UL/CSA—70/65
2 LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1

2 Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 Three-Pole
50 JGH305033G JGH305032G JGH305035G JGH305036G JGFCT050

2 100 JGH310033G JGH310032G JGH310035G JGH310036G JGFCT100

160 JGH316033G JGH316032G JGH316035G JGH316036G JGFCT160
2 250 JGH325033G JGH325032G JGH325035G JGH325036G JGFCT250
Four-Pole 2
2 50 JGH405033G JGH405032G JGH405035G JGH405036G —

2 100 JGH410033G JGH410032G JGH410035G JGH410036G —

160 JGH416033G JGH416032G JGH416035G JGH416036G —
2 250 JGH425033G JGH425032G JGH425035G JGH425036G —

2
Notes
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.

2 3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

V4-T2-180 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
IEC/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting Per UL 489
Neutral CT for
2
LS LSI LSG LSIG LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
Rating Number Number Number Number Number
Three-Pole 2
50
2
JGC305033G JGC305032G JGC305035G JGC305036G JGFCT050
100 JGC310033G JGC310032G JGC310035G JGC310036G JGFCT100
160 JGC316033G JGC316032G JGC316035G JGC316036G JGFCT160
2
250 JGC335033G JGC325032G JGC325035G JGC325036G JGFCT250
Four-Pole 2 2
50 JGC405033G JGC405032G JGC405035G JGC405036G —
100 JGC410033G JGC410032G JGC410035G JGC410036G — 2
160
2
JGC416033G JGC416032G JGC416035G JGC416036G —
250 JGC435033G JGC425032G JGC425035G JGC425036G —

2
IEC/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting Per UL 489
2
Neutral CT for

Ampere
LS
Catalog
LSI
Catalog
LSG
Catalog
LSIG
Catalog
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
2
Rating Number Number Number Number Number
Three-Pole
2
50 JGU305033G JGU305032G JGU305035G JGU305036G JGFCT050
2
100 JGU310033G JGU310032G JGU310035G JGU310036G JGFCT100
160 JGU316033G JGU316032G JGU316035G JGU316036G JGFCT160 2
250 JGU335033G JGU325032G JGU325035G JGU325036G JGFCT250
Four-Pole 23 2
50
2
JGU405033G JGU405032G JGU405035G JGU405036G —
100 JGU410033G JGU410032G JGU410035G JGU410036G —
160 JGU416033G JGU416032G JGU416035G JGU416036G —
2
250 JGU435033G JGU425032G JGU425035G JGU425036G —
2
IEC/UL/CSA—200/200, Current Limiting Per UL 489 2
Neutral CT for
LS LSI LSG LSIG LSG and LSIG 1 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number Number Number Number Number
2
Three-Pole
50 JGX305033G JGX305032G JGX305035G JGX305036G JGFCT050 2
100 JGX310033G JGX310032G JGX310035G JGX310036G JGFCT100
160 JGX316033G JGX316032G JGX316035G JGX316036G JGFCT160 2
250
2
JGX325033G JGX325032G JGX325035G JGX325036G JGFCT250
Four-Pole 2
50 JGX405033G JGX405032G JGX405035G JGX405036G —
2
100 JGX410033G JGX410032G JGX410035G JGX410036G —
160 JGX416033G JGX416032G JGX416035G JGX416036G — 2
250 JGX425033G JGX425032G JGX425035G JGX425036G —

Notes
2
2
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-181

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

JG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
2
JG-Frame JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25 JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65
2 Three-Pole Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Thermal,
2 Maximum
Continuous Magnetic
Adjustable Magnetic
Catalog
Maximum
Continuous Magnetic
Adjustable Magnetic
Catalog

2 Amperes
70
Range
350–700
Number
JGE3070FAGC
Amperes
70
Range
350–700
Number
JGH3070FAGC

2 90 450–900 JGE3090FAGC 90 450–900 JGH3090FAGC

100 500–1000 JGE3100FAGC 100 500–1000 JGH3100FAGC
2 125 625–1250 JGE3125FAGC 125 625–1250 JGH3125FAGC
150 750–1550 150 750–1550
2
JGE3150FAGC JGH3150FAGC
160 800–1600 — 160 800–1600 —

2 175 875–1750 JGE3175FAGC 175 875–1750 JGH3175FAGC

200 1000–2000 JGE3200FAGC 200 1000–2000 JGH3200FAGC

2 225 1125–2250 JGE3225FAGC 225 1125–2250 JGH3225FAGC

250 1250–2500 JGE3250FAGC 250 1250–2500 JGH3250FAGC
2
2 JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35
Three-Pole
2 Fixed Thermal,
Maximum Adjustable Magnetic
2 Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number

2 70 350–700 JGS3070FAGC
90 450–900 JGS3090FAGC
2 100 500–1000 JGS3100FAGC
125 625–1250
2
JGS3125FAGC
150 750–1550 JGS3150FAGC

2 160 800–1600 —
175 875–1750 JGS3175FAGC
2 200 1000–2000 JGS3200FAGC
225 1125–2250 JGS3225FAGC
2 250 1250–2500 JGS3250FAGC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-182 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
JG 100% Rated 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breaker
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-187. 2
IEC/UL/CSA—25/25 2
Neutral CT for
LS LSI LSG LSIG LSG and LSIG 1 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number Number Number Number Number
2
50 JGE305033GC JGE305032GC JGE305035GC JGE305036GC JGFCT050
100 JGE310033GC JGE310032GC JGE310035GC JGE310036GC JGFCT100 2
160 JGE316033GC JGE316032GC JGE316035GC JGE316036GC JGFCT160
250 JGE325033GC JGE325032GC JGE325035GC JGE325036GC JGFCT250
2
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA—40/35
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number Number Number Number Number
50 JGS305033GC JGS305032GC JGS305035GC JGS305036GC JGFCT050 2
100
160
JGS310033GC
JGS316033GC
JGS310032GC
JGS316032GC
JGS310035GC
JGS316035GC
JGS310036GC
JGS316036GC
JGFCT100
JGFCT160
2
250 JGS325033GC JGS325032GC JGS325035GC JGS325036GC JGFCT250 2
2
IEC/UL/CSA—70/65

LS LSI LSG LSIG

Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
50 JGH305033GC JGH305032GC JGH305035GC JGH305036GC JGFCT050
2
100 JGH310033GC JGH310032GC JGH310035GC JGH310036GC JGFCT100
160 JGH316033GC JGH316032GC JGH316035GC JGH316036GC JGFCT160 2
250 JGH325033GC JGH325032GC JGH325035GC JGH325036GC JGFCT250

Note
2
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-183

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
JG-Frame
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 T250FJ TA250FJ Endcap Kit Control Wire
Terminal Kit
Rear Fed Terminals Multiwire Connectors

2 Load and Line Terminals Base Mounting Hardware

2 Maximum
Breaker
Terminal
Body
AWG Wire
Metric Wire Range/ Number Catalog
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required
Amperes Material Wire Type Range mm2 of Conductors Number separately, order 66A2546G02.
2 Standard Pressure Type Terminals
250 Stainless steel Cu 25–185 #4–350 (1) Terminal Shields IP30
2
T250FJ 1
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 12 Location Number of Poles Catalog Number

2 JG-Frame circuit breakers include aluminum terminals TA250FJ

Line or Load 2, 3 FJTS3K

as standard. When optional stainless steel only terminals are 4 FJTS4K

2 required, order by catalog number.

Interphase Barriers
2 Endcap Kits Number Catalog
Catalog Number of Poles Number

2 Number of Poles Metric Imperial 3 FJIPBK 3

3 FJ3RTWK FJ3RTDK 4 FJIPBK4 3
2 4 FJ4RTWK FJ4RTDK
Multiwire Connectors
2 Endcap kits are used on J250-Frame breaker to connect busbar Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end
or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware. terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker
2 to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution
terminal blocks.
Control Wire Terminal Kit
2 Catalog
Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware,
Description Number insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace
2 Package of 14 (priced individually) FJCWTK
three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load
side (OFF) end.
2 For use with aluminum or copper terminals only.
JG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information
2 Rear Fed Terminals (Package of 3)
Maximum Wires per Wire Size Kit Catalog

2
Maximum Wire Size Catalog Amperes Terminal Range AWG Cu Number
Amperes Range AWG Cu Number
250 3 14–2 3TA250FJ3
250 #4–350 kcmil TA250JGRF
2 3TA250JGRF
250 6 14–6 3TA250FJ6

Notes
2 Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker 1 Individually packed.
from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase 2 Standard line and load.

2 barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending
on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates
3 Individually priced.

2 a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning

with a TA indicates one terminal.

2
2

V4-T2-184 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories 2
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
JG-Frame Accessories
2
Description
Reference
Page
Two- and Three-Pole
Left Center Right
Four-Pole
Left Center Right Neutral
2
Internal Accessories
(Only one internal accessory per pole)
2
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ —
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ —
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ — 2
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ —
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-252 ■ — — ■ — — — 2
Undervoltage release mechanism
External Accessories
V4-T2-253 ■ — — ■ — — —
2
End cap kit V4-T2-184 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-184 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-184 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-184 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-184 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Interphase barriers
Padlockable handle block
V4-T2-184
V4-T2-250
●
—
●
■
●
—
●
—
●
■
●
—
●
—
2
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-250 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ — 2
Key interlock kit V4-T2-250 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-250 ● ● ● — — — — 2
Electrical operator ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
V4-T2-250
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-250 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-532 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Earth leakage/ground fault protector V4-T2-235 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Drawout cassette V4-T2-258 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T2-179 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-249 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Cause of trip LED module ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
V4-T2-249
2
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-248 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Marine/naval application, UL 489 supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
2
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available 2
2
Note
1 Contact Eaton.

2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-185

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Technical Data and Specifications

2
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings
2 Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
Circuit
220–240 380–415 690 2
2 Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles Icu Ics Icu Ics 480 600 Icu Ics 250 23

2 JGE250
JGS250
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
65
85
65
85
25
40
25
40
25
35
18
18
12
12
6
6
10
22

2 JGH250 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 65 25 14 7 22

JGC250 4 3, 4 200 200 100 100 100 35 16 12 42
2 JGU250 4 3, 4 200 200 150 150 150 50 18 14 50
JGX250 4 3, 4 200 200 200 200 200 50 18 14 50
2
2 UL 489 Current-Limiting Data
Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
2 JGC 240 V/200 kA 45.1 1.820

2 JGC
JGC
480 V/100 kA
600 V/35 kA
45.1
32.8
1.820
2.140

2 JGU 240 V/200 kA 45.1 1.820

JGU 480 V/150 kA 45.1 1.820
2 JGU 600 V/50 kA 32.8 2.140
JGX 240 V/200 kA 45.1 1.820
2 JGX 480 V/200 kA 45.1 1.820

2 JGX 600 V/50 kA 32.8 2.140

2 JG 310+ Specifications

2
Description Specification
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+

2 Breaker Type
Frame designation JG
2 Frames available 50 A, 100 A, 160 A, 250 A
Continuous current range (A) 20–250 A
2 Ground fault pickup (A) 10–250 A

2 Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100, 150, 200
100% rated Yes

2 Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG
2 Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) No
Interchangeable trip unit Yes
2 High load alarm (suffix B20) 5 Yes

2 Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 5 Yes

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 5 Yes
2 Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG
Cause of trip indication Yes
2 Thru-cover accessories Yes

2 Notes
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
2 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
4 Current limiting per UL 489.

2 5 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.

V4-T2-186 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
JG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
JG Frame
2
310+ Settings
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) Ir
50 A 100 A 160 A 250 A
2
(All 310+)
A 20 40 63 100 2
B 20 45 80 125
C 25 50 90 150 2
D 30 63 100 160
E 32 70 110 175
2
F 40 80 125 200
2
G 45 90 150 225
H (= In) 50 100 160 250 2
tr = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 2 2 2 2
(All 310+)
Position 2 4 4 4 4 2
Position 3 7 7 7 7
Position 4 10 10 10 10
2
Position 5 12 12 12 12
2
Position 6 15 15 15 15
Position 7 20 20 20 20 2
Position 8 24 24 24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x 2x 2x 2x 2
(All 310+)
Position 2
Position 3
3x
4x
3x
4x
3x
4x
3x
4x
2
Position 4 5x 5x 5x 5x 2
Position 5 6x 6x 6x 6x
Position 6 7x 7x 7x 7x 2
Position 7 8x 8x 8x 8x
Position 8 10x 10x 10x 10x
2
Position 9 14x 14x 14x 14x
2
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x
(LS, LSG)
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst Inst
2
(LSI, LSIG)
Position 2 120 120 120 120 2
Position 3 300 300 300 300
Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 10 20 32 50 2
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 2 15 30 48 75
Position 3 20 40 64 100
2
Position 4 30 60 96 150
2
Position 5 40 80 128 200
Position 6 50 100 160 250 2
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst Inst
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 2 120 120 120 120 2
Position 3 300 300 300 300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 1 N/A
2
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) 2 N/A
2
Notes
1 Not available for JG. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode not available for JG frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG, and RG.
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-187

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Dimensions and Weights

2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 JG-Frame
2 Number
of Poles Width Height Depth

2 2, 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)

4 5.34 (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
2
JG-Frame
2
Front Cover Cutout Front View Three-Pole Side View
2 CL
Breaker 1.25 (31.8)
0.63 (16.0)
2 0.28 (7.1) 0.19 (4.8) R 3.95
(100.3)
3.06
2 2.05 (52.1) 7.00
(77.7) CL (177.8)
Handle
2 0.50
(12.7) 4.00
1.06 (27.0)
(101.6)
2 4.13
(104.9)
3.44
(87.4)

2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lb (kg)
2
JG-Frame
2 Number of Poles
Breaker Type 2, 3 4
2 JGC 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
JGE 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
2 JGH 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)

2 JGS 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)

JGU 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
2 JGX 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-188 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
2
4-Pole
5.50 (139.7)
3-Pole
2
5.50
2
4.13 (104.9)
(139.7) 2.05
0.69
(52.1)
1.38 (17.5) 2.06 3.57 1.25
(35.1) (52.3) (90.7) (31.8) 0.63
(16.0)
2
1.88
(47.8) 6.97
2
R 0.19
3.92 (177.0)
2
5.50 3.92 (4.8)
(99.6) (139.7) (99.6) 4.93
0.28 (125.2)
7.00
(177.8)
(7.1) 11.25
(285.8)
2
11.25 0.50 1.06 2
(285.8) (139.7) (26.9)
2
3.37 2
4.25 (85.6)
2
RESET

TEST
(108.0)

2
2
2.05
3.31 3.57 (52.1)
(84.1) 3.69 (90.7) 4.09
(93.7) 3.81
(96.8)
(103.9)
2
4.78
(121.4)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-189

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Contents
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
Description Page
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-191
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-192
V4-T2-203
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-204
2 Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-206
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208
2 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-217
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-228
2 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . .
V4-T2-232
V4-T2-235
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
V4-T2-239

Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244

2 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-247
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-255
2 Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258
2
2
2
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)

2 Product Description
LG breaker is HACR rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-190 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
Series G—LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)

L G S 3 600 FA G C 2
2
Frame Rating
L Blank = 80% rated 2
C = 100% rated (for LGE, LGS and LGH only)
Standard/Application
Number of Poles
Amperes
250 Terminations/Hardware
2
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
3 = Three 300
Performance
4 = Four—Neutral 0% protected 350
Terminals
M = Metric end caps
Mounting Hardware
Metric
2
6 = Four—Neutral 60% protected 400
E = Imperial end caps Imperial
2
600 480 415 240 7 = Four—Neutral 100% protected 500
G = Line/load standard Metric
E 18 35 35 65 8 = Four—Neutral 0–60% protected 600
W = Without terminals
S 25 50 50 85 9 = Four—Neutral 0–100 protected 630
H 35 65 70 100 Trip Unit 2
C 50 100 100 200 AA = Adj. adj.
U 65 150 150 200 FA = Fixed adj. 2
X 65 200 200 200 KS = Molded case switch
K Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI 2
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
38 = 310+ electronic ALSI
2
39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG
NN = Frame only (630 A only; no trip unit) 2

Trip Unit
2
LT 3 600 FA B20 2
2
Trip Features (ETU Only) 12
LT
3 = Three
Number of Poles
Amperes
Trip Unit Blank= No feature
B20= High load alarm
2
AA = Adj. adj., thermal-magnetic
4 = Four—neutral 0% protected B21= Ground fault alarm, with trip
8 = Four—neutral 0/60% protected
250
300
FA = Fixed adj., thermal-magnetic
KS = Molded case switch B22= Ground fault alarm, no trip 2
9 = Four—neutral 0/100% protected 350 33 = 310+ electronic LS ZG= Zone selective interlocking
400
500
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
2
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
2
600
630 38 = 310+ electronic ALSI
39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG

Notes
2
2
1 Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features.
2 B21 and B22 available with LSG and LSIG trip units.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-191

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Product Selection
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)
2
LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)
2 IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3
2 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45
2 Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 250 LGE3250FAG LGE3250AAG LGE4250FAG LGE4250AAG

300 LGE3300FAG — LGE4300FAG —
2 320 — LGE3320AAG — LGE4320AAG
350
2
LGE3350FAG — LGE4350FAG —
400 LGE3400FAG LGE3400AAG LGE4400FAG LGE4400AAG

2 500 LGE3500FAG LGE3500AAG LGE4500FAG LGE4500AAG

600 LGE3600FAG — LGE4600FAG —

2 630 4 — LGE3630AAG — LGE4630AAG

2 LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)

IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
2 Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal,
2 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Rating Number Number Number Number
250 LGS3250FAG LGS3250AAG LGS4250FAG LGS4250AAG
2 300 LGS3300FAG — LGS4300FAG —
320 — LGS3320AAG — LGS4320AAG
2 350 LGS3350FAG — LGS4350FAG —

2 400
500
LGS3400FAG
LGS3500FAG
LGS3400AAG
LGS3500AAG
LGS4400FAG
LGS4500FAG
LGS4400AAG
LGS4500AAG

2 600 LGS3600FAG — LGS4600FAG —

630 4 — LGS3630AAG — LGS4630AAG
2
LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)
2 IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1
Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3
2 Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45
2 Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 250 LGH3250FAG LGH3250AAG LGH4250FAG LGH4250AAG

300 LGH3300FAG — LGH4300FAG —
2 320 — LGH3320AAG — LGH4320AAG
350 LGH3350FAG — LGH4350FAG —
2 400 LGH3400FAG LGH3400AAG LGH4400FAG LGH4400AAG

2 500 LGH3500FAG LGH3500AAG LGH4500FAG LGH4500AAG

600 LGH3600FAG — LGH4600FAG —

2 630 4 — LGH3630AAG — LGH4630AAG

2
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.

2 3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side.
4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.

2 5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.

V4-T2-192 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)
2
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489
LG-Frame
IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 2
2 3

2
Three-Pole Four-Pole (0%)
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
Rating Number Number Number Number
250 LGC3250FAG LGC3250AAG LGC4250FAG LGC4250AAG 2
300 LGC3300FAG — LGC4300FAG —
320 — LGC3320AAG — LGC4320AAG 2
350
400
LGC3350FAG
LGC3400FAG
—
LGC3400AAG
LGC4350FAG
LGC4400FAG
—
LGC4400AAG
2
500 LGC3500FAG LGC3500AAG LGC4500FAG LGC4500AAG 2
600 LGC3600FAG — LGC4600FAG —
630 4 — LGC3630AAG — LGC4630AAG 2
2
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489
2
LG-Frame
IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, 2
Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
250 LGU3250FAG LGU3250AAG LGU4250FAG LGU4250AAG 2
300 LGU3300FAG — LGU4300FAG —
320 — LGU3320AAG — LGU4320AAG 2
350
2
LGU3350FAG — LGU4350FAG —
400 LGU3400FAG LGU3400AAG LGU4400FAG LGU4400AAG
500 LGU3500FAG LGU3500AAG LGU4500FAG LGU4500AAG
2
600 LGU3600FAG — LGU4600FAG —
630 4 — LGU3630AAG — LGU4630AAG 2
2
LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489
IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 2
Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal, 2
Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
250 LGX3250FAG LGX3250AAG LGX4250FAG LGX4250AAG 2
300 LGX3300FAG — LGX4300FAG —
320 — LGX3320AAG — LGX4320AAG 2
350 LGX3350FAG — LGX4350FAG —
400 LGX3400FAG LGX3400AAG LGX4400FAG LGX4400AAG
2
500 LGX3500FAG LGX3500AAG LGX4500FAG LGX4500AAG
2
600 LGX3600FAG — LGX4600FAG —
630 4 — LGX3630AAG — LGX4630AAG 2
2
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side.
4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
2
5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-193

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Molded Case Switches 1

2 Ampere Number Catalog
Rating of Poles Number
2 400 32 LGK3400KSG

2 4 LGK4400KSG
630 3 32 LGK3630KSG
2 4 LGK4630KSG

2
Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
2 Three-Pole 2 Four-Pole 0%
Maximum Catalog Catalog
2 Amperes 3 Number Number
35/35
2 630 3 LGE3630NN LGE4630NN

2
LGE3630NNWC 4 —
50/50

2 630 3 LGS3630NN LGS4630NN

LGS3630NNWC 4 —
2 70/53
630 3 LGH3630NN LGH4630NN
2 LGH3630NNWC 4 —

2 100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489

630 LGC3630NN LGC4630NN

2 150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489

630 LGU3630NN LGU4630NN
2 200/200 Current Limiting
630 LGX3630NN LGX4630NN
2
2 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

2 Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal,
Four-Pole (0%) 6
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 5 Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic 5
2 Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number Number Number Number
2 250 LT3250FA LT3250AA LT4250FA LT4250AA
300
2
LT3300FA — LT4300FA —
320 — LT3320AA — LT4320AA

2 350 LT3350FA — LT4350FA —

400 LT3400FA LT3400AA LT4400FA LT4400AA
2 500 LT3500FA LT3500AA LT4500FA LT4500AA
600 LT3600FA — LT4600FA —
2 630 — LT3630AA — LT4630AA

2 Notes
1 Molded case switches will trip above 6300 amperes.

2
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
3 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
4 100% rated frame.

2 5 Adjustable thermal, adjustable magnetic trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
6 Neutral protection is indicated by the third character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%.

2
2
2

V4-T2-194 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-205. 2

LS LSI LSG LSIG

Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
Three-Pole
2
250 LT325033 LT325032 LT325035 LT325036 LGFCT250
400 LT340033 LT340032 LT340035 LT340036 LGFCT400 2
600 LT360033 LT360032 LT360035 LT360036 LGFCT600
630 2 LT363033 LT363032 LT363035 LT363036 LGFCT600 2
2
Four-Pole 34

250 LT425033 LT425032 LT425035 LT425036 —

400 LT440033 LT440032 LT440035 LT440036 —
2
600 LT460033 LT460032 LT460035 LT460036 —
630 2 LT463033 LT463032 LT463035 LT463036 — 2
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Catalog 2
Description Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V 2
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
2
5108A03H01
External neutral sensor (630 A) LGFCT630
External neutral sensor (600 A) LGFCT600
2
External neutral sensor (400 A) LGFCT400
External neutral sensor (250 A) LGFCT250 2
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW 2
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06
2
Notes
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
2
2
3 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
4 Four-pole LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-195

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

IC Rating at 415/480 V
2 Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and
Mounting Hardware) 1
2 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-205.

2 IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac

Neutral CT
2 Ampere
LS
Catalog
LSI
Catalog
LSG
Catalog
LSIG
Catalog
for LSG and LSIG 2
Catalog

2
Rating Number Number Number Number Number
Three-Pole 3

2 250 LGE325033G LGE325032G LGE325035G LGE325036G LGFCT250

400 LGE340033G LGE340032G LGE340035G LGE340036G LGFCT400
2 600 LGE360033G LGE360032G LGE360035G LGE360036G LGFCT600
630 4 LGE363033G LGE363032G LGE363035G LGE363036G LGFCT600
2 Four-Pole 5
250 LGE425033G LGE425032G LGE425035G LGE425036G —
2 400 LGE440033G LGE440032G LGE440035G LGE440036G —
600
2
LGE460033G LGE460032G LGE460035G LGE460036G —
630 4 LGE463033G LGE463032G LGE463035G LGE463036G —

2 IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac

2 LS LSI LSG LSIG

Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Rating Number Number Number Number Number
Three-Pole 3
2 250 LGS325033G LGS325032G LGS325035G LGS325036G LGFCT250
400
2 600
LGS340033G
LGS360033G
LGS340032G
LGS360032G
LGS340035G
LGS360035G
LGS340036G
LGS360036G
LGFCT400
LGFCT600

2 630 4 LGS363033G LGS363032G LGS363035G LGS363036G LGFCT600

Four-Pole 56

2 250 LGS425033G LGS425032G LGS425035G LGS425036G —

400 LGS440033G LGS440032G LGS440035G LGS440036G —
2 600 LGS460033G LGS460032G LGS460035G LGS460036G —
630 4 LGS463033G LGS463032G LGS463035G LGS463036G —
2
IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 Neutral CT
LS LSI LSG LSIG for LSG and LSIG 2
2 Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 Three-Pole 3
250 LGH325033G LGH325032G LGH325035G LGH325036G LGFCT250
2 400 LGH340033G LGH340032G LGH340035G LGH340036G LGFCT400
600 LGH360033G LGH360032G LGH360035G LGH360036G LGFCT600
2 630 4 LGH363033G LGH363032G LGH363035G LGH363036G LGFCT600

2
Four-Pole 56
250 LGH425033G LGH425032G LGH425035G LGH425036G —

2 400
600
LGH440033G
LGH460033G
LGH440032G
LGH460032G
LGH440035G
LGH460035G
LGH440036G
LGH460036G
—
—

2 630 4 LGH463033G LGH463032G LGH463035G LGH463036G —

Notes
2 1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.

2 3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.

4 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
5 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
2 6 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.

V4-T2-196 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
IC Rating at 415/480 V
Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and 2
Mounting Hardware) 1
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-205. 2
IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 2
Neutral CT

Ampere
LS
Catalog
LSI
Catalog
LSG
Catalog
LSIG
Catalog
for LSG and LSIG 2
Catalog
2
2
Rating Number Number Number Number Number
Three-Pole 3
250 LGC325033G LGC325032G LGC325035G LGC325036G LGFCT250
2
400 LGC340033G LGC340032G LGC340035G LGC340036G LGFCT400
600 LGC360033G LGC360032G LGC360035G LGC360036G LGFCT600 2
630 4 LGC363033G LGC363032G LGC363035G LGC363036G LGFCT600
Four-Pole 56 2
250 LGC425033G LGC425032G LGC425035G LGC425036G —
400 LGC440033G LGC440032G LGC440035G LGC440036G — 2
600
2
LGC460033G LGC460032G LGC460035G LGC460036G —
630 4 LGC463033G LGC463032G LGC463035G LGC463036G —

IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489 2
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number Number Number Number Number 2
Three-Pole 3
250 LGU325033G LGU325032G LGU325035G LGU325036G LGFCT250 2
400
2
LGU340033G LGU340032G LGU340035G LGU340036G LGFCT400
600 LGU360033G LGU360032G LGU360035G LGU360036G LGFCT600
630 4
Four-Pole 5
LGU363033G LGU363032G LGU363035G LGU363036G LGFCT600
2
250 LGU425033G LGU425032G LGU425035G LGU425036G — 2
400 LGU440033G LGU440032G LGU440035G LGU440036G —
600 LGU460033G LGU460032G LGU460035G LGU460036G — 2
630 4 LGU463033G LGU463032G LGU463035G LGU463036G —
2
IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
Neutral CT 2
LS LSI LSG LSIG for LSG and LSIG 2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Three-Pole 3 2
250 LGX325033G LGX325032G LGX325035G LGX325036G LGFCT250
400 LGX340033G LGX340032G LGX340035G LGX340036G LGFCT400 2
600 LGX360033G LGX360032G LGX360035G LGX360036G LGFCT600
630 4 LGX363033G LGX363032G LGX363035G LGX363036G LGFCT600 2
5

2
Four-Pole
250 LGX425033G LGX425032G LGX425035G LGX425036G —
400
600
LGX440033G
LGX460033G
LGX440032G
LGX460032G
LGX440035G
LGX460035G
LGX440036G
LGX460036G
—
—
2
630 4 LGX463033G LGX463032G LGX463035G LGX463036G —
2
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
2
3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
4 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
2
5 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
6 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection. 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-197

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

LG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)
2
LG-Frame LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes
2 UL, CSA) IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and
480 Vac 1
UL, CSA) IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65
kAIC at 480 Vac 1
2 Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,
Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,

2
Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Magnetic
Ampere Rating Catalog Number Ampere Rating Catalog Number

2 250 LGE3250FAGC 250 LGH3250FAGC

300 LGE3300FAGC 300 LGH3300FAGC

2 320 — 320 —
350 LGE3350FAGC 350 LGH3350FAGC
2 400 LGE3400FAGC 400 LGH3400FAGC
500 500
2
LGE3500FAGC LGH3500FAGC
600 LGE3600FAGC 600 LGH3600FAGC

2 630 3 — 630 3 —

Notes
2 LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.

2 UL, CSA) IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and

480 Vac 1
3 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is

the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.

2 Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
2 Ampere Rating Catalog Number

2 250
300
LGS3250FAGC
LGS3300FAGC

2 320 —
350 LGS3350FAGC
2 400 LGS3400FAGC
500 LGS3500FAGC
2 600 LGS3600FAGC

2 630 3 —

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-198 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
LG 100% Rated Electronic Breaker Per UL 489
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-205. 2
IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 2
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number Number Number Number Number 2
250 LGE325033GC LGE325032GC LGE325035GC LGE325036GC LGFCT250
400 LGE340033GC LGE340032GC LGE340035GC LGE340036GC LGFCT400 2
600
630 2
LGE360033GC
LGE363033GC
LGE360032GC
LGE363032GC
LGE360035GC
LGE363035GC
LGE360036GC
LGE363036GC
LGFCT600
LGFCT600
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
Neutral CT for
2
LS LSI LSG LSIG LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
Rating Number Number Number Number Number
250 LGS325033GC LGS325032GC LGS325035GC LGS325036GC LGFCT250 2
400 LGS340033GC LGS340032GC LGS340035GC LGS340036GC LGFCT400
600 LGS360033GC LGS360032GC LGS360035GC LGS360036GC LGFCT600
2
630 2 LGS363033GC LGS363032GC LGS363035GC LGS363036GC LGFCT600
2
IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 2
2
Neutral CT for
LS LSI LSG LSIG LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Rating Number Number Number Number Number 2
250 LGH325033GC LGH325032GC LGH325035GC LGH325036GC LGFCT250
400 LGH340033GC LGH340032GC LGH340035GC LGH340036GC LGFCT400 2
600
2
LGH360033GC LGH360032GC LGH360035GC LGH360036GC LGFCT600
630 2 LGH363033GC LGH363032GC LGH363035GC LGH363036GC LGFCT600

Notes
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-199

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System

2 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-205.

2 Series G LG circuit breakers

are available with the Arcflash
simple and reliable method to
reduce fault clearing time.
interruption times than the
standard (digital)
Maintenance System unit can
have a significantly lower
2 Reduction Maintenance
System™ integrated into the
The Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System unit
“instantaneous” protection.
Work locations downstream
incident energy level,
reducing arc flash potential to
electronic trip units helping to utilizes a separate analog trip of a circuit breaker with an the system.
2 improve safety by providing a circuit that provides faster Arcflash Reduction

2 LG with LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System

Arcflash Reduction
2
Neutral CT for
Maintenance System
ALSI ALSIG LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Rating Number Number Number
IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
2 250 LGE325038G LGE365039G LGFCT250
400 LGE340038G LGE340039G LGFCT400
2 600 LGE360038G LGE360039G LGFCT600
630
2
LGE363038G LGE363039G LGFCT600
IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac

2 250
400
LGS325038G
LGS340038G
LGS365039G
LGS340039G
LGFCT250
LGFCT400

2 600 LGS360038G LGS360039G LGFCT600

630 LGS363038G LGS363039G LGFCT600
2 IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
250 LGH325038G LGH365039G LGFCT250
2 400 LGH340038G LGH340039G LGFCT400
600
2
LGH360038G LGH360039G LGFCT600
630 LGH363038G LGH363039G LGFCT600

2 IEC/UL/CSA 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
250 LGC325038G LGC365039G LGFCT250

2 400 LGC340038G LGC340039G LGFCT400

600 LGC360038G LGC360039G LGFCT600
2 630 LGC363038G LGC363039G LGFCT600
IEC/UL/CSA 150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
2 250 LGU325038G LGU365039G LGFCT250
400 LGU340038G LGU340039G LGFCT400
2 600 LGU360038G LGU360039G LGFCT600
630
2 LGU363038G LGU363039G
IEC/UL/CSA 200 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
LGFCT600

2 250 LGX325038G LGX365039G LGFCT250

400 LGX340038G LGX340039G LGFCT400

2 600 LGX360038G LGX360039G LGFCT600

630 LGX363038G LGX363039G LGFCT600
2
2 LG Electronic Trip Units with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
Neutral CT for

2 Ampere
ALSI
Catalog
ALSIG
Catalog
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Rating Number Number Number
2 250 LT325038 LT325039 LGFCT250

2 400
600
LT340038
LT360038
LT340039
LT360039
LGFCT400
LGFCT600

2 630 LT363038 LT363039 LGFCT600

Note
2 1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.

V4-T2-200 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Line and Load Terminals
AWG
2
Maximum Terminal Wire Range/ Metric Number of
Breaker
Amperes
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Number of
Conductors
Wire Range
(mm2)
Terminals
Included
Catalog
Number
2
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 3 3TA631LK 1
2
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 4 4TA631LK 1
400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 3 3T631LK 1 2
400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 4 4T631LK 1
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 1 TA632L 2
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3TA632LK 12
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4TA632LK 12 2
630 Copper Cu 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3T632LK 1
630 Copper Cu 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4T632LK 1 2
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 TA350LK 2
400 Copper Cu 3–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 T350LK 2
Base Mounting Hardware Interphase Barrier 2
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
2
Catalog
molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required Package of 2 Number
separately, order 66A4560G03. Interphase barrier IPB3
2
Terminal Covers Rear Fed Terminals

Description
Catalog
Number Maximum Wire Size Catalog
2
Amperes Range AWG Cu Number
Three-pole terminal cover 3 LTS3K
400 2–500 kcmil TA350LKRF 2
Four-pole terminal cover 3 LTS4K
400 2–500 kcmil
2
3TA350LKRF

End Cap Kits (MIO Metric Nuts) 630 2–500 (2) kcmil TA632LKRF

Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
630 2–500 (2) kcmil 3TA632LKRF
2
Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker
3 L3RTWK from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase 2
4 L4RTWK barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending

Control Wire Terminal Kit

on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates
a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning
2
with a TA indicates one terminal.
Description
Terminal
Body Type
Catalog
Number 2
Multiwire Connectors
Three-pole kit
Four-pole kit
Aluminum
Aluminum
3TA632LKW
4TA632LKW Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end 2
terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker
Three-pole kit Copper 3T632LKW
to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution 2
Four-pole kit Copper 4T632LKW
terminal blocks.
Terminal Spreaders Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware,
2
insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load 2
side (OFF) end.
3
4
LGTEW3
LGTEW4
2
LG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information

Terminal Extensions
(Package of 3) 2
Maximum Wires per Wire Size Kit Catalog
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
Amperes Terminal Range AWG Cu Number
2
600 6 14–1/0 3TA600L6K
3
4
LGTES3
LGTES4
Notes 2
1 Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers.

Handle Extension
2 Standard terminal included with complete breaker.
3 Included in TA63IL, T63IL, TA632L kits listed above.
2
Description
Catalog
Number 2
Handle extension HEXLG
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-201

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

StrandAble Multiwire Terminals

2 Field-installed multiwire Used on the load side of StrandAble multiwire
terminals are UL listed for circuit breaker to distribute terminals are available in
2 nearly any class of rigid or the load to multiple devices three-pole kits that include
fine strand wire without the without the use of a power the necessary hardware and
2 use of additional fittings. distribution block. shielding.

2 3TA600L6SWK_ LG Frame StrandAble Multiwire Terminals (Three-Pole Kits)

Maximum
2 Amperage Wire Class Wire Range Shield Included Catalog Number
600 B and C (6) 12–2/0 Interphase barrier 3TA600L6SWKI
2 600 D, G, H, I, K, M (6) 8–1/0 Interphase barrier

2 600
600
B and C
D, G, H, I, K, M
(6) 12–2/0
(6) 8–1/0
Terminal shield
Terminal shield
3TA600L6SWKS

2
2 Terminals and Terminal Cover

2 Terminals and Terminal Cover for the LG Breaker—Includes LTS3K (Three-Pole) or LTS4K (Four-Pole) Terminal Covers
Note: Extended terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.0 mm) to breaker length.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-202 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Accessories
2
Base Mounting Hardware 2
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch.
(Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A4560G03. 2
Allowable Accessory Combinations 2
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker. 2
LG-Frame Accessories 2
Three-Pole Four-Pole
2
Reference
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

2
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ —
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ —
2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ —
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ — 2
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-252 ■ — — ■ — — —
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-253 ■ — — ■ — — — 2
External Accessories
End cap kit V4-T2-201 ● — — ● — — —
2
Handle extension V4-T2-201 ● — — ● — — —
2
Terminal cover V4-T2-201 ● — — ● — — —
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-201 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-201 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Padlockable handle block V4-T2-250 — ■ — — ■ — — 2
Padlockable handle lock hasp
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-250
V4-T2-250
❏
❏
—
—
❏
❏
❏
❏
—
—
❏
❏
—
—
2
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-250 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Electrical operator V4-T2-250 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-250 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Rear connecting studs ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
V4-T2-250
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-532 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Earth leakage/ground fault protector V4-T2-235 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Drawout cassette V4-T2-258 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T2-195 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-249 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-249 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-248 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Legend 2
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
2
Note 2
1 Contact Eaton.
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-203

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Technical Data and Specifications

2
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2 UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2
Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
Circuit
240–240 380–415 480 600 690 250 23
2 Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
LGE630 3, 4 65 65 35 35 35 18 12 6 22 22
2 LGS630 3, 4 85 85 50 50 50 25 20 10 22 22

2 LGH630 3, 4 100 100 70 70 65 35 25 13 42 42

LGC630 4 3, 4 200 200 100 100 100 50 30 15 42 42
2 LGU630 4 3, 4 200 200 150 150 150 65 35 18 50 50
LGX630 4 3, 4 200 5 200 200 200 200 65 35 18 50 50
2
2 UL 489 Current-Limiting Data
Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
2 LGC 240 V/200 kA 56.4 5.873
LGC 480 V/100 kA 56.4 5.873
2 LGC 600 V/50 kA 56.4 6.690

2 LGU
LGU
240 V/200 kA
480 V/150 kA
77.7
77.7
7.320
7.320

2 LGU 600 V/65 kA 50.6 6.690

LGX 240 V/200 kA 77.7 7.320
2 LGX 480 V/200 kA 77.7 7.320
LGX 600 V/65 kA 50.6 6.690
2
2 LG 310+ Specifications
Description Specification
2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+

2
Breaker Type
Frame designation LG

2 Frames available 250 A, 400 A, 600 A

Continuous current range (A) 100–600 A
2 Ground fault pickup (A) 50–600 A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100, 150, 200
2 100% rated Yes

2
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

2 Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes

Interchangeable trip unit Yes
2 High load alarm (suffix B20) 6 Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 6 Yes
2 Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 6 Yes
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
2 Cause of trip indication Yes

2 Thru-cover accessories Yes

Notes
2 1 DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits.

2
3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at–kA.
4 Current limiting per UL 489.
5 IEC rating is 300 kA at 240 Vac.

2 6 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.

V4-T2-204 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
LG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
LG Frame
2
310+ Settings
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) Ir
250 A 400 A 600 A
2
(All 310+)
A 100 160 250 2
B 125 200 300
C 150 225 315 2
D 160 250 350
E 175 300 400
2
F 200 315 450
2
G 225 350 500
H (= In) 250 400 600 2
tr = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 2 2 2
(All 310+)
Position 2 4 4 4 2
Position 3 7 7 7
Position 4 10 10 10
2
Position 5 12 12 12
2
Position 6 15 15 15
Position 7 20 20 20 2
Position 8 24 24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x 2x 2x 2
(All 310+)
Position 2
Position 3
3x
4x
3x
4x
3x
4x
2
Position 4 5x 5x 5x 2
Position 5 6x 6x 6x
Position 6 7x 7x 7x 2
Position 7 8x 8x 8x
Position 8 10x 10x 10x
2
Position 9 12x 12x 12x
2
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x
(LS, LSG)
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) 1 Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
2
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 2 120 120 120 2
Position 3 300 300 300
Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 50 80 120 2
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 75 120 180
Position 3 100 160 240
2
Position 4 150 240 360
2
Position 5 200 320 480
Position 6 250 400 600 2
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 120 120 120 2
Position 3 300 300 300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Yes 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x,
2
(ALSI, ALSIG) 7x, 8x, 10x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 7x, 8x, 10x,
12x 12x 12x 2
Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) 2 Fixed 2.5x
(ALSI, ALSIG) 2
2
Notes
1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.

2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-205

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Dimensions and Weights

2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 LG-Frame
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2 2, 3 5.48 (139.2) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)

2 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)

2 LG-Frame
Note: TA63IL, T63IL, T632L, TA632L terminals add 1.19 inches (30.2 mm) to line or load side of LG. LTS3K or
2 LTS4K terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.1 mm) to line or load side of LG.

2.43 (61.7)
2 CL Breaker
4.06
(103.1)

2 R 0.25
(6.4) 3.16 1.92
5.58
2 (80.3) (48.8)
(141.7)

2 2.00
(50.8)
10.13
(257.3)

2
2
2 2.69
5.48
(139.2)
5.38
(68.3)
2 (136.7) Three-Pole

Approximate Shipping Weight in Lb (kg)

2
LG-Frame
2 Breaker Type Two- and Three-Pole Four-Pole
LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX 16 (7.3) 20 (9.1)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-206 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
2
5.16 4.31 3.44
(131.1) (109.5)
4.06
(87.4)
1.72
2
3.44
(103.1)
2
(87.4) (43.7)
1.72 3.98 0.86
(43.7) (101.1) (21.8)
2
5.58
5.58 2
4.73 (141.7) 4.73
(141.7)
(120.1) (120.1)
2
2
8.44
8.44
(214.4)
10.13
(257.3)
(214.4)
2
15.38
(390.7)
2
13.69
13.68
(347.5)
2
15.38

2
(347.7) (390.7)

2
4-Pole 4-Pole
2
3.97
2.75 (69.9) (100.8) 2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole 3-Pole 4.30 4-Pole 3-Pole
5.48 (139.2)
4-Pole
2.74 (69.6) (109.2)
4.55
7.22 (183.4)
3-Pole
2.74 (69.6)
2
(115.6) 5.48 (139.2)
2
7.22 (183.4)
5.43
(137.9)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-207

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Contents
2 NG-Frame (1200 Ampere)
Description Page
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes)
V4-T2-190

2 Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Product Selection Guide and Ordering
V4-T2-209

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-210
2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-213
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-214
2 Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-216
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-217
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-228
V4-T2-232
2 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-235
V4-T2-239
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
2 Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-247
2 Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-255
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
2 Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258

2
2
2 NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes)

2 Product Description
● All Eaton NG-Frame circuit
2 breakers are suitable for
reverse feed use
All NG-Frame circuit
2
●

breakers are HACR rated

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-208 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
NG Circuit Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit

NG H 3 080 39 ZG E C 2
2
Frame Rating
NG Blank=80% rated
C = 100% rated
2
Performance
Amperes
080= 800 Trip Unit Terminations 3
2
at 480 Vac
120 = 1200
S = 50 kAIC
H = 65 kAIC
33 =310+ Electronic LS
32 =310+ Electronic LSI
M =Metric tapped line/load
conductors 2
C = 100 kAIC Poles 35 =310+ Electronic LSG E =Imperial tapped line/load
U = 150 kAIC 1
K = Molded
2 = Two
36 =310+ Electronic LSIG
38 =310+ Electronic ALSI with maintenance mode
conductors 2
3 = Three
case switch 39 =310+ Electronic ALSIG with maintenance mode
4 = Four; neutral 2
0% protected
KS =Molded case switch Feature
2
Blank=No feature
7 = Four; neutral 2
100% protected
9 = Four; neutral 2
B20=High load alarm
B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip 2
B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip
0/60/100% adjustable
protection
ZG= Zone selective interlocking
2
Notes 2
1 800 A only.
2 Neutral inn left pole on GN; right pole on NG.
3 Breakers do not ship with lugs.
2
Trip units are factory installable only. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-209

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
2
Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 50 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-215.

2 Maximum
Continuous
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit with Imperial Tapped Conductors

2 Ampere
Rating Number Neutral CT
at 40 °C 12 of Poles LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG for LSG and LSIG 3
2 800 2 NGS208033E NGS208032E NGS208035E NGS208036E — — —
3
2
NGS308033E NGS308032E NGS308035E NGS308036E NGS308038E NGS308039E NGFCT120
4 NGS408033E NGS408032E NGS408035E 4 NGS408036E 4 NGS408038E NGS408039E 4 —

2 45 NGS708033E NGS708032E — — NGS708038E — —

46 NGS908033E NGS908032E — — NGS908038E — —
2 1200 6 2 NGS212033E NGS212032E NGS212035E NGS212036E — — —
3 NGS312033E NGS312032E NGS312035E NGS312036E NGS312038E NGS312039E NGFCT120
2 4 NGS412033E NGS412032E NGS412035E 4 NGS412036E 4 — NGS412039E 4 —
4
2
5
NGS712033E NGS712032E — — NGS712038E — —
46 NGS912033E NGS912032E — — NGS912038E — —

2
2 Molded Case Switches 789j
Ue Maximum 690 Vac
2 Ampere
Rating Three-Pole
Catalog
Number Four-Pole
Catalog
Number

2 800 MCS with Imperial tapped line and load conductors NGK3080KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK4080KSE
1200 MCS with Imperial tapped line and load conductors NGK3120KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK4120KSE
2 1250 MCS with Imperial tapped line and load conductors NGK3125KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK43125KSE

2 Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 °C or 50 °C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 °C labeling.

2 3 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.

4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pole; GN, neutral in left pole.

2 5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four).
7 Non-UL listed NG 1250 with 1250 ampere trip unit is also available.
2 8 For AC use only. Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes.
9 For two-pole applications, use outer poles of three-pole molded case switch.

2 j Add “M” to above catalog numbers for metric tapped line/load conductors.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-210 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Type NGH High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 65 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-215. 2
Maximum
Continuous
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit 2
2
Ampere
Rating Number Neutral CT
at 40 °C 12 of Poles LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG for LSG and LSIG 3
800 2 NGH208033E NGH208032E NGH208035E NGH208036E — — — 2
3 NGH308033E NGH308032E NGH308035E NGH308036E NGH308038E NGH308039E NGFCT120
4 NGH408033E NGH408032E NGH408035E 4 NGH408036E 4 NGH408038E NGH408039E 4 — 2
45
46
NGH708033E
NGH908033E
NGH708032E
NGH908032E
—
—
—
—
NGH708038E
NGH908038E
—
—
—
—
2
1200 2 NGH212033E NGH212032E NGH212035E NGH212036E — — — 2
3 NGH312033E NGH312032E NGH312035E NGH312036E NGH312038E NGH312039E NGFCT120
4 NGH412033E NGH412032E NGH412035E 4 NGH412036E 4 — NGH412039E 4 — 2
45
2
NGH712033E NGH712032E — — NGH712038E — —
46 NGH912033E NGH912032E — — NGH912038E — —

2
Type NGC Very High Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-215.
2
Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit 2
Continuous
Ampere
Rating Number Neutral CT 2
at 40 °C 12 of Poles LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG for LSG and LSIG 3
800 2 NGC208033E NGC208032E NGC208035E NGC208036E — — — 2
3
4
NGC308033E
NGC408033E
NGC308032E
NGC408032E
NGC308035E
NGC408035E 4
NGC308036E
NGC408036E 4
NGC308038E
NGC408038E
NGC308039E
NGC408039E 4
NGFCT120
—
2
45 NGC708033E NGC708032E — — NGC708038E — — 2
46 NGC908033E NGC908032E — — NGC908038E — —
1200 2 NGC212033E NGC212032E NGC212035E NGC212036E — — — 2
3 NGC312033E NGC312032E NGC312035E NGC312036E NGC312038E NGC312039E NGFCT120
4 NGC412033E NGC412032E NGC412035E 4 NGC412036E 4 — NGC412039E 4 — 2
4
2
5 NGC712033E NGC712032E — — NGC712038E — —
46 NGC912033E NGC912032E — — NGC912038E — —

2
Type NGU Ultra High Capacity—Ue Max. 600 Vac, 150 kA at 480 Vac 2
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-215.

Maximum Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit 2

Continuous
Ampere
Rating Number Neutral CT
2
at 40 °C 12 of Poles LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG for LSG and LSIG 3
800 3 NGU308033E NGU308032E NGU308035E NGU308036E NGU308038E NGU308039E NGFCT120
2
Notes
1 For AC use only.
2
2 NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 °C or 50 °C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 °C labeling.
3 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
2
4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pole; GN, neutral in left pole.
5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units. 2
6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four).

2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-211

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
Line and Load Terminals
2 N-Frame circuit breakers do not include terminals as standard. When copper or Cu/Al terminals are required, order by catalog number.

2 Line and Load Terminals

2
AWG Wire AWG Wire Metric
Maximum Terminal (Number of Catalog Metric Wire Catalog
Breaker Amperes Body Material Wire Type Conductors) Number 1 Range mm2 Number 1

2 Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals

700 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 (2) TA700NB1 50–240 TA700NB1M
2 1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 (3) TA1000NB1 95–185 TA1000NB1M
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0–500 (4) 120–240
2
TA1200NB1 TA1200NB1M
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (3) TA1201NB1 300–400 TA1201NB1M

2 Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals

700 Copper Cu 2/0–500 (2) T700NB1 70–240 T700NB1M
2 1000 Copper Cu 3/0–500 (3) T1000NB1 95–240 T1000NB1M
1200 Copper Cu 3/0–400 (4) T1200NB3 95–185 T1200NB3M
2
2 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Conductor Extension Kit

2
Catalog Conductor Extension Kit 4
Description Number
Catalog
Electronic portable test kit
2
MTST230V Description Number
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 Three-pole both ends Metric 5104A24G04

2 External neutral sensor (1200 A) 2 NGFCT120 Three-pole both ends English 5104A24G02
External neutral sensor (800 A) 2 NGFCT120

2 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED Keeper Nut

Not required on NG-Frame. Terminals are threaded.
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
2 Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06
Handle Extension
2 Base Mounting Hardware
Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are
available.
2 Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch. Handle Extension

2
Catalog
Base Mounting Hardware 3 Description Number
Number Catalog Single handle extension HEX5
2 of Poles Description Number
Three- and four-pole Imperial hardware: BMH5
2 0.3125–18 x 1.25
pan-head steel screws and lock washers
Interphase Barriers
The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance
Three- and four-pole Metric hardware: M8 pan-head steel screws BMH5M
2 and lock washers
between circuit breaker poles for special termination
applications. Barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that
are installed in the molded slots between the terminals.
2 Terminal Shield (Field installation only.)

2 Terminal Shield
Interphase Barriers
Catalog
Catalog
2 Description Number
Description Number
Three-pole terminal shield NTS3K
Interphase barriers 4 IPB5
2 Notes

2
1 Single terminals individually packed.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
3 Metric hardware included with breaker.

2 4 Included as standard on 100% rated 1200 A breakers only.

2
2

V4-T2-212 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles 2
in the circuit breaker.
2
NG-Frame Accessories
Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
Reference
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.
2
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-252 ● — ■ ● — ■ — 2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-252 ● — ■ ● — ■ —
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-252 ● — ■ ● — ■ — 2
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination ● — ■ ● — ■ —
2
V4-T2-252
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-252 ■ — — ■ — — —
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-253 ■ — — ■ — — —
2
External Accessories
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-212 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Interphase barriers V4-T2-212 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-250 — ■ — — ■ — — 2
Padlockable handle lock hasp
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-250
V4-T2-250
❏
❏
—
—
❏
❏
❏
❏
—
—
❏
❏
—
—
2
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-250 ● ● ● — — — — 2
Electrical operator V4-T2-250 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-257 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-250 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-532 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Drawout cassette V4-T2-258 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Handle extension V4-T2-212 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-249 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-249 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T2-249 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-248 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Marine/Naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Legend 2
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
2
Note 2
1 Contact Eaton.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-213

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Technical Data and Specifications

2
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

2 Circuit
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
220–240 380–415 690
Breaker Number
2 Type of Poles 240 (UL) Icu Ics Icu Ics 480 600 Icu Ics
NGS 1 2, 3, 4 65 85 85 50 50 50 25 20 10
2 NGH 2, 3, 4 100 100 100 70 50 65 35 25 13

2 NGC
NGU
2, 3, 4
3, 4
200
200
200
—
100
—
100
—
50
—
100
150
65
65
35
—
18
—

2
NG-Frame Digitrip Specifications
2
2 NG 310+ Specifications
Description Specification
2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+

2 Breaker Type
Frame designation NG
2 Frames available 800 A, 1200 A
Continuous current range (A) 320–1200 A
2 Ground fault pickup (A) 160–1200 A

2 Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)

100% rated
35, 65, 100, 150
Yes

2 Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
2 Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes
Interchangeable trip unit No
2 High load alarm (suffix B20) 2 Yes

2 Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 2 Yes

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 2 Yes

2 Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG

Cause of trip indication Yes
2 Thru-cover accessories No

2 Notes
1 1600 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG.
2 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-214 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
NG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
NG Frame
2
310+ Settings
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) Ir
800 A 1200 A
2
(All 310+)
A 320 500 2
B 400 600
C 450 630 2
D 500 700
E 600 800
2
F 630 900
2
G 700 1000
H (= In) 800 1200 2
tr = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 2 2
(All 310+)
Position 2 4 4 2
Position 3 6 7
Position 4 8 10
2
Position 5 10 12
2
Position 6 12 15
Position 7 14 20 2
Position 8 14 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x 2x 2
(All 310+)
Position 2
Position 3
3x
4x
3x
4x
2
Position 4 5x 5x 2
Position 5 6x 6x
Position 6 7x 7x 2
Position 7 8x 8x
Position 8 9x 9x
2
Position 9 9x 9x
2
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x
(LS, LSG)
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst
2
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1
Position 2 120 120 2
Position 3 300 300
Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 160 240 2
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 240 360
Position 3 320 480
2
Position 4 480 720
2
Position 5 640 960
Position 6 800 1200 2
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 120 120 2
Position 3 300 300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Yes 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x,
2
(ALSI, ALSIG) 8x, 10x, 18x 8x, 10x, 12x
Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) Fixed 2.5x 2.5x
2
(ALSI, ALSIG) 2

Notes
2
2
1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.

2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-215

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Dimensions and Weights

2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 NG-Frame

2 Number of Poles Width Height Depth

3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
2 4 11.13 (282.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)

2 NG-Frame

2 Front Cover Cutout Front View Three-Pole Side View

3.44
2 (87.4)
BREAKER

2 R .25
9.25
(235.0)
(6.4)
2
1.91
16.00
2 (48.5)
(406.4)
3.68

2
1.50 (93.5)
(38.1)

2
3.19

2 (81.0)
6.38 8.25 5.50
(162.1) (209.6) (139.7)
2
2 Approximate Shipping Weight in Lb (kg)

2 NG-Frame
Complete Breaker
2 Breaker Type Three-Pole Four-Pole
NGS, NGH, NGC 45 (20.4) 58 (26.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-216 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Contents
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Description Page
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158 2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-190
V4-T2-208
2
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-218 2
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-219
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-224 2
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-225
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-227 2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-228
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . .
V4-T2-232
V4-T2-235
2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
V4-T2-239
2
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244
Special Features and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-247 2
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-255
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257 2
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258
2
2
2
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) 2
Product Description
● Eaton’s RG-Frame circuit
2
breakers are available as
frame (which includes trip 2
unit), rating plug and
terminals 2
● All R-Frame circuit breakers
are suitable for reverse 2
feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-217

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Catalog Number Selection

2 This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac
2
RG Circuit Breaker With 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
2
RG H 3 250 39 ZG E C
2
2 Frame
RG Blank=80% rated
Rating

C = 100% rated (except 2500 A)

2 Performance
Amperes
160 = 1600 Trip Unit Terminations
2
at 480 Vac
200 = 2000 33 =310+ Electronic LS M =Metric tapped line/load
H = 65 kAIC
250 = 2500 32 =310+ Electronic LSI conductors
C = 100 kAIC
2 K = Molded
case switch Poles
35 =310+ Electronic LSG
36 =310+ Electronic LSIG
E =Imperial tapped line/load
conductors
38 =310+ Electronic LSI w/ Maintenance Mode W =No terminals
3 = Three
2 4 = Four
39 =310+ Electronic LSIG w/ Maintenance Mode
KS =Molded case switch
Feature
2 Blank=No feature
B20=High load alarm
2 B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG= Zone selective interlocking
2
2 RG 310+ Electronic Trip Unit

2 RT 3 250 39 ZG
2 Type Feature
RT
2
Trip Unit Blank=No feature
Amperes B20=High load alarm
33 =310+ Electronic LS
160 = 1600 32 =310+ Electronic LSI B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip
2 Poles 200 = 2000
250 = 2500
35
36
=310+ Electronic LSG
=310+ Electronic LSIG
B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG= Zone selective interlocking
3 = Three
=310+ Electronic LSI
2
38
w/ Maintenance Mode
39 =310+ Electronic LSIG
2 w/ Maintenance Mode

2 RG Circuit Breaker with OPTIM 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit

2 RGH 3 16 T92 W
2 Type Modification Suffix
RGH 65K
2 RGC 100K Amperes
Trip Function
Digitrip 610
R = Ground fault remote
RES trip
16 = 1600 T61 = LI E = 100% protection
2 Poles 20 = 2000
25 = 2500
T62 = LSI (new design 310)
RES trip unit
3 = Three T63 = LS
P = 100% prot. neut.
2 4 = Four T64 = LIG
T65 = LSG 4P RES trip unit
T66 = LSIG V3 = Electronic trip without

2 Digitrip 910
ambient temperature
marked on trip unit
T91 = LI W = w/o terms
2 T92 = LSI
T93 = LS
K = Molded case switch

T94 = LIG
2 T95 = LSG
T96 = LSIG

V4-T2-218 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Product Selection
2
70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac
2
Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-226. 2
Maximum
Continuous
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2 2
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles LS LSI LSG 3 LSIG 3 ALSI ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 4
2
1600 1 3 RGH316033E RGH316032E RGH316035E RGH316036E RGH316038E RGH316039E RGFCT160A 2
2000 3 RGH320033E RGH320032E RGH320035E RGH320036E RGH320038E RGH320039E RGFCT200A
2500 3 RGH325033E RGH325032E RGH325035E RGH325036E RGH325038E RGH325039E RGFCT250A 2
2
100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac
2
Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-226. 2
Maximum
Continuous
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
2
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles LS LSI LSG 35 LSIG 35 ALSI ALSIG 35
2
1600 1 46 RGH416033E RGH416032E — — RGH416038E — 2
2000 4 6 RGH420033E RGH420032E — — RGH420038E —
2500 46 RGH425033E RGH425032E — — RGH425038E — 2
Notes
1 For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame.
2
2 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.” 2
4 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
5 No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.”
2
RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-219

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac

2
Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac
2 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-226.

2 Maximum
Continuous
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
Ampere
2 Rating Number Neutral CT
at 40 °C 1 of Poles LS LSI LSG 3 LSIG 3 ALSI ALSIG for LSG and LSIG 4

2 1600 1 3 RGC316033E RGC316032E RGC316035E RGC316036E RGC316038E RGC316039E RGFCT160A

2000 3 RGC320033E RGC320032E RGC320035E RGC320036E RGC320038E RGC320039E RGFCT200A
2 2500 3 RGC325033E RGC325032E RGC325035E RGC325036E RGC325038E RGC325039E RGFCT250A

2
Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac, continued
2 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-226.

2 Maximum
Continuous
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2

2
Ampere
Rating Number
at 40 °C 1 of Poles LS LSI LSG 35 LSIG 35 ALSI ALSIG 35
2 1600 1 46 RGC416033E RGC416032E — — RGC416038E —
2000 46 RGC420033E RGC420032E — — RGC420038E —
2 2500 46 RGC425033E RGC425032E — — RGC425038E —

2
2 Molded Case Switches 7
Ampere Number Catalog

2
Rating of Poles Number
1600 3 RGK3160KSE

2 2000 3 RGK3200KSE
1600 4 RGK4160KSE
2 2000 4 RGK4200KSE

2
Notes
1 For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame.
2 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.

2 3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.”
4 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.

2
5 No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.”
7 Molded case switch will trip above 17,500 amperes.

2 RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-220 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs
2
Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1
Maximum L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
Digitrip RMS
Interchangeable 2
Continuous S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating Number
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
(Order as Individual
Component)
2
2
at 40 °C of Poles LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Fixed Rating Plug
Long Delay Pickup 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–I.0n 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In
Long Delay Time 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds
Short Time Range
Short Time Delay
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2
Instantaneous 2–6 x M1 and M2 — 2–6 x M1 and M2 2–6 x M1 and M2 — 2–6 x M1 and M2
Ground Fault Pickup — — — 0.25–1.0 x In 2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 Ampere Catalog 2
Ground Fault Delay — — — 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Rating Number
Type RGH with Digitrip 610 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac 2
1600 3 RGH316T61WP44 RGH316T63WP44 RGH316T62WP44 RGH316T64WP44 RGH316T65WP44 RGH316T66WP44 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100 2
1200
1250
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A125
2
Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A160 2
2000 3 RGH320T61WP49 RGH320T63WP49 RGH320T62WP49 RGH320T64WP49 RGH320T65WP49 RGH320T66WP49 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120 2
1250 RP6R20A125
1600 RP6R20A160
2
Includes 2000 A rating plug 2000 RP6R20A200
2
2500 3 RGH325T61WP53 RGH325T63WP53 RGH325T62WP53 RGH325T64WP53 RGH325T65WP53 RGH325T66WP53 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200 2
2500 RP6R25A250
Type RGC with Digitrip 610 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac 2
1600 3 800
2
RGC316T61WP44 RGC316T63WP44 RGC316T62WP44 RGC316T64WP44 RGC316T65WP44 RGC316T66WP44 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
2
1250 RP6R16A125
Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A160 2
2000 3 RGC320T61WP49 RGC320T63WP49 RGC320T62WP49 RGC320T64WP49 RGC320T65WP49 RGC320T66WP49 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120 2
1250
1600
RP6R20A125
RP6R20A160
2
Includes 2000 A rating plug 2000 RP6R20A200 2
2500 3 RGC325T61WP53 RGC325T63WP53 RGC325T62WP53 RGC325T64WP53 RGC325T65WP53 RGC325T66WP53 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200 2
Includes 2500 A rating plug 2500 RP6R25A250

Notes
2
2
1 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
2 Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup.

RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-221

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910, continued

2 Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs
Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1
2 Maximum L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
Digitrip RMS
Interchangeable
Continuous S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) Rating Plug
2 Ampere
Rating Number
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
(Order as Individual
Component)

2
at 40 °C of Poles LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Fixed Rating Plug
Long Delay Pickup 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–I.0n 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In 0.5–1.0 x In
Long Delay Time 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds 2–24 Seconds
2 Short Time Range
Short Time Delay
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x M1 and M2 — 2–6 x M1 and M2 2–6 x M1 and M2 — 2–6 x M1 and M2
2
Instantaneous
Ground Fault Pickup — — — 0.25–1.0 x In 2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 0.25–1.0 x In 2 Ampere Catalog
Ground Fault Delay — — — 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms Rating Number
2 Type RGH with Digitrip 910 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600 3 RGH316T91WP44 RGH316T93WP44 RGH316T92WP44 RGH316T94WP44 RGH316T95WP44 RGH316T96WP44 800 RP6R16A080
2 1000 RP6R16A100

2 1200
1250
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A125

2 Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A160

2000 3 RGH320T91WP49 RGH320T93WP49 RGH320T92WP49 RGH320T94WP49 RGH320T95WP49 RGH320T96WP49 1000 RP6R20A100
2 1200 RP6R20A120
1250
2
RP6R20A125
1600 RP6R20A160

2 Includes 2000 A rating plug 2000 RP6R20A200

2500 3 RGH325T91WP53 RGH325T93WP53 RGH325T92WP53 RGH325T94WP53 RGH325T95WP53 RGH325T96WP53 1600 RP6R25A160
2 2000 RP6R25A200
Includes 2500 A rating plug 2500 RP6R25A250
2 Type RGC with Digitrip 910 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600 3 800
2
RGC316T91WP44 RGC316T93WP44 RGC316T92WP44 RGC316T94WP44 RGC316T95WP44 RGC316T96WP44 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100

2 1200 RP6R16A120
1250 RP6R16A125
2 Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A160
2000 3 RGC320T91WP49 RGC320T93WP49 RGC320T92WP49 RGC320T94WP49 RGC320T95WP49 RGC320T96WP49 1000 RP6R20A100
2 1200 RP6R20A120

2 1250
1600
RP6R20A125
RP6R20A160

2 Includes 2000 A rating plug 2000 RP6R20A200

2500 3 RGC325T91WP53 RGC325T93WP53 RGC325T92WP53 RGC325T94WP53 RGC325T95WP53 RGC25T96WP53 1600 RP6R25A160
2 2000 RP6R25A200
Includes 2500 A rating plug 2500 RP6R25A250
2 Notes

2 1 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.

2 Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup.

2 RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-222 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Line and Load Terminals Base Mounting Hardware
R-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/Al terminals as standard and Supplied by customer. 2
copper only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation
is required. Must have terminals for 100% rated and or freeze Handle Extension 2
testing requirements. Included with breaker.
Additional handle extensions 2
Line and Load Terminals are available.
Maximum Terminal AWG/kcmil 2
Breaker Body Wire Wire Range/ Metric Wire Catalog Handle Extension
Amperes
Wire Terminals
Material Type Hardware Number of Conductors Range mm2 Number
Description
Catalog
Number
2
1600
1600
Aluminum
Copper
Cu/Al
Cu
Metric
Metric
500–1000 (4)
1–600 (4)
300–500
50–300
TA1600RDM 1
T1600RDM 1
Single handle
extension
HEX6 2
2000
Rear Connectors
Aluminum Cu/Al Metric 2–600 (6) 35–300 TA2000RDM 2
Wire Seal 2
2000 Copper — Metric — — The wire seal can be used to
2
B2016RDM 1

2000 Copper — Metric — — B2016RDLM 1 secure the cover on the trip

2500 Copper — Metric — — unit to prevent adjustments
2
B2500RDM 1
after settings are confirmed.

RG Rear Connector Exploded View Wire Seal 2

Conductor Securing Catalog
Conductor
(Viewed from Rear (Viewed from Front Hardware Description Number 2
of Circuit Breaker and Cut of Circuit Breaker)
Wire seal 5108A03H01
Away for Clarity) Cu Only
Terminal Notes
2
Catalog Number
T1600RDM 3
1 Order one per pole—single terminals

individually packed. 2
(For 1600 A 2 Order one TA2000RD kit per three poles.
Frame Only) Catalog number includes bus connection,
terminals and hardware for either line
2
side or load side of three-pole breaker.
OR 3 For use with 2500 A Frame. Do not order 2
separately unless for replacement
Al/Cu
Terminal
purposes. Included in breaker carton
when 2500 A frame is ordered.
2
Catalog
Number
TA1600RDM 3
RG MCCBs have metric threading on line
and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if 2
imperial threading is required.
(For 1600 A
Frame Only) 2
Rear Connector (Cu)
B2016RDM
B2016RDLM (For 100% Application) Securing Hardware
2
(For 1600 A and 2000 A Frames)
B2500RDM for 2500 A 2
TA2000RD Wire Terminal 2
Note: Order one TA2000RDM kit per three poles. Catalog number
includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or
load side of three-pole breaker. 2
Breaker Line/Load
Conductors
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-223

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
2 Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
2
RG-Frame Accessories
2 Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
2 Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)

2 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ —

Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ —
2 Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ —
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-252 — — ■ — — ■ —
2 Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-252 — — ● — — ● —
Undervoltage release mechanism — — ● — — ● —
2 External Accessories
V4-T2-253

2 Base mounting hardware V4-T2-223 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-250 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
2 Key interlock kit V4-T2-250 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
Electrical operator V4-T2-250 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Handle mechanisms V4-T2-532 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 Handle extension
Digitrip 310+ test kit
V4-T2-223
V4-T2-249
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-248 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Legend

2 ■ Applicable in indicated pole position

❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
2
2 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Catalog
2 Description Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V
2 Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01

2 External neutral sensor (2500 A) 2

External neutral sensor (2000 A) 2
RGFCT250A
RGFCT200A

2 External neutral sensor (1600 A) 2 RGFCT160A

Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication 3 —
2 Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06
2 Notes

2
1 Contact Eaton.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
3 Cause-of-trip indication LEDs integrated in RG 310+ trip units.

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-224 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
1

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 277 480 600
2
RGH 3, 4 125 — 65 50
2
RGC 3, 4 200 — 100 65
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz) 2
Type of Poles 240 415 690
RGH 3, 4 2
Icu
Ics
135
100
70
50
25
13
2
RGC 3, 4 2
Icu 200 100 35
Ics 100 50 18 2
2
RG 310+ Specifications
Description Specification
2
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
2
Breaker Type
Frame designation RG 2
Frames available 1600 A, 2000 A, 2500 A
Continuous current range (A) 800–2500 A 2
Ground fault pickup (A)
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
200–1200 A
65, 100
2
100% rated Yes 2
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG 2
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes
Interchangeable trip unit Yes
2
High load alarm (suffix B20) 2 Yes
2
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 2 Yes
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 2 Yes 2
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Cause of trip indication Yes 2
Thru-cover accessories No
2
Notes
1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2
See Page V4-T2-217 for trip unit specifications.
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-225

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

RG 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2 RG Frame

2 310+ Settings
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) Ir
1600 A 2000 A 2500 A

(All 310+)
2 A 800 1000 1600
B 900 1200 1700
2 C 1000 1400 1800
D 1100 1600 2000
2 E 1200 1700 2100

2 F 1400 1800 2200

G 1500 1900 2400
2 H (= In) 1600 2000 2500
tr = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 2 2 2
2 (All 310+)
Position 2 4 4 4
Position 3 7 7 7
2 Position 4 10 10 10

2 Position 5 12 12 12
Position 6 15 15 15
2 Position 7 20 20 20
Position 8 24 24 24
2 Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x 2x 2x
(All 310+)
2 Position 2
Position 3
3x
4x
3x
4x
2x
2x

2 Position 4 5x 5x 3x
Position 5 6x 6x 4x
2 Position 6 7x 7x 5x
Position 7 8x 8x 6x
2 Position 8 8x 8x 6x

2 Position 9 9x 9x 6x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x
2 (LS, LSG)
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1
2 Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
2 Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 200 200 200
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 400 400 400
2 Position 3 600 600 600

2 Position 4 800 800 800

Position 5 1000 1000 1000
2 Position 6 1200 1200 1200
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
2 (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
2 Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Yes 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x,
(ALSI, ALSIG) 7x, 8x, 11x 7x, 8x, 9x 7x
2 Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) Fixed 2.5x 2.5x 2.5x
(ALSI, ALSIG) 2
2 Notes

2
1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.

2
2

V4-T2-226 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
RG-Frame 2
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth 2
3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
4 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7) 2
Front Cover Cutout Front View 3-Pole Side View 2
CL
2
2.25 (57.2)
14.50 Breaker
(368.3)
7.25
0.16 R
(4.1)
(184.2)
2
2
8.25
(209.6) .44 R
7.75 (11.2)
5.10 (196.9)

2
(129.5)
CL 16.00 13.00
9.70 (330.2)
(406.4) Tee
(246.4) Handle
15.00
(381.0)
Connectors
May Be
Rotated 90
2
2
6.57
4 Holes
0.44 Dia.
(11.2)
(166.9)
13.13
2
(333.5) 15.50
(393.7)
9.00
(228.6)
6.75
(171.5) 2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lb (kg) 2
RG-Frame
2
Complete Breaker
Breaker Number of Poles 2
Type Three-Pole Four-Pole
1600 Amperes 2
RGH, RGC 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2000 Amperes 2
RGH, RGC
2500 Amperes
102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2
RGH, RGC 135 (61.2) 182 (82.6) 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-227

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Contents
2 Motor Circuit 480 Vac, Protectors
Description Page
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-190
V4-T2-208
2 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
V4-T2-217

Product Selection Guide and Ordering

2 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-229
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-232
2 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . V4-T2-235
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
2 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244
2 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-247
V4-T2-255
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
2 Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258

2
2 Motor Circuit Protectors
(MCP)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-228 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum
2
1

Motor
Full Load MCP MCP
Continuous Cam Current Trip Catalog 2
Amperes Setting Amperes 2 Setting 3 Number
3 A 0.69 –0.91 9 HMCPE003A0C 2
B 1.1–1.3 15
C 1.6–1.7 21 2
D
E
2.0–2.2
2.3–2.5
27
30
2
F 2.6– 2.8 33 2
7 A 1.5–2.0 21 HMCPE007C0C
B 2.6–3.1 35 2
C 3.7–3.9 49
D 4.8–5.2 63
2
E 5.3–5.7 70
2
F 5.8–6.1 77
15 A 3.4–4.5 45 HMCPE015E0C 2
B 5.7–6.8 75
C 8.0–9.1 105 2
D 10.4–11.4 135
E 11.5–12.6 150
2
F 12.7–13.0 165
2
30 A 3.9–9.1 90 HMCPE030H1C
B 11.5–13.7 150 2
C 16.1–18.3 210
D 20.7–22.9 270 2
E
F
23.0–25.2
25.3–26.1
300
330
2
Notes 2
1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.
2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown.

Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2
3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-229

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum, continued 1

2 Motor
Full Load MCP MCP
2 Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Current
Amperes 2
Trip
Setting 3
Catalog
Number

2 50 A 11.5–15.2 150 HMCPE050K2C

B 19.2–22.9 250
2 C 26.9–30.6 350
D 34.6–38.3 450
2 E 38.4–42.1 500

2 F 42.2–43.5 550
70 A 16.1–30.6 210 HMCPE070M2C
2 B 26.9–32.2 350
C 37.6–42.9 490
2 D 48.4–53.7 630

2 E
F
53.8–59.1
59.2–60.9
700
770

2 100 A 23.0–30.6 300 HMCPE100R3C

B 38.4–46.0 500
2 C 53.8–61.4 700
D 69.2–76.8 900
2 E 76.9–84.5 1000

2 F 84.6–87.0 1100
100 A 38.4–46.0 500 HMCPE100T3C
2 B 57.6–65.2 750
C 76.9–84.5 1000
2 D 4 1250
E 1375
2
4

F 4 1500

2
2 JG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1
MCP MCP

2 Continuous
Amperes
Trip Range
(Amperes)
Catalog
Number

2 250 500–1000
625–1250
HMCPJ250D5L
HMCPJ250F5L

2 750–1500 HMCPJ250G5L
875–1750 HMCPJ250J5L
2 1000–2000 HMCPJ250K5L
1125–2250 HMCPJ250L5L
2 1250–2500 HMCPJ250W5L

2 Notes
1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.

2 2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown.

Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.

2 4 Settings above 10 x I are for special applications. Where the ampere rating of the disconnecting means cannot be
n
less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-230 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
LG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1
MCP MCP
2
Continuous Trip Range Catalog
Amperes (Amperes) Number 2
600 1250–2500 HMCPL600L6G
1500–3000 HMCPL600N6G 2
1750–3500
2000–4000
HMCPL600R6G
HMCPL600X6G
2
2250–4500 HMCPL600Y6G 2
2500–5000 HMCPL600P6G
3000–6000 HMCPL600M6G 2
Notes
1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters. 2
800 and 1200 ampere, 600 Vac maximum motor circuit protectors are available as Series C HMCP product.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-231

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Contents
2 Series G Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Description Page
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-190
V4-T2-208
2 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-217
V4-T2-228
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-233
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-234
2 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . V4-T2-235
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
2 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244
2 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-247
V4-T2-255
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
2 Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258

2
2 Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
2 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications
● Eliminates need for ● Can be used with ● Phase unbalance ● IEC 60947-2
2 separate overload relay contactor to eliminate need protection ● UL 489 100% rated
for overload relay and still ● Phase loss protection ● UL 508
2 create manual motor
control
● Hot trip/cold trip ● CSA C22.2
● High load alarm
2 ● Meets requirement for
motor branch protection,
● Pre-detection trip relay
including: option
2 ● Disconnecting means
● Class 10, 15, 20, 30
protection
2 Branch circuit short
●

circuit protection

2 Overload protection
●

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-232 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Product Selection
2
JGMP Catalog Numbers
35 kAIC 65 kAIC
2
Continuous Amperes
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
50
100
JGMPS050G
JGMPS100G
JGMPH050G
JGMPH100G
2
160 JGMPS160G JGMPH160G 2
250 JGMPS250G JGMPH250G
2
JGMP FLA le Dial Setting 2
Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H
50 20 20 25 30 32 40 45 50 2
100
160
40
63
45
80
50
90
63
100
70
110
80
125
90
150
100
160
2
250 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250 2
2
LGMP Catalog Numbers
50 kAIC 65 kAIC 2
Catalog Catalog
Continuous Amperes Number Number
2
250 LGMPS250G LGMPH250G
400 LGMPS400G LGMPH400G 2
600 LGMPS600G LGMPH600G
630 1 LGMPS630G LGMPH630G
2
2
LGMP FLA le Dial Setting
Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H
2
250 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250 2
400 160 200 225 250 300 315 350 400
600 250 300 315 350 400 450 500 600 2
630 250 300 315 350 400 500 600 630
2
1

Notes
1 630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.

For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02.

2
For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-410.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-233

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Technical Data and Specifications

2
2
JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
Maximum Rated Current—250 A

2 Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz

Breaker Type
JGMPS JGMPH

2 IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac I cu 85 100

I cs 85 100
2 380–415 Vac I cu 40 70
I cs 40 70
2 660–690 Vac I cu 12 14

2 NEMA UL 489 240 Vac

I cs 6
85
7
100

2 480 Vac 35 65
600 Vac 25 35
2 Number of poles 3 3
Ampere range 50–250 50 –250
2
2 LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range

2 Maximum Rated Current—630 A 1

Breaker Type

2 Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz

IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac I cu
LGMPS
85
LGMPH
100

2 I cs 85 100
380–415 Vac I cu 50 70
2 I cs 50 53
660–690 Vac I cu 20 25
2 I cs 10 13

2 NEMA UL 489 240 Vac 85 100

480 Vac 50 65
2 600 Vac 25 35
Number of poles 3 3
2 Ampere range 250–630 1 250 –630 1

2 Notes
1 630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.

2 For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-234 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Contents
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
Description Page
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158 2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-190
V4-T2-208
2
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-217
V4-T2-228 2
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-232
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module 2
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-236
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-237 2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244
2
Special Features and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-247
V4-T2-255 2
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
Clockwise from Left:
JG, LG, EG MCCBs Shown with Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258 2
Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module
2
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module 2
Product Description 2
Eaton offers three- and four- The module is completely self UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
pole 30 mA ground fault contained, including a current 2
(earth leakage) protection sensor, relay and power
modules for Series G E-, J-
and L-frame molded case
supply inside the device.
Current pickup settings are
2
circuit breakers (MCCBs). selectable from 0.03 to 10
Separate UL listed and IEC amperes for all devices, 2
rated devices are available for except for the UL listed
each frame. module, for which settings 2
are selectable from 0.03 to 30
The modules are bottom
mounted and are available for
amperes. Time delays are
also selectable from
2
each frame circuits up to: Instantaneous to 1.0 second
● EG: 125 amperes for pickup settings of 0.10 2
amperes and above. The
JG: 150 (UL), 160 (IEC)
2
●
current pickup setting of
or 250 amperes 0.03 amperes defaults to an
LG: 400, 600 (UL)
2
●
Instantaneous time setting
or 630 (IEC) amperes IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
regardless of the time dial’s
position.
2
Two alarm contacts are
included with each device,
which can be wired externally
2
for remote indication. Both of
these are also indicated by an 2
LED on the front of the
device: 2
1. 50% pre-trip: alarms
when the earth leakage 2
current reaches 50% of
the set pickup setting 2
value.
2. 100% after trip: alarms 2
when the breaker
reaches the set pickup 2
setting value and the
breaker trips. 2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-235

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Product Selection
2
2 EG-Frame EG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, LG-Frame LG-Frame Ground Fault Modules,
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac, UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac,
50/60 Hz) 1 50/60 Hz)
2 Ampere Number Catalog Ampere Number Catalog
Rating of Poles Number Rating of Poles Number
2 125 3 ELEBN3125G 400 3 ELLBN3400W
125 4 400 4
2
ELEBN4125G ELLBN4400W
600 3 ELLBN3600W

2 600 4 ELLBN4600W

2 EG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules, LG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules,

IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac, IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac,
2 50/60 Hz) 50/60 Hz)
Ampere Number Catalog Ampere Number Catalog
2 Rating of Poles Number Rating of Poles Number
125 3 ELEBE3125G 400 3 ELLBE3400W
2 125 4 ELEBE4125G 400 4 ELLBE4400W
630 3 ELLBE3630W
2 JG-Frame Ground Fault Modules, 630 4 ELLBE4630W
JG-Frame
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac,
2 50/60 Hz)
Ampere Number Catalog
2 Rating of Poles Number
150 3 ELJBN3150W
2 150 4 ELJBN4150W

2 250 3 ELJBN3250W
250 4 ELJBN4250W

2
JG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules,
2 IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
2 Ampere Number Catalog
Rating of Poles Number

2 160 3 ELJBE3160W
160 4 ELJBE4160W
2 250 3 ELJBE3250W

2 250 4 ELJBE4250W

Note
2 1 Shunt trip and undervoltage release cannot be used in an EG

breaker connected to an earth leakage module.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-236 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
Assembled Breaker and Earth Leakage Module 2
2
Frame Height Width Depth
Three-Pole
EG 10.25 (260.3) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) 2
JG 11.25 (285.8) 4.13 (104.9) 3.57 (90.7)
LG 15.38 (390.7) 5.48 (139.2) 4.06 (103.1) 2
Four-Pole
EG 10.25 (260.3) 4.00 (101.6) 2.98 (75.8)
2
JG 11.25 (285.8) 5.50 (139.7) 3.57 (90.7)
2
LG 15.38 (390.7) 7.23 (183.6) 4.06 (103.1)

2
EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
10.26
2
(260.6)
4.75
(120.6)
0.55 (14.0) 2
1.49
2
1.00 (37.8)
2
0.50 3.98
(12.7) (25.4) (101.1)

2
3-Pole
1.00 2.98
(25.4) (75.7)

1.50 0.50
2.00
(50.8) 2
(38.1) (12.7)
2
4.78
(121.4) 0.70 (17.8)
2
8.59
(218.2)
0.90 (22.9) 2
0.35 (8.9)
2
3.01 2
0.09 (76.5)
(2.29)
2.75
3.17
(80.5)
2
(69.9)
0.78 2
(19.8)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-237

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module

2
4-Pole
2 5.50 (139.7)
3-Pole
5.50
2
4.13 (104.9)
(139.7) 2.05
0.69
(52.1)
1.38 (17.5) 2.06 3.57 1.25
2 (35.1) (52.3) (90.7) (31.8) 0.63
(16.0)

2 R 0.19
1.88
(47.8) 6.97
3.92 3.92 (177.0)
2
5.50 (4.8)
(99.6) (139.7) (99.6) 4.93
0.28 (125.2)
2
7.00 11.25
(7.1)
(177.8) (285.8)

2 11.25
(285.8)
0.50
(139.7)
1.06
(26.9)

2
2 4.25
3.37
(85.6)
RESET

(108.0)
2 TEST

2
2.05
2 3.31
(84.1) 3.69
3.57
(90.7)
(52.1)
4.09
(93.7) (103.9)
2 4.78
3.81
(96.8)
(121.4)
2
LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
2
5.16 4.31 3.44
2 (131.1) (109.5)
4.06
(87.4)
3.44 1.72
(103.1)
2 (87.4)
1.72 3.98
(43.7)
0.86
(43.7) (101.1) (21.8)
2
2 5.58
5.58
4.73
4.73 (141.7)
(141.7)
2 (120.1) (120.1)

2
8.44
2 8.44
(214.4)
10.13
(257.3)
(214.4)

2 15.38
(390.7)

2 13.69 15.38
13.68
(347.5)
(347.7) (390.7)
2
2
4-Pole 3.97 4-Pole
2 3-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
(100.8)
4.30 4-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
5.48 (139.2) 2.74 (69.6) (109.2) 7.22 (183.4) 2.74 (69.6)
2 4-Pole 4.55 3-Pole
7.22 (183.4) (115.6) 5.48 (139.2)
2 5.43
(137.9)

V4-T2-238 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Contents
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules
Description Page
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158 2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-190
V4-T2-208
2
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-217
V4-T2-228 2
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-232
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . V4-T2-235 2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-240 2
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-241
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
V4-T2-241 2
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-244
V4-T2-247 2
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-255
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257 2
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258
2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module 2
Product Overview Product Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications 2
Power demand continues The current-limiting breaker Superior system protection: ● IEC 60947-2
to grow in new and existing modules use a unique contact
● Auto reset improves
● UL 489 2
facilities. To meet increased design to enhance the ● CSA C22.2
system uptime and
demand, larger utility
supplies, spot networks and
system protection similar to
that of the circuit breaker. eliminates the need for 2
finding replacement parts
large facility transformers
are installed. The increased
When high short-circuit
current is flowing through the ● No fuses to replace, 2
capacity of the electrical contacts of these modules, reducing the overall cost of
source results in increased the design results in very high ownership and the waste 2
fault currents in excess interrupting capacities and created by fuses
of 100 kA short-circuit
protection. Eaton
improved current-limiting
characteristics.
● Overloads, by using inverse 2
time current tripping
manufactures non-fused
current-limiting modules with Application Description
characteristics of the
molded-case circuit
2
interrupting capacities up to High-performance breakers breaker
200 kA at 600 Vac or 70 kA at are most commonly applied ● Low-level short circuits, by 2
690 Vac. Unlike fused current when very high fault levels using instantaneous and/or
limiters with a one-time use, are available and with short-time delay tripping 2
a current limiter module applications where the characteristics of the
provides an automatic reset
of the module after a short-
current-limiting capability is
used upstream of the final
molded-case circuit 2
breaker
circuit event. Resetting the
molded-case circuit breaker is
load to limit current. Typical
loads include lighting, power
● High-level short circuits, by 2
using ultra-high-speed,
the only action required to distribution, and motor
restore critical power to the control applications.
blow-apart contacts of the
current-limiting module in
2
system; there is no time
wasted with sourcing the
series with the circuit
breaker contacts 2
correct replacement fuses
Let-through currents, by
2
●
or module to bring system
back online. improved opening speed of
the contacts, the resultant
rapid rise of arc voltage 2
introduces impedance into
the system 2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-239

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Product Selection
2
2 Series G High Performance Family Offering

2 480 Vac 600 Vac

415 Vac (IEC) 690 Vac (IEC)
Type Product Amperes (UL) (UL) Icu Ics Icu Ics
2 EGC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 15–125 100 35 1 100 100 — —
With limiter 15–100 150 100 1 150 150 — —
2 JG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 70–250 200 50 200 200 18 14

2 With limiter 70–225 200 200 200 150 70 18

JG 3P electronic Breaker only 20–250 200 50 200 200 18 14
2 With limiter 100–250 200 200 200 150 70 18
LG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 250–600 200 65 200 200 35 18
2 LG 3P electronic Breaker only 100–600 200 65 200 200 35 18

2
EG IC Rating—150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
2 EG-Frame
UL Listed
(NEMA/IEC Rated) Breaker with Breaker with
2 Base Molded Case
Circuit Breaker
Line Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Load Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Line and Load
Terminations Included 2
Interphase Barrier
Included for Limiter

2 EGC3015FFG EGC3015FFGQ01 EGC3015FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK

EGC3016FFG EGC3016FFGQ01 EGC3016FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
2 EGC3020FFG EGC3020FFGQ01 EGC3020FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK

2 EGC3025FFG
EGC3030FFG
EGC3025FFGQ01
EGC3030FFGQ01
EGC3025FFGQ02
EGC3030FFGQ02
T125EF
T125EF
EIPBSK
EIPBSK

2 EGC3032FFG EGC3032FFGQ01 EGC3032FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK

EGC3035FFG EGC3035FFGQ01 EGC3035FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
2 EGC3040FFG EGC3040FFGQ01 EGC3040FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK

2
EGC3045FFG EGC3045FFGQ01 EGC3045FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3050FFG EGC3050FFGQ01 EGC3050FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK

2 EGC3060FFG EGC3060FFGQ01 EGC3060FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK

EGC3063FFG EGC3063FFGQ01 EGC3063FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
2 EGC3070FFG EGC3070FFGQ01 EGC3070FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3080FFG EGC3080FFGQ01 EGC3080FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
2 EGC3090FFG EGC3090FFGQ01 EGC3090FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK

2 EGC3100FFG EGC3100FFGQ01 EGC3100FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK

Notes
2 1 600Y/347 V.
2 Two interphase barriers included on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase barriers included on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker

2 (2) load end of limiter.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-240 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489 Current-Limiting Data
Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
2
EGC…Q 240 V/150 kA 21.80 0.277 2
EGC…Q 480 V/150 kA 21.80 0.277
EGC…Q 600 V/100 kA 22.60 0.387 2
2
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
Assembled Breaker and Current-Limiting Module 2
2
Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lb (kg)
EG 9.66 (245.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) 2.91 (1.32)
HMCP 9.66 (245.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) 4.18 (1.90) 2
EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module 2
4.17
9.66
(245.4)
2
(105.9)
0.56
(14.2) 3.61 2
(91.7)
2
2
1.00

3.00
(25.4) 0.50
1.00 (12.7)
2
(76.2)
1.00
(25.4)
2
(25.4)
2
3.20 2
(81.3)
4.17
(105.9)
2
2
2
2.75 0.09
(69.9) (2.3)
2
2
0.78
(19.8) 2
0.41
(10.4) 2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-241

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

JG IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac and 70 kAIC at 690 Vac

2 JG Frame
UL Listed, IEC Rated UL Listed, IEC Rated IEC Rated Breaker IEC Rated Breaker

2 Ampere
Rating
Magnetic
Range
Breaker With Line Side
Mounted Current Limiter 1
Breaker With Load Side
Mounted Current Limiter 2
With Line Side Mounted
Current Limiter 1
With Load Side Mounted
Current Limiter 2

2 70 350–700
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic
JGH3070FAGQ01 JGH3070FAGQ02
Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic
— —

2 90 450–900 JGH3090FAGQ01 JGH3090FAGQ02 — —

100 500–1000 JGH3100FAGQ01 JGH3100FAGQ02 JGH3100AAGQ01 JGH3100AAGQ02
2 125 625–1250 JGH3125FAGQ01 JGH3125FAGQ02 JGH3125AAGQ01 JGH3125AAGQ02
150 750–1550 JGH3150FAGQ01 JGH3150FAGQ02 — —
2 160 800–1600 — — JGH3160AAGQ01 JGH3160AAGQ02

2 175 875–1750 JGH3175FAGQ01 JGH3175FAGQ02 — —

200 1000–2000 JGH3200FAGQ01 JGH3200FAGQ02 JGH3200AAGQ01 JGH3200AAGQ02

2 225 1125–2250 JGH3225FAGQ01 JGH3225FAGQ02 — —

Electronic Trip LS
2 250 — JGH325033GQ01 JGH325033GQ02 — —

2
Electronic Trip LSI
250 — JGH325032GQ01 JGH325032GQ02 — —

2 Electronic Trip LSG

250 — JGH325035GQ01 JGH325035GQ02 — —
2 Electronic Trip LSIG
250 — JGH325036GQ01 JGH325036GQ02 — —
2
Series G HMCP
2 Ampere Motor Circuit Protector with Breaker with Load Side
Rating Line Side Mounted Current Limiter Mounted Current Limiter
2 250 HMCPJ250D5LQ01 HMCPJ250D5LQ02

2 250
250
HMCPJ250F5LQ01
HMCPJ250G5LQ01
HMCPJ250F5LQ02
HMCPJ250G5LQ02

2 250 HMCPJ250J5LQ01 HMCPJ250J5LQ02

250 HMCPJ250K5LQ01 HMCPJ250K5LQ02
2 250 HMCPJ250L5LQ01 HMCPJ250L5LQ02

2 Line and Load Terminals

2
Maximum Terminal AWG Wire
Breaker Body Metric Wire Range/ Number Catalog
Amperes Material Wire Type Range mm2 of Conductors Number
2 Standard Pressure Type Terminals
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 3
2
Notes

2 1 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJIPBK.
2 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter.
3 Line and load terminals included with products listed above.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-242 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489 Current-Limiting Data
Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S) 2
JGH…Q 240 V/200 kA 48.60 2.47
2
JGH…Q 480 V/200 kA 48.60 2.47
JGH…Q 600 V/200 kA 48.60 2.47 2
2
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
Assembled Breaker and Current-Limiting Module 2
Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lb (kg)
JG + limiter 13.06 (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) 9.87 (4.48) 2
HMCP 13.06 (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) 9.87 (4.48)
2
JG-Frame With Current Limiter Module 2
2
2
4.12 4.13
(104.6) (104.9) 2
2
2
2
13.06
(331.7)
2
2
2
4.41
(112.0)
3.44
2
2
3.34 (87.4)
(84.8)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-243

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Contents
2 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination
Description Page
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-190
V4-T2-208
2 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-217
V4-T2-228
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-232
2 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . V4-T2-235
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
2 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-245
V4-T2-246
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-246
V4-T2-247
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-255
2 Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258
2
2 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination
2 Product Description Features, Benefits and
Eaton offers high-magnetic Functions
2 withstand molded case circuit Eaton’s new LHH and NHH For overcurrents protected All other overcurrent
breakers, specifically designed molded case circuit breakers by circuit breakers on the protective devices within
2 for critical operations and
selective coordination
are furnished with a higher
level of magnetic pickup or
load-side of the LHH or NHH,
only the effected load-side
these systems shall remain
closed. Similarly, backup
2 requirements. The high-
magnetic withstand LHH
electronic instantaneous
settings as indicated in
circuit breaker will open,
while the line-side LHH
power system designs of
a critical nature that are not
and NHH frames continue table on Page V4-T2-246. and/or NHH circuit breakers code mandated may also
2 the legacy of circuit breaker These higher levels of remain closed, thus providing require overcurrent protective
innovation for which Eaton magnetic pickup and continuity of power to the devices to be selectively
2 is recognized throughout the
world. The LHH and NHH
electronic instantaneous other critical loads supplied
by the LHH or NHH circuit
coordinated as much as
practicable to provide a higher
values in turn allow the
2 breakers are equipped with
125 to 400 ampere trip units
system designer to obtain
selective coordination at
breakers. level of uptime.

with high-magnetic capability. Benefits of Using the LHH

2 This design enables the
fault current levels up to
these higher ratings. and NHH Molded Case
breakers to withstand up Greater values of selective Circuit Breakers
2 to 90 times rated current coordination are available Customer expectations and
before opening under short- based on manufacturer codes are driving product
2 circuit conditions. tested combinations using development to protect
customers’ critical
the LHH and NHH as line-
The LHH and NHH circuit
2 breakers incorporate a higher
side breakers and standard
breakers as load-side devices.
operations. NEC® 2005
and 2008 requires circuits
level of instantaneous pickup, with elevators, emergency
Refer to IA01200002E to
2 thus allowing for higher
current levels of selective
determine the maximum systems, legally required
fault values that selective standby systems, health care
2 coordination. Standard
molded case circuit breakers
coordination achieves. When essential systems and critical
the line-side and load-side operation power systems to
typically are furnished with a
2 magnetic pickup or electronic
molded case circuit breaker
trip ratings are chosen to
be selectively coordinated.
Simply stated, only the
instantaneous adjustment or closest protective device
2 instantaneous override set at
coordinate in the overload
range, they also can be directly protecting the
10 times (10x) the continuous circuit having an overcurrent
selectively coordinated in
2 trip rating.
the fault range up to the (overload or fault) condition
values listed in the table should open.
2 on Page V4-T2-246 or
IA01200002E.
2
2

V4-T2-244 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Product Selection
2
Proven Technology
and Performance
LHH LHH and NHH Catalog Numbers 2
The LHH is based on the
Series G L-Frame circuit
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
LSI Electronic
Trip Unit 2
breaker, sharing the same
Ampere
small footprint and field-fit
accessories as the L-Frame
Rating LHH Frame NHH Frame 2
breaker. The NHH is based 125 LHH3125FFG —
on the Series G N-Frame 150 LHH3150FFG NHH3150T52X15 2
circuit breaker and shares
the same footprint and
175
200
LHH3175FFG
LHH3200FFG
NHH3175T52X15
NHH3200T52X15
2
accessories as the N-Frame
breaker. NHH accessories
must be factory installed.
225 LHH3225FFG NHH3225T52X15 2
250 LHH3250FFG NHH3250T52X15
The LHH incorporates a 300 LHH3300FFG NHH3300T52X15 2
thermal-magnetic trip unit 350 LHH3350FFG NHH3350T52X15
with fixed thermal and
400 LHH3400FFG —
2
fixed magnetic settings.
The NHH has an OPTIM™
electronic trip unit with
2
LSI adjustment capabilities.
The instantaneous setting is 2
adjustable from 1000–4000 A
or may be turned off to 2
default to the frame override
of 14,000 A. A hand-held
OPTIMizer must be used
2
with the NHH to adjust
short-time delay and 2
instantaneous, however,
the long delay pickup is fixed 2
and cannot be adjusted.
The LHH and NHH
2
breakers are available in
Eaton’s panelboards and 2
switchboards.
Standards and Certifications
2
● UL 2
● CSA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-245

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions

2 ● Three-pole Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

●

● 125–400 ampere LHH Dimensions

2 ● 150–350 ampere NHH

Description Height Width Depth
Weight in
Lb (kg)
● Trip units:
2 ● LHH—thermal-magnetic LHH 10.13 (257.3) 5.48 (139.2) 4.09 (103.9) 12.36 (5.6)
● NHH—LSI electronic trip unit NHH 16.00 (406.4) 8.25 (209.5) 5.50 (139.7) 46.80 (21.2)

2 ● No rating plugs required

● Factory-sealed breakers L-Frame
2 ● LHH uses same internal and external accessories
as standard Series G L-Frame circuit breaker 2.43 (61.7)
4.06
2 ● NHH uses same internal and external accessories R 0.25
(6.4)
CL Breaker
3.16
(103.1)
as standard Series G N-Frame circuit breaker (80.3) 5.58
2 LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics
2.00 (141.7)
10.13
(50.8) (257.3)
2 Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz
1.92
(48.8)

2 Breaker Type 2.69

(68.3) 5.38
5.48
(139.2)
Description LHH NHH (136.7) Three-Pole
2 Max. rated current (amperes) 400 350
NEMA UL 489 N-Frame
2 240 Vac 100 100 Front Cover Cutout Front View Three-Pole Side View

2 480 Vac 65 65 3.44

(87.4)
600 Vac 35 35 R 0.25 CL
Breaker
2 250 Vac 42 — (6.4)
1.91
(48.5)
9.25
(235.0)
IEC 60947-2 1.50
2 220 Vac 100 100
(38.1) 16.00
(406.4)
415 Vac 70 70
2 690 Vac 25 25 3.68
(93.5)
2 125/250 Vdc 22 — 6.38
(162.1)
3.19
(81.0)
8.25
(209.6)
5.50
(139.7)
Number of poles 3 3
2 Ampere range 125–400 A 150–350 A

2 Continuous Current Ratings

2 Continuous
Current Magnetic
Continuous
Current Instantaneous
Continuous
Current Short Delay
Rating (Ir) Trip Point Multiplier Trip Point Multiplier Pickup
2 125 A 2500 A 20x — — —

2 150 A
175 A
2500 A
4000 A
16x
22x
14,000 A
14,000 A
93x
80x
225–1200 A
260–1400 A

2 200 A 4000 A 20x 14,000 A 70x 300–1600 A

225 A 6000 A 26x 14,000 A 62x 338–1800 A
2 250 A 6000 A 24x 14,000 A 56x 375–2000 A
300 A 6000 A 20x 14,000 A 47x 450–2400 A
2 350 A 6000 A 17x 14,000 A 40x 525–2800 A

2 400 A 6000 A 15x — — —

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-246 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Contents
Description Page
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158 2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-190
V4-T2-208
2
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-217
V4-T2-228 2
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-232
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . V4-T2-235 2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for 2
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244
Special Features and Accessories
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-249
2
External Accessories and Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-250
V4-T2-252 2
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-255
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257 2
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258
2
Special Features and Accessories 2
Eaton’s molded case circuit
breakers are designed to
In low-voltage distribution
systems, there are many
Special Calibration
Special non-UL listed
Calibrations and Treatment
2
Frame
provide circuit protection for varied applications of molded
low-voltage distribution case circuit breakers.
calibrations are available for
certain ambient temperatures
Description EG JG LG NG RG
2
systems. They are described Eaton offers the most Special ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
other than 40 °C and for
by NEMA as, “... a device for comprehensive family of frequencies other than
calibration
2
closing and interrupting a molded case circuit breakers 50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced Moisture- ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
circuit between separable
contacts under both normal
in the industry. interrupting ratings will apply fungus
treatment 2
This section of circuit for 400 Hz applications.
and abnormal conditions,”
and furthermore as, “... a breakers includes: ● Add suffix H01 to 2
breaker assembled as an breaker catalog number
Thermal-magnetic trip
2
●

integral unit in a supporting breakers for 400 Hz rating

and enclosing housing of
Electronic rms trip 50 ºC Calibration
2
●
insulating material.” The
breakers Note: Breakers equipped with
National Electrical Code
Molded case switches electronic trip units can operate
2
●
(NEC) describes them as, “A
● Motor circuit protectors reliably in ambient temperatures
device designed to open and of 50 °C. Add suffix “V3” to NG
close a circuit by non- Current-limiting breakers
2
●
MCCBs to remove standard
automatic means, and to ● Special application 40 °C labeling.
open the circuit automatically
on a predetermined overload
breakers
Add suffix “V” to catalog 2
of current, without injury to Modified Breakers number for complete
itself when properly applied
within its rating.”
Eaton breakers can be ordered thermal-magnetic breaker 2
with internal accessories when ordering listed ampere
So designed, Eaton circuit installed. These modified ratings for breakers to be
used in 50 ºC ambients. 50 ºC
2
breakers protect conductors breakers will be subject to an
against overloads and addition charge. ambient MCCBs are not
UL listed. 2
conductors and connected
apparatus, such as motors
and motor starters, against
Contact Eaton for availability. 2
2
short circuits.

2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-247

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Standards and Certifications

2 Moisture-Fungus Treatment UL 489 Supplement SA Molded case circuit breakers Conformance with these
2 All Eaton circuit breaker cases
are molded from glass-
applies to vessels over 65 feet
(19.8m) in length.
are designed to conform with
the following standards:
standards satisfies most local
and international codes,
assuming user acceptability
2 polyester, which does not
support the growth of fungus.
Requirements include 40 °C
ambient calibration, special
● Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., Standard UL 489,
and simplified application.
Any parts that are susceptible
2 to the growth of fungus will
labeling, and no use of
aluminum conductors or
molded case circuit
breakers and circuit
Molded case circuit breakers
equal or exceed Federal
require special treatment. terminals. (No 50 °C.) breaker enclosures Specification Classification
2 Order by description. ● National Electrical W-C-375b requirements for
● Add suffix H08 the particular class associated
Manufacturers Association
2 ● Add suffix J01 to breaker Or you can choose to add (NEMA) Standards with the circuit breaker frame
catalog number 50ºC ambient but then there Publication No. AB1-1993, being considered.
2 Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers
is no “UL” mark. molded case circuit Open breakers do not have
breakers service entrance ratings.
Add suffix VH08
2
●
The circuit breakers may be ● Australian Standard AS Service entrance rating is part
ordered with freeze testing. UL 489 Supplement SB 2184, molded case circuit of the enclosure.
This option uses special
2 lubrication and mechanical
requires partial 50 °C ambient
calibration, vibration testing, ●
breakers
British Standards Institution
operation is verified at –40 °C.
2 ● Add suffix F01 to catalog
special nameplating and no
use of aluminum conductors
Standard BS 4752: Part 1,
switchgear and control
or terminals. Eaton chooses gear Part 1: circuit breakers
2
number –57 °F, F02 –30 °F
to always fully calibrate to 50 ● Canadian Standards
Marine Applications °C ambient. (“Naval” labeled Association (CSA) Standard
2 E- to R-Framed circuit per UL but no “UL” mark due C22.2 No. 5, service
breakers can be supplied to to 50 °C label.) entrance and branch circuit
2 meet the following marine ● Add suffix VH09 breakers
specifications: ● International
2 ● U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46; Certified Test Reports Electrotechnical
Eaton breakers can be Commission
ABS—American Bureau
2 of Shipping, IEEE 45 ordered with certified test Recommendations IEC
60947-2, circuit breakers
and Lloyds reports at the time of order
2 entry. Test report documents Japanese T-Mark Standard
●

These specifications the thermal and magnetic or molded case circuit

generally require molded electronic tripping breakers
2 case circuit breakers to be characteristics of the ● South African Bureau of
supplied with 50 °C ambient, individual breaker. Breaker Standards, Standard SABS
2 and plug-in adapter kits. and test report must be 156, Standard Specification
When plug-in adapter kits are ordered together. Add suffix for molded case circuit
2 used, no terminals need be
supplied (switchboard
12 to breaker catalog number
and enter separate line item
breakers
● Swiss Electro-Technical
applications).
2 on order for certified test
report.
Association Standard SEV
Circuit breakers can also be 157-1, safety regulations
2 supplied to meet UL 489
Supplement SA (Marine use) ●
for circuit breakers
Union Technique de
2 and UL 489 Supplement SB
(Naval Use).
l’Electricite Standard
NFC 63-120, low-voltage
switchgear and control
2 gear circuit breaker
requirements
2 ● Verband Deutscher
Elektrotechniker
2 (Association of German
Electrical Engineers)
2 Standard VDE 0660,
low-voltage switchgear
2
and control gear, circuit
breakers

2
2
2

V4-T2-248 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Internal Accessories Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
2
Alarm Lockout Shunt Trips Cause of Trip Display/Remote Electronic Portable Test Kit
The alarm switches operate The shunt trip is used for Mount Cause of Trip Display The electronic portable test 2
when the circuit breaker is remote tripping. The Cause of Trip Display kit provides a means to
tripped by a short circuit or
The coil of the shunt trip is
can be field-installed on any complete field tests using 2
overcurrent, but also when it Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. secondary injection on all
rated only for short-time
is tripped by a shunt trip or
undervoltage release. operation.
The device provides breaker
information through an LCD
310+ trip units. The same
test kit is also capable of
2
screen, such as cause of
Auxiliary Switches
It is not permissible with
the circuit breaker open to trip, phrase current, ground
secondary injection testing
on Magnum and Series NRX 2
Auxiliary switches are used current and low loads. low-voltage power circuit
for signaling and control
apply a continuous opening
command to the shunt trip in The display is ideal for breakers' 520 and 1150 2
purposes. The various order to prevent the breaker troubleshooting common trip units.
functions of the auxiliary from closing. This means trips such as ground
fault, long delay, and
2
switches (changeover) are that interlocking circuits with Electronic Portable Test Kit
shown on Page V4-T2-251. continuous commands
may not be set up with
instantaneous/short delay.
The DIGIVIEW version will Catalog 2
Number
provide a local display at the
shunt trips.
breaker without additional MTST230V 2
Undervoltage Releases wiring by connecting directly
The circuit breaker cannot be
onto the trip unit. The Wire Seal 2
DIGIVIEWR06 version has a The wire seal can be used to
closed until the undervoltage
release is energized. If the
6 foot cable that allows users
to mount the display on the
secure the cover of the trip 2
release is not energized, the unit to prevent adjustments
circuit breaker can only
outside of an enclosure door
and connect to the trip unit
after settings are confirmed.
2
perform an idle switching
that is contained inside the
operation.
enclosure.
Wire Seal
2
Frequent idle switching Catalog
actions should be avoided as
The DIGIVIEWR06 is NEMA
3R rated.
Number
2
they shorten the endurance 5108A03H01
of the circuit breaker.
Cause of Trip Display/ 2
Remote Mount Cause of
Trip Display 2
Catalog
Number 2
DIGIVIEW
DIGIVIEWR06 2
Cause of Trip LED Module 2
The Cause of Trip LED
Module can be field-installed 2
on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip
unit. The device provides a 2
cause of trip indication via
LED. The Cause of Trip LED
Module connects directly
2
onto the trip unit. When the
breaker trips, the module 2
indicates the cause of trip
(long delay, short delay, 2
instantaneous and ground)
via LED indication. The
module is reset after the
2
breaker is reset.
2
Cause of Trip LED Module
Catalog
2
Number
TRIP-LED
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-249

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

External Accessories and Test Kit

2
2
External Accessories
Fit Frame

2 Description Type EG JG LG NG RG
Non-padlockable handle block Field EFHB — — LKD4 —

2 Padlockable handle block Field EFPHB — — — —

Padlockable handle block Field EFPHBOFF FJPHBOFF LBHPOFF — —
2 off-only
Padlockable handle lock hasp Field EFPLK FJPHL LPHL PLK5 HLK6
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp
off-only
Field EFPHLOFF FJPHLOFF LPHLOFF PLK5SOFF HLK6OFF

2 Kirk key interlock kit 12 Field — KYKJG KYKLG KYK4 KYK6

Castell key interlock kit 23 Field — CTKJG CTKLG CTK4 CTK6
2 Slide bar interlock 4 Field EFSBI FJSBI LGSBI SBK5 —
Walking beam interlock 4 Three-pole EG3WBI JG3WBI LG3WBI WBL5 WBL6
2 Four-pole EG4WBI JG4WBI LG4WBI WBL5 —
Electrical operator 5 120 Vac MOPEG240C MOPJG120C MOPLG120C EOP5T07 EOP6T08K
2 240 Vac MOPEG240C MOPJG240C MOPLG240C EOP5T11 EOP6T11K

2 24 Vdc
48 Vdc
MOPEG48D
MOPEG48D
MOPJG24D
—
MOPLG24D
—
EOP5T21
EOP5T22
—
EOP6T21K

2 125 Vdc MOPEG120C MOPJG120C MOPLG120C EOP5T26 —

220 Vdc — MOPJG240C MOPLG240C — —

2 250 Vdc — MOPJG240C MOPLG240C — —

Plug-in adapters Three-pole PAD3E PAD3J PAD3L PAD53 —
2 Four-pole PAD4E PAD4J PAD4L — —
Wohner busbar adapter Field top EG-BUS-T JG-BUS-TB LG-BUS-TB — —
2 Field bottom EG-BUS-B JG-BUS-TB LG-BUS-TB — —

2
Series G MCCB Frames EG, JG, and LG to mount to the SASY 60 mm Wohner Classic System
2 ● UL file # E197132 ● No line side wiring required
Compact design Up to 630 A MCCB
2
● ●

● UL508 tested and certified ● Reverse feed possible

using Wohner system with
2 Eaton breakers

2
Wohner Busbar Adapters
2
Wohner Busbar
Adapter
Breaker Frame Busbar Adapter Connection Point

2 EG EG-BUS-T Top
EG EG-BUS-B Bottom
2 JG JG-BUS-TB Top or bottom
LG LG-BUS-TB Top or bottom
2 Notes

2
1 Provision only.
2 See Page V4-T2-461 for bolt projection dimensions.
3 Castell bolt mounting hole must be 10 mm.

2 4 Requires two breakers.

5 Contact Eaton for availability of operators for EG- and NG-Frames before December 2004.

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-250 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Accessory Configurations for EG–RG Circuit Breakers
2
Internal Accessory Configurations
2
2
2
2
¬ 2
¬
2
¨ ¨

¨ ¨ 2
¨ ¨
2
¡ ¡

¡ ¡
2
2
2
2
¨
≠
2
¬ = For N and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Only
2
Contact Making by the Auxiliary and Alarm Switches as a
Function of the Switching Position of the Circuit Breaker
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-251

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Accessories
2
Field Fit Kit Catalog Numbers
2 Alarm Lockout

2 Description Pole Location

Frame
EG, JG and LG NG RG 1

2 Make/Break Left — A1L5LPK —

Right ALM1M1BEPK 2 A1L5RPK A1L6RPK

2 2 Make/2 Break Left — A2L5LPK —

Right ALM2M2BEPK 3 A2L5RPK A2L6RPK

2
2
Description Pole Location For Use in Frame Contact Type Catalog Number
Make/Break Right EG Silver ALM1M1BEPK

2 2 Make/ 2 Break
Make/Break
Right
Right
EG
JG and LG
Silver
Silver
ALM2M2BEPK
ALM1M1BJPK

2 2 Make/ 2 Break
Make/Break
Right
Right
JG and LG
EG
Silver
Gold
ALM2M2BJPK
ALM1M1BEEPK

2 2 Make/ 2 Break
Make/Break
Right
Right
EG
JG and LG
Gold
Gold
ALM2M2BEEPK
ALM1M1BEJPK

2 2 Make/ 2 Break Right JG and LG Gold ALM2M2BEJPK

2 Auxiliary Switch
Frame
2 Description Pole Location EG, JG and LG NG RG 1
1A, 1B Left — A1X5PK —
2 Right AUX1A1BPK A1X5PK —
2A, 2B Left — A2X5PK —
2 Right AUX2A2BPK A2X5PK A2X6RPK
3A, 3B Left — A3X5LPK —
2 Right — A3X5RPK —
4A, 4B Left — — —
2 Right — — A4X6RPK

2 Description Pole Location For Use in Frame Contact Type Catalog Number

2 1A, 1B Right EG/JG/LG Silver AUX1A1BPK

2A, 2B Right EG/JG/LG Silver AUX2A2BPK
2 1A, 1B Right EG/JG/LG Gold AUX1E1BPK
2A, 2B Right EG/JG/LG Gold AUX2E2BPK
2
Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout
2 Frame
Description
2
Pole Location EG, JG and LG NG RG 1
— Left — AA115LPK —
Right
2
AUXALRMEPK 4 AA115RPK —

2 Description Pole Location For Use in Frame Contact Type Catalog Number
1A/1B & 1M/1B Right EG Silver AUXALRMEPK
2 1A/1B & 1M/1B Right JG and LG Silver AUXALRMJPK
1A/1B & 1M/1B Right EG Gold AUXALRMEEPK
2 1A/1B & 1M/1B Right JG and LG Gold AUXALRMEJPK

2 Notes
1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
2 Part number for JG and LG is ALM1M1BJPK.

2 3 Part number for JG and LG is ALM2M2BJPK.

4 Part number for JG and LG is AUXALRMJPK.

V4-T2-252 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Shunt Trip—Standard
Shunt Trip—Standard
Frame
2
Pole

2
Description Location EG, JG and LG 1 NG RG 2
ST
48–60 Vac Left SNT4860CPK SNT5LP05K —
a
110–240 Vac
Right
Left
—
SNT120CPK
—
SNT5LP11K
SNT6P05K
—
2
Right
2
— — SNT6P11K
380–600 Vac Left SNT480CPK 3 — —
Right
2
— — —
220–250 Vdc or 380–440 Vac — SNT5LP14K SNT6P14K
480–600 Vac — SNT5LP18K SNT6P18K
12 Vdc Left SNT012CPK — — 2
Right — — —
24 Vac/dc Left SNT024CPK SNT5LP03K — 2
Right — — SNT6P03K
48–60 Vdc Left SNT4860CPK SNT5LP23K — 2
Right — — SNT6P23K
110–125 Vdc Left SNT125DPK SNT5LP26K — 2
Right — — SNT6P26K
250 Vdc Left SNT250DPK — — 2
Right — — —
2
Shunt Trip—Low Energy
Frame
2
Pole

2
Description Location EG, JG and LG NG RG 2
— Left — LST5LPK —
Right — — LST6RPK
2
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
2
Frame
Pole
Description Location EG, JG and LG 1 NG RG 2 2
110–127 Vac Left UVR120APK UVH5LP08K —
Right — — UVH6RP08K 2
208–240 Vac Left UVR240APK UVH5LP11K —
Right — — UVH6RP11K 2
24 Vdc Left UVR024DPK UVH5LP21K 4 —
Right — — UVH6RP21K 4 2
24 Vac Left UVR024APK UVH5LP21K 4 —
Right — — UVH6RP21K 4 2
48–60 Vdc Left UVR048DPK UVH5LP23K —
Right — — UVH6RP23K 2
48–60 Vac Left UVR048APK UVH5LP05K —

120 Vdc
Right
Left
—
UVR125DPK
—
UVH5LP26K
UVH6RP05K
—
2
220–250 Vdc
Right
Left
—
UVR250DPK
—
UVH5LP28K
UVH6RP26K
—
2
380–500 Vac
Right
Left
—
UVR480APK
—
UVH5LP29K
UVH6RP28K
—
2
525–600 Vac
Right
Left
—
UVR600APK
—
—
UVH6RP29K
—
2
12 Vdc
Right
Left
—
—
—
UVH5LP20K
—
—
2
Right
12 Vac Left
—
—
—
UVH5LP02K
UVH6RP20K
—
2
Right
2
— — UVH6RP02K

Notes
1 LH cavity not available for EG frame with earth leakage module.
2 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
2
3 380–600 Vdc, 50/60 Hz.
4 24 Vdc only use UVH5LP03K (NG) UVH6RP03K (RG) for 24 Vac. 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-253

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Technical Data and Specifications

2 Note: Gold-plated contacts are
well suited for switching low
2 voltages and currents. Lead wires
on accessories containing gold-
2 plated contacts are marked with a
yellow stripe.

2
Series G Gold Contact Accessory Switch Electrical Ratings
2 Dielectric Withstand
Max. Voltage (Ue) Frequency Max. Current (ln) Voltage (Ul)
2 125 V 50/60 Hz 0.1 A 2200 V

2 30 V
5V
DC
DC
0.25 A
5 mA
2200 V
2200 V

2
2 Series G Silver Contact Accessory Switch Electrical Ratings
Dielectric Withstand
2 Max. Voltage (Ue) Frequency Max. Current (ln) Voltage (Ul)
600 V 50/60 Hz 2A 2200 V
2 125/250 V 50/60 Hz 5A 2200 V
125 V DC 1A 2200 V
2
2 Series GJ Frame: Terminal Extension Kits

2
Extension Orientation
Edgewise Right Angle Spreader Straight

2 Three-pole FJTEE3 FJTER3 FJTEW3 FJTES3

Four-pole FJTEE4 FJTER4 FJTEW4 FJTES4

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-254 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Contents
Series G Motor Operators
Description Page
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158 2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-190
V4-T2-208
2
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-217
V4-T2-228 2
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-232
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . V4-T2-235 2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for 2
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244
Special Features and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators
V4-T2-247 2
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-256 2
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-256
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257 2
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258
2
Motor Operators 2
Product Description 2
Eaton’s motor operator The robust motor operators
mechanism enables local and offer various voltages to 2
remote ON, OFF and reset maximize customer flexibility.
switching of a circuit breaker.
The motor operator is
Standard load transfer
switching can be
2
mounted on the circuit
breaker cover within
accomplished through the
use of two circuit breakers 2
the dimensions of the fitted with motor operators
circuit breaker. and a mechanical interlock. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-255

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Features, Benefits and Functions Product Selection

2 The motor operator provides ● A key is provided to
special features for ease of manually operate the
2
Motor Operators
customer use and status circuit breaker Frame Voltage Frequency Inrush Current Catalog Number
indication. ● A special pull-out locking
2 ● The motor operator allows mechanism provides a Series G E-Frame 100–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPEG240C
method for padlocking the 100–220 Vdc DC 1A MOPEG240C
2 the circuit breaker to be
opened, closed or reset circuit breaker handle in 24/48 Vdc DC 3A MOPEG48D
remotely the OFF position
Series C F-Frame 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A
2
MOPFD240C
● The motor operator
● The locking device will
accept three padlock 110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPFD120C
contains a motor
2 connected to a cam drive shackles with a maximum
diameter of 1/4-inch
220–250 Vdc DC 1A MOPFD240C
mechanism. The cam 110–125 Vdc DC 1A MOPFD120C
(6.4 mm) each
2 drives a slide mechanism
to operate the circuit ● The cover provides visual 24 Vdc DC 3A MOPFD24D
status of the circuit Series G J-Frame 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A
2 breaker handle MOPJG240C
● Internal limit switches and breaker: ON, OFF or 110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPJG120C
TRIPPED. A PUSH-TO-TRIP
2 relays are used to control
motor operation to prevent button allows the user to 220–250 Vdc DC 1A MOPJG240C
manually trip the breaker 110–125 Vdc DC 1A MOPJG120C
overdriving the circuit
2 breaker handle and motor 24 Vdc DC 3A MOPJG24D
overload conditions Series G L-Frame 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 2A MOPLG240C
2 110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 2A MOPLG120C

2 Manual Operating Key

Turn the Key
220–250 Vdc DC 2A MOPLG240C
(clockwise only) 110–125 Vdc DC 2A MOPLG120C

2 24 Vdc DC 6A MOPLG24D

2
2
Circuit Breaker
Status Indication
Window

2
2
2 PUSH-TO-TRIP Button

2
2
2
Standards and Certifications
2 The motor operators are UL
and CSA listed, and CE
2 marked.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-256 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.3
Contents
LG Breaker with Plug-In Block
Description Page
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158 2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-190
V4-T2-208
2
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-217
V4-T2-228 2
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-232
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . V4-T2-235 2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for 2
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244
Special Features and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-247
V4-T2-255
2
Plug-In Blocks
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-258 2
2
2
Plug-In Blocks 2
Product Description Product Selection 2
Plug-in adapters simplify
installation and front removal Plug-In Blocks 2
of circuit breakers. Plug-ins Breaker Number Catalog
are available for rear
connection applications on
Frame of Poles Number 2
EG-, JG- and LG-Frame Plug-In Blocks
three- and four-pole circuit
breakers. Trip on drawout EG 3 PAD3E 2
interlock kits are included. EG 4
2
PAD4E
Stabs for EG, JG and LG plug-
JG 3 PAD3J
ins rotate 90 ° for flexible
installation. Use terminal
shields for IP30 protection.
JG 4 PAD4J
2
LG 4 PAD4L
Trip-On Drawout Interlock Kit 1 2
EG 3, 4 PIILEG
JG 3, 4 PIILJG 2
LG
Terminal Shields IP30
3, 4 PIILLG
2
EG 3 EFTS3K 2
EG 4 EFTS4K
JG 3 FJTS3K 2
JG 4 FJTS4K
LG 3 LTS3K
2
LG 4 LTS4K
2
Note
1 Included with plug-in block. Trips the breaker when breaker is removed from plug-in block.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-257

 2.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G

Contents
2 Drawout Cassettes
Description Page
2 EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-172
2 LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-190
V4-T2-208
2 RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-217
V4-T2-228
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-232
2 30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . V4-T2-235
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-239
2 High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-244
2 Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-247
V4-T2-255
2 Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette
V4-T2-257

2
2
2 Drawout Cassette
2 Product Description Features Product Selection
The drawout cassette is Features of the drawout
2 available for use with JG, LG cassettes for the JG, LG and
JG Drawout Cassette JG, LG and NG Drawout Cassettes
and NG, three- and four-pole NG include:
Number Catalog
2 breakers. The cassettes
consist of two separate
● Trip on drawout—breaker Breaker Frame of Poles Number
will trip if it is in the ON JG 3 JG3DOM
2 components: the movable
mechanism, which attaches position when withdrawn
to the breaker, and the from the cassette
2 stationary mechanism, which ● Secondary terminal block—
houses in the cassette. For the drawout cassettes
LG Drawout Cassette LG 3 LG3DOM
2 the JG, LG and NG drawout
cassettes, all necessary parts
include a secondary
terminal block for easier
2 for installation are included in
the one catalog number.
access when wiring
low-voltage accessories,
including shunts and NG 3 NG3DOM
2 undervoltage releases

2 The drawout mechanism has

three primary positions:

2 ● Connected—the breaker
is fully connected to
2 the primary stabs and
secondary contacts

2 Disconnected—both the
●

primary stabs and the

secondary contacts are
2 disconnected
● Withdraw—the breaker
2 can be removed from the
cassette
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-258 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Contents
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family
Description Page
2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260 2
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-261
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-264
V4-T2-278
2
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-296
V4-T2-304 2
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354 2
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380 2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-399
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . .
V4-T2-410
V4-T2-412
2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-413
V4-T2-416 2
External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449
Learn Drawings
2
Online Online
2
Product Overview 2
Eaton’s molded case circuit
breakers are designed to
Eaton offers the most
comprehensive family of
50 °C Calibration
Add suffix V to catalog
These specifications
generally require molded
2
provide circuit protection for molded case circuit breakers case circuit breakers to be
low-voltage distribution in the industry.
Number for complete
breaker, listed above, when supplied with 50 °C ambient, 2
systems. They are described ordering listed ampere ratings and plug-in adapter kits.
by NEMA as, “... a device for This section of circuit breakers
includes: for breakers to be used in When plug-in adapter kits are 2
closing and interrupting a 50 °C ambients. (No UL label.) used, no terminals need be
circuit between separable
contacts under both normal
● Thermal-magnetic trip
Moisture-Fungus Treatment
supplied (switchboard
applications).
2
breakers
and abnormal conditions,”
and furthermore as, “... a
● Electronic rms trip All circuit breaker cases are
molded from glass-polyester
Circuit breakers can also be 2
breakers supplied to meet UL 489
breaker assembled as an which does not support the
integral unit in a supporting
● Molded case switches
growth of fungus. Any parts
Supplement SA (Marine use)
and UL 489 Supplement SB
2
and enclosing housing of ● Motor circuit protectors which are susceptible to the
insulating material.” The ● Current-limiting breakers growth of fungus will require
(Naval Use).
2
National Electrical Code ● Special application special treatment. UL 489 Supplement SA
(NEC) describes them as, “A
device designed to open and
breakers
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers
applies to vessels over 65 feet 2
(19.8 m) in length.
Modified Breakers
close a circuit by non-
automatic means, and to Eaton breakers can be ordered
The circuit breakers may be
ordered with freeze testing.
Requirements include 40 °C
ambient calibration, special
2
open the circuit automatically
2
with internal accessories This option uses special labeling, and no use of
on a predetermined overload installed. These modified lubrication and mechanical aluminum conductors or
of current, without injury to breakers will be subject to an operation is verified at –40 °C. terminals. (No 50 °C.)
itself when properly applied addition charge.
Suffix H08
2
within its rating.” Marine Applications ●

So designed, Eaton circuit

Special Calibration
Special non-UL-listed
E- to R-Framed circuit
breakers can be supplied to
Or you can choose to add 50 2
breakers protect conductors °C ambient but then there is
against overloads and calibrations are available for
certain ambient temperatures
meet the following marine
specifications:
no “UL” mark. 2
conductors and connected
other than 40 °C and for ● Suffix VH08
apparatus, such as motors
and motor starters, against frequencies other than 50/60
● U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46;
UL 489 Supplement SB
2
Hz or DC. Reduced ABS—American Bureau of
2
short circuits. Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV; requires partial 50 °C ambient
interrupting ratings will apply
for 400 Hz applications. Lloyds; and ABS/NVR calibration, vibration testing,
In low-voltage distribution
special nameplating and no
systems, there are many
varied applications of molded
use of aluminum conductors 2
or terminals. Eaton chooses
case circuit breakers.
to always fully calibrate to 50 2
°C ambient. (“Naval” labeled
per UL, and UL now allows
50 °C label here.)
2
● Suffix VH09 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-259

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Certified Test Reports Standards and Certifications

2 Eaton breakers can be Molded case circuit breakers ● Japanese T-Mark Standard Conformance with these
ordered with certified test
2 reports at the time of order
are designed to conform with
the following standards:
molded case circuit
breakers
standards satisfies most local
and international codes,
entry. Test report documents assuming user acceptability
2 South African Bureau of
●
the thermal and magnetic or ● Underwriters Laboratories and simplified application.
Inc., Standard UL 489, Standards, Standard SABS
electronic tripping 156, Standard Specification
2 characteristics of the
individual breaker. Breaker
molded case circuit
breakers and circuit for molded case circuit
Molded case circuit breakers
equal or exceed Federal
breaker enclosures breakers Specification Classification
2 and test report must be
ordered together. Add suffix ● National Electrical
● Swiss Electro-Technical W-C-375b requirements for
12 to breaker catalog number Manufacturers Association Association Standard SEV the particular class associated
2 and enter separate line item (NEMA) Standards 157-1, safety regulations
for circuit breakers
with the circuit breaker frame
on order for certified test Publication No. AB1-1993, being considered.
2 report. molded case circuit ● Union Technique de
l’Electricite Standard Open breakers do not have
breakers service entrance ratings.
2 ● Australian Standard AS NFC 63-120, low-voltage
switchgear and control Service entrance rating is part
2184, molded case circuit of the enclosure.
gear circuit breaker
2 ●
breakers
British Standards Institution
requirements
● Verband Deutscher
2 Standard BS 4752: Part 1,
switchgear and control Elektrotechniker
gear Part 1: circuit breakers (Association of German
2 ● Canadian Standards
Electrical Engineers)
Standard VDE 0660,
Association (CSA) Standard
2 C22.2 No. 5, service
low-voltage switchgear
and control gear, circuit
entrance and branch circuit breakers
2 breakers
● International
2 Electrotechnical
Commission
2 Recommendations IEC
60947-2, circuit breakers

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-260 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Quick Reference
2
Industrial Circuit Breakers
2
G-Frame 2
Continuous Volts UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Ampere
Rating No. of Type
Federal
Specification
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
Page
2
Type at 40 °C Poles AC DC of Trip 1 W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 3 250 Number
GHB 15–100 1 120 125 N.I.T.U. 11a 65 — — — — — 14 — V4-T2-269
2
GHB 15–100 2, 3 240 125/250 N.I.T.U. 11a10b, 11b — — 65 — — — — 14 V4-T2-269
2
GHB 15–100 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12b, 14b — — — 14 — — 14 — V4-T2-269
GHB 15–100 2, 3 480Y/277 125/250 N.I.T.U. 15b — — — 14 14 — — 14 V4-T2-269 2
HGHB 15–30 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a, 13b 65 — — 25 — — 14 — V4-T2-269
GHBS 15–30 1, 2 480Y/277 — — — 65 65 — 14 — — — — V4-T1-34 2
GBHS
GDB
15–20
15–50
1, 2
2
600Y/347
480
—
125/250
N.I.T.U.
N.I.T.U.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
14
10
—
—
—
—
10
V4-T1-34
V4-T2-267
2
GDB 15–100 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. — — — — — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-267 2
GD 15–50 2 480 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-266
GD 15–100 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — 22 — — 10 V4-T2-266 2
GHC 15–100 1 120 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a 65 — — — — — 14 — V4-T2-274
GHC 15–100 2, 3 240 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — — — 1 V4-T2-274
2
GHC
GHC
15–100
15–100
1
2, 3
277
480Y/277
125
125/250
N.I.T.U.
N.I.T.U.
12c, 13a
13b
—
—
—
—
—
—
14
14
—
14
—
—
14
—
—
14
V4-T2-274
V4-T2-274
2
HGHC 15–30 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. — 65 — — 25 — — 14 — V4-T2-274 2
Notes
1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. 2
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
3 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems up to 70 A.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-261

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

F-Frame
2 Continuous Volts UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit Ampere Federal
2 Breaker
Type
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles AC DC
Type
of Trip 1
Specification
W-C-375b
AC (kA)
120 120/240 240 277 480 600
DC (kA) 2
125 250
Page
Number

2 EDB 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. — — — 22 — — — 10 — V4-T2-278

EDS 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. — — — 42 — — — 10 — V4-T2-278
2 ED 15–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 12b — — 65 — — — 10 — V4-T2-278
EDH 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 14b — — 100 — — — 10 —
2 EDC 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 1 — — 200 — — — 10 —
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-278

2 EHD 15–100 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 14 — — 10 — V4-T2-278

EHD 15–100 2, 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 18 — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-278
2 FDB 15–150 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 18a — — 18 — 14 14 — 10 V4-T2-278
FDB 15–150 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. 3
— — 18 — 14 14 — 10 V4-T2-278
2 FD 15–150 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 35 — — 10 — V4-T2-278

2 FD
FD
15–225
15–225
2, 3
4
600
600
250
250
N.I.T.U.
N.I.T.U.
22a
3
—
—
—
—
65
65
—
—
35
35
18
18
—
—
10
10
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-278

2 FDE 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T.U. — — — 65 — 35 18 — — V4-T2-278

HFD 15–150 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 65 — — 10 — V4-T2-278
2 HFD 15–225 2,3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 22a — — 100 — 65 25 — 22 V4-T2-278
HFD 15–225 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. 3
— — 100 — 65 25 — 22
2
V4-T2-278
HFDE 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T.U. — — — 100 — 65 25 — — V4-T2-278

2 FDC 4 15–225 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 24a — — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-278

FDC 4 15–225 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. 3
— — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-278
2 FDCE 45 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T.U. — — — 200 — 100 25 — — V4-T2-278

2
Notes
1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.

2 3 Not defined in W-C-375b.

4 Current limiting.

2
5 Check with Eaton for availability.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-262 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
J-Frame
Continuous Volts UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
2
Circuit Ampere Type Federal
2
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
Breaker Rating No. of of Specification Page
Type at 40 °C Poles AC DC Trip 1 W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 Number
JDB 70–250 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-299 2
JD 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-298
HJD 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 100 — 65 25 — 22 V4-T2-298 2
JDC 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 200 — 100 35 — 22
2
3 V4-T2-298

K-Frame 2
Circuit
Continuous
Ampere
Volts
Type Federal
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
2
Breaker Rating No. of of Specification Page
Type at 40 °C Poles AC DC Trip 1 W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 Number 2
DK 250–400 2, 3 240 250 N.I.T.U. 14b — — 65 — — — — 10 V4-T2-310
KDB 100–400 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 10 V4-T2-310 2
KD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 10
2
V4-T2-307, V4-T2-308,
V4-T2-312, V4-T2-315
CKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — — V4-T2-309, V4-T2-318,
V4-T2-320 2
HKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 22 V4-T2-307, V4-T2-308,
V4-T2-312, V4-T2-315 2
CHKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-309, V4-T2-318,
V4-T2-320 2
KDC 3 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 65 — 22 V4-T2-307, V4-T2-308,
V4-T2-312, V4-T2-315
2

L-Frame
2
Circuit
Continuous
Ampere
Volts
Type Federal
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) 2
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
2
Breaker Rating No. of of Specification Page
Type at 40 °C Poles AC DC Trip 1 W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 Number
LDB 300–600 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 22
2
V4-T2-333
LD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 22 V4-T2-331, V4-T2-332,
V4-T2-337
CLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — — V4-T2-333, V4-T2-343 2
HLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 25 V4-T2-331, V4-T2-332,
V4-T2-337 2
CHLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — —
LDC 3 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 50 — 30
V4-T2-333, V4-T2-343
V4-T2-331, V4-T2-332,
2
2
V4-T2-339
CLDC 3 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 50 — 30 V4-T2-333, V4-T2-345

2
M-Frame
Continuous Volts UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
2
2
Circuit Ampere Type Federal AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
Breaker Rating No. of of Specification Page
Type at 40 °C Poles AC DC Trip 1 W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 Number
MDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 50 25 — 22 V4-T2-356, V4-T2-358 2
CMDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 50 25 — — V4-T2-358
HMDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 25 V4-T2-356, V4-T2-358
2
CHMDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-358
2
Notes
1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
2
2
3 Current limiting.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-263

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes)
V4-T2-261

2 Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-265
V4-T2-265
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-278
2 J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-365
V4-T2-380
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-410
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-412
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2
2
2 G-Frame (15–100 Amperes)

2 Product Description
● All two- and three-pole
2 circuit breakers are of the
common trip type. On all
three-phase delta (240 V)
2 Grounded B phase
applications, refer to Eaton
2 ● Single-pole circuit
breakers, 15 and 20
2 amperes. Switching duty
rated (SWD) for
2 fluorescent lighting
applications

2 All G-Frame circuit

●

breakers are suitable for

reverse feed use
2 ● HACR rated

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-264 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
Circuit Breaker/Frame
2
GD 3 100 K
2
Circuit Breaker Type Suffix
GD HGHB Number of Poles Trip Amperes K = Molded case switch J01= Fungus proofed 2
GDB HGHC 1 = 1 pole 015 035 070 D = Ring type terminals R01= Shock tested
GHB
GHC
GHBGFEP
GHCGFEP
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
020
024
040
045
080
090
C = Steel collars F01= Freeze tester 2
V = 122 °F (50 °C) HID= High intensity discharge 1
GHQ 030 050 100
060 2
2
Technical Data and Specifications 2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 2

Breaker Type of Poles 120 240 277 480 480Y/277 125 2 250 34
GDB 2, 3 — — — 14 — — 10
2
GD 2 — 65 — 14 — — 10
2
GD 3 — 65 — 22 — — 10
GHQ — 65 — 14 — — — — 2
GHB 1 65 — 14 — — 14 —
GHB 2, 3 — 65 — — 14 14 — 2
HGHB 1 65 — 25 — — 14 —
GHC 1 65 — 14 — — 14 —
2
GHC 2, 3 — 65 — — 14 14 — 2
HGHC 1 65 — 25 — — 14 —

Terminal Types
2
For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below. 2
Terminal Types 2
Circuit Breaker Amperes Terminal Type Material Screw Head Type Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm2) 5
Standard 2
15–20 Clamp (plated steel) Slotted Cu/Al 14–10 2.5–4
25–100 Pressure (aluminum body) Slotted Cu/Al 10–1/0 4–50
2
Optional—GD, GHB, GHC
2
15–100 Pressure (steel body) Slotted Cu 14–3 —

Notes 2
1 HID suffix only applies to the GHB and GHC single-pole, 15–20 A circuit breakers.
2 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems up to 70 A.
3 Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.
2
4 Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
5 Not UL listed sizes. 2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-265

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Typical G-Frame Circuit Breaker
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-410
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-412
V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (15–100 Amperes)
2 Product Description Standards and Certifications
● Cable in, cable out ● UL/CSA
2 ● Includes mounting
hardware and BMHE
2
2 Product Selection

2
Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Includes Binding
2
14 kAIC at 480 Vac 22 kAIC at 480 Vac Head Screws and Clamps
Includes Line and Load Terminals 10–32 x 0.312
Maximum
2 Continuous Two-Pole Three-Pole Three-Pole
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number
2 15 GD2015 GD3015 GD3015D

2 20
25
GD2020
GD2025
GD3020
GD3025
GD3020D
GD3025D

2 30 GD2030 GD3030 GD3030D

35 GD2035 GD3035 GD3035D
2 40 GD2040 GD3040 GD3040D
45 GD2045 GD3045 GD3045D
2 50 GD2050 GD3050 GD3050D

2 60
70
—
—
GD3060
GD3070
GD3060D
GD3070D

2 80 — GD3080 GD3080D
90 — GD3090 GD3090D
2 100 — GD3100 GD3100D

2
2
2

V4-T2-266 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Type GDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
2
14 kAIC at 480 Vac
Includes Line and Load Terminals
2
Maximum
2
Continuous Two-Pole Three-Pole
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number
15 GDB2015 GDB3015 2
20
25
GDB2020
GDB2025
GDB3020
GDB3025
2
30 GDB2030 GDB3030 2
35 GDB2035 GDB3035
40 GDB2040 GDB3040 2
45 GDB2045 GDB3045
50 GDB2050 GDB3050
2
60 — GDB3060
2
70 — GDB3070
80 — GDB3080 2
90 — GDB3090
100 — GDB3100 2
Type GD Molded Case Switches 2
Type GD Molded Case Switches—Three-Pole 2
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Maximum Continuous Catalog Number 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C (Includes Line and Load Terminals)
60 GD3060K 2
60 GD3060KC 1
100 GD3100K 2
100
2
GD3100KD 2

Notes
1 Includes line and load steel terminals.
2 Includes binding head screws and clamps 10–32 x 0.312.
2
Molded case switches may open above 1300 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-267

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Dimensions
2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
GD-Frame, Three-Pole
2 Front View Side View

2
2
2
2
2 4.88
(123.8)

2
Off

2
2
2
2 3.00 2.63
(76.2) (66.7)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-268 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Contents
Typical GHB
Description Page
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259 2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296 2
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328 2
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 2
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-410
2
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-412
V4-T2-413 2
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449 2
2
Types GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes) 2
Standards and Certifications 2
These breakers meet the
requirements of Federal 2
Specification W-C-375b
as follows:
2
● Type GHB, 120 and 240 V:
● Single-pole: Class 11a 2
● Two-, three-pole:
Classes 10b, 11b, 12b, 2
14b, 15b
● UL/CSA 2
Type GHB, 277 and
2
●

480Y/277 V:
Single-pole:
2
●

Classes 12c, 13a

Two-, three-pole:
2
●

Class 13b
● Type HGHB 277 V
● Type GHQ 277 V 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-269

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Product Selection
2
2 Typical GHB Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1
2 277/480 Vac Maximum, 277/480 Vac Maximum, 277/480 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum 2 125/250 Vdc Maximum 125/250 Vdc Maximum 3
2 Continuous Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 at 40 °C Number Number Number
15 GHB1015 45 GHB2015 4 GHB3015 4
2 20 GHB1020 45 GHB2020 4 GHB3020 4
25
2
GHB1025 GHB2025 GHB3025
30 GHB1030 GHB2030 GHB3030

2 35 GHB1035 GHB2035 GHB3035

40 GHB1040 GHB2040 GHB3040
2 45 GHB1045 GHB2045 GHB3045
50 GHB1050 GHB2050 GHB3050
2 60 GHB1060 GHB2060 GHB3060
70
2
GHB1070 GHB2070 GHB3070
80 GHB1080 GHB2080 GHB3080

2 90 GHB1090 GHB2090 GHB3090

100 GHB1100 GHB2100 GHB3100
2
2 Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum
Continuous Single-Pole
2 Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number

2 15 HGHB1015 6
20 HGHB1020 6
2 25 HGHB1025
30 HGHB1030
2
Notes

2 1 480Y/277 V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for three-phase delta (480 V).
2 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems from 15 through 70 amperes; 80 through 100 amperes devices

are not suitable for DC application.

2 3 Use two outside poles.
4 Uses 0.190 (4.83) –32 screw type clamp terminals.

2 5 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
6 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-270 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
2
GDB-Frame, Three-Pole

Front View
2
Side View 2
2
2
2
4.00 2
(101.6)

2
2
2
3.00
(76.2)
2.63
(66.7)
2
Max.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-271

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Single-Phase (requires two poles)
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-410
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-412
V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes)
2 Product Description Standards and Certifications
● 15–60 amperes, 277 V, These circuit breakers meet
2 50/60 Hz the requirements of UL 489
● Operational voltage and UL 1053.
2 240 V to 305 V

2
2 Product Selection
2 Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground
Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2 Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles)
277 Vac, 30 mA
2 Continuous
Ampere Rating Catalog
at 40 °C Number
2 15 GHBGFEP1015
20
2
GHBGFEP1020
30 GHBGFEP1030

2 40 GHBGFEP1040
50 GHBGFEP1050
2 60 GHBGFEP1060

2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2 Circuit Breaker Number Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
Type of Poles 277 Vac (50/60 Hz)
2 GHBGFEP 1 14,000

2
2
2

V4-T2-272 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
2
GHB-Frame, Three-Pole

Front View
2
Side View 2
2
2
2
4.00 2
(101.6)

2
2
2
3.00
(76.2)
2.63
(66.7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-273

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Typical GHC
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-410
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-412
V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 Types GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)
2 Product Description Standards and Certifications
● 15–100 amperes These breakers meet the
2 ● 120, 240, 277, 480Y/277 V, requirements of Federal
50/60 Hz, 125, 125/250 Vdc Specification W-C-37b
2 ● Single-, two- and as follows:
three-pole ● Type GHC, 277 and
2 ● Cable in, cable out 480Y/277 V:
● Does not include mounting ● Single-pole:
2 hardware Classes 12c, 13a
● Two-, three-pole:
2 Class 13b
● UL/CSA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-274 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with 2
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
277 Vac Maximum, 480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 480Y/277 Vac Maximum, 2
125 Vdc Maximum 1 125/250 Vdc Maximum 125/250 Vdc Maximum 2
Continuous Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 2
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number
2
15 GHC1015 34 GHC2015 3 GHC3015 3
20 GHC1020 34 GHC2020 3 GHC3020 3 2
25 GHC1025 GHC2025 GHC3025
30 GHC1030 GHC2030 GHC3030
2
35 GHC1035 GHC2035 GHC3035
2
40 GHC1040 GHC2040 GHC3040
45 GHC1045 GHC2045 GHC3045 2
50 GHC1050 GHC2050 GHC3050
60 GHC1060 GHC2060 GHC3060 2
70
2
GHC1070 GHC2070 GHC3070
80 GHC1080 GHC2080 GHC3080
90 GHC1090 GHC2090 GHC3090
2
100 GHC1100 GHC2100 GHC3100
2
Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum 2
Continuous Single-Pole
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
2
15 HGHC1015 5 2
20 HGHC1020 5
25 HGHC1025 2
30 HGHC1030

Notes
2
2
1 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only.
2 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems from 15 through 70 ampere; 80 through 100 ampere devices are

not suitable for DC application.

3 Uses 0.190–32 screw type clamp terminals.
4 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
2
5 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-275

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Single-Phase (requires two-pole spaces)
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-410
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-412
V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 Type GHCGFEP Cable-In/Cable-Out 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes)
2 Product Description Standards and Certifications
● 15–60 amperes, 277 V, These circuit breakers meet
2 50/60 Hz the requirements of UL 489
● Operational voltage and UL 1053.
2 240–305 V

2
2 Product Selection

2 Type GHCGFEP 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit

Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2 Continuous
Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 277 V, 30 mA
Ampere Rating Catalog
2 at 40 °C Number
15 GHCGFEP1015
2 20 GHCGFEP1020
30
2
GHCGFEP1030
40 GHCGFEP1040

2 50 GHCGFEP1050
60 GHCGFEP1060
2
2 Technical Data and Specifications

2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
2 Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles 277 Vac (50/60 Hz)

2 GHCGFEP 1 14,000

2
2
2

V4-T2-276 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Contents
Special Purpose Circuit Breakers
Description Page
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259 2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-261 2
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-264
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-278 2
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-304
V4-T2-328
2
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-354
V4-T2-365
2
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-380
V4-T2-399 2
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . V4-T2-412 2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416 2
External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449
2
Special Purpose GHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)
2
Product Description Product Selection 2
Eaton’s Type GHC circuit
breakers have binding head Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2
screw-type terminals on line
and load side. These circuit 277 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum 1
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum 2
2
breakers with screw-type
terminals (0.190–32) will be
marked “Special purpose
Continuous
Ampere Rating
Single-Pole
Catalog
Two-Pole
Catalog
Three-Pole
Catalog
2
breaker not for general use.” at 40 °C Number Number Number
To order this special breaker, 25 GHC1025D GHC2025D GHC3025D
2
use the catalog number from
the tables on this page.
30 GHC1030D GHC2030D GHC3030D
2
35 GHC1035D GHC2035D GHC3035D
40 GHC1040D GHC2040D GHC3040D 2
45 GHC1045D GHC2045D GHC3045D
50 GHC1050D GHC2050D GHC3050D 2
60
2
GHC1060D GHC2060D GHC3060D
70 GHC1070D GHC2070D GHC3070D
80 GHC1080D GHC2080D GHC3080D
2
90 GHC1090D GHC2090D GHC3090D
100 GHC1100D GHC2100D GHC3100D 2
2
Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications 2
277 Vac Maximum
Continuous Single-Pole 2
Ampere Rating Catalog
Type at 40 °C Number
2
Cable-in 15 GHC1015HID
20 GHC1020HID 2
Bolt-on 15 GHB1015HID
20 GHB1020HID
2
Notes
1 Single-pole breakers can be applied in DC systems from 15 through 70 amperes; 80 through 100 amperes devices are not suitable
2
for DC application.
2 Use two outside poles. 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-277

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Typical F-Frame Breaker
F-Frame Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-261
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-279
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-281
V4-T2-292
2 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-293
V4-T2-295
2 J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-296
V4-T2-304
V4-T2-328
2
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
2 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-399
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-412
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes)

2 Product Description
● All Eaton’s F-Frame circuit
2 ●
breakers are HACR rated
All circuit breakers 10
through 30 amperes are
2 suitable for HID (high
intensity discharge) use
2 ● All F-Frame circuit breakers
are suitable for reverse
2 feed use

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-278 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology 2
FDC 3 100 L 2
Circuit Breaker Suffix 2
Type Number of Trip Amperes E = 100% protected (four-pole only) neutral pole
EHD
FDB
Poles
1 = 1 pole
010
015
EH = 50% protected (four-pole only)
K = High magnetic molded case switch
2
FD 2 = 2 poles 020 L = Line and load terminals
HFD 3 = 3 poles 025 S = Stainless steel terminals
V = 50 °C calibration
2
FDC 4 = 4 poles 030
W = Without terminals
035
040 Y = Line terminals only 2
045 Z = Aluminum terminals (≤100 amperes)
050
060
2
070
080
090
2
2
100
110
125
150
175 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 2
200 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)
225 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 2
2
EDC 3 200 L
2
Circuit Breaker
Type Number of Trip
Suffix
L = Line and load terminals
2
Poles Amperes W = Without terminals
2
EDB
EDS 2 = 2 poles 100 Y = Line terminals only
ED 3 = 3 poles 125 Z = Aluminum terminals (100 amperes)
EDH
EDC
150
175 2
200
225 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-279

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.

2 It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

2 FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 210+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology

2 HFDE 3 225 22 L
2
Performance at Trip Unit Features
2 480 Vac
FDE= 35 kAIC
Number of
Poles
Trip Units 21 = 210+ LI
22 = 210+ LSI
W= Without terminals
L= Line and load terminals
100
HFDE= 65 kAIC Blank= Load side terminals only
2 FDCE= 100 kAIC
3 = 3 poles 150
225

2
2 FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology

2 HFDE 3 225 32 ZG W
2 Performance at Features
480 Vac Number of W= Without terminals
2 FDE= 35 kAIC
HFDE= 65 kAIC
Poles
3 = 3 poles 080
Trip Units
Trip Unit Trip Unit Features
L= Line and load terminals
Blank= Load side terminals only
FDCE= 100 kAIC
2
160 32 = 310+ LSI ZG= Zone
225 33 = 310+ LS selective
35 = 310+ LSG interlocking
2 36 = 310+ LSIG Blank= No option

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-280 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Type ED Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 2
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 2
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
65 kAIC at 240 Vac 2
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
15 ED2015 ED3015 2
20 ED2020 ED3020
25 ED2025 ED3025 2
30
2
ED2030 ED3030
35 ED2035 ED3035
40 ED2040 ED3040
2
50 ED2050 ED3050
60 ED2060 ED3060 2
100 ED2100 ED3100
125 ED2125 ED3125 2
150
175
ED2150
ED2175
ED3150
ED3175
2
200 ED2200 ED3200 2
225 ED2225 ED3225
2
Type EDH Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 2
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 2
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
100 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole
2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
15 — —
2
20 — —
25 — — 2
30 — —
35 — — 2
40
50
—
—
—
—
2
60 — —
2
100 EDH2100 EDH3100
125 EDH2125 EDH3125 2
150 EDH2150 EDH3150
175 EDH2175 EDH3175 2
200
225
EDH2200
EDH2225
EDH3200
EDH3225
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-281

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Type EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable

2 Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed

2
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
200 kAIC at 240 Vac
2 Two-Pole Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog
2 Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number
15 — —
2 20 — —
25 — —
2 30 — —

2 35 — —
40 — —

2 50 — —
60 — —
2 100 EDC2100 EDC3100
125
2
EDC2125 EDC3125
150 EDC2150 EDC3150

2 175 EDC2175 EDC3175

200 EDC2200 EDC3200
2 225 EDC2225 EDC3225

2
Type EDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
2 Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
2 (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
22 kAIC at 240 Vac

2 Maximum Continuous
Two-Pole
Catalog
Three-Pole
Catalog

2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number
100 EDB2100 EDB3100

2 110 EDB2110 EDB3110

125 EDB2125 EDB3125
2 150 EDB2150 EDB3150
175 EDB2175 EDB3175
2 200 EDB2200 EDB3200

2 225 EDB2225 EDB3225

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-282 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Type EDS Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 2
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2
42 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole 2
Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number
2
100 EDS2100 EDS3100
110 EDS2110 EDS3110 2
125 EDS2125 EDS3125
150 EDS2150 EDS3150
2
175 EDS2175 EDS3175
2
200 EDS2200 EDS3200
225 EDS2225 EDS3225 2
2
Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC at 277 Vac 14 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
10 1 EHD1010 EHD2010 EHD3010 2
15 EHD1015 2 EHD2015 EHD3015
20 EHD1020 2 EHD2020 EHD3020 2
25 EHD1025 EHD2025 EHD3025
30 EHD1030 EHD2030 EHD3030
2
35 EHD1035 EHD2035 EHD3035
2
40 EHD1040 EHD2040 EHD3040
45 EHD1045 EHD2045 EHD3045 2
50 EHD1050 EHD2050 EHD3050
60 EHD1060 EHD2060 EHD3060 2
70
2
EHD1070 EHD2070 EHD3070
80 EHD1080 EHD2080 EHD3080
90 EHD1090 EHD2090 EHD3090
2
100 EHD1100 EHD2100 EHD3100

Notes 2
1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.
2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-283

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Type FDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

2 (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC at 600 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number Number
2 10 1 FDB2010 FDB3010 FDB4010
15
2
FDB2015 FDB3015 FDB4015
20 FDB2020 FDB3020 FDB4020

2 25 FDB2025 FDB3025 FDB4025

30 FDB2030 FDB3030 FDB4030
2 35 FDB2035 FDB3035 FDB4035
40 FDB2040 FDB3040 FDB4040
2 45 FDB2045 FDB3045 FDB4045

2 50
60
FDB2050
FDB2060
FDB3050
FDB3060
FDB4050
FDB4060

2 70 FDB2070 FDB3070 FDB4070

80 FDB2080 FDB3080 FDB4080
2 90 FDB2090 FDB3090 FDB4090
100 FDB2100 FDB3100 FDB4100
2 110 FDB2110 FDB3110 FDB4110

2 125 FDB2125 FDB3125 FDB4125

150 FDB2150 FDB3150 FDB4150

2 Note
1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-284 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
35 kAIC at 277 Vac 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
10 1 FD1010 — — — 2
15
2
FD1015 2 FD2015 FD3015 FD4015
20 FD1020 2 FD2020 FD3020 FD4020
25 FD1025 FD2025 FD3025 FD4025
2
30 FD1030 FD2030 FD3030 FD4030
35 FD1035 FD2035 FD3035 FD4035 2
40 FD1040 FD2040 FD3040 FD4040
45 FD1045 FD2045 FD3045 FD4045 2
50
60
FD1050
FD1060
FD2050
FD2060
FD3050
FD3060
FD4050
FD4060
2
70 FD1070 FD2070 FD3070 FD4070 2
80 FD1080 FD2080 FD3080 FD4080
90 FD1090 FD2090 FD3090 FD4090 2
100 FD1100 FD2100 FD3100 FD4100
110 FD1110 FD2110 FD3110 FD4110
2
125
150
FD1125
FD1150
FD2125
FD2150
FD3125
FD3150
FD4125
FD4150
2
175 — FD2175 FD3175 FD4175 2
200 — FD2200 FD3200 FD4200
225 — FD2225 FD3225 FD4225 2
Notes
1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.
2
2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-285

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Type HFD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

2 (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

2
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
65 kAIC at 277 Vac 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
2 15 HFD1015 1 HFD2015 HFD3015 HFD4015
20
2
HFD1020 1 HFD2020 HFD3020 HFD4020
25 HFD1025 HFD2025 HFD3025 HFD4025

2 30 HFD1030 HFD2030 HFD3030 HFD4030

35 HFD1035 HFD2035 HFD3035 HFD4035
2 40 HFD1040 HFD2040 HFD3040 HFD4040
45 HFD1045 HFD2045 HFD3045 HFD4045
2 50 HFD1050 HFD2050 HFD3050 HFD4050

2 60
70
HFD1060
HFD1070
HFD2060
HFD2070
HFD3060
HFD3070
HFD4060
HFD4070

2 80 HFD1080 HFD2080 HFD3080 HFD4080

90 HFD1090 HFD2090 HFD3090 HFD4090
2 100 HFD1100 HFD2100 HFD3100 HFD4100
110 HFD1110 HFD2110 HFD3110 HFD4110
2 125 HFD1125 HFD2125 HFD3125 HFD4125

2 150 HFD1150 HFD2150 HFD3150 HFD4150

175 — HFD2175 HFD3175 HFD4175

2 200 — HFD2200 HFD3200 HFD4200

225 — HFD2225 HFD3225 HFD4225
2 Note
1 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-286 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Type FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
100 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Maximum Continuous Catalog Catalog Catalog 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number Number
15 FDC2015 FDC3015 FDC4015 2
20
2
FDC2020 FDC3020 FDC4020
25 FDC2025 FDC3025 FDC4025
30 FDC2030 FDC3030 FDC4030
2
35 FDC2035 FDC3035 FDC4035
40 FDC2040 FDC3040 FDC4040 2
45 FDC2045 FDC3045 FDC4045
50 FDC2050 FDC3050 FDC4050 2
60
70
FDC2060
FDC2070
FDC3060
FDC3070
FDC4060
FDC4070
2
80 FDC2080 FDC3080 FDC4080 2
90 FDC2090 FDC3090 FDC4090
100 FDC2100 FDC3100 FDC4100 2
110 FDC2110 FDC3110 FDC4110
125 FDC2125 FDC3125 FDC4125
2
150
175
FDC215
FDC2175
FDC3150
FDC3175
FDC4150
FDC4175
2
200 FDC2200 FDC3200 FDC4200 2
225 FDC2225 FDC3225 FDC4225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-287

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Types FDE, HFDE and FDCE 310+ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-294.

2 Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only

Standard Optional
2 LS
Adjustable Short
LSI
Independently
LSG
Adjustable Short Time
LSIG
Independently Adjustable Neutral
Time Pickup with I2t Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I2t Short Delay Short Time Pickup and CT for LSG
2 Maximum
Ampere Short Delay Ramp Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Ground Fault Protection and LSIG
Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac
80
2
FDE308033 FDE308032 FDE308035 FDE308036 CTF080
160 FDE316033 FDE316032 FDE316035 FDE316036 CTF160

2 225 FDE322533 FDE322532 FDE322535 FDE322536 CTF225

65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
2 80 HFDE308033 HFDE308032 HFDE308035 HFDE308036 CTF080
160 HFDE316033 HFDE316032 HFDE316035 HFDE316036 CTF160
2 225 HFDE322533 HFDE322532 HFDE322535 HFDE322536 CTF225

2 100 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac

80 FDCE308033 FDCE308032 FDCE308035 FDCE308036 CTF080

2 160 FDCE316033 FDCE316032 FDCE316035 FDCE316036 CTF160

225 FDCE322533 FDCE322532 FDCE322535 FDCE322536 CTF225
2
Types FDE, HFDE, and FDCE 210+ Electronic Circuit Breakers FDE 310+ Electronic Breaker with Zone Selective
2 with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Interlocking
Digitrip RMS 210+ Trip Unit Only Ampere LSI w/ZSI LSIG w/ZSI
2 Standard Optional Rating Catalog Number Catalog Number
LI LSI 35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac
2 Adjustable
Instantaneous
Adjustable Short Time Pickup
and Delay 80 FDE308032ZG FDE308036ZG

2 Maximum
Ampere Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
160 FDE316032ZG FDE316036ZG
225 FDE322532ZG FDE322536ZG

2 35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac

100 FDE310021 FDE310022
65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
80 HFDE308032ZG HFDE308036ZG
2 150 FDE315021 1
160 HFDE316032ZG HFDE316036ZG
225 FDE322521 FDE322522
225
2
HFDE322532ZG HFDE322536ZG
65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
100 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
100 HFDE310021 HFDE310022
2 150 HFDE315021 1
80 FDCE308032ZG FDCE308036ZG
160 FDCE316032ZG FDCE316036ZG
2 225 HFDE322521 HFDE322522
225 FDCE322532ZG FDCE322536ZG

2 210+ Trip Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings

Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings
Circuit
Circuit
2 Breaker
Type Frame Ratings Breaker
Type Frame Ratings

2 FDE, HFDE
FDE, HFDE
225
150
100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 225 100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 160 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160
2 FDE, HFDE 100 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 80 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80

2 Note
1 For 210+ trip unit, 150 A not available with LSI trip unit; entire range is covered by 100 A and

225 A frames.
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-288 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case components and are of the 2
switches are used as high instantaneous automatic
compact switches in type. Molded case switches 2
applications requiring high are listed in accordance with
current switching capabilities. Underwriters Laboratories 2
Molded case switches are Standard UL 489.
constructed of circuit breaker
2
Molded Case Switches
2
Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side
Terminals Only
2
Maximum Continuous
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Catalog
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Catalog Catalog
2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Number Number Number
Two-Pole 2
100
150
EHD2100K
—
FD2100K
FD2150K
HFD2100K
HFD2150K
2
225 — FD2225K HFD2225K 2
Three-Pole
100 EHD3100K FD3100K HFD3100K 2
150
2
— FD3150K HFD3150K
225 — FD3225K HFD3225K
Four-Pole
2
100 — FD4100K HFD4100K
150 — FD4150K HFD4150K 2
225 — FD4225K HFD4225K

Note
2
Molded case switches will open above 1800 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-289

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
Line and Load Terminals Ordering Information
2 Line and load terminals provide F-Frame circuit breakers and
wire connecting capabilities for molded case switches have
2 specific ranges of continuous load terminals only as
current ratings and wire types. standard equipment. When
2 Except as noted, terminals
comply with Underwriters
standard line-end terminals
(same as standard load-end
2 Laboratories Standards UL
486A and UL 486B. Unless
terminals) are required, add
Suffix L to the circuit breaker
otherwise specified, F-Frame catalog number. When non-
2 circuit breakers are factory standard or optional line and/
equipped with load or load terminals are required,
2 terminals only. order by style number.
Specify if factory installation
2 is required.

2 Line and Load Terminals

2 Maximum
Package of Three
Terminals

2
Breaker Terminal Body AWG Wire Metric Wire Catalog
Amperes Material Wire Type Range Range mm2 Number

2
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
20 (EHD) Steel Cu/AI 14–10 2.5–4 3T20FB 1

2 100 Steel Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB

225 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD
2 Optional Pressure Terminals
50 Aluminum Cu/AI 14–4 2.5–25 3TA50FB 1
2 100 Aluminum Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3TA100FD

2 200
225
Stainless steel
Copper
Cu
Cu
4–4/0
4–4/0
25–95
25–95
3T150FB
3T225FD

2 225 Aluminum Cu/AI 6–300 kcmil 16–150 3TA225FDK3 2

225 Aluminum Cu/AI 6–300 kcmil 16–150 3TA225FDK 2 3
2 Notes
1 Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.

2 2 Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately 3 inches (76.2) to breaker height. Available for use on three-pole breaker only.
3 Replacement use only.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-290 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Line and Load Terminals
2
2
Collar

Screw
Nut
Collar
2
Clip 2
2
Conductor
Washer
Conductor Conductor

3T20FB
Wire Clamp
3T100FB, 3T150FB
Screw

3TA225FD
Extrusion
2
Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown. Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of
conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer.
Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar.
Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around
2
Caution: Collar must surround conductor. bottom of collar.
2
2
Collar
2
Conductor
Collar
2
Washer Washer
2
Conductor

Screw
Screw
2
3TA50FB 3TA100FD 3TA225FDK3 (Up to 150 mm2)
Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a screw Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely
2
with screw and washer. and lockwasher. with screw and washer. Terminal shield must be used with
this collar. 2
Note: For 185 mm2, use 3TA225FDK1.
Same illustration for 3TA225FDK
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-291

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessories
2 Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
2 FD Frame Accessories
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 1 Four-Pole
2
Reference
Description Page Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole)
2 Alarm lockout switch (make only) V4-T2-418 ■ — — — — — — — — —
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) — — ■ ❏ — ❏ ■ — — —
2
V4-T2-418
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-418 — — ■ ❏ — ❏ ■ — — —
— — ■ ■ — ■ ■ — — ■
2 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-420
V4-T2-420 — — ■ ■ — ■ ■ — — ■

2 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination

Shunt trip—standard
V4-T2-422
V4-T2-424
—
—
—
—
■
■
❏
■
—
—
❏
■
■
■
—
—
—
—
—
■

2 Shunt trip—low energy

Undervoltage release mechanism
V4-T2-428
V4-T2-430
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
■
—
—
—
—
—
—

2 External Accessories
End cap kit V4-T2-453 — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Keeper nut V4-T2-453 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-454 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Multiwire connectors V4-T2-455 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-455 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Base mounting hardware V4-T2-455 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal shields V4-T2-457 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Terminal end covers V4-T2-458 — — — ● ● ● — — — —
Interphase barriers V4-T2-458 — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-459 ■ ■ — — ■ — — ■ — —
Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-459 ■ ■ — — ■ — — ■ — —
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-460 — — ■ ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
Cylinder lock — — — ■ — — — — — —
2
V4-T2-460
Key interlock kit V4-T2-461 — — ■ ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
— — — ● ● ● — — — —
2 Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-462
V4-T2-462 — — — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 Electrical (solenoid and motor) operators

Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-463
V4-T2-464
—
—
—
●
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

2 Rear connecting studs V4-T2-466 ●

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-467

2 Handle mechanisms V4-T2-544 — — — ● ● ● — — — —

LFD current limiter V4-T2-469 — — — ● ● ● — — — —

2 IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-469 — ● ● ● ● ● — — — —

Cause of trip display V4-T2-470 — — — ● — — ● — — —
2 Remote mount cause of trip display V4-T2-470 — — — ● — — ● — — —
Cause of trip LED V4-T2-470 — — — ● — — ● — — —
2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-259 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
2 ● Accessory available/modification available
Note
2 1 Internal accessories are listed with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for factory installation. They are not listed with UL for field installation.

V4-T2-292 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
2
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 277 480 600
Volts DC 1
125 250 23
2
EDB
EDS
2, 3
2, 3
22
42
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
—
—
2
ED
EDH
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
—
—
2
EDC
EHD
2, 3
1
200
—
—
4
—
—
—
—
10
10
—
—
2
FDB
2, 3
2, 3, 4
18
18
—
—
14
14
—
14
—
—
10
10
2
FD 1 — 35 — — 10 —
2, 3, 4 65 — 35 18 — 10 2
FDE 4 3 65 — 35 18 — —
HFD 1 — 65 — — 10 — 2
2, 3, 4 100 — 65 25 — 22
HFDE 4 3 100 — 65 25 — — 2
FDC 5 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 35 — 22
FDCE 456 3 200 — 100 25 — — 2
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings (P1) 2
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit Breaker Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
250 23
2
Type of Poles 220, 240 380, 415 440 500 125
EDB 2, 3 22 — — — 10 —
EDS 2, 3 42 — — — 10 —
ED 2, 3 65 — — — 10 —
2
EDH 2, 3 100 — — — 10 —
EDC 2, 3 200 — — — 10 — 2
EHD 1 — 14 — — 10 —
2, 3 18 — 14 — — 10 2
FDB 2, 3, 4 18 14 14 14 — 10
FD 1 35 — — — 10 — 2
2, 3, 4 65 35 35 18 — 10
HFD 1 65 — — — 10 — 2
2, 3, 4 100 65 65 25 — 22
FDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 35 — 22 2
210+ and 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories UL 489 Current-Limiting Data 2
Catalog Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
Description 210+ 310+ number
FDC 240 V/200 kA 41.4 1.41
2
Electronic portable test kit ■ ■ MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal ■ ■ 5108A03H01
FDC 480 V/100 kA 38.9 2.50
2
FDC 600 V/35 kA 29.0 3.00
External neutral sensor (80 A) 7 ■ CTF080
Notes 2
External neutral sensor (160 A) 7 ■ CTF160 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
External neutral sensor (225 A) 7 ■ CTF225 2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
2
Compact external neutral sensor (80 A) 7 ■ CTFD080
Compact external neutral sensor (160 A) 7 ■ CTFD160
4 Electronics available on three-pole only, no DC rating for FDE, HFDE, FDCE.
5 Current limiting.
2
Compact external neutral sensor (225 A) 7 ■ 6 Check with Eaton for availability.
2
CTFD225
7 Neutral sensor required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired; sold separately.
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication ■ TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module ■ DIGIVIEW
2
Remote-mount ammeter module ■ DIGIVIEWR06
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-293

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

FDE 210+ and 310+ Specifications FDE 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2 Description Digitrip RMS 210+ Digitrip RMS 310+ FD Frame

2 Breaker type 310+ Settings

Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) Ir
80 A 160 A 225 A
Frame designation FD FD
(All 310+)
2 Frames available 100 A, 150 A, 225 A 80 A, 160 A, 225 A A 15 60 100
Continuous current range (A) 40–225 A 15–225 A B 20 70 110
2 Ground fault pickup (A) N/A 16–225 A C 30 80 125
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100 35, 65, 100
D 40 90 150
2 Protection
E 50 100 160
Ordering options LI, LSI LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG
2 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ No No
F 60 125 175
(or Maintenance Mode) G 70 150 200
2 Interchangeable trip unit No No H (= In) 80 160 225
High load alarm (suffix B20) No No tr = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 2 2 2
2 Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) No No (All 310+)
Position 2 4 4 4
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) No No
Position 3 7 7 7
2 Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) No LSI, LSIG
Position 4 10 10 10
Cause of trip indication No Yes
2 Thru-cover accessories No No
Position 5 12 12 12

Test kit available Yes Yes Position 6 15 15 15

2 Position 7 20 20 20
FDE 210+ Adjustability Specifications Position 8 24 24 24
2 FD Frame Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x 2x 2x
(All 310+)
2
210+ settings 100 A 150 A 225 A Position 2 3x 3x 3x
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup Ir Position 3 4x 4x 4x
(amperes)
2 (all 210+)
A
B
40
50
70
80
100
110
Position 4 5x 5x 5x
Position 5 6x 6x 6x
2 C
D
60
70
90
100
125
150
Position 6 7x 7x 7x
Position 7 8x 8x 8x
2 E 80 110 175
Position 8 10x 10x 10x
F 90 125 200
2 G (= In) 100 150 225 Position 9 12x 12x 12x
Ii (x In)= Instantaneous pickup Ii 100 150 225 tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 67 67
2 (210+ LI version) J–2x 200 300 450
(LS, LSG)
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1
at10x
Inst
at10x
Inst
at10x
Inst
K–2.5x 250 375 565
(LSI, LSIG)
2 L–3x 300 450 675 Position 2 120 120 120
M–3.5x 350 525 790 Position 3 300 300 300
2 N–4x 400 600 900 Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 16 32 45
O–5x 500 750 1125 (LSG, LSIG)
Position 2 24 48 67
2 P–6x 600 900 1350 Position 3 32 64 90
Q–8x 800 1200 1800
2 R–10x 1000 1500 2250
Position 4 48 96 135
Position 5 64 128 180
S–12x 1 1200 1800 2400
2 Fixed instantaneous override (all 210+) 2400 2400 2400
Position 6 80 160 225
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
“Isd (x Ir) / tsd = SD profile 2 Isd / tsd 100 150 225
2 (210+ LSI version) J 2x / 150 N/A 2x / 150
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
2 K
L
2x / 300
2x / I2t
N/A
N/A
2x / 300
2x / I2t Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 1

2 M
N
4x / Inst
4x / 150
N/A
N/A
4x / Inst
4x / 150
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) 2

Notes
2 O 4x / I2t N/A 4x / I2t 1 Not available for FD. Independently adjustable I setting available in LG, NG and
i
P 6x / Inst N/A 6x / Inst RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Q 6x / 300 N/A 6x / 300 2 Maintenance Mode not available for FD frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG

and RG.
R 10x / 150 N/A 10x / 150
2 S 10x / 300 N/A 10x / 300

V4-T2-294 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
FD Frame 2
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2
1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2 2.75 (70.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 2
3 4.13 (105.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 2
2
FD Frame, Three-Pole

Front View Side View

2
2
2
2
On
Off 2
6.00
(152.4)
2
2
2
2
4.13 3.38 2
(104.9) (85.7)
2
Approximate Shipping Weight Lb (kg) 2
FD Frame 2
Number of Poles
Breaker Type 1 2 3 4 2
ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
—
2 (0.9)
3 (1.4)
3 (1.4)
4.5 (2.0)
4.5 (2.0)
—
6 (2.7)
2
FDE, HFDE, FDCE — — 4.5 (2.0) — 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-295

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Typical J-Frame Breaker
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-261
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-278
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes)
2 Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-297
V4-T2-298
2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-301
V4-T2-302
2 Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-303
V4-T2-304
V4-T2-328
2
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
2 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-399
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-412
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 J-Frame (70–250 Amperes)

2 Product Description
● All Eaton’s J-Frame circuit
2 ●
breakers are HACR rated
J-Frame circuit breakers are
available as individual
2 components (frame, trip
unit, terminals), or factory
2 assembled complete
breakers
2 ● J-Frame circuit breakers
with non-interchangeable
2 trip units are suitable for
reverse feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-296 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
Circuit Breaker/Frame 2
JD 3 250 F 2
Circuit Breaker/ Suffix 2
Frame Type Number of Circuit Breaker/Frame C = Non-aluminum terminals
JDB
JD
Poles
2 = 2 poles 070
Ampere Rating F = Frame only
K = High magnetic molded case switch
2
V = 50 °C calibration
3 = 3 poles
2
HJD 090
JDC 4 = 4 poles 100 W = Without terminals
125 X = Load side terminals only
150
175
Y = Line side terminals only
2
200
225
250
2
2
Trip Unit
2
JT 3 250 T
2
Trip Unit Type
JT = Thermal-magnetic Number Trip Unit Rating/ T =Trip unit
Suffix
2
thermal-magnetic
2
of Poles Plug Ampere Rating
2 = 2 poles 070 fixed thermal
3 = 3 poles 090 adj. magnetic
4 = 4 poles 100
125
V =50 °C calibration
(thermal-magnetic 2
150 trip units only)
175
200
2
225
250 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-297

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Product Selection
2
2 Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

2 Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity

Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting Standard
600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated Thermal-Magnetic Terminals Only
2 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
Trip Unit Only 1
See Page
For Use with Standard or V4-T2-300
2 Maximum
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
for Optional
Terminals
Continuous and Terminals 1 and Terminals 1 and Terminals 1
2 Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 Two-Pole
70 JD2070 HJD2070 JDC2070 JT2070T TA250KB 2
2 90 JD2090 HJD2090 JDC2090 JT2090T
100 JD2100 HJD2100 JDC2100 JT2100T
2 125 JD2125 HJD2125 JDC2125 JT2125T

2 150
175
JD2150
JD2175
HJD2150
HJD2175
JDC2150
JDC2175
JT2150T
JT2175T

2 200 JD2200 HJD2200 JDC2200 JT2200T

225 JD2225 HJD2225 JDC2225 JT2225T
2 250 JD2250 HJD2250 JDC2250 JT2250T
Three-Pole
2 70 JD3070 HJD3070 JDC3070 JT3070T TA250KB 2
90
2
JD3090 HJD3090 JDC3090 JT3090T
100 JD3100 HJD3100 JDC3100 JT3100T

2 125 JD3125 HJD3125 JDC3125 JT3125T

150 JD3150 HJD3150 JDC3150 JT3150T
2 175 JD3175 HJD3175 JDC3175 JT3175T
200 JD3200 HJD3200 JDC3200 JT3200T
2 225 JD3225 HJD3225 JDC3225 JT3225T
250
2 Four-Pole 34
JD3250 HJD3250 JDC3250 JT3250T

2 125 — HJD4125 — JT4125T TA250KB 2

150 — — — —
2 175 — — — —
200 JD4200 — — JT4200T
2 225 — — — —

2 250 JD4250 HJD4250 — JT4250T

Notes
2 1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2 Individually packed.

2
3 Fully rated neutral pole with no protection.
4 Neutral is in right pole.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-298 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers— Molded Case Switches
Frame Only Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in 2
Standard Interrupting High Interrupting Ultra High Interrupting applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded
Capacity Capacity Capacity Current Limiting case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components 2
600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
Catalog
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Catalog
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Catalog
switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters 2
Laboratories Standard UL 489.
Number Number Number
Two-Pole
2
JD2250F HJD2250F JDC2250F Molded Case Switches 2
Three-Pole 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Standard
JD3250F HJD3250F JDC3250F Complete Circuit Breaker Only Without
Line and Load Terminals
Terminals Only 2
Four-Pole Maximum
JD4250F HJD4250F JDC4250F
Continuous
Ampere
Suitable for
Reverse Feed Use
See PageV4-T2-300
for Optional Terminals 2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number 2
Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non- Two-Pole
Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Suitable for 250 JD2250KW JDB2250KW TA250KB 1 2
Reverse Feed Application
600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc
Three-Pole
HJD2250KW HJDB2250KW —
2
Complete Circuit Breaker
Maximum Without Line and With Standard Line and 250 JD3250KW JDB3250KW TA250KB 1 2
Continuous Load Terminals Load Terminals Only HJD3250KW HJDB3250KW —
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number Four-Pole 2
250 1

2
JD4250KW JDB4250KW TA250KB
Two-Pole
HJD4250KW HJDB4250KW —
70 JDB2070W JDB2070
90 JDB2090W JDB2090 Notes
1 Individually packed.
2
100 JDB2100W JDB2100
125 JDB2125W JDB2125
Molded case switches may open above 2500 amperes. 2
150
175
JDB2150W
JDB2175W
JDB2150
JDB2175
2
200 JDB2200W JDB2200 2
225 JDB2225W JDB2225
250 JDB2250W JDB2250 2
2
Three-Pole
70 JDB3070W JDB3070
90 JDB3090W JDB3090
2
100 JDB3100W JDB3100
125 JDB3125W JDB3125 2
150 JDB3150W JDB3150
175 JDB3175W JDB3175 2
200
2
JDB3200W JDB3200
225 JDB3225W JDB3225
250 JDB3250W JDB3250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-299

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
Line and Load Terminals Unless otherwise specified, J- Ordering Information
2 Eaton’s line and load terminals Frame circuit breaker line and J-Frame circuit breakers use
provide wire connecting load terminals are shipped Cu/AI terminals as standard.
2 capabilities for specific ranges separately for field installation. When optional copper-only
of continuous current ratings The bottom of the standard terminals are required, order
2 and wire types. All terminals
comply with Underwriters
TA250KB terminal contains a by catalog number. Specify if
factory installation is required.
recess that is positioned over
2 Laboratories Standards UL
486A and UL 486B and CSA
the J-Frame circuit breaker
terminal conductor.
Standard C22.2 No. 65, or
2 Electrical Bulletin 1165.

2
2 Collar

2 Collar

2
2 Slotted Nut
Slotted
Screw Screw

2 T250KB Terminal TA250KB Terminal (Standard)

2
Line and Load Terminals
2 Maximum Terminal
Breaker Body Wire AWG Wire Range/ Metric Wire Catalog
2 Amperes Material Type No. Conductors Range mm2 Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
2 250 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–350 kcmil 25–185 TA250KB

2
Optional Cu Pressure Terminals
250 Stainless Steel Cu 4–350 kcmil 25–185 T250KB

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-300 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories 2
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
2
JD Frame Accessories 2
Two-, Three-Pole Four-Pole
2
Reference
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral

2
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-418 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-420 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-420 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-422 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ — 2
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-425 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-428 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ — 2
Undervoltage release mechanism ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
External Accessories
V4-T2-432
2
End cap kit V4-T2-453 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Plug nut V4-T2-454 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-454 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-455 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-456 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Terminal shields
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-457
V4-T2-458
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-459 — ■ — — ■ — — 2
Padlockable handle block V4-T2-459 — ■ — — ■ — —
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-460 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ — 2
Cylinder lock ❏ — ❏ — — — —
2
V4-T2-460
Key interlock kit V4-T2-461 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-462 ● ● ● — — — —
2
Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T2-464 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-464 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-466 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-467 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Handle mechanisms ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle extension
V4-T2-544
V4-T2-556 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-469 ● ● ● — — — —
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-259 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position 2
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-301

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Technical Data and Specifications

2
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
2 Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 480 600
Volts DC
125 250 12

2 JDB 2, 3 65 35 18 — 10
JD 2, 3, 4 65 35 18 — 10
2 HJD 2, 3, 4 100 65 25 — 22
JDC 3 2, 3, 4 200 100 35 — 22
2
2 IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC

2
Type of Poles 240 380 415 600 125 250 12
JD 2, 3, 4 65 35 35 — — 10

2 HJD 2, 3, 4 100 65 65 — — 22
JDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 — — 22
2
2 UL 489 Current-Limiting Data
Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
2 JDC 240 V/200 kA 42.6 1.36

2 JDC
JDC
480 V/100 kA
600 V/35 kA
40.0
31.9
3.00
3.10

2 Notes
1 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.

2 2 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.

3 Current limiting.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-302 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
JD Frame 2
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 4.13 (105.0) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (104.1) 2
4 5.50 (139.7) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (104.1)
2
JD-Frame, Three-Pole 2
2
Front View

Side View
2
Front View Cutout 4.13
(104.8)

2
1.56
(39.7)
0.34 R 0.78
(8.7 R) (19.8)
2
CL Handle

2.92
3.94
(100.0)
(74.2) 2
10.00 ON

CL Breaker
0.88
(22.2) (254.0) 2
3.33
2
0.19 R
(4.8) R (84.5)
0.72 OFF
(18.2)
0.50 (12.7)
Diameter 2.75
1.38
(34.9) 2
3 Megger Holes (69.9)
if Required 3.50
(88.9)
1.75
(44.5) 2
4.06 2
(103.2)
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lb (kg) 2
JD Frame
2
Breaker Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
2
JDB 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) — — — — — — —
JD 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) 13.25 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) 10.00 (4.5) 10.50 (4.8) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0) 2
HJD 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) 13.25 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) 10.00 (4.5) 10.50 (4.8) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0)
JDC 12.25 (5.6) 13.50 (6.1) 14.25 (6.5) 10.00 (4.5) 11.00 (5.0) 11.50 (5.2) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-303

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-261
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-278
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-296
2 K-Frame (70–400 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-305
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-307
V4-T2-323
2 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-324
V4-T2-327
V4-T2-328
2
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
2 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-399
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-412
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 K-Frame (70–400 Amperes)

2 Product Description
● All Eaton K-Frame circuit
2 ●
breakers are HACR rated
K-Frame circuit breakers are
available as individual
2 components (frame, trip
unit, terminals), or factory
2 assembled complete
breakers
2 ● K-Frame circuit breakers
with non-interchangeable
2 trip units are suitable for
reverse feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-304 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
K-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
2
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frames 1
2
KD 3 400 F
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type Number Circuit Breaker/ C = Copper terminals
Suffix
2
DK of Poles Frame Ampere E = 50% protected neutral pole (four-pole electronic
KD 2 = Two-pole Rating trip unit circuit breaker only) 2
KDB 3 = Three-pole 100 F = Frame only (400 A only)
HKD
KDC
4 = Four-pole 125
150
K
V
= High-magnetic molded-case switch
= 50 ° calibration (thermal-magnetic trip 2
175 units only)
200
225
W
X
= Without terminals
= Load terminals only
2
Y = Line side terminals only
2
250
300 Blank = Standard load and line side terminals
350
400
2
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 2
KT 3 400 F 2
Trip Unit Type Suffix
2
KT = Thermal-magnetic T = Trip unit only
2
Number Circuit Breaker/
of Poles Frame Ampere
2 = Two-pole Rating
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
100
125
2
150
175
200
2
225
250 2
300
350
400
2
Notes 2
1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F or HKD3400F.

Ampere rating available with electronic trip unit only. 2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-305

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

K-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 1

2
2 310+ Circuit Breakers 2

2 KDB 3 400 F T36 ZG W

2 Performance at
480 Vac
Terminals
Number Feature W = No terminals
2 KDB= 35 kAIC
HKDB= 65 kAIC
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Ampere Rating
125 Frame Designation
Blank= No feature
B20 = High load alarm
L = Line and load

CKDB= 35 kAIC B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip

2
250 F
100% rated 400 B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
CHKDB= 65 kAIC ZG = Zone selective interlocking
100% rated
2 Trip Unit
T33=310+ Electronic LS
2 T32=310+ Electronic LSI
T35=310+ Electronic LSG
T36=310+ Electronic LSIG
2 T38=310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode
T39=310+ Electronic ALSIG with Maintenance Mode

2
310+ Electronic Trip Units 3
2
KES 3 400 LSIG ZG
2
2 Trip Unit Type
KES Number
Feature
Blank= No feature
of Poles B20 = High load alarm
2 3 = Three-pole
Ampere Rating
125 Trip Unit B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 2
4 = Four-pole 250 B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip 2
LS= 310+ Electronic LS
2 400 LSI=310+ Electronic LSI
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
LSG=310+ Electronic LSG 2
2 LSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG 2
ALSI=310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
ALSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 2
2
2
K-Frame with OPTIM Trip Unit Technology
2
2 OPTIM Circuit Breakers

2 KD 3 125 T5 7 W

2 Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
Suffix
Number Circuit Breaker/Frame Trip Model Trip Type W = Without terminals
2 KD
HKD
of Poles
3 = Three-pole 125
Ampere Rating T5= Model 550
T10= Model 1050
2 = LSI
6 = LSIG
KDC 250 7 = LSIA
2 CKD
CHKD
400

2
2 Notes
1 Cannot combine ‘B2X’ suffixes with ‘B2X’ suffixes.

2 2 Not available in four-pole configurations.

3 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F, HKD3400F, etc.

2
2
2

V4-T2-306 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units 2
Standard Interrupting
Capacity
High Interrupting
Capacity
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting 2
600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated 600 Vac Rated Thermal-Magnetic
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
Trip Unit Only 1
Standard Terminals Only
2
2
Circuit Consisting Circuit Consisting Circuit Consisting For Use with Standard
Maximum of Frame, Trip Unit of Frame, Trip Unit of Frame, Trip Unit or High or Ultra High See Page V4-T2-322 for
Continuous and Terminals 1 and Terminals 1 and Terminals 1 Interrupting Frames Optional Terminals
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Two-Pole 2
100 KD2100 HKD2100 KDC2100 KT2100T TA300K 2
125 KD2125 HKD2125 KDC2125 KT2125T TA300K 2 2
150 TA300K 2
2
KD2150 HKD2150 KDC2150 KT2150T
175 KD2175 HKD2175 KDC2175 KT2175T TA300K 2
200 KD2200 HKD2200 KDC2200 KT2200T TA300K 2
2
225 KD2225 HKD2225 KDC2225 KT2225T TA300K 2
250 KD2250 HKD2250 KDC2250 KT2250T TA350K 2 2
300 KD2300 HKD2300 KDC2300 KT2300T TA350K 2
350 KD2350 HKD2350 KDC2350 KT2350T TA350K 2 2
400
2
KD2400 HKD2400 KDC2400 KT2400T 2TA400K 3
Three-Pole
100 KD3100 HKD3100 KDC3100 KT3100T TA300K 2
2
125 KD3125 HKD3125 KDC3125 KT3125T TA300K 2
150 KD3150 HKD3150 KDC3150 KT3150T TA300K 2 2
175 KD3175 HKD3175 KDC3175 KT3175T TA300K 2
200 KD3200 HKD3200 KDC3200 KT3200T TA300K 2 2
225
250
KD3225
KD3250
HKD3225
HKD3250
KDC3225
KDC3250
KT3225T
KT3250T
TA300K 2
TA350K 2
2
300 KD3300 HKD3300 KDC3300 KT3300T TA350K 2 2
350 KD3350 HKD3350 KDC3350 KT3350T TA350K 2
400 KD3400 HKD3400 KDC3400 KT3400T 3TA400K 3 2
Four-Pole
100 KD4100 HKD4100 KDC4100 KT3100T TA300K 2
2
125 KD4125 HKD4125 KDC4125 KT3125T TA300K 2
2
175 KD4175 HKD4175 KDC4175 KT3175T TA300K 2
200 KD4200 HKD4200 KDC4200 KT3200T TA300K 2 2
225 KD4225 HKD4225 KDC4225 KT3225T TA300K 2
250 KD4250 HKD4250 KDC4250 KT3250T TA350K 2 2
300
2
KD4300 HKD4300 KDC4300 KT3300T TA350K 2
350 KD4350 HKD4350 KDC4350 KT3350T TA350K 2
400 KD4400 HKD4400 KDC4400 KT3400T 4TA400K 3
2
Notes
1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating. 2
2 Individually packed.
3 2TA400K, 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-307

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only

2 Ultra High Interrupting
Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Capacity Current Limiting
2 600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 Two-Pole
KD2400F HKD2400F KDC2400F
2 Three-Pole
KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F
2 Four-Pole

2 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F

2 Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units

2 Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-325.

Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Standard Options
2 Ultra High
Interrupting LS LSI LSG LSIG
Standard High Capacity Adjustable Independently
2 Interrupting
Capacity
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting Adjustable Independently
Short Time
Pickup with
Adjustable
Short Time

2 Max.
Cont.
600 Vac
Rated
600 Vac
Rated
600 Vac
Rated
Short Time
Pickup with
Adjustable
Short Time
I2t Short
Delay and
Pickup and
Delay and
Ampere 35 kAIC at 65 kAIC at 100 kAIC I2t Short Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for
2 Rating
at 40 °C
480 Vac
Catalog Number
480 Vac at 480 Vac Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Catalog Number Information

2 125 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG LGFCT125 See Page
V4-T2-322
250 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG LGFCT250
2 400 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG LGFCT400

2 Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Four-Pole 45

2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Standard Options
Ultra High
2 Interrupting LS LSI LSG LSIG
Standard High Capacity Adjustable Independently
Interrupting Interrupting Current Short Time Adjustable
2 Capacity
600 Vac
Capacity
600 Vac
Limiting
600 Vac
Adjustable
Short Time
Independently
Adjustable
Pickup with
I2t Short
Short Time
Pickup and
Max.
Rated Rated Rated Pickup with Short Time Delay and Delay and
2 Cont.
Ampere 35 kAIC at 65 kAIC at 100 kAIC I2t Short Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for
Rating 480 Vac 480 Vac at 480 Vac Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal

2 at 40 °C Catalog Number Catalog Number Information

125 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4125LS KES4125LSI — — — See Page
2 250 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4250LS KES4250LSI — — —
V4-T2-322

400 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4400LS KES4400LSI — — —

2 Notes

2 1 For AC use only.

2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.

2 4 Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use corresponding three-pole trip unit if protected neutral pole is not required.
5 Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard. For 50% rated protection on neutral pole, add Suffix E to four-pole trip unit catalog number.

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-308 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Type KDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-325. 2
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1 2
Standard Optional
LS LSI LSG
Adjustable Short Time
LSIG
2
Maximum
Adjustable Short Time Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short Independently Adjustable
Continuous
Ampere Pickup with I2t Short Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Short Time Pickup and Neutral CT for 2
Rating Number Delay Ramp Delay Protection Ground Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
at 40 °C of Poles Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
2
125 3 KDB3125FT33W KDB3125FT32W KDB3125FT35W KDB3125FT36W LGFCT125 See Page
250 3 KDB3250FT33W KDB3250FT32W KDB3250FT35W KDB3250FT36W LGFCT250
V4-T2-323
2
400 3 KDB3400FT33W KDB3400FT32W KDB3400FT35W KDB3400FT36W LGFCT400
2
Type HKDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed 2
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-325.
2
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI LSG LSIG
2
Maximum
Continuous Adjustable Short Time
Adjustable Short Time
Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short Independently Adjustable 2
Ampere Pickup with I2t Short Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Short Time Pickup and Neutral CT for
Rating Number Delay Ramp Delay Protection Ground Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal 2
at 40 °C of Poles Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
125 3 HKDB3125FT33W HKDB3125FT32W HKDB3125FT35W HKDB3125FT36W LGFCT125 See Page 2
V4-T2-323
250 3 HKDB3250FT33W HKDB3250FT32W HKDB3250FT35W HKDB3250FT36W LGFCT250
400 3 HKDB3400FT33W HKDB3400FT32W HKDB3400FT35W HKDB3400FT36W LGFCT400 2
2
100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C 2
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units.
2
100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers—Three-Pole
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-325. 2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 2
Standard Options

Standard High
Adjustable
Short Time
Independently
Adjustable
2
Interrupting Interrupting Adjustable Independently Pickup with Short Time
Maximum Capacity Capacity Short Time Adjustable I2t Short Pickup and 2
Continuous Pickup with Short Time Delay and Delay and
Ampere
Rating
35 kAIC at
480 Vac
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Pickup and
Delay
Ground Fault
Protection
Ground Fault
Protection
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
2
at 40 °C Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
125 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG LGFCT125 See Page
2
V4-T2-322
250 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG LGFCT250
2
400 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG LGFCT400

Notes 2
1 For AC use only.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-309

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2 Suitable for reverse feed application.

2
Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2 240 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc

2 Maximum
Continuous
Complete Circuit Breaker
Without Line and With Line With Standard Line and
Complete Circuit Breaker
Without Line and With Standard Line
Load Terminals Terminals Only Load Terminals Only Load Terminals and Load Terminals
2
Ampere
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number Number
2 Two-Pole
100 — — — KDB2100W KDB2100
2 125 — — — KDB2125W KDB2125

2 150 — — — KDB2150W KDB2150

175 — — — KDB2175W KDB2175

2 200 — — — KDB2200W KDB2200

225 — — — KDB2225W KDB2225
2 250 DK2250W DK2250Y DK2250 KDB2250W KDB2250
300
2
DK2300W DK2300Y DK2300 KDB2300W KDB2300
350 DK2350W DK2350Y DK2350 KDB2350W KDB2350

2 400 DK2400W DK2400Y DK2400 KDB2400W KDB2400

Three-Pole
2 100 — — — KDB3100W KDB3100
125 — — — KDB3125W KDB3125
2 150 — — — KDB3150W KDB3150

2 175
200
—
—
—
—
—
—
KDB3175W
KDB3200W
KDB3175
KDB3200

2 225 — — — KDB3225W KDB3225

250 DK3250W DK3250Y DK3250 KDB3250W KDB3250
2 300 DK3300W DK3300Y DK3300 KDB3300W KDB3300
350 DK3350W DK3350Y DK3350 KDB3350W KDB3350
2 400 DK3400W DK3400Y DK3400 KDB3400W KDB3400

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-310 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case components and are of the 2
switches are used as high instantaneous automatic
compact switches in type. Molded case switches 2
applications requiring high are listed in accordance with
current switching capabilities. Underwriters Laboratories 2
Molded case switches are Standard UL 489.
constructed of circuit breaker
2
2
Molded Case Switches
240 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 2
Complete Circuit Breaker
Maximum
Continuous
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Standard Line and
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Standard Line and
with Standard Line and
Load Terminals. Suitable for
2
Load Terminals Load Terminals Reverse Feed Use
2
Ampere
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number
Two-Pole 2
400 DK2400K KD2400K KDB2400K
— HKD2400K HKDB2400K
2
Three-Pole
2
400 DK3400K KD3400K KDB3400K
— HKD3400K HKDB3400K 2
Four-Pole
400 — KD4400K KDB4400K 2
2
— HKD4400K HKDB4400K

Note
Molded case switches may open above 4000 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-311

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.

2
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 KD3125T52W KD3125T56W KD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70

2 90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100

2 110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
2 250 KD3250T52W KD3250T56W KD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125
150
2
ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175

2 200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
2 250 ORPK025A250
400 KD3400T52W KD3400T56W KD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
2 225 ORPK40A225

2 250
300
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300

2 350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.

2 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-312 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 HKD3125T52W HKD3125T56W HKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
2
90 ORPK125A90
2
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110 2
125 ORPK125A125
250 HKD3250T52W HKD3250T56W HKD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125 2
150
2
ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
2
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250 2
400 HKD3400T52W HKD3400T56W HKD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225 2
250
300
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
2
350 ORPK40A350 2
400 ORPK40A400

Notes
2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-313

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 KDC3125T52W KDC3125T56W KDC3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70

2 90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
2 110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
2 250 KDC3250T52W KDC3250T56W KDC3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125
150
2 175
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175

2 200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
2 250 ORPK025A250
400 KDC3400T52W KDC3400T56W KDC3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
2 225 ORPK40A225

2 250
300
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300

2 350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-314 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 2
2
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
2
L
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 2
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 KD3125T106W KD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
2
90 ORPK125A90
2
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110 2
125 ORPK125A125
250 KD3250T106W KD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125 2
150
2
ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
2
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250 2
400 KD3400T106W KD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A22 2
250
300
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
2
350 ORPK40A350 2
400 ORPK40A400

Notes 2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Factory sealed. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-315

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 2
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 HKD3125T106W HKD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70

2 90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
2 110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
2 250 HKD3250T106W HKD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125
150
2 175
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175

2 200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
2 250 ORPK025A250
400 HKD3400T106W HKD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
2 225 ORPK40A225

2 250
300
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300

2 350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 2 Factory sealed.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-316 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 2
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 KDC3125T106W KDC3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
2
90 ORPK125A90
2
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110 2
125 ORPK125A125
250 KDC3250T106W KDC3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125 2
150
2
ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
2
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250 2
400 KDC3400T106W KDC3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225 2
250
300
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
2
350 ORPK40A350 2
400 ORPK40A400

Notes
2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Factory sealed. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-317

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.

2
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CKD3125T52W CKD3125T56W CKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70

2 90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100

2 110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
2 250 CKD3250T52W CKD3250T56W CKD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125
150
2
ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175

2 200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
2 250 ORPK025A250
400 CKD3400T52W CKD3400T56W CKD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
2 225 ORPK40A225

2 250
300
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300

2 350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.

2 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number

(refer to Page V4-T2-436).

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-318 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CHKD3125T52W CHKD3125T56W CHKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
2
90 ORPK125A90
2
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110 2
125 ORPK125A125
250 CHKD3250T52W CHKD3250T56W CHKD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125 2
150
2
ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
2
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250 2
400 CHKD3400T52W CHKD3400T56W CHKD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225 2
250
300
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
2
350 ORPK40A350 2
400 ORPK40A400

Notes
2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-319

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.

2
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 2
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CKD3125T106W CKD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70

2 90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100

2 110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
2 250 CKD3250T106W CKD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125
150
2
ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175

2 200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
2 250 ORPK025A250
400 CKD3400T106W CKD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
2 225 ORPK40A225

2 250
300
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300

2 350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.

2 2 Factory sealed.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-320 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 2
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CHKD3125T106W CHKD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
2
90 ORPK125A90
2
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110 2
125 ORPK125A125
250 CHKD3250T106W CHKD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125 2
150
2
ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
2
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250 2
400 CHKD3400T106W CHKD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225 2
250
300
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
2
350 ORPK40A350 2
400 ORPK40A400

Notes
2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Factory sealed. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-321

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Guide

2
Line and Load Terminals UL 486A and UL 486B and Ordering Information
2 Eaton’s line and load CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65, K-Frame circuit breakers use
terminals provide wire or Electrical Bulletin 1165. Cu/AI terminals as standard.
2 connecting capabilities for Unless otherwise specified,
K-Frame circuit breaker line
When optional copper or Cu/
specific ranges of continuous AI terminals are required,
2 current ratings and wire
types. All terminals comply
and load terminals are
shipped separately for field
order by catalog number.
Specify if factory installation
installation.
2 with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards
is required.

2
2
2
2
2 Tab is 1/4 x.032

TA401K TA400K, T400K TA350K, T350K TA300K, T300K T400KCW, TA400KCW, TA402K, T402K
2 TA401KCW

2 Line and Load Terminals

Terminals with
2 Maximum Terminal AWG Wire
Terminal Control Wire Termination
Breaker Body Wire Range/No. Metric Wire Catalog Catalog
2 Amperes Material Type Conductors Range mm2 Number Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
2 225 Aluminum Cu/AI 3–350 (1) 35–185 TA300K 1 —
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 250–500 (1) 120–240 TA350K 1 —
2 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–250 (2) 95–120 2TA400K 23 2TA400KCW 23

2 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–250 (2) 95–120 3TA400K 24 3TA400KCW 24

400 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–250 (2) 95–120 4TA400K 56 4TA400KCW 56

2 Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals

225 Copper Cu 3–350 (1) 35–185 T300K1 —
2 400 Copper Cu 250–500 (1) 120–240 T350K 1 —
400 Copper Cu 3/0–250 (2) 95–120
2
2T400K 3 2T400KCW 23
3T400K 4 3T400KCW 24

2 4T400K 5 4T400KCW 56
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 2/0–250 (2) 70–120 2TA401K 23 2TA401KCW 23
2 or
2/0–500 (1)
70–240 3TA401K 24 3TA401KCW 24
70–240 4TA401K 56 4TA401KCW 56
2 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 500–750 (1) 300–400 2TA402K 23 —

2 3TA402K 24
4TA402K 56
—
—

2 400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) — 2T402K 23 —

3T402K 24 —
2 4T402K 56 —

2 Notes
1 Individually packed.
2 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.

2 3 Two-pole kit.
4 Three-pole kit.

2 5 Four-pole kit.
6 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers.

V4-T2-322 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
2
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
2
KD Frame Accessories 2
Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole Four-Pole
Description
Reference
Page Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral 2
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-419 — ■ ❏ — ❏ ■ — — — 2
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-419 — — ❏ — ❏ ■ — — —
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-421 — ■ ■ — ■ ■ — ■ — 2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-421 — — ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-421 — — ■ — ■ ■ — ■ — 2
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-422 — — ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
Shunt trip—standard 2 V4-T2-425 — ■ ■ — ■ ■ — ■ — 2
Shunt trip—low energy 2 V4-T2-428 — — ■ — ■ ■ — — —
Undervoltage release mechanism 2 V4-T2-433 — ■ ■ — ■ ■ — — — 2
PowerNet or zone interlock kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T2-436 — — — — ■ — — —
External Accessories 2
End cap kit V4-T2-453 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Keeper nut V4-T2-453 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-454 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal adapter
Multiwire connectors
V4-T2-454
V4-T2-455
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Rear fed terminals
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-455
V4-T2-456
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Terminal shields
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-458
V4-T2-458
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Non-padlockable handle block
Padlockable handle block
V4-T2-459
V4-T2-459
■
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
—
—
—
—
■
—
—
—
—
—
2
Padlockable handle lock hasp
Cylinder lock
V4-T2-460
V4-T2-460
—
❏
■
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
—
—
—
❏
—
—
—
2
Key Interlock kit ■ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-461
V4-T2-462 — — ● ● ● — — — —
2
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers — — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
V4-T2-462
Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T2-463 — — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in adapters ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
V4-T2-464
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-466 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-467 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-544 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Handle extension V4-T2-556 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-469 — — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-469 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
OPTIM System Components Three Poles 2
Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-469 — — — — — — — — —
Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-470 — — — — — — — — — 2
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-470 — — — — — — — — —
Modifications (Refer to Eaton) 2
Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-259 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position 2
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available 2
Notes
1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on KES or OPTIM trip units. Standard internal accessories cannot be mounted in right pole on any K-Frame OPTIM trip unites. Special OPTIM
2
ground fault and zone interlock accessories are available for field installation in the right pole of K-Frame 550 OPTIM trip units. Factory installed 2a/2b and bell/aux are available for factory
installation. K-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 1050 trip units include aux-bell alarm in the right pole. 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-323

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories

2 Description Catalog Number

2 Electronic portable test kit MTST230V 1

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01

2 External neutral sensor, 400 A LGFCT400 2

External neutral sensor, 250 A LGFCT250 2
2 External neutral sensor, 125 A LGFCT125 2
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
2 Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 3
2
2 Technical Data and Specifications

2 NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
2 Circuit
Breaker Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
Type of Poles 4 240 277 480 600 250 56
2 DK 2, 3 65 — — — 10
KDB 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 10
2 KD 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 10
HKD, HKDB 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 22
2 KDC 7 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 65 22

2 CKD
CHKD
3
3
65
100
—
—
35
65
25
35
—
—

2 IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2 Circuit
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
Breaker Number
2 Type of Poles 4 240 380 415 440 500 600 250 56
DK 2, 3 65 — — — — — 10

2 KDB 2, 3, 4 65 40 40 — — — 10
KD 2, 3, 4 65 40 40 — — — 10
2 HKD, HKDB 2, 3, 4 100 65 65 — — — 22
KDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 — — — 22
2
UL 489 Current-Limiting Data
2 Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
KDC 240 V/200 kA 56.00 2.30
2 KDC 480 V/100 kA 53.30 5.60

2 KDC 600 V/50 kA 43.40 5.40

Notes
2 1 MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac.
2 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers.

2 3 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.

4 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
5 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
2 6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
7 Current limiting.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-324 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
310+ Specifications 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
2
K-Frame
Breaker Type 310+ Settings 125 A 250 A 400 A
2
Frame K Ir = continuous current or Ir \ In
Frames available 125 A, 250 A, 400 A
long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
A (=Ir) 55 100 160 2
Continuous current range (A) 55–400 A B (=Ir) 60 125 200
Ground fault pickup (A) 50–400 A C (=Ir) 70 150 225
2
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
100% rated
35, 65, 100
Yes
D (=Ir) 80 160 250
2
E (=Ir) 90 175 300
Protection F (=Ir) 100 200 315 2
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG G (=Ir) 110 225 350
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG H (=Ir=In) 125 250 400 2
Interchangeable trip unit Yes tr = long delay time (seconds) 2 2 2 2
High load alarm, trip (suffix B20) 1 Yes (All 310+)
4 4 4 4
2
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 7 7 7 7
2
1

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 10 10 10 10

Zone selective interlock (suffix ZG) 1 LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG 12 12 12 12 2
Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) 15 15 15 15
Thru-cover accessories No 20 20 20 20 2
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (amperes)
24
Position 1
24
2
24
2x
24
2x
2
(All 310+)
Position 2 3 3x 3x 2
Position 3 4 4x 4x
Position 4 5 5x 5x 2
Position 5 6 6x 6x
Position 6 7 7x 7x
2
Position 7 8 8x 8x
2
Position 8 10 10x 10x
Position 9 12 12x 12x 2
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds) Fixed 67 @10x
(LS and LSG) 2
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 2 120 2
Position 3 300
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 25 50 80
2
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 37.5 75 120
2
Position 3 50 100 160
Position 4 75 150 240 2
Position 5 100 200 320
Position 6 125 250 400 2
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 120
2
Position 3 300
2
Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 2

Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) Fixed 312 625 1000 2
(310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)

Notes 2
1 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2 Not available for KD. Independently adjustable I setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and

ALSIG trip units.

i 2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-325

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Specifications
2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050

2 rms sensing
Breaker Type
Yes Yes

2 Frame
Ampere range
K
125–400 A
K
125–400 A

2 Interrupting rating at 480 volts

Protection
35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA)

2 Ordering options
Fixed rated plug (In)
LSI, LSI(A), LSIG
Yes
LSI(A), LSIG
Yes

2 Overtemperature trip
Long Delay Protection (L)
Yes Yes

2 Adjustable rating plug (In)

Long delay pickup
No
0.4–1.0 x (In)
No
0.4–1.0 x (In)

2 Long delay time I2t

Long delay time I4t
2–24 seconds
1–5 seconds
2–24 seconds
1–5 seconds

2 Long delay thermal memory

High load alarm
Yes
0.5–1.0 x Ir
Yes
0.5–1.0 x Ir

2 Short Delay Protection (S)

Short delay pickup 150–800% x (Ir) 150–800% x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t
2 Short delay time flat
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms

2 Short delay time zone selective interlocking

Instantaneous Protection (I)
Yes 1 Yes

Instantaneous pickup 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In)

2 Discriminator Yes Yes
Instantaneous override Yes Yes
2 Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground fault alarm 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
2 Ground fault pickup 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2 Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes
2 Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes

2
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes
2 Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes
Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 1 Yes
2 Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included
System Monitoring
2 Digital display Yes 2 Yes 2
Current Yes Yes
2 Power and energy No Yes
Power quality—harmonics No Yes
2 Power factor No Yes
Communications
2 PowerNet Yes 3 Yes
Testing
2 Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet

2 Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
2 Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
2 Notes
1 Zone interlock kit.

2 2 By OPTIMizer/BIM.
3 Eaton’s PowerNet kit.

V4-T2-326 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
KD Frame 2
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth 2
2, 3 5.50 (149.7) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1)
4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1) 2
KD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
2

Front View
Side View 2
Front Cover Cutout 5.49
4.31 2
(109.6)
2
(139.4)
0.34 R
(8.7 R)
2
3.75

CL Handle
(95.3)
2
0.83

0.19 R
(4.8 R)
(21.0) 1.64
(41.7)
ON
2
1.25
2
10.13
(31.8) (257.2)
1.31
OFF
(33.3)
2.63
(66.7)
2
2.39
4.78
(121.5)
(60.7) 2
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lb (kg) 2
KD Frame
2
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 1
Breaker
Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
2
DK 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) — — — — 2
KDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) — — — —
KD 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7) 2
HKD, HKDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7)
KDC 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7)
2
Note
1 Weights shown are for thermal-magnetic trip units. Three-pole electronic trip units weigh 2.5 lb (1.1 kg).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-327

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-261
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-278
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-296
2 K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes)
V4-T2-304

2 Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-329
V4-T2-331
2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-347
V4-T2-349
V4-T2-353
2
Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
2 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-399
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-412
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes)

2 Product Description
● All Eaton L-Frame circuit
Standards and Certifications
● CE marked
2 ●
breakers are HACR rated
L-Frame circuit breakers are
available as individual
2 components (frame, trip
unit, terminals), or factory
2 assembled complete
breakers
2 ● L-Frame circuit breakers
with non-interchangeable
2 trip units are suitable for
reverse feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-328 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
LD-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1 2
LD 3 600 F 2
2
Circuit Breaker/ Suffix

LDB
Frame Type Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
C = Copper terminals
F = Frame only (600 A only)
2
LD 2 = Two-pole Rating K = High magnetic molded case switch
HLD 3 = Three-pole 300 V = 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) 2
LDC 4 = Four-pole 350 W = Without terminals
CLD
CHLD
400
450
X = Load side terminals only
Y = Line side terminals only 2
CLDC 500
600 2
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 2
LT 3 400 T 2
Trip Unit Type Suffix 2
LT = Thermal-magnetic Number Trip Unit Rating/Plug T =Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal adjustable
of Poles Ampere Rating magnetic
V =50 °C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
2
2 = Two-pole 300
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
350
400 2
450
500
600
2
Note 2
1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-329

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

LD-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology

2 310+ Circuit Breakers
2
LDB 3 600 F T36 B22ZG W
2
2 Performance at 480 Vac
LDB=35 kAIC
Number
of Poles
Terminals
W = No terminals
HLDB=65 kAIC 3 = Three-pole
2 LDCB=100 kAIC 4 = Four-pole
CLDB=35 kAIC, 100% rated Trip Unit Features
2 CHLDB=65 kAIC, 100% rated
CLDCB=100 kAIC, 100% rated Amperes
T33=310+ Electronic LS
T32=310+ Electronic LSI
Blank=No feature
B20=High load alarm
600 T35=310+ Electronic LSG 1 B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip 1
2 T36=310+ Electronic LSIG 1 B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip 1
T38=310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode ZG= Zone selective interlocking
2 F
Designation T39=310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1

2 310+ Electronic Trip Units 2

2 LES 3 600 LSIG B22ZG

2
2
Trip Unit Type Features
LES Number Trip Unit Blank=No feature
of Poles LS= 310+ Electronic LS B20=High load alarm
2 3 = Three-pole Amperes LSI=310+ Electronic LSI B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip 1
B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip 1
4 = Four-pole 600 LSG=310+ Electronic LSG 1
ZG= Zone selective interlocking
2 LSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG 1
ALSI=310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
ALSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1
2
2 LD-Frame with OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Technology
OPTIM Circuit Breakers
2
LD 3 125 T5 7 W
2
2 Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type Number Trip Type
Suffix
W = Without terminals
of Poles
2 2 = LSI (550 only)
LD Circuit Breaker/
HLD 3 = Three-pole Frame Ampere Rating 6 = LSIG
LDC 125 (Available on Model 1050 only) 7 = LSIA
2 CLD
CHLD
250 (Available on Model 1050 only)
400 Trip Model
CLDC 600
2 T5 = Model 550
T10 = Model 1050

2 Notes
1 Not available in four-pole configurations.

2 2 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-330 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Standard Interrupting High Interrupting Ultra High Interrupting 2
Capacity Capacity Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
2
Maximum
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting of Factory Assembled Factory Assembled Circuit For Use with Standard
Standard Terminals Only
2
Continuous Frame, Trip Unit and Circuit Consisting of Frame, Consisting of Frame, or High or Ultra High See Page V4-T2-346 for
Ampere
Rating
Terminals
Catalog
Trip Unit and Terminals
Catalog
Trip Unit and Terminals
Catalog
Interrupting Frames
Catalog
Optional Terminals
Catalog
2
2
at 40 °C 1 Number Number Number Number Number
Two-Pole
300 LD2300 HLD2300 LDC2300 LT2300T TA602LD 2 2
350 LD2350 HLD2350 LDC2350 LT2350T TA602LD 2
400 LD2400 HLD2400 LDC2400 LT2400T TA602LD 2 2
450 LD2450 HLD2450 LDC2450 LT2450T TA602LD 2
500 LD2500 HLD2500 LDC2500 LT2500T TA602LD 2
2
600 LD2600 HLD2600 LDC2600 LT2600T 2TA603LDK 3
2
Three-Pole
300 LD3300 HLD3300 LDC3300 LT3300T TA602LD 2 2
350 LD3350 HLD3350 LDC3350 LT3350T TA602LD 2
400 LD3400 HLD3400 LDC3400 LT3400T TA602LD 2 2
450
2
LD3450 HLD3450 LDC3450 LT3450T TA602LD 2

500 LD3500 HLD3500 LDC3500 LT3500T TA602LD 2

600 LD3600 HLD3600 LDC3600 LT3600T 3TA603LDK 3
2
Four-Pole 4
300 LD4300 HLD4300 LDC4300 LT4300T TA602LD 2 2
350 LD4350 HLD4350 LDC4350 LT4350T TA602LD 2
400 LD4400 HLD4400 LDC4400 LT4400T TA602LD 2 2
450
2
LD4450 HLD4450 LDC4450 LT4450T TA602LD 2

500 LD4500 HLD4500 LDC4500 LT4500T TA602LD 2

600 LD4600 HLD4600 LDC4600 LT4600T 4TA603LDK 3 2
2
Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only

Standard Interrupting High Interrupting Capacity

Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
2
Capacity 600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
Catalog Catalog Catalog
Number Number Number 2
Two-Pole
LD2600F HLD2600F LDC2600F 2
Three-Pole
LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F
2
Four-Pole 2
LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F

Notes 2
1 Magnetic trip range 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2 Individually packed. 2
3 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
4 Neutral is in right pole.
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-331

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-325.

2 Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
2 Ultra High Standard Optional
Standard Interrupting LS LSI LSG LSIG
2 Interrupting
Capacity
High
Interrupting
Capacity
Current Adjustable Adjustable Short Independently
Maximum 600 Vac Capacity Limiting Short Time Independently Time Pickup with Adjustable Short
2 Continuous Rated
35 kAIC at
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at
Pickup with I2t
Short Delay
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
I2t Short Delay
and Ground Fault
Time Pickup and
Ground Fault Neutral CT for
Ampere
480 Vac 480 Vac 480 Vac Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
2 Rating
at 40 °C Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Information

2 Three-Pole
600 LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG LGFCT600 See Page

2
V4-T2-323
Four-Pole 4

2 600 LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F LES4600LS LES4600LSI — — — See Page

V4-T2-323

2 Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
2 See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-325.
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Less Terminals
2 Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
2 Standard Optional
LS LSI LSG LSIG
2 Maximum
Adjustable Short Time
Adjustable Short Time
Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short Independently Adjustable
Continuous
Pickup with I2t Short
2 Ampere Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Short Time Pickup and Neutral CT for
Rating Number Delay Ramp Delay Protection Ground Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
at 40 °C of Poles Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
2 600 3 LDB3600FT33W LDB3600FT32W LDB3600FT35W LDB3600FT36W LGFCT600 See Page
V4-T2-323
2 600
600
3
3
HLDB3600FT33W
LDCB3600FT33W
HLDB3600FT32W
LDCB3600FT32W
HLDB3600FT35W
LDCB3600FT35W
HLDB3600FT36W
LDCB3600FT36W

2 100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
2 The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and
2 terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-325.
100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with 310+ Interchangeable Trip Units
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only
Standard Optional
2 Ultra High LS LSI LSG LSIG
Standard Interrupting Adjustable Short Independently
2 Maximum
Continuous
Interrupting High Interrupting Capacity Current
Capacity 600 Vac Capacity 600 Vac Limiting 600 Vac
Adjustable Short Independently Time Pickup with
Time Pickup with Adjustable Short I2t Short Delay
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Rated 35 kAIC at Rated 65 kAIC at Rated 100 kAIC 2
I t Short Delay Time Pickup and and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for
2
Ampere
Rating 480 Vac 480 Vac at 480 Vac Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
at 40 °C Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
2 Three-Pole
600 CLD3600F CHLD3600F CLDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG LGFCT600 See Page
2 V4-T2-323

2 Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.

2 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.

4 Neutral is in right pole.

2
2

V4-T2-332 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Molded Case Switches
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1 Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in 2
600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded
Complete Circuit Breaker case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components 2
Without Line and With Standard Line and and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case
Maximum
Continuous Load Terminals Load Terminals Only switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters 2
Ampere Catalog Catalog Laboratories Standard UL 489.
Rating Number Number
2
Two-Pole
300 LDB2300W LDB2300
Molded Case Switches 2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Standard Terminals Only
350 LDB2350W LDB2350
400 LDB2400W LDB2400
Maximum Circuit Breaker Only
without Line and Load See Page V4-T2-346 for
2
Continuous
Terminals Optional Terminals
450 LDB2450W LDB2450 Ampere
Rating Catalog Catalog 2
500 LDB2500W LDB2500 at 40 °C Number Number
600 LDB2600W LDB2600
Two-Pole 2
Three-Pole
600
2
LD2600WK 2TA603LDK
300 LDB3300W LDB3300
600 LDB2600WK 1 2TA603LDK
350
2
LDB3350W LDB3350
600 HLD2600WK 2TA603LDK
400 LDB3400W LDB3400
Three-Pole
450 LDB3450W LDB3450
600 LD3600WK 3TA603LDK 2
500 LDB3500W LDB3500
600 LDB3600WK 1 3TA603LDK
600 LDB3600W LDB3600
600 HLD3600WK 3TA603LDK 2
Four-Pole
600 LD4600WK 4TA603LDK
2
600 LDB4600WK 1 4TA603LDK 2
600 HLD4600WK 4TA603LDK

Notes
2
1 Factory sealed—suitable for reverse feed application.

Molded case switch will trip above 6000 amperes. 2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-333

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug

2 Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

2 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2 L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2 I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2 Maximum
Continuous
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
2
Ampere
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number
2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 LD3125T52W LD3125T56W LD3125T57W — ORPL125A070
2 — ORPL125A090

2 — ORPL125A100
— ORPL125A110

2 — ORPL125A125
250 LD3250T52W LD3250T56W LD3250T57W — ORPL025A125
2 — ORPL025A150
—
2
ORPL025A175
— ORPL025A200

2 — ORPL025A225
— ORPL025A250
2 400 LD3400T52W LD3400T56W LD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
2 250 ORPL40A250

2 300
350
ORPL40A300
ORPL40A350

2 400 ORPL40A400
600 LD3600T52W LD3600T56W LD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
2 350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2 500 ORPL60A500

2 600 ORPL60A600

Notes
2 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-334 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 HLD3125T52W HLD3125T56W HLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070
2
90 ORPL125A090
2
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110 2
125 ORPL125A125
250 HLD3250T52W HLD3250T56W HLD3250T57W 125 ORPL025A125 2
150
2
ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
2
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250 2
400 HLD3400T52W HLD3400T56W HLD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225 2
250
300
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300
2
350 ORPL40A350 2
400 ORPL40A400
600 HLD3600T52W HLD3600T56W HLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300 2
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2
500 ORPL60A500
2
600 ORPL60A600

Notes 2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-335

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 LDC3125T52W LDC3125T56W LDC3125T57W — ORPL125A070

2 — ORPL125A090
— ORPL125A100
2 — ORPL125A110
— ORPL125A125
2 250 LDC3250T52W LDC3250T56W LDC3250T57W — ORPL025A125
—
2 —
ORPL025A150
ORPL025A175

2 — ORPL025A200
— ORPL025A225
2 — ORPL025A250
400 LDC3400T52W LDC3400T56W LDC3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
2 225 ORPL40A225

2 250
300
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300

2 350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
2 600 LDC3600T52W LDC3600T56W LDC3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350
2
ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400

2 500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.

2 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-336 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals. 2
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug 2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1 2
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I
G
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
OPTIM 1050 23 2
LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
2
Ampere
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
125 LD3125T106W LD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090 2
100
110
ORPL125A100
ORPL125A110
2
125 ORPL125A125 2
250 LD3250T106W LD3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150 2
175
2
ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
2
250 ORPL025A250
400 LD3400T106W LD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200 2
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250 2
300
350
ORPL40A300
ORPL40A350
2
400 ORPL40A400 2
600 LD3600T106W LD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350 2
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500 2
600 ORPL60A600
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
2
2
3 Factory sealed.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-337

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 23
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 HLD3125T106W HLD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070

2 90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
2 110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
2 250 HLD3250T106W HLD3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125
150
2 175
ORPL025A150
ORPL025A175

2 200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
2 250 ORPL025A250
400 HLD3400T106W HLD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
2 225 ORPL40A225

2 250
300
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300

2 350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
2 600 HLD3600T106W HLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300
350
2
ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400

2 500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.

2 2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-338 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 23
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 LDC3125T106W LDC3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
2
90 ORPL125A090
2
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110 2
125 ORPL125A125
250 LDC3250T106W LDC3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125 2
150
2
ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
2
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250 2
400 LDC3400T106W LDC3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225 2
250
300
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300
2
350 ORPL40A350 2
400 ORPL40A400
600 LDC3600T106W LDC3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300 2
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2
500 ORPL60A500
2
600 ORPL60A600

Notes 2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-339

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2 Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

2
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CLD3125T52W CLD3125T56W CLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070

2 90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100

2 110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
2 250 CLD3250T52W CLD3250T56W CLD3250T57W 125 ORPL025A125
150
2
ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175

2 200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
2 250 ORPL025A250
400 CLD3400T52W CLD3400T56W CLD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
2 225 ORPL40A225

2 250
300
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300

2 350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
2 600 CLD3600T52W CLD3600T56W CLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
2 400 ORPL60A400

2 500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600

2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.

2 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-340 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CHLD3125T52W CHLD3125T56W CHLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070
2
90 ORPL125A090
2
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A125 2
125 ORPL125A125
250 CHLD3250T52W CHLD3250T56W CHLD3250T57W 125 ORPL025A125 2
150
2
ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
2
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250 2
400 CHLD3400T52W CHLD3400T56W CHLD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225 2
250
350
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A350
2
400 ORPL40A400 2
600 CHLD3600T52W CHLD3600T56W CHLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350 2
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
2
600 ORPL60A600
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-341

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CLDC3125T52W CLDC3125T56W CLDC3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070

2 90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
2 110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
2 250 CLDC3250T52W CLDC3250T56W CLDC3250T57W 125 ORPL025A125
150
2 175
ORPL025A150
ORPL025A175

2 200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
2 250 ORPL025A250
400 CLDC3400T52W CLDC3400T56W CLDC3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
2 225 ORPL40A225

2 250
300
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300

2 350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
2 600 CLDC3600T52W CLDC3600T56W CLDC3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350
2
ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400

2 500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.

2 2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-342 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 23
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CLD3125T106W CLD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
2
90 ORPL125A090
2
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110 2
125 ORPL125A125
250 CLD3250T106W CLD3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125 2
150
2
ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
2
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250 2
400 CLD3400T106W CLD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225 2
250
300
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300
2
350 ORPL40A350 2
400 ORPL40A400
600 CLD3600T106W CLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300 2
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2
500 ORPL60A500
2
600 ORPL60A600

Notes 2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-343

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

2 Maximum
Continuous
OPTIM 1050 23

Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug

2 Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number

2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CHLD3125T106W CHLD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
2 90 ORPL125A090
100
2
ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110

2 125 ORPL125A125
250 CHLD3250T106W CHLD3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125
2 150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
2 200 ORPL025A200

2 225
250
ORPL025A225
ORPL025A250

2 400 CHLD3400T106W CHLD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200

225 ORPL40A225
2 250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
2 350 ORPL40A350

2 600 CHLD3600T106W CHLD3600T107W

400
300
ORPL40A400
ORPL60A300

2 350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2 500 ORPL60A500
600
2
ORPL60A600

Notes

2 1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-344 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 23
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Fixed Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CLDC3125T106W CLDC3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
2
90 ORPL125A090
2
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110 2
125 ORPL125A125
250 CLDC3250T106W CLDC3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125 2
150
2
ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
2
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250 2
400 CLDC3400T106W CLDC3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225 2
250
300
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300
2
350 ORPL40A350 2
400 ORPL40A400
600 CLDC3600T106W CLDC3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300 2
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
2
500 ORPL60A500
2
600 ORPL60A600

Notes 2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-345

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
Line and Load Terminals L-Frame circuit breaker line breaker before installation of Ordering Information
2 Eaton’s line and load and load terminals are the conductors. (Applies to all L-Frame circuit breakers use
terminals provide wire shipped separately for field styles.) The circuit breaker Cu/AI terminals as standard.
2 connecting capabilities for installation. line/load terminal conductors
are positioned in the
When optional copper
specific ranges of continuous The wire connecting terminal terminals are required, order
2 current ratings and wire
types. All terminals comply
is secured with two pan-
conducting holes in the wire
connecting terminal and are
by catalog Number. Specify if
factory installation is required.
head, slotted screws and secured with recessed socket
2 with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards UL
lockwashers that can be screws that are tightened to
checked for the correct the correct torque loading
486A and UL 486B and CSA
2 Standard C22.2 No. 65M.
torque loading or retightened
from the front of the circuit
from the front of the circuit
Unless otherwise specified, breaker.
2
Terminals
2 TA401LD or TA603LD
Terminal (Step-Type
2 Terminal Requires
Terminal Cover and Pan-Head Screws
Pan-Head Screws and
Lockwashers (Installed
Warning Label. and Lockwashers TA450LD or TA602LD or before Cable Clamping
2 See Inset.) T602LD Terminal Screws)

2 Terminal Cover

2
2
2
2 Warning Label

2 Retainer

2 Screws
Circuit Breaker
2 Line Terminal Cover

2
2 Line and Load Terminals
Terminals with

2 Maximum Terminal AWG Wire Terminal Control Wire Termination

Breaker Body Wire Range/Number Metric Wire Catalog Catalog
Amperes Material Type of Conductors Range mm2 Poles Number Number
2 Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals

2 400
400
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
4/0–600 (1)
4/0–600 (1)
120–300
120–300
Two-pole kit 1
Three-pole kit 1
2TA401LDK
3TA401LDK
—
—

2 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 120–300 Four-pole kit 1 4TA401LDK —

450 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 (2) 25–95 2
TA450LD —
2 500 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–350 (2) 95–150 2
TA602LD TA602LDCW
600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Two-pole kit 1
2
2TA603LDK 2TA603LDKCW
600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Three-pole kit 1 3TA603LDK 3TA603LDKCW

2 600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Four-pole kit 1 4TA603LDK 4TA603LDKCW
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
2 600 Copper Cu 250–350 (2) 120–250 2
T602LD T602LDCW

2
Notes
1 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
2 Individually packed.

V4-T2-346 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles 2
in the circuit breaker.
2
LD Frame Accessories
Reference Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral 2
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 3
2
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-419 ■
■
—
—
■
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
—
—
2
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-419
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-421 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ — 2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-421 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-421 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ — 2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
2
V4-T2-423
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-423 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
Shunt trip—standard 4 V4-T2-425 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
2
Shunt trip—low energy 4 V4-T2-428 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
Undervoltage release mechanism 4 V4-T2-434 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ — 2
Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T2-436 — — ■ — — — —
External Accessories 2
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
End cap kit
Control wire terminal kit
V4-T2-453
V4-T2-454 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-456 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Terminal shields V4-T2-458 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-458 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-459 — ■ — — ■ — —
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-460 ❏ — ❏ ❏ — ❏ — 2
Key interlock kit V4-T2-461 ❏
●
—
●
❏
●
❏
—
—
—
❏
—
—
—
2
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-462
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-462 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-463 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-465 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Rear connecting studs ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
V4-T2-466
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-467 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-544 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Handle extension V4-T2-556 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-469 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available 2
2
Notes
1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2 Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations.
3 OPTIM model 1050 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories.
4 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units. Standard non-tripping internal accessories can be mounted in the left or right poles of LES and 550 OPTIM trip units.
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-347

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

LD Frame Accessories, continued

2 Reference Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole

2 Description
OPTIM System Components Three Poles
Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral 2

2 Ground fault alarm unit V4-T2-469 — — — — — — —

Potential transformer module V4-T2-469 — — — — — — —
2 Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-469 — — — — — — —
Digitrip OPTIMizer — — — — — — —
2
V4-T2-470
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-470 — — — — — — —

2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Special calibration —
2 Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-259 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position

2 ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both

● Accessory available/modification available

2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
2 Description Catalog Number

2 Electronic portable test kit MTST230V 3

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
2 External neutral sensor LGFCT600 4
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
2 Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module
2
DIGIVIEWR06 5

Notes
2 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2 Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations.
3 MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac.
2 4 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers.
5 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-348 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
1

Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 277 480 600
Volts DC
125 250 23
2
LDB 2, 3 65 — 35 25 — 22
2
LD 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 — 22
CLD 4 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 — — 2
HLD, HLDB 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 — 25
CHLD 4 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 — — 2
LDC, LDCB 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 50 — 30
2
5

CLDC 45 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 50 — —

2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) 2

Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
2
Circuit
Breaker Number 240 415 690 250 23
Type of Poles Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
LDB 2, 3 85 85 45 45 20 10 20 10 2
LD 2, 3, 4 85 85 45 45 20 10 20 10
CLD 4 2, 3, 4 85 85 45 45 20 10 — —
2
HLD, HLDB
CHLD 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
100
100
100
100
70
70
70
70
25
25
13
13
20
—
10
—
2
LDC, LDCB 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 75 35 18 20 10 2
CLDC 4 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 75 35 18 — —
2
UL 489 Current-Limiting Data
Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S) 2
LDC
LDC
240 V/200 kA
480 V/100 kA
64.80
66.90
6.80
9.33
2
LDC 600 V/50 kA 54.30 8.92 2
Notes
1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 2
2 L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum.
3 Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
4 100% rated breakers.
2
2
5 Current limiting.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-349

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

310+ Specifications 310+ Adjustability Specifications

2 Description Specification LD Frame
Description Specification
2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
310+ settings 600 A
Breaker Type
2 Frame designation LD
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
A 250
Frames available 600 A
2 Continuous current range (A) 250–600 A
B 300
C 315
2 Ground fault pickup (A)
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
120–600 A
35, 65, 100
D 350
E 400
2 100% rated Yes
F 450
Protection
2 Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
G 500
H (= In) 600
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG
2 (or Maintenance Mode) tr = long delay time (seconds) 2 2
(All 310+)
Interchangeable trip unit Yes 4 4
2 High load alarm (suffix B20) 1 Yes 7 7

2 Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1

Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 1
LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
10
12
10
12

2 Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG 15 15

Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) 20 20
2 Thru-cover accessories No 24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x
2 (All 310+)
Position 2 3x

2 Position 3 4x
Position 4 5x

2 Position 5 6x
Position 6 7x
2 Position 7 8x
Position 8 8x
2 Position 9 8x

2 tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)

(LS and LSG)
Fixed 67 @10x

2 tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)

(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst
Position 2 120

2 Position 3 300
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 120
2 (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 180
Position 3 240
2 Position 4 360

2 Position 5 480
Position 6 600
2 tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 120
2 Position 3 300

2 Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 2

Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) Fixed 1500

(310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)
2
Notes
2 1 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2 Not available for LD. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI and

ALSIG trip units.

2
2

V4-T2-350 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM Specifications
Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
2
rms sensing Yes Yes
2
Breaker Type
Frame L L 2
Ampere range 200–600 A 200–600 A
Interrupting rating at 480 volts 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 2
Protection
Ordering options LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG
2
Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes 2
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L) 2
Adjustable rating plug (In) No No
Long delay pickup 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
2
Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
2
Long delay time I4t 1–5 seconds 1–5 seconds
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes 2
High load alarm 0.5–1.0 x Ir 0.5–1.0 x Ir
Short Delay Protection (S) 2
Short delay pickup 150–800% x (Ir) 150–800% x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2
Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2
Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I) 2
Instantaneous pickup 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In)
Discriminator Yes Yes 2
Instantaneous override
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Yes Yes
2
Ground fault alarm 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is) 2
Ground fault pickup 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 2
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes
2
Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes
2
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
2
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
2
Note
1 Zone interlock kit.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-351

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip OPTIM Specifications, continued

2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050

2 System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes
2 Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes
Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes
2 Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 1 Yes

2 Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact

System Monitoring
Optional Included

2 Digital display Yes 2 Yes 2

Current Yes Yes
2 Power and energy No Yes
Power quality—harmonics No Yes
2 Power factor No Yes

2 Communications
PowerNet Yes 3 Yes

2 Testing
Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet
2 Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
2 (A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
2 Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
Notes
2 1 Zone interlock kit.
2 By OPTIMizer/BIM.

2 3 Eaton’s PowerNet kit.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-352 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
LD Frame 2
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1) 2
4 11.00 (279.4) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
2
LD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole 2
Side View
2
Front Cover Cutout Front View
3.81
(96.8)
2
2
3.44
(87.3)
1.72
2
(43.7)
CL Breaker

3.28
CL Handle
1.33
(83.3)
2
(33.7)2.29
0.25 (6.4) R (58.2)
10.75 8.21 2
(273.1) (208.6)
2
1.50
(38.1)

3.64
2
(92.5) 7.28 0.19 R
(184.9) (4.8) R

2
8.25 2
(209.6)
2
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lb (kg) 2
LD Frame
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
2
Breaker
Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
LD, HLD, LDC 18 (8.2) 20 (9.1) 25 (11.3) 14 (6.4) 15 (6.8) 20 (9.1) 3 (1.4) 4 (1.8) 5 (2.3)
2
LDB 18 (8.2) 20 (9.1) 25 (11.3) — — — — — —

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-353

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-261
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-278
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-296
2 K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-304
V4-T2-328
2 M-Frame (300–800 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-355
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-356
V4-T2-361
V4-T2-362
2
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-364
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
2 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-399
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-412
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 M-Frame (300–800 Amperes)

2 Product Description
● All Eaton M-Frame circuit
Standards and Certifications
● CE marked
2 ●
breakers are HACR rated
MDL-Frame circuit
breakers are available as
2 individual components
(frame, trip unit, terminals),
2 or factory assembled
complete breakers
2 ● MDLB, HMDLB-Frame
circuit breakers with non-
2 interchangeable trip units
are suitable for reverse
2 feed use

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-354 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
MDL Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1 2
MDL 3 800 F 2
Circuit Breaker/ Suffix
2
2
Frame Type Number Circuit Breaker/ F = Frame only (800 A only)
MDL, MDLB of Poles Frame Ampere Rating K = High magnetic molded case switch
HMDL, HMDLB 2 = Two-pole 300 1 500 V = 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
3 = Three-pole 350 1
400
600
700
W
X
=
=
Without terminals
Load side terminals only
2
Y = Line side terminals only
2
450 800

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit

2
1

MT 3 800 T
2
Trip Unit Type
MT Number Trip Unit Rating/ T = Thermal-magnetic
Suffix
2
of Poles Plug Ampere Rating V = 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
2 = Two-pole 300 1 500 2
3 = Three-pole 350 1 600
400
450
700
800 2
MDL Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 2
310+ Circuit Breaker 2
MDLB 3 800 F T36 B21 W 2
2
Performance at 480 Vac Number Terminals
MDLB=50 kAIC
HMDLB=65 kAIC
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
W = No terminals
2
CMDLB=50 kAIC, 100% rated
CHMDLB=65 kAIC, 100% rated
Amperes
Trip Unit Features 2
T33=310+ Electronic LS Blank=No feature
800 T32=310+ Electronic LSI
T35=310+ Electronic LSG
B20=High load alarm
B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip 2
T36=310+ Electronic LSIG B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip

F
Designation T38=310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
T39=310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode
ZG= Zone selective interlocking 2
2
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit 1

MES 3 800 ALSIG B21 2

Trip Unit Type Features
2
Blank=No feature
2
MES Number Trip Unit
of Poles LS= 310+ Electronic LS B20=High load alarm
3 = Three-pole Amperes LSI=310+ Electronic LSI B21=Ground fault alarm, with trip
800 LSG=310+ Electronic LSG
LSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG
B22=Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG= Zone selective interlocking 2
ALSI=310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
ALSIG=310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 2
Note
1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., MDL3800F, HMDL3800F, etc.
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-355

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Product Selection
2
Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole
2 Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Thermal-Magnetic
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Trip Unit Only
2 For Use with Standard
or High or Ultra High
2 Interrupting Frames Standard
Terminals

2 Factory Assembled Factory Assembled

Magnetic Trip Range
is 5–10 Up Through
Only 1

Maximum Circuit Consisting Circuit Consisting 600 A; 4–8 on 700 and See Page
2 Continuous
Ampere
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals Frame Only
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals Frame Only
800 A x Continuous
Ampere Rating
V4-T2-360 for
Optional Terminals

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number Number Number
300
2
MDL2300 MDL2800F HMDL2300 HMDL2800F MT2300T TA700MA1
350 MDL2350 HMDL2350 MT2350T TA700MA1

2 400 MDL2400 HMDL2400 MT2400T TA700MA1

450 MDL2450 HMDL2450 MT2450T TA700MA1
2 500 MDL2500 HMDL2500 MT2500T TA700MA1
600 MDL2600 HMDL2600 MT2600T TA700MA1
2 700 MDL2700 HMDL2700 MT2700T TA700MA1

2 800 MDL2800 HMDL2800 MT2800T TA800MA2

2 Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole
2 Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only

2 For Use with Standard

or High or Ultra High

2
Interrupting Frames Standard
Terminals
Magnetic Trip Range Only 1
2 Maximum
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
is 5–10 Up Through
600 A; 4–8 on 700 and See Page
of Frame, Trip Unit of Frame, Trip Unit 800 A x Continuous V4-T2-360 for
2
Continuous
Ampere and Terminals Frame Only and Terminals Frame Only Ampere Rating Optional Terminals
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 at 40 °C Number Number Number Number Number Number
300 MDL3300 MDL3800F HMDL3300 HMDL3800F MT3300T TA700MA1

2 350 MDL3350 HMDL3350 MT3400T TA700MA1

400 MDL3400 HMDL3400 MT3400T TA700MA1
2 450 MDL3450 HMDL3450 MT3450T TA700MA1
500
2
MDL3500 HMDL3500 MT3500T TA700MA1
600 MDL3600 HMDL3600 MT3600T TA700MA1

2 700 MDL3700 HMDL3700 MT3700T TA700MA1

800 MDL3800 HMDL3800 MT3800T TA800MA2
2 Note
1 Two terminals are required per pole.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-356 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole 1
Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Standard Terminals Only 2
2
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Maximum
Continuous Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting See Page V4-T2-360 for 2
Ampere of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Optional Terminals
Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
300 MDLB2300 HMDLB2300 TA700MA1 2
350 MDLB2350 HMDLB2350 TA700MA1
400 MDLB2400 HMDLB2400 TA700MA1 2
450
2
MDLB2450 HMDLB2450 TA700MA1
500 MDLB2500 HMDLB2500 TA700MA1
600 MDLB2600 HMDLB2600 TA700MA1
2
700 MDLB2700 HMDLB2700 TA700MA1
800 MDLB2800 HMDLB2800 TA800MA2 2
2
Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole 1
Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity Standard Terminals Only 2 2
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
Maximum
Continuous Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting See Page V4-T2-360 for
Ampere of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Optional Terminals
Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
300
350
MDLB3300
MDLB3350
HMDLB3300
HMDLB3350
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
2
400 MDLB3400 HMDLB3400 TA700MA1 2
450 MDLB3450 HMDLB3450 TA700MA1
500 MDLB3500 HMDLB3500 TA700MA1 2
600
2
MDLB3600 HMDLB3600 TA700MA1
700 MDLB3700 HMDLB3700 TA700MA1
800 MDLB3800 HMDLB3800 TA800MA2
2
Notes
1 Factory sealed for reverse feed application.
2 Two terminals are required per pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-357

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
2 Order as Individual Components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals.
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-363.
2
Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Standard Optional
2 LS LSI LSG LSIG
Standard Adjustable Short Independently
2 Maximum
Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac Adjustable Short
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay and
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Rated 50 kAIC at Rated 65 kAIC at Time Pickup with I2t Time Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for
2
Continuous
Ampere 480 Vac 480 Vac Short Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23
Rating Catalog Catalog Terminal
2 at 40 °C Number Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
800 MDL3800F HMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG LGFCT600 See Page
2 V4-T2-361

2 Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units 4

2 Factory-Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Maximum
2 Continuous
Ampere Adjustable Short Time Pickup Independently Adjustable
Adjustable Short Time Pickup Independently Adjustable
with I2t Short Delay and Short Time Pickup and Ground Neutral CT for
Rating with I2t Short Delay Ramp Short Time Pickup and Delay Ground Fault Protection Fault Protection LSG and LSIG 23
2 at 40 °C Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 800 MDLB3800FT33W MDLB3800FT32W MDLB3800FT35W MDLB3800FT36W LGFCT600

2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 HMDLB3800FT33W HMDLB3800FT32W HMDLB3800FT35W HMDLB3800FT36W LGFCT600

2 100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

2 The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and
terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-363.
2
100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Standard Options
2 Standard High LS LSI LSG LSIG
Interrupting Interrupting Adjustable Short Independently
2 Maximum Capacity
600 Vac Rated
Capacity
600 Vac Rated Adjustable Short
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay and
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Continuous 2
50 kAIC at 65 kAIC at Time Pickup with I t Time Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault Neutral CT for
2 Ampere
Rating 480 Vac 480 Vac Short Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
at 40 °C Catalog Number Catalog Number Information
2 800 CMDL3800F CHMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T2-361

2 Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
2 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units or breakers.
4 Factory sealed, suitable for reverse feed application. CMDLB and CHMDLB are also available.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-358 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case switches are used as compact switches in 2
applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded
case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components 2
and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case
switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters 2
Laboratories Standard UL 489.

Molded Case Switches

2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Circuit Breaker Only without
2
Maximum
2
Continuous Line and Load Terminals
Ampere Rating Catalog
at 40 °C Number
Two-Pole 2
800 MDL2800WK
MDLB2800WK 1
2
HMDL2800WK 2
Three-Pole
800 MDL3800WK 2
MDLB3800WK 1
HMDL3800WK
2
Notes
1 MDLB and HMDLB are suitable for reverse feed applications.
2
Molded case switch may trip above 6000 amperes. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-359

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
Line and Load Terminals
2 M-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard.
When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by
2 catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required.

2
2
2
2
2 TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA801MA

2
Line and Load Terminals
2 Terminals with Control
Maximum Terminal AWG Wire Terminal Wire Termination
2 Breaker Body Wire Range/No. Catalog Catalog
Amperes Material Type Conductors Number Number

2 Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals

700 Aluminum Cu/AI 1–500 kcmil (2) TA700MA1 TA700MA1CWT
2 800 std. Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–400 kcmil (3) TA800MA2 TA800MA2CWT

2 800 Aluminum Cu/AI 500–750 kcmil (2)

Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
TA801MA TA801MACWT

2 600 Copper Cu 2/0–500 kcmil (2) T600MA1 —

800 Copper Cu 3/0–300 kcmil (3) T800MA1 —
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-360 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the 2
circuit breaker.
2
MD Frame Accessories
Reference Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2
Description Page Left Right Left Center Right
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 2
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-419 ■ ■ ■ — ■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-419 ■ ■ ■ — ■ 2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-421 ■
■
■
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-421
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-421 ■ ■ ■ — ■ 2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-423 ■ ■ ■ — ■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-423 ■ ■ ■ — ■ 2
Shunt trip—standard ■ ■ ■ — ■
2
2 V4-T2-426
Shunt trip—low energy 2 V4-T2-428 ■ ■ ■ — ■
Undervoltage release mechanism 2 V4-T2-434 ■ ■ ■ — ■
2
External Accessories
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-455 — — ● ● ● 2
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-456 — — — ● —
Terminal shields V4-T2-458 — — — ● — 2
— — — ● —
Interphase barriers
Non-padlockable handle block
V4-T2-458
V4-T2-459 — — — ■ —
2
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-460 ❏ — ❏ — ❏
2
Key interlock kit V4-T2-461 ❏ — ❏ — ❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-462 ● ● ● ● ● 2
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-462 ● ● ● ● ●
Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-463 ● ● ● ● ● 2
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-465 ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-466
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-467 ● ● ● ● ● 2
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-544 ● ● ● ● ●
Handle extension V4-T2-556 ● ● ● ● ● 2
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit ● ● ● ● ●
2
V4-T2-469
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ●
2
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-259 ● ● ● ● ●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● 2
Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ●

Legend
2
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
2
● Accessory available/modification available
Notes
2
2
1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units.

2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-361

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories

2 Description Catalog Number

2 Electronic portable test kit MTST230V 1

Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
2 External neutral sensor LGFCT600 2
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
2 Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW

2 Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 3

2
2 Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4
2 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
2 Breaker Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 56
Type of Poles 240 480 600 250

2 MDL, MDLB 2, 3 65 50 25 22
CMDL 2, 3 65 50 25 —

2 HMDL, HMDLB 2, 3 100 65 35 25

CHMDL 2, 3 100 65 35 —
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4
2 Interrupting Capacity rms (kA Symmetrical Amperes) I CU ≠ I CS
Circuit
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 56
2 Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles 240 415 690 250

2 MDL, MDLB
CMDL
2, 3
2, 3
65/65
65/65
50/50
50/50
20/10
20/10
20/10
—

2 HMDL, HMDLB 2, 3 100/100 70/50 25/13 20/10

CHMDL 2, 3 100/100 70/50 25/13 —
2 Notes
1 MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac.

2 2 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers.
3 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.

2 4 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.

5 Two-pole or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated.

2
6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds at 22 kA.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-362 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
310+ Specifications 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Description Specification MDL Frame
2
Description Specification
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
310+ settings 800 A
2
Breaker Type
Frame designation MDL
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
2
A 320
Frames available 800 A
Continuous current range (A) 320–800 A
B 400 2
C 450
Ground fault pickup (A)
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
160–800 A
50, 65
D 500 2
E 600
100% rated Yes
F 630
2
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
G 700
2
H (= In) 800
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG
(or Maintenance Mode) tr = long delay time (seconds) 2 2 2
(All 310+)
Interchangeable trip unit Yes 4 4
High load alarm (suffix B20) 1 Yes 7 7 2
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 1
LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
10
12
10
12
2
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG 15 15 2
Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) 20 20
Thru-cover accessories No 24 24 2
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup Position 1 2x
(All 310+)
Position 2 3x
2
Position 3 4x
2
Position 4 5x
Position 5 6x 2
Position 6 7x
Position 7 8x 2
Position 8 8x
Position 9 8x
2
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS and LSG)
Fixed 67 @10x
2
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst
2
Position 2 120
Position 3 300 2
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 160
(310+ w/ ground fault)
Position 2 240 2
Position 3 320
Position 4 480
2
Position 5 640
2
Position 6 800
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst 2
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 2 120
Position 3 300 2
Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
2
2

Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) Fixed 2000

(310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)
2
Notes
1 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2 Not available for MDL. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI
2
and ALSIG trip units.
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-363

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Dimensions and Weights

2 Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 MD Frame
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1)

2
MDL-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
2 Drilling Plan
Front View Side View
2 3.44
(87.3)
2 1.72
(43.7)

2 CL Breaker R 0.25
(6.4)

2
2 3.28 16.00
R 0.19 CL Handle 1.33 (83.3) (406.4)
2 (4.8) (33.7)

1.50

2 (38.1)
0.97
(24.6)
2
3.64
2 (92.5)
7.28 4.06
8.25

2
(184.9) (209.6) (103.2)

2
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lb (kg)
2 MD Frame

2 Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 1

Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole

2 MDL, HMDL (T/M T.U.) 26.5 (12.0) 29.0 (13.2) 24.5 (11.1) 26.0 (11.8) 2.5 (1.1) 3.0 (1.4)
MDL, HMDL (Elec. T.U.) — 30.0 (13.6) — 26.0 (11.8) — 4.0 (1.8)
2 Note

2
1 Thermal-magnetic only.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-364 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Contents
Typical N-Frame Breaker
Description Page
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259 2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-261 2
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-264
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-278 2
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-304
V4-T2-328
2
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes)
V4-T2-354
2
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-366
V4-T2-367 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-375
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-376 2
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-379
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380 2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-399
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-410 2
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . V4-T2-412
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413 2
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449 2
2
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) 2
Product Description
● All Eaton N-Frame circuit
2
breakers are suitable for
reverse feed use 2
All N-Frame circuit
2
●

breakers are HACR rated

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-365

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Catalog Number Selection

2 This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
2 Circuit Breaker/Frame

2 ND 3 12 T3 2 W
2 Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
Suffix
Number Trip Type E = 100% R.P. protected (four-pole)
2 ND
HND
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
Trip Model
T3= Model 310
2 = LSI
3 = LS
EH
K
=
=
50% R.P. protected (four-pole)
High magnetic molded case switch
NDC 3 = Three-pole 800= 800 amperes T5 = Model 550 5 = LSG W = Without terminals
2 NDU
CND
4 = Four-pole 12 = 1200 amperes T7= Model 750
T10 = Model 1050
6 = LSIG
7 = LSIA
X
Y
=
=
Load only terminals
Line only terminals

2
CHND
CNDC

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-366 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 2
2
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only 2
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S
I
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2
G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum OPTIM 550 2
2
Continuous Fixed
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 ND3800T52W ND3800T56W ND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400 2
450
2
ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
2
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700 2
800 ORPN80A800
1200 ND312T52W ND312T56W ND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600 2
700
800
ORPN12A700
ORPN12A800
2
1000 ORPN12A100 2
1200 ORPN12A120
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
800 HND3800T52W HND3800T56W HND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
2
500 ORPN80A500
2
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600 2
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800 2
1200 600
2
HND312T52W HND312T56W HND312T57W ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
2
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120 2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. 2
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-367

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2 Fixed
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 NDC3800T52W NDC3800T56W NDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400

2 450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
2 550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
2 700 ORPN80A700
800
2 1200 NDC312T52W NDC312T56W NDC312T57W 600
ORPN80A800
ORPN12A600

2 700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
2 1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
2 Notes

2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-368 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 23 Fixed
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 ND3800T106W ND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
2
450 ORPN80A450
2
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550 2
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700 2
800
2
ORPN80A800
1200 ND312T106W ND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
2
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100 2
1200 ORPN12A120
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
800 HND3800T106W HND3800T107W 400
450
ORPN80A400
ORPN80A450
2
500 ORPN80A500 2
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600 2
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
2
1200 HND312T106W HND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
2
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800 2
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120 2
2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 NDC3800T106W NDC3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
2
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550 2
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700 2
1200 NDC312T106W NDC312T107W
800
600
ORPN80A800
ORPN12A600
2
700 ORPN12A700 2
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100 2
1200 ORPN12A120
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
2
3 Factory sealed.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-369

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.

2
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2 Fixed
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 CND3800T52W CND3800T56W CND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400

2 450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500

2 550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
2 700 ORPN80A700
800
2
ORPN80A800
1200 3 CND312T52W CND312T56W CND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600

2 700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
2 1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 800 CHND3800T52W CHND3800T56W CHND3800T57W 400

450
ORPN80A400
ORPN80A450

2 500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
2 600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
2 800 ORPN80A800

2 1200 3 CHND312T52W CHND312T56W CHND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600

700 ORPN12A700

2 800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
2 1200 ORPN12A120

2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2 3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-370 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 550 2 Fixed
Continuous
Ampere LSI LSIG LSIA Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 CNDC3800T52W CNDC3800T56W CNDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
2
450 ORPN80A450
2
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550 2
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700 2
800
2
ORPN80A800
1200 3 CNDC312T52W CNDC312T56W CNDC312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
2
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100 2
1200 ORPN12A120

Notes
2
2
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-371

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 23 Fixed
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Rating Plug

2
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number

2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 CND3800T106W CND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400

2 450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
2 550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
2 700 ORPN80A700
800
2 1200 CND312T106W CND312T107W 600
ORPN80A800
ORPN12A600

2 700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
2 1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 800 CHND3800T106W CHND3800T107W 400

450
ORPN80A400
ORPN80A450

2 550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
2 700 ORPN80A700
800
2
ORPN80A800
1200 CHND312T106W CHND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600

2 700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
2 1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
2 Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 2 One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-372 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response) 2
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) 2
Maximum
2
OPTIM 1050 23 Fixed
Continuous
Ampere LSIG LSIA Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number 2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 CNDC3800T106W CNDC3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
2
450 ORPN80A450
2
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550 2
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700 2
800
2
ORPN80A800
1200 CNDC312T106W 4 CNDC312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
2
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100 2
1200 ORPN12A120
2
Type ND Molded Case Switches
2
Type ND High Instantaneous (K)
Continuous Three-Pole Four-Pole 5 2
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number 2
800 ND3800WK ND4800WK
HND3800WK HND4800WK 2
1200
2
ND312WK ND412WK
HND312WK HND412WK

Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2
2 One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker

as standard.
2
3 Factory sealed.
4 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. 2
Terminal ordered separate.
5 Neutral is in right pole.

Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes.

2
For UL listed, series tested molded case switch application data, refer to Eaton.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-373

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
Line and Load Terminals—Ordering Information
2 N-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by catalog
number. Specify if factory installation is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA1200NB1 TA1201NB1 T700NB1 T1000NB1

2
Line and Load Terminals
2 Maximum Breaker Terminal Body Wire AWG Wire Range/ Metric Wire Catalog
Amperes Material Type No. Conductors Range mm2 Number
2 Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
700 Aluminum Cu/AI 1–500 kcmil (2) 50–240 TA700NB1
2 1000 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 TA1000NB1 1

2 1200 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–240 TA1200NB1 1

1200 Aluminum Cu/AI 500–750 kcmil (3) 300–400 TA1201NB1 2

2 Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals

700 Copper Cu 2/0–500 kcmil (2) 70–240 T700NB1
2 1000 Copper Cu 3/0–500 kcmil (3) 95–240 T1000NB1
1200 Copper Cu 3/0–400 kcmil (4) 95–185
2
T1200NB3

Notes
2 1 Terminal rating is AL9CU.
2 Terminal rating is AL7CU.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-374 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the 2
circuit breaker.
2
ND Frame Accessories
Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 1
2
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-419
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
—
—
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-421 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-421 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-421 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ — 2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-423 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ —
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-423 ■ — ■ ■ — ■ — 2
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-427 ■ — — ■ — — —
Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-428 ■ — — ■ — — — 2
■ — — ■ — — —
Undervoltage release mechanism
Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550)
V4-T2-435
V4-T2-436 — — ■ — — — —
2
External Accessories
2
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-456 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-458 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Terminal shield V4-T2-458 ■ ■ ■ — — — —
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-459 — ■ — — ■ — — 2
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-460 ❏ ❏ ❏ — ❏ —
Key interlock kit V4-T2-461 ❏ ❏ ❏ — ❏ — 2
● ● ●
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-462
V4-T2-462 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-464 ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-465
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-466 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-467 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-544 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Handle extension V4-T2-556 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-470 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
2
OPTIM System Components Three Poles
Ground fault alarm unit V4-T2-469 — — — — — — —
Potential transformer module V4-T2-469 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-469
Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-470 — — — — — — — 2
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-470 — — — — — — —
Modifications (Refer to Eaton) 2
Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-259 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2
Legend 2
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
2
Note
1 OPTIM 550 and 1050 are factory sealed and do not have the right pole available for accessories.
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-375

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Technical Data and Specifications

2
2 UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1

2 Circuit
Breaker Number
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

2 Type
ND
of Poles
2, 3, 4
240
65
277
—
480
50
600
25

2 CND 2 2, 3, 4 65 — 50 25
HND 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35
2 CHND 2 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35
NDC 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 65
2 CNDC 2 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 65

2 NDU 3 3 300 4 — 150 75 5

2 IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1

2 Circuit
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Breaker Number Volts AC (50/60 Hz)

2 Type of Poles 240 415 690

ND
2 Icu 2, 3, 4 85 50 20
Ics 2, 3, 4 85 50 10
2 CND 2

2 Icu 2, 3, 4 85 50 20
Ics 2, 3, 4 85 50 10

2 HND
Icu 2, 3, 4 100 70 25
2 Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 13

2
CHND 2
Icu 2, 3, 4 100 70 25

2 Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 13
NDC
2 Icu 2, 3, 4 200 100 35
Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 18
2 CNDC 2

2 Icu
Ics
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
200
100
100
50
35
18

2 Notes
1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.

2 2 100% rated breakers.

3 800 amperes maximum rating.

2
4 Successfully tested at 300 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 200 kAIC at 240 Vac.
5 Successfully tested at 75 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kAIC at 600 Vac.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-376 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
N-Frame Digitrip
Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
2
rms sensing Yes Yes
2
Breaker Type
Frame N N 2
Ampere range 400–1200 A 400–1200 A
Interrupting rating at 480 volts 50, 65, 100 (kA) 50, 65, 100 (kA) 2
Protection
Ordering options LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LISG
2
Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes 2
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L) 2
Adjustable rating plug (In) No No
Long delay pickup 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
2
Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
2
Long delay time I4t 1–5 seconds 1–5 seconds
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes 2
High load alarm No 0.5–1.0 x Ir
Short Delay Protection (S) 2
Short delay pickup 150–800% x (Ir) 150–800% x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2
Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2
Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I) 2
Instantaneous pickup 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In)
Discriminator Yes Yes 2
Instantaneous override
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Yes Yes
2
Ground fault alarm 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is) 2
Ground fault pickup 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 2
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes
2
Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes
2
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes 2
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes
Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes 2
Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes Yes
2
1

Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included

Legend 2
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating 2
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
Note
2
2
1 Zone interlock kit.

2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-377

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

N-Frame Digitrip, continued

2 Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050

2 System Monitoring
Digital display Yes 1 Yes 1
2 Current Yes Yes
Power and energy No Yes
2 Power quality—harmonics No Yes

2 Power factor
Communications
No Yes

2 Eaton PowerNet No 2 Yes

Testing
2 Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet PowerNet
2 Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
2 (A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
2 Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
Notes
2 1 By OPTIMizer/BIM.
2 Eaton’s PowerNet kit.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-378 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
2
ND Frame
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2
2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) 2
4 11.13 (282.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
2
ND-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
2
Front View Side View
Front Cover Cutout 2
3.44 2
(87.3)
1.72
(43.6)
2
0.25 R

1.91
(6.4 R)
2
CL Handle

(48.4)
CL Handle
16.00
(406.4) ON/I 2
3.68 0.19 R
(4.8 R)
2
(93.2) OFF/O

1.50 2
(38.1)

3.19
(80.9) 6.38
2
2
(161.9)
8.25 5.50
(209.6) (139.7)
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lb (kg) 2
ND Frame 2
2
Complete Breaker
Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
ND, HND, NDC, NDU 37 (16.8) 45 (20.4) 58 (26.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-379

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Typical R-Frame Breaker
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-261
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-278
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-296
2 K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-304
V4-T2-328
2 M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-354
V4-T2-365
2 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-381
V4-T2-382
2
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-394
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-395
2 Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-398
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-399
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-412
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)

2 Product Description
● Eaton R-Frame circuit
2 breakers are available as
frame (which includes trip
unit), rating plug and
2 terminals
● All R-Frame circuit breakers
2 are suitable for reverse
feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-380 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. 2
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
Circuit Breaker/Frame 2
RD 3 16 T53 W 2
Circuit Breaker/ Suffix 2
Frame Type Number W =Without terminals
RD of Poles Circuit Breaker/Frame Trip Type 1 P =100% protected neutral pole 2
RDC 3 = Three-pole Ampere Rating T53= Digitrip RMS 510 LS R =Ground fault remote (310 only)
CRD 2
CRDC 2
4 = Four-pole 16 = 1600 amperes
20 = 2000 amperes
T65= Digitrip RMS 610 LSG
T86= Digitrip RMS 810 LSIG
K =Molded case switch
2
25 = 2500 amperes T96= Digitrip RMS 910 LSIG
T106 = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIG
T107 = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIA
2
Notes 2
1 For complete list of available trip types, refer to Pages V4-T2-382 to V4-T2-391.
2 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-381

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Product Selection
2
Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2
Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
2 Maximum
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
Continuous
2 Ampere
Rating
G
LI
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Rated
Current
Fixed
Rating Plug

2
at 40 °C Catalog Number (In) Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 1600 RD316T51W RD316T53W RD316T52W RD316T54W RD316T55W RD316T56W 800 RP6R16A080

1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2 2000 RD320T51W RD320T53W RD320T52W RD320T54W RD320T55W RD320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100

2 1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160

2 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T51W RD325T53W RD325T52W RD325T54W RD325T55W RD325T56W 1600 RP6R25A160
2 2000 RP6R25A200
2500
2
RP6R25A250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 1600 RDC316T51W RDC316T53W RDC316T52W RDC316T54W RDC316T55W RDC316T56W 800 RP6R16A080

1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2 2000 RDC320T51W RDC320T53W RDC320T52W RDC320T54W RDC320T55W RDC320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100

2 1200
1600
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160

2 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T51W RDC325T53W RDC325T52W RDC325T54W RDC325T55W RDC325T56W 1600 RP6R25A160
2 2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-382 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity. 2
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers 2
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
I
G
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
2
Ampere Rated Fixed
Rating
at 40 °C
LI
Catalog Number
LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Current
(In)
Rating Plug
Catalog Number
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
1600 CRD316T51W CRD316T53W CRD316T52W CRD316T54W CRD316T55W CRD316T56W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100 2
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160 2
2000 1 CRD320T51W CRD320T53W CRD320T52W CRD320T54W CRD320T55W CRD320T56W 1000
1200
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
2
1600 RP6R20A160 2
2000 RP6R20A200
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
1600 — CRDC316T53W CRDC316T52W CRDC316T54W CRDC316T55W CRDC316T56W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
2
1200 RP6R16A120
2
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1 CRDC320T51W CRDC320T53W CRDC320T52W CRDC320T54W CRDC320T55W CRDC320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100 2
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160 2
2000
2
RP6R20A200

Note
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-383

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2
Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

2 Maximum
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2
Continuous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere Rated Fixed
Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Current Rating Plug

2 at 40 °C Catalog Number (In) Catalog Number

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 1600 RD316T61W RD316T63W RD316T62W RD316T64W RD316T65W RD316T66W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120

2 2000 RD320T61W RD320T63W RD320T62W RD320T64W RD320T65W RD320T66W

1600
1000
RP6R16A160
RP6R20A100

2 1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T61W RD325T63W RD325T62W RD325T64W RD325T65W RD325T66W 1600 RP6R25A160
2 2000 RP6R25A200

2 2500 RP6R25A250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 1600 RDC316T61W RDC316T63W RDC316T62W RDC316T64W RDC316T65W RDC316T66W 800 RP6R16A080

1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120
1600
2
RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T61W RDC320T63W RDC320T62W RDC320T64W RDC320T65W RDC320T66W 1000 RP6R20A100

2 1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T61W RDC325T63W RDC325T62W RDC325T64W RDC325T65W RDC325T66W 1600 RP6R25A160
2 2000 RP6R25A200

2 2500 RP6R25A250

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-384 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity. 2
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers 2
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
I
G
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
2
Ampere Rated Fixed
Rating
at 40 °C
LI
Catalog Number
LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Current
(In)
Rating Plug
Catalog Number
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
1600 CRD316T61W CRD316T63W CRD316T62W CRD316T64W CRD316T65W CRD316T66W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100 2
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160 2
2000 1 CRD320T61W CRD320T63W CRD320T62W CRD320T64W CRD320T65W CRD320T66W 1000
1200
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
2
1600 RP6R20A160 2
2000 RP6R20A200
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
1600 CRDC316T61W CRDC316T63W CRDC316T62W CRDC316T64W CRDC316T65W CRDC316T66W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
2
1200 RP6R16A120
2
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1 CRDC320T61W CRDC320T63W CRDC320T62W CRDC320T64W CRDC320T65W CRDC320T66W 1000 RP6R20A100 2
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160 2
2000
2
RP6R20A200

Note
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-385

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2
Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

2 Maximum
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2
Continuous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere Rated Fixed
Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Current Rating Plug

2 at 40 °C Catalog Number (In) Catalog Number

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 1600 RD316T81W RD316T83W RD316T82W RD316T84W RD316T85W RD316T86W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120

2 2000 RD320T81W RD320T83W RD320T82W RD320T84W RD320T85W RD320T86W

1600
1000
RP6R16A160
RP6R20A100

2 1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T81W RD325T83W RD325T82W RD325T84W RD325T85W RD325T86W 1600 RP6R25A160
2 2000 RP6R25A200

2 2500 RP6R25A250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 1600 RDC316T81W RDC316T83W RDC316T82W RDC316T84W RDC316T85W RDC316T86W 800 RP6R16A080

1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120
1600
2
RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T81W RDC320T83W RDC320T82W RDC320T84W RDC320T85W RDC320T86W 1000 RP6R20A100

2 1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T81W RDC325T83W RDC325T82W RDC325T84W RDC325T85W RDC325T86W 1600 RP6R25A160
2 2000 RP6R25A200

2 2500 RP6R25A250

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-386 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity. 2
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers 2
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
I
G
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
2
Ampere Rated Fixed
Rating
at 40 °C
LI
Catalog Number
LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Current
(In)
Rating Plug
Catalog Number
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
1600 CRD316T81W CRD316T83W CRD316T82W CRD316T84W CRD316T85W CRD316T86W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100 2
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160 2
2000 1 CRD320T81W CRD320T83W CRD320T82W CRD320T84W CRD320T85W CRD320T86W 1000
1200
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
2
1600 RP6R20A160 2
2000 RP6R20A200
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
1600 CRDC316T81W CRDC316T83W CRDC316T82W CRDC316T84W CRDC316T85W CRDC316T86W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
2
1200 RP6R16A120
2
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1 CRDC320T81W CRDC320T83W CRDC320T82W CRDC320T84W CRDC320T85W CRDC320T86W 1000 RP6R20A100 2
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160 2
2000
2
RP6R20A200

Note
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-387

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2
Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

2 Maximum
L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2
Continuous G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere Rated Fixed
Rating LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Current Rating Plug

2 at 40 °C Catalog Number (In) Catalog Number

Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2 1600 RD316T91W RD316T93W RD316T92W RD316T94W RD316T95W RD316T96W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120

2 2000 RD320T91W RD320T93W RD320T92W RD320T94W RD320T95W RD320T96W

1600
1000
RP6R16A160
RP6R20A100

2 1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T91W RD325T93W RD325T92W RD325T94W RD325T95W RD325T96W 1600 RP6R25A160
2 2000 RP6R25A200

2 2500 RP6R25A250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 1600 RDC316T91W RDC316T93W RDC316T92W RDC316T94W RDC316T95W RDC316T96W 800 RP6R16A080

1000 RP6R16A100
2 1200 RP6R16A120
1600
2
RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T91W RDC320T93W RDC320T92W RDC320T94W RDC320T95W RDC320T96W 1000 RP6R20A100

2 1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T91W RDC325T93W RDC325T92W RDC325T94W RDC325T95W RDC325T96W 1600 RP6R25A160
2 2000 RP6R25A200

2 2500 RP6R25A250

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-388 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity. 2
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers 2
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
I
G
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
2
Ampere Rated Fixed
Rating
at 40 °C
LI
Catalog Number
LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Current
(In)
Rating Plug
Catalog Number
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
1600 CRD316T91W CRD316T93W CRD316T92W CRD316T94W CRD316T95W CRD316T96W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100 2
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160 2
2000 1 CRD320T91W CRD320T93W CRD320T92W CRD320T94W CRD320T95W CRD320T96W 1000
1200
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
2
1600 RP6R20A160 2
2000 RP6R20A200
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
1600 CRDC316T91W CRDC316T93W CRDC316T92W CRDC316T94W CRDC316T95W CRDC316T96W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
2
1000 RP6R16A100
2
1200 RP6R16A120
2000 1 CRDC320T91W CRDC320T93W CRDC320T92W CRDC320T94W CRDC320T95W CRDC320T96W 1000 RP6R20A100 2
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160 2
2000
2
RP6R20A200

Note
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-389

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

2 Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.

2
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

2 L
S
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
2 Maximum
G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Fixed
Continuous
2 Ampere LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050 Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number
2 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac

2 1600 RD316T107W RD316T106W 800

1000
ORPR16A080
ORPR16A100

2 1200 ORPR16A120
1600 ORPR16A160
2 2000 RD320T107W RD320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100
1200 ORPR20A120
2 1600 ORPR20A160

2 2000 ORPR20A200
2500 RD325T107W RD325T106W 1600 ORPR25A160

2 2000 ORPR25A200
2500 ORPR25A250
2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 800
2
RDC316T107W RDC316T106W ORPR16A080
1000 ORPR16A100

2 1200 ORPR16A120
1600 ORPR16A160
2 2000 RDC320T107W RDC320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100
1200 ORPR20A120
2 1600 ORPR20A160

2 2500 RDC325T107W RDC325T106W

2000
1600
ORPR20A200
ORPR25A160

2 2000 ORPR25A200
2500 ORPR25A250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-390 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 2
2
100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
2
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
Maximum
G
A
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Fixed
2
Continuous
2
Ampere LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050 Rating Plug
Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Rating Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 2
1600 CRD316T107W CRD316T106W 800
1000
ORPR16A080
ORPR16A100
2
1200 ORPR16A120 2
1600 ORPR16A160
2000 1 CRD320T107W CRD320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100 2
1200 ORPR20A120
1600 ORPR20A160
2
2000 ORPR20A200
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 CRDC316T107W CRDC316T106W 800 ORPR16A080 2
1000 ORPR16A100
1200 ORPR16A120 2
1600
2
ORPR16A160
2000 1 CRDC320T107W CRDC320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100
1200 ORPR20A120
2
1600 ORPR20A160
2000 ORPR20A200 2
Molded Case Switches 2
Refer to Eaton for UL listed, series tested Molded Case
Switch application data. 2
Type RD—High Instantaneous (K) 2
Complete without Terminals
2
Continuous
Ampere Three-Pole Four-Pole
Rating Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number
2
1600 RD316WK RD416WK
2000 RD320WK RD420WK 2
2
Notes
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.

Molded case switch may trip above 17,500 amperes.

2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-391

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information

2
Line and Load Terminals Ordering Information
2 Line and load terminals R-Frame circuit breakers have
provide wire connecting Cu/AI terminals as standard
2 capabilities for specific and Cu only terminals as an
ranges of continuous current option. Specify if factory
2 ratings and wire types. All
terminals comply with
installation is required.

2 Underwriters Laboratories
Standards UL 486A and UL
486B and CSA C22.2 No.
2 65M. Unless otherwise
specified, R-Frame circuit
2 breaker line load terminals are
shipped separately for field
2 installation.

2 Line and Load Terminals

2 Maximum
Breaker
Terminal
Body Wire
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/ Metric Wire Catalog
Amperes Material Type Hardware No. Conductors Range mm2 Number
2 Wire Terminals

2 1600
1600
Aluminum
Copper
Cu/AI
Cu
English
English
500–1000 (4)
1–600 (4)
300–500
50–300
TA1600RD
T1600RD

2 2000 Aluminum Cu/AI English 2–600 (6) 35–300 TA2000RD 1

Rear Connectors
2 2000 Copper — English — — B2016RD
2000 Copper — English — — B2016RDL 2
2 2500 Copper — English — — B2500RD 3

2 Notes
1 Catalog Number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker.

2 2 For use with 100% rated 1600 A and 2000 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when

100% rated device is ordered.

3 For use with 2500 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 2500 A breaker is ordered.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-392 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Mounting Hardware
2
Breaker Line/Load
Conductors 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
TA2000RD
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-393

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
2 Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
2
2 RD Frame Accessories
Three-Pole Four-Pole
2
Reference
Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

2
Internal Accessories 1
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-419 — — ■ — — ■ —

2 Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-419 — — ■ — — ■ —

Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-419 — — ■ — — ■ —

2 Auxiliary switch (4A, 4B) V4-T2-419 — — ■ — — ■ —

Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-427 — — ■ — — ■ —
2 Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-428 — — ■ — — ■ —
— — ■ — — ■ —
2 Undervoltage release mechanism
Accessory terminal block 2
V4-T2-435
V4-T2-436 — — ■ — — — ■

2 External Accessories
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-456 — — — — — — —
2 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-459 — ● — — ● — —
Key interlock kit V4-T2-461 ■ ■ ■ — ■ — —
2 Walking beam interlock V4-T2-462 — — — — — — —

2 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-464 ■

■
■
■
■
■
—
—
■
■
—
—
—
—
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-544

2 Handle extension 3 V4-T2-556 — ■ — — ■ — —

OPTIM System Components
2 Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-469 ● ● ● — — — —
Digitrip OPTIMizer ● ● ● — — — —
2
V4-T2-470
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-470 ● ● ● — — — —

2 Modifications (Refer to Eaton)

Special calibration — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-259 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
2 Marine/naval application — ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position

2 ● Accessory available/modification available

Notes

2 1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
2 Mounts outside breaker.
3 Included with breaker.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-394 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1 2
Circuit
Breaker Number
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
2
2
Type of Poles 240 277 480 600
RD 3, 4 125 — 65 50
CRD 2 3 125 — 65 50 2
RDC 3, 4 200 — 100 65
CRDC 2 3 200 — 100 65 2
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1

Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) 2

Circuit
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles 240 415 690 2
RD
Icu 3, 4 135 70 25
2
Ics 3, 4 100 50 13 2
RDC
Icu 3, 4 200 100 35 2
Ics 3, 4 100 50 18

Notes
2
1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2 100% rated breakers.
2
See Page V4-T2-396 for Trip Unit Specifications.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-395

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Specifications
2
2 R-Frame Digitrip

2
Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip
Trip Unit Type RMS 510 RMS 610 RMS 810 RMS 910 OPTIM 1050
rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Breaker Type

2 Frame R R R R R
Ampere range 800–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A
2 Interrupting rating at 480 volts 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA)
Protection
2 Ordering options LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSI(A), LISG
LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG
2 Fixed rated plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Long Delay Protection (L)

2 Adjustable rating plug (In) No No No No No

Long delay pickup 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5 –1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
2 Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
Long delay time I4t No No No No 1–5 Seconds
2 Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
High load alarm No 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir 0.5-1.0 x Ir
2 Short Delay Protection (S)

2 Short delay pickup 200–600%

S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
150-800% x (Ir) 12

2 Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms

Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2 Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
2 Instantaneous pickup 200–600% 200–600% 200–600% 200–600% 200–800% x (In) 2
M1and M2 x (In) M1and M2 x (In) M1and M2 x (In) M1and M2 x (In)
2 Discriminator Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes
Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Ground Fault Protection (G)

2 Ground fault alarm 4 No No No No 25–100% x (In)

Ground fault pickup 4 25–100% x (Is) 25-100% x (Is) 25–100% x (Is) 25–100% x (Is) 25–100% x (In)
2 Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
2 Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2
Legend
2 BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
2 In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In

2 Notes
1 Except 2500 ampere frame is 200–600%.
2 Varies by frame.

2 3 LS/LSG only.
4 Not to exceed 1200 amperes.

2
2
2

V4-T2-396 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
R-Frame Digitrip, continued
Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip
2
Trip Unit Type RMS 510 RMS 610 RMS 810 RMS 910 OPTIM 1050
System Diagnostics
2
Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Magnitude of trip information No Yes Yes Yes Yes 2
Remote signal contacts No Yes Yes Yes Yes
System Monitoring 2
Digital display No Yes Yes Yes Yes 1
Current No Yes Yes Yes Yes
2
Voltage No No No Yes No
2
Power and energy No No Yes Yes Yes
Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes Yes 2
Power factor No No Yes (over Yes Yes
Eaton PowerNet only) 2
Communications
Eaton PowerNet No No Yes Yes Yes 2
2
Testing
Testing method Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet

Legend
2
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm 2
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In 2
2
Note
1 By OPTIMizer/BIM.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-397

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Dimensions and Weights

2 Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 RD Frame
Number
2 of Poles Width Height Depth
3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
2 4 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)

2 RD-Frame, Three-Pole, 1600 and 2000 Amperes

2 Front View

2 11.13 (0.4) Dia. 15.50

Side View
14.50 (4 Holes) Use 4, (393.7)
2 7.25
(184.2)
(368.3) 0.38 (Mil) Dia. Bolts
for Mounting Breaker
9.00
(228.6)

2 C
L Breaker
5.09 7.75
2 (129.4)
C
L Handle
(196.9)
9.69
2 (246.1) 15.00
(381.0)
16.00
(406.4)

2 Push
To
Trip

2
6.65 0.16
(166.7) 12.91 (4.0)
(327.8) R Typ.
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lb (kg)
2 RD Frame

2 Breaker Type
Complete Breaker
Three-Pole Four-Pole

2 1600 Amperes
RD, CRD 1, RDC, CRDC 1 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2 2000 Amperes
RD, RDC 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2 CRD, CRDC 130 (59.0) 175 (79.4)

2 2500 Amperes
RD, RDC 135 (61.2) 182 (82.6)
2 Note
1 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-398 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Contents
Motor Circuit Protectors
Description Page
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259 2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296 2
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328 2
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 2
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-400
2
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-401
V4-T2-402 2
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . V4-T2-412 2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416 2
External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449
2
2
2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) 2
Product Description
Designated as Eaton’s Types
Standards and Certifications
The MCP is designed to
2
GMCP and HMCP, the
instantaneous-only motor
comply with the applicable
requirements of Underwriters 2
circuit protector (MCP) is Laboratories Standard UL
available in ratings from 3 A 489, Canadian Standards 2
to 1200 A for motor starter Association Standard C22.2
sizes 0 through 8. No. 5.1, and International 2
Electrotechnical Commission
An innovative design of
internal components allows
Recommendations
IEC 157-1.
2
higher MCP-starter
combination interrupting The MCP is a recognized 2
ratings. The MCP is marked component (UL File E7819)
to permit proper electrical
application within the
and complies with the
applicable requirements of
2
assigned equipment ratings. Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489. It is also 2
designed to comply with the
applicable requirements of 2
Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2 2
No. 5.1, International
Electrotechnical Commission
Recommendations IEC 157-1,
2
and nameplates bear the CE
marking. 2
2
2
Note: Interrupting ratings are
dependent on starter it is used 2
with.
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-399

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Catalog Number Selection

2 This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
2 Motor Circuit Protector

2 HMCP 003 A0 C
2 Motor Circuit Suffix
Protective Type Continuous Ampere Magnetic Trip Range/ C =Non-aluminum terminals
2 HMCP = Three-pole
HM2P = Two-pole 1 003
Rating
A0=9–30/0
NEMA Starter Size W =Without terminals
X =Load terminals only
HMCPS = Three-pole 007 C0=21–70/0 Y =Line terminals only
2 015 E0=45–150/0 S =Stainless steel terminals
(150 A frame only)
025 D0=40–60/0
No Suffix: Standard terminals on line and load
2 030
050
H1=90–300/1
G2=80–120/2
K2=50–500/2
2 070 J2=115–170/2
M2=210–700/2
100 L3 =160–240/3
2 150
R3=300–1000/3
T4=450–1500/4

2
U4=750–2500/4
250 A5=350–700/5
C5=450–900/5
2 400 D5=500–1000/5
F5 =625–1250/5
G5=750–1500/5
2 J5=875–1750/5
K5=1000–2000/5
L5 =1125–2250/5
2 W5=1250–2500/5
N5=1500–3000/5
2 R5=1750–3500/5
X5=2000–4000/5
Y5=2250–4500/5
2 600 L6 =1800–6000/6 (electronic)
X6=500–2500/6 (electronic)
Y6=1000–4000/6 (electronic)
2 800 X7=1600–6400/7 (electronic)
1200 Y8=2400–9600/8 (electronic)

2
2 Motor Circuit Protector

GMCP 003 A0 C
2
2 Motor Circuit
Protective Device Continuous Magnetic Trip
Suffix
C = Non-aluminum terminals
GMCP = Three-pole Ampere Range/NEMA
2 Rating Starter Size
003 A0= 15–30/0
2 007
015
C0= 35–70/0
E0= 75–150/0
030 H1= 150–300/1
2 050
060
K2= 250–500/2
J2= 300–600/2

2
063 M2=320–630/2

Note
2 1 On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-400 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
G-Frame
2
480 Vac Maximum, 600Y/347 Vac
NEMA Continuous Motor Full Load MCP MCP 2
Starter Size Amperes Cam Setting Current Amperes (FLA) 1 Trip Setting Catalog Number
0 3 A 1.1–1.2 15 GMCP003A0C 2
B 1.3–1.5 18
C 1.6–1.7 21
2
D 1.8–1.9 24
2
E 2.0–2.2 27
F 2.3–2.5 30 2
0 7 A 2.6–3.1 35 GMCP007C0C
B 3.2–3.6 42 2
C 3.7–3.9 49
D 4.3–4.7 56
2
E 4.8–5.2 63
2
F 5.3–5.7 70
0 15 A 5.7–6.8 75 GMCP015E0C 2
B 6.9–7.9 90
C 8.0–9.1 105 2
D
E
9.2–10.3
10.4–11.4
120
135
2
F 11.5–12.6 150 2
1 30 A 11.5–13.7 150 GMCP030H1C
B 13.8–16.0 180 2
C 16.1–18.3 210
D 18.4–20.6 240
2
E 20.7–22.9 270
2
F 23.0–25.2 300
2 50 A 19.3–22.9 250 GMCP050K2C 2
B 23.0–26.8 300
C 26.9–30.6 350 2
D 30.7–34.5 400
E 34.6–38.3 450
2
F 38.4–42.1 500
2
3 60 A 23.1–27.5 300 GMCP060J2C
B 27.7–32.2 360 2
C 32.3–36.7 420
D 36.9–41.4 480 2
E
F
41.5–46.0
46.2–50.5
540
600
2
3 63 A 24.2–32.1 320 GMCP063M2C 2
B 29.1–34.8 380
D 38.8–46.4 500 2
E 43.6–48.9 570
F 48.5–53.7 630
2
Notes
1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or
2
MCP ratings should be used.
All GMCP 3–63A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire. Refer to Page V4-T2-265 under Optional Terminal Types.
2
UL recognized and CSA approved.
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-401

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessories
2
Modifications for GMCP
2 Internal accessories must be factory installed.

2 Internal Accessories 1
Electrical Ratings Contact Factory Style
2 Type Accessory Volts Frequency Amperes Arrangement Suffix Number
Shunt trip 2 120 50/60 Hz 1.1 — S5 1373D62G18
2 Shunt trip 2 240 50/60 Hz 2.1 — S6 1373D62G19
Auxiliary switch 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B A3 1288C74G03
2 Auxiliary switch 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 2A/2B A6 1288C73G03
Alarm switch 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 Make/Break B3
2
1288C75G03
Auxiliary switch/alarm switch combination 3 240 50/60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B Make/Break B13 1288C76G09

2
External Mounted Accessories
2 Description
Number Units
in Package
Style
Number

2 Lock dog (non-padlockable) 1 1294C01H01

Mounting hardware 1 624B375G23
2 DIN rail adapter 4 10 1225C79G02

2 Modifications for HMCP

See Internal Accessories starting on Page V4-T2-416.
2 Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames

2 Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—GMCP-Frame

Rating Type GMCP-Frame
2 Catalog
Description NEMA IP Number
2 S01 Blue Handle S01 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 GMHMVD12B / 68C6039G05
12-inch shaft 4/4X 65 GMHMVD12BX / 68C6039G07
2
S01 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 GMHMVD12R / 68C6039G06
2
S01 Red Handle
12-inch shaft 4/4X 65 GMHMVD12RX / 68C6039G08

2
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
2 G Direct 5
2 Black Handle Yellow Handle
With Shroud Without Shroud With Shroud Without Shroud
2 Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30

Notes
2 1 Only one accessory may be installed in GMCP.
2 LH only.

2 3 RH only.
4 For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN50022.

2
5 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.

No UVR available on GMCP.

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-402 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
F-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
Motor Motor 2
Full Load MCP Full Load MCP
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
2
(FLA) 1 (FLA) 1
2
Size Amps Setting 2 Number Size Amps Setting 2 Number
0 3 A 0.69–0.91 9 HMCP003A0C 2 70 A 16.1–21.4 210 HMCP070M2C
B 0.92–1.0 12 B 21.5 –26.8 280
2
C 1.1–1.2 15 C 26.9 –32.2 350
D 1.3–1.5 18 D 32.3–37.5 420 2
E 1.6–1.7 21 E 37.6–42.9 490
F 1.8–1.9 24 F 43.0–48.3 560 2
G
H
2.0–2.2
2.3–2.5
27
30
G
H
48.4–53.7
53.8–59.1
630
700
2
0 7 A 1.5–2.0 21 HMCP007C0C 3 100 A 23.0–30.6 300 HMCP100R3C 2
B 2.1–2.5 28 B 30.7–38.3 400
C 2.6–3.1 35 C 38.4–46.0 500 2
D 3.2–3.6 42 D 46.1–53.7 600
E 3.7–3.9 49 E 53.8 –61.4 700
2
F 4.3–4.7 56 F 61.5 –69.1 800
2
G 4.8–5.2 63 G 69.2–76.8 900
H 5.3–5.7 70 H 76.9–84.5 1000 2
0 15 A 3.4–4.5 45 HMCP015E0C 4 150 A 34.6–46.0 450 HMCP150T4C
B 4.6–5.6 60 B 46.1–57.5 600 2
C 5.7–6.8 75 C 57.6–69.1 750
D 6.9–7.9 90 D 69.2–80.6 900
2
E 8.0–9.1 105 D 69.2–80.6 900
2
F 9.2–10.3 120 E 80.7–92.2 1050
G 10.4–11.4 135 F 92.3–103.7 1200 2
H 11.5 –12.6 150 G 103.8–115.2 1350
1 30 A 6.9–9.1 90 HMCP030H1C H 115.3–126.7 1500 2
B
C
9.2–11.4
11.5–13.7
120
150
4 150 A
B
57.0 –75.0
76.0–95.0
750
1000
HMCP150U4C
2
D 13.8–16.0 180 C 96.0–114.0 1250 2
E 16.1–18.3 210 D 115.0–130.7 1500
F 18.4–20.6 240 E 3 1750 2
G 20.7–22.9 270 F 2000
2
3

H 23.0–25.2 300 G 3 2250

2 50 A 11.5–15.2 150 HMCP050K2C H 3 2500
2
B 15.3–19.1 200 Notes
C 19.2–22.9 250 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA

value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam
2
D 23.0–26.8 300
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
E 26.9–30.6 350 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 2
3 Settings above 130 A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the
F 30.7–4.5 400
G 34.6–38.3 450
ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load
ampere rating.
2
H 38.4–42.1 500 HMCP 3–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCP 150 A come with
line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB. 2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-403

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP

2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
2 MCP MCP
Cont. Cam Trip Catalog
2 Amps Setting Setting 1 Number
25 A 40 HMCP025D0C
2 B 43
D 49
2 E 52

2 F 55
G 58
2 H 60
50 A 80 HMCP050G2C
2 B 87

2 C
D
93
98

2 E 103
F 109
2 G 115
H 120
2 70 A 115 HMCP070J2C

2 B 122
C 130
2 D 139
E 145
2 F 153
G 160
2 H 170

2 100 A 160 HMCP100L3C

B 174
2 C 185
D 196
2 E 207

2 F
G
218
229

2 H 240

Notes
2 1 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.

HMCP 25–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-404 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
Motor Full MCP Motor Full MCP
2
NEMA Load Current Trip MCP NEMA Load Current Trip MCP
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Amperes
(FLA) 1
Setting
2
Catalog
Number
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Amperes
(FLA) 1
Setting
2
Catalog
Number
2
0 3 A 0.69–0.91 9 HMCPS003A0C 3 100 A 23.0–30.6 300 HMCPS100R3C 2
B 0.92–1.0 12 B 30.7–38.3 400
C 1.1–1.2 15 C 38.4–46.0 500 2
D 1.3–1.5 18 D 46.1–53.7 600
E 1.6–1.7 21 E 53.8–61.4 700
2
F 1.8–1.9 24 F 61.5–69.1 800
2
G 2.0–2.2 27 G 69.2–76.8 900
H 2.3–2.5 30 H 76.9–84.5 1000 2
0 7 A 1.5–2.0 21 HMCPS007C0C 4 150 A 34.6–46.0 450 HMCPS150T4C
B 2.1–2.5 28 B 46.1–57.5 600 2
C 2.6–3.1 35 C 57.6–69.1 750
D 3.2–3.6 42 D 69.2–80.6 900
2
E 3.7–3.9 49 E 80.7–92.2 1050
2
F 4.3–4.7 56 F 92.3–103.7 1200
G 4.8–5.2 63 G 103.8–115.2 1350 2
H 5.3–5.7 70 H 115.3–126.7 1500
0 15 A 3.4–4.5 45 HMCPS015E0C 4 150 A 57.0–75.0 750 HMCPS150U4C 2
B
C
4.6–5.6
5.7–6.8
60
75
B
C
76.0–95.0
96.0–114.0
1000
1250
2
D 6.9–7.9 90 D 115.0–130.7 1500 2
E 8.0–9.1 105 E 3 1750
F 9.2–10.3 120 F 3 2000 2
G 10.4–11.4 135 G 2250
2
3

H 11.5–12.6 150 H 3 2500

1 30 A 6.9–9.1 90 HMCPS030H1C Notes 2
B 9.2–11.4 120 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA

C 11.5–13.7 150
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2
D 13.8–16.0 180 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.

E 16.1–18.3 210
3 Settings above 130 A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the

ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load
2
F 18.4–20.6 240 ampere rating.
G 20.7–22.9 270 HMCP 25–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB.
2
HMCPS 3–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 150 A come
H 23.0–25.2 300
with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB. 2
2 50 A 11.5–15.2 150 HMCPS050K2C
B 15.3–19.1 200 2
C 19.2–22.9 250
D 23.0–26.8 300 2
E
F
26.9–30.6
30.7–34.5
350
400
2
G 34.6–38.3 450 2
H 38.4–42.1 500
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-405

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

J-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
2 Motor Motor
Full Load MCP Full Load MCP
2 NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog

2
Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 2 Number 3 Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 2 Number 3
4 250 A 27.0–30.7 350 HMCP250A5C 5 250 A 67.4–75.3 875 HMCP250J5C

2 B 30.8–33.8 400 B 75.4–83.8 980

C 33.9–36.9 440 C 83.9–92.3 1090
2 5 250 D 37.0–40.3 480 D 92.4–100.7 1200
E 40.4–43.8 525 E 100.8–109.2 1310
2 F 43.9–46.9 570 F 109.3–117.6 1420

2 G
H
47.0–50.7
47.0–50.7
610
660
G
H
117.7–126.1
126.2–134.6
1530
1640

2 I 47.0–50.7 700 I 134.7–142.8 1750

5 250 A 34.7–38.8 450 HMCP250C5C 5 250 A 77.0–86.6 1000 HMCP250K5C
2 B 38.9–43.4 505 B 86.6–96.1 1125
C 43.5–47.6 565 C 96.2–105.7 1250
2 D 47.7–52.2 620 D 105.8–115.3 1375

2 E 52.3–56.5 680 E 115.4–124.9 1500

F 56.6–60.7 735 F 125.0–134.6 1625
2 G 60.8–64.9 790 G 134.7–144.2 1750
H 65.0–69.2 845 H 144.3–153.8 1875
2 I 69.3–73.5 900 I 153.9–163.3 2000
5 250 A 38.5–43.4 500 5 250 A 86.6–97.3 1125
2 B 43.5–48.0 565
HMCP250D5C
B 97.4–108.4 1265
HMCP250L5C

2 C 48.1–53.0 625 C 108.5–118.8 1410

D 53.1–57.6 690 D 118.9–129.9 1545
2 E 57.7–62.3 750 E 130.0–140.7 1690
F 62.4–67.3 810 F 140.8–151.5 1830
2 G 67.4–71.9 875 G 151.6–162.3 1970

2 H
I
72.0–76.9
77.0–81.6
935
1000
H
I
162.4–173.0
173.1–183.6
2110
2250

2 5 250 A 48.1–53.8 625 HMCP250F5C 5 250 A 96.2–108.0 1250 HMCP250W5C

B 53.9–59.9 700 B 108.1–119.9 1405
2 C 60.0–66.1 780 C 120.0–132.3 1560
D 66.2–72.3 860 D 132.4–144.2 1720
2 E 72.4–78.4 940 E 144.3–156.1 1875

2 F 78.5–83.8 1020 F 156.2–168.0 2030

G 83.9–89.9 1090 G 168.1–179.9 2185
2 H 90.0–96.1 1170 H 180.0–192.3 2340
I 96.2–102.0 1250 I 192.4–204.0 2500
2 5 250 A 57.7–64.6 750 HMCP250G5C Notes
B 64.7–71.9 840
2
1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA

value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate
C 72.0–79.2 935
cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2 D 79.3–86.5 1030 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place
E 86.6–93.8 1125
of HMCP.
2 F 93.9–101.1 1220
All HMCP and HM2P 250 A come with line and load steel body terminals, T250KB. (With suffix
G 101.2–108.4 1315 “C,” without “C” comes with TA250KB.)
2 H 108.5–115.3 1410

2 I 115.4–122.4 1500

V4-T2-406 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
K-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
Motor Motor 2
Full Load MCP Full Load MCP
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
2
(FLA) 1 Number 3 (FLA) 1 Number 3
2
Size Amps Setting 2 Size Amps Setting 2

4 400 A 27.0–30.7 350 HMCP400A5C 5 400 A 77.0–86.5 1000 HMCP400K5C

B 30.8–33.8 400 B 86.6–96.1 1125
2
C 33.9–36.9 440 C 96.2–105.7 1250
5 400 D 37.0–40.3 480 HMCP400A5C D 105.8–115.3 1375 2
E 40.4–43.8 525 E 115.4–124.9 1500
F 43.9–46.9 570 F 125.0–134.6 1625 2
G
H
47.0–50.7
50.8–53.8
610
660
G
H
134.7–144.2
144.3–153.8
1750
1875
2
I 53.9–57.2 700 I 153.9–163.3 2000 2
5 400 A 38.5–43.4 500 HMCP400D5C 5 400 A 86.6–97.3 1125 HMCP400L5C
B 43.5–48.0 565 B 97.4–108.4 1265 2
C 48.1–53.0 626 C 108.5–118.8 1410
D 53.1–57.6 690 D 118.9–129.9 1545
2
E 57.7–62.3 750 E 130.0–140.7 1690
2
F 62.4–67.3 810 F 140.8–151.5 1830
G 67.4–71.9 875 G 151.6–162.3 1970 2
H 72.0–76.9 935 H 162.4–173.0 2110
I 77.0–81.6 1000 I 173.1–183.6 2250 2
5 400 A 48.1–53.8 625 5 400 A 96.2–108.0 1250
2
HMCP400F5C HMCP400W5C
B 53.9–59.9 700 B 108.1–119.9 1405
C 60.0–66.1 780 C 120.0–132.3 1560
2
D 66.2–72.3 860 D 132.4–144.2 1720
E 72.4–78.4 940 E 144.3–156.1 1875 2
F 78.5–83.8 1020 F 156.2–168.0 2030
G 83.9–89.9 1090 G 168.1–179.9 2185 2
H
I
90.0–96.1
96.2–102.0
1170
1250
H
I
180.0–192.3
192.4–204.0
2340
2500
2
5 400 A 57.7–64.6 750 HMCP400G5C 5 400 A 115.4–129.9 1500 HMCP400N5C 2
B 64.7–71.9 840 B 130.0–144.2 1690
C 72.0–79.2 935 C 144.3–158.4 1875 2
D 79.3–86.5 1030 D 158.5–173.0 2060
E 86.6–93.8 1125 E 173.1–187.6 2250
2
F 93.9–101.1 1220 F 187.7–201.9 2440
2
G 101.2–108.4 1315 G 202.0–216.1 2625
H 108.5–115.3 1410 H 216.2–230.7 2810 2
I 115.4–122.4 1500 I 230.8–244.9 3000
5 400 A 67.4–75.3 875 HMCP400J5C Notes
2
B 75.4–83.8 980 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA

C 83.9–92.3 1090
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam 2
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
D 92.4–100.7 1200 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place
2
E 100.8–109.2 1310
of HMCP.
F 109.3–117.6 1420
All HMCP and HM2P 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers 2
G 117.7–126.1 1530 with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K.

H 126.2–134.6 1640 2
I 134.7–142.8 1750
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-407

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

L-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued 600 Vac Maximum 4

2 Motor Motor
Full Load MCP Full Load
2 NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
NEMA
Starter Cont. Cam
Current
Amperes
MCP
Trip
MCP
Catalog

2
Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 2 Number 3 Size Amps Setting (FLA) 1 Setting Number
5 400 A 134.7–151.5 1750 HMCP400R5C 6 600 A 138.5–184.5 1800 HMCP600L6W

2 B 151.6–168.4 1970 B 184.6–230.7 2400

C 168.5–185.3 2190 C 230.8–276.8 3000
2 D 185.4–201.9 2410 D 276.9–323.0 3600
E 202.0–218.8 2625 E 323.1–369.1 4200
2 F 218.9–235.7 2845 F 369.2–415.3 4800

2 G
H
235.8–252.6
252.7–269.2
3065
3285
G
H
415.4–461.4
461.5–507.7
5400
6000

2 I 269.3–285.7 3500 6 600 A 38.5–46.1 500 HMCP600X6W

5 400 A 153.9–173.0 2000 HMCP400X5C B 46.2–61.4 600
2 B 173.1–192.3 2250 C 61.5–76.8 800
C 192.4–211.5 2500 D 76.9–96.1 1000
2 D 211.6–230.7 2750 E 96.2–115.3 1250

2 E 230.8–249.9 3000 F 115.4–153.7 1500

F 250.0–269.2 3250 G 153.8–192.2 2000
2 G 269.3–288.4 3500 H 192.3–230.7 2500
H 288.5–307.6 3750 6 600 A 76.9–96.1 1000 HMCP600Y6W
2 I 307.7–326.9 4000 B 96.2–115.3 1250
5 400 A 173.1–194.5 2250 C 115.4–153.7 1500
2 B 194.6–216.1 2530
HMCP400Y5C
D 153.8–192.2 2000

2 C 216.2–237.6 2810 E 192.3–230.7 2500

D 237.7–259.5 3090 F 230.8–269.1 3000
2 E 259.6–281.1 3375 G 269.2–307.6 3500
F 281.2–302.6 3655 H 307.7–346.1 4000
2 G 302.7–324.1 3935 Notes

2 H 324.2–346.1 4215 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA

value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam
I 346.2–368.1 4500
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place

2 of HMCP.
4 Equipped with electronic trip device.

All HMCP and HM2P 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers
2 with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K.
All HMCP 600 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-346.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-408 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
N-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum 1

NEMA Motor Full MCP MCP 2

Starter Cont. Cam Load Current Trip Catalog
Size Amps Setting Amperes (FLA) 2 Setting Number 2
7 800 A 123.1–184.5 1600 HMCP800X7W
B 184.6–246.1 2400 2
C 246.2–307.6 3200
D 307.7–369.1 4000
2
E 369.2–430.7 4800
2
F 430.8–492.2 5600
G 492.3–553.7 6400 2
8 1200 A 184.6–276.8 2400 HMCP12Y8W
B 276.9–369.1 3600 2
C
D
369.2–461.4
461.5–553.7
4800
6000
2
E 553.8–646.1 7200 2
F 646.2–738.4 8400
G 738.5–830.7 9600 2
Notes
1 Equipped with electronic trip device.
2
2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13X the minimum FLA value

shown. Where a 13X setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings 2
and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-409

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
V4-T2-399

2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-411
V4-T2-411
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . V4-T2-412
2 Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2
2
2 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB)

2 Product Description
Motor protection circuit The electronic trip unit ● Phase loss protection The MPCB is based on
2 breakers (MPCBs) provide
UL 489 branch circuit
provides typical motor
overload relay functionality
● Active when the
maximum phase current
the Series C F-Frame.
Accessories for standard
protection, UL 508 and and short-circuit protection is greater than 50% of Series C breakers apply to the
2 CSA C22.2 No. 14 motor against potential phase-to- FLA setting MPCB. Unlike Motor Circuit
protection, and meet IEC phase or phase-to-ground Breaker will trip when Protectors (MCPs), MPCBs
2
●
60947-2 and 50947-4 faults. minimum phase current are UL 489 listed with 35 kA
requirements. Typical branch is 25% or less than the and 65 kA interruption
● Disconnecting means
2 motor loads are protected by
three-component starters, ● Branch circuit short-circuit maximum phase current ratings.

consisting of breaker, protection ● Time delay of 1 or

2 contactor and overload ● Overload protection 2 seconds before
relay, or fuse, contactor and breaker trips
Class 5, 10, 15 and 20
2
●

overload relay. The MPCB ● Thermal memory to

● Phase unbalance prevent immediate restart
application-specific protection
protection
2 eliminates the need for motor
overload relay found in the
● FDMP breaker trips
after overload trip to allow
motor to cool down
when there is a 40%
2 traditional three-component
starter assembly. The branch difference between any
motor load protection is phase compared to the
2 simplified to an MPCB and calculated three-phase
contactor, reducing both average
2 space requirements and
heat generation in customer
2 panels. Protection is provided
by application-specific
2 electronic trip units.

2
2
2

V4-T2-410 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
FDMP and HFDMP
35 kA With Phase 65 kA With Phase
2
2
35 kA Without Phase Unbalance, Unbalance and Adjustable 65 kA Without Phase Unbalance, Unbalance and Adjustable
Continuous Amperes Class 10 Motor Protection Only Motor Class Protection Class 10 Motor Protection Only Motor Class Protection
80
2
FDMP3080L FDMP3080JL HFDMP3080L HFDMP3080JL
100 FDMP3100L FDMP3100JL HFDMP3100L HFDMP3100JL
160 FDMP3160L FDMP3160JL HFDMP3160L HFDMP3160JL
2
205 FDMP3205L FDMP3205JL HFDMP3205L HFDMP3205JL
2
FLA le Dial Setting
Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H 2
80 40 50 60 70 80 — — —
100 80 — 90 — 100 — — — 2
160
205
100
160
115
170
130
180
145
195
160
205
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
Technical Data and Specifications 2
Specifications 2
Feature FDMP HFDMP
Interruption rating at 240 V 65 kA 100 kA 2
Interruption rating at 480 V 35 kA 65 kA
Interruption rating at 600 V 18 kA 25 kA
2
Icu/Ics at 240 V 65 kA/33 kA 1 100 kA/50 kA 1
2
Icu/Ics at 415 V 35 kA/18 kA 1 65 kA/33 kA 1
100% rated No No 2
FLA range (A) 40–205 40–205
Motor class protection 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20 2
Phase unbalance protection (current)—active for phase current 40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds 40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds
>0.5 FLA setting 2
Phase loss protection (current)—active for phase current Min. phase 0.25 max. phase for 1 second Min. phase 0.25 max. phase for 1 second
>0.5 FLA setting 2
Thermal memory protection Yes Yes
High load indicator — — 2
Pre-detection relays
Internal accessories
—
Factory installed
—
Factory installed
2
Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR 2
Notes
1 IEC ratings available only on FWMP and HFWMP. 2
For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-232.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-411

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-410
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
2 Product Description Product Selection
Eaton’s Type ELC current Limiters are coordinated with
2 limiter attachment for the the MCP so that normal fault Type ELC Current
Limiter Attachment
ELC Current Limiter Attachment
MCP is designed to provide currents are interrupted MCP Rating Catalog

2 increased interrupting
capacity. The combination
automatically by the MCP
without any damage to the
(Amperes)
3
Number
ELC3003R

2 may be used for the

application up to 200,000 A
limiter. Only the rare very
high fault is opened by
7 ELC3007R
15 ELC3015R
symmetrical at 600 Vac, the limiter. Faults that are
2 making the MCP suitable for interrupted by the limiter 30 ELC3030R
use in network distribution also magnetically trip the 50 ELC3050R
2 systems or other applications
where unusually high fault
MCP, opening all three
poles, preventing single-
100 ELC3100R
150 ELC3150R
2 currents are available. The
current limiter connects to
phase operation.

the load end of the MCP and Each of the three poles of the
Technical Data and Specifications
2 is provided with terminals Type ELC limiter is equipped
suitable for copper or with an indicator that extends Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes 1
2 aluminum conductors. when a fault is interrupted by
the limiter. Type ELC Current Wire Range Metric
(See table at right.) Limiter Maximum Amperes AWG (mm2)
2 Standard Aluminum Terminals
50 14–2 2.5–35
2 100 1–4/0 50–95
150 1–4/0 50–95
2 Non-Standard Terminals (Steel)

2 50
100
14–2 2
—
2.5–35
—

2 150 — —

Notes
2 1 Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in

UL 486A or UL 486B.

2
2 Optional on special order for copper cable only.

All HMCP 800 A and 1200 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-360.

2
2
2

V4-T2-412 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Contents
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Description Page
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259 2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296 2
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328 2
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 2
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-410
2
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
V4-T2-412
2
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-414
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-415 2
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-415
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416 2
External Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449
2
2
2
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module 2
Product Overview
Power demand continues to
Product Description
The current-limiting breaker
Features and Benefits
Superior system protection:
Standards and Certifications
● UL 489
2
grow in new and existing
facilities. To meet increased
modules use a unique contact
design to enhance the
● Auto reset improves
● CSA C22.2
2
demand, larger utility system protection similar to system uptime and
supplies, spot networks and that of the circuit breaker. eliminates the need for
finding replacement parts
2
large facility transformers When high short-circuit
are installed. The increased current is flowing through the ● No fuses to replace,
reducing the overall cost of
2
capacity of the electrical contacts of these modules,
source results in increased
fault currents in excess
the design results in very high
interrupting capacities and
ownership and the waste
created by fuses 2
of 100 kA short-circuit improved current-limiting Overloads, by using inverse
2
●

protection. Eaton characteristics. time current tripping

manufactures non-fused characteristics of the
current-limiting modules with Application Description molded-case circuit 2
interrupting capacities up to High-performance breakers breaker
200 kA at 600 Vac. Unlike
fused current limiters with
are most commonly applied
when very high fault levels
● Low-level short circuits, by 2
using instantaneous and/or
a one-time use, a current
limiter module provides an
are available and with
applications where the
short-time delay tripping
characteristics of the
2
automatic reset of the current-limiting capability is
module after a short-circuit used upstream of the final
molded-case circuit
breaker 2
event. Resetting the molded- load to limit current. Typical
High-level short circuits, by
2
●
case circuit breaker is the loads include lighting, power
using ultra-high-speed,
only action required to restore distribution, and motor
blow-apart contacts of the
critical power to the system;
there is no time wasted
control applications.
current-limiting module in 2
series with the circuit
with sourcing the correct
replacement fuses or
breaker contacts 2
module to bring the system
● Let-through currents, by
back online. improved opening speed of
the contacts, the resultant
2
rapid rise of arc voltage
introduces impedance into 2
the system
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-413

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Product Selection
2
2 Series C High Performance Ratings

2 Type Product Amperes 480 Vac (UL) 600 Vac (UL)

FDC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 15–225 100 35

2 With limiter 40–200 200 200

2
FD IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac 1
2 FD Frame
Ampere Breaker with Line Side Breaker with Load Side
Rating Mounted Current Limiter 2 Mounted Current Limiter 3
2 Thermal-Magnetic

2 40 FDC3040Q01 FDC3040YQ02
45 FDC3045Q01 FDC3045YQ02

2 50 FDC3050Q01 FDC3050YQ02
60 FDC3060Q01 FDC3060YQ02
2 70 FDC3070Q01 FDC3070YQ02
80
2
FDC3080Q01 FDC3080YQ02
90 FDC3090Q01 FDC3090YQ02

2 100 FDC3100Q01 FDC3100YQ02

110 FDC3110Q01 FDC3110YQ02
2 125 FDC3125Q01 FDC3125YQ02
150 FDC3150Q01 FDC3150YQ02
2 175 FDC3175Q01 FDC3175YQ02

2 200 FDC3200Q01 FDC3200YQ02

2 Limiter Terminals

2 Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Body Material Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Catalog
Number

2 Standard Pressure Type Terminals

250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 4
2
2 Breaker Load Terminals (For Line Mounted Limiters Only)
Package of
2 Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Body Material Wire Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Three Terminals
Catalog Number

2 Standard Pressure Type Terminals

100 Steel Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB
2 225 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD

2 Notes
1 Line and load terminal included.
2 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJ1PBK.
2 3 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter.
4 Load side breaker terminations included for units configured with line mounted limiters.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-414 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489 Current-Limiting Data
Frame Circuit Ip (kA) I2T (106A2S)
2
FDC 240 V/200 kA 64.80 6.80 2
FDC 480 V/100 kA 66.90 9.33
FDC 600 V/50 kA 54.30 8.92 2
2
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
Assembled Breaker and Current-Limiting Module 2
Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lb (kg)
FD + limiter 12.06 (306.3) 4.13 (104.9) 3.39 (86.1) 8.50 (3.86)
2
2
FD-Frame With Current Limiter Module
2
2
4.12 4.13
2
(104.6) (104.9)
2
2
2
2
12.06
(306.3)
2
2
3.96
(100.5)
2
3.34
(84.8) 3.39
(86.1)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-415

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Contents
2 Series C Internal Accessories
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2 F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
2 L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
2 N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
2 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-410
2 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-412
V4-T2-413
Internal Accessories
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-418
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
2 External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-449

2
2
2
2 Internal Accessories

2 Product Overview
Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Select shunt trip catalog When a 100 microfarad
2 For remote indication of Switch Combination number for the voltage within capacitor charged to 28 Vdc
automatic trip operation. Each catalog number listed in the indicated voltage range. is discharged through the
2 Does not function with tables on Pages V4-T2-421 Shunt trip coils are designed shunt trip coil, the resultant
manual switching; however, and V4-T2-422 includes one to be applied at specific AC or flux opposes the permanent
2 it will operate when either a
shunt trip or undervoltage
auxiliary switch and one alarm
switch. In an auxiliary switch
DC voltages within the voltage
range shown. Electrical ratings
magnet flux field, which
releases the stored energy
are also shown on applicable in the spring to trip the
2 release is operated. A
“make” contact closes and a
ASL switch combination, the
auxiliary switch is always circuit breaker accessory circuit breaker. As the circuit
“break” contact opens when mounted on the side of the nameplates. breaker resets, the shunt
2 the alarm/lockout switch plug-in module next to the trip reset arm is actuated by
operates. The switch center pole of the circuit Low Energy Shunt Trip the circuit breaker handle,
2 automatically resets when breaker. Low energy shunt trip resetting the shunt trip. The
plug-in module is mounted
the circuit breaker is reset. devices are designed to
2 Auxiliary Switch
Shunt Trip
The shunt trip provides
operate from low energy
output signals from dedicated
in retaining slots in the
top of the trip unit. Coil is
intermittent-rated only.
2 The auxiliary switch provides
circuit breaker contact status
remote controlled tripping of
the circuit breaker. The shunt
current sensors typically
applied in ground fault Cutoff provisions required
information by monitoring the trip consists of an intermittent protection schemes. in control circuit.
2 position of the molded cross rated solenoid with a tripping However, with a proper
bar that contains the moving plunger and a cutoff switch control voltage source, they
2 contact arms. The auxiliary assembled to a plug-in may be applied in place of
switch is used for remote module. When required conventional trip devices for
2 indication and interlock
system verification, and
for ground fault protection
applications, certain AC rated
special applications. Flux
paths surrounding permanent
magnets used in the shunt
2 consists of one or two SPDT
switches housed in a plug-in
shunt trips, as noted in the
electrical rating table, are trip assembly hold a charged
module. Each SPDT switch suitable for operation at spring poised in readiness to
2 has one “a” and one “b” 55 percent of rated voltage. operate the circuit breaker
contact. When the circuit trip mechanism.
2 breaker contacts are open,
the “a” contact is open and
2 the “b” contact is closed.

V4-T2-416 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Undervoltage Release Accessory Terminal Block PowerNet and Zone Interlock
Mechanism (R-Frame) Kits (OPTIM 550 only) K-, L- and 2
The undervoltage release (For fixed-mounted N-Frames
mechanism monitors a configuration.) Eaton’s PowerNet 2
voltage (typically a line Internal accessory wiring Communications Kit can be
voltage) and trips the circuit
breaker when the voltage
leads are normally supplied ordered to add PowerNet
communications to an
2
with pigtail leads (18 AWG)
falls to between 70 and 35
percent of the solenoid coil
that exit from the right side of
the circuit breaker. Where
existing OPTIM 550 breaker
in the field. An 18-inch (457.2 2
rating. mm) wiring pigtail is routed to
specified, fixed-mounted
accessory terminal blocks are the rear of the breaker: two 2
The undervoltage release wires for PowerNet and two
available. A maximum of one
mechanism consists of a
continuous rated solenoid 24-point terminal block can be wires for 24 Vdc (45 mA 2
installed on the right side of load). It is recommended that
with a plunger and tripping
lever mounted in a plug-in the circuit breaker for the the power supply be an
“isolated high quality” unit.
2
module. The tab on the internal accessories.
tripping lever resets the For convenience in 2
undervoltage release determining the appropriate
mechanism when normal
voltage has been restored
number of terminal block 2
points required, refer
and the circuit breaker handle
is moved to the reset (or OFF)
to Page V4-T2-417. 2
position. With less than
pickup voltage applied to the 2
undervoltage release
mechanism, the circuit 2
breaker contacts will not
touch when a closing
operation is attempted.
2
Note: Undervoltage release 2
mechanism accessories are not
designed for, and should not be
used as, circuit interlocks. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-417

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Product Selection
2
Alarm Switch
2
Alarm Switch G-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) 1
2 Electrical Ratings Contact Factory Catalog
Make Volts Frequency Amperes Arrangement Suffix Number 234
2 Alarm Switch

2
Break 240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break B3 1288C75G03
Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination

2 240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break and 1A/1B B13 1288C76G09

2 F-Frame Alarm Switch 1

Factory Installation Kit 5
2
Factory Mounted
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
2 Number of
Contacts Mounting Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side
(Make and Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 Break) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Left 7 B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L1LPK A1L1LTK
2 Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L1RPK A1L1RTK

2 2 Left 7
Right
B09
B12
B10
B13
—
—
B11
B14
A2L1LPK
A2L1RPK
A2L1LTK
A2L1RTK

2 1 Single-pole B15 8 — — — — —

2 F-Frame HMCP Alarm Switch 1

Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 5
2 Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
2 Number of
Contacts Mounting Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side
(Make and Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 Break) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Left 7 B01 B02 B03 B04 MA1L1LPK MA1L1LTK
2 Right B05 B06 B07 B08 MA1L1RPK MA1L1RTK
2 Left 7
2 Right
B09
B12
B10
B13
—
—
B11
B14
MA2L1LPK
MA2L1RPK
MA2L1LTK
MA2L1RTK

2
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Alarm Switch
2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 9
2 Number of
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Contacts Mounting Same Side Rear 7 Opposite Side Same Side
2 (Make and
Break)
Location
(Pole)
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 1 Left j B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L2LPK A1L2LTK

Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L2RPK A1L2RTK 6
2 Notes
1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for
2 factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed; however, this is not
recommended for FDE breakers. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2 2 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads,18 AWG (16–0.010).
3 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.
4 Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker.
2 5 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation.
6 Standard pigtail lead exit location.

2 7 Standard mounting location.

8 Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker.

2
9 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
j Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.

V4-T2-418 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Alarm Switch
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2
2
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Number of
2
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
Sets of Mounting
Contacts Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(1M and 1B) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Left 3 B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L3LPK A1L3LTK 2
2
Right 4
Left 3
B05
B09
B06
B10
B07
—
B08
B11
A1L3RPK
A2L3LPK
A1L3RTK
A2L3LTK
2
Right 4 B12 B13 — B14 A2L3RPK A2L3RTK 2
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Alarm Switch 2
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Number of
Sets of Mounting Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side 2
Contacts Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(1M and 1B) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
1 Left 3 B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L4LPK A1L4LTK
Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L4RPK A1L4RTK 2
2 Left
2
3 B09 B10 — B11 A2L4LPK A2L4LTK
Right B12 B13 — B14 A2L4RPK A2L4RTK

2
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Alarm Switch
Factory Mounted Field Mounted 2
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5

Number of
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2
Sets of Mounting Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
Contacts
(1M and 1B)
Location
(Pole)
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
1 Left B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L5LPK A1L5LTK 2
Right 3 B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L5RPK A1L5RTK
2 Left B09 B10 — B11 A2L5LPK A2L5LTK 2
Right 3
2
B12 B13 — B14 A2L5RPK A2L5RTK

R-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only)

2
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Number of Contacts
(Make and Break)
Suffix
Number 6
Catalog
Number 6
2
1 B05 A1L6RPK
2
2 B12 A2L6RPK

Notes 2
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location.
3 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
2
4 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2
6 A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.

2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-419

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Auxiliary Switch
2
G-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only)
2
Auxiliary Switch
Electrical Ratings Contact Factory Catalog
Volts Frequency Amperes Arrangement Suffix Number 12
2 a
240 50/60 Hz 6 1a/1b A3 1288C74G03
b
2 240 50/60 Hz 6 2a/2b A6 1288C73G03

2 F-Frame and HMCP (F) Auxiliary Switch

Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 4
2 Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
2 Number of Mounting Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side
Contacts Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog

2 A and B
1
(Pole)
Left 5
Number
A01
Number
A02
Number
A03
Number
A04
Number
A1X1PK
Number
A1X1LTK

2 Left 5 A15 7 A16 7 A17 7 — E1X1PK —

Right or Neutral 6 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X1PK A1X1RTK 8
2 Right or Neutral 6 A18 7 A19 7 A20 7 — — —
2 Left 5 A09 A10 — A11 A2X1LPK A2X1LTK
2 Left 5 A21 7 A22 7 — — E2X1LPK —

2 Right or Neutral 6
Right or Neutral 6
A12
A23 7
A13
A24 7
—
—
A14
—
A2X1RPK
E2X1RPK
A2X1RTK 8
—

2 F-Frame with Electronic Trip Unit Auxiliary Switch 9

2 Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 4
Connection Type and Location

2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads

Same Side Rear Opposite Side
Terminal Block
Same Side
Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Number of Mounting
2 Contacts
A and B
Location
(Pole)
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2
Trip Unit Type 310+
1 Right A30 A31 A32 — — —

2 Trip Unit Type 210+

1 Right A33 A34 A35 — — —
2
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch
2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit j
2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Number of Mounting Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side
2 Contacts
A and B
Location
(Pole)
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 1 Left A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X2PK A1X2LTK

Right k A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X2PK A1X2RTK 4

2 2 Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X2PK A2X2LTK

Right k A12 A13 — A14 A2X2PK A2X2RTK 4
2 Notes

2
1 Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010).
2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker.
3 Standard pigtail lead exit location.

2 4 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation.

5 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

2 6 Not for use on F-Frame with electronic trip unit.

7 125 volts (max.), 50/60 Hz switch for use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum.
8 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.

2 9 Only for use on three-pole F-Frame breakers with electronic trip unit. Installation auxiliary switch for FD electronic breakers on right pole must be performed at

breaker factory.
2 j Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation or interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
k Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.

V4-T2-420 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2
2
Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

2
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
Number of Mounting
Contacts Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
A and B (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Left A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X3PK A1X3LTK 2
Right 23 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X3PK A1X3RTK 4

2 Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X3PK A2X3LTK

2
Right
2
23 A12 A13 — A14 A2X3PK A2X3RTK 4

Right A21 A22 — — 1482D28G10 67 —

3 Left A18 — — A15 A3X3LPK A3X3LTK 2
Right 3 A17 — — A16 A3X3RPK A3X3RTK 4
2
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch
Factory Mounted Field Mounted 2
Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2
Number of Mounting Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
Contacts Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog 2
A and B (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Left A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X4PK A1X4LTK 2
Right 2 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X4PK A1X4RTK 4
2 Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X4PK A2X4LTK 2
Right 2
2
A12 A13 — A14 A2X4PK A2X4RTK 4
3 Left A18 — — A15 A3X4PK A3X4LTK
Right 2 A17 — — A16 A3X4PK A3X4RTK 4
2
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch
2
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1 2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Number of
Contacts
Mounting
Location
Same Side
Suffix
Rear 2
Suffix
Opposite Side
Suffix
Same Side
Suffix Catalog Catalog
2
2
A and B (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Left A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X5PK A1X5LTK

2
Right 2
Left
A05
A09
A06
A10
A07
—
A08
A11
A1X5PK
A2X5PK
A1X5RTK 4
A2X5LTK
2
Right 2 A12 A13 — A14 A2X5PK A2X5RTK 4 2
3 Left A18 — — A15 A3X5LPK A3X5LTK
Right 2 A17 — — A16 A3X5RPK A3X5RTK 4 2
R-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only) 2
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 2
Number of 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Contacts Suffix Catalog 2
A and B Number 5 Number 5
2 A12 A2X6RPK 2
4 A19 A4X6RPK

Notes
2
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker. 2
3 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
5 A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of 2a/2b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
2
2
6 This option is not field installable.
7 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-421

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

2
F-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 1
2 Auxiliary Switch and
Alarm Switch Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 2
Combination
2
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
a Same Side Rear 3 Same Side
2 b
Mounting
Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(Pole) Number Number Number Number Number
2 Left 3 C01 C02 C03 AAL1LPK AAL1LTK
Right
2
C04 C05 C06 AAL1RPK AAL1RTK 4

2 F-Frame HMCP Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 2

2 Connection Type and Location

18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

2 Mounting
Location
Same Side
Suffix
Rear 3
Suffix
Same Side
Suffix Catalog Catalog
(Pole) Number Number Number Number Number
2 Left 4 C01 C02 C03 MAAL1LPK MAAL1LTK

2 Right C04 C05 C06 MAAL1RPK MAAL1RPK

2 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2 Number of
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
2
Sets of
Contacts Mounting Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side
(1A and 1B) Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 (1M–1B) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Left C01 C02 — C03 AAL2LPK AAL2LTK
2 Right 4 C04 C05 — C06 AAL2RPK AAL2RTK 4

2 K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2 Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5
Number of 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
2 Sets of
Contacts Mounting Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side
(1A and 1B) Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 (1M–1B) (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Left C01 C02 — C03 AAL3LPK AAL3LTK
2 Right 67 C04 C05 — C06 AAL3RPK 8 AAL3RTK
Right
2
C07 C08 — — 1482D28G09 9j —

Notes
2 1 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination options (Cxx) are not available on FDE 310+ with LSG or LSIG trip units due to exit wire limitations. To obtain both

features, order a left mounting alarm switch (B01-B04 or B09-B11), and right mounting auxiliary switch (A30-A32).
2 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation.

2 3 Standard mounting location.

4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers

2 5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
6 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.

2
7 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
8 Will not install on OPTIM Trip (RH).
9 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option.

2 j This option is not field installable.

2
2
2

V4-T2-422 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2
2
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

2
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
Number of Mounting
Sets of Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
Contacts (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
1A, 1B and Left C01 C02 — C03 AA114LPK AA114LTK 2
1 Make/1 Break

2A, 2B and
Right 2
Left
C04
C07
C05
C08
—
—
C06
C12
AA114RPK
AA214LPK
AA114RTK 3
AA214LTK
2
1 Make/1 Break
Right 2 C10 C11 — C13 AA214RPK AA214RTK 3 2
3A, 3B and Left C14 — — — AA314LPK —
1 Make/1 Break
Right 2 C15 — — — AA314RPK — 2
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 2
2
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Number of Mounting Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side 2
Sets of Location Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
Contacts (Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
1A, 1B and Left C01 C02 — C03 AA115LPK AA115LTK
1 Make/1 Break
Right 2 C04 C05 — C06 AA115RPK AA115RTK 3
2
2A, 2B and
1 Make/1 Break
Left
Right 2
C07
C10
C08
C11
—
—
C12
C13
AA215LPK
AA215RPK
AA215LTK
AA215RTK 3
2
Notes 2
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 Not for use on four-pole circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-423

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Shunt Trip
2
2 Shunt Trip G-Frame Shunt Trip (LH Three-Pole Only)

2
Electrical Ratings Suffix Catalog
Volts Frequency Amperes Number Number
ST
2 a
120
240
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
1.1
2.1
S1
S2
1373D62G01
1373D62G02

2 12 DC 2.8 S3 1373D62G15
24 DC 5.7 S4 1373D62G16
2 24 60 Hz — S7 1373D62G20

2
F-Frame and HMCP (F) Shunt Trip
2 Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 1
Connection Type and Location
2 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads 2 Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side
2 Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number
2 Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings
12–24 Vac or Vdc
2
S01 S02 S03 S04 SNT1LP03K SNT1LT03K
48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4 S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT1LP08K SNT1LT08K

2 208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT1LP12K SNT1LT12K
415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT1LP18K SNT1LT18K
2 Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 5
12–24 Vac or Vdc S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT1RP03K SNT1RT03K 6
2 48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4 S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT1RP08K SNT1RT08K 6

2 208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc

415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
S25
S29
S26
S30
S27
S31
S28
S32
SNT1RP12K
SNT1RP18K
SNT1RT12K 6
SNT1RT18K 6

2 Notes
1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation.

2 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

3 Standard pigtail lead exit location.

2
4 120 Vac marked suitable for ground fault protection devices.
5 Standard mounting location.
6 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.

2 G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
2 Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed.
Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-424 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2
2
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

2
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number

Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2

2
12–24 Vac or Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT2P04K SNT2T04K
2
48–60 Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S52 SNT2P06K SNT2T06K
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT2P11K SNT2T11K 2
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT2P14K SNT2T14K
480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT2P18K SNT2T18K 2
2
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings
12–24 Vac or Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT2P04K SNT2T04K 4
48–60 Vac or Vdc S53 S54 S55 S56 SNT2P06K SNT2T06K 4
2
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT2P11K SNT2T11K 4
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT2P14K SNT2T14K 4 2
480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT2P18K SNT2T18K 4
2
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip 2
2
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1

2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
12–24 Vac or Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K
2
48–60 Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S52 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K
2
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K 2
480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 56 2
12–24 Vac or Vdc
2
S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K 4

48–60 Vac or Vdc S53 S54 S55 S56 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K 4

110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3 S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K 4
2
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K 4
480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K 4 2
2
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element.
4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
2
5 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-425

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Shunt Trip

2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted

2 Connection Type and Location

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Field Installation Kits 1

2
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number
2 Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2

2 12–24 Vac or Vdc

48–60 Vac
S01
S05
S02
S06
S03
S07
S04
S08
SNT4LP03K
SNT4LP05K
SNT4LT03K
SNT4LT05K

2 48–60 Vdc S85 S86 S87 — SNT4LP23K SNT4LT23K

110–240 Vac S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT4LP11K SNT4LT11K
2 110–125 Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT4LP26K SNT4LT26K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
2
S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT4LP14K SNT4LT14K
480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT4LP18K SNT4LT18K

2 Right-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 3

12–24 Vac or Vdc S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT4RP03K SNT4RT03K

2 48–60 Vac S25 S26 S27 S28 SNT4RP05K SNT4RT05K

48–60 Vdc S88 S89 S90 — SNT4RP23K SNT4RT23K
2 110–240 Vac S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT4RP11K SNT4RT11K
110–125 Vdc
2
S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT4RP26K SNT4RT26K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT4RP14K SNT4RT14K

2 480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT4RP18K SNT4RT18K

Notes
2 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.

2 3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) three-pole trip units only.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-426 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2
2
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

2
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2 2
9–24 Vac or Vdc
48–60 Vac
S01
S05
S02
S06
S03
S07
S04
S08
SNT5LP03K
SNT5LP05K
SNT5LT03K
SNT5LT05K
2
110–240 Vac 3 S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT5LP11K SNT5LT11K 2
110–125 Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT5LP26K SNT5LT26K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT5LP14K SNT5LT14K 2
480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT5LP18K SNT5LT18K
48–60 Vdc S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT5LP23K SNT5LT23K
2
2
R-Frame Shunt Trip (RH Only)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2
2
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads

Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Suffix
Number 4
Catalog
Number 4 2
24 Vac or Vdc
48–60 Vac
S21
S25
SNT6P03K
SNT6P05K
2
110–240 Vac S29 SNT6P11K 2
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 SNT6P14K
480–600 Vac S37 SNT6P18K 2
48–60 Vdc S88 SNT6P23K
110–125 Vdc S45 SNT6P26K
2
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits.
2
4 A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-427

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Low Energy Shunt Trip

2 Ordering Information

2 Select shunt trip catalog

number for the voltage within
2 the indicated voltage range.
Shunt trip coils are designed
to be applied at specific AC or
2 DC voltages within the
voltage range shown.
2 Electrical ratings are also
shown on applicable circuit
2 breaker accessory
nameplates.
2 F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N- and R-Frames and HMCPs Low Energy Shunt Trip 1
Low Energy Shunt Trip
2 Factory Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Mounted
Field Installation Kits 2

2 UV
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Opposite
Terminal Block

2 Mounting Same Side Rear 3 Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Positions Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(Pole) Number Number Number Number Number Number
2 F-Frame

2 Left
Right 3
NO1
NO5
NO2
NO6
NO3
NO7
NO4
NO8
LST1LPK 4
LST1RPK 4
LST1LTK 4
LST1RTK 4

2 J-Frame
Left NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST2LPK —
2 Right 3 NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST2RPK —
K-Frame
2 Left 3 NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST3LPK —

2 Right 56 NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST3RPK —

L- and M-Frames

2 Left NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST4LPK —

Right NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST4RPK —
2 N-Frame
Left 3
2
NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST5LPK —
R-Frame

2 Right NO1 — — — LST6RPK —

Notes
2 1 Cutoff provisions required in control circuit.
2 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.

2 3 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.

4 For F-Frame HMCP, add an “M” to beginning of catalog number. Field Installation Kit referenced for factory use only,

not UL listed for field installation.

2 5 For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only.
6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-428 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Ordering Information 2
Select handle reset
undervoltage release
2
mechanism catalog number
for the voltage within the 2
indicated voltage range.
Undervoltage release 2
mechanism coils are
designed to be applied at 2
specific AC or DC voltages
within the voltage range
shown on applicable circuit
2
breaker accessory
nameplates. 2
G-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH Three-Pole Only)
2
Undervoltage Release
Mechanism Electrical Ratings
Volts (AC Only) Frequency (Hz) Amperes Style Numbers 123
Factory
Suffix
2
UV
120 50/60 0.05 1373D62G03 T1 2
24 50/60 0.22 1373D62G04 T2
48 50/60 0.11 1373D62G05 T3 2
60 50/60 0.10
2
1373D62G06 T4
110 50 0.049 1373D62G07 T5
208 60 0.026 1373D62G08 T6
2
220 50 0.025 1373D62G09 T7
240 50/60 0.024 1373D62G10 T8 2
380 50 0.015 1373D62G11 T9
415 50 0.013 1373D62G12 T10 2
440
480
50
60
0.012
0.01
1373D62G13
1373D62G14
T11
T12
2
Notes 2
1 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010).
2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.
3 Suitable for mounting in left pole only of three-pole breaker.
2
G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
2
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation
should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-429

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

F-Frame Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP)

2 Undervoltage Release Mechanism

2
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 1 Opposite Side Same Side
2 Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number
2 Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings
12 Vac
2
U01 U02 U03 U04
24 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08

2 48 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40

60 Vac U97 U98 U99 U100
2 110–127 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16
208–240 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20
2 380–480 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24

2 525–600 Vac
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23
U25 U26 U27 U28

2 12 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52

24 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56
2 48 Vac U85 U86 U87 U88
60 Vac U101 U102 U103 U104
2 110–127 Vac U61 U62 U63 U64

2 208–240 Vac U65 U66 U67 U68

380–480 Vac U69 U70 U71 U72

2 525–600 Vac U73 U74 U75 U76

Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings
2 12 Vdc U29 U30 U31 U32
24 Vdc
2
U33 U34 U35 U36
48 Vdc U37 U38 U39 U40

2 60 Vdc U97 U98 U99 U100

110–127 Vdc U41 U42 U43 U44
2 220–250 Vdc U45 U46 U47 U48
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23
2 12 Vdc U77 U78 U79 U80

2 24 Vdc
48 Vdc
U81
U85
U82
U86
U83
U87
U84
U88

2 60 Vdc U101 U102 U103 U104

110–127 Vdc U89 U90 U91 U92
2 220–250 Vdc U93 U94 U95 U96

2 Notes
1 Standard pigtail lead exit location.
2 Standard mounting location.

2 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.

F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
2 Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be
2 done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-430 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
F-Frame Field Mounted Undervoltage Release Mechanism
F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker HMCP
2
2
Factory Installation Kits 1

Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

2
Voltage Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number

2
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings
12 Vac UVH1LP02K UVH1LT02K MUVH1LP02K MUVH1LT02K
24 Vac UVH1LP03K UVH1LT03K MUVH1LP03K MUVH1LT03K
2
48 Vac UVH1LP22K UVH1LT22K MUVH1LP22K MUVH1LT22K
60 Vac UVH1LP24K UVH1LT24K MUVH1LP24K MUVH1LT24K 2
110–127 Vac UVH1LP08K UVH1LT08K MUVH1LP08K MUVH1LT08K
208–240 Vac UVH1LP11K UVH1LT11K MUVH1LP11K MUVH1LT11K 2
380–480 Vac
525–600 Vac
UVH1LP15K
UVH1LP18K
UVH1LT15K
UVH1LT18K
MUVH1LP15K
MUVH1LP18K
MUVH1LT15K
MUVH1LT18K
2
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23 2
12 Vac UVH1RP02K UVH1RT02K MUVH1RP02K MUVH1RT02K
24 Vac UVH1RP03K UVH1RT03K MUVH1RP03K MUVH1RT03K 2
48 Vac UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K
60 Vac UVH1RP24K UVH1RT24K MUVH1RP24K MUVH1RT24K
2
110–127 Vac UVH1RP08K UVH1RT08K MUVH1RP08K MUVH1RT08K
2
208–240 Vac UVH1RP11K UVH1RT11K MUVH1RP11K MUVH1RT11K
380–480 Vac UVH1RP15K UVH1RT15K MUVH1RP15K MUVH1RT15K 2
525–600 Vac UVH1RP18K UVH1RT18K MUVH1RP18K MUVH1RT18K
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2
12 Vdc
2
UVH1LP20K UVH1LT20K MUVH1LP20K MUVH1LT20K
24 Vdc UVH1LP21K UVH1LT21K MUVH1LP21K MUVH1LT21K
48 Vdc UVH1LP22K UVH1LT22K MUVH1LP22K MUVH1LT22K
2
60 Vdc UVH1LP24K UVH1LT24K MUVH1LP24K MUVH1LT24K
110–127 Vdc UVH1LP26K UVH1LT26K MUVH1LP26K MUVH1LT26K 2
220–250 Vdc UVH1LP28K UVH1LT28K MUVH1LP28K MUVH1LT28K
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23 2
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
UVH1RP20K
UVH1RP21K
UVH1RT20K
UVH1RT21K
MUVH1RP20K
MUVH1RP21K
MUVH1RT20K
MUVH1RT21K
2
48 Vdc UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K 2
60 Vdc UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K
110–127 Vdc UVH1RP26K UVH1RT26K MUVH1RP26K MUVH1RT26K 2
220–250 Vdc UVH1RP28K UVH1RT28K MUVH1RP28K MUVH1RT28K

Notes
2
1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation.
2 Standard mounting location. 2
3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-431

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

J-Frame and HMCP (J) Undervoltage Release Mechanism

2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted

2 Connection Type and Location

Terminal
Field Installation Kits 2

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Block 1

2 Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 3
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 4
2 12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH2LP02K UVH2LT02K
24 Vac
2
U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH2LP03K UVH2LT03K
48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH2LP05K UVH2LT05K

2 110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH2LP08K UVH2LT08K

208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH2LP11K UVH2LT11K
2 380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH2LP15K UVH2LT15K
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 3
2 12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH2RP02K UVH2RT02K

2 24 Vac
48–60 Vac
U41
U45
U42
U46
U43
U47
U44
U48
UVH2RP03K
UVH2RP05K
UVH2RT03K
UVH2RT05K

2 110–127 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 UVH2RP08K UVH2RT08K

208–240 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH2RP11K UVH2RT11K
2 380–480 Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH2RP15K UVH2RT15K
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 4
2 12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH2LP20K UVH2LT20K

2 24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH2LP21K UVH2LT21K

48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH2LP23K UVH2LT23K

2 110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH2LP26K UVH2LT26K

220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH2LP28K UVH2LT28K
2 Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 3

12 Vdc
2
T21 T22 T23 T24 UVH2RP20K UVH2RT20K
24 Vdc T25 T26 T27 T28 UVH2RP21K UVH2RT21K

2 48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH2RP23K UVH2RT23K

110–127 Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH2RP26K UVH2RT26K
2 220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH2RP28K UVH2RT28K

2 Notes
1 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton.
2 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.

2 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breakers.

4 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-432 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2
Connection Type and Location
Terminal
Field Installation Kits 1
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Block
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 2
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number 2
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2
12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH3LP02K UVH3LT02K 2
24 Vac
2
U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH3LP03K UVH3LT03K
48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH3LP05K UVH3LT05K
110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH3LP08K UVH3LT08K
2
208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH3LP11K UVH3LT11K
380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH3LP15K UVH3LT15K 2
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 345
12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH3RP02K UVH3RT02K 2
24 Vac
48–60 Vac
U41
U45
U42
U46
U43
U47
U44
U48
UVH3RP03K
UVH3RP05K
UVH3RT03K
UVH3RT05K
2
110–127 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 UVH3RP08K UVH3RT08K 2
208–240 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH3RP11K UVH3RT11K
380–480 Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH3RP15K UVH3RT15K 2
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2

12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH3LP20K UVH3LT20K

2
24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH3LP21K UVH3LT21K
2
48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH3LP23K UVH3LT23K
110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH3LP26K UVH3LT26K 2
220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH3LP28K UVH3LT28K
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 345 2
12 Vdc
2
T21 T22 T23 T24 UVH3RP20K UVH3RT20K
24 Vdc T25 T26 T27 T28 UVH3RP21K UVH3RT21K
48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH3RP23K UVH3RT23K
2
110–127 Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH3RP26K UVH3RT26K
220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH3RP28K UVH3RT28K 2
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983. 2
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.
2
5 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-433

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

L-, HMCP (L) and (M)-Frames and Undervoltage Release Mechanism

2 Factory Mounted Field Mounted

2 Connection Type and Location

Terminal
Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Block

2 Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
2 (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2
2 12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH4LP02K UVH4LT02K
24 Vac
2
U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH4LP03K UVH4LT03K
48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH4LP05K UVH4LT05K

2 110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH4LP08K UVH4LT08K

208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH4LP11K UVH4LT11K
2 380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH4LP15K UVH4LT15K
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 34
2 12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH4RP02K UVH4RT02K

2 24 Vac
48–60 Vac
U41
U45
U42
U46
U43
U47
U44
U48
UVH4RP03K
UVH4RP05K
UVH4RT03K
UVH4RT05K

2 110–127 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 UVH4RP08K UVH4RT08K

208–240 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH4RP11K UVH4RT11K
2 380–480 Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH4RP15K UVH4RT15K
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2
2 12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH4LP20K UVH4LT20K

2 24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH4LP21K UVH4LT21K

48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH4LP23K UVH4LT23K

2 110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH4LP26K UVH4LT26K

220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH4LP28K UVH4LT28K
2 Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 34

12 Vdc
2
T21 T22 T23 T24 UVH4RP20K UVH4RT20K
24 Vdc T25 T26 T27 T28 UVH4RP21K UVH4RT21K

2 48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH4RP23K UVH4RT23K

110–127 Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH4RP26K UVH4RT26K
2 220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH4RP28K UVH4RT28K

2 Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.

2 3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.

4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-434 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
2
2
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1

18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

2
Same Side Rear 2 Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Voltage Rating Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Catalog Catalog
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Number Number Number Number Number Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2 2
12 Vac
24 Vac
U05
U09
U06
U10
U07
U11
U08
U12
UVH5LP02K
UVH5LP03K
UVH5LT02K
UVH5LT03K
2
48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH5LP05K UVH5LT05K
2
110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH5LP08K UVH5LT08K
208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH5LP11K UVH5LT11K 2
380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH5LP29K UVH5LT29K
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2 2
12 Vdc
2
T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH5LP20K UVH5LT20K
24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH5LP21K UVH5LT21K
48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH5LP23K UVH5LT23K
2
110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH5LP26K UVH5LT26K
220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH5LP28K UVH5LT28K 2
2
R-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted 2
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 3
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads 2
Voltage Rating Suffix Catalog
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Number 4 Number 4 2
12 Vac U37 UVH6RP02K
24 Vac U41 UVH6RP03K 2
48–60 Vac
2
U45 UVH6RP05K
110–127 Vac U49 UVH6RP08K
208–240 Vac U53 UVH6RP11K
2
380–500 Vac U57 UVH6RP29K
12 Vdc T21 UVH6RP20K 2
24 Vdc T25 UVH6RP21K
48–60 Vdc T29 UVH6RP23K 2
110–125 Vdc
220–250 Vdc
T33
T37
UVH6RP26K
UVH6RP28K
2
Notes 2
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
2
4 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-435

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame)

2
R-Frame Accessory Terminal Block 1
2 Accessory Terminal
Block (R-Frame)
Factory Installed Field Mounted

2 Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number

2 Q01 TBRDK

2
2 Number of Control Wires for Each Internally Mounted Accessory
Number of Contacts Required Number
2 Type of Accessory per Single Accessory of Wires
Auxiliary switch 2a/2b 6
2 4a/4b 12
Alarm (Signal)/ 1m/1b 6
2 Lockout switch 2m/2b 12
Shunt trip N/A 2
2 Low energy shunt N/A 2
Undervoltage release mechanism N/A 2
2
2 PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only)
K-, L- and N-Frames
2 PowerNet Interlock Kit 2
PowerNet and Zone
2 Interlock Kits Circuit
Breaker
Factory Install
Suffix
Catalog
Number

2 K-Frame PN ICK550K
L-Frame PN ICK550L
2 N-Frame PN ICK550N

2
2 Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23
2 Circuit
Breaker
Factory Install
Suffix
Catalog
Number

2 K-Frame ZG ZGK550K
L-Frame ZG ZGK550L
2 N-Frame ZG ZGK550N

2
PowerNet and Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23
2 Circuit Factory Install Catalog
Breaker Suffix Number
2 K-Frame ZGP ZGPK550K
L-Frame
2
ZGP ZGPK550L
N-Frame ZGP ZGPK550N

2 Notes
1 One 24-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped

2 from warehouse as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram
(IL 29C714).
2 Installation of these kits restrict any other attachments from being installed in the RH pole.

2 3 Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit (catalog number GFAU).

2
2

V4-T2-436 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switch
2
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12 F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
2
Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers 125 3 50/60 Hz 1 2500 2
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 3 2500 125 DC 0.50 4 2500 2
250 DC 0.25 3 2500 250 DC 0.25 4 2500
Single-Pole Circuit Breakers
2
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data
2
12
125/250 50/60 Hz 63 2000
28 DC 33 2000 Maximum Maximum Dielectric

2
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
28 DC 54 2000
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500

J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 56 125 DC 0.50 4 2500

2
250 DC 0.25 4 2500
Maximum Maximum Dielectric
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage 2
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 25
125 DC 0.50 3 2500 Maximum Maximum Dielectric 2
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
250 DC 0.25 2500
2
3
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 4 2500
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 67
250 DC 0.25 4 2500
2
Maximum Maximum Dielectric
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 2
2
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 3 2500 Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
2
250 DC 0.25 3 2500
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
2
125 DC 0.50 4 2500
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 67

Maximum Maximum Dielectric

250 DC 0.25 4 2500 2
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 26 2
Maximum Maximum Dielectric
125 DC 0.50 2500
2
3
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
250 DC 0.25 3 2500
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500

N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 8 125 DC 0.50 4 2500 2

250 DC 0.25 2500
2
4
Maximum Maximum Dielectric
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 78
2
125 DC 0.50 3 2500 Maximum Maximum

250 DC 0.25 3 2500

Voltage Frequency Current Amperes
2
600 50/60 Hz 6

R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 9j 125 DC 0.50 4 2

250 DC 0.25 4
2
Maximum Maximum Dielectric
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
Notes
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.

125 DC 0.50 3 2500

2 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations. 2
3 Non-inductive load.
250 DC 0.25 3 2500 4 Inductive (L/R = 0.026).
5 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
2
6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
7 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 2
8 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
i Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations. 2
j Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-437

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

2
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12 L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 25
2 Maximum Maximum Dielectric Maximum Maximum Dielectric
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
2 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500

2 125
250
DC
DC
0.50 3
0.25 3
2200
2200
125
250
DC
DC
0.50 3
0.25 3
2500
2500

2
2 J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 24 N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 26
Maximum Maximum Dielectric Maximum Maximum Dielectric
2 Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500 600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
2 125 DC 0.50 3 2500 125 DC 0.50 3 2500
250 DC 0.25 3 2500 250 DC 0.25 3 2500
2 Notes

2
1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 24 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
3 Non-inductive load.

2
Maximum Maximum Dielectric
4 Endurance: 4000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
Voltage Frequency Current Amperes Withstand Voltage
5 Endurance: 1000 electrical operations plus 5000 mechanical operations.
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
2 125 DC 0.50 3 2500
6 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.

2 250 DC 0.25 3 2500

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-438 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Shunt Trip
F-Frame and HMCP Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123
2
Application Ratings
Voltage Frequency
Electrical Operating Ratings
Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Ip Irms at Irms at One Minute Dielectric
2
2
Catalog Number (V) (Hz) (V) Voltage (V) (A) 0.25 (A) 0.33s (A) VA Withstand Voltage (V)
SNT1LP03K or SNT1LT03K 12–24 50/60 9 6.3 6.1 4.3 40 1048
12
24
8.5
17
6
12
75
300
2
12–24 DC 12 9 8 100
2
24 16 400
SNT1LP08K or SNT1LT08K 48–127 50/60 48 33.6 2.7 1.9 92 1254 2
60 3.4 2.4 140
110 6.2 4.4 480 2
120 6.8 4.8 570
127 7.2 5.1 640 2
48–60 DC 48 33.6 2.1 100
60 2.6 160 2
SNT1LP12K or SNT1LT12K 208–380 50/60 208 146 1.2 0.25 180 1760
220 1.3 0.27 200 2
240 1.4 0.29 240
380 2.3 0.31 610 2
110–125 DC 110 77 0.5 55
120 0.55 66
2
SNT1LP18K or SNT1LT18K 415–600 50/60
125
400 280 1.1
0.57
0.77
71
310 2200
2
415
440
1.1
1.2
0.8
0.85
330
380
2
480 1.3 0.93 450
2
525 1.4 1.02 530
550 1.5 1.06 590 2
600 1.6 1.16 700
220–250 DC 220 154 0.48 110 2
250 0.55 140

Notes 2
1 Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds. 2
3 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-439

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123
2 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings

2 Catalog Number
Voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
Supply Voltage Minimum Operating
(V) Voltage (V)
Ip
(A)
Irms at
0.25 (A)
Irms at
0.33s (A) VA
One Minute Dielectric
Withstand Voltage (V)

2 SNT2P04K or SNT2T04K 12–24 50/60 12 9 17.7 12.6 164 1048

24 38.3 27.4 631
2 12–24 DC 12 9 7.3 87
24 16.9 405
2 SNT2P06K or SNT2T06K 48–60 50/60 48 36 24.4 17.3 830 1120

2 48–60 DC
60
48 36
30.1
14.8
21.3 1280
710

2 60 18.4 1105
SNT2P11K or SNT2T11K 110–240 50/60 110 60 0.9 0.6 66 1480
2 120 1 0.7 84
127 1.1 0.8 102
2 208 2.4 1.7 354

2 220 2.6 1.8 396

240 2.6 1.8 432

2 110–125 DC 110 60 1 112

120 1.1 138
2 125 1.2 150
SNT2P14K or SNT2T14K 380–440 50/60 380 285 0.34 0.25 127 1880
2 400 0.38 0.27 150

2 415 0.4 0.29 163

440 0.44 0.31 188
2 220–250 DC 220 165 0.19 40
250 0.22 58
2 SNT2P18K or SNT2T18K 480–600 50/60 480 360 0.13 0.07 34 2200

2 525
550
0.13
0.13
0.08
0.09
42
50

2 600 0.14 0.1 60

Notes
2 1 Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds.

2 3 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-440 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123
Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings
2
Catalog Number
Voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
Supply Voltage Minimum Operating
(V) Voltage (V)
Ip
(A)
Irms at
0.25 (A)
Irms at
0.33s (A) VA
One Minute Dielectric
Withstand Voltage (V)
2
SNT3P04K or SNT3T04K 12–24 50/60 12 9 17.7 12.6 164 1048
2
24 38.3 27.4 631
12–24 DC 12 9 7.3 87 2
24 16.9 405
SNT3P06K or SNT3T06K 48–60 50/60 48 36 24.4 17.3 830 1120 2
48–60 DC
60
48 36
30.1
14.8
21.3 1280
710
2
60 18.4 1105 2
SNT3P11K or SNT3T11K 110–240 50/60 110 60 1.3 0.9 100 1480
120 1.4 1 120 2
127 1.5 1.1 140
208 2.8 2 420
2
220 3 2.1 470
2
240 3.2 2.3 550
110–125 DC 110 82 1 110 2
120 1.1 130
125 1.2 140 2
SNT3P14K or SNT3T14K 380–440 50/60 380 285 0.37 0.25 95 1880
400 0.39 0.27 108
2
415 0.42 0.29 120
2
440 0.44 0.31 136
220–250 DC 220 165 0.19 41 2
250 0.22 54
SNT3P18K or SNT3T18K 480–600 50/60 480 360 0.11 0.08 40 2200 2
525
550
0.13
0.13
0.09
0.09
50
50
2
600 0.16 0.12 70 2
Notes
1 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. 2
2 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 8 milliseconds.
3 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-441

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

L-Frame and HMCP (L) and M-Frame Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123
2 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings

2 Catalog Number
Voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
Supply Voltage Minimum Operating
(V) Voltage (V)
Ip
(A)
Irms at
0.25 (A)
Irms at
0.33s (A) VA
One Minute Dielectric
Withstand Voltage (V)

2 SNT4P03K or SNT4T03K 12–24 50/60 9 6.3 7.2 5.1 46 1048

12 11.6 8.2 98
2 24 28.6 20.2 485
12–24 DC 9 6.3 8.5 75
2 12 8.6 103

2 SNT4P05K SNT4T05K 48–60 50/60

24
48 34 0.72
17.4
0.51
418
82 1120

2 60 1.2 0.84 126

SNT4P11K or SNT4T11K 110–240 50/60 110 77 0.89 0.63 69 1480
2 120 1.03 0.73 88
127 1.1 0.8 102
2 208 2.3 1.6 333

2 220 2.4 1.7 374

240 2.6 1.8 432

2 SNT4P14K or SNT4T14K 380–440 50/60 380 266 0.3 0.21 80 1880

400 0.34 0.24 96
2 415 0.35 0.25 104
440 0.38 0.27 119
2 220–250 DC 220 154 0.34 75

2 250 0.34 85
SNT4P18K or SNT4T18K 480–600 50/60 480 336 0.07 0.05 24 2200
2 525 0.08 0.06 32
550 0.09 0.07 39
2 600 0.11 0.08 48

2 SNT4P23K SNT4T23K 48–60 DC 48

60
34 0.76
0.95
36
57
1120

2 SNT4P26K or SNT4T26K 110–125 DC 110 77 0.42 46 1250

120 0.43 52
2 125 0.44 55

2 Notes
1 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds.

2 3 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-442 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123
Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings
2
Catalog Number
Voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
Supply Voltage Minimum Operating
(V) Voltage (V)
Ip
(A)
Irms at
0.25 (A)
Irms at
0.33s (A) VA
One Minute Dielectric
Withstand Voltage (V)
2
SNT5LP03K or SNT5LT03K 9–24 50/60 9 6.3 7.2 5.1 46 1048
2
12 11.6 8.2 98
24 28 19.8 475 2
9–24 DC 9 7.2 8.8 79
12 12.1 145 2
SNT5LP05K SNT5LT05K 48–60 50/60
24
48 34 2.4
25.4
1.7
610
82 1120
2
60 3 2.1 126 2
SNT5LP11K or SNT5LT11K 110–240 50/60 110 77 0.86 0.61 67 1480
120 0.98 0.69 83 2
127 1.1 0.75 95
208 2.3 1.6 333
2
220 2.4 1.7 374
2
240 2.6 1.8 432
SNT5LP14K or SNT5LT14K 380–440 50/60 380 266 0.28 0.2 76 1880 2
400 0.31 0.22 88
415 0.33 0.23 95 2
440 0.35 0.25 110
220–250 DC 220 154 0.21 46
2
250 0.22 55
2
SNT5LP18K or SNT5LT18K 480–600 50/60 480 336 0.06 0.04 19 2200
525 0.08 0.06 32 2
550 0.08 0.06 33
600 0.1 0.07 42 2
SNT5LP23K SNT5LT23K 48–60 DC 48
60
34 1.4
1.7
67
102
1120
2
SNT5LP26K or SNT5LT26K 110–125 DC 110 77 1.1 121 1250 2
120 1.2 144
125 1.2 150 2
Notes
1 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. 2
2 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds.
3 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-443

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

R-Frame Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data 123456

2 Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings

2 Catalog Number
Voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
Supply Voltage Minimum Operating
(V) Voltage (V)
Ip
(A)
Irms at
0.25 (A)
Irms at
0.33s (A) VA
One Minute Dielectric
Withstand Voltage (V)

2 SNT6P03K 24 50/60 24 16.8 36.1 25.5 612 1050

24 DC 24 16.8 16.5 396
2 SNT6P05K 48–60 50/60 48 34 11.9 8.4 403 1120
60 15.7 11.1 666
2 SNT6P11K 110–240 50/60 110 60 5.09 3.6 396 1480

2 120
127
5.66
5.94
4
4.2
480
533

2 208 10.2 7.2 1498

220 10.5 7.4 1628
2 240 11.2 7.9 1896
SNT6P14K 380–440 50/60 380 266 5.94 4.2 1596 2200
2 400 6.23 4.4 1760

2 415 6.51 4.6 1909

440 6.93 4.9 2156

2 220–250 DC 220 154 1.7 374 1500

250 1.9 475
2 SNT6P18K 480–600 50/60 480 336 0.68 0.48 230 2200
525 0.78 0.55 289
2 550 0.79 0.56 308

2 600 0.91 0.64 384

SNT6P23K 48–60 DC 48 34 7.1 341 1120
2 60 8.8 258
SNT6P26K 110–125 DC 110 77 2.4 264 1250
2 120 2.6 312

2 125 2.8 350

Notes
2 1 Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds.
2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 62 milliseconds, at rated voltage.

2
3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations and 2500 mechanical operations.
4 Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute.
5 Maximum operating voltage—110% of maximum voltage range rating.

2 6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are yellow and white.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-444 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
2
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1
50/60 Hz DC 2
2
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
Supply Supply
Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA
12 4.2 6.3 7.6 1.3 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.8 2
12 4.2 6.3 7.6 2.5 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.8
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.4 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.6 2
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.2 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.3
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.9 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
2
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.3 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.5
2
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.5 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.7
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.7 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9 2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.2 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 2.6
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.4 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.4 2
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.9 — — — — —
380 168.0 266.0 323.0 2.9 — — — — —
2
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.5 — — — — —
2
440 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.9 — — — — —
480 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — — 2
525 210.0 367.0 446.0 4.3 — — — — —
550 210.0 367.0 446.0 4.8 — — — — — 2
600 210.0 367.0 446.0 5.8 — — — — —
2
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 23
2
50/60 Hz
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
DC
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
2
Supply Supply
Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA 2
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1 2
48
60
21.0
21.0
33.6
33.6
40.8
40.8
2.5
3.8
48
60
21.0
21.0
33.6
33.6
40.8
40.8
2.0
3.1
2
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6 2
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2 2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0
2
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — —
2
380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — —
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — — 2
440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —
480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — — 2
Notes
1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2
2 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
3 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. 2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-445

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1

2 50/60 Hz DC

2 Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Minimum Maximum
Pickup Voltage
Maximum VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Minimum Maximum
Pickup Voltage
Maximum VA

2 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6

24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
2 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1
2 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6

2 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
2 208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0
2 240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — —

2 380
415
168.0
168.0
266.0
266.0
323.0
323.0
3.4
4.0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

2 440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —

480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —
2
2 L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 1
50/60 Hz DC
2 Supply
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
Supply
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage

2
Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6

2 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1

48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
2 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
2 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9

2 127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1

2 220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — —
2 380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — —
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — —
2 440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —

2 480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —

Note
2 1 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-446 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1
50/60 Hz DC
2
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Minimum Maximum
Pickup Voltage
Maximum VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Minimum Maximum
Pickup Voltage
Maximum VA
2
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6 2
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0 2
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
2
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
2
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1 2
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 —
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 250 — — — 4.0 2
380
415
175.0
175.0
266.0
266.0
323.0
323.0
3.4
4.0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
480 175.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — — 2
500 175.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —

Note 2
1 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-447

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

R-Frame AC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12

2 Application
Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms)
2 Supply Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup Minimum Initiation Maximum Circuit Dielectric
Catalog Voltage Voltage Voltage UVR Circuit Breaker Breaker Withstand
2 Suffix (V) (V) Minimum Maximum (V) Max. VA Response 3 Contact Separation 4 Contact Opening Voltage (V) 5
02/02K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.3 5 46 77 1024
2 03/03K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1 5 46 77 1048
05/05K 48–60 48 21.0 33.5 40.8 3.4 5 46 77 1120
2 60 21.0 33.5 40.8 6.0 5 46 77 1120

2 08/08K 110–127 110

120
44.5
44.5
77.0
77.0
93.5
93.5
3.3
3.6
5
5
46
46
77
77
1254
1254

2 127 44.5 77.0 93.5 3.8 5 46 77 1254

11/11K 208–240 208 84.0 145.6 176.8 4.2 5 46 77 1480
2 220 84.0 145.6 176.8 6.6 5 46 77 1480
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 7.2 5 46 77 1480
2 29/29K 380–500 380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.8 5 46 77 2000

2 415 168.0 266.0 323.0 8.3 5 46 77 2000

440 168.0 266.0 323.0 8.8 5 46 77 2000
2 480 168.0 266.0 323.0 9.6 5 46 77 2000
500 168.0 266.0 323.0 10.0 5 46 77 2000
2
2 R-Frame DC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12
Application
2 Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms)
Supply Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup Minimum Initiation Maximum Circuit Dielectric
2 Catalog
Suffix
Voltage
(V)
Voltage
(V) Minimum Maximum
Voltage
(V) Max. VA
UVR
Response 3
Circuit Breaker
Contact Separation 4
Breaker
Contact Opening
Withstand
Voltage (V) 5

2 20/20K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 3.4 5 46 77 1024

21/21K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 4.3 5 46 77 1048
2 23/23K 48–60 48 21.0 33.5 40.8 4.8 5 46 77 1120
60 21.0 33.5 40.8 7.2 5 46 77 1120
2 26/26K 110–127 110 43.8 77.0 93.5 3.3 5 46 77 1250

2 120
125
43.8
43.8
77.0
77.0
93.5
93.5
3.6
3.8
5
5
46
46
77
77
1250
1250

2 28/28K 220–250 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 6.6 5 46 77 1500

250 87.5 154.0 187.0 7.5 5 46 77 1500
2 Notes
1 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.

2 2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown.
3 UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown.

2 4 Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate.

5 For 1 minute.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-448 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Contents
Series C External Accessories
Description Page
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-259 2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-260
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-261
V4-T2-264
2
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-278
V4-T2-296 2
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-304
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-328 2
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-354
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365 2
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-380
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-410
2
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . .
Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-412
V4-T2-413 2
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-416
External Accessories 2
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-453
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-471 2
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-472
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-473 2
2
2
External Accessories 2
Product Overview
2
End Cap Kit J-Frame Plug Nut Multiwire Connectors Rear Fed Terminals.
The end cap kit slides onto The plug nut is used in Eaton’s field-installed Rear fed terminals allow 2
the line or load conductor of applications where screw- multiwire connectors for the the cable to connect to the
the circuit breaker and acts as connected ring-type terminals load side (OFF) end terminals breaker from the back instead 2
a threaded adapter for the are preferred to connect are used to distribute the load of the top. Terminal shields or
conductor to accept a ring
terminal or other bolt-on
cables to circuit breaker
conductors. The plug nut is
from the circuit breaker to
multiple devices without the
interphase barriers are
included with each rear fed
2
connector. The end cap kit
is available with English and
press-fit into the opening in
the circuit breaker terminal
use of separate distribution
terminal blocks.
terminal kit (depending on
frame size). When catalog 2
metric thread sizes. (Field conductor. Screws and number starts with a 3, it
installation only.) Listed per washers are supplied by Multiwire lug kits include indicates a kit with three 2
UL File E7819. customer. mounting hardware, terminals in each kit. Catalog
insulators and tin-plated
aluminum connectors to
number beginning with a TA 2
Keeper Nut Terminal Adapter indicates one terminal.
2
replace three mechanical
The keeper nut slides onto
Control Wire Terminal Kit load lugs. UL listed as used
the line or load conductor of
on the load side (OFF) end.
the circuit breaker and acts as
a threaded adapter for the
The control wire terminal kit
provides a means to tap off 2
control power from a main Terminal Shields
conductor to accept a ring
terminal or other bolt-on disconnect, using the Terminal shields provide 2
connector. The keeper nut provided male end of a quick protection against accidental
is available with English and disconnect. contact with live line side
terminations. Terminal
2
metric thread sizes. Screws
For use with steel or stainless
and washers are supplied by
customer. (Field installation
steel terminals only.
shields are fabricated from
high dielectric insulating 2
material and fasten over
only.) Listed per UL File
E7819.
Note: Terminal Kits contain one
terminal for each pole and one the front terminal access 2
terminal cover. openings. Small openings in
L-, M-, N-Frames the shields provide limited 2
access to the terminals for
Not required. Terminals are
threaded.
tightening connectors.
(Field installation only.)
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-449

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Terminal End Covers handle block holds the circuit Cylinder Lock Walking Beam Interlock
2 The terminal end covers are breaker handle in the ON The cylinder lock internally The walking beam Interlock
designed for use in motor position.) The device is blocks the trip bar in the provides mechanical
2 control center applications positioned over the circuit tripped position to prevent interlocking between two
where, because of confined breaker handle and secured the circuit breaker from adjacent circuit breakers of
2 spaces, line side conductors by a setscrew to deter
accidental operation of the
being switched to ON. the same pole configuration.
are normally custom fitted. The cylinder lock is factory The walking beam interlock
2 The molded end covers are
made of high dielectric glass-
circuit breaker handle. Listed
per UL File E7819. (Field
installed in the left pole only
of the circuit breaker cover.
mounts on a bracket behind
and between the circuit
installation only.)
2 polyester and slide over the
line ends of the circuit
Other internally mounted
accessories cannot be
breakers. A plunger on each
end of the beam is inserted
breaker. Close fitting Padlockable Handle installed in the same through an access hole in the
2 conductor openings are
Padlockable Handle Lock
pole as the cylinder lock. back plate and base of each
molded into the end covers. (Factory installation only.) circuit breaker. The walking
2 The end cover and circuit
breaker case fit together to
The device is positioned in
the cover opening to prevent Key Interlock Kit
beam interlock prevents both
circuit breakers from being
handle movement. Will
2 form terminal compartments
that isolate discharged accommodate one 5/16-inch
(Lock Not Included)
The key interlock is used to
switched ON at the same
time. If a walking beam
ionizing gases during circuit (8 mm) padlock. externally lock the circuit interlock is installed, the
2 breaker tripping. Terminal end breaker handle in the OFF wiring troughs in the back
covers are available with two Snap-on Padlockable Handle position. When the key of the circuit breaker case
2 conductor opening diameters, Lock Hasp interlock is locked, an are blocked by the plungers
0.25-inch (6.4 mm) and 0.41- The snap-on padlockable extended deadbolt blocks and cannot be used for cross
2 inch (10.4 mm), and are listed
per UL File E7819. (Field
handle lock allows the handle
to be locked in the OFF or ON
movement of the circuit
breaker handle. Uniquely
wiring. Factory modified
circuit breakers are required
position. (Trip-free operation
2 installation only.)
allows the circuit breaker to
coded keys are removable
only with the deadbolt
for this application. UL
File E38116.
Interphase Barriers trip when the handle lock extended. Each coded key
2 The interphase barriers holds the circuit breaker controls a group of circuit Electrical Operator
provide additional electrical handle in the ON position.) breakers for a given specific The electrical (solenoid)
2 clearance between circuit This device was designed
for use on the single-pole
customer installation. operator is a single solenoid
breaker poles for special mechanism that enables local
The key interlock assembly is
2 termination applications. The
barriers are high dielectric
circuit breaker, but may be
used on one-, two-, three- Underwriters Laboratories
and remote circuit breaker
ON, OFF, and reset
and four-pole styles. The listed for field installation
2 insulating plates that are
installed in the molded slots handle lock snaps onto the under UL File E7819 and
switching. The electrical
operator is mounted on the
escutcheon area of the consists of a mounting kit
between the terminals. (Field circuit breaker cover within
2 installation only.) Two per handle with an optional and a purchaser supplied
deadbolt lock. The mounting
the trimline of the circuit
package. retaining screw for added breaker. The electrical
2 secureness. The handle
lock will accommodate
kit comprises a mounting
plate, which is secured to the
operator uses a unique
Base Mounting Plate bi-stable latch that allows
circuit breaker cover in either
2 Suitable for mounting six
one padlock with a 1/4-inch
(6.4 mm) shackle. Listed per the left- or right-pole position,
the device to operate using
one solenoid. The accessory
single-pole circuit breakers. key interlock mounting
UL File E7819. (Field
2 DIN Rail Adapter installation only.) screws, and a wire seal.
provides high-speed
switching with a maximum
Specific mounting kits are
operating time of 5 cycles
2 For use with standard 35 mm
DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp required for individual key
interlock types.
(80 mS), making it suitable
The padlockable handle lock for generator synchronizing
35 x 15 mm per DIN
2 EN50022.
hasp allows the handle to
be locked in the ON or OFF Sliding Bar Interlock
applications.
The sliding bar interlock Means are provided for
2 Adapter mounting screws
included are for use with two-
position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to provides mechanical remote electrical operation
and three-pole circuit trip when the handle lock interlocking between two and for local manual
2 breakers. Adapters for single- holds the circuit breaker adjacent three-pole circuit operation. A special slide
pole circuit breakers clip into handle in the ON position.) breakers. It is installed on the includes provisions for
2 the base molding. The hasp mounts on the enclosure cover between the
circuit breakers. When the
padlocking the circuit breaker
handle in the OFF position.
circuit breaker cover within
2 Key Operated Attachment the trimline. The cover is
predrilled on both sides of the
sliding bar interlock handle
is moved from one side to the
The slide will accept three
padlock shackles with a
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) other, a bar extends to maximum diameter of
2
operating handle so that the
hasp can be mounted on alternately block movement 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each.
Non-Padlockable Handle Block either side of the handle. of the circuit breaker handles An interlock electrically
2 The non-padlockable handle The hasp will accommodate and prevents both circuit disconnects the solenoid
block secures the circuit up to three padlocks with breakers from being switched when the electrical operator
2 breaker handle in either the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free
1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles,
one per circuit breaker.
to ON at the same time.
Sliding bar interlocks are
cover is removed. The rating
data tables provide electrical
rating data for the electrical
2 operation allows the circuit
breaker to trip when the
Listed per UL File E7819.
(Field installation only.)
not UL listed. (Field
installation only.) (solenoid) operator.

V4-T2-450 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
The electrical (motor) operator Panelboard Connecting Straps IQ Energy Sentinel Potential Transformer Module
allows the circuit’s breaker to Panelboard connecting straps The IQ Energy Sentinel The potential transformer 2
be opened, closed or reset are used to connect the is a highly accurate, module is required for the
remotely. It also has a lock-off circuit breaker terminals to microprocessor-based, Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to 2
capability and provisions for the panelboard bus. The breaker-mounted device provide a voltage input to
manual operation. panelboard connecting straps designed to monitor power allow the trip unit to monitor 2
The electrical (motor) are available with various and energy readings. It power and energy as well as
operator contains a reversible ratings for outside and center
poles. (Field installation only.)
represents an alternative to
watt meters, watt-hour
power factor. The potential
transformer module is a 6 VA
2
motor connected to a ball
meters, and watt demand transformer with a primary
screw. The ball screw drives
the circuit breaker handle.
Panelboard connecting straps meters. Key advantages voltage input of up to 600 volt 2
are available to meet the include savings in space, line to line. Three 0.1 ampere
Limit switches and relays are
used to control the motor.
needs of most standard
panelboard applications.
lower installation costs, and fuses are provided on the 2
remote monitoring capability. primary of the transformer
Plug-In Adapters
Style numbers for mounting
brackets for CDP panelboard The IQ Energy Sentinel
and can be used for isolation
purposes during dielectric
2
Plug-in adapters simplify installations are also included. mounts on the load side
installation and front removal
Note: Not UL listed. Refer to
of a Series C F-Frame
testing. The device is
normally panel mounted 2
of circuit breakers. Individual (150 ampere) circuit breaker. and can feed up to 16 OPTIM
2
panelboard manufacturer for
line and load plug-in compatibility. It can be applied on three- trip units.
adapters are available for phase, four-wire systems,
rear connection applications
on two-, three-, and four-pole
Type LFD Current Limiter or single-phase, three-wire
systems with voltage
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable
Test Kit
2
The LFD current limiter is an
circuit breakers. Common connected through
mounting plates for line-
accessory that bolts to the
load end of a standard FDB or
Phases A and C.
The solid-state (electronic)
portable test kit provides
2
and load-end adapters
are available.
FD thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker, providing 200,000 A
For more information, see
Descriptive Bulletin 8178.
verification of performance
of all ratings of Digitrip 310 2
interrupting capacity at up to electronic trip units installed
2
One plug-in adapter kit is
required for line-end and 600 Vac. LFD current limiters in circuit breakers while in
one for load-end. for thermal-magnetic and service under varying load

Plug-in adapters are

electronic circuit breakers and/or phase imbalance. The 2
are listed with Underwriters test kit operates on 120-volt,
UL approved unless
otherwise noted.
Laboratories under File
E47239.
50/60 Hz power; it includes
complete instructions and test
2
Rear Connecting Studs Ground Fault Alarm Unit
times for testing long time,
short time/instantaneous 2
Rear connecting studs are The ground fault alarm unit is operation and optional
available in several sizes to a remotely mounted device ground fault operation of 2
accommodate specific fixed- with a combination indicating the circuit breaker.
mounted circuit breaker
applications.
light/test button that will light 2
when the breaker trips or
Each rear connecting stud alarms on ground fault. The
ground fault alarm unit
2
assembly consists of one stud
and one tube. To maintain requires a separate 120 Vac
power source to power the 2
proper clearances between
light and the internal relay,
poles, select alternate long
and short stud assemblies for which has 1NO and 1NC 2
circuit breakers with more contacts for remote indication.
than one pole. One assembly The ground fault alarm unit 2
is required for line-end and can be panel mounted for
one for load-end of each pole. ordering with an optional face
mounting bracket. For use on
2
Tubes must be ordered
separately. Connecting studs
are available only with English
Digitrip 310 only, K- through N-
Frame. 2
thread sizes.
2
Note: Not UL listed.
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-451

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Digitrip OPTIMizer Cause of Trip Display/Remote

2 The Breaker Interface Module The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a Mount Cause of Trip Display
(BIM) is a panel mounted hand-held programmer that The Cause of Trip Display
2 user interface device that is is used to access, configure, can be field-installed on any
mounted on the front of an test and display information Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit.
2 electrical assembly or at a from OPTIM trip units. The The device provides breaker
information through an LCD
remote location. The BIM is OPTIMizer plugs into the
2 used to access, configure,
test and display information
front of an OPTIM trip unit via
an eight-pin telephone jack
screen, such as cause of trip,
phrase current, ground current
and low loads. The display
2 for OPTIM trip units and other
devices. The BIM consists of
and is powered by a nine-volt
battery or the auxiliary power is ideal for troubleshooting
four display windows, eight module. One highlighted common trips such as
2 function buttons, 18 LEDs, feature is the “Copy” and ground fault, long delay, and
and a graphical time/current “Download” commands. instantaneous/short delay.
2 curve to provide breaker
status, operational Setting up multiple OPTIM
The DIGIVIEW version will
provide a local display at the
trips can be finished in
2 information, protection
status and energy monitoring. minutes and with no errors.
breaker without additional
wiring by connecting directly
A 24 Vdc power supply is An Auxiliary Power Module onto the trip unit. The
2 required to provide power connection provides a trip test DIGIVIEWR06 version has a
to the BIM. This is supplied when control power is not 6 foot cable that allows users
2 by the switchboard builder present at the breaker. The
OPTIMizer is supplied as a
to mount the display on the
to Eaton’s specifications. outside of an enclosure door
2 The BIM is a member of standard package to include and connect to the trip unit
Eaton’s PowerNet family of the programmer, the eight- that is contained inside
pin connection cord, battery
2 communicating devices that the enclosure.
connects OPTIM trip units, and carrying case. The
Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip auxiliary power module Cause of Trip LED Module
2 units and energy sentinels is optional. The Cause of Trip LED
as a subnetwork system. Module can be field-installed
2 The BIM can also be Auxiliary Power Module
The auxiliary power module
on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip
connected to a main unit. The device provides a
2 network via a PONI module
to PowerNet software.
is a power supply requiring
120 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz
cause of trip indication via
LED. The Cause of Trip LED
that provides a 32 Vdc output.
2 The auxiliary power module
Module connects directly
onto the trip unit. When the
provides control power for breaker trips, the module
2 testing an OPTIM trip unit indicates the cause of trip
when other means of control (long delay, short delay,
2 power is not available or
for continuous OPTIMizer
instantaneous and ground)
via LED indication. The
operation versus temporary
2 with a battery. The auxiliary
module is reset after the
breaker is reset.
power module connects
2 into the top of the Digitrip Note: The OPTIMizer can work
off of 32 Vdc control power,
OPTIMizer via a keyed
2 receptacle. The main
application for the auxiliary
although 24 Vdc is the standard
on OPTIM breakers.

2 power module would be for

the testing of a standalone
non-communicating OPTIM
2 breaker that ordinarily would
not have control power.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-452 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Product Selection
2
Termination Hardware—End Cap Kit
2
End Cap Kit End Cap Kit
Thread Thread Catalog 2
Type Size Number
Two-Pole F-Frame (225 A) 2
Imperial 10–32 KPEK12
Metric M–5 KPEKM12 2
Three-Pole F-Frame (225 A)
Imperial 10–32 KPEK1
2
Metric M–5 KPEKM1
2
Four-Pole F-Frame (225 A)
Imperial 10–32 KPEK14 2
Metric M–5 KPEKM14
Three-Pole J-Frame 2
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK2
Metric M–8 KPEKM2
2
Four-Pole J-Frame
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK24
2
Metric M–8 KPEKM24 2
Three-Pole K-Frame
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK3 2
Metric M–8 KPEKM3
Four-Pole K-Frame 2
Imperial 0.312–18
2
KPEK34
Metric M–8 KPEKM34
Three-Pole L-Frame
Imperial 0.312-18
2
KPEK4
Metric M-8 KPEKM4 2
Four-Pole L-Frame
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK44 2
Metric M–8 KPEKM44
2
Termination Hardware—Keeper Nut 2
F-Frame Keeper Nut F-Frame Keeper Nut 2
Catalog Number
Thread
Type
Thread
Size
Package of 12
(Priced Individually)
2
Imperial 10–32 KPR1A
2
Metric M–5 KPR1AM
2
K-Frame Keeper Nut K-Frame Keeper Nut 2
Thread Thread Line/Load Catalog Number
Type Size End Package of 3
2
Imperial 0.375–16 Line KPR3A
Load KPR3B 2
Metric M–8 Line KPR3AM
Load KPR3BM
2
Note 2
L-, M-, N-Frames not required. Terminals are threaded.
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-453

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Termination Hardware
2
J-Frame Plug Nut
2
J-Frame Plug Nut
Thread Thread Catalog Number
Type Size Package of 6
2 Imperial 0.250–20 PLN2
Metric M–6
2
PLN2M

2 K-Frame Terminal K-Frame Terminal Adapter 1

Adapter
2 Line/Load End
Catalog
Number

2 Line and load TAD3

2
2
F-Frame Ordering Information
2 Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually.
F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit 2
2
F-Frame Kit
Maximum Compatible Catalog
Description Amperes Terminals Number
2 Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs. 150 3T100FB, 3T150FB FCWTK
225 3TA225FD, 3TA225FDM
2
FCWTK225

2
2 J- and K-Frame Ordering Information
Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually.

2 J- and K-Frame Kit J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit

Catalog
2 Description Number
Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs. KCWTK
2
2
2
L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit
2 AWG Wire Metric Wire Catalog
Range/Number Conductors Range mm2 Number
2 Al/Cu 95–150 TA602LDCW 3
3/0–350 kcmil (2)
2 Cu 120–250 T602LDCW 3
250–350 kcmil (2)
2 Al/Cu 185–240 2TA603LDKCW 45
400–500 kcmil (2)
2 Al/Cu 185–240 3TA603LDKCW 46
400–500 kcmil (2)
2 Al/Cu 185–240 4TA603LDKCW 47
400–500 kcmil (2)

2 Notes
1 K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA breakers.

2 2 Not for use with T250KB terminals.

3 Individually packed.

2 4 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
5 Two-pole kit.
6 Three-pole kit.

2 7 Four-pole kit.

V4-T2-454 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Termination Hardware
2
G-Frame Control Wire Terminal
Catalog Catalog 2
Description Number Number
Control wire terminal (kit of 12) 5652B38G01 GCWTK 2
2
Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3)
Multiwire Connectors
Maximum Wires per Wire Size Kit Catalog
2
Amperes Terminal Range AWG Cu Number 1
G-Frame 2
2
100 3 14–2 3TA100G3K
2
6 14–6 3TA100G6K
F-Frame 2
225 3 14–2 3TA150F3K
6 14–6 3TA150F6K 2
J-Frame
250 3 14–2 3TA250J3K
2
6 14–6 3TA250J6K 2
K-Frame
400 3 14–2/0 3TA400K3K 2
6 14–3 3TA400K6K
2
Rear Fed Terminals 2
2
Maximum Wire Size Catalog
Frame Amperes Range AWG Cu Number 1
FD 150 14–4/0
2
TA150FDRF
150 14–4/0 3TA150FDRF
225 6–300 kcmil TA225FDRF
2
225 6–300 kcmil 3TA225FDRF
KD 400 250–500 kcmil TA350KRF 2
400 250–500 kcmil 3TA350KRF
MDL 800 3/0 MAX (3) TA800MDLRF 2
800 3/0 MAX (3) 3TA800MDLRF
2
Base Mounting Hardware 2
Ordering Information
Hardware for surface mounting of circuit breakers is supplied only on request. Hardware consists of 2
mounting screws and lockwashers. Order hardware for circuit breaker pole configurations as required.
2
Mounting Hardware
Catalog 2
Screw Length in Inches (mm) Number
G-Frame 2
0.138–32 x 2.63 (3.5 x 66.7 mm) Std. 624B375G23
0.138–32 x 3.00 (3.5 x 76.2 mm) 8703C80G05
2
Notes
1 When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit.
2
Catalog number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal.
2 GD breakers require special tapping for multiwire lugs, as described in the IL or use with standard aluminum collars. 2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-455

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware

2 Number Type of Catalog
of Poles Description Mounting Number
2 F-Frame

2 1 0.164-32 x 3.188-inch pan-head steel screws, lockwashers and clamps Individual 624B375G01
Group 1 624B375G02
2 2 0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 4218B80G01
3, 4 0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1
2 J-Frame
2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 2.75 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual
2
BMH2
K-Frame

2 2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3
L-Frame
2 2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH4
M-Frame
2 2, 3 0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH5

2 N-Frame
2, 3, 4 0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH5

2 R-Frame
Supplied by customer
2
2 Metric Thread Mounting Hardware
Number Type of Catalog
2 of Poles Description Mounting Number
F-Frame
2 1 M4–0.7 x 80 mm pan-head steel screws, lockwashers, and clamps Individual 4218B80G09

2 2 M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers

Group 1
Individual
4218B80G10
4218B80G11

2 3, 4 M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1M

J-Frame
2 2, 3, 4 M6–0.7 x 70 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH2M
K-Frame
2 2, 3, 4 M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3M

2 L-Frame
2, 3 — Individual BMH4M

2 M-Frame
2, 3 — Individual BMH4M
2 N-Frame
2, 3 — Individual
2
BMH5M
R-Frame

2 Supplied by customer

Note
2 1 One set of hardware for two circuit breakers.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-456 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Terminal Shields
2
G-Frame Terminal Shield
Catalog 2
Number Units in Package Number
10 GTSK3 2
2
F-Frame Terminal Shield
F-Frame
Standard (Package of 10) Special—For Use When Electrical
2
(Priced Individually) Operator is Mounted on Circuit Breaker
Number Catalog Catalog 2
of Poles Location Number Number
1 Line 625B229G06 — 2
2 Line
2
625B229G07 —
3 Line 625B229G08 4210B95G01
4 Line 625B229G09 4210B95G02
2
2
J-Frame J-Frame Terminal Shield
Number Catalog Number 2
of Poles Location (Package of 10)
2, 3 Line End 1266C07G01 2
4 Line End 6631C01G01
2, 3 Load End 6641C16G01
2
4 Load End 6641C16G02
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-457

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

K-Frame Terminal Shield Interphase Barriers

2 K-Frame
Number Catalog Number Ordering Information
of Poles Location (Package of 10) Two per package.
2 2, 3 Line TS33LN
Interphase Barriers
2 4 Line TS34LN Interphase Barrier
Catalog
3 Load TS33LD
Frame Number
2 F IPB1

2 J, K IPB3
L IPB4

2 L-Frame Terminal Shield

M IPB4
N IPB5
2 Catalog Number
(Package of 1)

2 314C420G05

2
Base Mounting Plate
2 Base Mounting Plate G-Frame GD/GHC
Base Mounting Plate
2 Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number

2 M-Frame Terminal Shield 1 207B513G01

Catalog Number
2 (Package of 1)
208B966G01
2 DIN Rail Adapter

2 DIN Rail Adapter DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC

Number Number of Units Catalog

2
of Poles in Package Number
1, 2 10 1225C79G01

2 3 10 1225C79G02 1
N-Frame Terminal Shield
2 Catalog Number All Metal DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC
(Package of 1) Number Number of Units Catalog
2 NTS3K
of Poles in Package Number
3 1 EGGDDIN
2
2 Key Operated Attachment

Key Operated Attachment

2
Terminal End Covers Key Operated
Ordering Information Attachment G-Frame GD/GHC
The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers
2
Number of Units Catalog
only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity in Package Number
(one per circuit breaker) when ordering. 10
2
GKOA

Note
F-Frame Terminal End Covers
2
F-Frame 1 For use on three-pole breakers only.
Conductor Opening Catalog
Diameter in Inches (mm) Number
2 0.25 (6.35 mm) TEC1
0.41 (10.41 mm)
2
TEC2

2
2
2

V4-T2-458 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Padlockable Handle Lock
2
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Padlockable Handle Lock
Lock Dog (Non-
Padlockable) G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB/GMCP
Padlockable Handle
Lock Catalog 2
Number of Units Catalog Frame Number
in Package Number
G GPHBOFF 2
1 1294C01H01
J, K PHB3
2
2
Handle Ties Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 2
Handle Tie—Series C, F-Frame
Snap-On Padlockable Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 2
Number Number of Units Catalog Handle Lock Hasp
2
Catalog
of Poles in Package Number Frame Number
2 10 HTBFD2P F
2
PHL1
3 10 HTBFD3P

Handle Tie—Series C, G-Frame 2

2
Number Number of Units Catalog
of Poles in Package Number
2 10 Notes
2
HTBGD2P
1 Accepts 0.285 Lock Shank.
3 10 HTBGD3P 2 Padlockable in the OFF position only.

2
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
2
Non-Padlockable Non-Padlockable Handle Block
Handle Block Catalog 2
Frame Number
F LKD1 2
J, K LKD3
L, M, N LKD4 2
2
Padlockable Handle
2
Padlockable G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB
2
Padlockable Handle
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number 1 2
10 1223C77G03
2
10 1223C77G05 2
10 1223C77G06 2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-459

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

2
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
2 Padlockable Handle
Lock Hasp Catalog
Description Number
2 F-Frame

2 Single-pole breakers
Two-, three- and four-pole breakers
PHL1
PLK1

2 For left side mounting PLK1LOFF

For right side mounting PLK1ROFF
2 J, K-Frames
Two-, three- and four-pole breakers
2
PLK3
For left side mounting PLK3LOFF 1

2 For right side mounting PLK3ROFF 1

L-Frame (Side Mounted)
2 Lock ON or OFF HLK4
Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1
2 L-Frame (Top Mounted)
Lock ON or OFF
2
HLK4S
Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF 1

2 M-Frame
Lock ON or OFF HLK4
2 Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1
M-Frame (Vertical Mounting)
2 Lock ON/OFF HLK4S

2 Lock OFF only

N-Frame
HLK4SOFF

2 Side mounted PLK5

Top mounted (ON/OFF) PLK5S
2 Top mounted (OFF only) PLK5SOFF 1

2
R-Frame
Lock ON/OFF HLK6

2 Lock OFF only HLK6OFF 1

2 Cylinder Lock

2 Cylinder Lock Cylinder Lock

Catalog
2 Frame Number
F, J, K Order by description
2
2
Note
2 1 For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF

position only, order either catalog number.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-460 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Key Interlock Kit
Ordering Information 2
Key interlock kits contain the necessary interface and hardware to install a trapped key interlock
from one of the listed manufacturers. Key interlocks are not installed or supplied as part of the 2
breaker, and must be obtained separately from the lock manufacturer or through the manufacturer
of the equipment on which the breaker will be installed. Select the mounting kit catalog number 2
to match the type of lock used.
2
Key Interlock Kit Key Interlock Kit (Trapped Key Interlock)

Lock Lock
Bolt Projection in
Withdrawn Position
Kit
Catalog
2
2
Manufacturer Type in Inches (mm) Number
F-Frame
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK1 2
Kirk® F 0.38 (9.5) KYK1
Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK1 2
J, K-Frames
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK3
2
Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK3
2
Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK3
L-, M-, N-Frames 2
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK4
Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK4 2
Castell K or QK 0.38 (9.5)
2
1 CTK4
R-Frame
Superior B-4003-1 1.0 (25.4) KYK6
2
Kirk F 1.0 (25.4) KYK6
Castell 1 K or QK 1.0 (25.4) CTK6 2
JG-Frame
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYKJG 2
Kirk
Castell 1
F
K or QK
0.38 (9.5)
0.38 (9.5)
KYKJG
CTKJG
2
LG-Frame 2
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYKLG
Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKLG 2
Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKLG

Note
2
1 When ordering Castell Interlock, it is necessary for customer to specify that the mounting bolt holes must be

10 mm in diameter 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-461

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Sliding Bar Interlock

2 Ordering Information
The sliding bar interlock is available for mounting between
2 two adjacent three-pole circuit breakers with circuit breakers
centerline spacing as indicated in table and enclosure front
2 panel thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch (3.2 or 4.8 mm). (For field
installation only.)
2
Sliding Bar Interlock Sliding Bar Interlock
2 Frame
Centerline Spacing
in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number

2 F 4.19 (106.4) SBK1

J 4.38 (111.3) SBK2
2 K 5.75 (146.0) SBK3
L, M 8.50 (215.9)
2
SBK4
N 8.50 (215.9) SBK5

2
Walking Beam Interlock
2 Ordering Information
The walking beam interlock is available for mounting between
2 two adjacent circuit breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) apart and
having the same pole configuration. The two circuit breakers
2 must be factory modified to accept the walking beam interlock
assembly (suitable for use with either two-, three- or four-pole
circuit breakers).
2
With properly modified circuit breakers, the walking beam
2 interlock is suitable for field installation. Order circuit breakers
specifying modification for walking beam (20% price adder) and
2 select walking beam interlock from table below. Circuit breakers
and walking beam interlock are boxed and shipped separately.

2 Walking Beam Walking Beam Interlock

Interlock
2 Frame
Catalog
Number
F
2 K
WBL1
WBL3

2 L, M WBL4A
N WBL5
2 R1 WBL6

2 Note
1 Three-pole only.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-462 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Electrical Operator
2
F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
Terminal Block 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead 2
2
Catalog Catalog
Voltage Frequency Number Number
120 AC
2
EOP1T07 EOP1P07
240 AC EOP1T11 EOP1P11

2
F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead 2
Catalog
Voltage Frequency Number 2
120 50/60 Hz AC MOPFD120C
24 DC MOPFD24D 2
125
208–240
DC
50/60 Hz
MOPFD120C
MOPFD240C
2
220–250 DC MOPFD240C 2
J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
2
Operating
Terminal Block
Catalog
2
2
Voltage Frequency Number
120 50/60 Hz AC EOP2T07
240 50/60 Hz AC EOP2T11 2
2
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
Terminal Block 2
Operating Catalog
Voltage Frequency Number
2
120 50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT07
240 50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT11 2
2
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit
Catalog 2
Frame Number
K BBMK3 2
2
2
L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator (310 and OPTIM)
Terminal Block 2
Operating Catalog
Voltage Frequency Number
2
120 50/60 Hz EOP4MT07
208 50/60 Hz EOP4MT11 2
240 50/60 Hz EOP4MT11A
480 50/60 Hz EOP4MT15
2
125 DC EOP4MT26
2
24 DC EOP4MT21

Note 2
1 Motor operators MOP1P07, MOP1P03DC, MOP1P05DC and MOP1P07DC are replaced by MOPFD

motor operators listed in table. 2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-463

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator

2 Pigtail Leads

2 Operating
Voltage Frequency
Catalog
Number
120 50/60 Hz
2 208 50/60 Hz
EOP5T07
EOP5T09

2 240 50/60 Hz EOP5T11

480 50/60 Hz EOP5T15
2 24 DC EOP5T21
48 DC EOP5T22
2 125 DC EOP5T26

2
R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator
2 Factory-Installed Terminal Block

2 Operating
Voltage Frequency
Catalog
Number

2 120
240
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
EOP6T08K
EOP6T11K

2 48 DC EOP6T21K

2 Plug-In Adapters

2 F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)

Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
2 Continuous
Current Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
(Amperes) Number Number Number
2 100–225 1480D13G01 1480D13G02 1480D13G07 1
Mounting plate
2
176C511H01 507C047H01 —

2 J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)

2 Continuous
Current Rating Terminal
Two-Pole
Catalog
Three-Pole
Catalog
Four-Pole
Catalog
(Amperes) End Number Number Number
2 250 Line 1260C86G05 1260C86G06 1231C67G01

2 Load 1260C86G07 1260C86G08 1231C67G02

One line and one load 506C144G27 506C144G28 —
2 Mounting plate — 2 PMP23 —

2
K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum
2 Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Continuous Current Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Rating (Amperes) Number Number Number
400 PAD32 PAD33 —
2 Mounting plate 2 PMP33 —

2 Notes
1 100 ampere maximum.

2
2 Use three-pole mounting plate for two-pole circuit breaker.

2
2
2

V4-T2-464 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
L-Frame (Threaded Stud Type)
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
2
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
600 (threaded stud type)
2
506C059G03 506C059G04 PAD44
600 (flat bar type) 1288C19G01 1288C19G02 6636C55H01
Mounting plate 504C824H01 504C824H01 —
2
2
M-Frame (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum
Two-Pole Three-Pole 2
Continuous Current Catalog Catalog
Rating (Amperes) Number Number
2
800 2614D53G05 2614D53G06
Mounting plate 1290C73H01 1290C73H01 2
2
N-Frame (Flat Bar Type)
2
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
1200 2614D53G03 2614D53G04 2
Mounting plate 1290C73H01 1290C73H01
2
Plug-In Adapters
2
Frame
Number of
Poles
Standard
Certification
Catalog
Number
2
FD 3 IEC PAD3F
2
FD 4 IEC PAD4F
JD 3 IEC PAD3JD 2
KD 3 IEC PAD3K
LD 3 IEC PAD3LD 2
LD 4 IEC PAD4LD
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-465

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Rear Connecting Studs

2
F-Frame 1 L-Frame Ordering Information
2 Stud Stud Tube Stud Catalog
Ampere Catalog Catalog Number
2 Rating Number Number
314C960G07
For 15 to 100 A Circuit Breakers
2 100 short 451D874G01 32B9446H20
314C960G08
314C960G09
100 short
2 100 short
451D874G01
451D874G01
32B9446H21
32B9446H22

2 100 short 451D874G01 32B9446H23 M-Frame Ordering Information 1

100 long 451D874G02 32B9446H24 Stud Stud
2 100 long 451D874G02 32B9446H25
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
100 long 451D874G02 32B9446H26
2 100 long 451D874G02 32B9446H27
225 314C960G01
400 314C960G04

2 For 110 to 225 A Circuit Breakers

225 short 374D883G01 374D883H06
400 314C960G05
400 314C960G06
2 225 short 374D883G01 374D883H07
600 314C960G07
225 short 374D883G01 374D883H08
600
2
314C960G08
225 short 374D883G01 374D883H09
600 314C960G09
225 long
2
374D883G02 374D883H10
800 314C960G10
225 long 374D883G02 374D883H11
800 314C960G11
2 225 long 374D883G02 374D883H12
800 314C960G12
225 long 374D883G02 374D883H13
2
N-Frame Ordering Information 1
2 J-Frame 1 Stud Stud
Stud Stud Tube Ampere Catalog
2 Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Rating Number
800 623B222G01
2 250 short 5010D23G01 456D983H05
800 623B222G02
250 short 5010D23G01 456D983H06
800 623B222G03
2 250 short 5010D23G01 456D983H07
1200 373B375G04
250 long 5010D23G02 5010D23H05
2 250 long 5010D23G02 5010D23H06
1200 373B375G03

Note
2 250 long 5010D23G02 5010D23H07 1 Not UL listed.

2 K-Frame 1

2 Stud
Ampere
Stud
Catalog
Standard Tube
Catalog
Rating Number Number
2 400 short 6642C14G02 313C909H17

2 400 short
400 short
6642C14G04
6642C14G06
313C909H18
313C909H19

2 400 long 6642C14G03 313C909H20

400 long 6642C14G05 313C909H21
2 400 long 6642C14G07 313C909H22

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-466 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Panelboard Connecting Straps
2
F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Pole Connector Type 2
Bus Continuous
2
Spacing Current Center Outside
in Inches Rating Catalog Catalog
(mm) (Amperes) Number Number
2.75 (69.9) 50 673B142G02 673B142G09 2
2.75 (69.9) 100
2.75 (69.9) 150
673B142G02
673B142G04
673B142G10
673B142G03
2
3.50 (88.9) 50 1253C72G01 1253C72G03 2
3.50 (88.9) 100 1253C73G03 1253C73G06
3.50 (88.9) 150 1253C73G01 1253C73G05 2
2
F-Frame Mounting Bracket
Catalog 2
Number of Poles Number
2 624B600H02 2
3
2
624B600H01

J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps 2

Bus Continuous
Pole Connector Type
Center Outside
2
Spacing Current
in Inches
(mm)
Rating
(Amperes)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
3.50 (88.9) 250 2600D26G01 2600D26G02
2
K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
2
Bus Continuous
Pole Connector Type
Center Outside
2
Spacing Current
in Inches
(mm)
Rating
(Amperes)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
3.50 (88.9) 400 4212B78G02 4212B77G01
2
K-Frame Mounting Bracket
2
Number of Poles
Catalog
Number
2
2, 3 208B264H01 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-467

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps

2 Pole Connector Type
Continuous
2 Current
Rating
Center
Catalog
Outside
Catalog
(Amperes) Number Number
2 600 624B609G01 506C052G01

2
2 L-Frame Mounting Bracket
Catalog

2
Number of Poles Number
2, 3 208B297H01

2
2 M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Bus Continuous Pole Connector Type

2 Spacing
in Inches
Current
Rating Connector Catalog
(mm) (Amperes) Type Number
2 3.50 (88.9) 800 Short 314C996G01
Medium
2
314C996G02
Long 314C996G03

2
2 M-Frame Mounting Bracket
Catalog

2 Number
315C270H01

2
2 N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Bus Continuous Pole Connector Type
2 Spacing
in Inches
Current
Rating Connector Catalog
(mm) (Amperes) Type Number
2 3.50 (88.9) 1200 Short 505C606G04

2 Medium
Long
505C606G05
505C606G06

2
2 N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four Required)
Catalog
2 Number
315C270H01
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-468 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Type LFD Current Limiter Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit
The LFD current limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load The solid-state (electronic) portable test kit provides verification 2
end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic and electronic of performance of all ratings of Digitrip 310 electronic trip units
circuit breaker, providing 200,000 A interrupting capacity at installed in circuit breakers while in service under varying load 2
up to 600 Vac. LFD current limiters for thermal-magnetic and/or phase imbalance. The test kit operates on 120-volt,
circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories 50/60 Hz power; it includes complete instructions and test 2
under File E47239. times for testing long time, short time/instantaneous operation
and optional ground fault operation of the circuit breaker.
2
Type LFD Current Type LFD Current Limiter
Limiter Circuit Breaker
Rating Amperes
Catalog
Number
Portable Test Kit
2
Catalog
15–70 LFD3070R
Description Number
2
80–160 LFD3150R Solid-state (electronic) STK2
portable test kit
2
Ground Fault Alarm Unit 2
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
The ground fault alarm unit is a remotely mounted device with a
combination indicating light/test button that will light when the
The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user
interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical
2
breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The ground fault alarm
unit requires a separate 120 Vac power source to power the light
assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access,
configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and
2
and the internal relay, which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight
remote indication. The ground fault alarm unit can be panel
mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket.
function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve 2
to provide breaker status, operational information, protection
For use on Digitrip 310 only, K- through N-Frame. status and energy monitoring. A 24 Vdc power supply is required 2
to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard
Ground Fault Alarm
Unit
GF Alarm Unit builder to Eaton’s specifications. The BIM is a member of
Eaton’s PowerNet family of communicating devices that
2
Catalog
Description Number connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units
and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can 2
Ground fault alarm unit GFAU
also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to
Face mounting bracket 1264C67G01 PowerNet software. 2
Breaker Interface Breaker Interface Module (BIM) 2
Module (BIM) Catalog
IQ Energy Sentinel
The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-
Number 2
based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and BIMII
energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, 2
watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages
include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote 2
monitoring capability.
The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a Series C 2
F-Frame (150 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on three-
phase, four-wire systems, or single-phase, three-wire systems 2
with voltage connected through Phases A and C.
For more information, see Descriptive Bulletin 8178. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-469

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Digitrip OPTIMizer Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display

2 The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used The Cause of Trip Display can be field-installed on any
to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides breaker
2 trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip information through an LCD screen, such as cause of trip,
unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt phrase current, ground current and low loads. The display is
2 battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is ideal for troubleshooting common trips such as ground fault,long
the “Copy” and “Download” commands. delay, and instantaneous/short delay. The DIGIVIEW version will
2 Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and
provide a local display at the breaker without additional wiring by
connecting directly onto the trip unit. The DIGIVIEWR06 version
with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides
2 a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker.
has a 6 foot cable that allows users to mount the display on the
outside of an enclosure door and connect to the trip unit that is
The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include the contained inside the enclosure.
2 programmer, the eight-pin connection cord, battery and carrying
case. The auxiliary power module is optional.
Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount
2 Note: 24 Vdc Power Supply Cause of Trip Display
A 24 Vdc power supply is required for all Digitrip OPTIM trip units that
Catalog
2 are required to communicate either on the main Eaton PowerNet network
or as a subnetwork to a BIM. The breaker’s load is 45 mA of current.
Number
Typically one power supply is required per switchboard and can provide DIGIVIEW
2 control power to a BIM and the OPTIM trip units. The 24 Vdc power
DIGIVIEWR06
supply should be an “isolated high quality” power supply with a “CE”
2 label, and is normally provided by the switchboard manufacturer to
Eaton’s recommendations.
Cause of Trip LED Module
2 Digitrip OPTIMizer Digitrip OPTIMizer The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip
2
Catalog indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects
Number
directly onto the trip unit.
2
OPTIMizer—standard package
When the breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip
(long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED
2 indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset.

2 Auxiliary Power Module Cause of Trip LED Module

The auxiliary power module is a power supply requiring 120 Vac Catalog
2 input at 50 or 60 Hz that provides a 32 Vdc output. The auxiliary Number
power module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip TRIP-LED
2 unit when other means of control power is not available or for
continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery.
2 The auxiliary power module connects into the top of the Digitrip
OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the
2 auxiliary power module would be for the testing of a standalone
non-communicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not
2 have control power.

2 Auxiliary Power
Module
Auxiliary Power Module
Catalog

2 Number
PRTBAPMDV

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-470 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Accessories
2
Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame) Wire Seal 2
The wire seal can be used to secure the cover on the trip unit to
NEMA 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft and C371 1 prevent adjustments after settings are confirmed. 2
Handle Length Catalog
in Inches (mm) Number 2 Wire Seal 2
4 (101.6) C361KJ4 Catalog
6 (152.4) C361KJ6
Description Number
2
Roller Latch 3 C361KR Wire seal 5108A03H01

Notes 2
Series C Rotary Accessories 1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters

As an option, an auxiliary switch is offered so that the control required for assembly.
2 The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied
2
panel builder may electrically indicate the status of the breaker.
This accessory would be mounted on the mechanism and
with these kits.
3 Third roller latch for use with 4- or 6-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when 3 point latching 2
comes with 24-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads. is required.
2
Series C Auxiliary Switch
Catalog 2
Number
5108A61G01 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-471

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Technical Data and Specifications

2
Electrical Operator
2
F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 12 L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data
2 Inrush Current Maximum Fuse
168j

Voltage 3 Frequency Amperes Operating Time Amperes 4 Operating Voltage 3 Inrush Current Amperes
2 120 50/60 Hz AC 10 5 cycles (80 ms) 3 120 AC 31
240 50/60 Hz AC 5 5 cycles (80 ms) 2 208 AC 13
2 240 AC 12

2 F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 2567

125 DC 21
24 DC 50
2 Voltage 3 Frequency
Inrush Current
Amperes

2 120
24
AC
DC
2
5
N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 16kl
Operating Inrush Current Fuse
2 48 DC 3 Voltage 3 Frequency Amperes Amperes
125 DC 2 120 50/60 Hz 31 6
2 208 50/60 Hz 21 —
240 50/60 Hz 19 4
2 J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689
480 50/60 Hz — —
Inrush Current Fuse
2 Voltage 3 Amperes Amperes 24 DC 50 —

120 30 6 48 DC 80 —
2 240 16 4 125 DC 21 —

2
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689 R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data mnop
2 Operating Inrush Current Fuse Operating Motor Inrush Current
Voltage 3 Amperes Amperes Voltage q Frequency Amperes
2 120 30 6 120 50/60 Hz 40
240 50/60 Hz 27
2 240 16 4
48 DC 53

2 24 DC 58

Notes
2 1 UL listed under UL File E64983.
2 The electrical operator design is endurance tested for 8000 electrical operations.

2 3 Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage.

4 Use current-limiting type fuse where required.
5 UL listed under UL File E64124.

2 6 Frequency: 50/60 Hz.

7 Maximum operating time: 3 seconds max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe

2 duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute.
8 The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6000 electrical operations.
9 Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 mS).
2 j Maximum operating time: 12 cycles.
k The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 2,500 electrical operations.

2 l Maximum operating time: 12 cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe

duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute.

2
m Operator is an intermittent duty service. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not

exceed one per minute.

n Electric Operating time at rated voltage; (a) To turn breaker ON–1/2 second max. (b) To turn

2 breaker OFF–1/2 second max.

o Motor operating temperature; Class “A” temperature limits apply.

2
p A minimum 1 kVA power source is recommended for motor operation.
q Applied voltage should be no less than 85% or no more than 110% of rated voltage.

For OPTIM trip, OPEOPCK kit required.

2
2
2

V4-T2-472 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
Rear Connecting Studs 2
F-Frame 1 2
Stud Stud Panel Thickness Tube Length Tube Dimensions
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number A B C
Catalog
Number D E F
2
For 15 to 100 A Circuit Breakers 2
100 short 451D874G01 1.00 (25.4) 1.06 (26.9) — 32B9446H20 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 short 451D874G01 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) 1.38 (34.9) — 32B9446H21 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18 2
100 short 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) 1.69 (42.9) — — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 short
451D874G01
451D874G01 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 2.00 (50.8) —
32B9446H22
32B9446H23 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
2
100 long 451D874G02 1.00 (25.4) — 3.44 (87.3) 32B9446H24 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
2
100 long 451D874G02 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) — 3.75 (95.2) 32B9446H25 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 long 451D874G02 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) — 4.06 (103.1) 32B9446H26 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18 2
100 long 451D874G02 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) — 4.38 (111.3) 32B9446H27 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
For 110 to 225 A Circuit Breakers 2
225 short
225 short
374D883G01
374D883G01
1.00 (25.4)
0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8)
1.06 (26.9)
1.38 (34.9)
—
—
374D883H06
374D883H07
—
—
4.25 (108.0)
4.25 (108.0)
0.44 (11.1)–14
0.44 (11.1)–14
2
225 short 374D883G01 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) 1.69 (42.9) — 374D883H08 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14 2
225 short 374D883G01 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 2.00 (50.8) — 374D883H09 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14
225 long 374D883G02 1.00 (25.4) — 3.44 (87.3) 374D883H10 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14 2
225 long 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) — 3.75 (95.2) 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
2
374D883G02 374D883H11
225 long 374D883G02 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) — 4.06 (103.1) 374D883H12 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
225 long 374D883G02 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) — 4.38 (111.3) 374D883H13 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
2
F-Frame 2
B
E
2
Mounting Panel
2
“F” Thread 2
Breaker Mounting

2
Surface

.06
(1.5) A
2
C
.75
2
D
(19.1)

2
Note
1 Not UL listed.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-473

 2.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
J-Frame
2 Stud Stud Panel Thickness Tube Length Tube
Ampere Catalog Catalog
2 Rating Number A B C Number
250 short 5010D23G01 0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4) 0.84 (21.4) — 456D983H05
2 250 short 5010D23G01 0.50–0.75 (12.7–19.1) 1.09 (27.7) — 456D983H06

2 250 short
250 long
5010D23G01
5010D23G02
0.25–0.50 (6.4–12.7)
0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4)
1.03 (26.2)
—
—
3.88 (98.6)
456D983H07
5010D23H05

2 250 long 5010D23G02 0.50–0.75 (12.7–19.1) — 4.13 (104.9) 5010D23H06

250 long 5010D23G02 0.25–0.50 (6.4–12.7) — 4.38 (111.3) 5010D23H07
2
2 1.59 6.66
(40.4) (169.2)
2 0.59
(15.0)
A C
0.03
0.06
2 (1.5)
(0.7)

0.31 (7.9) – 18 Thread

2
2 Do Not Use More
Than 10 Ft Lb
Torque to Tighten Nuts
0.50 (12.7) – 13 Thread
2 Breaker

2 Mounting Panel
B
3.63
2 (92.2)

2
K-Frame 1
2 Stud Stud Panel Thickness Tube Length Standard Tube Dimensions
Ampere Catalog Catalog
2 Rating Number A B C Number D E F
400 short 6642C14G02 0.75–1 (19.1–25.4) 0.84 (21.3) — 313C909H17 — 3.66 (93.0) 0.75–16 (19.1–406.4)
2 400 short 6642C14G04 0.50–0.75 (12.7–18.4) 1.09 (27.69) — 313C909H18 — — —
400 short 0.25–0.5 (6.35–12.7) 1.03 (26.16) — — — —
2 400 long
6642C14G06
6642C14G03 0.75–1 (19.1–25.4) — 3.78 (96.0)
313C909H19
313C909H20 — — —

2 400 long 6642C14G05 0.50–0.75 (12.7–18.4) — 4.03 (102.4) 313C909H21 6.58 (167.1) — —
400 long 6642C14G07 0.25 –0.5 (6.35–12.7) — 4.28 (108.7) 313C909H22 — — —
2
2 E
B
2 Mounting Panel

2 “F” Thread
Breaker Mounting
2 Surface

2
0.06 A C
2 (1.5)
1.67 D
(42.4)
2
Note
2 1 Not UL listed.

V4-T2-474 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
L-Frame
Stud Catalog
2
Stud Length (A) Number
5.47 (138.9) 314C960G07
2
7.97 (202.4) 314C960G08
2
10.47 (265.9) 314C960G09

2
.44
(11.2) A 2
Insulators
2
Washer
Nut 2
2
Circuit Breaker Rear 2
Connecting
Insulating Panel
Stud
2
2
M-Frame
Stud Diameter Extension Stud 2
Ampere and Back of Catalog
Rating Thread Breaker Number 2
225 0.50 (12.7)–13 3.66 (93.0) 314C960G01
400 0.75 (19.1)–16 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G04 2
400 0.75 (19.1)–16 8.41 (213.6)
400 0.75 (19.1)–16 10.91 (277.0)
314C960G05
314C960G06
2
600 1.00 (25.4)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G07 2
600 1.00 (25.4)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G08
600 1.00 (25.4)–12 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G09 2
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G10
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G11 2
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G12
2
N-Frame
2
Stud
Ampere
Diameter
and
Extension
Back of
Stud
Catalog
2
Rating Thread Breaker Number
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.5 (139.7) 623B222G01
2
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 8.0 (203.2) 623B222G02
2
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 10.5 (266.7) 623B222G03
1200 1.25 (31.8)–12 5.5 (139.7) 373B375G04 2
1200 1.25 (31.8)–12 10.5 (266.7) 373B375G03
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-475

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Contents
2 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Description Page
2 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-477
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-478
Accessories Selection Guide and
2 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-480
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-480
2 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-481
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-481
2 Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-482
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—
2 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-496
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-506
2 Learn Drawings
Online Online
2
2
2 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
2 Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s engine generator Engine generator circuit Engine generator molded
2 molded case circuit breakers breakers are suitable for case circuit breakers are
are designed specifically for reverse feed application. designed to conform with the
2 application on diesel engine
powered standby generators
following standards:
● Underwriters Laboratories
2 where high interrupting
circuit breakers are not Standard UL 489, Molded
required. The JG through NG Case Circuit Breakers and
2 breakers are equipped with a Circuit Breaker Enclosures
File E7819
special trip unit, that includes
2 standard thermal (overload)
protection and special low
● Canadian Standards
Association Standard
2 magnetic pickup range (FG
includes a fixed thermal-
C22.2 No. 5, Service
Entrance and Branch Circuit
magnetic pickup). The Breakers
2 standard thermal trip unit ● International
provides overload protection Electrotechnical
2 for conductors per the Commission
National Electrical Code®. The Recommendations IEC
2 low magnetic pickup range is
approximately two to five
947-2, Circuit Breakers

2 times the continuous rating

and provides closer low-level
short-circuit protection when
2 applied on generators that
have very low short-circuit Conformance with these
2 capacity. This combination standards satisfies most local
and international codes,
allows the user to customize
2 the breaker to the generator
output.
assuming user acceptability
and simplified application.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-476 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented ● JG, KG, LG and NG ● Contact Eaton for 2
only as an aid to breakers with W catalog additional ratings and
understanding catalog number suffix do not internal/external accessories 2
numbers. It is not to be used include any terminals ● Reverse feed
to build catalog numbers for ● JG, KG, LG and NG 2
circuit breakers. breakers without W catalog
● FG breakers include both number suffix include both 2
line and load side terminals line and load terminals
2
Circuit Breakers FG, JG, KG, LG and NG
2
FG 3 100 W
2
Frame
FG Number of Poles Trip Amperes
Suffix
W = Without terminals
2
3 = Three-pole 015
020 2
025
030
035
2
040
045
050
2
2
060
070
080
090
100 2
125
150
175
2
2
200
225
JG
175
200 2
225

KG
250 2
300
350 2
400

2
LG
450
500

NG
600
2
700
800
900
2
2
1000
1200

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-477

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Product Selection
2 The following table lists FG generator full load current
through NG engine generator rating (FLA). The maximum
2 breakers with the maximum kW rating is based on three-
generator kVA and kW rating. phase generators at 80%
2 Engine generator breakers power factor.
are applied at 115% of the
2
2 Thermal-Magnetic
Engine Generator
2 Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
Breaker 3
Magnetic Catalog
2 Pickup Range kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 Number
Fixed 5 4 11 9 14 11 FG3015 4
2 Fixed 7 6 14 12 18 14 FG3020 4
Fixed 9 7 18 14 23 18 FG3025 4
2 Fixed 11 9 22 17 27 22 FG3030 4

2 Fixed
Fixed
13
14
10
12
25
29
20
23
32
36
25
29
FG3035 4
FG3040 4

2 Fixed 16 13 32 26 41 32 FG3045 4
Fixed 18 14 36 29 45 36 FG3050 4
2 Fixed 22 17 43 35 54 43 FG3060 4
Fixed 25 20 51 40 63 51 FG3070 4
2 Fixed 29 23 58 46 72 58 FG3080 4

2 Fixed 32 26 65 52 81 65 FG3090 4
Fixed 36 29 72 58 90 72 FG3100 4

2 Fixed 40 32 79 64 99 79 FG3110 4
Fixed 45 36 90 72 113 90 FG3125 4
2 Fixed 54 43 108 87 135 108 FG3150 4
Fixed 63 51 126 101 158 126
2
FG3175 4
Fixed 72 58 144 116 181 144 FG3200 4

2 Fixed 81 65 162 130 203 162 FG3225 4

350–700 63 51 126 101 158 126 JG3175W 5
2 350–700 63 51 126 101 158 126 JG3175 4
350–700 72 58 144 116 181 144 JG3200W 5
2 350–700 72 58 144 116 181 144 JG3200 4

2 350–700
350–700
81
81
65
65
162
162
130
130
203
203
162
162
JG3225W 5
JG3225 4

2 350–700 90 72 181 144 226 181 JG3250W 5

350–700 90 72 181 144 226 181 JG3250 4
2 500–1000 108 87 217 173 271 217 KG3300W 5
500–1000 108 87 217 173 271 217 KG3300 4
2 500–1000 126 101 253 202 316 253 KG3350W 5

2 500–1000 126 101 253 202 316 253 KG3350 4

1000–2000 144 116 289 231 361 289 KG3400 4

2 Notes
1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating.

2 2 Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor.

3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units.

2
4 Breaker includes line and load terminals.
5 Without terminals.

The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW.
2
2

V4-T2-478 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Electronic
Engine Generator
2
Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz Breaker 3
Magnetic 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Catalog
2
Pickup Range kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 kVA 1 kW 2 Number
500–2500 162 130 325 260 406 325 LG3450 4 2
500–2500 181 144 361 289 451 361
2
LG3500 4

500–2500 217 173 433 347 542 433 LG3600 4

500–2500 253 202 505 404 632 505 NG3700 4 2
500–2500 289 231 578 462 722 578 NG3800 4
1250–5000 325 260 650 520 812 650 NG3900 4 2
1250–5000 361 289 722 578 903 722 NG31000 4
1250–5000 433 347 867 693 1083 867 NG31200 4
2
Notes
1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating.
2
2 Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor.
3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units.
2
4 Breaker includes line and load terminals.

The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-479

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Options and Accessories

2
Enclosures
2
Standard Terminals
Type 1 General Purpose as a main disconnect and Breaker Max. Amp AWG Wire Metric Wire Catalog
protective device for feeder Range mm2
2 ● Surface or flush mounting Frame Rating Range Number
circuits. Ratings through
● 15–1200 ampere range 1200 amperes are listed by FG 100 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB 1

2 ● 600 Vac, 500 Vdc Underwriters Laboratories as

suitable for service entrance
FG 150 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD 1
JG 250 4–350 kcmil 25–185 TA250KB
Type 1 enclosed breakers
2 are designed for use in
application.
KG 350 250–500 kcmil 120–240 TA350K
commercial buildings, Type 12 Dustproof Surface KG 400 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 3TA400K 1
2 apartment buildings and
other areas where a general
Mounting
LG 600 250–500 kcmil (2) 120–240 3TA603LDK
● No knockouts or other
2 purpose enclosure is
applicable. The breaker is openings
NG
NG
700
1000
1–500 kcmil (2)
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
50–300
95–185
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
front operable and is capable ● 15–1200 ampere range
2 of being padlocked in either ● 600 Vac, 500 Vdc
NG 1200 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–300 TA1200NB1

the ON or OFF position.

2 Ratings through 1200 The Type 12 enclosure is
designed in line with Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable
amperes are listed with
2 Underwriters Laboratories as
approved for service entrance
specifications for special
industry applications where
Max. Enclosure
Rating (Amperes)
Main Lug Number
Size Cu/Al
Ground Lug
Size Cu/Al
Catalog
Number
unusually severe conditions 100 (1) 14–1/0 (1) 14–1/0
2 application. Both surface and INK100
flush mounted enclosures are involving oil, coolant, dust and
250 (1) 6–350 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK250
available. other foreign materials exist
2 Type 3R Rainproof Surface
in the operating atmosphere.
The handle padlocks in the
400 (1) 4–750 kcmil or
(2) 1/0–250 kcmil
(1) 4–300 kcmil INK400

2 Mounting OFF position and the cover is

interlocked with the handle
600 (2) 250–500 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK600
● Interchangeable hubs 1200 (3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or (1) 6–250 kcmil INK1200
mechanism to prevent
2 (through 400 amperes) opening the cover with the
(4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil
● 15–1200 ampere range circuit breaker in the ON
2 ● 600 Vac, 500 Vdc position. Ratings through Internal Accessories
1200 amperes are listed by
2 This general purpose outdoor
service center employs a
Underwriters Laboratories as
suitable for service entrance
Auxiliary Switch 2
circuit breaker inside a 1A-1B 2A-2B
2 weatherproof sheet steel
application.
Breaker Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit
breaker enclosure to serve Frame Mounted Catalog Number Mounted Catalog Number
2 FG 3 A06 A1X1PK A13 A2X1RPK
Enclosure Selection Data JG A06 A1X2PK A13 A2X2PK
2 Breaker KG A06 A1X3PK A13 A2X3PK
Frame Enclosure Catalog
2 Amperes Type Class Number
LG A06 A1X4PK A13 A2X4PK
NG A06 A1X5PK A13 A2X5PK
FG Type 1 SFDN225
2 15–225
Type 3R RFDN225
Shunt Trip 2
2 JG
Type 12
Type 1
JFDN225
SJDN250 Breaker Factory Field Kit
Frame Rating Mounted Catalog Number
175–250
2 Type 3R RJDN250
FG 3 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K
Type 12 JJDN250
2 KG Type 1 SKDN400
JG
KG
12–24 Vdc
12–24 Vdc
S42
S42
SNT2P04K
SNT3P04K
300–400
Type 3R
2
RKDN400
LG 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT4LP03K
Type 12 JKDN400
NG 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT5LP03K
2 LG
450–600
Type 1 SLDN600
Notes
Type 3R RLDN600
1 Package of three terminals.

2 Type 12 JLDN600 2 Other accessories are available. Same as standard frame breakers.
3 Field installation on the FG Frame is not UL listed.
NG Type 1 SNDN1200
2 700–1200
Type 3R RNDN1200
Type 12
2 JNDN1200

V4-T2-480 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 2
Volts AC Interrupting Capacity
(50/60 Hz) (Symmetrical Amperes)
2
240 18,000
480 14,000 2
600 10,000
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Volts AC Interrupting Capacity
2
(50/60 Hz) (Symmetrical Amperes)
220, 240 18,000/ 9,000
2
380, 415 14,000/ 7,000
2
660, 690 18,000/ 9,000
14,000/ 7,000
10,000/5,000 2
2
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
Enclosure Selection Data 2
Breaker
Frame Enclosure Approx. Weight Conduit Sizes, Catalog 2
Amperes Type Class A B C D E Lb (kg) Inches Number
FG Type 1 23.25 (590.6) 8.41 (213.6) 6.28 (159.5) 18.75 (476.3) 1.20 (30.5) 15 (7) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 SFDN225 2
15–225
Type 3R 25.66 (651.8) 8.84 (224.7) 9.31 (236.5) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.2) 19 (9) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 RFDN225
Type 12 25.66 (651.8) 8.84 (224.7) 9.31 (236.5) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.2) 18 (8) — JFDN225 2
JG
175–250
Type 1
Type 3R
34.70 (881.4)
37.50 (952.5)
10.92 (277.4)
11.56 (293.6)
7.20 (182.9)
10.22 (259.6)
30.00 (762.0)
35.77 (908.6)
1.88 (47.8)
1.94 (49.3)
31 (14)
40 (18)
0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3
0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3
SJDN250
RJDN250
2
Type 12 37.53 (953.3) 11.56 (293.6) 10.22 (259.6) 35.77 (908.6) 1.94 (49.3) 37 (17) — JJDN250 2
KG Type 1 38.81 (985.8) 11.06 (280.9) 10.94 (277.9) 34.00 (863.6) 2.28 (57.9) 53 (24) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.50, 2, 2.50, 3, 3.50 SKDN400
300–400
Type 3R 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.5) 14.06 (357.1) 39.90 (1013.5) 1.97 (50.0) 60 (27) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 2.50, 3, 3.50 RKDN400 2
Type 12 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.5) 14.06 (357.1) 39.90 (1013.5) 1.97 (50.0) 53 (24) — JKDN400
LG Type 1 45.88 (1165.4) 14.31 (363.5) 12.38 (314.5) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.91 (48.5) 81 (37) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4 SLDN600
2
450–600
Type 3R 48.31 (1227.1) 14.91 (378.7) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.92 (48.8) 84 (38) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4 RLDN600
2
Type 12 48.31 (1227.1) 14.91 (378.7) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.92 (48.8) 81 (37) — JLDN600
NG
700–1200
Type 1 61.22 (1555.0) 21.44 (544.6) 15.41 (391.4) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 178 (81) — SNDN1200 2
Type 3R 63.59 (1615.2) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.8) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 175 (79) — RNDN1200
Type 12 63.59 (1615.2) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.8) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 170 (77) — JNDN1200 2

Type 1 Surface Mounted Type 3R Rainproof Type 12, 12K Dustproof

2
E E
C
E C
2
B C

2
ON 2
D ON
D A
A OFF OFF
2
D A

2
B
B
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-481

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Contents
2 Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Description Page
2 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-476
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
2 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-484
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-485
2 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-492
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-494
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-495

2
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—
1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-496
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-506
2
2
2
2
2 Direct Current Circuit Breakers
2 Product Description
DC (direct current) Current ratings are available All DC breakers use the
2 systems and applications from 15 to 3000 A, with same internal and external
are becoming commonplace a full scale of voltage and accessories as their
2 as alternative energy sources
have expanded and the
interrupting ratings to address
needs ranging from standard
corresponding Series C
and Series G AC frame
2 number of DC devices
and data centers using DC
to the highest performance.
Optional internal accessories
equivalents, except for the
NBDC breaker, which uses
power has swelled. provide remote tripping and the same internal and
2 Eaton offers molded case
indication of breaker status. external accessories as
the standard NB frame.
2 circuit breakers and switches
to meet circuit protection and
The DC breaker family is
UL 489 listed and exceeds The HFDDC through
switching requirements for a the requirements in UL 489 HMDLDC and EG to RG
2 host of different DC end user Supplement SC for UPS DC breakers use the same
requirements. Applications applications. Eaton breakers internal and external
2 include UPS battery supply may be applied in both accessories as their
circuits, solar systems and ungrounded and select corresponding Series C
2 electric vehicle charging, as
well as commercial and
grounded applications, with
poles connected in series
and Series G AC Frame
equivalents. NBDC uses the
2
industrial distribution. to operate at the maximum same internal and external
voltages shown on Page accessories as standard
V4-T2-483. To use DC circuit NB breakers.
2 breakers on 600 V grounded
Many of the Eaton AC
systems, three poles in series
2 must be connected on the
ungrounded leg.
molded case circuit breakers
carry 250 Vdc ratings for
ungrounded systems. Refer
2 to Pages V4-T2-152 and
V4-T2-261 for these
2 interrupting tables.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-482 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Quick Reference Direct Current Circuit Breakers
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Interrupting Capacity (kA) 2
Volts DC 1
Circuit Breaker Maximum Poles in Poles in Poles in Poles in 2
Type Amperes 125 Series 250 2 Series 500 600 Series 750 2 Series
EGEDC 100 10 1 35 2 35 — 3 — — 2
EGSDC 100 35 1 42 2 50 — 3 — —
EGHDC 100 42 1 50 2 65 — 3 — —
2
HFDDC 225 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 42 4
2
JGEDC 250 35 1 35 2 — 35 3 — —
JGSDC 250 42 1 42 2 — 50 3 — — 2
JGHDC 250 50 1 50 2 — 65 3 — —
HJDDC 250 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 — — 2
HKDDC 400 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 — —
LGEDC 600 22 1 22 2 — 35 3 — —
2
LGSDC 600 22 1 22 2 — 50 3 — —
2
LGHDC 600 50 1 50 2 — 65 3 — —
HLDDC 600 42 1 50 2 — 35 3 — — 2
HLDDC 3 1200 42 1 50 2 — — — — —
HMDLDC 800 42 1 50 2 — 35 3 — — 2
NBDC
RGHDC
1200
3000
42
42
1
1
50
50
2
2
—
—
50
65
3
3
—
—
—
—
2

IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

2
Circuit Breaker Maximum 125 Volts DC Poles in 250 Volts DC Poles in 600 Volts DC Poles in 2
Type Amperes Icu Ics Series Icu Ics Series Icu Ics Series
EGEDC 100 10 10 1 10 10 2 — — — 2
EGSDC 100 35 35 1 35 35 2 — — —
EGHDC 100 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
2
JGEDC
JGSDC
250
250
22
22
22
22
1
1
22
22
22
22
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
JGHDC 250 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — — 2
HJDDC 250 — — — — — — 20 10 3
LGEDC 600 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — — 2
LGSDC 600 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
LGHDC 600 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
2
HLDDC 600 — — — — — — 20 10 3
2
HMDLDC 800 — — — — — — 20 10 3

Notes 2
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Time constants per UL 489.
2 EGEDC through HMDLDC have been tested up to 300 Vdc to allow for battery charging voltages. 750 Vdc is common in transportation applications.
2
HFDDC, four-pole 750 Vdc is available up to 150 A maximum. 300 Vdc and 750 Vdc are not UL 489 listed voltage ratings.

2
3 Four-pole frame with two-poles connected in parallel.

See Page V4-T2-494 for series connection diagrams. Use NEC rated cable to connect/short poles in series as shown.

2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-483

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Catalog Number Selection

2 This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
2 DC Circuit Breaker

2 HFDDC 3 150 W
2 Frame Suffix
EGEDC=Series G—E (100 A max.) Number of Poles Trip Unit Ampere Rating Series C, NB Frames
2 EGSDC=Series G—E (100 A max.)
EGHDC=Series G—E (100 A max.)
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
015 = 15 A
020 = 20 A
K = Molded case switch
L = Line and load terminals, F-Frame
HFDDC=Series C—F (225 A max.) 3 = Three-pole 025 = 25 A MW = 135% magnetic trip unit, without terminals
2 JGEDC=Series G—J (250 A max.)
JGSDC=Series G—J (250 A max.)
4 = Four-pole 030 = 30 A W = Without terminals
035 = 35 A Series G Frames
JGHDC=Series G—J (250 A max.) FFG = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, with terminals
2 HJDDC=Series C—J (250 A max.)
040 = 40 A
045 = 45 A FFW = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, without terminals
HKDDC=Series C—K (400 A max.) 050 = 50 A FAG = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, with terminals
2 LGEDC=Series G—L (600 A max.)
LGSDC=Series G—L (600 A max.)
060 = 60 A
070 = 70 A
FAW = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, without terminals
KSG = Molded case switch, with terminals
LGHDC=Series G—L (600 A max.) 080 = 80 A KSW = Molded case switch, without terminals
2 HLDDC=Series C—L (1200 A max.)
HMDLDC=Series C—M (800 A max.)
090 = 90 A
100 = 100 A
NBDC=NB (1200 A max.) 110 = 110 A
2 RGHDC=Series G—R (3000 A max.) 125 = 125 A
150 = 150 A
2 175 = 175 A
200 = 200 A
225 = 225 A
2 250 = 250 A
300 = 300 A
350 = 350 A
2 400 = 400 A
450 = 450 A
2 500 = 500 A
600 = 600 A
700 = 700 A
2 800 = 800 A
900 = 900 A
1000=1000 A
2 1200=1200 A
1600=1600 A

2 2000=2000 A
2500=2500 A
3000=3000 A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-484 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Product Selection
2
Type EGEDC DC Circuit Breakers— Type EGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 500 Vdc Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 500 Vdc 2
Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker
2
Maximum Maximum
Continuous with Terminals without Terminals Continuous with Terminals without Terminals
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number at 40 °C Number Number
2
25 EGEDC3025FFG EGEDC3025FFW 25 EGHDC3025FFG EGHDC3025FFW
30 EGEDC3030FFG EGEDC3030FFW 30 EGHDC3030FFG EGHDC3030FFW 2
35 EGEDC3035FFG EGEDC3035FFW 35 EGHDC3035FFG EGHDC3035FFW
40 EGEDC3040FFG EGEDC3040FFW 40 EGHDC3040FFG EGHDC3040FFW 2
45
50
EGEDC3045FFG
EGEDC3050FFG
EGEDC3045FFW
EGEDC3050FFW
45
50
EGHDC3045FFG
EGHDC3050FFG
EGHDC3045FFW
EGHDC3050FFW
2
60 EGEDC3060FFG EGEDC3060FFW 60 EGHDC3060FFG EGHDC3060FFW 2
70 EGEDC3070FFG EGEDC3070FFW 70 EGHDC3070FFG EGHDC3070FFW
80 EGEDC3080FFG EGEDC3080FFW 80 EGHDC3080FFG EGHDC3080FFW 2
90 EGEDC3090FFG EGEDC3090FFW 90 EGHDC3090FFG EGHDC3090FFW
100 EGEDC3100FFG EGEDC3100FFW 100 EGHDC3100FFG EGHDC3100FFW
2
2
Type EGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 500 Vdc 2
Maximum
Continuous
Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker
with Terminals without Terminals 2
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number 2
25 EGSDC3025FFG EGSDC3025FFW
30 EGSDC3030FFG EGSDC3030FFW 2
35
40
EGSDC3035FFG
EGSDC3040FFG
EGSDC3035FFW
EGSDC3040FFW
2
45 EGSDC3045FFG EGSDC3045FFW 2
50 EGSDC3050FFG EGSDC3050FFW
60 EGSDC3060FFG EGSDC3060FFW 2
70 EGSDC3070FFG EGSDC3070FFW
80 EGSDC3080FFG EGSDC3080FFW
2
90 EGSDC3090FFG EGSDC3090FFW
2
100 EGSDC3100FFG EGSDC3100FFW

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-485

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Type HFDDC DC Circuit Breakers—

2 HFDDC
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker with Line and Load Terminals 1
2 Maximum
Continuous Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
15 HFDDC1015L HFDDC2015L HFDDC3015L HFDDC4015L
2 20 HFDDC1020L HFDDC2020L HFDDC3020L HFDDC4020L

2 25 HFDDC1025L HFDDC2025L HFDDC3025L HFDDC4025L

30 HFDDC1030L HFDDC2030L HFDDC3030L HFDDC4030L

2 35 HFDDC1035L HFDDC2035L HFDDC3035L HFDDC4035L

40 HFDDC1040L HFDDC2040L HFDDC3040L HFDDC4040L
2 45 HFDDC1045L HFDDC2045L HFDDC3045L HFDDC4045L
50
2
HFDDC1050L HFDDC2050L HFDDC3050L HFDDC4050L
60 HFDDC1060L HFDDC2060L HFDDC3060L HFDDC4060L

2 70 HFDDC1070L HFDDC2070L HFDDC3070L HFDDC4070L

80 HFDDC1080L HFDDC2080L HFDDC3080L HFDDC4080L
2 90 HFDDC1090L HFDDC2090L HFDDC3090L HFDDC4090L
100 HFDDC1100L HFDDC2100L HFDDC3100L HFDDC4100L
2 110 HFDDC1110L HFDDC2110L HFDDC3110L HFDDC4110L

2 125
150
HFDDC1125L
HFDDC1150L
HFDDC2125L
HFDDC2150L
HFDDC3125L
HFDDC3150L
HFDDC4125L
HFDDC4150L

2 175 — HFDDC2175L HFDDC3175L —

200 — HFDDC2200L HFDDC3200L —
2 225 — HFDDC2225L HFDDC3225L —

2
Type JGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard
2
Maximum
Continuous Breaker Frame Only 2 Trip Unit Terminals
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
70 JGEDC3070FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
2 90 JGEDC3090FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ
100 JGEDC3100FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ
2 125 JGEDC3125FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ
150
2
JGEDC3150FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ
175 JGEDC3175FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ

2 200 JGEDC3200FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ

225 JGEDC3225FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ
2 250 JGEDC3250FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ

2 Notes
1 For breaker without terminals, replace “L” with “W” at end of catalog number.
2 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-486 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Type JGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc 2
Complete Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard
Maximum
Continuous Breaker Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals 2
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
2
70 JGSDC3070FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
90 JGSDC3090FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ 2
100 JGSDC3100FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ
125 JGSDC3125FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ
2
150 JGSDC3150FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ
2
175 JGSDC3175FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ
200 JGSDC3200FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ 2
225 JGSDC3225FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ
250 JGSDC3250FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ 2
2
Type JGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
JGHDC3250NN
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc 2
Complete Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard
Maximum
Continuous Breaker Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals 2
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
2
70 JGHDC3070FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
90 JGHDC3090FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ 2
100 JGHDC3100FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ
125 JGHDC3125FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ
2
150 JGHDC3150FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ
2
175 JGHDC3175FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ
200 JGHDC3200FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ 2
225 JGHDC3225FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ
250 JGHDC3250FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ 2
2
Type HJDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
HJDDC3250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc 2
Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard
Maximum
Continuous Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals 2
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number
2
70 HJDDC3250F JT3070T TA250KB
90 HJDDC3250F JT3090T TA250KB 2
100 HJDDC3250F JT3100T TA250KB
125 HJDDC3250F JT3125T TA250KB 2
150
175
HJDDC3250F
HJDDC3250F
JT3150T
JT3175T
TA250KB
TA250KB
2
200 HJDDC3250F JT3200T TA250KB 2
225 HJDDC3250F JT3225T TA250KB
250 HJDDC3250F JT3250T TA250KB 2
Note
1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-487

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Type HKDDC DC Circuit Breakers—

2 HKDDC3400
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc

2 Maximum Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard

Continuous Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 at 40 °C Number Number Number
100 HKDDC3400F KT3100T TA300K
2 125 HKDDC3400F KT3125T TA300K
150
2
HKDDC3400F KT3150T TA300K
175 HKDDC3400F KT3175T TA300K

2 200 HKDDC3400F KT3200T TA300K

225 HKDDC3400F KT3225T TA300K
2 250 HKDDC3400F KT3250T TA350K
300 HKDDC3400F KT3300T TA350K
2 350 HKDDC3400F KT3350T TA350K
400
2 HKDDC3400F KT3400T 3TA400K 2

2 Type LGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—

LGEDC3630NN
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
2 Maximum Complete Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard
Breaker Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals
2
Continuous
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
2 250 LGEDC3250FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK
300 LGEDC3300FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK
2 350 LGEDC3350FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK

2 400 LGEDC3400FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK

500 LGEDC3500FAG LGEDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2

2 600 LGEDC3600FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2

2
Type LGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
2 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Maximum Complete Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard
2 Continuous
Ampere Rating
Breaker
Catalog
Frame Only 1
Catalog
Trip Unit
Catalog
Terminals
Catalog

2
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
250 LGSDC3250FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK

2 300 LGSDC3300FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK

350 LGSDC3350FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK
2 400 LGSDC3400FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK
500 LGSDC3500FAG LGSDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2
2 600 LGSDC3600FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2

2 Notes
1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.

2 2 Three-pole kit.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-488 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Type LGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc 2
Complete Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard
Maximum
Continuous Breaker Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals 2
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C Number Number Number Number
2
250 LGHDC3250FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK
300 LGHDC3300FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK 2
350 LGHDC3350FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK
400 LGHDC3400FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK
2
500 LGHDC3500FAG LGHDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2
2
600 LGHDC3600FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2

2
HLDDC Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
2
Maximum Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
2
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
300
350
HLDDC3600F
HLDDC3600F
LT3300T
LT3350T
TA602LD
TA602LD
2
400 HLDDC3600F LT3400T TA602LD 2
450 HLDDC3600F LT3450T TA602LD
500 HLDDC3600F LT3500T TA602LD 2
600 HLDDC3600F LT3600T 3TA603LDK 2
2
Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers— 2
Two-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 250 Vdc 34
Maximum Complete 2
Continuous Breaker
Ampere Rating Catalog 2
at 40 °C Number
600 HLDDC20600 2
700 HLDDC20700
800 HLDDC20800 2
900
1000
HLDDC20900
HLDDC21000
2
1200 HLDDC21200 2
Notes
1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation. 2
2 Three-pole kit.
3 Includes breaker frame, trip unit and terminals.
4 Four-pole breaker with two poles wired in parallel.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-489

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Type HMDLDC DC Circuit Breakers—

2 HMDLDC3800F
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc

2 Maximum Circuit Breaker Thermal-Magnetic Standard

Continuous Frame Only 1 Trip Unit Terminals
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 at 40 °C Number Number Number
300 HMDLDC3800F MT3300T TA700MA1
2 350 HMDLDC3800F MT3350T TA700MA1
400
2
HMDLDC3800F MT3400T TA700MA1
450 HMDLDC3800F MT3450T TA700MA1

2 500 HMDLDC3800F MT3500T TA700MA1

600 HMDLDC3800F MT3600T TA700MA1
2 700 HMDLDC3800F MT3700T TA700MA1
800 HMDLDC3800F MT3800T TA800MA2
2
2 Type NBDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
2 Maximum Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Standard
Continuous Assembled without Terminals 2 Terminals
2 Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Includes Magnetic
Trip Unit Calibrated at 135%
Catalog
Number

2 700 NBDC3700MW Included TA1000NB1

800 NBDC3800MW Included TA1000NB1
2 900 NBDC3900MW Included TA1000NB1
1000 NBDC31000MW Included TA1000NB1
2 1200 NBDC31200MW Included TA1200NB1

2
2 RGHDC3300FFWM Type RGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc

2 Complete Circuit Breaker

Factory Assembled 2
Imperial Termination Metric Termination
2
Maximum
Continuous Threading Threading Includes Magnetic
Ampere Rating Catalog Catalog Trip Unit Calibrated
2 at 40 °C Number Number at 135%
1600 RGHDC3160FFWE RGHDC3160FFWM Included
2 2000 RGHDC3200FFWE RGHDC3200FFWM Included
2500 RGHDC3250FFWE RGHDC3250FFWM Included
2 3000 RGHDC3300FFWE RGHDC3300FFWM Included

2 Notes
1 Includes frame and trip unit. Order terminals or connectors separately.

2
2 Six rear connectors included as standard that match terminal threading.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-490 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
DC Breaker Terminal Wire Ranges
Breaker Maximum Breaker Terminal Body AWG Wire Range/ Metric Wire Number of Standard Terminal
2
Frame Ampacity Material Wire Type Number of Conductors Range mm2 Terminals Included Catalog Number
EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 100 Aluminum Cu/Al 14–1/0 2.5–50 3 3TA125EF 2
HFDDC 20 Steel Cu/Al 14–10 (1) 2.5–4 (1) 3
100 Steel Cu/Al 14–1/0 (1) 2.5–50 (1) 3
3T20FB
3T100FB
2
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC
225
250
Aluminum
Stainless steel
Cu/Al
Cu
4–4/0 (1)
4–350 (1)
25–95 (1)
25–185 (1)
3
1
3TA225FD
T250FJ
2
HJDDC
HKDDC
250
225
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
4–350 kcmil (1)
3–350 kcmil (1)
25–185 (1)
35–185 (1)
1
1
TA250KB
TA300K
2
350 Aluminum Cu/Al 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 TA350K
2
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 3 3TA400K
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 TA350LK 2
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 1 TA632L
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3TA632LK 2
HLDDC 500 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–350 kcmil (2) 95–150 (2) 1 TA602LD
600 Aluminum Cu/Al 400–500 kcmil (2) 185–240 (2) 3 3TA603LDK 2
HMDLDC 600 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 kcmil (2) — 1 TA700MA1
800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) — 1 TA800MA2 2
NBDC 700 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1 2
900 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1 2
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–240 (4) 1
2
TA1200NB1

Note: RGHDC breakers include six rear connectors as standard.

2
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s DC molded case switches are used in applications requiring a compact, high-capacity disconnect. They are UL 489 listed and 2
have automatic high instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection.
Molded Case Switches 2
Maximum
Continuous
With Line and Load Terminals Without Line and Load Terminals
2
Ampere Rating Interrupting Capacity Poles in Catalog Catalog
at 40 °C (Volts DC) Series Number Number 2
600 Vdc Maximum
100 42 3 HFDDC3100KL HFDDC3100KW 2
150 42 3 HFDDC3150KL HFDDC3150KW
225 42 3 HFDDC3225KL HFDDC3225KW 2
250 65 3
2
JGKDC3250KSG JGKDC3250KSW
250 42 3 HJDDC3250K HJDDC3250KW
400 35 3
65 3
HKDDC3400K
LGKDC3400KSG
HKDDC3400KW
LGKDC3400KSW
2
600 65
35
3
3
LGKDC3630KSG
HLDDC3600K
LGKDC3630KSW
HLDDC3600WK
2
800 35 3 HMDLDC3800K HMDLDC3800WK
2
500 Vdc Maximum
100 65 3 EGK3100KSG EGK3100KSW 2
250 Vdc Maximum
100 50 2 HFDDC2100KL HFDDC2100KW 2
150 50 2 HFDDC2150KL HFDDC2150KW
225 50 2 HFDDC2225KL HFDDC2225KW 2
1200 50 1
HLDDC21200K 1 HLDDC21200WK 1

Note
2
2
1 Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel.

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-491

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Accessories
2
2
Internal Accessories
Field Installation Kits

2 JGEDC,
JGSDC,
JGHDC
2 Factory EGEDC, LGEDC,
Installation EGSDC, LGSDC,
2 Description (HFDDC) HFDDC 1 EGHDC LGHDC HJDDC HKDDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC RGHDC
Right-Pole Mounting
2 Auxiliary switch
1A-1B A06 A1X1PK AUX1A1BPK AUX1A1BPK A1X2PK A1X3PK A1X4PK A1X4PK 4980D16G05 —
2 2A-2B A13 A2X1RPK AUX2A2BPK AUX2A2BPK A2X2PK A2X3PK A2X4PK A2X4PK 4980D16G06 A2X6RPK
Alarm switch
2 1 make/1 break B06 A1L1RPK ALM1M1BEPK ALM1M1BJPK A1L2RPK A1L3RPK A1L4RPK A1L4RPK — A1L6RPK

2 Auxiliary and alarm combo

1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 AAL1RPK AUXALRMEPK AUXALRMJPK AAL2RPK AAL3RPK AA114RPK AA114RPK — —

2 Left-Pole Mounting
Shunt trip

2 12 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K SNT012CPK SNT012CPK SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 2606D58G14 —
24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K SNT024CPK SNT024CPK SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 2606D58G13 SNT6P03K 2
2 48 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT4860CPK SNT4860CPK SNT2P06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP23K 2606D58G12 SNT6P23K 2
60 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT4860CPK SNT4860CPK SNT2P06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP23K 2606D58G11 SNT6P23K 2
2 125 Vdc S10 SNT1LP12K SNT120CPK SNT120CPK SNT2P11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP26K SNT4LP26K 2606D58G10 SNT6P23K 2

2 250 Vdc
120 Vac
S14
S06
SNT1LP18K
SNT1LP12K
—
SNT120CPK
—
SNT120CPK
SNT2P14K
SNT2P11K
SNT3P14K
SNT3P11K
SNT4LP14K
SNT4LP11K
SNT4LP14K
SNT4LP11K
2606D58G09
2060D58G05
SNT6P14K
SNT6P11K 2

2 Undervoltage release
12 Vdc U30 UVH1LP20K UVR012DPK UVR012DPK UVH2LP20K UVH3LP20K UVH4LP20K UVH4LP20K 372D032G06 UVH6RP20K 2

2 24 Vdc U34 UVH1LP21K UVR024DPK UVR024DPK UVH2LP21K UVH3LP21K UVH4LP21K UVH4LP21K 372D032G07 UVH6RP21K 2
48 Vdc U38 UVH1LP22K UVR048DPK UVR048DPK UVH2LP22K UVH3LP22K UVH4LP22K UVH4LP22K 372D032G08 UVH6RP23K 2
2 125 Vdc U42 UVH1LP26K UVR125DPK UVR125DPK UVH2LP26K UVH3LP26K UVH4LP26K UVH4LP26K 372D032G09 UVH6RP26K 2
250 Vdc U46 UVH1LP28K UVR250DPK UVR250DPK UVH2LP28K UVH3LP28K UVH4LP28K UVH4LP28K 372D032G10 UVH6RP28K 2
2 120 Vac U14 UVH1LP08K UVR120APK UVR120APK UVH2LP08K UVH3LP08K UVH4LP08K UVH4LP08K 373D632G05 UVH6RP08K 2

2 Notes
1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation

2 under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker
is mounted and connected.
2 Right-pole mounted.

2 One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker. Factory installation of accessories is available. Contact Eaton for assistance with part number configuration.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-492 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Jumpers
Jumpers must be ordered separately. Priced individually. 2
HFDDC Frame 2
Maximum Catalog
Description Amperes Number 2
Single copper jumper 60 DC1F060 1
100 DC1F100 1 2
125
225
DC1F125 1
DC1F225 1
2
Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 100 DC2FD100A 2
Package of 3 aluminum jumpers 100 DC3FD100A
2
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC Frames
Maximum Catalog
2
2
Description Amperes Number
Single aluminum jumper 250 DC1JG250A 1
Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 250 DC2JG250A 1 2
Package of 20 aluminum jumpers 250 DC20JG250A 1
2
HKDDC Frame
Maximum Catalog
2
Description Amperes Number
Single copper jumper 400 DC1K400 1
2
Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 400 DC2KD400A 1
2
Package of 3 aluminum jumpers 400 DC3KD400A 1
2
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC Frames
Maximum Catalog
2
Description Amperes Number
Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 400 DC2LG400A
2
Package of 3 aluminum jumpers 400 DC3LG400A
2
Package of 30 aluminum jumpers 400 DC30LG400A

Note 2
1 Not UL Listed; Non UL listed jumpers used in a UL application may need to be qualified by the OEM in their assembly.

This may take place with UL or another certified testing agency. 2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-493

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Wiring Diagrams
2
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12
2
2 250 Vdc Maximum—Two Poles in Series

2
2
2
2 Load

2 Load
(A)

2 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to

2 grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.

2 500 Vdc or 600 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series

2 Load

2
2
2
2 Load
(A)

2 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded

systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.

grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.

2
2
750 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles in Series
2
2
2
2
2 Load
Load
2 (A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.

2 systems that have one end of load (A) connected to

grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.

2 Notes

2
1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
2 For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.

2
2

V4-T2-494 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
DC Breaker Dimensions 2
Frame
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth 2
EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 3 3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
2
HFDDC 1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2 2.75 (70.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 2
3 4.13 (105.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0) 2
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
HJDDC 2, 3 4.13 (105.0) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (103.1)
2
HKDDC 2, 3 5.50 (139.7) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1)
2
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 3 5.48 (139.2) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
600 A Max. HLDDC 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1) 2
1200 A Max. HLDDC 4 11.00 (279.4) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
HMDLDC 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1) 2
NBDC
RGHDC
3
3
8.25 (209.6)
15.50 (393.7)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
5.50 (139.7)
9.75 (247.7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-495

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Contents
2 PVGard Solar Photovoltaic Circuit Breakers
Description Page
2 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-476
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-482
2 PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—
1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
2 Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-497
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-497
2 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-497
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-498
2 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-499
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-503
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-505

2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-505
V4-T2-506
2
2
2 PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker—1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
2 Product Overview Product Description
● Two PVGard™ lineups Photovoltaic (PV) systems PVGard 1000 Vdc
2 ● 600 Vdc per-pole breaker convert the energy of the sun Poles-in-Series Lineup
and switch. Each pole into electrical power that is This 1000 Vdc poles-in-series
2 rated 600 Vdc fed directly into the electric
grid. Within the balance of
lineup provides reliable and
safe disconnect means and
● 1000 Vdc poles-in-series
2 breaker and switch.
Requires poles in series
system (BOS), direct current
(DC) circuit breakers protect
overcurrent protection in
a single, compact device for
the wiring connected from commercial and utility scale
2 ●
connection
UL 489B listed for solar
the PV modules to the PV systems. This solution
combiner or the inverter, does not require jumpers
2 photovoltaic circuit
protection
while also behaving as
a disconnect.
with the breaker/switch to
be a UL 489B listed device,
2 50 °C calibration
●
providing reliability and
Offers both 100% and Eaton is a global leader in
●
flexibility in design without
80% rated breakers circuit protection and brings
2 ● Handle bi-directional
this expertise to bear in the
limitation on implementation
of the breaker/switch. If
photovoltaic market. PVGard
current flow needed, cost-effective Eaton
2 solar circuit breakers are part
of a product family that
jumpers can be included.

2
combines a disconnect with
circuit protection in a single,
compact, resettable device
2 to protect and isolate DC
circuits as needed in
2 photovoltaic systems.
PVGard breakers can replace
2 fuses, fuse holders and
disconnects in combiner box
and inverter applications—
2 saving space, streamlining
design, purchasing and
2 receiving, and reducing spare
parts requirements.
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-496 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Application Description Features Standards and Certifications
Photovoltaic (PV) systems PVGard breakers are uniquely Designed specifically for ● Designed to meet UL 489B 2
convert the energy of the sun designed with these features: high- and low-temperature for solar photovoltaic circuit
into electrical power that is demands of PV installations, protection 2
fed directly into the electric
● Meets the higher voltage PVGard circuit breakers ● UL File E350638, Category
grid. PVGard circuit breakers and lower fault current
levels of solar systems
undergo extreme ambient Control Number DIUR 2
are used to protect the wiring cycling tests, and carry a
from the modules to the
combiner box or inverter from
● Tested to extreme ambient
conditions from –40 ºC to
robust operating temperature
range. Trip units calibrate at
2
+90 ºC
overcurrents, and to provide
an isolation mechanism. ● Full complement of
100% and 80% of nameplate
current in a 50 ºC ambient, 2
accessories for status, ensuring continuous
signalling, and on/off operation in higher 2
operation remotely temperature environments
● Can handle bi-directional typical to solar. 2
flow of current Rigorous third-party testing
● Can be applied in includes limited and standard 2
grounded, ungrounded fault current tests, electrical
or bi-polar systems and mechanical endurance, 2
● Meets and exceeds the di-electric voltage withstand
standards of UL 489B for
photovoltaic molded case
and temperature tests.
Eaton’s PVGard products are
2
circuit breakers and
molded case switches
stand-alone devices without
requiring jumpers to be 2
UL 489B listed devices.
Available both standard
2
●

(80%-rated) and 100%- PVGard breakers are available

rated breakers
● 50 ºC calibration
with a full complement of
accessories to provide string 2
Ability to open on signal status, enable remote trip,
2
●

from DC arc or ground fault on/off operation, and can

detector be customized to site
● Wide range of current requirements. 2
ratings increases options
for matching incoming 2
strings
● Eliminates fuse stocking 2
costs and matching issues
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-497

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Product Selection
2 Catalog number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T2-501.

2
FD PV Frame, 100 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 3 kA 1
2 FD PV Frame
80% Rated 100% Rated
2 Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
30 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4030W CFDPV4030W
2 40 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4040W CFDPV4040W

2 50
60
4
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
FDPV4050W
FDPV4060W
CFDPV4050W
CFDPV4060W

2 70 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4070W CFDPV4070W

80 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4080W CFDPV4080W
2 90 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4090W CFDPV4090W
100 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
2
FDPV4100W CFDPV4100W

2 KD PV Frame KD PV Frame, 350 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1

2 80% Rated 100% Rated

Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 125 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4125W CKDPV4125W
150 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4150W CKDPV4150W
2 175 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4175W CKDPV4175W

2 200 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4200W CKDPV4200W

225 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4225W CKDPV4225W

2 250 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4250W CKDPV4250W

300 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4300W CKDPV4300W
2 350 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4350W CKDPV4350W

2
LG PV Frame, 400 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1
2 LG PV Frame
80% Rated 100% Rated

2 Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
250 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4250W CLGPV4250W
2 300 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4300W CLGPV4300W
350 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4350W CLGPV4350W
2 400 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4400W CLGPV4400W

2
2 MDL PV Frame MDL PV Frame, 600 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 7.5 kA 1
80% Rated 100% Rated
2 Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
300 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3300W CMDLPV3300W
2 350 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3350W CMDLPV3350W

2 400
450
3
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
MDLPV3400W
MDLPV3450W
CMDLPV3400W
CMDLPV3450W

2 500 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3500W CMDLPV3500W

600 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3600W CMDLPV3600W
2 Note
1 Terminals not included with frames.

2
2

V4-T2-498 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Accessories
2
Available Accessories Factory Modifications—Freeze Testing to –40 ºC 3 2
● Auxiliary switch Frame Modification Code
● Shunt trip FD PV F01 2
● Electrical operator KD PV F01
● Alarm lockout LG PV F01 2
● Undervoltage release MDL PV F01
● Terminals Special calibration—contact Eaton for availability 2
● Lock-off devices
● End cap kits Molded Case Switches 2
● Rotary handle mechanisms Eaton’s DC molded case switches (MCS) are used in
● Flexible shaft handle mechanisms applications requiring a compact, high capacity disconnect. 2
PVGard 1000 Vdc MCS are UL 489B listed and have automatic
Optional modifications instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide 2
● Freeze testing overload protection.

For complete internal and external accessories, see the

2
Molded Case Switches
accessory section of each frame.
Maximum Continuous Interrupting Poles in Catalog 2
Ampere Rating at 50 °C Capacity Vdc Series Number
External Accessories
Catalog
1000 Vdc Maximum 2
100 3000 4 FDPV4100KW
2
Description Frame Number
200 5000 4 KDPV4200KW
Imperial Base Mounting Hardware
250 5000 4 KDPV4250KW
0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
FD PV
KD PV
BMH1
BMH3
350 5000 4 KDPV4350KW 2
400 5000 4 LGPV4400KSW
—
0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and
LG PV
MDL PV
N/A
BMH5
600 7500 3 MDLPV3600KSW 2
lockwashers and flat washers Notes
Metric Base Mounting Hardware 1 Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or a molded case switch 2
M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers FD PV BMH1M (included with breaker). If required separately, order 66A2546G02.
M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers KD PV BMH3M
2 Locks in ON and OFF position.
3 Add 20% to list price.
2
— LG PV Included 1
M8-1.25 x 35 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers MDL PV BMH5M 2
Interphase Barriers
FD PV IPB1 2
KD PV IPB3
LG PV IPB3 2
MDL PV IPB4
Non-Padlockable Handle Block 2
FD PV LKD1
KD PV LKD3 2
LG PV N/A
MDL PV LKD4 2
2

2
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
FD PV PLK1
KD PV PLK3
LG PV LPHL 2
MDL PV
2
HLK4

2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-499

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Internal Accessories—Right Pole Mounting

2 FD PV 1 KD PV LG PV MDL PV

2 Factory
Modification
Field Kit
Catalog
Factory
Modification
Field Kit
Catalog
Factory
Modification
Field Kit
Catalog
Factory
Modification
Field Kit
Catalog
Code Number Code Number Code Number Code Number
2 Auxiliary Switch
1A-1B A06 A06 A1 A06
2
A1X1PK A1X3PK AUX1A1BPK A1X4PK
2A-2B A13 A2X1RPK A13 A2X3PK A2 AUX2A2BPK A13 A2X4PK

2 Alarm Switch
1 make/1 break B06 A1L1RPK B06 A1L3RPK B1 ALM1M1BJPK B06 A1L4RPK
2 Auxiliary and Alarm Combo
1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 AAL1RPK C05 AAL3RPK B2 AUXALRMJPK C05 AA114RPK
2
Internal Accessories—Left Pole Mounting
2 FD PV 1 KD PV LG PV MDL PV

2
Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit Factory Field Kit
Modification Catalog Modification Catalog Modification Catalog Modification Catalog
Code Number Code Number Code Number Code Number
2 Shunt Trip
12 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K S42 SNT3P04K S4 SNT012CPK S02 SNT4LP03K
2 24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K S42 SNT3P04K S6 SNT024CPK S02 SNT4LP03K

2 48 Vdc
60 Vdc
S06
S06
SNT1LP08K
SNT1LP08K
S50
S50
SNT3P06K
SNT3P06K
S7
S7
SNT4860CPK
SNT4860CPK
S86
S86
SNT4LP23K
SNT4LP23K

2 125 Vdc S10 SNT1LP12K S10 SNT3P11K S2 SNT120CPK S42 SNT4LP26K

250 Vdc S14 SNT1LP18K S14 SNT3P14K — — S14 SNT4LP14K
2 120 Vac S10 SNT1LP12K S10 SNT3P11K S2 SNT120CPK S10 SNT4LP11K

2
Undervoltage Release
12 Vdc U30 UVH1LP20K T02 UVH3LP20K U1 UVR012DPK T02 UVH4LP20K

2 24 Vdc U34 UVH1LP21K T02 UVH3LP21K U2 UVR024DPK T06 UVH4LP21K

48 Vdc U38 UVH1LP22K T10 UVH3LP22K U4 UVR048DPK T10 UVH4LP22K
2 60 Vdc — — — — — — — —
125 Vdc U42 UVH1LP26K T14 UVH3LP26K U6 UVR125DPK T14 UVH4LP26K
2 250 Vdc U46 UVH1LP28K T18 UVH3LP28K U8 UVR250DPK T18 UVH4LP28K
120 Vac U14 U18 U5 U18
2 UVH1LP08K UVH3LP08K UVR120APK UVH4LP08K

Notes
2 1 Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories for the FD PV be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation

under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be
done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2 One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-500 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker Terminal Offering
Standard
2
Maximum Number of Terminal
Breaker
Frame
Breaker
Ampacity
Terminal Body
Material Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Terminals
Included
Catalog
Number Comments
2
FD PV 50 Steel Cu/Al 14–4 (1) 2.5–25 (1) 3 3TA50FB 2
100 Aluminum Cu/Al 6–300 kcmil (1) 16–150 (1) 3 3TA225FDK3 Includes 3P terminal cover
100 Aluminum Cu/Al 6–300 kcmil (1) 16–150 (1) 3 3TA225FDK Includes 3P terminal cover 2
Replacement use only
100 Copper Cu 4–4/0 (1) 25–95 (1) 3 3T225FD 2
KD PV 225 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 TA300K
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 TA350K
2
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 4 4TA400K Contains interphase barriers
2
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 2/0–250 kcmil (2) or 2/0–500 kcmil (1) 70–240 (2) 4 4TA401K
300 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers 2
350 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers
225 Copper Cu 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 T300K 2
250 Copper Cu 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1
2
T350K
250 Copper Cu 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 4 4T400K Contains interphase barriers
300 Copper Cu 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers
2
350 Copper Cu 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers
LG PV 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4TA632LK Includes 4P terminal cover 2
250 Copper Cu 2–500 kcmil (1) 35–240 (1) 1 T350LK
400 Copper Cu 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4T632LK Includes 4P terminal cover 2
MDL PV 300
600
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
1–500 kcmil (2)
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
—
—
1
1
TA700MA1
TA800MA2
2
2
Endcap Kits
Breaker Frame Number of Poles Thread Type Thread Size Catalog Number 2
FD PV 4 Imperial 10–32 KPEK14
4 Metric M–5 KPEKM14 2
KD PV 4
4
Imperial
Metric
0.312–18
M–8
KPEK34
KPEKM34
2
LG PV 4 Imperial — N/A 2
4 Metric M-10 L4RTWK
MDL PV 3 Imperial — — 2
3 Metric — —
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-501

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Jumpers
2 Jumpers must be ordered separately. Priced individually.

2 FD PV Frame
Maximum Catalog
2 Description Amperes Number
Single copper jumper 60 DC1F060
2 100 DC1F100

2 125 DC1F125
225 DC1F225

2
KD PV Frame
2 Maximum Catalog
Description Amperes Number
2 Single copper jumper 400 DC1K400

2
LG PV Frame
2 Description
Maximum
Amperes
Catalog
Number

2 Package of 2 aluminum jumpers 400 DC2LG400A

Package of 3 aluminum jumpers 400 DC3LG400A
2 Package of 30 aluminum jumpers 400 DC30LG400A

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-502 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Technical Data and Specifications
● Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers 2
Designed to meet UL 489B for solar photovoltaic
2
●

circuit protection
100% rated of the continuous current rating
2
●

● 50 °C calibrated
●

●
Can be applied in grounded, ungrounded or bi-polar systems
Ability to open on signal from DC arc or ground fault detector
2
● UL File EE350638, Category Control Number DIUR 2
● 1000 Vdc poles-in-series breaker and switch
● Requires poles in series connection 2
2
Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers
1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series 2
PVGard 1000 Vdc Current Ratings by Frame
UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (kA) 1000 Vdc
2
Circuit
Breaker Type
Minimum
Amperes
Maximum
Amperes kA Rating
Poles in
Series 2
FD PV 30 100 3 4
2
KD PV 125 350 5 4
LG PV 250 400 5 4 2
MDL PV 300 600 7.5 3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-503

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

PVGard 1000 Vdc Solar PV Circuit Breakers (100% and 80% Rated Frames)
2 FD PV KD PV LG PV MDL PV

2 Number of poles 4 4 4 3
Maximum voltage rating 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc
2 Maximum current rating 100 A 350 A 400 A 600 A
Interrupting capacity at 1000 Vdc 3 kA 5 kA 5 kA 7.5 kA
2 Time constant 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms

2 Ampere range
Trip unit type
15–100 A
Thermal-magnetic
125–350 A
Thermal-magnetic
250–400 A
Thermal-magnetic
300–600 A
Thermal-magnetic

2 Rated impulse withstand voltage

Main conducting paths 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV
2 Auxiliary circuits 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Endurance
2 Mechanical operations 10,000 10,000 8000 8000
Electrical operations 1000 400 400 400
2 Maximum switching frequency
Third-party certification
300 per hour
UL 489B
240 per hour
UL 489B
240 per hour
UL 489B
240 per hour
UL 489B

2 Environment
Design ambient temperature 50 °C 50 °C 50 °C 50 °C
2 Maximum current at 60 °C, as % of rated current
Maximum current at 70 °C, as % of rated current
91%
88%
91%
88%
93%
88%
93%
88%

2 Operating temperature range

Storage temperature range
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Suitable for freeze temperatures to –40 °C Option Option Option Option
2 Relative humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing 0 to 95% noncondensing 0 to 95% noncondensing 0 to 95% noncondensing
Suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Mounting—permissible mounting position

2
2
º

º
90

90
90

90
º

º
2
2
Connection diagrams 1 2

2
2
2
2
Load
Load
(A)

2 Terminations
Al/Cu wire #6–300 kcmil (2) 3/0–250 kcmil (2) #2–500 kcmil (3) 3/0–400 kcmil
2 Cu wire #4–4/0 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil (2) #2–500 kcmil (3) 3/0–300 kcmil

2 Dimensions in inches (mm)

Height 6.00 (152.4) 10.13 (257.3) 10.13 (257.3) 16.00 (406.4)

2 Width
Depth
5.50 (139.7)
3.38 (85.9)
7.22 (183.4)
4.09 (103.9)
7.22 (183.4)
4.09 (103.9)
8.25 (209.5)
4.06 (103.1)
Weight in lb 6 20 20 29
2
Notes
2 1 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
2 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.

2
2

V4-T2-504 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series 2
Frame
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth 2
FD PV 4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2
KD PV 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
LG PV 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9) 2
MDL PV 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1)
2
Wiring Diagrams 2
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12

2
FD PV, KD PV, LG PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles-in-Series
2
2
2
2
Load 2
Load
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
2
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection. 2
MDL PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series 2
Load 2
2
2
2
Load
(A) 2
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to 2
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.

Notes 2
1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
2 For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-505

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Contents
2 E2 Mining Service Breakers
Description Page
2 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-476
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-482
2 PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—
1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-496
2 E2 Mining Service Breakers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-508
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-512
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-523
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-526

2
2
2
2
2 E2 Mining Service Breakers
2 Product Overview
600 Vac Mining Breaker 1000 Vac Mining Breaker
State-of-the-art E2 mining E2 electronic trip units are the Replacement Chart Replacement Chart
2 service breakers incorporate first to provide the mining
Classic Series C E2 Classic Series C E2M
the rigid specifications and industry with true rms
2 testing procedures developed
by a focus group led by
sensing, made possible by
the custom ASIC
FBM FDBM E2F HFM — E2FM
HFBM FDM E2F — JDCM E2JM
2 engineers from several
large coal companies and
microprocessor in each
electronic trip unit. HFDM (mag. only) E2F HKAM KDCM E2KM
Eaton design engineers. — JDM E2J HLAM LDCM E2LM
2 Additionally, the performance E2 breakers are designed to
be physically and electrically KAM KDM E2K HLCM LDCM E2LM
of these breakers was proven
E2K E2MM
2 and verified during hundreds
of hours of field testing in
interchangeable with Classic
Mining Service Breakers and
KAMH
LAM
KDM
LDM E2L
HMAM
HMCM
—
— E2MM
supersede Series C® Mining
2 harsh mine environments.
Service Breakers. The table to LAMH LDM E2L HNBM — E2NM
E2 mining breakers are the right outlines direct LCM LDM E2L HNBMH — E2NM
2 available in 600 Vac, l000Y/ replacements. LCMH LDM E2L HNCM — E2NM
577 Vac and 1200 Vac.
MAM — E2M HLCLM — E2NM
2 Interchangeable trip units can
be used on either 600 or 1000 MAMH — E2M HPBM — E2RM 1

2
Vac frames. MCM — E2M

The E2 mining breaker family MCMH — E2M

2 is designed especially for

trailing cable application per
NBM — E2N
NBMH — E2N
2 MSHA 30 CFR 75. Field
interchangeable electronic NCM — E2N
rms sensing trip units are NCMH — E2N
2 available from 150 to 2000
amperes with instantaneous
2 pickup settings conforming
Additional Information on Mining Breakers
to the code of Federal
2 Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2.
Electromechanical trip units
Source Description
TD01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data

2
are also available with a
BR01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure
wide range of magnetic
pickup ranges. TC01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves
2 www.eaton.com/mining Mining and Metals

2 Note
1 E2R/E2RM is a new frame physically different than the HPBM. See DS29-170MS.

V4-T2-506 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Eaton’s mining service circuit breakers provide short-circuit The tables below list the conductor size maximum allowable
protection as specified in the code of Federal Regulations circuit breaker instantaneous setting and the E2 breaker that 2
30 CFR 75.601-2. meets that setting.
E2 225/400 A K frame and 400/600 A L frame electronic trip units
2
feature specifically designed instantaneous pickup settings to
conform exactly with the code of Federal Regulations 30 CFR
Trailing Cable Setting Per 30 CFR 75
2
Maximum Maximum
75.601-2. Electromechanical trip units are also available with a
wide range of magnetic pickup ranges. Conductor
Breaker
Instantaneous
Ampere
75 °C Insulated
E2/E2M/E2W
Instantaneous 2
Size Setting Conductor Only Setting
Interrupting Capacity Rating 14 50 15 E2K 150 A A 2
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA) 12 75 20 E2K 150 A B
Circuit Vac (50/60 Hz) Vdc 1 10 150 30 E2K 150 A C
2
Breaker Type 240 480 600 1000Y/577 1200 250
E2F 65 35 18 — — 10
8
6
200
300
50
65
E2K 225 A
E2K 225 A
A
B
2
E2J 65 35 18 — — 10 4 500 85 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A C/A 2
E2K 65 35 25 — — 10 3 600 100 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A D/B
E2LME 100 65 35 — — 42 2 800 115 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A E/C 2
E2L 65 35 25 — — 22 1 1000 130 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A F/D
E2M 65 35 25 — — 22 1/0 1250 150 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A G/E 2
E2N 65 50 25 — — — 2/0 1500 175 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A H/F
E2R 125 65 50 — — — 3/0 2000 200 E2L 400 A G
2
E2FM
E2JM
65
65
25
35
18
18
10
10
—
—
10
22
4/0 2500 230 E2L 400 A H
2
250 2500 255 E2L 400 A H
E2KM 65 35 25 14 — 10 300 2500 285 E2L 400 A H 2
E2LMZ 100 65 35 10 — 42 350 2500 310 E2L 400 A H
E2LM — 35 25 18 — 22 400 2500 335 E2L 400 A H 2
E2MM — 35 25 18 — 22 500 2500 380 E2L 400 A H
E2NM 2 — 50 25 25 — — 2
E2RM — 65 50 25 — —
E2KW — — — 10 10 — Auxiliary Switch Electrical Rating Data 2
E2LW
E2MW
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
12
10
12
—
—
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum Current
Amperes 2
600 50/60 Hz 6.0
125 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load)
2
250 DC 0.25 (non-inductive load)
2
2
Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) Electrical Rating Data
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum Current
Amperes
2
600 50/60 Hz 6.0 2
125 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load)
250 DC 0.25 (non-inductive load) 2
Notes
1 Two poles in series. DC rating applies to breakers with thermal-magnetic trip unit.
2
Breakers with electronic trip units are not DC rated.
2 Series rated for application with Eaton’s E2KM and E2LM breakers. 2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-507

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Catalog Number Selection

2 This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
2 E2 Mining Service Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology

2 E2K E M 3 400 38 2 B20 W

2 Frame Size Terminal
E2K Electronic Trip Optional Features W= No terminals
2 E2L
E2M
E 1 = Electronic trip Magnetic Rating
(If Applicable)
B20 2= High load alarm Blank= Standard terminals

E2N Blank= Standard mag.

2 E2R Voltage Current Ampere
Rating 2= High mag.
Blank= 600 Vac max.
100–2000
2 M= 1000Y/577 Vac max.
Trip Unit Function
M= 310+ Electronic Inst only
2
Number (magnetic only)
of Poles Blank= 310+ Electronic LSI
3 = Three-pole 38= 310+ Electronic ALSI with
2 maintenance mode

2
E2 Mining Service 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
2 K E M 3 400 38 T 2 B20
2
Frame Size Optional Features
2 K Electronic Trip Magnetic Rating B20 1= High load alarm
L E = Electronic trip Trip Unit (If Applicable)
2 M T Blank= Standard mag.
2= High mag.
Voltage Current Ampere

2 M = 600 V and 1000 V

interchangeable
Rating
100–2000
Trip Unit Function
M= 310+ Electronic Inst only
(magnetic only)
2 Number
Blank= 310+ Electronic LSI
38= 310+ Electronic ALSI with
of Poles
2 3 = Three-pole
maintenance mode

2 Notes
1 All N- and R-Frame breakers equipped with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit. No “E” suffix required.

2 2 Not available with instantaneous only.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-508 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
E2 Mining Service Breaker Frame Only 1
2
E2K M 3 400 F
2
Frame Size
E2J Voltage Current Ampere
Frame
Designation
2
Rating
Blank= 600 Vac max.
2
E2K Number F
E2L M= 1000Y/577 Vac max. of Poles 70–800
E2M 3 = Three-pole
2
E2 Mining Service Breaker with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 2
E2K M 3 400 M K W 2
Frame Size Terminal 2
E2F Voltage Magnetic Trip Range W= No terminals
E2J
E2K
Blank= 600 Vac max.
M= 1000Y/577 Vac max.
Number
of Poles
Trip Unit Function Suffix Blank= Standard terminals 2
M= Magnetic only See catalog
E2L
E2M
W 2= 1200 Vac max. 3 = Three-pole Blank= Thermal-magnetic
2
2
Current Ampere
Rating
3–800
2
E2 Mining Service Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
2
E2K 3 400 T M A
2
Frame Size Magnetic Trip Range
Suffix
2
E2J Number Trip Unit Function
E2K
E2L
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Current Ampere
Rating T
Trip Unit M= Magnetic only
Blank= Thermal-magnetic
See catalog
2
E2M 70–800
2
Notes
1 Does not apply to E2LME/LMZ.
2 Only available in K-, L- and M-Frames.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-509

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Undervoltage Release Mechanism Electrical Rating Data

2 Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage

2 Breaker Type Supply Voltage Minimum Maximum Maximum VA

E2F/E2FM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.3
2 120 Vac 1.5
127 Vac 1.7
2 110 Vdc 1.5

2 120 Vdc 1.7

125 Vdc 1.9
2 E2J/E2JM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
2 127 Vac 2.4

2 110 Vdc 1.6

120 Vdc 1.9

2 125 Vdc 2.2

E2K/E2KM/E2KW 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
2 120 Vac 2.1
127 Vac 2.4
2 110 Vdc 1.6

2 120 Vdc 1.9

125 Vdc 2.2
2 E2LME/E2LMZ 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 0.96
120 Vac 1.13
2 127 Vac 1.25

2 110 Vdc 43.8 77 93.5 0.94

120 Vdc 1.12
2 125 Vdc 1.21
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
2 E2MM/E2MW
120 Vac 2.1

2 127 Vac 2.4

110 Vdc 1.6
2 120 Vdc 1.9
125 Vdc 2.2
2 E2N/E2NM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8

2 120 Vac
127 Vac
2.1
2.4

2 110 Vdc 1.6

120 Vdc 1.9
2 125 Vdc 2.2
E2R/E2RM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 3.3
2 120 Vac 3.6

2 127 Vac 3.8

110 Vdc 43.8 77 93.5 3.3
2 120 Vdc 3.6
125 Vdc 3.8
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-510 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data
Operating Voltage Operating Voltage
2
Breaker Type
E2F/E2FM
Supply Voltage
48 Vac
Minimum
33.6
VA
92
Breaker Type
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/
Supply Voltage
48 Vac
Minimum
34
VA
830
2
E2MM/E2MW
60 Vac 140 60 Vac 1280 2
110 Vac 480 110 Vac 60 100
120 Vac 570 120 Vac 120 2
127 Vac 640 127 Vac 140
208 Vac 146 180 48 Vdc 34 710
2
220 Vac 200 60 Vdc 1105 2
230 Vac 240 110 Vdc 77 110
48 Vdc 33.6 100 120 Vdc 130 2
60 Vdc 160 125 Vdc 140
110 Vdc 77 55 E2N/E2NM 110 Vac 60 100
2
120 Vdc 66 120 Vac 120
2
125 Vdc 71 127 Vac 140
E2J/E2JM 110 Vac 60.5 66 110 Vdc 77 110 2
120 Vac 84 120 Vdc 130
127 Vac 102 125 Vdc 140 2
110 Vdc 77 112 E2R/E2RM 110 Vac 60.5 330
2
120 Vdc 138 120 Vac 390
125 Vdc 150 127 Vac 430 2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 110 Vac 60 100 110 Vdc 77 370
120 Vac 120 120 Vdc 440 2
127 Vac
110 Vdc 77
140
110
125 Vdc 480
2
120 Vdc 130 2
125 Vdc 140
24 Vac 41 2
48 Vac 18 139
60 Vac 210
2
E2LME/E2LMZ 110 Vac 60 83
2
120 Vac 92
127 Vac 117 2
24 Vdc 120
48 Vdc 18 475
2
60 Vdc 720
2
110 Vdc 82 99
120 Vdc 120 2
125 Vdc 121
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-511

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Product Selection
2
3 A–150 A
2 E2F/E2FM
2
2 E2F/E2FM Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—Include Line/Load Terminals, Non-Electronic Trip Units 1
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum

2
250 Vdc 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac 10 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole Three-Pole
2 Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number

2 Thermal-Magnetic
15 — — E2F3015 —
2 20 — — E2F3020 E2FM3020
25 — — E2F3025 E2FM3025
2 30 — — E2F3030 —

2 35 — — E2F3035 —
40 — — E2F3040 E2FM3040

2 45 — — E2F3045 —
50 — — E2F3050 E2FM3050
2 60 — — E2F3060 E2FM3060
70 — —
2
E2F3070 E2FM3070
80 — — E2F3080 E2FM3080

2 90 — — E2F3090 E2FM3090
100 — — E2F3100 E2FM3100
2 125 — — E2F3125 E2FM3125
150 — — E2F3150 E2FM3150
2 Magnetic Only

2 3
7
9–30
21–70
—
—
E2F003AM
E2F007CM
—
—

2 15 45–150 — E2F015EM —
30 90–300 — E2F030HM —
2 50–150 — E2F030EM —
50 150–500 — E2F050KM E2FM050KM
2 66–190 — E2F050YM E2FM050YM

2 70 210–700 — E2F070MM E2FM070MM

100 150–500 — E2F100KM E2FM100KM

2 300–1000 — E2F100RM E2FM100RM

150 450–1500 — E2F150TM E2FM150TM
2 750–2500 — E2F150UM E2FM150UM

2 Note
1 For two-pole application, use outer poles.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-512 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
70 A–250 A
2
E2J/E2JM
2
E2J/E2JM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units 2
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
10 kA at 1000 Vac
2
Three-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2
Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Thermal-Magnetic 2
70 300–650
90 450–900
E2J3070T
E2J3090T
E2J3070W
E2J3090W
E2JM3070W
E2JM3090W
2
100 500–1000 E2J3100T E2J3100W E2JM3100W
2
125 625–1250 E2J3125T E2J3125W E2JM3125W
150 750–1500 E2J3150T E2J3150W E2JM3150W 2
175 875–1750 E2J3175T E2J3175W E2JM3175W
200 1000–2000 E2J3200T E2J3200W E2JM3200W 2
225 300–650
500–1000
E2J3225TA
E2J3225TD
E2J3225AW
E2J3225DW
E2JM3225AW
E2JM3225DW
2
1125–2250 E2J3225T E2J3225W E2JM3225W 2
250 1250–2500 E2J3250T E2J3250W E2JM3250W
Magnetic Only 2
250 300–650
2
E2J3250TMA E2J3250MAW E2JM3250MAW
450–900 E2J3250TMC E2J3250MCW E2JM250MCW
500–1000 E2J3250TMD E2J3250MDW E2JM3250MDW
2
625–1250 E2J3250TMF E2J3250MFW E2JM3250MFW
750–1500 E2J3250TMG E2J3250MGW E2JM3250MGW 2
875–1750 E2J3250TMJ E2J3250MJW E2JM3250MJW
1000–2000 E2J3250TMK E2J3250MKW E2JM3250MKW 2
1125–2250
2
E2J3250TML E2J3250MLW E2JM3250MLW
1250–2500 E2J3250TM E2J3250MW E2JM3250MW

Notes 2
1 Frame only: E2J3250F.
2 Frame only: E2JM3250F.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-513

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

100 A–400 A
2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
2
2 E2K/E2KM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 1200 Vac Maximum
2 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac 10 kA at 1200 Vac
Three-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2 Three-Pole 34
2 Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker Complete Breaker
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 Thermal-Magnetic

2 100
125
500–1000
625–1250
E2K3100T
E2K3125T
E2K3100W
E2K3125W
E2KM3100W
E2KM3125W
E2KW3100W
E2KW3125W

2 150 750–1500 E2K3150T E2K3150W E2KM3150W E2KW3150W

175 875–1750 E2K3175T E2K3175W E2KM3175W E2KW3175W
2 200 1000–2000 E2K3200T E2K3200W E2KM3200W E2KW3200W
225 300–650 E2K3225TA E2K3225AW E2KM3225AW E2KW3225AW
2 500–1000 E2K3225TD E2K3225DW E2KM3225DW E2KW3225DW

2 250
1125–2250
1250–2500
E2K3225T
E2K3250T
E2K3225W
E2K3250W
E2KM3225W
E2KM3250W
E2KW3225W
E2KW3250W

2 300 1500–3000 E2K3300T E2K3300W E2KM3300W E2KW3300W

320 1600–3200 — — — E2KW3320W
2 350 1750–3500 E2K3350T E2K3350W E2KM3350W E2KW3350W
400 2000–4000
2
E2K3400T E2K3400W E2KM3400W —
Magnetic Only

2 400 300–650 E2K3400TMA E2K3400MAW E2KM3250MAW E2KW3250MAW

500–1000 E2K3400TMD E2K3400MDW E2KM3400MDW E2KW3350MDW
2 625–1250 E2K3400TMF E2K3400MFW E2KM3400MFW E2KW3350MFW
750–1500 E2K3400TMG E2K3400MGW E2KM3400MGW E2KW3350MGW
2 875–1750 E2K3400TMJ E2K3400MJW E2KM3400MJW E2KW3350MJW
1000–2000
2 1125–2250
E2K3400TMK
E2K3400TML
E2K3400MKW
E2K3400MLW
E2KM3400MKW
E2KM3400MLW
E2KW3350MKW
E2KW3350MLW

2 1250–2500 E2K3400TMW E2K3400MWW E2KM3400MWW E2KW3350MWW

1500–3000 E2K3400TMN E2K3400MNW E2KM3400MNW E2KW3350MNW
2 1600–3200 — — — E2KW3350MVW
1750–3500 E2K3400TMR E2K3400MRW E2KM3400MRW E2KW3350MRW
2 2000–4000 E2K3400TM E2K3400MW E2KM3400MW —

2 Notes
1 Frame only: E2K3400F.

2
2 Frame only: E2KM3400F.
3 1200 V breakers are sold as “complete breakers” only.
4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.

2 Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-514 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
100 A–400 A
2
E2KE/E2KEM
2
E2KM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units 2
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac
2
Three-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2
Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only 2
150 50–800
225 200–1500
KEM3150TM
KEM3225TM
E2KE3150MW
E2KE3225MW
E2KEM3150MW
E2KEM3225MW
2
500–2500 KEM3225TM2 E2KE3225M2W E2KEM3225M2W
2
400 200–1500 KEM3400TM E2KE3400MW E2KEM3400MW
500–2500 KEM3400TM2 E2KE3400M2W E2KEM3400M2W 2
310+ Electronic LSI 3
100 50–800 KEM3100T E2KE3100W E2KEM3100W 2
125 50–800 KEM3125T E2KE3125W E2KEM3125W
150 50–800 KEM3150T E2KE3150W E2KEM3150W 2
200 200–1500
225 200–1500
KEM3200T
KEM3225T
E2KE3200W
E2KE3225W
E2KEM3200W
E2KEM3225
2
500–2500 KEM3225T2 E2KE32252W E2KEM32252W
2
400 200–1500 KEM3400T E2KE3400W E2KEM3400W
500–2500 KEM3400T2 E2KE34002W E2KEM34002W 2
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
100 50–800 KEM310038T E2KE310038W E2KEM310038W 2
125 50–800 KEM312538T E2KE312538W E2KEM312538W
150 50–800 KEM315038T E2KE315038W E2KEM315038W 2
200
225
200–1500
200–1500
KEM320038T
KEM322538T
E2KE320038W
E2KE322538W
E2KEM320038W
E2KEM322538
2
500–2500 KEM322538T2 E2KE3225238W E2KEM3225238W
2
400 200–1500 KEM340038T E2KE340038W E2KEM340038W
500–2500 KEM340038T2 E2KE3400238W E2KEM3400238W 2
2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2K3400F.
2 Frame only: E2KM3400F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2KE340038B20W, KEM3400TB20.
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-515

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

160 A–400 A
2
E2LME/E2LMZ (Series G)
2
2 Circuit Breakers
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
2 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2
2 Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 Magnetic Only

2 400
Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit
3600–4400 LT3400KM E2LME3400KMW E2LMZ3400KMW

2 160 320–1920 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W

200 400–2400 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
2 225 450–2700 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
250 500–3000 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
2 300 600–3600 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W

2 315
350
630–3780
700–4200
LT340031M
LT340031M
E2LME340031W
E2LME340031W
E2LMZ340031W
E2LMZ340031W

2 400 800–4800 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W

Notes
2 1 Frame only: E2LME3400NN.
2 Frame only: E2LMZ3400NN.

2 Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-516 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
300 A–600 A
2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
2
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units 2
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 1200 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac 10 kA at 1200 Vac
2
Three-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2 Three-Pole 3
Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker Complete Breaker 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Thermal-Magnetic 2
300 1500–3000
320 2250–4500
E2L3300T
—
E2L3300W
—
E2LM3300W
—
E2LW3300W
E2LW3320W
2
350 1600–3200 E2L3350T E2L3350W E2LM3350W E2LW3350W
2
400 1750–3500 E2L3400T E2L3400W E2LM3400W E2LW3400W
450 2000–4000 E2L3450T E2L3450W E2LM3450W E2LW3450W 2
500 2500–5000 E2L3500T E2L3500W E2LM3500W —
600 3000–6000 E2L3600T E2L3600W E2LM3600W — 2
1125–2250
2
E2L3600TL 4 — — —
Magnetic Only
450 1600–3200 — — — E2LW3450MVW 2
1125–2250 — — — E2LW3450MLW
1500–3000 — — — E2LW3450MNW 2
1750–3500
2
— — — E2LW3450MRW
2000–4000 — — — E2LW3450MXW
2250–4500 — — — E2LW3450MYW
2
600 1125–2250 E2L3600TML E2L3600MLW E2LM3600MLW —
1500–3000 E2L3600TMN E2L3600MNW E2LM3600MNW — 2
1750–3500 E2L3600TMR E2L3600MRW E2LM3600MRW —
2000–4000 E2L3600TMX E2L3600MXW E2LM3600MXW — 2
2250–4500
2
E2L3600TMY E2L3600MYW E2LM3600MYW —
2500–5000 E2L3600TMP E2L3600MPW E2LM3600MPW —
3000–6000 E2L3600TM E2L3600MW E2LM3600MW —
2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2L3600F.
2 Frame only: E2LM3600F.
2
3 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.
4 600 A thermal 1125–2250 T.A.
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-517

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

300 A–600 A
2
E2LE/E2LEM
2
2 E2LM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
2 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2
2 Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only

2 400 500–2500
1000–4000
LEM3400TM
LEM3400TM2
E2LE3400MW
E2LE3400M2W
E2LEM3400MW
E2LEM3400M2W

2 600 500–2500 LEM3600TM E2LE3600MW E2LEM3600MW

2500–5000 LEM3600TM2 E2LE3600M2W E2LEM3600M2W
2 310+ Electronic LSI 3
300 500–2500 LEM3300T E2LE3300W E2LEM3300W
2 350 500–2500 LEM3350T E2LE3350W E2LEM3350W

2 400 500–2500
1000–4000
LEM3400T
LEM3400T2
E2LE3400W
E2LE34002W
E2LEM3400W
E2LEM34002W

2 600 500–2500 LEM3600T E2LE3600W E2LEM3600W

2500–5000 LEM3600T2 E2LE36002W E2LEM36002W
2 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
300 500–2500
2
LEM330038T E2LE330038W E2LEM330038W
350 500–2500 LEM335038T E2LE335038W E2LEM335038W

2 400 500–2500 LEM340038T E2LE340038W E2LEM340038W

1000–4000 LEM340038T2 E2LE3400238W E2LEM3400238W
2 600 500–2500 LEM360038T E2LE360038W E2LEM360038W
2500–5000 LEM360038T2 E2LE3600238W E2LEM3600238W
2 Notes

2
1 Frame only: E2L3600F.
2 Frame only: E2LM3600F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2LE360038B20W, LEM3600TB20.

2 Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-518 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
300 A— 800 A
2
E2M/E2MM/E2MW
2
E2M/E2MM/E2MW Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units 2
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum 1200 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac 12 kA at 1200 Vac
2
Three-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2 Three-Pole 34
Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker Complete Breaker 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Thermal-Magnetic 2
400 1000–2000
500 1250–2500
—
—
—
—
—
—
E2MW3400W
E2MW3500W
2
600 1500–3000 E2M3600TN E2M3600W E2MM3600W E2MW3600W
2
630 1600–3200 — — — E2MW3630W
800 2000–4000 E2M3800TX E2M3800W E2MM3800W E2MW3800W 2
Magnetic Only
800 1500–3000 E2M3800TMN E2M3800MNW E2MM3800MNW E2MW3800MNW 2
1600–3200
2000–4000
—
E2M3800TMX
—
E2M3800MXW
—
E2MM3800MXW
E2MW3800MVW
E2MW3800MXW
2
2500–5000 E2M3800TMP E2M3800MPW E2MM3800MPW — 2
3000–6000 E2M3800TMW E2M3800MWW E2MM3800MWW —

Notes
2
1 Frame only: E2M3800F.
2 Frame only: E2MM3800F. 2
3 1200 V breakers are sold as “complete breakers” only.
4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-519

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

800 A
2
E2ME/E2MEM
2
2 E2MN Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
2 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 1 Three-Pole 2
2 Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only

2 800 500–2500
1000–4000
MEM3800TM
MEM3800TM2
E2ME3800MW
E2ME3800M2W
E2MEM3800MW
E2MEM3800M2W

2 310+ Electronic LSI 3

800 500–2500 MEM3800T E2ME3800W E2MEM3800W
2 1000–4000 MEM3800T2 E2ME38002W E2MEM38002W
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
2 800 500–2500 MEM380038T E2ME380038W E2MEM380038W

2 1000–4000 MEM380038T2 E2ME3800382W E2MEM3800382W

Notes
2 1 Frame only: E2M3800F.
2 Frame only: E2MM3800F.

2
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2ME380038B20W, MEM3800TB20.

Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-520 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
400 A–1200 A
2
E2N/E2NM
2
E2NM Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units 2
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
2
Three-Pole Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker 2
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only 2
800 500–2500
1200 1250–5000
—
—
E2N3800MW
E2N312MW
E2NM3800MW
E2NM312MW
2
310+ Electronic LSI 1
2
400 500–2500 — E2N3400W E2NM3400W
500 500–2500 — E2N3500W E2N3M500W 2
600 500–2500 — E2N3600W E2NM3600W
700 500–2500 — E2N3700W E2NM3700W 2
800
900
500–2500
1250–5000
—
—
E2N3800W
E2N3900W
E2NM3800W
E2NM3900W
2
1000 1250–5000 — E2N310W E2NM310W 2
1200 1250–5000 — E2N312W E2NM312W
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 1 2
400 500–2500
2
— E2N340038W E2NM340038W
500 500–2500 — E2N350038W E2NM350038W
600 500–2500 — E2N360038W E2NM360038W
2
700 500–2500 — E2N370038W E2NM370038W
800 500–2500 — E2N380038W E2NM380038W 2
900 1250–5000 — E2N390038W E2NM390038W
1000 1250–5000 — E2N31038W E2NM31038W 2
1200 1250–5000
2
— E2N31238W E2NM31238W

Notes
1 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2N380038B20W.
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-521

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

1600 A–2000 A
2
E2R/E2RM
2
2 E2RM Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units
600 Vac Maximum 1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
2 250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac

2
Three-Pole Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous Magnetic Trip Unit Only Complete Breaker Complete Breaker
Ampere Rating at 40 °C Trip Range Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 310+ Electronic LSI 1

2 1600
2000
2–8 x In
2–8 x In
—
—
E2R316W
E2R320W
E2RM316W
E2RM320W

2 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 1

1600 2–8 x In — E2R31638W E2RM31638W
2 2000 2–8 x In — E2R32038W E2RM32038W

2 Notes
1 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2R1638B20W.

2 Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-522 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Accessories
2
Line and Load Terminals
Breaker Maximum Wire AWG Wire Range Catalog
2
Type Breaker Amperes Type (No. Conductors) Number
E2F/E2FM 100 Cu/AI #14–1/0 (1) 3T100FB (package of three)
2
150 Cu #4–4/0 (1) 3T150FB (package of three)
2
E2J/E2JM 250 Cu #4–350 (1) T250KB
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 225 Cu #3–350 (1) T300K 2
350 Cu 250–500 (1) T350K
400 Cu 2/0–250 (2) 3T400K (three-pole kit) 2
E2LME/E2LMZ
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
400
400
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
500–750 (1)
4/0–600 (1)
3TA631LK
3TA401LDK (three-pole kit)
2
600 Cu 250–350 (2) T602LD 2
E2M/E2MM/E2MW 600 Cu (2) 2/0–500 kcmil T600MA1
600 Cu/AI (2) 1–500 kcmil TA700MA1 2
800 std. Cu/AI (3) 3/0–400 kcmil TA800MA2
800 Cu/AI (2) 500–750 kcmil TA801MA
2
800 Cu (3) 3/0–300 kcmil T800MA1
2
E2N/E2NM 700 Cu 2/0–500 (2) T700NB1
1000 Cu 3/0–500 (3) T1000NB1 2
1200 Cu 3/0–400 (4) T1200NB3
1600 Cu/AI 500–1000 (4) TA1600RD 2
2000 Cu/AI 2–600 (6)
2
TA2000RD

End Cap Terminals—For Use with Ring Type Terminals 2

Breaker Maximum Catalog
Metric
Catalog 2
Type Breaker Amperes Number Number Imperial
E2F/E2FM 150 KPEK1 KPEMK1 — 2
E2J/E2JM 250
2
KPEK2 KPEMK2 —
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 400 KPEK3 KPEMK3 —
E2LME/E2LMZ 400 — L3RTWK —
2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW 600 KPEK4 KPEMK4 —

External Accessories
2
Padlockable Handle 2
Lock Hasp
Catalog 2
Breaker Type Number
E2F/E2FM PLK1 2
E2J/E2JM PLK3
E2K/E2KM/E2KW PLK3 2
E2LME/E2LMZ
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
LPHL
HLK4
2
E2M/E2MM/E2MW HLK4 2
E2N/E2NM PLK5
E2R/E2RM HLK6 2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-523

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Internal Accessories
2
Undervoltage Release 1
2 Breaker UVR Voltage Mounting Catalog Factory
Type Type Rating Location Number Modification Code
2 E2F/E2FM Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH1LP11K (thermal/magnetic only) 2 U18

2 Handle reset 110–127 Vdc Left pole UVH1LP26K (thermal/magnetic only) 2 U42
E2J/E2JM Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH2LP08K 2 U18

2 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH2LP11K 2 U22

Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH2LP26K 2 T14
2 E2K/E2KM/E2KW 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08K 23 U66
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole U68
2
UVM3LP08KT 24

Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH3LP08K 2 U18

2 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH3LP11K 2 U22

Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH3LP26K 2 T14
2 E2LME/E2LMZ Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVR120APK U5
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVR125DPK U6
2 E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/E2MM/ 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08K 23 U66
E2MW
2 120 volt handle reset with LED
Handle reset
120 Vac
110–127 Vac
Left pole
Left pole
UVM4LP08KT 24
UVH4LP08K 2
U68
U18

2 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH4LP11K 2 U22

Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH4LP26K 2 T14
2 E2N/E2NM 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM5LP08K 3 U66
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM5LT08K 4 U68
2 Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH5LP08K 2 U18

2 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH5LP11K 2 U22

Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH5LP26K 2 T14

2 E2R/E2RM 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Right pole UVM6RP08K 35 U58
Handle reset 110–127 Vac Right pole UVH6RP08K 5 U49
2 Handle reset 208–240 Vac Right pole UVH6RP11K 5 U53
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Right pole T33
2
UVH6RP26K 5

Notes

2 1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed.

2 LH (RH also available).
3 Pigtail leads.

2 4 Terminal blocks.
5 RH only.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-524 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Shunt Trip 1 Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch)
Factory Number of Sets
2
Breaker Voltage Mounting Catalog Modification of Contacts Factory
Type Rating Location Number Code Breaker
Type
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
Catalog
Number
Modification
Code
2
E2F/E2FM 48–127 Vac or Left pole SNT1LP08K 2 S06
48–60 Vdc E2F/E2FM 1 Right A1L1LPK/A1L1RPK B06 2
208–230 Vac or Left pole SNT1LP12K 2 S10 2 Right A2L1LPK/A2L1RPK B13
110–127 Vdc
E2J/E2JM 1 Right A1L2LPK/A1L2RPK B06 2
E2J/E2JM 110–240 Vac or Left pole SNT2P11K 3 S10
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 1 Right A1L3LPK/A1L3RPK B06
110–125 Vdc
2 Right A2L3LPK/A2L3RPK B13
2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 110–240 Vac or Left pole SNT3P11K 3 S10
110–125 Vdc E2LME/E2LMZ 1 Right ALM1M1BJPK B1
2
E2LME/E2LMZ 24 Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT024CPK S6 2 Right ALM2M2BJPK B3
48–60 Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT4860CPK S7 E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 1 Right A1L4LPK/A1L4RPK B06 2
E2MM/E2MW
110–240 Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT120CPK S2 2 Right A2L4LPK/A2L4RPK B13
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 48–60 Vac Left pole SNT4LP05K 2 S06 E2N/E2NM 1 Right A1L5LPK/A1L5RPK B06 2
E2MM/E2MW
48–60 Vdc Left pole S86 2 Right A2L5LPK/A2L5RPK B13
2
SNT4LP23K 2
110–240 Vac Left pole SNT4LP11K 2 S10 E2R/E2RM 1 Right A1L6RPK B05
110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT4LP26K 2 S42 2 Right A2L6RPK B12 2
E2N/E2NM 110–240 Vac Left pole SNT5LP11K 2 S10
Notes
110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT5LP26K 2 S42 1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed. 2
2 LH (RH also available).
E2R/E2RM 110–240 Vac Right pole SNT6P11K 4 S29
110–125 Vdc Right pole SNT6P26K 4 S45
3 LH or RH.
4 RH only.
2
2
Auxiliary Switch
Number of Sets Factory
2
Breaker of Contacts Mounting Catalog Modification
Type (1A and 1B) Location Number Code 2
E2F/E2FM 1 Right A1X1PK A06
2 Right A2X1RPK A13
2
E2J/E2JM 1 Right A1X2PK A06
2
2 Right A2X2PK A13
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 1 Right A1X3PK A06 2
2 Right A2X3PK A13
E2LME/E2LMZ 1 Right AUX1A1BPK A1 2
2 Right A2
2
AUX2A2BPK
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 1 Right A1X4PK A06
E2MM/E2MW
2 Right A2X4PK A13
2
E2N/E2NM 1 Right A1X5PK A06
2 Right A2X5PK A13 2
E2R/E2RM 2 Right A2X6RPK A12
4 Right A4X6RPK A19 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-525

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Dimensions
2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.

3 A–150 A 70 A–250 A
2
E2F/E2FM E2J/E2JM
2 Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—
Include Line/Load Terminals Non-Electronic Trip Units
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic
Trip Units
2 A C A C

2
2 On
Off
2 B

2 B
ON/

2
2
OFF/
D
2 Front View Side View

2 Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 A 4.13 (104.9)
B 6.00 (152.4)

2 C 3.38 (85.9)
D
D 3.50 (88.9)
2 Front View Side View

2 Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)

A 4.13 (104.9)
2 B 10.00 (254.0)
C 4.06 (103.1)
2 D 4.31 (109.5)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-526 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
100 A–400 A 100 A–400 A 2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic
E2KE/E2KEM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic
2
Trip Units Trip Units
2
A C A C
2
2
2
2
B B
ON ON
2
2
2
OFF OFF

2
2
2
Front View
D
Side View Front View
D
Side View
2

Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
A 5.49 (139.4) A 5.49 (139.4) 2
B 10.13 (257.3) B 10.13 (257.3)
C 4.06 (103.1) C 4.06 (103.1) 2
D 4.31 (109.5) D 4.31 (109.5)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-527

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2 160 A–400 A 300 A–600 A

2 E2LME/E2LMZ
Circuit Breakers
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
2 A C A C

2
2
2
On/I On/I On/I On/I

2 B B

2 Off/O Off/O Off/O Off/O

2 Trip Unit May Be Trip Unit May Be

Either Thermal/Magnetic Either Thermal/Magnetic
2 or Electronic or Electronic

2
D D
2 Front View Side View Front View Side View

2 Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2 A 5.48 (139.2) A 8.25 (209.6)

B 10.13 (257.3) B 10.75 (273.1)
2 C 4.00 (101.6) C 4.06 (103.1)
D 4.22 (107.1) D 4.38 (111.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-528 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
300 A–600 A 300 A–800 A
E2LE/E2LEM E2M/E2MM/E2MW 2
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic

A C
Trip Units 2
A C
2
2
2
On/I On/I
2
B

Off/O Off/O
2

On/I On/I
2
Trip Unit May Be
Either Thermal/Magnetic
or Electronic
B 2
Off/O Off/O 2
Front View
D
Side View
2
2
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 8.25 (209.6) 2
B 10.75 (273.1)
C 4.06 (103.1)
2
D 4.38 (111.3)
D
2
Front View Side View
2
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
A 8.25 (209.6)
B 16.00 (406.4) 2
C
D
4.06 (103.1)
4.38 (111.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-529

 2.5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
800 A 400 A–1200 A
2 E2ME/E2MEM E2N/E2NM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
2
A C A C

2
2
2
2
B
2
2 On/I On/I
ON/I

B
2
2
Off/O Off/O
OFF/O

2
2
2
2 Front View
D
Side View

2 D
Front View Side View
2
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 A 8.25 (209.6) A 8.25 (209.6)

2 B
C
16.00 (406.4)
4.06 (103.1)
B
C
16.00 (406.4)
5.50 (139.7)

2 D 4.38 (111.3) D 6.00 (152.4)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-530 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.5
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
1600 A–2000 A
E2R/ E2RM 2
Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units

A C
2
2
2
2
2
B

2
2
2
2
D
Front View Side View 2
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
A
B
15.50 (393.7)
16.00 (406.4)
2
C 9.00 (228.6) 2
D 10.00 (254.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-531

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Contents
2 Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-533
2 Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . .
V4-T2-538
V4-T2-540
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
V4-T2-541

High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-546

2 Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-552
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-553
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-556
2
2
2
2
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G
2 Product Overview
Handle mechanisms are used Through-the-Door Handle mechanisms are used
2 to operate molded case ● High-Performance Rotary on enclosed circuit breakers,
circuit breakers, molded case ● Universal Rotary control panels and motor
2 switches and motor circuit
protectors. They are available
control centers in many
different applications. Eaton
Direct (Close-Coupled)
2 in three basic configurations—
Flange Mounted, Through-
● Universal Direct
has a handle mechanism for
virtually any need.
the-Door and Direct (Close-
2 Coupled)—providing safe,
Flange Mounted
● Flex Shaft™
dependable operation and
2 ease of installation.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-532 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532 2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-534 2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-537
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-538 2
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-540
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
V4-T2-541
2
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. V4-T2-546
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-552
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-553 2
Handle Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-556
2
2
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms 2
Product Description Features 2
The high-performance rotary In addition to its robust ● NEMA Type 1/3R/12 (IP54) ● Same handle can be used
handle mechanism uses a design features, the handle and NEMA Type 4/4X on multiple frame sizes, 2
simple, yet robust design mechanism has stand-off (IP65) ratings reducing the number of
to make installation and
operation easy. The external
support that allows for easy
operation with a gloved hand.
● Black/Blue or Red/Yellow parts needed
2
external handle colors ● Red and yellow handles to
handle’s key functional
components are all metallic,
With a shallow profile, the
handle can easily be used in
● Three shaft lengths—6, 12
and 24 inches, which can
designate emergency
disconnecting means
2
ensuring reliability. The metal- applications where an internal be cut to size to match All handle mechanisms can
2
●
on-metal interface between or double door is required. enclosure depth accept padlocks or multi-
the handle and shaft prevents hasp locks for added
The high-performance Conveniently packaged as
2
●
contaminant buildup that flexibility
could impede operation, external handle can accept kit containing handle, shaft
padlocks or multi-hasp locks. and mechanism ● Fast, easy installation
while UV and chemical agent
resistant materials protect The door is interlocked when ● Replacement parts are (see video on website for 2
the handle from heat and padlocked and cannot be available separately step-by-step instructions)
fading in direct sunlight, as bypassed. ● Metallic functional Standards and Certifications
2
well as chemicals that may components ensure
be introduced in harsh reliability
The mechanisms for EG, JG
and LG breakers have an
2
environments. ● Metal-on-metal interface internal handle that can be
between handle and shaft operated independent of 2
● UV and chemical agent- door position, and locked-out
resistant materials protect to meet one of the key NFPA 2
the handle requirements (NFPA® 79)
● Shallow profile and UL 508A disconnect
requirements.
2
● Compatible with both
Series C and Series G
molded case circuit
● NEMA 1/3R/12, IP54 2
● NEMA 4/4X, IP65
breakers and molded case
switch platforms 2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-533

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Product Selection
2
Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames
2
2 Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—EG-, JG- and LG-Frame
Rating Type EG-Frame JG-Frame LG-Frame
2 Catalog Catalog Catalog
Description NEMA IP Number Number Number
2 S01 Blue Handle S01 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06B0 / 68C6040G25 JGHMVD06B0 / 68C6041G13 —
6-inch shaft
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6040G28 JGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6041G16 —
2 S01 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12B0 / 68C6040G26 JGHMVD12B0 / 68C6041G14 —
12-inch shaft
2 S01 blue handle,
4/4X
1/3R/12
65
54
EGHMVD12BX0 / 68C6040G29
EGHMVD24B0 / 68C6040G27
JGHMVD12BX0 / 68C6041G17
JGHMVD24B0 / 68C6041G15
—
—
24-inch shaft 1
2 4/4X 65 EGHMVD24BX0 / 68C6040G30 JGHMVD24BX0 / 68C6041G18 —
S01 Red Handle S01 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06R0 / 68C6040G31 JGHMVD06R0 / 68C6041G19 —
2 6-inch shaft
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6040G34 JGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6041G22 —
S01 red handle, 1/3R/12 54
2
EGHMVD12R0 / 68C6040G32 JGHMVD12R0 / 68C6041G20 —
12-inch shaft
4/4X 65 EGHMVD12RX0 / 68C6040G35 JGHMVD12RX0 / 68C6041G23 —

2 S01 red handle,

24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD24R0 / 68C6040G33 JGHMVD24R0 / 68C6041G21 —
4/4X 65 EGHMVD24RX0 / 68C6040G36 JGHMVD24RX0 / 68C6041G24 —
2 S2 Blue Handle S2 blue handle,
6-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06B / 68C6040G13 JGHMVD06B / 68C6041G01 LGHMVD06B / 68C6042G01
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06BX / 68C6040G16 JGHMVD06BX / 68C6041G04 LGHMVD06BX / 68C6042G04
2 S2 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12B / 68C6040G14 JGHMVD12B / 68C6041G02 LGHMVD12B / 68C6042G02
12-inch shaft
4/4X 65
2 S2 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54
EGHMVD12BX / 68C6040G17
EGHMVD24B / 68C6040G15
JGHMVD12BX / 68C6041G05
JGHMVD24B / 68C6041G03
LGHMVD12BX / 68C6042G05
LGHMVD24B / 68C6042G03
24-inch shaft 1
2 4/4X 65 EGHMVD24BX / 68C6040G18 JGHMVD24BX / 68C6041G06 LGHMVD24BX / 68C6042G06
S2 Red Handle S2 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06R / 68C6040G19 JGHMVD06R / 68C6041G07 LGHMVD06R / 68C6042G07
2 6-inch shaft
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06RX / 68C6040G22 JGHMVD06RX / 68C6041G10 LGHMVD06RX / 68C6042G10
S2 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12R / 68C6040G20 JGHMVD12R / 68C6041G08 LGHMVD12R / 68C6042G08
2 12-inch shaft
4/4X 65 EGHMVD12RX / 68C6040G23 JGHMVD12RX / 68C6041G11 LGHMVD12RX / 68C6042G11

2 S2 red handle,
24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12
4/4X
54
65
EGHMVD24R / 68C6040G21
EGHMVD24RX / 68C6040G24
JGHMVD24R / 68C6041G09
JGHMVD24RX / 68C6041G12
LGHMVD24R / 68C6042G09
LGHMVD24RX / 68C6042G12

2 Notes
1 24-inch handle comes with support bracket.

2 Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-534 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames
2
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—NG- and RG-Frame
Rating Type NG-Frame RG-Frame
2
Description NEMA IP
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
S3 Blue Handle S3 blue handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12
4/4X
54
65
NGHMVD08B / 68C6043G01
NGHMVD08BX / 68C6043G03
—
—
2
2
2
S3 Red Handle S3 red handle, 1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08R / 68C6043G02 — 2
10-inch shaft
4/4X 65
2
NGHMVD08RX / 68C6043G04 —

2
S4 Blue Handle S4 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08BT / 68C6043G05 RGHMVD08B / 68C6044G01 2
10-inch shaft
4/4X 65 NGHMVD08BTX / 68C6043G07 RGHMVD08BX / 68C6044G03
2
2
2
S4 Red Handle S4 red handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08RT / 68C6043G06 RGHMVD08R / 68C6044G02 2
4/4X 65 NGHMVD08RTX / 68C6043G08 RGHMVD08RX / 68C6044G04
2
2
2
Note
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-535

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Separate Components for Series G Frames

2
Series G Components—Shafts and Mechanisms
2 Shaft Shaft Length Mechanism

2
Frame Width 6-Inch 10-Inch 12-Inch 24-Inch 1 Only
EG 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 66A6010G97 1498D66G17

2 JG 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 66A6010G98 69D6025G17

LG 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 66A6010G99 69D6051G30
2 NG 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — — 69D9101G30
RG 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — — 69D9101G31
2
2 Series G Components—Handles Only

2
Rating Type Handles Only
S01 S01 S2 S2 S3 S3 S4 S4
Frame NEMA IP Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow Blue/Black Red/Yellow
2 EG 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —

2 JG
4/4X
1/3R/12
65
54
68C6048G43
68C6048G41
68C6048G44
68C6048G42
68C6048G03
68C6048G01
68C6048G04
68C6048G02
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

2 4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —

LG 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 — —
2 4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 — —
NG 1/3R/12 54
2
— — — — 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 68C6048G09 68C6048G10
4/4X 65 — — — — 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 68C6048G11 68C6048G12

2 RG 1/3R/12 54 — — — — — — 68C6048G09 68C6048G10

4/4X 65 — — — — — — 68C6048G11 68C6048G12

2
2 Series G Components—Optional Caps
As an alternative to blue or red, a black, replaceable cap is available.
2 Catalog Number
S01 66A6032H01 Black handle cap HPHC0DGX
2 S2 66A6032H02 Black handle cap HPHC2DGX

2 S3 66A6032H03 Black handle cap HPHC3DGX

2 Series G Replacement Hardware

2 This kit provides replacement parts for
Series G high performance handle only.

2 Catalog Number
High-performance handle 66A6029G01
2 replacement parts kit

Notes
2 1 24-inch handle comes with support bracket.

Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-536 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches) 2
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Front Operation
2
Handle Type Direction of Operation Door Drilling
2
Type S01

2
2
2
2
2
Type S2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S4 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-537

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Contents
2 Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-533
2 Universal Rotary
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-539
2 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . .
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-540
V4-T2-541
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-546
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550
2 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-552
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-553
2 Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-556

2
2
2
2 Universal Rotary
2 Product Description Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s Universal Rotary is The Universal Rotary Universal Rotary is UL listed
2 suitable for use with Type 1 mechanisms for EG-, JG- and and meets CSA requirements.
or 12 enclosure types. All LG-Frame MCCBs can be Universal Rotary also meets
2 rotary handle mechanisms
include a handle “lock off” to
operated by hand with the
door open or “locked off” to
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
for international compliance.
2 prevent turning the breaker
ON while in the OFF position,
prevent operation with the
door open.
Rotary UL File Number is
E64983.
and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/
2 Reset positions. The
Universal Rotary has the
2 added feature of international
markings for ON (I) and OFF
2 (O). The Universal Rotary is
made of molded material.

2
2 Features

2 Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism

2
NEMA Enclosure Type International Available Shaft
Number Handle Handle Indication: Markings Handle Handle Handle Lengths
Rotary of Poles 1 3R 12 4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2 ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O) Material Colors Rotation (Inches)
2 Series C rotary — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 12, 16, 24
Universal rotary — ■ — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 12, 24
2 Notes

2
1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-538 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Product Selection
2
Universal Rotary Universal Rotary Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms 2
Handle
Color
UL
Rating
Shaft Length
in Inches (mm)
Complete
Catalog Number 1 2
EG-Frame
Black 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) EHMVD06B
2
12.00 (304.8) EHMVD12B 2
24.00 (609.6) EHMVD24B
Red 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) EHMVD06R 2
12.00 (304.8) EHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6) EHMVD24R
2
JG-Frame
Black 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) FJHMVD06B
2
12.00 (304.8) FJHMVD12B 2
24.00 (609.6) FJHMVD24B
Red 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) FJHMVD06R 2
12.00 (304.8)
2
FJHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6) FJHMVD24R
LG-Frame
2
Black 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) KLHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) KLHMVD12B 2
24.00 (609.6) KLHMVD24B
Red 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) KLHMVD06R 2
12.00 (304.8)
24.00 (609.6)
KLHMVD12R
KLHMVD24R
2
NG-Frame 2
Black 1 6.00 (152.4) HMVD5B
2
Series G Rotary Series G Rotary Ordering Information 2
Separate Catalog Number Catalog Number
2
Shaft Complete
Length Catalog Standard Breaker
Inches (mm) Number 2 Handle 3 Mechanism 4 Shaft 5 IEC IP65 67 IEC IP66 67
N-Frame (ND and NG) 2
6.00 (152.4) HM5R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G08 WHM5R06 WHM5R06X
12.00 (304.8) HM5R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G05 WHM5R12 WHM5R12X 2
16.00 (406.4)
24.00 (609.6)
HM5R16
HM5R24
6648C22G21
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
6648C23G08
4217B37G06
4217B37G07
WHM5R16
WHM5R24
WHM5R16X
WHM5R24X
2
Notes 2
1 Complete catalog number includes handle, mechanism, shaft and mounting hardware.
2 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket.
3 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number.
2
Handle is cast aluminum.
4 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm). 2
5 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension.
6 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware.
7 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-539

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Contents
2 Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-533
2 Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
V4-T2-538

2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
V4-T2-541

High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-546

2 Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-552
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-553
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-556
2
2
2
2
2 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
2 Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications
Direct (close-coupled) handle The Universal Direct handle Direct (close-coupled) handle The Universal Direct handle
2 mechanisms mount directly mechanisms are rated Type 1 mechanisms are typically mechanism is UL listed,
to the circuit breaker. and Type 12. used for applications where IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
2 They are used in shallow
enclosures where the The Universal Direct handle
high volume, standardized
enclosures are being
compliant, and meets CSA
requirements.
mechanism is available as
2 standard variable depth
Through-the-door type standard with a door interlock
fabricated.

mechanism is not practical to prevent opening the

2 or cannot be used. enclosure while the circuit
breaker is in the ON position.
2 It is also available without a
door interlock.

2
2 Product Selection

2 Universal Direct Handle Mechanisms

Universal Direct
2 (EG–LG) Black Handle Color
With Interlock Without Interlock
Red Handle Color
With Interlock Without Interlock

2 Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 EG EHMCCBI EHMCCB EHMCCRI EHMCCR

JG JHMCCBI JHMCCB JHMCCRI JHMCCR
2 LG LHMCCBI LHMCCB LHMCCRI LHMCCR

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-540 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532 2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. V4-T2-533
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
V4-T2-538
V4-T2-540
2
Flex Shaft
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-542 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-543
V4-T2-543
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. V4-T2-546
2
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-552 2
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-553
Handle Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-556 2
2
2
Flex Shaft 2
Product Description Standards and Certifications 2
Flex Shaft is UL listed under
Flange-Mounted Handle
Mechanisms
Flex Shaft comes preset from
the factory, requiring only
File E64983 and meets CSA 2
requirements.
Flange-mounted handle
mechanisms mount on the
minor field adjustments on
installation, which takes 2
flange of an enclosure door. about 10 minutes—a
The Flex Shaft is an extra significant time savings 2
heavy-duty mechanism that compared to installation of
includes a flexible shaft in other types of flange handle 2
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
through 10 feet (3m) for use
with various size enclosures.
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than
2
The Flex Shaft handle will
competitive designs, and the
handle fits standard flange 2
accept up to three padlock cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
can be remotely mounted 2
from breaker, where an
3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be
used with Type12 fabricated
operator can use it by 2
“funneling” the cable
enclosures. An optional
handle is available for Flex
through conduit.
2
Shaft that is suitable for use
with Type 4 environments. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-541

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Product Selection
2 Note: Type 4X handle Note: When selecting the length Note: The standard method
mechanisms are available. of shaft, ensure minimum of shipment includes the
2 Add Suffix X to the complete bending radius of 4 inches mechanism preset at the factory;
Catalog Number. (101.6 mm) is maintained to however, minor field adjustments
2 operate properly. may be required.

2 Flex Shaft Flex Shaft Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms 12

Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)

2 Breaker
2 (0.6)
Catalog
3 (0.9)
Catalog
4 (1.2)
Catalog
5 (1.3)
Catalog
6 (1.8)
Catalog

2
Frame Number Number Number Number Number
EG EHMFS02 EHMFS03 EHMFS04 EHMFS05 EHMFS06

2 JG N/A JHMFS03 JHMFS04 JHMFS05 JHMFS06

LG N/A — LHMFS04 — —
2 NG N/A N/A F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C
RG N/A N/A F6S04 F6S05 F6S06
2
2
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.1)
Breaker Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Frame Number Number Number Number
EG EHMFS07 EHMFS08 EHMFS09 EHMFS10
2 JG JHMFS07 JHMFS08 JHMFS09 JHMFS10

2 LG LHMFS07 — — LHMFS10
NG N/A N/A N/A F5S10C

2 RG N/A N/A N/A N/A

2
High-Performance
High-Performance Flex Shaft Flange Mounted Handle Mechanism 12
2 Flex Shaft Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
2 (0.6) 3 (0.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.3) 6 (1.8)
2 Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 EG EGFS02HP EGFS03HP EGFS04HP EGFS05HP EGFS06HP

JG N/A JGFS03HP JGFS04HP JGFS05HP JGFS06HP
2 LG N/A N/A LGFS04HP N/A N/A
NG
2 RG
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F5S04HP
F6S04HP
F5S05HP
F6S05HP
F5S06HP
F6S06HP

2 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)

2 Breaker
7 (2.1)
Catalog
8 (2.4)
Catalog
9 (2.7)
Catalog
10 (3.1)
Catalog

2
Frame Number Number Number Number
EG EGFS07HP EGFS08HP EGFS09HP EGFS10HP

2 JG JGFS07HP JGFS08HP JGFS09HP JGFS10HP

LG LGFS07HP N/A N/A LGFS10HP
2 NG N/A N/A N/A F5S10HP
RG N/A N/A N/A N/A
2 Notes

2
1 Three-pole only for EG-; three- and four-pole for JG- and LG-Frame.
2 EG-, JG- and LG-Frame can be left- or right-hand mounted.

2
2
2

V4-T2-542 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Accessories
2
Handle Auxiliary Switch—Early Break Design, Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft
1A–1B Contact for Flex Shaft (E- through R-Frame) 1 2
2
Breaker Catalog Catalog
Frame Number Number 2
EG
2
AUX1EBFSEG C361KJ4
JG AUX1EBFSJG C361KJ6
LG AUX1EBFSLG C361KR
2
Auxiliary contact changes state prior to parting of breaker
contacts to allow for shutdown of equipment. Contacts mounted 2
on breaker mechanism customer supplied wiring.
2
2
Dimensions 2
Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft 2
(E- through R-Frame) 1
Catalog Handle Length 2
Number 2 in Inches (mm)
C361KJ4 4.00 (101.6) 2
C361KJ6 6.00 (152.4)
C361KR Roller latch 3
2
Notes
1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters
2
required for assembly.
2 The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied 2
with these kits.
3 Third roller latch for use with 4.00- or 6.00-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when three-point

latching is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-543

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Contents
2 Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-533
2 Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . .
V4-T2-538
V4-T2-540
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
V4-T2-541

High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-546

2 Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-552
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-553
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-556
2
2
2
2
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series C
2 Product Overview
Handle mechanisms are used Through-the-Door Handle mechanisms are used
2 to operate molded case ● High-Performance Rotary on enclosed circuit breakers,
circuit breakers, molded case ● Series C Rotary control panels and motor
2 switches and motor circuit
protectors. They are available
control centers in many
different applications. Eaton
Direct (Close-Coupled)
2 in three basic configurations—
Flange Mounted, Through-
● Universal Direct
has a handle mechanism for
virtually any need.
the-Door and Direct (Close- ● Euro IEC
2 Coupled)—providing safe, ● G Direct
dependable operation and
2 ease of installation. Flange Mounted
● Flex Shaft
2 ● C371

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-544 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Standards and Certifications
Type C371 is UL Listed under 2
Through-the-Door Handle Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Flange-Mounted Handle File E62635.
Mechanisms Mechanisms Mechanisms 2
Eaton’s through-the-door Direct (close-coupled) handle Flange-mounted handle Flex Shaft is UL Listed under
handle mechanisms mount
on the front of an enclosure
mechanisms mount directly
to the circuit breaker. They are
mechanisms mount on the
flange of an enclosure door.
File E64983 and meets
CSA requirements.
2
or cabinet door and externally
operate the circuit breaker via
used in shallow enclosures
where the standard variable
The Flex Shaft is an extra
heavy-duty mechanism that
Series C Rotary and Universal 2
Rotary, are UL Listed and
a variable depth shaft or a depth Through-the-door type includes a flexible shaft in
linear operator (Type MC). mechanism is not practical various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m)
meet CSA requirements.
Universal Rotary also meets
2
Each rotary type handle or cannot be used. They are through 10 feet (3m) for use
mechanism includes a typically for applications with various size enclosures.
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
for international compliance. 2
handle, base operating where high volume, Rotary UL File Number is
mechanism and shaft that
can be cut to various lengths.
standardized enclosures
are being fabricated.
The Flex Shaft handle will
accept up to three padlock E64983. 2
shackles, each with a
Series C Rotary and Universal The Euro IEC Direct handle maximum diameter of
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is UL 489 Listed, 2
Rotary handle mechanisms mechanism can be used on 3/8-inch (9.5 mm). Can be IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2,
are for use with molded case
circuit breakers (G, F, J, K, L,
F- through R-Frames. used with NEMA 1, 3R and
12 fabricated enclosures. An
and meets CSA requirements. 2
The G Direct is available with The Euro IEC Direct handle
MDL), molded case switches
and motor circuit protectors. a black or the yellow handle,
optional handle is available for
Flex Shaft that is suitable for
mechanism is IEC-240-1. G 2
and with or without a shroud. Direct is UL Listed and meets
use with NEMA 4 and 4X
Type 4/4X handles are similar It is suitable for use with environments. Flex Shaft
CSA requirements. 2
to standard handles except NEMA 1 enclosures. It is for comes preset from the
they include an internal
neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X
use only with the G-Frame
(GD, GC, GHC, GMCP).
factory, requiring only minor 2
field adjustments on
2
handle style number is installation, which takes
6648C22G03. Due to An escutcheon ring and
interlock clip are provided as about 10 minutes—a
gasketing effect between
the handle and the housing, standard. The standard design
includes a lock-off feature.
significant time savings
compared to installation of 2
the handle may not indicate other types of flange handle
a tripped position. mechanisms. The Flex Shaft 2
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than 2
competitive designs and the
handle fits standard flange
cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
2
2
can be remotely mounted
from breaker, where an
operator can use it by
“funneling” the cable 2
through conduit.
The Type C371 circuit breaker 2
operating mechanisms are
designed for installation in 2
control enclosures where
main or branch circuit 2
protective devices are
required. All circuit breaker
mechanisms are suitable for
2
2
right-hand mounting.
Auxiliary contacts are not
available for mounting on
operating mechanisms.
2
Where required, have them
installed in circuit breaker. 2
Handle Extension 2
Handle extension is not
included with J, K, L, M and 2
N-Frame breakers. It must be
purchased separately. 2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-545

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Contents
2 Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-533
2 Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . .
V4-T2-538
V4-T2-540
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
V4-T2-541

High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms

2 Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-547
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-549
2 Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-552
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-553
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-556
2
2
2
2 High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
2 Product Description Features
The high-performance rotary In addition to its robust ● NEMA Type 1/3R/12 (IP54) ● Same handle can be used
2 handle mechanism uses a design features, the handle and NEMA Type 4/4X on multiple frames sizes
simple, yet robust design mechanism has stand-off (IP65) ratings reducing the number of
2 to make installation and
operation easy. The external
support that allows for easy
operation with a gloved hand.
● Black/Blue or Red/Yellow parts needed
external handle colors ● Red and yellow handles to
2 handle’s key functional
components are all metallic,
With a shallow profile, the
handle can easily be used in
● Three shaft lengths—6, 12
and 24 inches, which can
designate emergency
disconnecting means
ensuring reliability. The metal- applications where an internal
2 be cut to size to match All handle mechanisms can
●
on-metal interface between or double door is required. enclosure depth accept padlocks or multi-
the handle and shaft prevents hasp locks for added
2 The high-performance Conveniently packaged as
●
contaminant buildup that flexibility
could impede operation, external handle can accept kit containing handle, shaft
padlocks or multi-hasp locks. and mechanism ● Fast, easy installation
2 while UV and chemical agent
resistant materials protect The door is interlocked when ● Replacement parts are (see video on website for
the handle from heat and padlocked and cannot be available separately step-by-step instructions)
2 fading in direct sunlight, as bypassed. ● Metallic functional Standards and Certifications
well as chemicals that may components ensure
2 be introduced in harsh reliability
The mechanisms for EG, JG
and LG breakers have an
environments. ● Metal-on-metal interface internal handle that can be
2 between handle and shaft operated independent of
● UV and chemical agent- door position, and locked-out
2 resistant materials protect to meet one of the key NFPA
the handle requirements (NFPA® 79)
2 ● Shallow profile and UL 508A disconnect
requirements.
● Compatible with both
2 Series C and Series G
molded case circuit
● NEMA 1/3R/12, IP54
● NEMA 4/4X, IP65
2 breakers and molded case
switch platforms

2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-546 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Product Selection
2
Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames
2
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—GC/GD- and GMCP-Frame 2
Rating Type GC/GD-Frame GMCP-Frame
Catalog Catalog 2
Description NEMA IP Number Number
S01 Blue Handle S01 blue handle, 1/3R/12 54 GCHMVD12B / 68C6039G01 GMHMVD12B / 68C6039G05 2
12-inch shaft
4/4X 65 GCHMVD12BX / 68C6039G03 GMHMVD12BX / 68C6039G07
2
S01 Red Handle S01 red handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 GCHMVD12R / 68C6039G02 GMHMVD12R / 68C6039G06 2
4/4X 65 GCHMVD12RX / 68C6039G04 GMHMVD12RX / 68C6039G08
2
2
Separate Components for Series C Frames
2
Series C Components—Shaft and Mechanism 2
Shaft Shaft Length Mechanism
Frame Width 6-Inch 10-Inch 12-Inch Only 2
GC/GD 6 mm — — 66A6013H02 GCHMVD / 2A92095G15
GMCP 6 mm — — 66A6013H02 GMHMVD / 2A92095G16 2
GD
FD
8 mm
8 mm
66A6010G95
66A6010G95
—
—
66A6010G96
66A6010G96
1498D34G90
1498D34G91
2
JD 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G92 2
KD 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G93
LD 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G94 2
MDL 10 mm
2
66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G95
ND 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — 69D9101G30
RD 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — 69D9101G31
2
Note
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-547

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Series C Components—Handles Only

2 Rating Type Handles Only

2 Frame NEMA IP
S01
Blue/Black
S01
Red/Yellow
S2
Blue/Black
S2
Red/Yellow
S3
Blue/Black
S3
Red/Yellow
S4
Blue/Black
S4
Red/Yellow
GC/GD 1/3R/12 54
2 4/4X 65
68C6048G41
68C6048G43
68C6048G42
68C6048G44
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

2 GMCP 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 — — — — — —

4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 — — — — — —
2 GD 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —
4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —
2 FD 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —

2 JD
4/4X
1/3R/12
65
54
68C6048G43
—
68C6048G44
—
68C6048G03
68C6048G01
68C6048G04
68C6048G02
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

2 4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —

KD 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —
2 4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —
LD 1/3R/12 54
2
— — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 — —
4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 — —

2 MDL 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 — —

4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 — —
2 ND 1/3R/12 54 — — — — 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 68C6048G09 68C6048G10
4/4X 65 — — — — 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 68C6048G11 68C6048G12
2 RD 1/3R/12 54 — — — — — — 68C6048G09 68C6048G10
4/4X 65
2 — — — — — — 68C6048G11 68C6048G12

Note
2 Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-548 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches) 2
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Front Operation
2
Handle Type Direction of Operation Door Drilling
2
Type S01

2
2
2
2
2
Type S2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S4 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-549

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Contents
2 Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-533
2 Universal Rotary
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-540
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
V4-T2-541

High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-546

2 Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-551
2 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-552
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-553
2 Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-556

2
2
2
2 Series C Rotary
2 Product Description Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s through-the-door These rotary handles are Series C Rotary is UL listed and
2 handle mechanisms mount robust and durable, made meets CSA requirements.
on the front of an enclosure entirely of metal parts. It also
2 or a cabinet door and
externally operate the circuit
has a lock-out tag-out level at
the tip of the handle for
2 breaker via a variable depth
shaft or a linear operator
padlocking.

(Type MC). Each rotary type NEMA Type 4/4X handles are
2 handle mechanism includes a similar to standard handles
except they include an
handle, a base operating
2 mechanism and a shaft that
can be cut to various lengths.
internal neoprene gasket.
NEMA Type 4/4X handle style
number is 6648C22G03. Due
2 Series C Rotary handle to gasketing effect between
mechanisms are used with the handle and the housing,
2 molded case circuit breakers the handle may not indicate a
(F, J, K, L, MDL), molded tripped position.
2 case switches and motor
circuit protectors.
2
Features
2
Features of Series C Rotary Handle Mechanism
2 NEMA Enclosure Type International Available Shaft
Number Handle Handle Indication: Markings Handle Handle Handle Lengths
2 Rotary of Poles 1 3R 12 4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2 ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O) Material Colors Rotation (Inches)
Series C rotary — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 12, 16, 24
2 Notes
1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”

2 2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.

2
2
2
2

V4-T2-550 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Product Selection
2
Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms
2
Series C Rotary Series C Rotary Ordering Information
Shaft Complete Separate Catalog Number Catalog Number 2
Length Catalog Standard Breaker
Inches (mm) Number 1 Handle 2 Mechanism 3 Shaft 4 IEC IP65 56 IEC IP66 56 2
F-Frame
6.00 (152.4) HM1R06 6648C22G25 6648C23G11 4217B37G08 WHM1R06 WHM1R06X 2
12.00 (304.8)
16.00 (406.4)
HM1R12
HM1R16
6648C22G25
6648C22G25
6648C23G11
6648C23G11
4217B37G05
4217B37G06
WHM1R12
WHM1R16
WHM1R12X
WHM1R16X
2
24.00 (609.6) HM1R24 6648C22G25 6648C23G11 4217B37G07 WHM1R24 WHM1R24X 2
J-Frame
6.00 (152.4) HM2R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G08 WHM2R06 WHM2R06X 2
12.00 (304.8) HM2R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G05 WHM2R12 WHM2R12X
16.00 (406.4) HM2R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G06 WHM2R16 WHM2R16X 2
24.00 (609.6)
K-Frame
HM2R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G07 WHM2R24 WHM2R24X
2
6.00 (152.4) HM3R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G08 WHM3R06 WHM3R06X 2
12.00 (304.8) HM3R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G05 WHM3R12 WHM3R12X
16.00 (406.4) HM3R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G06 WHM3R16 WHM3R16X 2
24.00 (609.6)
2
HM3R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G07 WHM3R24 WHM3R24X
L- and MDL-Frame
6.00 (152.4) HM4R06 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G08 WHM4R06 WHM4R06X
2
12.00 (304.8) HM4R12 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G05 WHM4R12 WHM4R12X
16.00 (406.4) HM4R16 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G06 WHM4R16 WHM4R16X 2
24.00 (609.6) HM4R24 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G07 WHM4R24 WHM4R24X
MD/MDS 2
6.00 (152.4)
12.00 (304.8)
HM7R06
HM7R12
6648C22G21
6648C22G21
6648C23G17
6648C23G17
4217B37G08
4217B37G05
—
—
—
—
2
16.00 (406.4) HM7R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G06 — —
2
24.00 (609.6) HM7R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G07 — —
N-Frame (ND and NG) 2
6.00 (152.4) HM5R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G08 WHM5R06 WHM5R06X
12.00 (304.8) HM5R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G05 WHM5R12 WHM5R12X 2
16.00 (406.4)
24.00 (609.6)
HM5R16
HM5R24
6648C22G21
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
6648C23G08
4217B37G06
4217B37G07
WHM5R16
WHM5R24
WHM5R16X
WHM5R24X
2
Notes 2
1 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket.
2 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number.

Handle is cast aluminum.

2
2
3 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm).
4 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension.
5 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware.
6 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-551

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Contents
2 Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-533
2 Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . .
V4-T2-538
V4-T2-540
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
V4-T2-541

High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-546

2 Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-552
2 Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-552
Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-553
2 Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-556

2
2
2
2 Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
2 Product Description Application Description Product Selection
Direct (close-coupled) handle Direct (close-coupled) handle
2 mechanisms mount directly mechanisms are typically Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
to the circuit breaker. used for applications where Euro IEC Direct
2 They are used in shallow
enclosures where the
high volume, standardized
enclosures are being Black Handle
Catalog
2 standard variable depth
Through-the-door type
fabricated.
Frame Number

mechanism is not practical F HMCC1B

2 or cannot be used. Standards and Certifications J HMCC2B

2 The Universal Direct handle

mechanisms are rated Type 1
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is IEC 60947-1
K
L and M
HMCC3B
HMCC4B
and Type 12. and IEC 60947-2 compliant.
2 The Universal Direct handle
N HMVD5B
R HMVD6B
2 mechanism is available as
standard with a door interlock
to prevent opening the
2 enclosure while the circuit G Direct 1
breaker is in the ON position. Black Handle Yellow Handle
2 It is also available without a With Shroud Without Shroud With Shroud Without Shroud
door interlock. Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
2 Frame Number Number Number Number
GD/GHC HRGCC1S HRGCC10 HRGCC3S HRGCC30
2 GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30

2 Note
1 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-552 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532 2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. V4-T2-533
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
V4-T2-538
V4-T2-540
2
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
V4-T2-541
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. V4-T2-546
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550 2
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-552
Flex Shaft 2
Product Selection
Handle Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-556 2
2
2
2
Flex Shaft 2
Product Description Standards and Certifications 2
Flex Shaft is UL listed under
Flange-Mounted Handle
Mechanisms
Flex Shaft comes preset from
the factory, requiring only
File E64983 and meets CSA 2
requirements.
Flange-mounted handle
mechanisms mount on the
minor field adjustments on
installation, which takes 2
flange of an enclosure door. about 10 minutes—a
The Flex Shaft is an extra significant time savings 2
heavy-duty mechanism that compared to installation of
includes a flexible shaft in other types of flange handle 2
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m) mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
through 10 feet (3m) for use
with various size enclosures.
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than
2
The Flex Shaft handle will
competitive designs, and the
handle fits standard flange 2
accept up to three padlock cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
can be remotely mounted 2
from breaker, where an
3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be
used with Type12 fabricated
operator can use it by 2
“funneling” the cable
enclosures. An optional
handle is available for Flex
through conduit.
2
Shaft that is suitable for use
with Type 4 environments. 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-553

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Product Selection
2
Handle Mechanisms
2
Flex Shaft 12
2 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
3 (0.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.5) 6 (1.8) 7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.0)
2 Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

2 G1 F0S03C F0S04C F0S05C F0S06C — — — —

F F1S03C F1S04C F1S05C F1S06C F1S07C F1S08C F1S09C F1S10C
2 F (dual) F1S03CD F1S04CD F1S05CD F1S06CD F1S07CD F1S08CD F1S09CD F1S10CD
J
2
F2S03C F2S04C F2S05C F2S06C F2S07C F2S08C F2S09C F2S10C
K F3S03C F3S04C F3S05C F3S06C F3S07C F3S08C F3S09C F3S10C

2 L and MDL — F4S04C F4S05C F4S06C — — — F4S10C

N — F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C — — — F5S10C
2 R — F6S04 F6S05 F6S06 — — — —
MD, MDS (old) — F7S04 F7S05 F7S06 — — — F7S10C
2
High Performance Flex Shaft 12
2 Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)

2
3 (0.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.3) 6 (1.8) 7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.1)
Breaker Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Frame Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
2 G F0S03HP F0S04HP F0S05HP F0S06HP N/A N/A N/A N/A
F
2 F (dual)
F1S03HP
F1S03HPD
F1S04HP
F1S04HPD
F1S05HP
F1S05HPD
F1S06HP
F1S06HPD
F1S07HP
F1S07HPD
F1S08HP
F1S08HPD
F1S09HP
F1S09HPD
F1S10HP
F1S10HPD

2 J F2S03HP F2S04HP F2S05HP F2S06HP F2S07HP F2S08HP F2S09HP F2S10HP

K F3S03HP F3S04HP F3S05HP F3S06HP F3S07HP F3S08HP F3S09HP F3S10HP
2 L and MDL N/A F4S04HP F4S05HP F4S06HP N/A N/A N/A F4S10HP
N N/A F5S04HP F5S05HP F5S06HP N/A N/A N/A F5S10HP
2 R N/A F6S04HP F6S05HP F6S06HP N/A N/A N/A N/A

2
Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms
2 Type C371

2 Operating
Operating Mechanism w/ 4-Inch Handle
For NEMA 1–12 For NEMA 4/4X
Mechanism Only 4
2 Variable Depth Enclosure Enclosure
Circuit Breaker or Frame Mounting Range Catalog Catalog Catalog
Motor Circuit Protector Size Min./Max. 23 Number Number Number
2 HMCP and Series C—EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED 150 6.50–16 (165.1–406.4) C371E C371E1 C371E2
HMCP and Series C—HJD, JD, JDB, JDC 250 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4)
2 HMCP and Series C—DK, HKD, KD, KDB 400 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4)
C371F
C371F
C371F5
C371F5
C371F6
C371F6

2 Series C—HLD, LD, LDC 600 8.50–22 (215.9–558.8) C371G C371G5 C371G6
Series C MD, MDS—(No MDL) 800 8.75–22 (222.3–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6
2 Series C—HND, ND, NDC 1200 9.75–22 (247.7–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6

2 Notes
1 Suitable for GC/GD MCCB; not suitable Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available. When selecting the length of shaft,
for GMCP. Add Suffix X to complete catalog number. ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches
2 2 For increased maximum allowable Add Suffix I to complete catalog number for
IEC handle. Original narrow handle design
(101.6 mm) (5 inches, 12.7 mm for L-, N- and
R-Frames) is maintained to operate properly.
depth, see connecting rods on (No C Suffix) is available. Remove C from The standard method of shipment includes
2 Page V4-T2-555.
3 Dimensions shown are from panel
catalog number. the mechanism preset at the factory;
however, minor field adjustments may
flange surface. be required.
2 4 Does not include handle. Dual breakers operator available on F-Frame
only. Only the F, J and K can mount LH and
RH all other RH only.
2

V4-T2-554 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com

 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.6
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Handle Only
Circuit Breaker 2
Frame Size NEMA Operating Catalog
(Amperes) Enclosure Type Handle Length Number
2
150 1/3R/3/12 4.00 (101.6) C371H1
4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H2 2
1/3R/3/12 6.00 (152.4) C371H3
4/4X 6.00 (152.4) C371H4 2
250–1200 1/3R/3/12
4/4X
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
C371H5
C371H6
2
1/3R/3/12 6.00 (152.4) C371H7 2
4/4X 6.00 (152.4) C371H8
2
Channel Support Kit (Rod Not Supplied) 2
For use to prevent bending of the operating handle mounting
surface. This is especially useful when the operating handle is 2
mounted on a channel in a multi-door enclosure.

Amperes Catalog Number 2

600–1200 C371CS6
2
Connecting Rods 1
2
Application Catalog Number 2
Disconnect switches (30, 60, 100, 200 A sizes) C371CS1
Circuit breakers (150, 250, 400 A sizes) C371CS1 2
Circuit breakers (600, 800, 1200 A sizes)
2
C371CS2

Note
1 Increase maximum allowable depth by 5 inches (127 mm).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com V4-T2-555

 2.6 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms

Contents
2 Handle Extension
Description Page
2 Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-532
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-533
2 Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . .
V4-T2-538
V4-T2-540
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
V4-T2-541

High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms. . V4-T2-546

2 Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-550
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . . V4-T2-552
2 Flex Shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-553
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-554
2
2
2
2
2 Handle Extension
2 Product Description
● Suitable for use on two- or
2 three-pole G-Frame
● Not included with J, K, L,
2 M and N-Frame breakers;
it must be purchased
2 ●
separately
Included with R-Frame
2 breakers

2 Product Selection
2 Handle Extension 12
Handle Extension
2 Frame
Style
Number

2 J, K HEX3
L, M HEX4
2 N HEX5
R HEX6
2 Notes

2
1 Handle extension is not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame

breakers. It must be purchased separately.

2 Handle extension is included with breaker with R-Frame breakers.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V4-T2-556 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2022 www.eaton.com